No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, photocopied, or translated into another language without the written consent of EPIX, Inc. Information in this document is subject to change without obligation or notice. EPIX, Inc. makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this document, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. EPIX, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. EPIX, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to the specifications of hardware and software at any time, without obligation or notice.
4MIP, SVIP, XCIP, XCAP, 4MEG VIDEO, 1MEG VIDEO, SILICON VIDEO MUX, QUICK SET VIDEO, 12-7MUX, IMAGE MEMORY EXPANSION, COC40, and COC402 are trademarks of EPIX, Inc.
EPIX, SILICON VIDEO, and PIXCI are registered trademarks of EPIX, Inc.
Other brand, product, and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Printing: 28-Apr-2023
EPIX, Inc.
381 Lexington Drive
Buffalo Grove IL 60089
847.465.1818
847.465.1919 (fax)
epix@epixinc.com
www.epixinc.com
This XCAP REFERENCE MANUAL provides a detailed description of the features within XCAP.
A word about conventions used in this manual. Highlighted phrases such as Main Window are a reference to a section of this manual. Highlighted phrases such as FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING are a reference to this or another publication. Highlighted phrases such as Current Image Buffer or Image File - Save generally refer to items within a window or a menu selection. Older HTML browsers may not show these variations in a distinguished manner.
Only selected pictures of the primary windows and dialogs are shown; hopefully persuading the reader to interact with XCAP while reading this manual. Even if the PIXCI® frame grabber is not installed, most of the windows and menus of XCAP can still be visited!
XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, XCAP-Ltd, and XCAP-Lite are easy to install by following the instructions below.
Administrator privileges are required to complete the installation procedure.
> Z:SETUP (replace Z with drive letter for your CD/DVD)
orftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit XCAP for Windows)
from the EPIX, Inc. ftp site.ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN64.EXE (for 64-bit XCAP for Windows)
or> XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit XCAP for Windows)
> XCAPWIN64.EXE (for 64-bit XCAP for Windows)
PCITIPS.TXT
file provides the
PCI Configuration Tips,
with tips for resolving hardware and software conflicts.
The installation procedure also, optionally,
creates a desktop shortcut for XCAP.
The Blue (older) or Green (newer) authorization USB key has the size and shape of a USB thumb drive (4 to 6×1.6×0.8 cm) with a standard USB-A 4-pin connector. If provided, connect the authorization key to a USB port.
The authorization key must remain attached, to the USB port while XCAP is running. If the authorization key is missing, or disconnected while XCAP is running, then XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std or XCAP-Ltd, will behave similar to the XCAP-Lite version; selected image processing and analysis tools will not be operational.
Subsequently, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup within XCAP, to change XCAP's configuration as per the authorization key or the software Activation ID Code.
XCAPWIN32.EXE
or
XCAPWIN64.EXE
installer).
Or may be installed by the
PIXCI® - Driver Assistant
feature within XCAP.
Alternately, the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver can be installed as follows.
EPIXXCW2.INF
within Drivers\Win8 or Drivers\Win10 for Windows 8/10 32-Bit,
or highlight file
EPIXXCW6.INF
within Drivers\Win8x64, Drivers\Win10x64, or Drivers\Win11x64
for Windows 8/10 64-Bit and 11 64-Bit,
within the chosen installation directory,
right-click and select
''Install'',
and restart Windows.
The PIXCI® frame grabber's driver consists of files:
for Windows 8/10 32-Bit, or files:EPIXXCW2.INF EPIXXCW2.CAT EPIXXCW2.SYS
for Windows 8/10/11 64-Bit. Driver files for different versions of Windows, although with the same file name, may have different digital signatures as required by each version of Windows.EPIXXCW6.INF EPIXXCW6.CAT EPIXXCW6.SYS
The PIXCI® frame grabber driver is installed by the Windows Device Manager, or by PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP.
Installation copies the driver files and creates registry entry:
for Windows 8/10 32-Bit, orHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
for Windows 8/10/11 64-Bit. Most values within the registry entry are set by the Device Manager and should not be modified. The value:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW6
may be created upon installation, added or modified by XCAP, or can be added or modified manually (i.e. via the Registry Editor (REGEDIT)); its component value(s) are Driver Configuration Parameters, as described below.PIXCI = -IM <memorysize> ...
Under Windows 8/10 32/64-Bit and 11 64-Bit, frame buffer memory must be allocated during Windows' initialization.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
The requested frame buffer memory size must be specified in the Registry entry described above, using an entry named ''PIXCI'', such as:
replacing the ''<memorysize>'' with the desired memory size in KiBytes. If no frame buffer memory size is specified, a default size of 32768 KiBytes is used. Windows must be restarted for the new specification to take effect. Note that using Windows' Shutdown instead of Restart may delay Windows' recognition of these changes until the second subsequent shutdown!PIXCI = "-IM <memorysize>"
Optionally,
specifies that the requested"-MB <memory_partition_size>"
is to be allocated in blocks or partitions of the stated size. Requesting memory partitioned into blocks may allow receiving more memory that would be available as a single block. However, (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, and (b) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition."-IM <memorysize>"
For the PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2, which have on-board frame buffer memory, memory reserved by the -IM parameter is needed as a DMA buffer (approximately 1 MiByte) and optionally for support of time stamping of captured frames as specified by the ''-MU'' parameter (see PIXCI® Driver Esoterica) specifies use of frame buffer memory for that purpose. Currently, 64 bytes are needed for each frame buffer's capture status.
Windows 8/10 32/64-Bit and 11 64-Bit limits the maximum amount of allocatable frame buffer memory, dependent upon what other devices are installed, the total computer memory size, and other factors. Under Windows 8/10/11 32-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to 1024 MiByte, but not more than half of the computer memory size. Under Windows 8/10/11 64-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup has not yet been determined, but is probably similar to the limit for Windows Vista 64-Bit: the smaller of 6 GiByte or one half of the computer memory size.
Windows may provide less frame buffer memory than was requested. If no memory could be allocated, the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be available, stating ''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''. Otherwise, within XCAP, the number of available frame buffers can be checked under PIXCI®, PIXCI® Video Setup, Resolution. As the frame buffer memory is allocated once during Windows initialization; the contents of frame buffers are retained as XCAP is closed and restarted, but lost if Windows is restarted.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows 8/10 32-Bit, or EPIXXCW6.SYS for Windows 8/10/11 64-Bit, during Windows startup may be limited to a small percentage of total computer memory. Under Windows 8/10 32-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to 1024 MiByte, but not more than half of the computer memory size. Under Windows 8/10/11 64-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup has not yet been determined, but is probably similar to the limit for Windows Vista 64-Bit: the smaller of 6 GiByte or one half of the computer memory size. Some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of memory recognized by Windows, and then instructing EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows 8/10 32-Bit, or EPIXXCW6.SYS for Windows 8/10/11 64-Bit, to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating it from Windows.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of forceful frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
BCDEDIT
utility to create a copy of the
''{CURRENT}''
boot entry,
set the new
entry use limit memory usage via
''truncatememory'',
and changing the new entry's description.
Typical commands are:
to list current entries and obtain the current entry's description,BCDEDIT /enum
to create a new entry with modified description and boot prompt including a reminder of the amount of memory provided to Windows and to the PIXCI® imaging card,BCDEDIT /copy {current} /d "CURRENT_ENTRY_DESCRIPTION [PIXCI=##M NT=##M"
to get the ID of the new entry, and:BCDEDIT /enum /v
to limit the Windows memory size to <memory_size>, in bytes.BCDEDIT /set <new_entry_id> truncatememory <memory_size>
Also using
BCDEDIT
change the timeout selection to be greater than 0:
Otherwise the boot configuration options will not be shown when Windows starts.BCDEDIT /timeout 30
for Windows 8/10 32-Bit, orHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
for Windows 8/10/11 64-Bit. On the ''PIXCI'' field add:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW6
In practice, all four fields are on the same line.-IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte> -BH <size_of_BIOS_hole_below_4GiB_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
When using more than 1 or 2 GiBytes of image memory, it may be necessary to append:
to the ''PIXCI'' field, conserving system memory mapping resources by not mapping the image memory directly into the application program's space. It may also be necessary to append:-MU 0x01
which additionally conserves system resources by mapping memory only on demand.-MU 0x03
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified ''truncatememory'' limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
On a computer populated with 4 or more GiBytes of memory, some of the memory directly below the 4 GiByte address overlaps other hardware resources such as BIOS, memory mapped I/O, PCI configuration space, etc.[1] and is unavailable to either the operating system or for use as frame buffers. The usable frame buffer memory is therefore reduced by the amount by which the -IA address up to the -IA address plus -IM size overlap the 4 GiByte address minus -BH size up to the 4 GiByte address. The -BH size may be set to 0 (or not specified) if the computer has significantly less than 4 GiBytes of memory.
On computers with Intel vPro Technology, computer memory between the 768 MiByte and 1024 MiByte addresses may be reserved; the -IA address should not be lower than the 1024 MiByte address.
For example, for a computer with 1 GiByte of memory, allocating 256 MiByte for Windows and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
and use:BCDEDIT /set NEW_ENTRY_ID truncatememory 268435456
in the registry entry. Note that 262144 is 256×1024, and 786432 is (1024-256)×1024.PIXCI = -IA 262144 -IM 786432 -MB 8192
Note that if this memory allocation method is used, program access to image data may be slower. Thus, the video display rate (and image processing) may be slower, but the video capture rate (such as sequence capture) is not adversely affected. This method of memory allocation is primarily used for video rate acquisition of long sequences, followed by off-line analysis or saving of the sequence.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient installation of the authorization key's driver(s).
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
orHARDLOCK\Win7+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options. The authorization key's vendor does not provide detailed information regarding installation of drivers for USB port authorization keys.HARDLOCK\Win7+\HASPDINST -help
Attach the USB green key. Run the Windows Device Manager, look for the ''USBKEY'', ''USBKEY64'', or ''Keylok 2'' device, ask the Device Manager to install or update the driver for the device, pointing the Device Manager to XCAP's chosen installation directory:
and subdirectory:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
for 32-Bit Windows, or subdirectory:Keylok\i386\WinXP+
for 64-Bit Windows.Keylok\x86_64\Win10+
Administrator privileges are required to complete the installation procedure.
> Z:SETUP (replace Z with drive letter for your CD/DVD)
orftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit XCAP for Windows)
from the EPIX, Inc. ftp site.ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN64.EXE (for 64-bit XCAP for Windows)
or> XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit XCAP for Windows)
> XCAPWIN64.EXE (for 64-bit XCAP for Windows)
PCITIPS.TXT
file provides the
PCI Configuration Tips,
with tips for resolving hardware and software conflicts.
The installation procedure also, optionally,
creates a desktop shortcut for XCAP.
The Blue (older) or Green (newer) authorization USB key has the size and shape of a USB thumb drive (4 to 6×1.6×0.8 cm) with a standard USB-A 4-pin connector. If provided, connect the authorization key to a USB port.
The authorization key must remain attached, to the USB port while XCAP is running. If the authorization key is missing, or disconnected while XCAP is running, then XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std or XCAP-Ltd, will behave similar to the XCAP-Lite version; selected image processing and analysis tools will not be operational.
Subsequently, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup within XCAP, to change XCAP's configuration as per the authorization key or the software Activation ID Code.
XCAPWIN32.EXE
or
XCAPWIN64.EXE
installer),
or may be installed by the
PIXCI® - Driver Assistant
feature within XCAP.
Alternately, the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver can be installed as follows.
The PIXCI® frame grabber's driver consists of files:
for Windows 7 32-Bit, or files:EPIXXCW2.INF EPIXXCW2.CAT EPIXXCW2.SYS
for Windows 7 64-Bit. Driver files for different versions of Windows, although with the same file name, may have different digital signatures as required by each version of Windows.EPIXXCW6.INF EPIXXCW6.CAT EPIXXCW6.SYS
The PIXCI® frame grabber driver is installed by the Windows Device Manager, or by PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP.
Installation copies the driver files and creates registry entry:
for Windows 7 32-Bit, orHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
for Windows 7 64-Bit. Most values within the registry entry are set by the Device Manager and should not be modified. The value:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW6
may be created upon installation, added or modified by XCAP, or can be added or modified manually (i.e. via the Registry Editor (REGEDIT)); its component value(s) are Driver Configuration Parameters, as described below.PIXCI = -IM <memorysize> ...
Under Windows 7 32/64-Bit, frame buffer memory must be allocated during Windows' initialization.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
The requested frame buffer memory size must be specified in the Registry entry described above, using an entry named ''PIXCI'', such as:
replacing the ''<memorysize>'' with the desired memory size in KiBytes. If no frame buffer memory size is specified, a default size of 32768 KiBytes is used. Windows must be restarted for the new specification to take effect.PIXCI = "-IM <memorysize>"
Optionally,
specifies that the requested"-MB <memory_partition_size>"
is to be allocated in blocks or partitions of the stated size. Requesting memory partitioned into blocks may allow receiving more memory that would be available as a single block. However, (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, and (b) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition."-IM <memorysize>"
For the PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2, which have on-board frame buffer memory, memory reserved by the -IM parameter is needed as a DMA buffer (approximately 1 MiByte) and optionally for support of time stamping of captured frames as specified by the ''-MU'' parameter (see PIXCI® Driver Esoterica) specifies use of frame buffer memory for that purpose. Currently, 64 bytes are needed for each frame buffer's capture status.
Windows 7 32/64-Bit limits the maximum amount of allocatable frame buffer memory, dependent upon what other devices are installed, the total computer memory size, and other factors. Under Windows 7 32-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to 1024 MiByte, but not more than half of the computer memory size. Under Windows 7 64-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup has not yet been determined, but is probably similar to the limit for Windows Vista 64-Bit: the smaller of 6 GiByte or one half of the computer memory size.
Windows may provide less frame buffer memory than was requested. If no memory could be allocated, the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be available, stating ''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''. Otherwise, within XCAP, the number of available frame buffers can be checked under PIXCI®, PIXCI® Video Setup, Resolution. As the frame buffer memory is allocated once during Windows initialization; the contents of frame buffers are retained as XCAP is closed and restarted, but lost if Windows is restarted.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows 7 32-Bit, or EPIXXCW6.SYS for Windows 7 64-Bit, during Windows startup may be limited to a small percentage of total computer memory. Under Windows 7 32-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to 1024 MiByte, but not more than half of the computer memory size. Under Windows 7 64-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup has not yet been determined, but is probably similar to the limit for Windows Vista 64-Bit: the smaller of 6 GiByte or one half of the computer memory size. Some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of memory recognized by Windows, and then instructing EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows 7 32-Bit, or EPIXXCW6.SYS for Windows 7 64-Bit, to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating it from Windows.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of forceful frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
BCDEDIT
utility to create a copy of the
''{CURRENT}''
boot entry,
set the new
entry use limit memory usage via
''truncatememory'',
and changing the new entry's description.
Typical commands are:
to list current entries and obtain the current entry's description,BCDEDIT /enum
to create a new entry with modified description and boot prompt including a reminder of the amount of memory provided to Windows and to the PIXCI® imaging card,BCDEDIT /copy {current} /d "CURRENT_ENTRY_DESCRIPTION [PIXCI=##M NT=##M"
to get the ID of the new entry, and:BCDEDIT /enum /v
to limit the Windows memory size to <memory_size>, in bytes.BCDEDIT /set <new_entry_id> truncatememory <memory_size>
Also using
BCDEDIT
change the timeout selection to be greater than 0:
Otherwise the boot configuration options will not be shown when Windows starts.BCDEDIT /timeout 30
for Windows 7 32-Bit, orHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
for Windows 7 64-Bit. On the ''PIXCI'' field add:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW6
In practice, all four fields are on the same line.-IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte> -BH <size_of_BIOS_hole_below_4GiB_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
When using more than 1 or 2 GiBytes of image memory, it may be necessary to append:
to the ''PIXCI'' field, conserving system memory mapping resources by not mapping the image memory directly into the application program's space. It may also be necessary to append:-MU 0x01
which additionally conserves system resources by mapping memory only on demand.-MU 0x03
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified ''truncatememory'' limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
On a computer populated with 4 or more GiBytes of memory, some of the memory directly below the 4 GiByte address overlaps other hardware resources such as BIOS, memory mapped I/O, PCI configuration space, etc.[2] and is unavailable to either the operating system or for use as frame buffers. The usable frame buffer memory is therefore reduced by the amount by which the -IA address up to the -IA address plus -IM size overlap the 4 GiByte address minus -BH size up to the 4 GiByte address. The -BH size may be set to 0 (or not specified) if the computer has significantly less than 4 GiBytes of memory.
On computers with Intel vPro Technology, computer memory between the 768 MiByte and 1024 MiByte addresses may be reserved; the -IA address should not be lower than the 1024 MiByte address.
For example, for a computer with 1 GiByte of memory, allocating 256 MiByte for Windows and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
and use:BCDEDIT /set NEW_ENTRY_ID truncatememory 268435456
in the registry entry. Note that 262144 is 256×1024, and 786432 is (1024-256)×1024.PIXCI = -IA 262144 -IM 786432 -MB 8192
Note that if this memory allocation method is used, program access to image data may be slower. Thus, the video display rate (and image processing) may be slower, but the video capture rate (such as sequence capture) is not adversely affected. This method of memory allocation is primarily used for video rate acquisition of long sequences, followed by off-line analysis or saving of the sequence.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient installation of the authorization key's driver(s).
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
orHARDLOCK\Win7+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options. The authorization key's vendor does not provide detailed information regarding installation of drivers for USB port authorization keys.HARDLOCK\Win7+\HASPDINST -help
Attach the USB green key. Run the Windows Device Manager, look for the ''USBKEY'', ''USBKEY64'', or ''Keylok 2'' device, ask the Device Manager to install or update the driver for the device, pointing the Device Manager to XCAP's chosen installation directory:
and subdirectory:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
for 32-Bit Windows, or subdirectory:Keylok\i386\WinXP+
for 64-Bit Windows.Keylok\x86_64\WinXP+
Administrator privileges are required to complete the installation procedure.
> Z:SETUP (replace Z with drive letter for your CD/DVD)
orftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit XCAP for Windows)
from the EPIX, Inc. ftp site.ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN64.EXE (for 64-bit XCAP for Windows)
or> XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit XCAP for Windows)
> XCAPWIN64.EXE (for 64-bit XCAP for Windows)
PCITIPS.TXT
file provides the
PCI Configuration Tips,
with tips for resolving hardware and software conflicts.
The installation procedure also, optionally,
creates a desktop shortcut for XCAP.
The Blue (older) or Green (newer) authorization USB key has the size and shape of a USB thumb drive (4 to 6×1.6×0.8 cm) with a standard USB-A 4-pin connector. If provided, connect the authorization key to a USB port.
The authorization key must remain attached, to the USB port while XCAP is running. If the authorization key is missing, or disconnected while XCAP is running, then XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std or XCAP-Ltd, will behave similar to the XCAP-Lite version; selected image processing and analysis tools will not be operational.
Subsequently, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup within XCAP, to change XCAP's configuration as per the authorization key or the software Activation ID Code.
XCAPWIN32.EXE
or
XCAPWIN64.EXE
installer),
or may be installed by the
PIXCI® - Driver Assistant
feature within XCAP.
Alternately, the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver can be installed as follows.
The PIXCI® frame grabber's driver consists of files:
for Windows Vista 32-Bit, or files:EPIXXCW2.INF EPIXXCW2.CAT EPIXXCW2.SYS
for Windows Vista 64-Bit. Driver files for different versions of Windows, although with the same file name, may have different digital signatures as required by each version of Windows.EPIXXCW6.INF EPIXXCW6.CAT EPIXXCW6.SYS
The PIXCI® frame grabber driver is installed by the Windows Device Manager, or by PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP.
Installation copies the driver files and creates registry entry:
for Windows Vista 32-Bit, orHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
for Windows Vista 64-Bit. Most values within the registry entry are set by the Device Manager and should not be modified. The value:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW6
may be created upon installation, added or modified by XCAP, or can be added or modified manually (i.e. via the Registry Editor (REGEDIT)); its component value(s) are Driver Configuration Parameters, as described below.PIXCI = -IM <memorysize> ...
Under Windows Vista 32/64-Bit, frame buffer memory must be allocated during Windows' initialization.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
The requested frame buffer memory size must be specified in the Registry entry described above, using an entry named ''PIXCI'', such as:
replacing the ''<memorysize>'' with the desired memory size in KiBytes. If no frame buffer memory size is specified, a default size of 32768 KiBytes is used. Windows must be restarted for the new specification to take effect.PIXCI = "-IM <memorysize>"
Optionally,
specifies that the requested"-MB <memory_partition_size>"
is to be allocated in blocks or partitions of the stated size. Requesting memory partitioned into blocks may allow receiving more memory that would be available as a single block. However, (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, and (b) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition."-IM <memorysize>"
For the PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2, which have on-board frame buffer memory, memory reserved by the -IM parameter is needed as a DMA buffer (approximately 1 MiByte) and optionally for support of time stamping of captured frames as specified by the ''-MU'' parameter (see PIXCI® Driver Esoterica) specifies use of frame buffer memory for that purpose. Currently, 64 bytes are needed for each frame buffer's capture status.
Windows Vista 32/64-Bit limits the maximum amount of allocatable frame buffer memory, dependent upon what other devices are installed, the total computer memory size, and other factors. Under Windows Vista 32-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to 1024 MiByte, but not more than half of the computer memory size. Under Windows Vista 64-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to the smaller of 6 GiByte or one half of the computer memory size.
Windows may provide less frame buffer memory than was requested. If no memory could be allocated, the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be available, stating ''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''. Otherwise, within XCAP, the number of available frame buffers can be checked under PIXCI®, PIXCI® Video Setup, Resolution. As the frame buffer memory is allocated once during Windows initialization; the contents of frame buffers are retained as XCAP is closed and restarted, but lost if Windows is restarted.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows Vista 32-Bit, or EPIXXCW6.SYS for Windows Vista 64-Bit, during Windows startup may be limited to a small percentage of total computer memory. Under Windows Vista 32-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to 1024 MiByte, but not more than half of the computer memory size. Under Windows Vista 64-Bit, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to the smaller of 6 GiByte or one half of the computer memory size. Some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of memory recognized by Windows, and then instructing EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows Vista 32-Bit, or EPIXXCW6.SYS for Windows Vista 64-Bit, to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating it from Windows.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of forceful frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
BCDEDIT
utility to create a copy of the
''{CURRENT}''
boot entry,
set the new
entry use limit memory usage via
''truncatememory'',
and changing the new entry's description.
Typical commands are:
to list current entries and obtain the current entry's description,BCDEDIT /enum
to create a new entry with modified description and boot prompt including a reminder of the amount of memory provided to Windows and to the PIXCI® imaging card,BCDEDIT /copy {current} /d "CURRENT_ENTRY_DESCRIPTION [PIXCI=##M NT=##M"
to get the ID of the new entry, and:BCDEDIT /enum /v
to limit the Windows memory size to <memory_size>, in bytes.BCDEDIT /set <new_entry_id> truncatememory <memory_size>
Also using
BCDEDIT
change the timeout selection to be greater than 0:
Otherwise the boot configuration options will not be shown when Windows starts.BCDEDIT /timeout 30
for Windows Vista 32-Bit, orHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
for Windows Vista 64-Bit. On the ''PIXCI'' field add:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW6
In practice, all four fields are on the same line.-IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte> -BH <size_of_BIOS_hole_below_4GiB_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
When using more than 1 or 2 GiBytes of image memory, it may be necessary to append:
to the ''PIXCI'' field, conserving system memory mapping resources by not mapping the image memory directly into the application program's space. It may also be necessary to append:-MU 0x01
which additionally conserves system resources by mapping memory only on demand.-MU 0x03
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified ''truncatememory'' limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
On a computer populated with 4 or more GiBytes of memory, some of the memory directly below the 4 GiByte address overlaps other hardware resources such as BIOS, memory mapped I/O, PCI configuration space, etc.[3] and is unavailable to either the operating system or for use as frame buffers. The usable frame buffer memory is therefore reduced by the amount by which the -IA address up to the -IA address plus -IM size overlap the 4 GiByte address minus -BH size up to the 4 GiByte address. The -BH size may be set to 0 (or not specified) if the computer has significantly less than 4 GiBytes of memory.
On computers with Intel vPro Technology, computer memory between the 768 MiByte and 1024 MiByte addresses may be reserved; the -IA address should not be lower than the 1024 MiByte address.
For example, for a computer with 1 GiByte of memory, allocating 256 MiByte for Windows and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
and use:BCDEDIT /set NEW_ENTRY_ID truncatememory 268435456
in the registry entry. Note that 262144 is 256×1024, and 786432 is (1024-256)×1024.PIXCI = -IA 262144 -IM 786432 -MB 8192
Note that if this memory allocation method is used, program access to image data may be slower. Thus, the video display rate (and image processing) may be slower, but the video capture rate (such as sequence capture) is not adversely affected. This method of memory allocation is primarily used for video rate acquisition of long sequences, followed by off-line analysis or saving of the sequence.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient installation of the authorization key's driver(s).
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
orHARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options. The authorization key's vendor does not provide detailed information regarding installation of drivers for USB port authorization keys.HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -help
Attach the USB green key. Run the Windows Device Manager, look for the ''USBKEY'', ''USBKEY64'', or ''Keylok 2'' device, ask the Device Manager to install or update the driver for the device, pointing the Device Manager to XCAP's chosen installation directory:
and subdirectory:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
for 32-Bit Windows, or subdirectory:Keylok\i386\WinXP+
for 64-Bit Windows.Keylok\x86_64\WinXP+
> Z:SETUP (replace Z with drive letter for your CD/DVD)
orftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit XCAP for Windows)
from the EPIX, Inc. ftp site.ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN64.EXE (for 64-bit XCAP for Windows)
or> XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit XCAP for Windows)
> XCAPWIN64.EXE (for 64-bit XCAP for Windows)
PCITIPS.TXT
file provides the
PCI Configuration Tips,
with tips for resolving hardware and software conflicts.
The installation procedure also, optionally,
creates a desktop shortcut for XCAP.
The printer port authorization key is black and approximately the size and shape of a printer's parallel port connector (5.5×4.5×1.6 cm), but with two 25-pin connectors. If provided, connect the authorization key to any printer port. If a printer cable was attached to the printer port, reconnect the printer cable to the back of the authorization key; the authorization key will not affect normal printer operation. The printer port authorization key is only supported on Intel i386 platforms.
Do not connect the printer port authorization key to a 25-pin serial (RS-232) port, or to any other interface that happens to use the same style connector; the authorization key will not function, might be permanently damaged, and the warranty will be void!
The Blue (older) or Green (newer) authorization USB key has the size and shape of a USB thumb drive (4 to 6×1.6×0.8 cm) with a standard USB-A 4-pin connector. If provided, connect the authorization key to a USB port.
The authorization key must remain attached, to the printer port or USB port as appropriate, while XCAP is running. If the authorization key is missing, or disconnected while XCAP is running, then XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std or XCAP-Ltd, will behave similar to the XCAP-Lite version; selected image processing and analysis tools will not be operational.
Subsequently, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup within XCAP, to change XCAP's configuration as per the authorization key or the software Activation ID Code.
XCAPWIN32.EXE
or
XCAPWIN64.EXE
installer),
or may be installed by the
PIXCI® - Driver Assistant
feature within XCAP.
Alternately, the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver can be installed as follows.
The PIXCI® frame grabber's driver consists of files:
for Windows XP 32-Bit, or files:EPIXXCW2.INF EPIXXCW2.CAT EPIXXCW2.SYS
for Windows XP 64-Bit. Driver files for different versions of Windows, although with the same file name, may have different digital signatures as required by each version of Windows.EPIXXCW6.INF EPIXXCW6.CAT EPIXXCW6.SYS
The PIXCI® frame grabber driver is installed by the Windows Device Manager, or by PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP.
Installation copies the driver files and creates registry entry:
for Windows XP 32-Bit, orHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
for Windows XP 64-Bit. Most values within the registry entry are set by the Device Manager and should not be modified. The value:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW6
may be created upon installation, added or modified by XCAP, or can be added or modified manually (i.e. via the Registry Editor (REGEDIT)); its component value(s) are Driver Configuration Parameters, as described below.PIXCI = -IM <memorysize> ...
Under Windows XP or XP(x64), frame buffer memory must be allocated during Windows' initialization.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
The requested frame buffer memory size must be specified in the Registry entry described above, using an entry named ''PIXCI'', such as:
replacing the ''<memorysize>'' with the desired memory size in KiBytes. If no frame buffer memory size is specified, a default size of 32768 KiBytes is used. Windows must be restarted for the new specification to take effect.PIXCI = "-IM <memorysize>"
Optionally,
specifies that the requested"-MB <memory_partition_size>"
is to be allocated in blocks or partitions of the stated size. Requesting memory partitioned into blocks may allow receiving more memory that would be available as a single block. However, (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, and (b) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition."-IM <memorysize>"
For the PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2, which have on-board frame buffer memory, memory reserved by the -IM parameter is needed as a DMA buffer (approximately 1 MiByte) and optionally for support of time stamping of captured frames as specified by the ''-MU'' parameter (see PIXCI® Driver Esoterica) specifies use of frame buffer memory for that purpose. Currently, 64 bytes are needed for each frame buffer's capture status.
Windows XP or XP(x64), limits the maximum amount of allocatable frame buffer memory, dependent upon what other devices are installed, the total computer memory size, and other factors. Under Windows XP the maximum amount of memory that can be allocated by this method is typically limited to 512 MiByte, but not more than half of the physical memory. Under Windows XP(x64), the typical amount of allocated memory has not yet been determined.
Windows may provide less frame buffer memory than was requested. If no memory could be allocated, the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be available, stating ''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''. Otherwise, within XCAP, the number of available frame buffers can be checked under PIXCI®, PIXCI® Video Setup, Resolution. As the frame buffer memory is allocated once during Windows initialization; the contents of frame buffers are retained as XCAP is closed and restarted, but lost if Windows is restarted.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows XP, or EPIXXCW6.SYS for Windows XP(x64), during Windows startup may be limited to a small percentage of total computer memory. Under Windows XP, the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to 512 MiByte, but not more than half of the computer memory size. Under Windows XP(x64), the amount of memory that Windows may grant during startup is typically limited to the computer memory size minus 1 GiByte, but not more than 27 Gbyte. Some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of memory recognized by Windows and then instructing EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows XP, or EPIXXCW6.SYS for Windows XP(x64), to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating it from Windows.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of forceful frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
to:[operating systems] multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows XP"
Do not copy this new line as shown above; the first portion of the line must be copied from an existing configuration line in your C:\BOOT.INI file. The text between quotes appears as a boot selection prompt, use of ''[NT=64M PIXCI=256M]'' is a suggested reminder, but not required.[operating systems] multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows XP [NT=64M PIXCI=256M]" /MAXMEM=64 multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows XP"
Also in C:\BOOT.INI, change the timeout selection to be greater than 0:
Otherwise the BOOT.INI configuration options will not be shown when Windows starts.[boot loader] timeout=30
Keeping the original configuration line, as a boot selection option, is highly recommended as a backup.
Under Windows XP, the
BOOTCFG
command, provided with Windows, can be used to
change the
BOOT.INI
file instead of manual editing.
for Windows XP, orHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
for Windows XP(x64). On the ''PIXCI'' field add:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW6
In practice, all four fields are on the same line.-IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte> -BH <size_of_BIOS_hole_below_4GiB_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
When using more than 1 or 2 GiBytes of image memory, it may be necessary to append:
to the ''PIXCI'' field, conserving system memory mapping resources by not mapping the image memory directly into the application program's space. It may also be necessary to append:-MU 0x01
which additionally conserves system resources by mapping memory only on demand.-MU 0x03
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified /MAXMEM limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! (i.e. for /MAXMEM=64, the smallest valid value of -IA is 65536, not 64000!). Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
On a computer populated with 4 or more GiBytes of memory, some of the memory directly below the 4 GiByte address overlaps other hardware resources such as BIOS, memory mapped I/O, PCI configuration space, etc.[4] and is unavailable to either the operating system or for use as frame buffers. The usable frame buffer memory is therefore reduced by the amount by which the -IA address up to the -IA address plus -IM size overlap the 4 GiByte address minus -BH size up to the 4 GiByte address. The -BH size may be set to 0 (or not specified) if the computer has significantly less than 4 GiBytes of memory.
On computers with Intel vPro Technology, computer memory between the 768 MiByte and 1024 MiByte addresses may be reserved; the -IA address should not be lower than the 1024 MiByte address.
For example, for a computer with 1 GiByte of memory, allocating 256 MiByte for Windows and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
in C:\BOOT.INI, and use:/MAXMEM=256
in the registry entry. Note that 262144 is 256×1024, and 786432 is (1024-256)×1024.PIXCI = -IA 262144 -IM 786432 -MB 8192
Note that if this memory allocation method is used, program access to image data may be slower. Thus, the video display rate (and image processing) may be slower, but the video capture rate (such as sequence capture) is not adversely affected. This method of memory allocation is primarily used for video rate acquisition of long sequences, followed by off-line analysis or saving of the sequence.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient installation of the authorization key's driver(s).
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
Printer port authorization keys are not supported on Windows XP(x64).
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
or:HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options.HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -help
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures for the printer port version of authorization keys.
C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS
This key must contain values:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\HardLock
or, if using REGEDT32, the values should appear as:ErrorControl = 0x00000001 Group = "Extended Base" Start = 0x00000002 Type = 0x00000001
ErrorControl:REG_DWORD:0x1 Group:REG_SZ:ExtendedBase Start:REG_DWORD:0x2 Type:REG_DWORD:0x1
which contains a value:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\HardLock\Parameters
where the ''????'' is replaced with the parallel port's I/O address in hexadecimal. As before, Windows must be shut down and restarted.IoPortAddress0 = 0x???? (for REGEDIT) IoPortAddress0:REG_DWORD:0x???? (for REGEDT32)
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
orHARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options. The authorization key's vendor does not provide detailed information regarding installation of drivers for USB port authorization keys.HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -help
Attach the USB green key. Run the Windows Device Manager, look for the ''USBKEY'', ''USBKEY64'', or ''Keylok 2'' device, ask the Device Manager to install or update the driver for the device, pointing the Device Manager to XCAP's chosen installation directory:
and subdirectory:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
for 32-Bit Windows, or subdirectory:Keylok\i386\WinXP+
for 64-Bit Windows.Keylok\x86_64\WinXP+
> Z:SETUP (replace Z with drive letter for your CD/DVD)
from the EPIX, Inc. ftp site.ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit Windows 2000 & later)
> XCAPWIN32.EXE (for 32-bit Windows 2000 & later)
PCITIPS.TXT
file provides the
PCI Configuration Tips,
with tips for resolving hardware and software conflicts.
The installation procedure also, optionally,
creates a desktop shortcut for XCAP.
The printer port authorization key is black and approximately the size and shape of a printer's parallel port connector (5.5×4.5×1.6 cm), but with two 25-pin connectors. If provided, connect the authorization key to any printer port. If a printer cable was attached to the printer port, reconnect the printer cable to the back of the authorization key; the authorization key will not affect normal printer operation.
Do not connect the printer port authorization key to a 25-pin serial (RS-232) port, or to any other interface that happens to use the same style connector; the authorization key will not function, might be permanently damaged, and the warranty will be void!
The Blue authorization USB key has the size and shape of a USB thumb drive (4 to 6×1.6×0.8 cm), with a standard USB-A 4-pin connector. If provided, connect the authorization key to a USB port.
The authorization key must remain attached, to the printer port or USB port as appropriate, while XCAP is running. If the authorization key is missing, or disconnected while XCAP is running, then XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std or XCAP-Ltd, will behave similar to the XCAP-Lite version; selected image processing and analysis tools will not be operational.
Subsequently, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup within XCAP, to change XCAP's configuration as per the authorization key or the software Activation ID Code.
XCAPWIN32.EXE
or
XCAPWIN64.EXE
installer),
or may be installed by the
PIXCI® - Driver Assistant
feature within XCAP.
Alternately, the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver can be installed as follows.
Use of EPIXXCW2.INF (or EPIXXCNT.INF for version 2.0 and earlier), above, provides automatic installation of EPIXXCW2.SYS (or EPIXXCNT.SYS for version 2.0 and earlier) in most circumstances. The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS
This entry must contain:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2 (version 2.1+) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCNT (version 2.0-)
and may, as described below, also contain:ErrorControl = 0x00000001 Group = "Extended base" Start = 0x00000001 Type = 0x00000001
Create an entry such as:PIXCI = "-IM <memorysize>"
This entry must contain:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EventLog\System\EPIXXCW2 (version 2.1+) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EventLog\System\EPIXXCNT (version 2.0-)
EventMessageFile = "%SystemRoot%\System32\IoLogMsg.dll" TypesSupported = 0x00000007
Under Windows 2000, the Windows NT driver EPIXXCWT.SYS can be, and was previously, used instead of EPIXXCW2.SYS. In contrast to EPIXXCWT.SYS, the EPIXXCW2.SYS is Plug & Play compatible.
Under Windows 2000 frame buffer memory must be allocated during Windows' initialization.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
The requested frame buffer memory size must be specified in the Registry entry described above, using an entry named ''PIXCI'', such as:
replacing the ''<memorysize>'' with the desired memory size in KiBytes. If no frame buffer memory size is specified, a default size of 32768 KiBytes is used. Windows must be restarted for the new specification to take effect.PIXCI = "-IM <memorysize>"
Optionally,
specifies that the requested"-MB <memory_partition_size>"
is to be allocated in blocks or partitions of the stated size. Requesting memory partitioned into blocks may allow receiving more memory that would be available as a single block. However, (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, and (b) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition."-IM <memorysize>"
For the PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2, which have on-board frame buffer memory, memory reserved by the -IM parameter is needed as a DMA buffer (approximately 1 MiByte) and optionally for support of time stamping of captured frames as specified by the ''-MU'' parameter (see PIXCI® Driver Esoterica) specifies use of frame buffer memory for that purpose. Currently, 64 bytes are needed for each frame buffer's capture status.
Windows 2000 limits the maximum amount of allocatable frame buffer memory, dependent upon what other devices are installed, the total computer memory size, and other factors. Under Windows 2000, the maximum amount of memory that can be allocated by this method is typically limited to 64 or 92 MiByte.
Windows may provide less frame buffer memory than was requested. If no memory could be allocated, the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be available, stating ''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''. Otherwise, within XCAP, the number of available frame buffers can be checked under PIXCI®, PIXCI® Video Setup, Resolution. As the frame buffer memory is allocated once during Windows initialization; the contents of frame buffers are retained as XCAP is closed and restarted, but lost if Windows is restarted.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows 2000, during Windows startup may be limited to a small percentage of the computer memory size; typically 64 to 96 MiByte.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of memory recognized by Windows and then instructing EPIXXCW2.SYS for Windows 2000 to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating it from Windows.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of forceful frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
to:[operating systems] multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows 2000"
Do not copy this new line as shown above; the first portion of the line must be copied from an existing configuration line in your C:\BOOT.INI file. The text between quotes appears as a boot selection prompt, use of ''[NT=64M PIXCI=256M]'' is a suggested reminder, but not required.[operating systems] multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows 2000 [NT=64M PIXCI=256M]" /MAXMEM=64 multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows 2000"
Also in C:\BOOT.INI, change the timeout selection to be greater than 0:
Otherwise the BOOT.INI configuration options will not be shown when Windows starts.[boot loader] timeout=30
Keeping the original configuration line, as a boot selection option, is highly recommended as a backup.
Under Windows XP, the
BOOTCFG
command, provided with Windows, can be used to
change the
BOOT.INI
file
instead of manual editing.
On the ''PIXCI'' field add:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCW2
In practice, all four fields are on the same line.-IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte> -BH <size_of_BIOS_hole_below_4GiB_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
When using more than 1 or 2 GiBytes of image memory, it may be necessary to append:
to the ''PIXCI'' field, conserving system memory mapping resources by not mapping the image memory directly into the application program's space. It may also be necessary to append:-MU 0x01
which additionally conserves system resources by mapping memory only on demand.-MU 0x03
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified /MAXMEM limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! (i.e. for /MAXMEM=64, the smallest valid value of -IA is 65536, not 64000!). Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
On a computer populated with 4 or more GiBytes of memory, some of the memory directly below the 4 GiByte address overlaps other hardware resources such as BIOS, memory mapped I/O, PCI configuration space, etc.[5] and is unavailable to either the operating system or for use as frame buffers. The usable frame buffer memory is therefore reduced by the amount by which the -IA address up to the -IA address plus -IM size overlap the 4 GiByte address minus -BH size up to the 4 GiByte address. The -BH size may be set to 0 (or not specified) if the computer has significantly less than 4 GiBytes of memory.
On computers with Intel vPro Technology, computer memory between the 768 MiByte and 1024 MiByte addresses may be reserved; the -IA address should not be lower than the 1024 MiByte address.
For example, for a computer with 1 GiByte of memory, allocating 256 MiByte for Windows and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
in C:\BOOT.INI, and use:/MAXMEM=256
in the registry entry. Note that 262144 is 256×1024, and 786432 is (1024-256)×1024.PIXCI = -IA 262144 -IM 786432 -MB 8192
Note that if this memory allocation method is used, program access to image data may be slower. Thus, the video display rate (and image processing) may be slower, but the video capture rate (such as sequence capture) is not adversely affected. This method of memory allocation is primarily used for video rate acquisition of long sequences, followed by off-line analysis or saving of the sequence.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient installation of the authorization key's driver(s).
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
or:HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options.HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -help
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures for the printer port version of authorization keys.
C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS
This key must contain values:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\HardLock
or, if using REGEDT32, the values should appear as:ErrorControl = 0x00000001 Group = "Extended Base" Start = 0x00000002 Type = 0x00000001
ErrorControl:REG_DWORD:0x1 Group:REG_SZ:ExtendedBase Start:REG_DWORD:0x2 Type:REG_DWORD:0x1
which contains a value:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\HardLock\Parameters
where the ''????'' is replaced with the parallel port's I/O address in hexadecimal. As before, Windows must be shut down and restarted.IoPortAddress0 = 0x???? (for REGEDIT) IoPortAddress0:REG_DWORD:0x???? (for REGEDT32)
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
orHARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options. The authorization key's vendor does not provide detailed information regarding installation of drivers for USB port authorization keys.HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -help
XCAP requires Windows NT Version 4 with Service Pack 3 or later.
Administrator privileges are required to complete the installation procedure.
> Z:SETUP (replace Z with drive letter for your CD/DVD)
from the EPIX, Inc. ftp site.ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN9598MeNT.EXE
> XCAPWIN9598MeNT.EXE
PCITIPS.TXT
file provides the
PCI Configuration Tips,
with tips for resolving hardware and software conflicts.
The installation procedure also, optionally,
creates a desktop shortcut for XCAP.
The printer port authorization key is black and approximately the size and shape of a printer's parallel port connector (5.5×4.5×1.6 cm), but with two 25-pin connectors. If provided, connect the authorization key to any printer port. If a printer cable was attached to the printer port, reconnect the printer cable to the back of the authorization key; the authorization key will not affect normal printer operation.
Do not connect the printer port authorization key to a 25-pin serial (RS-232) port, or to any other interface that happens to use the same style connector; the authorization key will not function, might be permanently damaged, and the warranty will be void!
The Blue authorization USB key has the size and shape of a USB thumb drive (4 to 6×1.6×0.8 cm), with a standard USB-A 4-pin connector. If provided, connect the authorization key to a USB port.
The authorization key must remain attached, to the printer port or USB port as appropriate, while XCAP is running. If the authorization key is missing, or disconnected while XCAP is running, then XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std or XCAP-Ltd, will behave similar to the XCAP-Lite version; selected image processing and analysis tools will not be operational.
Subsequently, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup within XCAP, to change XCAP's configuration as per the authorization key or the software Activation ID Code.
Alternately, the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver can be installed as follows.
Use of EPIXXCWT.INF (or EPIXXCNT.INF for version 2.0 and earlier), above, provides automatic installation of EPIXXCWT.SYS (or EPIXXCNT.SYS for version 2.0 and earlier) in most circumstances. The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS
This entry must contain:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCWT (version 2.1+) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCNT (version 2.0-)
and may, as described below, also contain:ErrorControl = 0x00000001 Group = "Extended base" Start = 0x00000001 Type = 0x00000001
Create an entry such as:PIXCI = "-IM <memorysize>"
This entry must contain:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EventLog\System\EPIXXCWT (version 2.1+) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EventLog\System\EPIXXCNT (version 2.0-)
EventMessageFile = "%SystemRoot%\System32\IoLogMsg.dll" TypesSupported = 0x00000007
Under Windows NT, frame buffer memory must be allocated during Windows' initialization.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
The requested frame buffer memory size must be specified in the Registry entry described above, using an entry named ''PIXCI'', such as:
replacing the ''<memorysize>'' with the desired memory size in KiBytes. If no frame buffer memory size is specified, a default size of 32768 KiBytes is used. Windows must be restarted for the new specification to take effect.PIXCI = "-IM <memorysize>"
Optionally,
specifies that the requested"-MB <memory_partition_size>"
is to be allocated in blocks or partitions of the stated size. Requesting memory partitioned into blocks may allow receiving more memory that would be available as a single block. However, (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, and (b) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition."-IM <memorysize>"
For the PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2, which have on-board frame buffer memory, memory reserved by the -IM parameter is needed as a DMA buffer (approximately 1 MiByte) and optionally for support of time stamping of captured frames as specified by the ''-MU'' parameter (see PIXCI® Driver Esoterica) specifies use of frame buffer memory for that purpose. Currently, 64 bytes are needed for each frame buffer's capture status.
Windows NT limits the maximum amount of allocatable frame buffer memory, dependent upon what other devices are installed, the total computer memory size, and other factors. Using the Control Panel's Device Manager to select Boot or System priority startup for EPIXXCWT.SYS (or EPIXXCNT.SYS for version 2.0 and earlier) allows more frame buffer memory to be allocated than selection of Automatic startup.
Windows may provide less frame buffer memory than was requested. If no memory could be allocated, the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be available, stating ''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''. Otherwise, within XCAP, the number of available frame buffers can be checked under PIXCI®, PIXCI® Video Setup, Resolution. As the frame buffer memory is allocated once during Windows initialization; the contents of frame buffers are retained as XCAP is closed and restarted, but lost if Windows is restarted.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by EPIXXCWT.SYS (or EPIXXCNT.SYS for version 2.0 and earlier) during Windows startup may be limited to a small percentage of the computer memory size.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of memory recognized by Windows NT, and then instructing EPIXXCWT.SYS (or EPIXXCNT.SYS for version 2.0 and earlier) to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating it from Windows.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of forceful frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
to:[operating systems] multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows NT V 4.00"
Do not copy this new line as shown above; the first portion of the line must be copied from an existing configuration line in your C:\BOOT.INI file. The text between quotes appears as a boot selection prompt, use of ''[NT=64M PIXCI=256M]'' is a suggested reminder, but not required.[operating systems] multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows NT V 4.00 [NT=64M PIXCI=256M]" /MAXMEM=64 multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(7)\WINNT="Windows NT V 4.00"
Also in C:\BOOT.INI, change the timeout selection to be greater than 0:
Otherwise the BOOT.INI configuration options will not be shown when Windows starts.[boot loader] timeout=30
Keeping the original configuration line, as a boot selection option, is highly recommended as a backup.
On the ''PIXCI'' field add:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCWT (version 2.1+) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EPIXXCNT (version 2.0-)
In practice, all four fields are on the same line.-IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte> -BH <size_of_BIOS_hole_below_4GiB_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
When using more than 1 or 2 GiBytes of image memory, it may be necessary to append:
to the ''PIXCI'' field, conserving system memory mapping resources by not mapping the image memory directly into the application program's space. It may also be necessary to append:-MU 0x01
which additionally conserves system resources by mapping memory only on demand.-MU 0x03
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified /MAXMEM limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! (i.e. for /MAXMEM=64, the smallest valid value of -IA is 65536, not 64000!). Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
On a computer populated with 4 or more GiBytes of memory, some of the memory directly below the 4 GiByte address overlaps other hardware resources such as BIOS, memory mapped I/O, PCI configuration space, etc.[6] and is unavailable to either the operating system or for use as frame buffers. The usable frame buffer memory is therefore reduced by the amount by which the -IA address up to the -IA address plus -IM size overlap the 4 GiByte address minus -BH size up to the 4 GiByte address. The -BH size may be set to 0 (or not specified) if the computer has significantly less than 4 GiBytes of memory.
On computers with Intel vPro Technology, computer memory between the 768 MiByte and 1024 MiByte addresses may be reserved; the -IA address should not be lower than the 1024 MiByte address.
For example, for a computer with 1 GiByte of memory, allocating 256 MiByte for Windows and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
in C:\BOOT.INI, and use:/MAXMEM=256
in the registry entry. Note that 262144 is 256×1024, and 786432 is (1024-256)×1024.PIXCI = -IA 262144 -IM 786432 -MB 8192
Note that if this memory allocation method is used, program access to image data may be slower. Thus, the video display rate (and image processing) may be slower, but the video capture rate (such as sequence capture) is not adversely affected. This method of memory allocation is primarily used for video rate acquisition of long sequences, followed by off-line analysis or saving of the sequence.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient installation of the authorization key's driver(s).
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
or:HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options.HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -help
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures for the printer port version of authorization keys.
C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS
or placed within the XCAP installation directory, typically:C:\WINNT\SYSTEM
C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP\PROGRAM
This key must contain values:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\HardLock
or, if using REGEDT32, the values should appear as:ErrorControl = 0x00000001 Group = "Extended Base" Start = 0x00000002 Type = 0x00000001
ErrorControl:REG_DWORD:0x1 Group:REG_SZ:ExtendedBase Start:REG_DWORD:0x2 Type:REG_DWORD:0x1
which contains a value:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\HardLock\Parameters
where the ''????'' is replaced with the parallel port's I/O address in hexadecimal. As before, Windows must be shut down and restarted.IoPortAddress0 = 0x???? (for REGEDIT) IoPortAddress0:REG_DWORD:0x???? (for REGEDT32)
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
orHARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -install
for additional options. The authorization key's vendor does not provide detailed information regarding installation of drivers for USB port authorization keys.HARDLOCK\WinXP+\HASPDINST -help
> Z:SETUP (replace Z with drive letter for your CD/DVD)
from the EPIX, Inc. ftp site.ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/XCAPWIN9598MeNT.EXE
> XCAPWIN9598MeNT.EXE
PCITIPS.TXT
file provides the
PCI Configuration Tips,
with tips for resolving hardware and software conflicts.
The installation procedure also, optionally,
creates a desktop shortcut for XCAP.
The printer port authorization key is black and approximately the size and shape of a printer's parallel port connector (5.5×4.5×1.6 cm), but with two 25-pin connectors. If provided, connect the authorization key to any printer port. If a printer cable was attached to the printer port, reconnect the printer cable to the back of the authorization key; the authorization key will not affect normal printer operation.
Do not connect the printer port authorization key to a 25-pin serial (RS-232) port, or to any other interface that happens to use the same style connector; the authorization key will not function, might be permanently damaged, and the warranty will be void!
The Blue authorization USB key has the size and shape of a USB thumb drive (4 to 6×1.6×0.8 cm), with a standard USB-A 4-pin connector. If provided, connect the authorization key to a USB port.
The authorization key must remain attached, to the printer port or USB port as appropriate, while XCAP is running. If the authorization key is missing, or disconnected while XCAP is running, then XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std or XCAP-Ltd, will behave similar to the XCAP-Lite version; selected image processing and analysis tools will not be operational.
Subsequently, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup within XCAP, to change XCAP's configuration as per the authorization key or the software Activation ID Code.
If the PIXCI® frame grabber was not previously installed, the first time Windows starts after installation of the PIXCI® frame grabber, Windows will notice the new device and inquire.
The first time Windows 95 starts after installation of the PIXCI® frame grabber, a window titled ''New Hardware Found'' appears; select ''Driver from disk provided by hardware manufacturer'', click ''OK''. A window stating ''Insert the manufacturers installation disk ...'', ''Copy manufacturers files from ...'' appears; click ''Browse'' enter path Drivers\Win95\EPIXXCW5.INF (or EPIXXC32.INF for XCAP version 2.0 and earlier) within the chosen installation directory (typically C:\XCAP or C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP), and click ''OK'', ''OK''. Do not accept the offer to ''Reboot''; a full shutdown and reboot is required. Some later releases of Windows 95 behave similar to Windows 98; the inquiries and responses may instead follow the steps below.
The first time Windows 98 starts after installation of the PIXCI® frame grabber, a pop-up window with the message ''New PCI Multimedia Device'' will flash. A window stating ''The wizard searches for new driver for PCI Multimedia Video Device'' appears; click ''Next'', select ''Search for the best driver for your device'', click ''Next''. A window stating ''Windows will search for new driver ...'' and ''Specify Location'' appears; enter path Drivers\Win98\EPIXXCW5.INF (or EPIXXC32.INF for XCAP version 2.0 and earlier) within the chosen installation directory (typically C:\XCAP or C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP), and click ''Next''. A window reports that a driver was found, namely ...\Drivers\Win98\EPIXXCW5.INF, click ''Next'' and ''Finish''.
The first time Windows ME starts after installation of the PIXCI® frame grabber, a pop-up window with the message ''New PCI Multimedia Device'' will flash. A window stating ''Windows has found the following new hardware: PCI Multimedia Video Device'' appears; select ''Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)'', click ''Next'', select ''Search for the best driver for your device'', check box ''Specify a Location'', Enter path Drivers\WinME within the chosen installation directory (typically C:\XCAP or C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP), and click ''Next''. A window reports that a driver was found, namely ...\Drivers\WinME\EPIXXCW5.INF, click ''Next'' and ''Finish''.
If the PIXCI® frame grabber was already installed under Windows 95 or 98, and ''Cancel'' was clicked when Windows started and announced the presence of new ''PCI Multimedia Hardware'', then instruct Windows to load the appropriate driver. Click ''Start'', ''Control Panel'', ''System'', ''Device Manager'', and under ''Other Devices'' double-click ''PCI MultiMedia Video Device'' or ''PIXCI(R) Video Capture Board''. Select ''Driver'', ''Change Driver'', ''Other''. Select ''PCI MultiMedia Video Device'' or ''PIXCI(R) Video Capture Board'', select ''Have Disk'', enter path Drivers\Win95 (Drivers\Win98 may be used interchangeably) within the chosen installation directory (typically C:\XCAP or C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP), and click ''OK''.
If the PIXCI® frame grabber was already installed under Windows ME, and ''Cancel'' was clicked when Windows started and announced the presence of new ''PCI Multimedia Hardware'', then instruct Windows to load the appropriate driver. Click ''Start'', ''Settings'', ''Control Panel'', ''System'' (if ''System'' is not listed, click on ''View all Control Panel options''), ''Device Manager'' and under ''Other Devices'' double-click ''PCI MultiMedia Video Device'' or ''PIXCI(R) Video Capture Board''. Select ''Properties'', ''Driver'', ''Change Driver'' or ''Update Driver''. A window reporting ''This wizard searches for updated drivers for PCI MultiMedia Video Device'' or ''This wizard searches for updated drivers for PIXCI(R) Video Capture Board'' appears; select ''Specify the location of the driver (Advanced)'', ''Next'', ''Search for the best driver for your device'', ''Specify a Location'', enter path Drivers\WinME within the chosen installation directory (typically C:\XCAP or C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP), and click ''Next'', ''Next'', ''Finish''.
Under Windows 95, 98, and ME, frame buffer memory must be allocated
during Windows' initialization, as specified in the Windows'
SYSTEM.INI
file.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
SYSTEM.INI
file,
add a section:
replacing the ''<memorysize>'' with the desired memory size in KiBytes. Windows must be restarted for the new specification to take effect.[EPIX_XC] PIXCI=-IM <memorysize>
Windows 95, 98, and ME limits the maximum amount of allocatable frame buffer memory, dependent upon what other devices are installed, the total computer memory size, and other factors.
Windows may provide less frame buffer memory than was requested. If no memory could be allocated, the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be usable; reporting ''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''. Otherwise, within XCAP, the amount of frame buffer memory can be checked under PIXCI®, PIXCI® Open/Close.
Use of EPIXXCW5.INF (or EPIXXC32.VXD for version 2.0 and earlier), above, provides automatic installation of EPIXXCW5.VXD (or EPIXXC32.VXD for version 2.0 and earlier) in most circumstances. The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM
replacing the \0000, if such an entry already exists, with the next available sequential number. This entry must contain:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\Class\Unknown\0000
DevLoader= "epixxc32.vxd" (for version 2.0-) DevLoader= "epixxcw5.vxd" (for version 2.1+) DriverDesc= "PIXCI(R) PCI Video Capture Board" (optional) InfSection= "Unknown" StaticVxD= "epixxc32.vxd" (for version 2.0-) StaticVxD= "epixxcw5.vxd" (for version 2.1+)
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SV4:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_8086&DEV_1223\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_8086&DEV_1223&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entries for PIXCI® SV5, SV5A, SV5B, or SV5L:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_109E&DEV_0350\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_109E&DEV_0350&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entries for PIXCI® SV6:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_109E&DEV_036E\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_109E&DEV_0878\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_109E&DEV_036E&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_109E&DEV_0878&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SV7:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_14F1&DEV_8800\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_14F1&DEV_8800&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SV8:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EA02\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EA02&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® D, PIXCI® D24, or PIXCI® D32:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EA03\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EA03&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® A:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_10E8&DEV_80D6\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_10E8&DEV_80D6&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® A110:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_10E8&DEV_82B1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_10E8&DEV_82B1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® A110:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_A110\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_A110&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® A310:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_A117\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_A117&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® CL3SD:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_A310\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_A310&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® CL3SD:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C300\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C300&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® CL1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C301\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C301&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® CL1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C100\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C100&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® CL2:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C10A\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C10A&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® D2X:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C200\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C200&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® D2X:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_D200\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_D200&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® D2X:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_D201\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_D201&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® D3X:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_D20A\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_D20A&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® D3XE:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_D300\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_D300&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ED30\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ED30&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E001\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E001&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E4:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E0A1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E0A1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E8:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E004\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E004&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E8CAM:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E008\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E008&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E8DB:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E0C8\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E0C8&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E1DB:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ED08\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ED08&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E1DB:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ED01\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ED01&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E4DB:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EDA1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EDA1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E4G2-2F:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ED04\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ED04&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E4G2-4B:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E504\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E504&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® E4G2-F2B:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E704\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E704&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® e104x4-2f:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E604\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E604&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® e104x4-4b:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E204\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E204&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® e104x4-f2b:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E404\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E404&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EB1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E304\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_E304&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EB1G2:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB01\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB01&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EB1-PoCL:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB13\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB13&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EB1G2-PoCL:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB11\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB11&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EB1mini:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB14\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB14&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EB1mini:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB21\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB21&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EB1tg:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB31\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB31&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EB1miniTg:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB41\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB41&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® miniH2F:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB43\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB43&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® miniH2B:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB23\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB23&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® miniH2x4F:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB22\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB22&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® mf2280:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB25\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB25&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EC1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB26\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EB26&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EC1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EC01\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_EC01&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® ECB1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ECF1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ECF1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® ECB1-34:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ECB1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ECB1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® ECB2:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ECB3\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ECB3&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EL1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ECB2\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_ECB2&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EL1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F001\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F001&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EL1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F0A1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F0A1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EL1DB:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F0F1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F0F1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® EL1DB:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_FD01\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_FD01&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® ELS2:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_FDF1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_FDF1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SI:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F002\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F002&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SI:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C000\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C000&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SI1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C001\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C001&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SI1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C011\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C011&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SI2:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C011\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C011&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SI2:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C002\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C002&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SI4:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C012\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C012&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® SI4:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C004\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C004&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
or the existing entry for PIXCI® TNTX1:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C024\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_C024&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
where the **'s may be any digits (assigned and created by Windows after detection of the PIXCI® frame grabber).[7] This entry must contain:(Win 95) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F0B1\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_** (Win 98) HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Enum\PCI\VEN_165A&DEV_F0B1&SUBSYS_00000000&REV_**\BUS_**&DEV_**&FUNC_**
where the ''0000'' is replaced by the sequential number used in the previous step.Class= "Unknown" ConfigFlags= 00 00 00 00 DeviceDesc= "PIXCI(R) PCI Video Capture Board" (optional) Driver= "Unknown\0000" (substitute 0000) Mfg= "EPIX, Inc." (optional)
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by EPIXXCW5.VXD (or EPIXXC32.VXD for version 2.0 and earlier) during Windows startup is limited to a small percentage of total computer memory.
A larger frame buffer memory can often be obtained by reserving memory before Windows starts.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of forceful frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
orDEVICE=C:\XCAP\Drivers\Win95\EPIXXC.SYS -IM <framebuffermemorysize>
after DEVICE=HIMEM.SYS, replacing ''<framebuffermemorysize>'' with the desired frame buffer memory size, in KiBytes. Alternately, the second form reserves ''<reservememorysize>'' KiBytes, for Windows and allocates (almost) all of the remaining memory for use as frame buffer memory.DEVICE=C:\XCAP\Drivers\Win95\EPIXXC.SYS -OS <reservememorysize>
so that EPIXXCW5.VXD (or EPIXXC32.VXD for version 2.0 and earlier) doesn't reserve and then waste additional frame buffer memory.[EPIX_XC] PIXCI=-IM 0
This technique allows most of the computer's memory to be reserved as frame buffer memory (e.g. typically all but 8 or 16 MiBytes, as required by Windows). However, the memory is unavailable to Windows, even when the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver is not open.
If the specified amount of frame buffer memory could not be allocated,
EPIXXC.SYS
will attempt to allocate smaller amounts.
If no memory can be allocated
EPIXXC.SYS
,
will display an error message during Windows startup,
and the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be available, stating
''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''.
This alternate frame buffer allocation method is not available under Windows ME.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by EPIXXCW5.VXD during Windows startup is limited to a small percentage of total computer memory.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of memory recognized by Windows ME, and then instructing EPIXXCW5.VXD to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating it from Windows.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of forceful frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
[386Enh] MaxPhysPage=4000 ;; 64 MiByte in 4096 byte pages, in hexadecimal
In practice, all three fields are on the same line.[EPIX_XC] PIXCI= -IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
When using more than 1 or 2 GiBytes of image memory, it may be necessary to append:
to the ''PIXCI'' field, conserving system memory mapping resources by not mapping the image memory directly into the application program's space. It may also be necessary to append:-MU 0x01
which additionally conserves system resources by mapping memory only on demand.-MU 0x03
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified /MaxPhysPage limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! (i.e. for MaxPhysPage=4000 or 64 MiByte, the smallest valid value of -IA is 65536, not 64000!). Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
For example, for a computer with 256 MiByte of memory, allocating 192 MiByte for Windows and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
andMaxPhysPage=C000
PIXCI = -IA 196608 -IM 65536 -MB 16384
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient installation of the authorization key's driver(s).
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
or:HARDLOCK\Win95+\HLDINST.EXE -install
for additional options.HARDLOCK\Win95+\HLDINST.EXE -help
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures for the printer port version of authorization keys.
HARDLOCK.VXD
must be copied to
the Windows
SYSTEM
directory, typically:
or placed within the XCAP installation directory, typically:C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM
C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP\PROGRAM
AUTOEXEC.BAT,
specifying:
forces only the I/O port addresses listed (in hexadecimal) to be searched. Note that setting HL_SEARCH from a DOS box has no effect, as the setting is not ''carried back'' from DOS into the Windows 95, 98, or ME environment.SET HL_SEARCH=378p SET HL_SEARCH=278p,378p
Run the authorization key utility program provided with XCAP from the chosen installation directory:
as:> C:\Program Files\EPIX\XCAP
orHARDLOCK\Win95+\HLDINST.EXE -install
for additional options. The authorization key's vendor does not provide detailed information regarding installation of drivers for USB port authorization keys.HARDLOCK\Win95+\HLDINST.EXE -help
Super user privileges are required to complete the installation procedure.
for 32-bit Linux, or:/media/.../PIXCI(R)/XCAP/xcaplnx_i386.bin
for 64-bit Linux. Some systems mount the CD/DVD under/media/.../PIXCI(R)/XCAP/xcaplnx_x86_64.bin
/mnt/cdrom
instead of
/media/{loginname}.
/usr/local/xcap
,
or
/usr/local/xcap32
for 32 bit XCAP on an x86-64 platform.
for 32-bit Linux and Intel i386; orftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_i386.bin
for 64-bit Linux and Intel x86-64; orftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_x86_64.bin
for 32-bit Linux and nVidia TK1 (ARM A15) or Boundary Devices NITROGEN6 (ARM imx6); orftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_armv7l.bin ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_armv7l.bin
for 64-bit Linux & nVidia TX1, TX2, Xavier, Xavier NX, Nano, Orin (ARM A57); from the EPIX, Inc. ftp site, or via theftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
website.www.epixinc.com
and execute the downloaded program:chmod a+x xcaplnx_i386.bin chmod a+x xcaplnx_x86_64.bin chmod a+x xcaplnx_armv7l.bin chmod a+x xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
./xcaplnx_i386.bin ./xcaplnx_x86_64.bin ./xcaplnx_armv7l.bin ./xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
/usr/local/xcap
,
or
/usr/local/xcap32
for 32 bit XCAP on an x86-64 platform.
/usr/local/bin
,
/usr/bin
,
or
/bin
directories, which should already be in the user's execution
''PATH''.
Several
.txt
files are installed under
help
in the installation directory
containing these installation instructions,
a list of distributed files, corrections or additions
to this manual,
or other up-to-date information.
The
pcitips.txt
file provides the
PCI Configuration Tips,
with tips for resolving hardware and software conflicts.
/usr/share/applications/xcap.desktop
onto the desktop.
For other platforms, XCAP expects a JRE to have been installed from the Linux distribution. Typically, using:
See a platform specific application note:apt-get update apt-get install openjdk-8-jre
for tips on installing the Java JRE and other platform specific idiosyncrasies.
- Installation: Boundary Devices NITROGEN6 (ARM imx6)
- Installation: nVidia Nano (ARM Cortex-A57)
- Installation: nVidia TK1 (ARM Cortex-A15)
- Installation: nVidia TX1 (ARM Cortex-A57)
- Installation: nVidia TX2 (ARM Cortex-A57)
- Installation: nVidia Xavier (ARM Cortex-A57)
- Installation: nVidia Xavier NX (ARM Cortex-A57)
The printer port authorization key is black and approximately the size and shape of a printer's parallel port connector (5.5×4.5×1.6 cm), but with two 25-pin connectors. If provided, connect the authorization key to any printer port. If a printer cable was attached to the printer port, reconnect the printer cable to the back of the authorization key; the authorization key will not affect normal printer operation.
Do not connect the printer port authorization key to a 25-pin serial (RS-232) port, or to any other interface that happens to use the same style connector; the authorization key will not function, might be permanently damaged, and the warranty will be void!
The Blue (older) or Green (newer) authorization USB key has the size and shape of a USB thumb drive (4 to 6×1.6×0.8 cm), with a standard USB-A 4-pin connector. If provided, connect the authorization key to a USB port.
The authorization key must remain attached, to the printer port or USB port as appropriate, while XCAP is running. If the authorization key is missing, or disconnected while XCAP is running, then XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std or XCAP-Ltd, will behave similar to the XCAP-Lite version; selected image processing and analysis tools will not be operational.
XCAP and its printer port authorization key is supported on Intel i386 platforms. XCAP and its Blue USB authorization key is supported on Intel i386 and x86-64 platforms. XCAP and its Green USB authorization key are supported on Intel i386 and x86-64 platforms as well as ARM aarch64 and armv7l platforms.
Subsequently, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup within XCAP, to change XCAP's configuration as per the authorization key or the software Activation ID Code.
Within XCAP, the current graphics display configuration can be checked under Utility, Linux Info, X11.
Use of the
PIXCI® - Driver Assistant
within XCAP
provides convenient installation
of the
pixci_i386.o
driver in most circumstances.
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems,
or integration with an OEM's procedures.
using --force if trying to install the driver under a different kernel than it was intended, and using PIXCIPARM= to specify any optional Driver Configuration Parameters described below. For example,insmod -o pixci [ --force ] pixci_i386.o [ "PIXCIPARM=<driver_config_parameters>" ]
insmod -o pixci [ --force ] pixci_i386.o "PIXCIPARM=-IM 8192"
and note the major device number which is assigned to thecat /proc/devices
pixci
block device.
Run
If embedding these commands into a shell script:rm -f /dev/pixci mknod /dev/pixci c <major_device_number> 0 chmod 666 /dev/pixci
automatically ''reads'' and incorporates the major device number. Therm -f /dev/pixci mknod /dev/pixci c $(awk "\\$2==\"PIXCI(R)\" {print \\$1}" /proc/devices) 0 chmod 666 /dev/pixci
nodes for optional Linux ''tty'' style access to the serial ports of Camera Link compatible PIXCI® cards are not supported under 2.4 kernels. The/dev/tty*
nodes for optional ''Video for Linux (V4L2)'' style access to video are not supported under 2.4 kernels/dev/video*
for a list of currently installed modules and remove any named bt878 or bttv by using rmmod.lsmod
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP provides convenient installation of the:
drivers in most circumstances. The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.pixci_i386.ko (32 bit driver for Intel i386) pixci_x86_64.ko (64 bit driver for Intel x86-64 pixci_armv7l.ko (32 bit driver for ARM armv7l) pixci_aarch64.ko (64 bit driver for ARM aarch64)
pixci.sh
(and the
pixci.rc
implied by
pixci.sh
)
files to install the required
pixci_i386.ko
,
pixci_x86_64.ko
,
pixci_armv7l.ko
,
or
pixci_aarch64.ko
driver, configuring Linux to automatically load the driver upon execution
and during subsequent reboots:
Thepixci.sh install <absolute path of directory containing pixci.rc> <absolute path of directory containing pixci*.ko>
pixci.rc
loads
pixci_i386.ko
,
pixci_x86_64.ko
,
pixci_armv7l.ko
,
or
pixci_aarch64.ko
with Driver Configuration Parameters taken from
/etc/default/pixci
(re-read each time the driver is loaded).
pixcitty_i386.ko
,
pixcitty_x86_64.ko
,
pixcitty_armv7l.ko
,
or
pixcitty_aarch64.ko
drivers can be installed with:
and its impliedpixcitty.sh install <absolute path of directory containing pixcitty.rc> <absolute path of directory containing pixcitty*.ko>
pixcitty.rc
.
The optional
pixcitty_*.ko
is NOT needed for access to the Camera Link serial port
via XCLIB's proprietary API, nor is it needed by XCAP.
pixciv4l_i386.ko
,
pixciv4l_x86_64.ko
,
pixciv4l_armv7l.ko
,
or
pixciv4l_aarch64.ko
drivers can be installed with:
and its impliedpixciv4l.sh install <absolute path of directory containing pixciv4l.rc> <absolute path of directory containing pixciv4l*.ko>
pixciv4l.rc
,
with
''V4L2''
configuration parameters taken from
/etc/default/pixciv4l
(re-read each time the driver is loaded).
The optional
pixciv4l_*.ko
is NOT needed for access to captured images or video
via XCLIB's proprietary API, nor is it needed by XCAP.
In some circumstances, it may be necessary
to avoid use of
pixci.sh
and
pixci.rc
(and the implied use of Linux'
/etc/rc
for automatically loading of drivers during boot),
and instead manually load the driver when needed.
using PIXCIPARM= to specify any optional Driver Configuration Parameters described below. For example:insmod pixci_i386.ko [ "PIXCIPARM=<driver_config_parameters>" ] insmod pixci_x86_64.ko [ "PIXCIPARM=<driver_config_parameters>" ] insmod pixci_armv7l.ko [ "PIXCIPARM=<driver_config_parameters>" ] insmod pixci_aarch64.ko [ "PIXCIPARM=<driver_config_parameters>" ]
Some versions of insmod do not accept quoted spaces in the Driver Configuration Parameters; an underscore (i.e. ''_'') may be used instead of a space. For example:insmod pixci_i386.ko "PIXCIPARM=-IM 8192 -DM 1" insmod pixci_x86_64.ko "PIXCIPARM=-IM 8192 -DM 1" insmod pixci_armv7l.ko "PIXCIPARM=-IM 8192 -DM 1" insmod pixci_aarch64.ko "PIXCIPARM=-IM 8192 -DM 1"
insmod pixci_i386.ko PIXCIPARM=-IM_8192_-DM_1
To use the Driver Configuration Parameters
as last set by XCAP's
Driver Assistant
and stored in
/etc/default/pixci
:
insmod pixci_i386.ko PIXCIPARM=$(grep pixci.driver.parm= < /etc/default/pixci | sed -e "s/driver.pixci.parm=//" -e "y/ \\\/__/")
and note the major device number which is assigned to thecat /proc/devices
pixci
block device.
Run:
If embedding these commands into a shell script:rm -f /dev/pixci mknod /dev/pixci c <major_device_number> 0 chmod 666 /dev/pixci
automatically ''reads'' and incorporates the major device number.rm -f /dev/pixci mknod /dev/pixci c $(awk "\\$2==\"PIXCI(R)\" {print \\$1}" /proc/devices) 0 chmod 666 /dev/pixci
Theinsmod pixcitty_i386.ko [ <tty_config_parameters> ] insmod pixcitty_x86_64.ko [ <tty_config_parameters> ] insmod pixcitty_armv7l.ko [ <tty_config_parameters> ] insmod pixcitty_aarch64.ko [ <tty_config_parameters> ]
nodes for the first, second, etc. cards are created automatically./dev/ttySPIXCI0 /dev/ttySPIXCI1 ...
The
''tty''
configuration parameters are described in
pixcitty.df
.
For example:
insmod pixcitty_i386.ko DEFAULT_BAUDRATE=9600 insmod pixcitty_x86_64.ko DEFAULT_BAUDRATE=9600 insmod pixcitty_armv7l.ko DEFAULT_BAUDRATE=9600 insmod pixcitty_aarch64.ko DEFAULT_BAUDRATE=9600
The optional
pixcitty_*.ko
driver is used in addition to, and installed after, the corresponding
pixci_*.ko
driver.
The optional
pixcitty_*.ko
is NOT needed for access to the Camera Link serial port
via XCLIB's proprietary API, nor is it needed by XCAP.
The:insmod pixciv4l_i386.ko [ <v4l_config_parameters> ] insmod pixciv4l_x86_64.ko [ <v4l_config_parameters> ] insmod pixciv4l_armv7l.ko [ <v4l_config_parameters> ] insmod pixciv4l_aarch64.ko [ <v4l_config_parameters> ]
nodes for the first, second, etc. cards are created automatically./dev/video* ...
The
''V4L2''
configuration parameters are described in
pixciv4l.df
.
For example:
insmod pixciv4l_i386.ko STREAM_MODE=1 STREAM_BUFFERS=12 insmod pixciv4l_x86_64.ko STREAM_MODE=1 STREAM_BUFFERS=12 insmod pixciv4l_armv7l.ko STREAM_MODE=1 STREAM_BUFFERS=12 insmod pixciv4l_aarch64.ko STREAM_MODE=1 STREAM_BUFFERS=12
The optional
pixciv4l_*.ko
driver is used in addition to, and installed after, the corresponding
pixci_*.ko
driver.
The optional
pixciv4l_*.ko
is NOT needed for access to captured images or video
via XCLIB's proprietary API, nor is it needed by XCAP.
for a list of currently installed modules and remove any named videodev, i2c, i2c-char, tuner, msp3400, bt878, or bttv by using rmmod.lsmod
Under Linux, frame buffer memory must be allocated during the driver's installation.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
The requested frame buffer memory size must be specified in the Driver Configuration Parameters, described above, using parameter
replacing the ''<memorysize>'' with the desired memory size in KiBytes. If no frame buffer memory size is specified, a default size of 4096 KiBytes is used under 32 bit Linux. 32768 KiBytes is used under 64 bit Linux."-IM <memorysize>"
Optionally,
specifies that the requested"-MB <memory_partition_size>"
is to be allocated in blocks or partitions of the stated size. Requesting memory partitioned into blocks may allow receiving more memory that would be available as a single block. However, (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, and (b) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition."-IM <memorysize>"
For the PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2, which have on-board frame buffer memory, memory reserved by the -IM parameter is needed as a DMA buffer (approximately 1 MiByte) and optionally for support of time stamping of captured frames as specified by the ''-MU'' parameter (see PIXCI® Driver Esoterica) specifies use of frame buffer memory for that purpose. Currently, 64 bytes are needed for each frame buffer's capture status.
Linux limits the maximum amount of allocatable frame buffer memory, dependent upon what other devices are installed, the computer's total memory size, and other factors. Installing the driver immediately after booting Linux improves the likelihood of being able to allocate large amounts of memory.
Linux may provide less frame buffer memory than was requested. If no memory could be allocated, the PIXCI® frame grabber will not be available, stating ''Can't allocate frame buffer memory''. Otherwise, within XCAP, the number of available frame buffers can be checked under PIXCI®, PIXCI® Video Setup, Resolution. As the frame buffer memory is allocated once during the driver's initialization; the contents of frame buffers are retained as XCAP is closed and restarted, but lost if the driver is uninstalled or Linux is restarted.
For the nVidia TK1 (ARM Cortex-A15),
the nVidia TX1/TX2 (ARM Cortex-A57),
the nVidia Nano (ARM Cortex-A57)
and the Boundary Devices NITROGEN6 (ARM imx6)
(but not the nVidia Xavier or Xavier NX),
the amount of frame buffer memory that can be allocated
is limited by the kernel's
''coherent pool''
size.
For these embedded systems, the memory is split into
various special purpose pools - unlike a typical
desktop system.
For the TK1, TX1, TX2, increasing the
''coherent pool''
size requires editing the
/boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf
file and setting the
''vmalloc'',
''CMA'',
and
''coherent-pool''
parameters.
For the NITROGEN6, increasing the
''coherent pool''
size requires editing the
/6x_bootscript.txt
file and setting the
''coherent-pool''
parameter, followed by compilation of
/6x_bootscript.txt
via a Boundary Devices tool, and
replacement of the
/6x_bootscript
file.
Values for
''coherent-pool''
and other parameters
must take into account all devices and requirements
of the system.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by
pixci_i386.o
during its installation may be limited to a small
percentage of the computer's total memory.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of
memory recognized by Linux, and then instructing
pixci_i386.o
to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating
it from Linux.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
/etc/lilo.conf
,
restricting Linux to use no more than a set amount of memory:
by copying an existing configuration group, adding mem=XXM
(where XX is the memory size in MiByte) to the
''append''
line, and changing the prompt name.
For example, changing:
toimage=/boot/vmlinuz label=linux root=/dev/hda1 append=" devfs=mount" read-only
Add an ''append'' line, such as:image=/boot/vmlinuz label=linux+PIXCI root=/dev/hda1 append=" devfs=mount mem=64M" read-only
if not previously present. When booting, the modified ''label='' provides a reminder of the modified configuration being selected.append=" mem=64M"
to compile and install thelilo
/etc/lilo.conf
.
In practice, all four fields are on the same line.-IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte> -BH <size_of_BIOS_hole_below_4GiB_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified ''mem='' limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! (i.e. for mem=64M, the smallest valid value of -IA is 65536, not 64000!). Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
On a computer populated with 4 or more GiBytes of memory, some of the memory directly below the 4 GiByte address overlaps other hardware resources such as BIOS, memory mapped I/O, PCI configuration space, etc.[10] and is unavailable to either the operating system or for use as frame buffers. The usable frame buffer memory is therefore reduced by the amount by which the -IA address up to the -IA address plus -IM size overlap the 4 GiByte address minus -BH size up to the 4 GiByte address. The -BH size may be set to 0 (or not specified) if the computer has significantly less than 4 GiBytes of memory.
On computers with Intel vPro Technology, computer memory between the 768 MiByte and 1024 MiByte addresses may be reserved; the -IA address should not be lower than the 1024 MiByte address.
For example, for a computer with 1 GiByte of memory, allocating 256 MiByte for Linux and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
inmem=256M
lilo.conf
,
and use:
in the Driver Configuration Parameters. Note that 262144 is 256×1024, and 786432 is (1024-256)×1024.-IA 262144 -IM 786432 -MB 8192
Some Linux 2.4.x systems may use
grub.conf
or
menu.lst
instead of
lilo.conf
for boot configuration;
see
Linux 2.6.x - Forceful Frame Buffer Memory Allocation
for instructions regarding
grub.conf
or
menu.lst
.
As described above, frame buffer memory allocated by
pixci_i386.ko
or
pixci_x86_64.ko
during its installation may be limited to a small
percentage of the computer's total memory.
A larger frame buffer memory can be obtained by limiting the amount of
memory recognized by Linux, and then instructing
pixci_i386.ko
or
pixci_x86_64.ko
to explicitly use a section of memory without allocating
it from Linux.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient configuration of frame buffer memory allocation. The following information allows manual configuration, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
/boot/grub/grub.conf
(renamed to
/boot/grub/menu.lst
on some systems),
restricting Linux to use no more than a set amount of memory:
by copying an existing configuration group, adding mem=XXM
(where XX is the memory size in MiByte) to the
''kernel''
line, and changing the prompt name.
For example, changing:
totitle Fedora Core (2.6.5-1.358) root (hd0,0) kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.5-1.358 ro root=LABEL=/ rhgb quiet initrd /initrd-2.6.5-1.358.img
When booting, the modified ''title'' provides a reminder of the modified configuration being selected.title Fedora Core (2.6.5-1.358) + PIXCI root (hd0,0) kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.5-1.358 ro root=LABEL=/ rhgb quiet mem=64M initrd /initrd-2.6.5-1.358.img
In practice, all four fields are on the same line.-IA <image_memory_adrs_in_KiByte> -IM <size_of_image_memory_in_KiByte> -MB <image_memory_partition_size_in_KiByte> -BH <size_of_BIOS_hole_below_4GiB_in_KiByte>
The -MB partition size specifies the size into which image memory is partitioned for the sake of virtual memory management: (a) Each frame buffer must be completely contained within a partition, (b) A value of 0 specifies that the entire image memory is to be handled as one partition, and (c) The maximum number of partitions is 256 under 32 bit operating systems, the maximum number of partitions is 256 under 64 bit operating systems. For most systems, a value of 8192 or 16384 is suggested; though the value need not be a power of two. Systems with very high resolution cameras using large frame buffers should choose the partition size carefully, so as to minimize the unusable memory remaining, smaller than a frame buffer, at the end of each partition.
Be careful that the -IA address is equal to (or above) the specified ''mem='' limit - including exact base2 to base10 conversions! (i.e. for mem=64M, the smallest valid value of -IA is 65536, not 64000!). Likewise, be certain that the -IA plus -IM values do not exceed the amount of memory available!
On a computer populated with 4 or more GiBytes of memory, some of the memory directly below the 4 GiByte address overlaps other hardware resources such as BIOS, memory mapped I/O, PCI configuration space, etc.[11] and is unavailable to either the operating system or for use as frame buffers. The usable frame buffer memory is therefore reduced by the amount by which the -IA address up to the -IA address plus -IM size overlap the 4 GiByte address minus -BH size up to the 4 GiByte address. The -BH size may be set to 0 (or not specified) if the computer has significantly less than 4 GiBytes of memory.
On computers with Intel vPro Technology, computer memory between the 768 MiByte and 1024 MiByte addresses may be reserved; the -IA address should not be lower than the 1024 MiByte address.
For example, for a computer with 1 GiByte of memory, allocating 256 MiByte for Linux and the remainder for frame buffer memory, use:
inmem=256M
grub.conf
(or
menu.lst
),
and use:
in the Driver Configuration Parameters. Note that 262144 is 256×1024, and 786432 is (1024-256)×1024.-IA 262144 -IM 786432 -MB 8192
Some Linux 2.6.x systems may use the older
lilo.conf
instead of
grub.conf
for boot configuration;
see
Linux 2.4.x - Forceful Frame Buffer Memory Allocation
for instructions regarding
lilo.conf
.
Forceful frame buffer memory allocation
is not available for
pixci_aarch64.ko
on the nVidia/ARM TX/TX21/Cortex-A57.
Forceful frame buffer memory allocation
is not available for
pixci_armv7l.ko
on the nVidia/ARM TK1/Cortex-A15.
Forceful frame buffer memory allocation
is not available for
pixci_armv7l.ko
on the Boundary Devices/ARM NITROGEN6/imx6.
Use of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant within XCAP, provides convenient installation of the authorization key's driver(s).
The following information allows manual installation, correcting problems, or integration with an OEM's procedures.
For manual installation, correcting problems,
or integration with an OEM's procedures,
installation instructions are
provided in text file
hardlock/INSTALL
within the XCAP installation directory.
Alternately, see the
hardlock/drv/src_i386/Makefile
for compiling the parallel port key driver
under the current kernel,
the
hardlock/drv/pinst
shell file for installing the parallel port key driver,
and the
hardlock/sbin/dinst
shell file for installing the USB key daemon,
all within the XCAP installation directory.
The parallel port key driver is needed under
2.4.x, 2.6.x, 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x i386 kernels even if the
parallel port version of the key isn't used.
Parallel port keys are not supported under newer x86-64 kernels;
the
hardlock/drv/src_x86_64/Makefile
and related files are provided for legacy systems.
The printer port and Blue USB authorization key and drivers are not supported on ARM platforms.
From the XCAP chosen installation directory:
copy the:> /usr/local/xcap
or:keylok/i386/z95_keylok.rules
file to:keylok/x86_64/z95_keylok.rules
Or, execute:/etc/udev/rules.d/
orkeylok/klinst keylok/i386
Reboot Linux.keylok/klinst keylok/x86_64
The various Driver Configuration Parameters for all operating systems are summarized below.
The Driver Configuration Parameter string may contain any of the following parameters, separated by spaces, in any order. Each parameter's flag is followed by a number, whose value is interpreted as hexadecimal if preceded by ''0x'' or ''0X'', octal if preceded by ''0o'' or ''0O'', binary if preceded by ''0b'' or ''0B'', and is otherwise interpreted as decimal.
For example, 0x01 selects the first board, 0x04 selects the third board, and 0b1001 selects the first and fourth board.
For the PIXCI® E1DB, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4TX2-2F, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, ECB2, EL1DB, ELS2, SI2, and SV7 frame grabbers which contain two independent functional units within a single physical board, and for the PIXCI® E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-F2B, and e104x4-f2b frame grabbers which contains three independent functional units within a single physical board, and for the PIXCI® E4G2-4B, E4TX2-4B, e104x4-4b, and SI4 frame grabbers which contain four independent functional units within a single physical board: Under Windows 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, 11 64-Bit, Linux 32 Bit, and Linux 64 Bit, each functional unit is handled as an independent frame grabber and may be opened and closed independently. Under other operating systems, the first functional unit (i.e. half, third, or quarter) must be opened before latter functional units of the same physical board. A bit map of 0b1101 selects the first half of the first physical PIXCI® E1DB, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4TX2-2F, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, EL1DB, ECB2, ELS2, SI2, or SV7 frame grabber and both halves of the second physical PIXCI® E1DB, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4TX2-2F, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, EL1DB, ECB2, ELS2, SI2, or SV7; 0b11111001 selects the first and fourth quarter of the first physical PIXCI® E4G2-4B, E4TX2-4B, e104x4-4b, or SI4 frame grabber and all quarters of the second physical PIXCI® E4G2-4B, E4TX2-4B, e104x4-4b, or SI4. Default: 0x01, except under a Windows Plug & Play O.S. where the default is a bitmap of all functional units of the first physical board.
For the PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2 which have on-board frame buffer memory, memory reserved by this parameter is needed for DMA buffers (approximately 1 MiByte). Memory reserved by this parameter is also, optionally, used for support of recording per-frame buffer capture status, as specified by the ''-MU'' parameter. Currently, 64 bytes are needed for each frame buffer's capture status. Default: 4096 KiByte.
Particularly useful for use with SILICON VIDEO® 10C6, 10M6, 1281M, 1281C, 1310, 1310C, 15C5, 1C45, 1M45 2112, 2112C, 2KS-C, 2KS-M, 5C10, 5M10, 642M, 642C, 643M, 643C, 9C10, 9M001, 9M001C, 9T001C, WGA-C, and WGA-M cameras; these SILICON VIDEO® camera heads use a I2C or similar two wire serial bus to control camera head features.
Does not affect the serial baud rate of Camera Link compatible frame grabbers.
Default: 0.
If bit 0x80 is set with non forceful memory allocation, frame buffer memory below 4 GiByte is requested; on 64 bit systems with more than 4 GiByte of memory, this allows allows use of 32 bit PCI cards. Option is quietly ignored for kernels that don't support the necessary feature(s).
Only used under Linux. Other bits to be described. Default: 0.
If bit 0x04 is not set, the frame buffer memory is not cleared after allocation, minimizing delay, particularly when using several GiBytes of frame buffer memory.
If bit 0x08 is not set, a portion of frame buffer memory is reserved for recording each per-frame buffer's capture status, such as stamping the time of capture. Use of frame buffer memory for capture status may not be supported when using forceful image frame buffer allocation. If bit 0x08 is set, memory is allocated dynamically from the operating system for recording each frame buffer's capture status. The amount of space reserved, or the amount of space allocated, is proportional to the number of frame buffers. The dynamic memory allocation option is not available under Windows 95, 98, or ME; and the per-frame buffer status is discarded upon closing the PIXCI® frame grabber(s).
If bit 0x20 is not set, a portion of frame buffer memory is reserved for serial data buffers used in conjunction with Camera Link serial communication. (For the PIXCI® CL3SD which has on-board frame buffer memory, a small static buffer is used in place of frame buffer memory). If bit 0x20 is set, memory is allocated dynamically from the operating system for serial data buffers. The dynamic memory allocation option is not available under Windows 95, 98, or ME.
If bit 0x40 is set, the frame buffer memory and memory used for recording per frame buffer's capture status is cleared (i.e. set to zero) whenever the capture format resolution, bit depth, bit packing, or color space options are changed. This is intended so that display of the contents of the frame buffer(s), under the new format but before a new image is captured, will show a black image (or green for YUYV formats) rather than ''garbled'' pixel data. This option is ignored when using forceful image frame buffer allocation, or for frame grabbers with on-board frame buffer memory.
Default: 0x01 under Windows 95, 98, ME. 0x28 under Linux 32 Bit and Linux 64 Bit prior to kernel 4.x; 0x29 for kernel 4.x and later. 0x29 under Windows NT, 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, 11 64-Bit.
Default: 0.
Under Linux: If n=1, the ''jiffies'' and ''HZ'' are used for time stamping video events. If n=2, the high resolution kernel timer (i.e. ''do_gettimeofday'' for earlier kernels or ''do_getnstimeofday'' for kernel 5.x and later) is used for time stamping video events. If n=3, the ''get_jiffies_64'' is used for time stamping video events.
Under Windows 95, 98, and ME: If n=1, the ''Get_Last_Updated_System_Time'' is used for time stamping video events.
Under Windows NT: If n=1, the ''KeQuerySystemTime'' is used for time stamping video events.
Under Windows 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit: If n=1, the ''KeQuerySystemTime'' is used for time stamping video events. If n=2, the ''KeQueryPerformanceCounter'' is used for time stamping video events. If n=3, the ''KeQueryInterruptTime'' is used for time stamping video events. If n=4, the ''KeQueryTickCount'' is used for time stamping video events.
Under Windows 8/10 32/64-Bit and 11 64-Bit: If n=1, the ''KeQuerySystemTime'' is used for time stamping video events. If n=2, the ''KeQueryPerformanceCounter'' is used for time stamping video events. If n=3, the ''KeQueryInterruptTime'' is used for time stamping video events. If n=4, the ''KeQueryTickCount'' is used for time stamping video events. If n=5, the ''KeQuerySystemTimePrecise'' is used for time stamping video events.
Each option has various advantages and disadvantages, as described by the operating system's documentation. Default: For backward compatibility, time stamping as per -WT or -LX is used.
If bit 0x20 is set, a high resolution kernel timer is used for time stamping video events. Windows documentation states that use of this timer incurs additional overhead. Only used with Window NT, 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, and 11 64-Bit. The new -TI option supersedes this option.
If bit 0x80 is set, frame buffer memory below 4 GiByte is requested; on 64 bit systems with more than 4 GiByte of memory, this allows allows use of 32 bit PCI cards, and/or allows allows use of 32 bit applications. Only used with Window XP, XP(x64), Vista 64-Bit, 7 64-Bit, 8/10 64-Bit, and 11 64-Bit.
if bit 0x100 is set, the driver applies a patch so that the frame grabber can be opened after Windows awakes from sleep or hibernation modes. Only used with Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, and 11 64-Bit.
If bit 0x200 is set, the driver does not use IOCTL ''DIRECT'' mode.
If bit 0x1000 is set, the driver implements a work-around so that Windows sleep or hibernation does not adversely affect the operation of older PIXCI® frame grabbers
Only used under Windows. Other bits to be described. Default: 0x20.
XCAP is a family of sophisticated, interactive, imaging programs specifically designed to support the PIXCI® series of frame grabbers, but also able to process and analyze images from other imaging sources. Several versions of XCAP are available: XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, XCAP-Ltd, XCAP-Lite, and XCAP-Viewer. All versions share the same user interface and menu structure, but selected features in XCAP-Std, XCAP-Ltd, XCAP-Lite, and XCAP-Viewer are not operational. XCAP is distributed on CD/DVD, or downloadable from the EPIX, Inc. website. After installation, a 12 character activation or ID code[13] is entered to configure XCAP as either XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, XCAP-Ltd,[14] or XCAP-Lite; or, lacking a valid activation or ID code, configured as XCAP-Viewer.
XCAP-Std is an interactive, imaging program designed for scientific, industrial, and machine vision applications. XCAP-Std supports the PIXCI® frame grabber, providing video format and resolution configuration; continuous (live), video rate sequence, and triggered capture; and single or sequence, zoomed or resized, display. The image frame buffers of PIXCI® frame grabbers can be loaded, examined, processed, analyzed, measured, printed, annotated, and saved.
XCAP-Std also allows loading, analyzing, modifying, and saving a pre-existing image or image sequence with size, pixel depth, and color space independent of the PIXCI® frame grabber's configuration; XCAP-Std can be used with pre-existing images even when the PIXCI® frame grabber is not present. XCAP-Std can also acquire images from TWAIN compliant devices.
XCAP-Plus provides extra, advanced, features in addition to all of the capabilities of the XCAP-Std, such as support for specialized, optional, hardware.
XCAP-Ltd is a simplified version of XCAP-Std. XCAP-Ltd provides the same image acquisition and PIXCI® frame grabber control capabilities, the same image display features, and the same image loading, examining, printing, and saving of single image or sequences of images. Only minimal image processing, measurement, analysis, and scripting features are functional. XCAP-Ltd can be used with pre-existing images even when the PIXCI® frame grabber is not present.
XCAP-Lite is a much simplified version of XCAP-Std. XCAP-Lite provides similar image acquisition and PIXCI® frame grabber control capabilities, video format and resolution configuration; continuous (live), video rate sequence, and triggered capture; and single or sequence, zoomed or resized, display. XCAP-Lite also provides some of the image loading, examining, printing, and saving features, but minimal processing, measurement, analysis, and scripting features are functional. XCAP-Lite allows loading and saving single images, as well as image sequences in TIFF format.
XCAP-Viewer allows browsing through the dozens of processing, measurement, analysis, and graphics features provided in XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, XCAP-Ltd, or XCAP-Lite. XCAP-Viewer can load and display pre-existing single images. The PIXCI® frame grabber can't be operated with the XCAP-Viewer version.
As XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, XCAP-Ltd, XCAP-Lite, and XCAP-Viewer share many common features, this manual typically refers to all versions as XCAP, except where explicitly differentiated.
The XCAP features are organized into two major types of windows, the Main Window and one or more Image Viewer Windows.
For each image, or sequence of images, an Image Viewer Window shows that image, or a selected image of that sequence, and via its menu bar allows viewing, examining, processing, analyzing, or drawing upon that image (sequence). The Image Viewer Window associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffers also provides features for capturing new images. There can be multiple Image Viewer Windows for the same image (sequence), allowing, for example, viewing the image both magnified (i.e. zoom) and unmagnified, or simultaneous viewing of different images of a sequence.
The Main Window allows creating new image (sequences), and thus new Image Viewer Windows, either by loading a new image from file, explicit specification of the new image's dimensions, or by opening the PIXCI® frame grabber for use. Video setup for the PIXCI® frame grabber, such as modifying the video resolution or color space, are also in the Main Window; these features may close and re-create the PIXCI® frame grabber's Image Viewer Window. The Main Window also provides features not directly associated with an image (sequence), such as scripts, RS-232 device control, and features to customize XCAP.
The XCAP main window provides a menu bar with File, Images, Scripts, Utility, PIXCI®, and Help features.
The main window's File allows loading of pre-existing images into new image buffers, displaying attributes about pre-existing images, and acquiring images from TWAIN compliant devices.
The Load New Image and Load New Image Sequence creates a new image buffer (sequence) with dimensions, pixel depth, and color space matching a specified AVI (Audio Video Interleaved), BigTIFF (Tagged Image File Format extended for large file sizes), BMP (Bitmap), FITS (Flexible Image Transport System), JPEG (Joint Photographic Exports Group), PBM/PGM/PBM (Portable Bit/Gray/Pixel Map), TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), VIF (Video Frame Files - Video to Disk) or multimedia format file(s), and loads the image(s) from the file(s). This feature, and the image buffer (sequence) created, is unrelated to the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffers. After creation and loading, the new image (sequence) is displayed, processed, and analyzed in a new instance of The Image Viewer Window, described below. Using wild cards, the Load New Image can also load multiple image files - each to their own new image buffer.
The Image File Info displays information about a specified AVI, BigTIFF, BMP, FITS, JPEG, PBM/PGM/PPM, TIFF, or VIF format file without loading the image. The information displayed includes the image's dimensions, pixel depth, color space, palette option, and other file format specific information.
The TWAIN Select Source and TWAIN New Acquire allow using XCAP as a TWAIN Application, acquiring images from TWAIN compliant imaging devices (TWAIN Sources). The TWAIN Select Source allows selecting which TWAIN Source is to be used, and the TWAIN New Acquire allows acquiring one image from the TWAIN Source.
The Window List displays a list of active windows belonging to XCAP; selecting a window causes that window to appear, if previously hidden, and/or to appear over other windows (subject to the priority of selected windows to always appear ''on top'').
The main window's Images allows creating new image buffers and activating any existing image windows that may not be on-screen.
The New Image creates a new image buffer, or sequence of image buffers, with specified dimensions, pixel depth, color space, and palette. This feature, and the image buffer created, is unrelated to the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffers. After creation, the new image is displayed in a new instance of The Image Viewer Window, as described below.
Underneath New Image are listed all existing image windows, whether for PIXCI® frame grabber frame buffers, or for independent image buffers. (The image window for PIXCI® frame grabber frame buffers appears only after the PIXCI® frame grabber has been opened for use, see below). An image window which has been closed and is thereby off-screen can be reactivated by clicking the image window's name.
The main window's Scripts provides features for recording and playing scripts. A script recording contains most of the user's interactions with the windows of XCAP; playing the script duplicates the original actions.
Some user actions are not recorded. Using the mouse to drag the cursor or other graphic across an image is not recorded as these actions are highly dependent upon image content (such as the typical scenario of dragging the cursor until it is positioned next to an artifact in a captured image), would likely be inappropriate to other captured images, and recording each mouse ''step'' would consume a significant amount of disk space. Instead, after positioning the cursor interactively the user can record the final position by clicking the appropriate numeric cursor coordinates. Similarly, the activation of a feature with shortcut keys or shortcut icons is not recorded; instead features can be activated via the non-shortcut alternative, which is recorded.
A recorded script is in a human readable form and can be altered with any common editor capable of handling ASCII text, allowing scripts to be modified or combined. A selected script may be executed automatically after XCAP starts, this feature is set in Utility, Program Setup, Startup Script.
The Load Tool Bar provides one or more user-defined tool bars of shortcuts, each shortcut represented by an icon which, when clicked, executes a user-specified script. Each shortcut may also specify an optional keyboard key which, when pressed, also executes the user-specified script.
The Script Remote Control allows using XCAP as a hidden, off-screen, ''black box''; any end-user application that can manipulate text files, can also remotely control XCAP.
The main window's Utility provides an assortment of features that are of secondary importance; features that allow fine tuning of XCAP, or features needed in relatively few circumstances.
The Black Board allows customizing XCAP, creating non-procedural programs, and collecting data. The black board allows inter-connecting the numeric and text field of other windows; computed results, such as center-of-mass, may be written onto the black board - parameters for other features, such as the coordinates of a displayed grid, may be extracted from the black board - combining these automatically repositions the grid as the center of mass is recomputed! Other features allow computed values (similar to a spreadsheet), ''push''ing buttons, timed updates, creating a report to file or an RS-232 port, collecting data, and graphing the black board's contents.
A Message Log window lists warnings and errors that arise from performing various operations. By default, the message log window appears automatically when a message is added, and disappears a few seconds later. Auto appearance, auto hide, and audible clicks can be disabled (from the message log window's menu bar). The menu-bar's Message Log allows explicit activation of the message log window.
The Program Setup shows information about the installed XCAP components, such as their revision level, and sets various configuration options. For versions of XCAP that require an authorization key, it also shows the ID of the key required by the instant copy of XCAP.
The Program Setup allows specifying the name of a script to be executed when XCAP starts, whether warning pop-up windows (if any) are to be shown, whether previously saved settings are to be loaded, and other similar initial or terminal conditions.
The Program Setup also enables user-defined translation of XCAP labels and messages for use in non-English speaking countries.
The Windows Info displays information about the current Windows environment, such as memory usage and the graphics display system's features, as reported by Windows.
The Window Style allows setting some characteristics of XCAP windows, such as color or character size and font. Some characteristics of window style are instead controlled by the Windows Control Panel.
The Audio Clip (only under Windows) allows recording and playing short audio ''clips''.
The RS-232 Terminal allows ''raw'' communication with a camera or other device connected via the computer's RS-232 port. The RS-232 Terminal is designed specifically for device control, including options to communicate with byte values, rather than as a common ''terminal emulator''. XCAP may also provide more convenient, camera-specific ''smart'' controls, provided after a camera-specific frame grabber is opened, via the Capture - Adjustments.
The I/O Port Peek & Poke allows controlling arbitrary devices accessible via I/O port peeks and pokes. This feature must be used with caution; peeking or poking arbitrary ports will cause computer malfunction! This feature is only available under Windows 95, 98, and ME.
The Screen Capture allows capturing the current graphics display screen, saving the graphics to a file, or printing the graphics. The Screen Capture also allows capturing numeric and textual parameters into a text file, suitable for loading into a spreadsheet or other programs.
The Volpi intralux dc-1100 and Illumination Technologies 3900 provide support for controlling these light sources through their RS-232 ports.
The Birger EF232 provides support for controlling the Birger EF232 RS-232 Lens Mount.
The Fujinon CCTV Lens provides support for controlling Fujinon CCTV Lenses that follow the Fujinon C10 Protocol.
The Directed Perception Pan-Tilt Unit provides support for controlling the Directed Perception Pan-Tilt Units.
The Sagebrush Pan-Tilt Gimbal provides support for controlling the Sagebrush Pan-Tilt Gimbals that follow the Sagebrush 2.0 Protocol.
The EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 20C-CL, EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 20M-CL, EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL, and EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL provide support for configuring the EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 10C-CL, SILICON VIDEO® 10M-CL, SILICON VIDEO® 20C-CL, SILICON VIDEO® 20M-CL, SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL, and SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL cameras via a virtual ''COM'' port (under Windows), a virtual ''ttyS'' device (under Linux), or a Camera Link Serial API DLL (i.e. a clserXXX.DLL, under Windows). These are provided for configuring the camera when using a frame grabber other than an PIXCI® frame grabber, leaving configuration of the frame grabber to its software. When using a PIXCI® frame grabber, the alternative PIXCI® - Open/Close is recommended as it provides integrated controls for both camera and frame grabber.
The main window's PIXCI® allows initiating access to the PIXCI® frame grabber and provides configuration options. Actual operation of the PIXCI® frame grabber is performed through the PIXCI® image viewer window's menu-bar.
The PIXCI® Open/Close allows opening access to, or closing access to, the PIXCI® frame grabber. Once open, the model, and submodel or preset camera & format selection, as appropriate, of the PIXCI® frame grabber is available via the Board Info button. After opening, the contents of the PIXCI® frame grabber's image frame buffer(s) are displayed in a new instance of The Image Viewer Window, along with a tool bar of PIXCI® Image Viewer - Capture - Shortcuts and a status bar of Image Viewer - View - Status Bar are shown as described below.
The PIXCI® Video Setup allows configuring the video format, video resolution and other, model specific, video characteristics. For the PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, and SV5L models, the PIXCI® Video Setup allows selecting NTSC, RS-170, NTSC/S-VIDEO, CCIR, PAL, or PAL/S-Video formats, allows selecting the video window size, capture resolution, and other video acquisition characteristics.
For the PIXCI® SV7 models, the PIXCI® Video Setup allows selecting NTSC, RS-170, CCIR, or PAL formats , allows selecting the video window size, capture resolution, and other video acquisition characteristics.
For the PIXCI® SV8 models, the PIXCI® Video Setup allows selecting NTSC, RS-170, NTSC/S-VIDEO, CCIR, PAL, or PAL/S-Video formats, allows selecting the video window size, capture resolution, and other video acquisition characteristics.
For the PIXCI® A310 model, the PIXCI® Video Setup allows selecting Video 720x480i 60Hz (RS-170), Video 720x480i 60Hz RGB, Video 720x576i 50Hz (CCIR), Video 720x576i 50Hz RGB, Video 1920x1080i 60Hz, Video 1920x1080i 60Hz RGB, Video 1920x1080i 50Hz, Video 1920x1080i 50Hz RGB, Video 1920x1080p 60Hz, Video 1920x1080p 60Hz RGB, Video 1920x1080p 50Hz, Video 1920x1080p 50Hz RGB, Video 1280x720p 50Hz, Video 1280x720p 50Hz RGB, Video 1280x720p 60Hz, Video 1280x720p 60Hz RGB, RS330 720x480i 60Hz, RS343 875i 60Hz, RS343 875i 60Hz RGB, SVGA 800x600 60Hz, SVGA 800x600 60Hz RGB, SXGA 1280x1024 60Hz, SXGA 1280x1024 60Hz RGB, VGA 640x480 60Hz, VGA 640x480 60Hz RGB, XGA 1024x768 60Hz or XGA 1024x768 60Hz RGB formats, allows modifying the PLL, A/D, and sync processor parameters to accommodate other video formats, allows selecting the capture resolution, and selecting other video acquisition characteristics. For the PIXCI® A110 model, the PIXCI® Video Setup is similar, but does not allow selecting RGB formats.
For the PIXCI® CL1, CL3SD, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, and D3XE models, fewer options are provided, as these frame grabbers are each customized to specifically support one camera, or a related group if cameras. For the PIXCI® CL2, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, and EL1DB models, which provide universal support for Camera Link cameras, fewer options are provided. For the PIXCI® E8CAM, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 models, which support SILICON VIDEO® cameras, fewer options are provided. For all of these, a different camera can be selected, if available, via PIXCI® Open/Close, Camera & Format.
The current video setup is automatically saved when access to the PIXCI® frame grabber is closed, and reloaded when the PIXCI® frame grabber is later opened. The PIXCI® Export Video Setup and PIXCI® Import Video Setup may be used to explicitly save or reload the current video setup, such as to choose amongst several favorite setups, or to export the current video setup to the XCLIB library.
The PIXCI® Status shows the PIXCI® frame grabber's current status, such as the state of the general purpose (formerly referred to as an external TTL) trigger input(s) and output(s), the number of elapsed video fields, the board's model, submodel or preset camera & format selection, as appropriate, and configured image memory size.
The PIXCI® Serial Terminal allows ''raw'' communication with a camera connected to the serial port on selected models of the PIXCI® frame grabber. For many cameras, XCAP includes more convenient, camera-specific ''smart'' controls, provided after a camera-specific frame grabber is opened, via the Capture - Adjustments.
The PIXCI® Connections provides, as appropriate for the specific model of PIXCI® frame grabber, a map of the board's connections, connectors, option jumpers, and adjustments.
The PIXCI® Camera Info provides a list of cameras and video formats supported by XCAP and various PIXCI® frame grabbers. The PIXCI® Camera Info also allows viewing a non-operational Capture - Adjustments window (i.e. the ''Control Panel'', which provides integrated control of both frame grabber and any supported camera).
The PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery (only under Windows) allows using XCAP, in conjunction with the ''XCAP Sourcery'' TWAIN driver, as a component of a ''smart'' TWAIN Source, allowing other applications to capture images from the PIXCI® frame grabber, while XCAP provides frame grabber controls, camera controls, and, optionally, image preprocessing.[15] The PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery should not be confused with TWAIN New Acquire; the former allows XCAP to provide image data to other, TWAIN compliant applications; the latter allows XCAP to accept image data from other TWAIN compliant sources. The TWAIN New Acquire should never be used to attempt to acquire image data from the PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery!
The PIXCI® Image-Pro Sourcery (only under Windows) allows using XCAP, in conjunction with the ''XCAP Sourcery'' Image-Pro driver, as a component of a ''smart'' video source, allowing Image-Pro to capture images from the PIXCI® frame grabber, while XCAP provides frame grabber, camera controls, and, optionally, image preprocessing.[15]
Each image buffer (sequence), or frame buffer (sequence), is displayed in an image viewer window, which is the focus of activity for examining, processing, or analyzing that image buffer (sequence). The image viewer window provides a menu bar with File, View, Examine, Modify, Measure, Draw, AOI, and Help features. The image viewer window associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffer(s) also provides a Capture feature.
The image viewer window's File allows saving, loading, or printing the image, shows information about the image's dimensions, pixel depth and color space, and allows closing the image viewer window.
The Load Image and Save Image allow saving or loading the image in a variety of file formats. The Load Image, unlike the Load New Image described above, loads an image file into the current image buffer, resizing and/or color converting to fit the image buffer's existing dimensions, pixel depth, and color space. The Load Image can also load images directly from an Internet URL.
For image viewer windows associated with an image buffer sequence, the Save Image Sequence and Load Image Sequence allow saving or loading multiple images of the sequence as a numbered sequence of image files, or as a single AVI, BigTIFF, FITS, PBM/PGM/PPM, or TIFF format image file with multiple images. Save Image can also save images directly to an FTP URL.
The E-Mail Image allows directly e-mailing the image, in a variety of file formats, from within XCAP.
The Print Image allows printing the image; either via the operating system's built-in image printing feature(s) which typically supports a wide variety of printers, or via EPIX® imaging drivers which support only the most popular printers, but providing precise control of print options.
The Image Attributes shows the image's (or image sequence's) dimensions, pixel depth, and color space.
The Duplicate Image and Duplicate Image Sequence allows creating a new image buffer and copying the current image, or creating a new sequence of image buffers and copying the current image sequence, respectively, in one step. It optionally allows copying the image's (or image sequence's) current appearance, as modified by the palette and graphics, instead of the underlying image (or image sequence).
The BlackBoard Image allows copying the image's pixel values into the Black Board.
The Close Viewer closes the window, but does not destroy the image (sequence). The Close & Dispose of Image closes the window and destroys the image (sequence). The image viewer window associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffer(s) does not provide a Close & Dispose of Image; an image viewer window is available whenever the PIXCI® frame grabber is open for use.
The image viewer window's View provides options governing the appearance of the displayed image.
The Shortcuts allows activating or deactivating a tool bar of icons providing shortcuts for accessing often used features, and is described under Image Viewer - View - Shortcuts.
The Status Bar allows activating or deactivating a small status bar with current information, and is described under Image Viewer - View - Status Bar.
The Menu Bar allows activating or deactivating the menu bar; when deactivated, clicking the mouse right-click button allows restoring the menu bar.
For image viewer windows associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's image frame buffer(s), the Adjustments allows setting common adjustments, as suitable for the model of the PIXCI® frame grabber in use, and is described under PIXCI® Image Viewer - Capture.
The Full Screen allows displaying the image in the full graphics display screen without the menu bar, centered with black border (if needed), and with little or no window ''frame'' around the image. The previous display mode can be restored via a mouse right-click.
The Always-On-Top allows forcing the image viewer window, and its subwindows, to always be ''above'' other windows; subject to the other windows' also requesting Always-On-Top, and the whims of the host operating system. This option is typically useful only when XCAP is being used in combination with other applications, such as in conjunction with the PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery or PIXCI® Image-Pro Sourcery feature. The Always-On-Top feature is only supported under Windows.
The Refresh forces the displayed image to be redrawn once; normally manual refresh is not needed, but occasionally, when the image was (partly) covered and uncovered by other window(s), the displayed image might ''forget'' to be updated.
For images composed of index pixels and palette, the Image's Palette allows manipulating the image's attached palette; for images of other types, the Image's Palette is not selectable. For all images, the Viewer's Palette allows manipulating a palette which is not attached to the image. Either can be used for contrast enhancement, adjustment of black level and gain, or, for monochrome images, false coloring. Either, or neither, of the palettes can be selected for use under Display.
For image sequences, the Sequence Play allows ''playing'' the sequence, image by image, at a selected rate.
The Cursor allows activating a cursor over the image, which may be positioned via coordinates, or by left clicking the mouse on an image feature.
The Display allows selecting how the image is displayed: (a) No resizing so there is a one to one relationship between an image pixel and a displayed graphics display pixel and is the quickest, although the entire image may not fit within the window and must therefore be panned and scrolled, (b) Resize by nearest neighbor which is relatively quick, or (c) Resize by bilinear interpolation which may produce better results for continuous tone images, but is slower. For the resize modes, the aspect ratio can also be modified. The Display allows selecting which palette, if any, is to be used during display and during file loads and saves. An option to display only even lines, or only odd image lines, allows avoiding interlace artifacts during display. For the image viewer window associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffer(s), the Display provides additional features, identical to the Live Options described below.
The Zoom, Pan, Scroll allows magnifying the displayed image, panning and scrolling to view different portions of the image under magnification. For image sequences, a specific image of the sequence can be selected for display. In addition to panning and scrolling via explicit coordinates and via scrollbars, holding the right mouse button and moving the mouse over the image also implements panning and scrolling. Optionally, the left or right mouse button can be used to increase magnification (i.e. zoom-in) or decrease magnification (i.e. zoom-out).
The Flip & Mirror allows flipping and mirroring the displayed image so that the top is displayed to the top, left, right, or bottom.
Each image buffer (sequence) may have several simultaneously active viewers, allowing, for example, viewing the same image buffer both magnified and unmagnified. The Launch 2nd Viewer creates a second image viewer window into the same image buffer (sequence), with the same features as the original image viewer window.
The image viewer window's Examine provides options to examine the image.
The Pixel Peek allows numeric display of the pixel values in the vicinity of the image cursor — within a single image, or across a sequence of images, or of a multi-image stack. The feature also graphically displays each pixel's value or trends.
The Pixel Peek & Poke allows numeric display and modification of individual pixel values. The Pixel Peek & Poke also allows precise, single pixel, image editing.
The Pixel Plot displays a two-dimensional graph of pixels values along a selected image line or column, of all image lines or columns, of an image pixel as it varies across an image sequence, of rows or columns as they vary across an image sequence, or of a multi-image stack. The recent trends of pixel values can also be shown, as an fading ''echo,'' to help visually evaluate the fluctuations of live video or the effects of camera adjustments. Features attached to the graph show specific pixel values and descriptive statistics such as lowest value, highest value, mean value, and standard deviation.
The Pixel Plot 3D displays the numeric values of pixels as as a three-dimensional graph — from a single image or from a multi-image ''stack'' — with the image X and Y coordinates composing two dimensions, and the pixel values composing the third dimension.
The Pixel Magnifier allows enlarging an area of the displayed image, with an effect similar to using a magnifying lens. Optionally, contrast and other enhancements can be applied to the magnified area.
The SMPTE VITC allows searching the image for valid SMPTE Vertical Interval Time Codes and displaying the decoded codes.
The image viewer window's Modify provides image processing operations which modify the image, modify each image (independently) in a sequence (typically named ''Sequence ...'') or modify one or more images in a sequence by combining data from across multiple images (typically named ''... Sequence ).''
The Patterns draws various test patterns in the image. The Sequence Patterns does the same on each image of a sequence.
The Set sets image pixels to a specified value. The Sequence Set does the same on each image of a sequence.
The Arithmetic provides pixel arithmetic, such as adding a constant value or multiplying by a constant value. The Sequence Arithmetic does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Arithmetic does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Binning provides averaging or integrating pixel values in ''bins'' of a checkerboard. The Sequence Binning does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Binning does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Contrast Modification allows modifying the image's contrast. The Sequence Contrast Modification does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Contrast Modification does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Convolution allows convolving the image with user-defined kernels. The Sequence Convolution does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Convolution does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Correlation Map allows correlating, or matching, a kernel image over a larger image, resulting in a profile image whose intensity, at each location, varies in proportion to the degree of match at that location. The Sequence Correlation Map does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Correlation Map does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Edge Detection provides Kirsch, Sobel, and other standard edge detectors. The Sequence Edge Detection does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Edge Detection does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The FFT provides Fast Fourier Transforms and Discrete Fourier Transforms. The Sequence FFT does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst FFT does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The HSB Tweak provides hue, saturation, and brightness adjustments within the HSB color space. While Arithmetic and other operations can optionally use the HSB color space to, for example, multiply all saturation values by a constant, the HSB Tweak allows adjusting selected portions of the HSB space, such as adjusting the brightness of red pixels with high saturation. The Sequence HSB Tweak does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst HSB Tweak does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Interlace & Flicker provides line and pixel shuffling operations. The Sequence Interlace & Flicker does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Interlace & Flicker does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Morphology provides morphological operations with user-defined kernels. The Sequence Morphology does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Morphology does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Noise Generator allows adding pseudo-random noise with uniform and other distributions to an image. The Sequence Noise Generator does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Noise Generator does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Normalization provides intensity normalizations based upon a single image. The Sequence Normalization does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Normalization does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Rotation & Shift provides image rotations and shifts. The Sequence Rotation & Shift does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Rotation & Shift does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Spatial Filtering provides low pass, high pass, and other filters. The Sequence Spatial Filtering does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Spatial Filtering does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Spatial Normalization provides spatial normalizations based upon a single image. The Sequence Spatial Normalization does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Spatial Normalization does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Threshold allows thresholding an image against user-defined, fixed, boundary values. The Sequence Threshold does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Threshold does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Threshold Adaptive allows thresholding an image against boundary values that are automatically adjusted. The Sequence Threshold Adaptive does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Threshold Adaptive does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Warping allows ''rubber-sheet'' transformations governed by a list of initial and final fiducial locations, governed by pincushion/barrel lens distortion, or specified by mathematical expressions. The Sequence Warping does the same on each image of a sequence. The Src+Dst Warping does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Copy & Resize allows copying and resizing an image from one image buffer to another. The Sequence Copy & Resize does the same on each image of a sequence.
The Pair Arithmetic provides pixel arithmetic, such as summation, between one image buffer and another. The Src+Dst Arithmetic does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Pair Normalization allows normalizing various intensity based attributes of an image, based upon a second reference, or background, image. The Src+Dst Pair Normalization does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Triplet Normalization allows normalizing various intensity based attributes of an image, based upon two other reference, or background, images. The Src+Dst Triplet Normalization does the same with distinct source and destination images.
The Average Sequence allows forming the average or sum of an image sequence.
The Difference Sequence allows forming the difference of each pair of images of an image sequence.
The Tile Sequence allows forming a grid of reduced images from an image sequence.
For image copy and other image processing operations utilizing a distinct source and destination, the image viewer window from which the operation is selected is always the modified destination; an image (or sequence) associated with a different image viewer window can be selected as the unmodified source.
The image viewer window's Measure provides features for image measurement and analysis, including user-defined coordinate systems and mapping intensities into user-defined units.
The Intensity Calibration allows creating a mapping (correspondence) from monochrome image pixel values into user-defined units, for example from grey level into brightness, or grey level into density of material.
The Spatial Calibration allows creating a mapping (correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system. The H,V coordinates may be translated, scaled, and/or rotated with respect to X,Y coordinates.
The Histogram computes and displays a graph of an image's histogram.
The Histogram Pair computes and displays a graph of the histogram of difference of a pair of images.
The Mass & Moments computes and displays various moments of an image.
The Line Profile displays a two-dimensional graph of pixels values along an arbitrary oriented line, arc, polyline, Bezier, and other curves.
The Radial Mass Plot displays a two-dimensional graph of the sum of pixel values versus the pixels' distance from an origin.
The Ruler overlays a ruler on the image, with user-defined length, width, and tick marks, all based on the H,V coordinate system. Multiple rulers can be overlaid on each image.
The Protractor overlays a protractor on the image, with user-defined radius, arc, and tick marks, all based on the H,V coordinate system. Multiple protractors can be overlaid on each image.
The Cartesian Reticle overlays a Cartesian coordinate reticle on the image, based on the H,V coordinate system. Multiple Cartesian reticles can be overlaid on each image.
The Polar Reticle overlays a polar coordinate reticle on the image, based on the H,V coordinate system. Multiple polar reticles can be overlaid on each image.
The Distance & Angle Crosshairs provides spatial calibration and measurement of absolute position, relative position, length and angles. While these capabilities are also available elsewhere in Image Viewer - Measure and Image Viewer - Draw, the Distance & Angle Crosshairs collects chosen features to provide a single window with the equivalent of a so-called ''Video Crosshair Overlay & Measurement'' system.
The Shape Analysis provides descriptive statistics about the shape of elliptical, rectangular, or polygonal regions.
The Blob Analysis identifies image blobs, based upon thresholding the image into foreground and background, and provides descriptive statistics about the blobs found.
The Particle Tracking provides identification and tracking of particles (blobs) over a sequence of images. Individual particles are detected based upon a thresholded (bi-level) image. In one method, multiple image occurrences of a common particle are identified across a sequence of images by position extrapolation and verification. In a second method, vectors of particles that are close together are compared and expected to yield consistent magnitude and direction. In a third method, which requires the fewest setup parameters, common particles are grouped by nearest neighbor. For any method, the particle's trajectories are displayed and reported.
The SubPixel Edger overlays a line or curve tool on the image, analyzes the pixel values under the line or curve finding edges or lines to subpixel accuracy, and displays the position of the edges or lines both graphically, on the image, and numerically.
The Ellipse Fitter overlays an elliptical pattern of subpixel edger tools on the image, and computes a best-fit elliptical curve from the edges found.
The Correlation Finder correlates, or matches, a kernel image over a larger image, showing the coordinates of, and displaying a box around, the best match(es).
The image viewer window's Draw provides features for drawing graphics and text over the image. One or more of: line, circle with aspect ratio correction, rotated rectangle, rotated ellipse, arc of circle with aspect ratio correction, arc of rotated ellipse, annulus, arc of annulus, rectangular frame, list of points, polygon, polyline (connected line segments not closed into a polygon), Bezier curve, or Bezier region (Bezier curve closed to form region), rotated text, and arrow may be overlaid over the image (non destructive) or written into the image. The individual menu items such as Text, Line, Rectangle, etc. allow quick drawing of graphics or text. The Graphic Manager permits drawing the same graphics or text, but in addition manages a list of graphic or text objects, including loading and saving of the graphic or text objects.
The Image Overlay feature allows overlaying a second image, containing graphics on a ''transparent'' background, over the current image.
The Paint Brush feature allows interactive ''painting'' onto the image with selectable color, patterns, and ''brush'' shapes.
The Paint Fill feature allows filling (flooding) an image region with ''paint'' of selectable color and patterns, using specified pixel values as the boundary terminating the ''filling''.
The image viewer window's Aoi allows defining areas of interest (AOI) and regions of interest (ROI) upon which future image processing, measurement, analysis, print, load, and save features will operate. As used in XCAP, an ''AOI'' is a rectangular area with sides parallel to the image axis, while an ''ROI'' is of arbitrary shape, such as an ellipse or rectangle which may be rotated with respect to the image axis, or an arbitrary path or polygon. The image print, load, save, and many other features only allow use of an AOI; selected image processing, measurement, analysis and other features also allow use of an ROI.
The Set AOI defines the default area of interest and color space upon which future image processing, printing, load, and save features will operate.
The Set ROI defines the default region of interest and color space upon which future image measurement, analysis, and other selected features which accept an ROI will operate.
The Set Full Image quickly sets the default area of interest and region of interest to the image's full dimensions, and the default color space to the image buffer's natural color space, without entering the Set AOI or Set ROI window.
The AOI/ROI Manager maintains a list of often used areas of interest (AOI) and regions of interest (ROI).
Within each of the image processing, measurement, analysis, print, load, and save features a different AOI (or ROI, if applicable) can be selected, temporarily overriding the default AOI (or ROI). Within the feature, the new AOI (or ROI) can be specified numerically or interactively drawn, or an AOI (ROI) previously defined within the AOI/ROI Manager can be selected.
A tool bar of icons provides shortcuts for accessing often used features of The Image Viewer Window. Selected shortcuts can also be activated by key clicks when the tool bar window has the ''input focus'' (i.e. that window's title bar is highlighted). The shortcuts provided are:
The shortcuts may either be attached and part of The Image Viewer Window, or may be detached into its own window, as set by Display under Image Viewer - View.
A status bar provides information about the image resolution, current cursor coordinates, current buffer of a sequence, and other similar information. The information to be shown can be selected by Display under Image Viewer - View.
The image viewer window associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's image frame buffer(s) has Capture which provides for capturing images from the PIXCI® frame grabber and other features associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber. Any additional image viewer windows created by Launch 2nd Viewer do not provide Capture, but only view, modify, examine, and/or draw the frame buffers.
The Snap captures and displays a single image. The Live continuously captures and displays images; the UnLive terminates the Live mode, displaying the last captured image.
The First Buffer switches to the first buffer of the frame buffer sequence, the Last Buffer switches to the last buffer of the frame buffer sequence, the Next Buffer switches to the next buffer of the frame buffer sequence, and the Previous Buffer switches to the previous buffer of the frame buffer sequence.
The Adjustments allows setting common adjustments, as suitable for the model of the PIXCI® frame grabber in use. For the PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, and SV5L models, the Adjustments allows selecting the video input connection (N/A for PIXCI® SV5B) and adjusting the gain, black level, hue, and saturation.
For the PIXCI® SV7 model, the Adjustments allows selecting AGC and adjusting the gain, black level, hue, and saturation.
For the PIXCI® SV8 model, the Adjustments allows selecting AGC and adjusting the gain, black level, hue, saturation, and sharpness.
For the PIXCI® A110 and A310 models, the Adjustments allows adjusting the analog gain and offset, and the digital gain and offset. Less frequently used, and more esoteric, adjustments may be found under PIXCI® Video Setup, described above. For the PIXCI® CL1, CL3SD, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, and D3XE models, the Adjustments provide camera specific controls.
For the PIXCI® CL2, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, and EL1DB models, the Adjustments provide camera specific controls. Or, for ''Generic Camera Link'' mode, the Adjustments allow configuring the PIXCI® frame grabber's video resolution, trigger modes, bit depth, color space, etc. so as to be consistent with the camera.
For the PIXCI® E8CAM, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 models, the Adjustments provide camera specific controls.
The Adjustments also provide duplicate features to Snap, Live, UnLive, select the frame buffer, and set the video window size. A duplicate menu item to access Adjustments is provided under Image Viewer - View.
The Shortcuts activates or deactivates the PIXCI® Image Viewer - Capture - Shortcuts, described below. A duplicate menu item to access Shortcuts is provided under Image Viewer - View.
The GIO Event Capture provides single or sequence image capture, each image triggered in conjunction with the frame grabber's general purpose (formerly referred to as an external TTL) input and output signals.
The Sequence Capture features allow capturing a timed sequence of images. The Sequence Capture features may be started by an event (trigger), run continuously until stopped by an event, or each individual image may be captured in response to an event. Events include mouse clicks, time of day, and the frame grabber's general purpose (formerly referred to as external TTL) inputs; when used with general purpose input events the Sequence Capture differs from GIO Event Capture in that the latter provides more options and higher accuracy and repeatability for the manipulation of the general purpose inputs and outputs in response to video timing. A time stamp feature allows recording the time that each image was captured, and either overlaying the time nondestructively or permanently marking the image with the time.
A variety of Sequence Capture features provide tradeoffs between capture rate vs. convenience vs. total number of images captured.
The Waterfall Display displays a chosen line of the frame buffer, in a ''waterfall'' fashion, updating the screen once per field, or as often as the host computer's speed allows. This feature is primarily intended for adjusting line scan type cameras. The waterfall display is intended only for viewing; it can't be analyzed, and can be saved only as a side effect of Screen Capture.
The Video to StreamStor (only under Windows) allows recording and playing video to and from Boulder Instruments StreamStor High-Speed Disk Recorders, allowing recording at video rate with almost all cameras and resolutions. The Video to StreamStor is provided only in the XCAP-Plus version.
The RGB Merge allows interpreting and viewing three monochromatic frame buffers as a single color (e.g. RGB) image, with adjustments for registration and coloring.
The Quad Pixel Merge allows interpreting and viewing four monochromatic frame buffers, each one captured after shifting the image sensor by ½ pixel horizontally and vertically, as a single high resolution image.
The Frame Average allows performing recursive, continuous, averaging of live video frames (or fields) and viewing the live result.
The Live Options combines the View - Display options, above, with additional choices governing Live mode. During Live mode, the PIXCI® frame grabber can: (a) Capture continuously into the specified frame buffer, however the image shown on the graphics display may contain portions from different video frames, (b) Snap, display on the graphics display, and repeat, however the image capture and display rate will be slower, or (c) Alternate capturing into the specified frame buffer and the last frame buffer (dual buffering). On host computers with insufficient PCI bandwidth to simultaneously capture into host computer memory and display from host computer memory to the graphics display, option (b) reduces the required bandwidth by approximately half.
The Lens Control - Birger EF232 allows controlling the aperture and focus of a compatible lens via a Birger EF232 Lens Mount. Both manual aperture and focus control, through the GUI, as well as automatic aperture and focus control, in response to the image intensity and sharpness, are provided.
A tool bar of icons provides shortcuts for accessing often used features of the PIXCI® frame grabber, and is an extension of the Image Viewer - View - Shortcuts described above. Selected shortcuts can also be activated by key clicks when the tool bar window has the ''input focus'' (i.e. that window's title bar is highlighted). The shortcuts provided are:
The shortcuts may either be attached and part of The Image Viewer Window, or may be detached into its own window, as set by Display under Image Viewer - View.
Other useful features of XCAP are associated with many, or all, of its windows.
Most windows of XCAP provide fields for numeric entry. Typically, to the right of the numeric entry field are two up/down or left/right buttons. Left clicking a button allows incrementing or decrementing the numeric value. Left clicking within a button's shaded area yields larger increment or decrement values, depending on the distance from the opposite button.
Right clicking the numeric field, either button, or the area between buttons, yields an options menu. The options menu typically provides the following:
Some numeric fields may have an associated, explicit, ''slider'' control in addition to the implicit ScrollPad. Right clicking the slider allows enlarging a portion of the slider's range for finer control.
Various windows of XCAP provide fields for entry of text, or file and path names. Right clicking the field yields an options menu. The options menu typically provides the following:
Various windows of XCAP provide fields for entry of pixel colors. Typically, the color can be entered numerically, and a small color ''swatch'' appears next to the color entry field, showing the selected color. Right clicking the swatch activates a color cylinder from which new colors may be selected by mouse clicks.
Various windows of XCAP provide a drop-down list selection field. Right clicking the selection field yields an options menu which in turn provides a Search feature. The Search allows convenient searching through a long list of selections. Selected drop-down list selection fields may have an explicit, adjacent, Search button to access the same service.
For drop-down list selection fields used to select a serial ''COM'' port (for Windows) or ''ttyS'' device (for Linux), right clicking the selection field yields an options menu which in turn provides a Refresh feature which updates the list based on the operating system's currently installed ports or devices.
Editing of numeric and text fields follows standard conventions. In brief, mouse click once or use left/right arrow keys to position the caret - characters are inserted at the caret as typed. Double mouse click to highlight all text or single click and drag to highlight a portion of text - a Delete or Backspace removes the highlighted text, a character replaces the highlighted text, and the left/right arrow keys cancel the highlight mode.
Hovering the mouse over a numeric, text, list selection, checkbox, radio button, button, or other control will cause the associated Tool Tip, if any, to pop-up; the Tool Tip will automatically disappear. The Tool Tip can also be displayed by right-clicking on the control for its options menu, which in turn provides a Tool Tip feature; the Tool Tip must be explicitly closed. The Big Field, Expression, and Search features also display the Tool Tip.
The user interface can be navigated without a mouse by using Tab and Shift-Tab to shift input focus, arrow keys and PgUp/PgDn to scroll, arrow keys to select tabs and list items, Enter to select choices and push buttons, and Alt-Tab (under Windows) or Ctrl-Alt-Tab (under Linux) to select a Window.
Main Window
File Load New Image Load New Image Sequence AVI BigTIFF BMP FITS JPEG/JFIF TIFF Portable Map VIF (Video Frame Files - Video to Disk) Multimedia Image File Info TWAIN Select Source TWAIN New Acquire TWAIN Source Info Window List -- List of current windows Exit
Images New Image -- List of current images
Scripts Script Record Script Play Script Remote Control Script Edit Script Tools Load Tool Bar Freeze Display Thaw & Refresh Display
Utility Black Board Message Log Audio Clip (Windows only) RS-232 Terminal Screen Capture I/O Port Peek & Poke (Windows 95, 98, ME only) Program Setup Windows Info (Windows only) Linux Info (Linux only) Window Style Java Info Devices Birger EF232 Directed Perception Pan-Tilt Unit EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 10C-CL EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 10M-CL EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 20C-CL EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 20M-CL EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL Fujinon CCTV Lens Illumination Technologies 3900 Sagebrush Pan-Tilt Gimbal Volpi intralux dc-1100
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Multiple Devices Camera & Format Driver Assistant Advanced Board Info PIXCI® Video Setup Format (dependent on frame grabber) Resolution Sync Custom
PIXCI® Export Video Setup PIXCI® Import Video Setup PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery (Windows only) PIXCI® Image-Pro Sourcery (Windows only) PIXCI® Status PIXCI® Serial Terminal PIXCI® Connections PIXCI® Camera Info
Help About License XCAP Release Notes XCAP Reference Manual PCI Configuration Tips Getting Started w. XCAP (via Web) for PIXCI® A110 for PIXCI® A310 for PIXCI® CL1 ... for SILICON VIDEO® 10M6 for SILICON VIDEO® 10C6 ...
PIXCI® Image Viewer Window
File Save Image BigTIFF BMP FITS JPEG/JFIF Portable Map TIFF X/Y Binary X/Y ASCII
Load Image TIFF BigTIFF JPEG/JFIF BMP FITS Portable Map X/Y Binary X/Y ASCII
Save Image Sequence One AVI/DIB w. Sequence One AVI/MJPG w. Sequence One BigTIFF w. Sequence One FITS w. Sequence One Portable Map w. Sequence One TIFF w. Sequence One X/Y Binary w. Sequence One X/Y ASCII w. Sequence Sequence of BigTIFF Sequence of BMP Sequence of FITS Sequence of JPEG/JFIF Sequence of TIFF Sequence of Portable Map Sequence of X/Y Binary Sequence of X/Y ASCII
Load Image Sequence One AVI w. Sequence One BigTIFF w. Sequence One FITS w. Sequence One TIFF w. Sequence One Portable Map w. Sequence One X/Y Binary w. Sequence One X/Y ASCII w. Sequence Sequence of BigTIFF Sequence of BMP Sequence of FITS Sequence of JPEG/JFIF Sequence of TIFF Sequence of Portable Map Sequence of X/Y Binary Sequence of X/Y ASCII
E-Mail Image Save Frame Buffer Memory Load Frame Buffer Memory Print Image Duplicate Image Duplicate Image Sequence BlackBoard Image Image Attributes Close Viewer
View Shortcuts Adjustments Status Bar Menu Bar Full Screen Always-On-Top Refresh Image's Palette Viewer's Palette Black & Gain Numerically Band Coloring Bit Slice Bit Transposition White Balance
Sequence Play Sequence Thumbnails Cursor Display Zoom, Pan, Scroll Flip & Mirror Launch 2nd Viewer
Examine Pixel Peek Peek X/Y Peek X/B Peek Y/B Pixel Peek & Poke Pixel Plot Plot Row Plot Column Plot Buffer Plot All Rows
Pixel Plot 3D Pixel Magnifier SMPTE VITC
Modify Patterns [Sequence Patterns] Set [Sequence Set] Arithmetic [Sequence Arithmetic] [Src+Dst Arithmetic] Complement Pixels Bit Wise Logical AND Pixels w. Mask Bit Wise Logical XOR Pixels w. Mask Bit Wise Logical OR Pixels w. Mask Bit Shift Left Bit Shift Right Bit Rotate Left Bit Rotate Right Bit Gray Code Bit Gray Decode Bit Reverse Signed Bias to/from 2's Complement Add Constant with Pixels Multiply Constant with Pixels Add Uniform Random Dither to Pixels Add Gaussian Random Dither to Pixels Halftone, Threshold & Carry Halftone, Dot Construction Gamma Correction Pixie Minimum Pixie Maximum Pixie Mean Pixie Copy
Binning [Sequence Binning] [Src_Dst Binning] Average Integrate
Contrast Modification [Sequence Contrast Modification] [Src+Dst Contrast Modification] Stretch Contrast, Pixel Value Endpoints Stretch Contrast, Histogram Percentile Endpoints Invert Contrast Histogram Modification
Convolution [Sequence Convolution] [Src+Dst Convolution] Convolve: Convolve(PixelValue) Convolve: Abs(Convolve(PixelValue)) Convolve: PixelValue Convolve(PixelValue) Convolve: PixelValue Abs(Convolve(PixelValue))
Correlation Map [Sequence Correlation Map] [Src+Dst Correlation Map] Edge Detection [Sequence Edge Detection] [Src+Dst Edge Detection] Edge Magnitude: Laplacian Edge Magnitude: Vertical Edge Magnitude: Horizontal Edge Magnitude: Sobel Edge Magnitude: Kirsch Edge Magnitude: Roberts Edge Gradient: Log Sobel Edge Gradient: Log Sobel Absolute Edge Gradient: Log Kirsch Edge Gradient: Log Roberts Edge Gradient: Thin, Minimal Effect Edge Gradient: Thin, Maximal Effect
FFT [Sequence FFT] [Src+Dst FFT] FFT to Log Magnitude Root Filter Gaussian Filter Inverse Gaussian Filter
HSB Tweak Interlace & Flicker [Sequence Interlace & Flicker] [Src+Dst Interlace & Flicker] Shuffle Line Order to Field Order Shuffle Field Order to Line Order Transpose Line Pairs Transpose Column Pairs Shuffle Line Pairs to Pixel Pairs Shuffle Pixel Pairs to Line Pairs Shuffle Column Order to Even-Odd Halves Shuffle Even-Odd Halves to Column Order Shuffle Column Order to N Section Order Shuffle N Section Order to Column Order Deflicker: Average Line Pairs Deflicker: Filter Singularity Shift Half-Line Down Shift Half-Line Up Tap Correction: User Defined f(X,Y)
Morphology [Sequence Morphology] [Src+Dst Morphology] Erode Dilate Open Close Boundary Hit Miss Medial Axis Thin Skeleton Thin
Noise Generator [Sequence Noise Generator] [Src+Dst Noise Generator] Uniform Noise Gaussian Noise Rayleigh Noise Negative Exponential Noise Salt & Pepper Noise
Normalization [Sequence Normalization] [Src+Dst Normalization] Normalize Intensity, Blobs & Background Normalize Row Mean Normalize Column Mean
Rotation & Shift [Sequence Rotation & Shift] [Src+Dst Rotation & Shift] X, Y Shift Flip Skew Left/Right Skew Up/Down Rotate Rotate w. Offset
Spatial Filtering [Sequence Spatial Filtering] [Src+Dst Spatial Filtering] Low Pass Filter Sharpen Filter Median Filter Rank Low (Erode) Filter Rank High (Dilate) Filter Edge Enhance: Sobel Edge Enhance: Sobel Absolute Edge Enhance: Kirsch Edge Enhance: Roberts Horizontal Sharpen Filter Vertical Sharpen Filter Embossed Edges Emboss Enhance
Spatial Normalization [Sequence Spatial Normalization] [Src+Dst Spatial Normalization] Shift Center of Mass to Center
Threshold [Sequence Threshold] [Src+Dst Threshold] Threshold Adaptive [Sequence Threshold Adaptive] [Src+Dst Threshold Adaptive] Warping [Sequence Warping] [Src+Dst Warping] Warp: Src => Dst Fiducials Warp: Pincushion Distortion Warp: Barrel Distortion Warp: Pincushion Distortion, 1-D Warp: Barrel Distortion, 1-D Warp: Fisheye Lens Distortion Warp: Fisheye Lens Correction Warp: User Defined f(X,Y) Copy & Resize [Sequence Copy & Resize] Copy Copy & Resize Copy & Flip Copy & Overlay Copy & Retype Copy & Reorder Copy & Tile Pair Arithmetic [Sequence Pair Arithmetic] [Src+Dst Pair Arithmetic] Add: Dst+Src Modulo PixelSize Add: Min(Dst+Src, MaxPixValue) Subtract: (MaxPixValue+(Dst Src))/2 Subtract: (MaxPixValue+(Src Dst))/2 Subtract: (Dst Src)Modulo PixelSize Subtract: (Src Dst)Modulo PixelSize Subtract: (Src Dst)Modulo PixelSize Subtract: Max(Dst Src, 0) Subtract: Max(Src Dst, 0) Subtract: Abs(Dst Src) Bit Wise AND: Dst & Src Bit Wise XOR: Dst ^ Src Bit Wise OR: Dst | Src Average: (Src+Dst)/2 Product: (c0*Src+c1)*(c2*Dst+c3)/c4 Product: (c0*Dst+c1)/(c2*Src+c3) Ratio: (c0*Dst+c1)/(c2*Src+c3) User-Defined f(PixA, PixB)
Pair Normalization [Sequence Pair Normalization] [Src+Dst Pair Normalization] Contrast Modify & Match Background Correction, Subtractive Background Correction, Ratio Spot Mask Correction
Triplet Normalization [Sequence Triplet Normalization] [Src+Dst Triplet Normalization] Gain & Offset Normalization: MeanSrcB*(Dst-SrcA)/(SrcB-SrcA) Gain & Offset Normalization: MaxSrcB*(Dst-SrcA)/(SrcB-SrcA) Gain & Offset Normalization: MinSrcB*(Dst-SrcA)/(SrcB-SrcA)
Average Sequence Average Sequence Integrate Sequence Pixel Mean of Sequence Pixel Std. Dev. of Sequence Pixel Variance of Sequence Difference Sequence Tile Sequence
Measure Intensity Calibration Spatial Calibration Histogram Histogram Pair Mass & Moments Center of Mass Center of Mass, Binary Moments
Line Profile Radial Mass Plot Ruler Protractor Cartesian Reticle Polar Reticle Distance & Angle Crosshairs Shape Analysis Blob Analysis Particle Tracking SubPixel Edger Ellipse Fitter Correlation Finder
Draw Arrow Text Point Points Bezier Curve Circle Circle Arc Ellipse Ellipse Arc Line Parallel Lines Path Curve Polyline Rectangle Window Annulus Annulus Arc Bezier Region Elliptical Annulus Elliptical Annulus Arc Rectangle Array Path Enclosed Polygon Rectangular Frame Graphic Manager Image Overlay Paint Brush Paint Fill
AOI Set AOI Set ROI Set Full Image AOI/ROI Manager
Capture Adjustments Shortcuts Snap Live UnLive First Buffer Last Buffer Next Buffer Previous Buffer Sequence Capture Video to Frame Buffers - Single Sequence Video to Frame Buffers - Single Sequence w. Event Start Video to Frame Buffers - Single Sequence w. Event per Image Video to Frame Buffers - Continuous Sequence Video to Frame Buffers - Continuous Sequence w. Event Stop Video to Frame Buffers - Continuous Sequence w. Event per Image Video to Virtual Memory - Single Sequence Video to Virtual Memory - Single Sequence w. Event Start Video to Virtual Memory - Single Sequence w. Event per Image Video to Virtual Memory - Continuous Sequence Video to Virtual Memory - Continuous Sequence w. Event Stop Video to Virtual Memory - Continuous Sequence w. Event per Image Video to Disk File - Single Sequence Video to Disk File - Single Sequence w. Event Start Video to Disk File - Single Sequence w. Event per Image Video to Disk File - Continuous Sequence Video to Disk File - Continuous Sequence w. Event Stop Video to Disk File - Continuous Sequence w. Event per Image Video to Image Files - Single Sequence Video to Image Files - Single Sequence w. Event Start Video to Image Files - Single Sequence w. Event per Image Video to Image Files - Continuous Sequence Video to Image Files - Continuous Sequence w. Event Stop Video to Image Files - Continuous Sequence w. Event per Image Video to StreamStor (Windows only) GIO Event Capture
Waterfall Display Video to Disk RGB Merge Quad Pixel Merge Frame Average Lens Control Birger EF232 Live Options
Help Vis-a-Vis PIXCI® --- User's Manual (via Web) (for specific PIXCIXCAP in use) SILICON VIDEO® --- User's Manual (via Web) (for specific SILICON VIDEOXCAP in use, if any)
Optionally, the Main Window and the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window's may be combined (see Utilities - Program Setup) with the following features of the Main Window added to the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window:
File Window List -- List of current windows Image List -- List of current images Exit Utility Message Log Program Setup Windows Info (Windows only) Linux Info (Linux only) Window Style Java Info
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery (Windows only) PIXCI® Image-Pro Sourcery (Windows only) PIXCI® Connections PIXCI® Video Setup PIXCI® Serial Terminal
Help XCAP Release Notes XCAP Reference Manual PCI Configuration Tips License About
Optionally, if XCAP is intended to be used solely in conjunction with a TWAIN compliant application or with Image-Pro, many of the menu features of the Main Window and the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window may be removed so as to provide a simplified appearance (see Utilities - Program Setup). The same option also removes several PIXCI® Image Viewer - Capture - Shortcuts and adds shortcuts duplicating features of the PIXCI® - TWAIN Sourcery and Image-Pro Sourcery.
Feature | XCAP-Plus | XCAP-Std | XCAP-Ltd | XCAP-Lite | XCAP-Viewer |
(A) | (A) | (A) | (A) | (A) | |
File - | |||||
- Load New Image | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (C) | Yes (C) |
- Load New Image Sequence | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (C) | Yes (C) |
- Image File Info | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- TWAIN Select Source (Win) | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- TWAIN New Acquire (Win) | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
Images - | |||||
- New Image (Workspace) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
Scripts - | |||||
- Record | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Play | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Remote Control | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Load Tool Bar | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
Utility - | |||||
- Black Board | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Message Log | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Audio Clip (Win) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- RS-232 Terminal | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Screen Capture | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- I/O Port Peek & Poke (W95) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
Devices - | |||||
- Birger EF232 | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Directed Perception Pan-Tilt Unit | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 10C-CL | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 10M-CL | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 20C-CL | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 20M-CL | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Fujinon CCTV Lens | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Illumination Technologies 3900 | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Sagebrush Pan-Tilt Gimbal | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Volpi intralux dc-1100 | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
PIXCI® - | |||||
- Open/Close - | |||||
- Single Board | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Multiple Identical Boards | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Multiple Different Boards | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Frame Buffer Memory Limit - | |||||
w. PIXCI® CL3SD | None (E) | None (E) | None (E) | None | N/A |
w. PCI 32 bit | None (E) | None (E) | 4 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. PCI 64 bit | None (E) | None (E) | 4 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. PCI Express & 32 bit O.S. | None (E) | None (E) | 4 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. PCI Express & 64 bit O.S. | None (E) | None (E) | 8 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. ExpressCard/54 & 32 bit O.S. | None (E) | None (E) | 4 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. ExpressCard/54 & 64 bit O.S. | None (E) | None (E) | 8 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. mini PCIe & 32 bit O.S. | None (E) | None (E) | 4 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. mini PCIe & 64 bit O.S. | None (E) | None (E) | 8 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. M.2 & 32 bit O.S. | None (E) | None (E) | 4 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
w. M.2 & 64 bit O.S. | None (E) | None (E) | 8 GiByte (E) | 256 MiByte(E) | N/A |
- Driver Assistant/Wizard | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Video Setup | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Export Video Setup | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Import Video Setup | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- TWAIN Sourcery (Win) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Image-Pro Sourcery (Win) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Status | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Serial Terminal | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Connections Info | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Camera Info | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Camera Specific Controls | Yes (F) | Yes (F) | Yes (F) | Yes (F) | No |
Help - | |||||
- XCAP Release Notes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- XCAP Reference Manual | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- PCI Configuration Tips | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Getting Started w. XCAP (via Web) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
File - | |||||
- Save Image | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (C) | No |
w. multi-thread compression | Yes | Yes | No | No | No | ||||
- Save Image Sequence | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (C) | No |
w. multi-thread compression | Yes | Yes | No | No | No | ||||
- Load Image | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (C) | Yes (C) |
- Load Image Sequence | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (C) | Yes (C) |
- E-Mail Image | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Print Image | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (R) | No |
- Duplicate Image | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Duplicate Image Sequence | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- BlackBoard Image | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
View - | |||||
- Full Screen | Yes (W) | Yes (W) | Yes (W) | Yes (W) | Yes (W) |
- Frame-Less Full Screen | Yes (W) | Yes (W) | Yes (W) | No | No |
- Palette | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (G) | Yes (G) |
- Sequence Play | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Sequence Thumbnails | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Cursor | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Zoom, Pan, Scroll | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Flip & Mirror | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Multi-thread/CPU rendering | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Launch 2nd Viewer | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
Examine - | |||||
- Pixel Peek X vs Y | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (H) |
- Pixel Peek X vs B | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (H) |
- Pixel Peek B vs Y | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (H) |
- Pixel Peek & Poke | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Pixel Plot Row | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (I)(Y) | Yes (I)(Y) |
- Pixel Plot Column | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (I)(Y) | Yes (I)(Y) |
- Pixel Plot Pixel × B | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (I)(Y) | Yes (I)(Y) |
- Pixel Plot Rows × Y | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Pixel Plot Rows × B | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Pixel Plot Cols × X | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Pixel Plot Cols × B | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Pixel Plot 3D | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (S) | Yes (S) |
- Pixel Magnifier | Yes | Yes | Yes (Z) | No | No |
- SMPTE VITC | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
Modify - | |||||
- Patterns | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Set | Yes | Yes | Yes (J) | Yes (J) | Yes (J) |
- Arithmetic | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Binning | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Contrast Modification | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Convolution | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Correlation Map | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Edge Detection | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- FFT | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- HSB Tweak | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Interlace & Flicker | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Morphology | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Noise Generator | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Normalization | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Rotation & Shift | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Spatial Filtering | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Spatial Normalization | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Threshold | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Threshold Adaptive | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Warping | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Copy & Resize | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Pair Arithmetic | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Pair Normalization | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Triplet Normalization | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Average Sequence | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Difference Sequence | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Tile Sequence | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
Measure - | |||||
- Intensity Calibration | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Spatial Calibration | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Histogram | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Histogram Pair | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Mass & Moments | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Line Profile | Yes | Yes | Yes (K,L) | Yes (I,K,L) | Yes (I,K,L) |
- Radial Mass Plot | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Ruler | Yes | Yes | Yes (K) | Yes (K) | Yes (K) |
- Protractor | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Cartesian Reticle | Yes | Yes | Yes (K) | Yes (K) | Yes (K) |
- Polar Reticle | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Dist. & Angle Crosshairs | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Shape Analysis | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Blob Analysis | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Particle Tracking | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- SubPixel Edger | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Ellipse Fitter | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Correlation Finder | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
Draw - | |||||
- Arrow | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Text | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Point | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Points | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Bezier Curve | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Circle | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Circle Arc | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Diamond | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Ellipse | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Ellipse Arc | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Line | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Parallel Lines | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Path Curve | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Polyline | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Rectangle | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Window | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes |
- Annulus | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Annulus Arc | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Bezier Region | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Elliptical Annulus | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Elliptical Annulus Arc | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Rectangle Array | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Path Enclosed | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Polygon | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Rectangular Frame | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Graphic Manager | Yes | Yes | Yes (B) | Yes (B) | Yes (B) |
- Paint Brush | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Paint Fill | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Image Overlay | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
Capture - | |||||
- Snap (Video) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Live (Video) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Frame Date&Time Stamp | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- First Buffer | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Next Buffer | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | No |
- Previous Buffer | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | No |
- Last Buffer | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | Yes (M) | No |
- Adjustments - | |||||
- Snap/Live Buffer Number | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Resolution (video window) | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- Camera Specific Controls | Yes (F) | Yes (F) | Yes (F) | Yes (F) | No |
- Color & White Balance | Yes (N) | Yes (N) | Yes (N) | Yes (N) | No |
- SILICON VIDEO(R) AWB | Yes (N) | Yes (N) | Yes (N) | Yes (N) | No |
- Auto Gain/Exposure Control | Yes (O) | Yes (O) | Yes (O) | No (O) | No |
- SILICON VIDEO(R) AGC/AEC | Yes (O) | Yes (O) | Yes (O) | Yes (O) | No |
- Pixel Normalization (FFC) | Yes (V) | Yes (V) | Yes (V) | Yes (V) | No |
- Auto Contrast Enhancement | Yes (X) | Yes (X) | Yes (X) | No (X) | No | |
- Manual Contrast Enhancement | Yes (X) | Yes (X) | Yes (X) | Yes (X) | No | |
- Load & Save Presets | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Shortcuts | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- GIO Event Capture Single | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- GIO Event Capture Sequence | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Waterfall Display | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes | No |
- RGB Merge | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- Frame Average | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Quad Pixel Merge | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- Lens Control - | |||||
- Birger EF232 | Yes | Yes | Yes(U) | Yes(U) | No |
Sequence Capture (Single Sequence and Continuous Sequence) - | |||||
- to Frame Buffers | Yes (E) | Yes (E) | Yes (E) | Yes (P)(E) | No |
- to Frame Buffers at Event | Yes | Yes | Yes | No (Q) | No |
- to Virtual Memory | Yes | Yes | Yes (T) | Yes (P)(T) | No |
- to Virtual Memory at Event | Yes | Yes | Yes (T) | No (Q) | No |
- to Image Files | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes (D) | No |
- to Image Files at Event | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- to Image Files - FTP Copy | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- to Image Files - HTTP Server | Yes | Yes | Yes | No | No |
- to Disk File | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- to Disk File at Event | Yes | Yes | No | No | No |
- to StreamStor (Win) | Yes | No | No | No | No |
Notes:
(A) For XCAP-Lite, the PIXCI® frame grabber is assumed installed and open for use,
otherwise XCAP-Lite provides the same features as XCAP-Viewer.
Use of XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, or XCAP-Ltd with missing authorization key provides the same features as XCAP-Lite.
Use of XCAP without activation code, or never having been configured for an authorization key,
provides the features of XCAP-Viewer.
(B) The Save, Import, and Export Graphic features are not available in
XCAP-Viewer, XCAP-Lite, or XCAP-Ltd.
(C) For XCAP-Viewer, images may not be saved;
images may not be loaded directly from an Internet URL.
For XCAP-Lite, Save Image Sequence is only available in TIFF format;
images may not be loaded directly from, or saved to, an Internet URL;
and does not support image
''stack''
options.
(D) For XCAP-Lite, the Sequence Capture to Image Files
only supports TIFF format.
(E) The maximum amount of frame buffer memory is dependent on a
the characteristics of the PIXCI® imaging card,
the operating system, and of XCAP software.
The PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2 have on-board frame buffer memory,
other PIXCI® imaging cards use computer based frame buffer memory.
The PIXCI® CL1, CL2, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, SI, SV2, SV3, SV4, and SV5
are designed to access up to 4 GB of computer memory.
The PIXCI® A110, A310, D3XE, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B,
E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B,
E8, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b,
EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280,
EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, EL1DB, ELS2, SI1, SI4, SV7, and SV8
are designed to access up to 16 EiByte of computer memory
(a theoretical limit, as no currently available computer system provides 16 EiByte of memory).
For XCAP-Lite, a maximum of 256 MiByte of computer based frame buffer memory is supported
(but allows one full resolution image buffer w/out size restriction).
On 32 bit systems, XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, and XCAP-Ltd support up to 4 GiBytes
of computer based frame buffer memory.
On 64 bit systems, XCAP-Plus and XCAP-Std supports up to 16 EiByte of computer based frame buffer memory;
XCAP-Ltd supports up to 8 GiByte of computer based frame buffer memory.
The maximum available computer based frame buffer memory is also
limited by the computer hardware, configuration, and
memory used by the operating system and other applications.
(F) Camera specific controls provided for
cameras supported by PIXCI® E8CAM, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4,
and for many digital cameras supported
by PIXCI® CL1, CL2, CL3SD, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, D3XE, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B,
E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B,
E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b,
EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280,
EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, and EL1DB;
the 'PIXCI® Camera Info' feature
shows the specific, customized, support provided for each camera.
(G) For XCAP-Lite and XCAP-Viewer, the Palette feature does not include
save, load, import, or export, nor the
''Extract Bright/Dark Reference''
features.
(H) The Save Data feature is not available in XCAP-Viewer.
(I) For XCAP-Lite and XCAP-Viewer, the Pixel Plot feature does not include statistics, save,
export, or multi-image
''stack''
or
''plank''
options.
For XCAP-Viewer, the Pixel Plot feature does not include printing.
(J) For XCAP-Ltd, XCAP-Lite, and XCAP-Viewer, the Modify, Set feature does not include non-rectangular regions.
(K) For XCAP-Ltd, XCAP-Lite, and XCAP-Viewer, the Measure features do not include calibration.
(L) For XCAP-Ltd, XCAP-Lite, and XCAP-Viewer, the Line Profile is limited to straight lines.
(M) Subject to the amount of frame buffer memory versus image resolution
yielding more than one frame buffer.
(N) Software implemented White Balance and Color Corrections
(in contrast to a camera's feature)
is provided for SILICON VIDEO® and other selected cameras;
XCAP-Lite provides automatic, continuous, white balance (AWB) only for SILICON VIDEO® cameras.
The XCAP-Lite does not provide custom color calibration from a Macbeth chart or other color reference.
(O) Software implemented AGC/AEC (in contrast to a camera's feature) is provided for selected cameras;
of those, XCAP-Lite provides AGC/AEC only for SILICON VIDEO® cameras.
(P) For XCAP-Lite, the Sequence Capture does not include the
graphic overlay of time stamp features,
nor the strobe features added by software (as selected in the Sequence Capture dialog);
any strobe features
provided by the PIXCI® frame grabber or camera
(either inherent or selected in the Capture & Adjust dialog) are available.
(Q) For XCAP-Lite,
''triggered''
sequence capture is provided when the camera is, itself,
triggered (often referred to as
''Async Reset Mode'');
sequence capture from a free-running camera where the trigger or event
is handled separately is not provided.
(R) For XCAP-Lite, the image printing feature only supports
use of the operating system's
image printing feature(s), not
printing via EPIX® imaging drivers.
(S) The Save Graphics, Save Data, Export Data,
or multi-image
''stack''
features are not available in XCAP-Viewer or XCAP-Lite.
The Print feature is not available in XCAP-Viewer.
(T) For XCAP-Lite, the sequence capture to virtual memory is limited to
using 1 GiByte of virtual memory
For XCAP-Ltd, the sequence capture to virtual memory is limited to
using 4 GiByte of virtual memory.
The operating system's configuration may impose additional limitations.
(U) Interactive control of the lens is provided, but not automatic aperture
or automatic focus features in XCAP-Viewer or XCAP-Lite.
(V) Software implemented Pixel Normalization or Flat Field Correction
(in contrast to a camera's feature)
is provided for SILICON VIDEO® and other selected cameras;
of those, XCAP-Lite does not provide Pixel Normalization in generic Camera Link mode.
(W) Frame-less full screen is not available in XCAP-Lite, XCAP-Viewer, or under Linux.
(X) Software implemented Contrast Enhancement (in contrast to a camera's feature) is provided for selected cameras;
of those, XCAP-Lite provides manual, but not automatic contrast enhancement.
(Y) The Save Graphics, Save Data, Copy Data, and Descriptive Statistics
features are not available in XCAP-Viewer or XCAP-Lite.
(Z) The Contrast and other enhancements of the magnified area not available in XCAP-Ltd.
(W95) Feature available only under Windows 95, 98, and ME.
(Win) Feature available only under Windows.
The XCAP Main Window allows creating a new image or new image sequences, and thus new Image Viewer Windows, either by loading a new image from file, explicit specification of the new image's dimensions, or by opening the PIXCI® frame grabber for use. Video setup for the PIXCI® frame grabber, such as modifying the video resolution or color space, are also in the Main Window; these features destroy and re-create the PIXCI® frame grabber's Image Viewer Window.
The Main Window also provides features not directly associated with an image (sequence), such as scripts, RS-232 device control, and features to customize XCAP. Some of these topics are discussed under Utilities.
The File - Load New Image window allows loading an image from a file into a new image buffer. Using wild cards, multiple image files can be loaded - each to their own new image buffer. Images can also be loaded directly from an Internet URL into a new image buffer. The new image buffer is automatically sized - width, height, pixel depth and color space - to match the image file.
If File is selected, the image is to be loaded from a file pathname. If URL is selected, the image is to be loaded from an Internet URL. If Files is selected, one or mere images are to be loaded from a file pathname utilizing wild cards.
The
Image File
field allows explicit entry of a path and file name.
Alternately, the
Browse
button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing
dialog box.
After selection, either the
BigTIFF,
BMP,
FITS,
JPEG/JFIF,
Multimedia,
PortableMap,
TIFF,
or
Unknown
selection is shown;
only BigTIFF, BMP, FITS, JPEG/JFIF, Portable Bit/Gray/Pixel Map (PBM/PGM/PPM), TIFF,
and some multimedia format image files can be loaded from this window[15]
(but see
Images - New Image
and the
Image File - Load Image
in the image viewer's window for loading X/Y format files
into a manually created image buffer).
XCAP does not require the file name's extension
to be the customary extension;
although using
.btf
for BigTIFF format,
.bmp
for BMP format,
.fts
for FITS format,
.jpg
for JPEG format,
.tif
for TIFF format,
etc., is recommended.
The File Names Wild field allows explicit entry of a path and file name using wild cards; a ''?'' matches any one character of the file name, a ''*'' matches zero or more characters of the file name.
The Image URL field allows explicit entry of an Internet URL of an image ''file''. The URL should have a format similar to:
and be publicly accessible. The same file formats as above are supported, however when loading from an Internet URL the customary file name extension must be present.ftp://domain.com/pretty.tif ftp://ftp.domain.com/pretty.tif http://domain.com/sequence/picture00.tif http://www.domain.com/sequence/picture00.tif
For image files where each pixel is an index into the attached palette, the Load Pixels+Palette selection allows creating a corresponding image buffer with attached palette. Saving the image buffer yields an image file which also contains pixel indices into an attached palette. The Load Pixels as Grey Level selection allows creating an image buffer where each index pixel is interpreted as a grey level and the attached palette is ignored. Saving the image buffer yields a monochrome image file without palette. The Load Pixels as True Color selection allows creating an image buffer where each pixel is color, initialized by interpreting the index pixels with the attached palette. Saving the image buffer yields a true color image file.
If Date&Time Stamp: Set from File's Date&Time is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the file's ''last modified'' time as reported by the operating system. The Date&Time Stamp: Set from File's Date&Time option is not available when a URL is used. If Date&Time Stamp: Set from Image's Tag is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the file's internal date and time tag, if any; not all image formats support internal date and time tags. If Date&Time Stamp: Don't Set is specified, the image's date and time stamp is not changed.
The Image Name field allows entering a short name which appears in the title of windows associated with the new image buffer; if using ''Files'' mode, the Image Name is automatically set to each file's file name. The Description field allows entering a longer, arbitrary, description which is attached to the new image buffer.
After selecting a file name and options, The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
After the image file(s) are loaded into a new image buffer, a new The Image Viewer Window displays each image and provides examination, processing, and analysis features on the image. If the image buffer has been modified, upon the buffer's being destroyed or XCAP being closed, a pop-up dialog will prompt whether the image buffer should be saved to the original file name.
The File - Load New Image Sequence window allows loading an image sequence from a sequence of files into a new sequence of image buffers. The new image buffers are automatically sized - width, height, pixel depth and color space - to match the first image file of the sequence.
The File Name Pattern, Indexing, as, and thru fields allows explicit entry of a path and numeric sequence of file names. The File Name Pattern is expected to contain one or more ''?'' characters; all such characters are replaced with decimal numbers incrementing from the sequence starting number (following as) through the sequence ending number (following thru). For example,
represents a sequence of 3 files, namely:File Name Pattern: c:\images\experiment????.tif Index: ? as: 45 thru: 47
The Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box; after selecting a specific file name with the browser, the result in File Name Pattern can be modified, inserting ''?'' characters to represent the sequencing characters. If Check Exist is not selected, no warning is given if any of the specified files do not exist.c:\images\experiment0045.tif c:\images\experiment0046.tif c:\images\experiment0047.tif
Alternately, a file name representing a single AVI, BigTIFF, FITS, Portable Bit/Gray/Pixel Map (PBM/PGM/PPM), TIFF or VIF file containing a sequence of images can be specified.
After file name selection, one of One AVI w. Sequence, One BigTIFF w. Sequence, One FITS w. Sequence, One Portable Map w. Sequence, One TIFF w. Sequence, One VIF w. Sequence, Two VIF Slices w. Sequence, Sequence of BigTIFF's, Sequence of BMP's, Sequence of FITS's, Sequence of JPEG/JFIF's, Sequence of Multimedia's, Sequence of Portable Map's, Sequence of TIFF's, or Unknown selection is shown; only AVI, BigTIFF, BMP, FITS, JPEG/JFIF, Portable Bit/Gray/Pixel Map (PBM/PGM/PPM), TIFF, VIF, and some multimedia format image files can be loaded from this window[16]. (but see Images - New Image and the Image File - Load Image or Image File - Load Image Sequence in the image viewer's window for additional methods of loading images into an image buffer created explicitly).
The VIF, or Video Frame Files, are video sequences created by
Capture - Video to Disk File.
In addition to the image data file, typically
.vif
,
the corresponding
.fmt
and
.ini
files must be present.
The
Two VIF Slices w. Sequence
variant supports cameras that use two capture cards
and thus produce two VIF files, one per capture card;
each VIF file contains a portion of every image in the sequence.
For image files where each pixel is an index into the attached palette, the Load Pixels+Palette selection allows creating a corresponding image buffer with attached palette. Saving the image buffer yields an image file which also contains pixel indices into an attached palette. The Load Pixels as Grey Level selection allows creating an image buffer where each index pixel is interpreted as a grey level and the attached palette is ignored. Saving the image buffer yields a monochrome image file without palette. The Load Pixels as True Color selection allows creating an image buffer where each pixel is color, initialized by interpreting the index pixels with the attached palette. Saving the image buffer yields a true color image file.
If Date&Time Stamp: Set from File's Date&Time is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the file's ''last modified'' time as reported by the operating system. The Date&Time Stamp: Set from File's Date&Time option is not available when a URL is used. If Date&Time Stamp: Set from Image's Tag is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the file's internal date and time tag, if any; not all image formats support internal date and time tags. If Date&Time Stamp: Don't Set is specified, the image's date and time stamp is not changed.
The Image Name field allows entering a short name which appears in the title of windows associated with the new image buffer. The Description field allows entering a longer, arbitrary, description which is attached to the new image buffer.
If Preload into Memory is selected, sufficient memory for the entire sequence is allocated, and all images are loaded at once. If Load on Demand - View & Modify is selected, images from the files are loaded, unloaded, and automatically saved as needed, using memory for a only single image buffer. If Load on Demand - View Only is selected, images from the files are automatically loaded and reloaded as needed, using memory for a only single image buffer. The Preload into Memory is commonly used for small image sequences which fit in the computer's (virtual) memory; Load on Demand is necessary for large image sequences which would not fit in the computer's (virtual) memory. Only the Preload into Memory option is available for a sequence of multimedia images. Only the Load on Demand option is available for VIF images.
After selecting a file name pattern and options, The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
After the image buffers are created, a new The Image Viewer Window displays the images and provides examination, processing, and analysis features on the image sequence.
If the Preload into Memory option is used, and the image sequence has been modified, upon the buffers' being destroyed or XCAP being closed, a pop-up dialog will prompt whether the image buffers should be saved to the original file names.
The File - Image File Info allows obtaining information about an image file, such as the width, height, pixel depth, and color space, without loading the image into an image buffer.
The Image File field allows explicit entry of a path and file name. Alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. After selection, information about AVI, BigTIFF, BMP, FITS, JPEG/JFIF, Portable Map (PBM/PGM/PPM), TIFF, or VIF format image files is displayed.
For BigTIFF or TIFF format image files containing more than one image, the Image Subfile allows selecting the specific image within the file for which information is shown.
The Images - New Image allows creating an image buffer, or a sequence of image buffers with specified width, height, pixel depth and color space.
The Image Width (X) specifies the number of pixels per line, the Image Height (Y) specifies the number of pixels per column. The Sequence Length specifies the number of image buffers in the sequence, or may be 1 for an individual image buffer. The Color Space specifies the color space of the image, such as monochrome, RGB, HSB, YCrCb, CMY, or CMYK, and indirectly specifies the number of numeric components per pixel, shown as Pixies per Pixel, such as 1 component for monochrome pixels, or 3 components for RGB pixels. The Bits per Pixie specifies the number of bits, and thus the range of levels, allowed for each pixel value component.
A typical image specification is:
which yields a monochrome image with 1024 grey levels. Or:Image Width (X) = 752 Image Height (Y) = 480 Sequence Length = 1 Color Space = Grey Level Bits per Pixie = 10 Pixies per Pixel = 1
which yields a sequence of 8 images, each RGB with 24 bit pixels (8 bits for red, 8 bits for green, 8 bits for blue).Image Width (X) = 2048 Image Height (Y) = 2048 Sequence Length = 8 Color Space = RGB Bits per Pixie = 8 Pixies per Pixel = 1
If Color Space was chosen as Index+Palette, the Bits per Pixie implies the number of distinct indices and the number of palette entries. The Palette Color Space and Palette Pixies per Pixel then specify the actual image color space and ultimate pixel depth. A typical image specification is:
which yields an image with 16 distinct colors, each chosen from a 24 bit palette (16777216 colors). If an image sequence is being created (i.e. Sequence Length is greater than one), then if Sequence's Palette of Common to All is selected, a single palette is used for all images in the sequence; if Unique to Each is selected, a unique palette is provided for each image in the sequence.Image Width (X) = 640 Image Height (Y) = 480 Sequence Length = 1 Color Space = Index+Palette Bits per Pixie = 4 Pixies per Pixel = 1 Palette Color Space = RGB Palette Pixies per Pixel = 8
The Pixel Aspect Ratio specifies the default aspect ratio at which the image pixels will be displayed.
The Image Name field allows entering a short name which appears in the title of windows associated with the new image buffer. The Description field allows entering a longer, arbitrary, description which is attached to the new image buffer.
The maximum number of pixels per column and the maximum number of pixels per row supported by XCAP is theoretically 231 divided by the number of bytes required per pixel. In practice, the host hardware, memory, and operating system limit the maximum image size to much smaller dimensions. The maximum number of bits per pixie is 16 for monochrome, RGB, CMY, and CMYK color spaces. The HSB and YcrCb color spaces currently only support 8 bits per pixie.
After selecting the parameters, The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
After the image buffer is created, a new The Image Viewer Window displays the image and provides examination, processing, and analysis features on the image(s). Pixel values in the created image are initialized to 0, and the palette, if used, is initialized to an identity mapping (correspondence) (i.e. pixel value 0 is displayed as intensity 0, pixel value 1 is displayed as intensity 1, etc.).
The Main Window's Scripts provides features for recording and playing scripts. A script recording contains most of the user's interactions with the windows of XCAP; playing the script duplicates the original actions.
A selected script may be executed automatically each time XCAP starts, this feature is set in Utilities - Program Setup.
One or more user-defined tool bars of shortcuts can be created, with the effect of each shortcut defined by executing a script.
Scripts and a remote control feature, allows using XCAP as a hidden, off-screen, ''black box''; any end-user application that can manipulate text files, can thereby remotely control XCAP.
The Scripts - Record allows automatic recording of most of the user's interactions with the windows of XCAP.
The Record to File field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box.
After selecting a file name, the Record button begins recording, and the Stop button terminates recording.
Some user actions are not recorded. Using the mouse to drag the cursor or other graphic across an image is not recorded as these actions are highly dependent upon image content (such as the typical scenario of dragging the cursor until it is positioned next to an artifact in a captured image), would likely be inappropriate to other captured images, and the recording could consume a excessive amount of disk space. Instead, after positioning the cursor interactively the user may record the final position by clicking the appropriate numeric cursor coordinates. Features in ''foreign'' windows, such as the file browser, printer setup, or TWAIN access, are not recorded.
While recording, the Insert Comment button allows inserting comments into the recorded file; the comments have no effect upon playback. The Insert Dialog Pause button allows inserting a message pause into the recorded file; upon playback a dialog window shows the message, pauses script playback, and requests the user's acknowledgment before the script playback resumes. Pressing either button activates a text field in which the comments or message can be written; but the button press, and additions to the text field, are not themselves recorded in the script. For Insert Dialog Pause, a Modal Dialog option allows selecting whether upon playback the dialog pause window is modal (no other XCAP windows can be manipulated until the modal dialog is closed), or non-modal.
While recording, the Insert Timed Pause button allows inserting a timed pause into the recorded file; upon playback the script halts, silently, for the specified timed interval.
While recording, the Insert Modalized Dialog button allows marking an existing dialog as modal. Upon playback, the script pauses until the modal dialog is closed. If Modalize Now, Too is selected, the dialog is marked as modal during recording too, so that the behavior of the GUI during recording better matches the behavior upon script playback.
While recording, the Options button provides several additional options. If Ignore Window Move is selected, any movement of windows are not recorded into the script. If Ignore Window Resize is selected, any resizing of windows are not recorded into the script.
If Inc/Dec Effect is Absolute is selected, any increment or decrement of a Numeric Field Options is recorded as the final, resulting, value; on playback the field is set to the recorded value. If Inc/Dec Effect is Relative is selected, an increment or decrement is recorded as an increment or decrement; on playback the field is incremented or decremented from its then current value.
If File Browse Effect is Interactive is selected, use of a Browse button while recording causes the file browsing dialog to appear during playback; the path and file name selected while recording is ignored in favor of the path and file name selected during playback. If File Browse Effect is Recorded is selected, use of a Browse button while recording causes the path and file name selected via the standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box to be recorded; the file browsing dialog does not appear during playback.
If File/Path Effect is Full Path is selected, the full path and file name is recorded; if File/Path Effect is File Name is selected, only the file name is recorded so that the effective path name is relative to the Data Directory or Scripts Directory (as appropriate) in effect during playback (see Utilities - Program Setup).
The Scripts - Play allows playback of a previously recorded script.
The Play from File field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box.
The Delay Each Action specifies a delay, in seconds, for each ''action'' in the script, allowing ''slow motion'' playback of a script.
The Repeat Script Count allows specifying that playback of the script should be repeated, and the number of times of repetition. The Delay Each Repeat specifies a delay, in seconds, between each repetition of the script.
After starting an operation, scripts normally wait for the operation to finish before continuing the script. If Wait for Processing is not selected, the script will start the operation and not wait for its completion. If End Wait for Processing is selected, following the end of the script the completion of all operations is awaited; the End Wait for Processing has no effect if Wait for Processing is selected.
A warning is posted if an operation, started by the script, and being waited upon, consumes more time that specified by the Slow Processing Warning, in seconds, thereby delaying the scripts execution. Offending operations are not terminated; only a warning is given. No warning is posted if Slow Processing Warning is set to 0 (seconds).
If Ignore Window Move is selected, any movement of windows recorded into the script are ignored. If Ignore Window Resize is selected, any resizing of windows recorded into the script are ignored.
Rename Dialog w. File Name is selected, the Scripts dialog title is changed to reflect the script's file name. This option may be helpful when using one script which, in turn, starts other scripts as script's reference the dialog to be acted upon by the dialog's title.
After selecting a file name, the Play button begins playback, the Stop button terminates playback without closing the window, and the Cancel button terminates playback (if any) and closes the window. The Repeated Script Count shows the number of times that the script has been repeated.
If Auto Play on entering File Name is selected, after selecting a file name the script is immediately played, without explicitly clicking the Play button.
If Close On Completion is selected, the Scripts - Play dialog is closed when script playback has finished.
If Log Trace is selected, a ''trace'' of each executable line of the script is posted to the Utilities - Message Log before the line is executed.
Successful playback of a pre-recorded script requires that the XCAP window titles, and the names of fields within each window, be identical to that recorded in the script. However, the script is independent of the position of windows and fields, and whether any additional windows are present (lacking window name conflicts).
The
Window Title References: Translate From
and
Window Title References: Translate To
allow filter a script during playback, to change the
effective name of the windows referenced by the script.
Each line of the
Window Title References: Translate From
represents a phrase; as that phrase is found in the
titles of the windows (within the script), the phrase
is replaced by the corresponding line of
Window Title References: Translate To.
This can be used to allow a script recorded under one version of
XCAP to be adapted to another, when there are slight differences
in the titles of corresponding windows.
It can also be used to allow a script written to operate upon
one image file name, such as
prototype.tif
,
to be adapted to operate on substitute image file names.
For scripts intended to operate without user intervention or interaction, portions of the XCAP display can be ''frozen'' so as to reduce processing overhead. The Freeze Display eliminates many, but not all, updates of the displayed windows. The Thaw & Refresh Display updates all windows so they reflect the current status and values of XCAP and re-enables future updates of the displayed windows, The Freeze Display does not eliminate all updates of the display, only those that can be done without affecting the behavior of XCAP; the precise effect of Freeze Display may change in different versions of XCAP and under different operating systems.
The Scripts - Edit allows editing an existing script; by activating the system ''Notepad'' program (under Windows) or ''gedit'' program (under Linux) upon a named script.
A script file contains standard ASCII text - any editor or word processing program could be used in lieu of Scripts - Edit
A sample portion of a script appears as:
The overall format appears as a sequence of subroutine-function-method calls, with a variable number of parameters, some of which are strings and some of which are numeric values. Parsing, string escapes, and comments all follow C++/Java rules. Each call corresponds to one user action, specifying the hierarchical depth of the window in which the action occurred (first numeric parameter), the name of each window in the hierarchy (one or more string parameters), an internal name of the control/field that was acted upon (next string parameter), the label of the widget/field (next string parameter), the number of parameters to be passed to the widget/field (next numeric parameter), and zero of more numeric or string parameters to be passed to the widget/field.// // Recorded by: XXAP V2.0 // Recorded on: 6 June 2006 06:06:06 GMT // MuiScript.apply(1,"EPIX(R)XXAPV0.5","MuiMenu", "New Image", 0); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX(R)XXAPV0.5","NewImage","MuiNumInput", "Image Width (X)", 1,768); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX(R)XXAPV0.5","NewImage","MuiNumInput", "Image Height (Y)",1,480); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX(R)XXAPV0.5","NewImage","MuiNumInput", "Sequence Length", 1,1); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX(R)XXAPV0.5","NewImage","MuiNumInput", "Bits per Pixie", 1,10); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX(R)XXAPV0.5","NewImage","MuiListInput","Color Space", 1,"Grey Level"); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX(R)XXAPV0.5","NewImage","MuiTextInput","Image Name", 1,"MyFrame"); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX(R)XXAPV0.5","NewImage","MuiStdBtn", "OK",0);
The Scripts - Load Tool Bar allows activating a user-defined tool bar of shortcuts, each shortcut represented by an icon which, when clicked, executes a user-specified script. Each shortcut may also specify an optional keyboard key which, when pressed, also executes the user-specified script.
The contents of the tool bar, the graphics of each icon, the optional key, and the script to be executed are all user-specified within a file, such as:
The shortcut.title specifies the title to appear in the shortcuts' window. The shortcut.height and shortcut.width specify the number of icons and scripts provided by the shortcut window and their arrangement; the example specifies 3×1 icons and scripts, arranged 3 across and 1 high. The optional shortcut.iconheight and shortcut.iconwidth specify the dimensions of each icon in pixels. For each icon, the shortcut.?.?.icon specifies the BMP or TIFF format file name containing graphics, shortcut.?.?.hint specifies the hint which appears when the mouse is over the icon, the shortcut.?.?.script specifies the script file name to be executed when the icon is clicked, and the optional shortcut.?.?.key specifies the name of an optional keyboard key, where the ''?.?'' is replaced by the X and Y position within the tool bar. The icon and script file names are typically ''simple'' file names, without a path, and are expected to be found in the same directory as the tool bar specification file. If the icon or script file names are to include a directory path, a separator character of ''/'', not ''\'', must be used. Comment lines, as shown, may be optionally included. The order of lines in the file is not significant.# comments like so - optional shortcut.title=Example shortcut.width=3 shortcut.height=1 # the shortcut iconwidth and iconheight are optional, default of 32 shortcut.iconwidth=64 shortcut.iconheight=64 shortcut.0.0.icon=cmnd00.bmp shortcut.0.0.script=cmnd00.scr shortcut.0.0.hint=This is the hint for the 1st icon shortcut.1.0.icon=cmnd10.bmp shortcut.1.0.script=cmnd10.scr shortcut.1.0.hint=This is another hint # the shortcut key is optional shortcut.1.0.key=Page Up shortcut.2.0.icon=cmnd20.bmp shortcut.2.0.script=cmnd20.scr shortcut.2.0.hint=This is the hint for the 3rd icon # the shortcut key is optional shortcut.2.0.key=F1
The Scripts - Tools provides additional tools which might be of use to scripts. While these features can also be used interactively, the host operating system provides better alternatives for non-scripted use.
The Execute Program allows a script to execute a ''foreign'' program. The Exec: Program File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. The Exec: Program Parameters specifies a parameter string which is added to the program's command line when it is executed. If Exec: Wait till Done is selected, a script executing a foreign program pauses until the program has terminated; otherwise, the specified program is started and the script's execution continues.
The Delete File allows a script to delete a file. The Delete: File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name. If Delete: Say Twice is selected, the user is prompted for verification before the file is actually deleted.
The Create Directory allows a script to create a directory, as specified by Directory: Path Name.
The List Directory to Black Board allows a script to list all of the files and/or subdirectories within the directory specified by Directory List: Path Name to the Black Board in column format starting at the List to Black Board Cell. If List Files is selected, non-directory files are listed. If List Subdirectories is selected, subdirectories are listed. If List Full Path Name is selected, the Directory List: Path Name combined with the file's name is listed, otherwise only the file's name is listed. If List Count is selected, the List to Black Board Cell is set to the count of the number of file names listed; the list of file names starts one line below the List to Black Board Cell. If List per Wildcard is selected, only file names or subdirectory names which match the List Wildcard Filter are listed, where the List Wildcard Filter may contain the customary ''?'' to match any one character, and ''*'' to match any zero or more characters.[17]
The Scripts - Remote Control allows using XCAP as a hidden, off-screen, ''black box''. The end-user application simply sends commands to XCAP, and receives processed images, or analyses results, in return. Familiarity with OLE, DDE, or other special Windows or Linux API(s) isn't needed - any application that can manipulate ASCII text files, can also remotely control XCAP.
The Wait, Play & Delete File specifies a file name to be used by both the end-user application and XCAP. On clicking Start, XCAP, (1) Waits for a file with the specified name to appear, (2) Executes the file as a script, (3) Deletes the file to indicate completion, and (4) Repeats the process until Stop or Cancel is clicked.
As for Scripts - Play, the Delay Each Action, Slow Processing Warning, Ignore Window Move, Ignore Window Resize, Ignore 'Item Inactive' Error, Log Trace, Wait for Processing, and End Wait for Processing options allow delaying each action in the script, controlling warnings about slow processing, ignoring any movement of windows recorded into the script, ignoring any resizing of windows recorded into the script, ignoring error from trying to manipulate an inactive GUI item, posting each executable line of the script to the Utilities - Message Log before the line is executed, selecting whether the script should wait for a processing operation, and whether at the end, the script should wait for all processing operations.
To implement remote control of XCAP into your end-user application, (a) Decide how many different ''commands'' your application must give to XCAP, and the functionality of each command, (b) Run XCAP and record one script per command with the desired functionality, and (c) Within your application, execute a ''command'' by copying one of the previously recorded scripts to the selected file name, and then waiting for the selected file to be executed and deleted by XCAP. Alternately, since script files are ASCII text, your application can simply write the script's contents to the selected file name, perhaps changing numeric parameters, such as cursor coordinates, as the script's lines are written.
Your application can also automatically start XCAP (using the host computer's normal API for starting programs), and use Program Setup - Start/End Startup Script to execute a setup script which might, (a) Activate the Scripts - Remote Control feature, and (b) Reposition XCAP to the side of the screen.
Your end-user application can retrieve results from XCAP by formulating a ''command'' script which saves an image (using The Image Viewer Window's Image File - Save), or saves data (such as is provided under 2-D Graphs, Image Examination - Pixel Peek, Image Measurement - Blob Analysis, and similar features).
Other results where XCAP does not provide an explicit save feature, such as values shown in most numeric or textual fields, can be retrieved by formulating a ''command'' script which uses the Parameters to File feature of Utilities - Screen Capture, which saves almost all on-screen numeric fields and text fields. Or, to retrieve only one or more selected numeric or textual fields, formulate a ''command'' script which uses the Black Board as follows, (a) Activate the Black Board, (b) Right click on the desired numeric or textual field, select BlackBoard Write and specify a Black Board cell that is to receive that field's value, (c) Repeat, using BlackBoard Write on other numeric or textual fields, specifying a Black Board cell adjacent to the previous cell to receive the field's value, (d) Use the Black Board - As a Report Generator to save the selected Black Board cells to a file.
The Main Window's Black Board allows customizing XCAP and creating non-procedural programs, by inter-connecting the numeric and text field of various windows. Other features allow computed values (similar to a spreadsheet), ''push''ing buttons or shortcuts of other windows, executing timed commands, collecting data, and generating reports or graphs.
The Black Board is similar to, and can be used as, a spreadsheet. The black board consists of two-dimensional arrays of pages, where each page is a two-dimensional array of cells. Each cell can contain:
Cells are named by Volume, Page, Column, and Row, such as:
The Volume and Page controls allow selecting which volume and page of cells is being viewed. The Rows and Columns controls allow increasing the width and height of the current page, from the default of 10 rows and 10 columns, up to the maximum of 65535 rows and 63 columns. In theory, the black board could contain 26 volumes of 10 pages, each with 65535 rows and 63 columns, for a total of 1,073,463,300 cells. In practice the host computer hardware and operating system limit the number of cells to far less than the theoretical maximum.A 2 B 4 | | | | | | | +-- Row 0-9 default | | | 0-65534 maximum | | | | | +---- Column A-J default (10 columns) | | A-Z,BA-BZ,CA-CK maximum (63 columns) | | | +------ Page 0-9 | +-------- Volume A-Z (26 volumes)
The allowable format of integer numbers (e.g. base 2, 8, 10, 16), real numbers (e.g. scientific notation), string constants, and expressions are described in Mathematical Expression, and String Expression. The expressions may reference other cells, using variables such as:
An abbreviated cell name, such as:D4A0 A0B77 A0CD123
refers to the cell at the specified column and row on the same volume and page as the cell containing the expression. Circular references, such as:F5
must be avoided. The volume, page, column, and row indices within cell names used in expressions must not contain leading 0's, such as:Cell A0A0: 3+A0A1 Cell A0A1: A0A0/2
As for spreadsheets, changing one cell causes re-evaluation of all cells whose expressions are dependent upon the new value.A0B77 (valid) A0B0077 (invalid) A0AAB77 (invalid) A00B77 (invalid) AA0B77 (invalid)
Right clicking on a cell provides an options menu for that cell. The options menu allows selecting the cell's type (i.e. Integer Number, Real Number, Numeric Expression, String Expression, String, or Clear). The options menu allows switching a numeric cell's or numerical valued expression cell's display between integer and real (i.e. Eval to Integer, Eval to Real), allows forcing an expression cell to show the underlying expression rather than the expression's value (i.e. Show Expression), or for string valued expressions allows resuming display of the expression's value (i.e. Eval to String). The options menu allows selecting the display format of integer cells as base 2, 8, 10, or 16 (i.e. Format), allows selecting the display format of real cells as scientific, fixed point, shortest (auto), and the number of significant digits (i.e. Format). The options menu's Attributes creates a dialog box which duplicates these cell type options, and provides additional selections for Timer, Clock, and Gateway cells, and other features, discussed below.
A cell's type (i.e.integer, real, mathematical expression, string expression, or blank), is determined automatically as keystrokes are entered; no special syntax is needed.[18] Some keystrokes are ambiguous, such as ''ABC'' which is automatically typed as a hexadecimal number instead of a string, or ''sqrt(sin(1.0))'' which is reduced to, and automatically typed as, a real number instead of a numeric expression. The options menu can be used specify an explicit cell type.
When variables in string expressions refer to cells with numeric values, the cell(s) referred to may provide a numeric value to the expression, or a string value to the expression (i.e. Variable as Number, Variable as String).
The menu-bar's Cells - Clear Page allows resetting all cells on the current volume and page. The Cells - Clear All allows resetting all cells.
The Cells - Page Utilities activates a dialog with additional operations on the selected page. The Clear Cells clears cells on the page, the Shift Cell Values Left, Shift Cell Values Right, Shift Cell Values Up, and Shift Cell Values Down, shift the value of cells within the page left, right, up, or down, respectively. All of the operations can be applied On (the) Entire Page or On Selected Cells; the Upper Left Corner and Lower Right Corner specify the rectangle of selected cells.
The Black Board allows creating non-procedural programs, by connecting cells to numeric or text fields in other windows, importing values from, and exporting values to, other windows. These connections are dynamic; an updated value in a window has automatic effect on the black board, and vice versa.
The black board connections may be useful for convenience, such as continuously showing the average of two computed values. Or, the connections may be used to connect a computed value of one window to a parameter value of another such as computed center of mass coordinates ''driving'' the image cursor's location.
Connecting a cell to a numeric or text field in another window is initiated by right clicking the numeric or text field in the other window. The right click activates an options menu for that field, under Blackboard Source or Blackboard Dest. the desired cell name that values or text are to be exported to, or values or text are to be imported from, respectively, is entered; values or text are exported to, or imported from, whenever changed. A numeric or text field can't simultaneously be both Blackboard Source and Blackboard Dest.. Alternately, under Blackboard Write or Blackboard Read the desired cell name that values or text are to be exported to, or values or text are to be imported from, respectively, is entered; values or text are exported to, or imported from, once. An abbreviated cell name, such as:
always refers to Volume A and Page 0 of the Black Board.B2
Note: The Black Board window must have been activated (although may be off-screen) before the options menu of numeric or text fields will show the Blackboard Source, Blackboard Dest., Blackboard Read, and Blackboard Write options.
A cell may ''push'' buttons or shortcuts in other windows. The connection is established by right clicking the button or shortcut in the other window and selecting a cell for Blackboard Source. The selected cell exports a ''push'' to the connected button or shortcut whenever the cell is re-evaluated and the numeric result is nonzero, or the cell is re-evaluated and the string result's length is nonzero.
Buttons in other windows may report their status to a cell. The connection is established by right clicking the button in the other window and selecting a cell for Blackboard Destination. The selected cell imports a numeric value whenever the connected button's status is changed. For simple buttons that may change their foreground color, bit 0x1 of the status is 1 if the button is active otherwise it is 0, bit 0x2 of the status is 1 if the button is the normal foreground color otherwise it is 0. For buttons which may also change their background color or label, in addition to using bits 0x1 and 0x2 as above, bits 0xFF00 indicate the button's state; most such buttons have only two states (i.e. sets of label & colors), indicated by bit 0x100. Some buttons, such as those use to switch groups of controls from ''Normal'' to ''Advanced'' mode, may actually be a pair or group of simple buttons occupying the same space; to the black board each button is independent.
Shortcuts in other windows may report their status to a cell. The connection is established by right clicking the shortcut in the other window and selecting a cell for Blackboard Destination. The selected cell imports a numeric value whenever the connected shortcut's status is changed. Bit 0x1 of the status is 1 if the shortcut is active, otherwise it is 0. For shortcuts with multiple states (i.e. different graphics, and not just depressed versus not depressed), the higher order bits indicate the numerical state of the shortcut.
Via the Attributes dialog, accessed by right clicking a cell (described above in Black Board - As a Spreadsheet), a cell can contain a Timer value, in seconds since the Black Board was first accessed. The Timer Period allows setting the time interval between updates of a timer cell's value. Timer cells are most useful for ''push''ing buttons, such as the Run button for Scripts - Play, or the Snap button for video frame capture.
Via the Attributes dialog, accessed by right clicking a cell (described above in Black Board - As a Spreadsheet), a cell can contain a Clock value, showing date and time. The Clock Update allows setting the time interval between updates of a clock cell's value. Clock cells are useful for exporting strings, such as to the Text field in Graphic Text.
The Attributes dialog also shows all the current connections from other numeric or text fields, buttons, or shortcuts, to a cell. The Attributes dialog also allows filtering values received via connections, discarding imported values that don't contain a desired string or that don't satisfy a Mathematical Expression.
Note that when exporting a numeric value to fields in other windows, values which are out of bounds (as defined for the specific field) may be ignored, or may be modified to the nearest allowable value. Fields in other windows which present an angle require the value in radians, regardless of what display mode has been selected for interactive use. Fields in other windows which present a temporal interval in user selected units require a value in the field's default units. Fields in other windows which present a length in user selected units require a value in the field's default units. Fields in other windows which present a floating point hue (as part of hue, saturation, and brightness) require a value scaled between 0.0 and 1.0. Fields in other windows which present a temperature require the value in degrees Celsius, regardless of what display mode has been selected for interactive use.
The menu-bar's Run - Freeze Timers disables the update of all timer cells. The menu-bar's Run - Freeze Clock disables the update of all clock cells. The menu-bar's Run - Freeze Exports disables the export of updated cell contents to numeric or text fields in other windows which previously set the Blackboard Source. The menu-bar's Run - Freeze Imports disables the import of updated cell contents from numeric or text fields in other windows which previously set the Blackboard Dest.. Freezing timers, exports, and/or imports allows configuration changes to be made to black board or other windows, without automatic updates ''getting in the way'', and without having to clear, and then recreate, the timers and connections.
The Attributes dialog, accessed by right clicking a cell, provides features that allow convenient use of the cell as a variable (such as an index variable), particularly in conjunction with Scripts.
The Increment button adds one to a numeric cell, the Decrement button subtracts one from a numeric cell.
The Eval Expression and the Expression Eval button allow for more general changes. The Eval Expression may contain the same type of numeric expression as would be used in a Black Board cell, but may be self referential. That is, the Eval Expression for cell A0A0 may be:
orA0A0+5
The Eval Expression is evaluated once when the Expression Eval is clicked, and the result assigned to the numeric cell (to which the Attributes dialog belongs).A0A0+A0B0
Note that cell names in the Eval Expression may not be abbreviated; the volume and page must be specified.
The Black Board allows collecting data, by connecting ''gateway'' cells to numeric or text fields in other windows, and having the gateway cell forward the data to a range of (usually) numeric cells. Typically, the gateway cell is a target of numeric field and a Blackboard Dest. selection (see above); so that any values produced by the field are collected.
Via the Attributes dialog, accessed by right clicking a cell (described above in Black Board - As a Spreadsheet), a cell can contain a Gateway. The Upper Left Corner and Lower Right Corner specify the range of cells to receive data from the gateway, the Current Position specifies the current position within the Upper Left Corner and Lower Right Corner. If Gateway Off is selected, the gateway is inactive; any data received is discarded. If Gateway Fill & Stop is selected, the gateway fills cells from the Current Position through the Lower Right Corner and then turns Gateway Off. If Gateway Fill & Repeat is selected, the gateway fills cells from the Current Position through the Lower Right Corner, resets the Current Position to the Upper Left Corner and continues. If Gateway Fill & Pushdown is selected, the gateway sends new data to the Lower Right Corner, sliding old data by one cell position from the Lower Right Corner to the Upper Left Corner. The Gateway Fill & Pushdown mode does not use the Current Position.
The Black Board allows creating a formatted report, reporting the contents of a group of cells to a file, an RS-232 port, or to the system clipboard. Having previously connected selected cells to results produced in other windows, and having previously entered expressions in selected cells to yield derived results, a report containing the selected cells can be created.
The File - Report accesses the black board's report generator.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
If All Pages is selected, the contents of all black board volumes and pages are reported. If Current Page is selected, the contents of the currently displayed Black Board page is reported. If Coordinates is selected, the cells bounded by the Upper Left Corner and Lower Right Corner are reported; note that these coordinates may actually encompass a rectangle of cells (e.g. A0A0 through A0Z9), a cube of cells (e.g. A0A0 through A9Z9), or a four-dimensional group of cells (e.g. A0A0 through Z9Z9). For the All Pages and Coordinates selections, any pages of the Black Board which have never been accessed are silently ignored, rather than being reported as a lengthy list of blanks.
If Prefix Cell w. Name is selected, each cell's reported value is prefixed with the cell's name and an ''=''. If Include Suffix is selected, any suffix, such as a number base, is appended to the cell's reported value. If Quote String is selected, any non-numeric cell reported values (including the ''value'' of blank cells), are enclosed between quotes ("). If Skip Blank Rows is selected, any rows in which all of the cells (not just the cells potentially being reported) are clear or have a string of of zero or spaces, are not reported. If Pad Cell is ''None'', the cell's reported value is not padded with spaces; if Left Justify the cell's reported value is padded with spaces on the right to a minimum of Pad Cell To Width characters; if Right Justify the cell's reported value is padded with spaces on the left to a minimum of Pad Cell To Width characters.
The Header Text specified text to be written at the start of the report. The Inter Cell Text specifies text to be written between cells on the same row, but not after the last cell on a row. The Post Row Text specifies text to be written after each row of cells. The Inter Page Text specifies text to be written between pages of cells, but not after the last page. The Trailer Text specified text to be written at the end of the report. If Text has \ Codes is selected, all five of the above text entries options are interpreted as possibly containing embedded ''\'' codes, allowing entry of ASCII control codes. A ''\a'' sequence yields an ASCII Bell, a ''\b'' sequence yields an ASCII Back-Space, a ''\f'' sequence yields an ASCII Form-Feed, a ''\r'' sequence yields an ASCII Carriage-Return (CR), a ''\n'' sequence yields an ASCII Line-Feed (LF), a ''\t'' sequence yields an ASCII Tab, a ''\\'' sequence yields an ASCII Back-Slash. A ''\x'' followed by two hexadecimal digits yields the byte value specified by the two digits.
If
Report to File
is selected, the report is written to a file.
If
File Create/Overwrite
is selected, multiple reports written to the same file
over-write one another.
If
File Create/Append
is selected, multiple reports written to the same
file are appended.
The
File Name
field allows explicit entry of a path and file name;
alternately, the
Browse
button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing
dialog box.
XCAP does not force the file name's extension
to be the customary extension;
although using
.txt
is highly recommended.
The OK or Apply may be clicked without a File Name; the effect of the Browse button and OK or Apply, respectively, is combined.
If Report to RS-232 is selected, the report is written to a RS-232 port. The RS-232 Parameters allows specifying the ''COM'' port (under Windows) or a ''ttyS'' device (under Linux) to be used, and other communication settings, such as the baud rate, number of data bits, type of parity, number of stop bits, and whether XON/XOFF flow control is to be used. Most of the default values are those common to most applications; typically only the baud rate needs to be specified and a ''COM'' port or ''ttyS'' device selected.
If Report to Clipboard is selected, the report is written to the Windows or Linux clipboard.
The Black Board allows creating a two and three-dimensional graphs, displaying the contents of a group of cells. Having previously connected selected cells to results produced in other windows, and having previously entered expressions in selected cells to yield derived results, a graph of the selected cells can be created to visualize the results.
In addition, the Controls' What and When provides additional options unique to the black board graph, specifying which black board cells are to used as data, and specifying when the graph is to be updated. In all cases, reference to a cell that does not have a numeric value is graphed as a numeric zero.
If Coordinates is selected, the values of cells bounded by the Upper Left Corner and Lower Right Corner are used; note that these coordinates may actually encompass a rectangle of cells (e.g. A0A0 through A0Z9), a cube of cells (e.g. A0A0 thru A9Z9), or a four-dimensional group of cells (e.g. A0A0 through Z9Z9).
If User-Defined f(X) is specified, the graphed data is generated by evaluation of the Mathematical Expression specified by Expression. The Exp., Max X specifies the number of data points to be graphed, and thus the number of times the Expression is evaluated. The Expression can contain a variable ''X'', representing the abscissa coordinate of the data point being evaluated, and can contain a subscripted variable ''cell'', representing the value of the subscripted black board cell. The ''cell'' should be subscripted with volume, page, column, and row, such as:
which refers to Volume A (e.g. 0), Page 1, Column C (e.g. 2), and Row 3. Or, the cell can be subscripted with column and row, such as:cell(0, 1, 2, 3)
which refers to Column D and Row 5 on the implied Volume A, Page 0. For example, the expression:cell(4, 5)
graphs the value of cells on the diagonal (upper left to lower right) of Volume A, Page 0. Or,cell(X,X)
which graphs the difference of cells in the A and B columns of Volume A, Page 0.cell(0,X) - cell(1,X)
If Update on Button is selected, the graph is updated only when the Replot button is clicked, or the graph window is resized. If Update on Cell is selected, the graph is updated whenever the specified Update Cell's value is updated.
In addition, the Controls' What and When provides additional options unique to the black board graph, specifying which black board cells are to used as data, and specifying when the graph is to be updated. In all cases, reference to a cell that does not have a numeric value is graphed as a numeric zero.
If Coordinates is selected, the values of cells bounded by the Upper Left Corner and Lower Right Corner are used; note that these coordinates may actually encompass a rectangle of cells (e.g. A0A0 through A0Z9), a cube of cells (e.g. A0A0 thru A9Z9), or a four-dimensional group of cells (e.g. A0A0 through Z9Z9).
If User-Defined f(X,Y) is specified, the graphed data is generated by evaluation of the Mathematical Expression specified by Expression. The Exp., Max X and Exp., Max Y specifies the number of data points to be graphed, and thus the number of times the Expression is evaluated. The Expression can contain variables ''X'' and ''Y'' representing the coordinates of the data point being evaluated, and can contain a subscripted variable ''cell'', representing the value of the subscripted black board cell. The ''cell'' should be subscripted with volume, page, column, and row, such as:
which refers to Volume A (e.g. 0), Page 1, Column C (e.g. 2), and Row 3. Or, the cell can be subscripted with column and row, such as:cell(0, 1, 2, 3)
which refers to Column D and Row 5 on the implied Volume A, Page 0. For example, the expression:cell(4, 5)
graphs the value of cells in the upper left corner of Volume A, Page 0. Or,cell(X,Y)
which graphs the difference of cells in Page 0 and Page 1, of Volume A.cell(0,1,X,Y) - cell(0,0,X,Y)
If Update on Button is selected, the graph is updated only when the Replot button is clicked, or the graph window is resized. If Update on Cell is selected, the graph is updated whenever the specified Update Cell's value is updated.
The following example illustrates how the black board can be used to interconnect a value produced in one dialog to an input field in a second dialog. The example also produces a useful tool, one which displays the current buffer number over the current image.
The displayed image buffer number can also be modified or annotated, for example, to display the image buffer number plus one (so the first buffer is shown number one instead of zero, the second is shown as two instead of one, etc.), and to prefix the displayed number with a legend.
This expression will result in a value one greater than the number in cell A0A0.A0A0+1
This string expression prefixes the text ''Buffer: '' to the value of cell A0A1.concat("Buffer: ", A0A1)
The main window's menu-bar's PIXCI® allows initiating access to the PIXCI® frame grabber. Video setup for the PIXCI® frame grabber, such as modifying the video resolution or color space, are also done from the Main Window. Operating the PIXCI® frame grabber, such as capturing images, is done from the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window.
The PIXCI® - Open/Close allows opening access to, or closing access to, the PIXCI® frame grabber.
For most applications: Only the Open button need be clicked. After opening, the contents of the PIXCI® frame grabber's image frame buffer(s) are displayed in The Image Viewer Window, and a tool bar of Capture - Shortcuts is created. The PIXCI® frame grabber is ready to capture images.
After opening, the Board Info button shows the Frame Grabber Model, the Frame Grabber Submodel or Frame Grabber Preset (if any), software selections (if any) which override the submodel or preset settings as Configured as Submodel or Configured w. Preset, the amount of memory available for frame buffers as Frame Buffer Memory, and the number of PIXCI® frame grabbers in operation as Frame Grabbers in Use. For frame grabbers which do not have on-board frame buffer memory, the Memory Setup button provides an alternate method of accessing the Set PIXCI® Frame Buffer Memory Size feature of the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant. For PIXCI® CL1, D2X, D3X, D3XE, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers the Submodel Setup button, or for PIXCI® A110, A310, CL2, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, EL1DB, and SV8 frame grabbers the Preset Setup button, may allow changing the default camera configuration to be used by software. Unlike software override of the board's default, the new programmed default will be effective even if the board is moved to another computer. The Submodel Setup or Preset Setup also provide an option to ''sanitize'' the EEPROM used to store the setup; unused areas of the EEPROM are zero'ed so as to help prevent its use for illicit storage and transfer of information.
It is not necessary to click the Close button before closing XCAP.
If the PIXCI® frame grabber was used once before, XCAP remembers the last used video setup. Before clicking Open, under Camera & Format, if Open w. last used Video Setup is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber is reset to the last used video setup. If Open w. default Video Setup is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber is set to its default video setup (which varies according to the model and submodel or preset).
Note:
If switching from one model of PIXCI® frame grabber to another, use
Open w. default Video Setup;
a previously used video setup for NTSC, for example, won't be appropriate
for a high resolution digital camera!
If multiple PIXCI® frame grabbers are installed, before clicking Open, the Multiple Devices allows selecting which board, or subset of boards, is to be used. The Multiple Devices lists all of the PIXCI® frame grabbers found and their model identification; one or more boards may be selected. The Select All Devices allows convenient selection of all installed boards; further, the selection is updated automatically as boards are added or removed.
The default selection of Multiple Devices is from various sources. First, from the setting last used by XCAP. If XCAP's Load Settings on Startup is disabled or Multiple Devices was not previously used, the default selection is from the PIXCI® driver's setting. Second, the PIXCI® driver's last used (subsequent from boot) setting or, if not used since boot, from its default. Third, the PIXCI® driver's default from the Driver Configuration Parameters, or if not specified, from a built-it default.
If Use Individual Format & Controls is selected, each frame grabber is provided with its own The Image Viewer Window, its own PIXCI® - Video Setup, and its own independent Live, Snap, and similar controls.
If Use Common Format & Controls w. Cameras Synchronized is selected, each frame grabber is provided with its own The Image Viewer Window, but all boards share the same PIXCI® - Video Setup and only The Image Viewer Window associated with the first board has Live, Snap, and similar controls which operate all boards. The Use Common Format & Controls w. Cameras Synchronized may not be used if operating multiple, non-identical, frame grabbers.
The Install PIXCI® Driver provides instructions for installing the PIXCI® driver via the Windows Device Manager. It also allows uninstalling of the PIXCI® driver.
The Set PIXCI® Frame Buffer Memory Size allows specifying the amount of computer memory to be reserved for frame buffers. If Memory Requested for Frame Buffers is selected, the specified amount of memory is requested for frame buffers, and remaining memory is available for Windows. If Memory Reserved for Windows is selected, the specified amount of memory is requested for Windows, and remaining memory is available for frame buffers.
Under Windows NT, 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, and 11 64-Bit the Install PIXCI® Driver installs, updates, and/or uninstalls the PIXCI® driver,
The Install Authorization Key Blue Driver installs or uninstalls the driver for the older, blue, authorization key used with XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, and XCAP-Ltd; but not with XCAP-Lite or XCAP-Viewer. The Install Authorization Key Green Driver installs or uninstalls the driver for the newer, green, authorization key used with XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, and XCAP-Ltd; but not with XCAP-Lite or XCAP-Viewer. After installing the appropriate driver, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup to change XCAP's configuration as per the current authorization key.
The Set PIXCI® Frame Buffer Memory Size allows specifying the amount of computer memory to be reserved for frame buffers. If Request Normal Frame Buffer Allocation is selected, the requested frame buffer memory size may or may not be granted by Windows. Under Windows NT and 2000, the amount of memory that may be granted is limited to approximately 64 to 96 MiByte regardless of the computer memory size; some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits. Under Windows XP, the amount of memory that may be granted is limited to approximately the smaller of 512 MiByte or one half of the computer memory size; some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits. Under Windows XP(x64), the amount of memory that may be granted is limited to approximately the computer memory size minus 1 GiByte but not more than 27 Gbyte; some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits. Under Windows Vista, 7, or 8 32-Bit, the amount of memory that may be granted is limited to approximately the smaller of 1024 MiByte or one half of the computer memory size; some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits. Under Windows Vista 64-Bit, the amount of memory that may be granted is limited to approximately the smaller of 6 GiByte or one half of the computer memory size; some computer and/or Windows configurations may have lower limits. Under Windows 7 or 8/10/11 64-Bit the amount of memory that may be granted is not yet determined, but is probably similar to the Vista 64-Bit limits. If Request Forceful Frame Buffer Allocation is selected, almost all of the computer system memory can be used for frame buffers (leaving at least 32 MiByte for Windows NT, 64 MiByte for Windows 2000, 128 MiByte for Windows XP, 256 Mbyte for XP(x64), or 512 Mbyte for Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, or 11 64-Bit is advisable). However, the user must be careful to select the correct option each time Windows NT, 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, or 11 64-Bit boots. Also, the video display rate (and image processing) may be slower, but the video capture rate (such as Capture - Video to Frame Buffers) is not adversely affected.
Installation of these features require being logged on as Administrator, or have equivalent elevated privileges. Alternately, the Driver Assistant will open a User Account Control (UAC) dialog, asking the user for permissions as needed. (Depending on Windows' configuration, a simple acknowledgement may be requested, or a UAC login and password may be requested). This allows using XCAP's Driver Assistant on without elevating the entire XCAP application.
The Install PIXCI® Camera Link® Serial DLL installs or uninstalls the Camera Link Serial API DLL obeying the Camera Link specification, which is required when using a camera manufacturer's software to configure a camera via serial commands, via the Camera Link® specification's API, via the PIXCI® frame grabber. Either a Camera Link V1.0 API or V1.1/2.0 API specification DLL can be selected, as required by the camera manufacturer's software. Under Windows XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, or 11 64-Bit either a 32 bit or 64 bit version of the DLL can be selected, as required by the camera manufacturer's software. The location of the installed DLL can be forced to follow the V1.0, V1.1, or V2.0 Camera Link specification, to accommodate camera manufacturer's software. Under Windows NT, 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, or 11 64-Bit the Camera Link Serial API DLL can be used by the camera manufacturer's software at the time as XCAP has the PIXCI® frame grabber open for image capture and display.
The PIXCI® Camera Link Serial API DLL is NOT needed when XCAP provides a camera specific Capture - Adjustments dialog with integrated serial controls, or when explicit serial commands will be entered via XCAP's PIXCI® Serial Terminal; it is only needed for the sake of third party programs that intend to access the PIXCI® Camera Link serial port via the Camera Link Serial API.
The Install PIXCI® Serial (COM Port) Driver installs or uninstalls the virtual COM port driver, allowing camera manufacturer's software to configure a camera via serial commands, via a Windows COM port, via the PIXCI® frame grabber. The virtual COM port driver is supported under Windows XP and later. After installation, the Utilities - Message Log Utilities - Message Log reports the COM port designation assigned to the PIXCI® frame grabber(s); the Windows' Device Manager can also be used to determine the assignment of COM ports.
The PIXCI® Serial (COM Port) Driver is NOT needed when XCAP provides a camera specific Capture - Adjustments dialog with integrated serial controls, or when explicit serial commands will be entered via XCAP's PIXCI® Serial Terminal; it is only needed for the sake of third party programs that intend to access the PIXCI® Camera Link serial port as a Windows standard COM port.
The Install PIXCI® TWAIN Driver installs or uninstalls the TWAIN driver, allowing TWAIN compliant applications to capture images from PIXCI® frame grabbers. The PIXCI® TWAIN driver is NOT needed for use of the video capture, display, save, or similar features in XCAP.
The Install PIXCI® ImagePro Driver installs or uninstalls the ImagePro driver, allowing the third party ImagePro application to capture images from PIXCI® frame grabbers. The PIXCI® ImagePro driver is NOT needed for use of the video capture, display, save, or similar features in XCAP.
Installation of these features require being logged on as Administrator, or have equivalent elevated privileges. Alternately, the Driver Assistant will open a User Account Control (UAC) dialog, asking the user for permissions as needed. (Depending on Windows' configuration, a simple acknowledgement may be requested, or a UAC login and password may be requested). This allows using XCAP's Driver Assistant on without elevating the entire XCAP application.
The Install PIXCI® Driver installs or uninstalls the driver for the PIXCI® frame grabber; it can also compiles the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver under the current operating system, expecting that Linux' standard compilation tools and kernel build files have been installed. The Unload Conflicting Multimedia Drivers option unloads multimedia drivers that may cause conflicts with PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, or SV5L frame grabbers.
The Install PIXCI® Serial (TTY) Driver installs or uninstalls the serial (i.e. ''tty'') driver for the PIXCI® frame grabber; it can also compiles the PIXCI® serial driver under the current operating system, expecting that Linux' standard compilation tools and kernel build files have been installed. The PIXCI® Serial Driver can be installed only after the PIXCI® Driver has been installed. The optional PIXCI® Serial Driver is not supported under 2.4 kernels.
The PIXCI® Serial (TTY) Driver is NOT needed when XCAP provides a camera specific Capture - Adjustments dialog with integrated serial controls, or when explicit serial commands will be entered via XCAP's PIXCI® Serial Terminal; it is only needed for the sake of third party programs that intend to access the PIXCI® Camera Link serial port as a Linux standard ''ttyS'' device.
The Install PIXCI® V4L2 Driver installs or uninstalls the Video for Linux (V4L2) driver for the PIXCI® frame grabber; it also compiles the PIXCI® V4L2 driver under the current operating system, expecting that Linux' standard compilation tools and kernel build files have been installed. The PIXCI® V4L2 driver is NOT needed for use of XCAP's video capture, display, save or similar features; The PIXCI® V4L2 Driver can only be installed after the PIXCI® Driver has been installed.
The PIXCI® V4L2 Driver is NOT needed for use of the video capture, display, save, or similar features in XCAP; it is only needed for the sake of third party programs that intend to access the PIXCI® frame grabber as a Linux standard ''Video for Linux (V4L2)'' device.
The Install Authorization Blue Key Driver installs or uninstalls the driver(s) for the older, blue, authorization key used with XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, and XCAP-Ltd; but not with XCAP-Lite or XCAP-Viewer. If use of the parallel port key is selected (selection is mandatory on 2.4 and 2.6 32-bit kernels even if a USB key is used); the Install Authorization Blue Key Driver also compiles the authorization key's driver under the current operating system, expecting that Linux' standard compilation tools and kernel build files have been installed. The Install Authorization Green Key Driver installs or uninstalls the driver(s) for the newer, green, authorization key used with XCAP-Plus, XCAP-Std, and XCAP-Ltd; but not with XCAP-Lite or XCAP-Viewer. After installing the appropriate driver, use Change Setup under Utilities - Program Setup to change XCAP's configuration as per the current authorization key.
The Set PIXCI® Frame Buffer Memory Size allows specifying the amount of computer memory to be reserved for frame buffers.
If Request Normal Frame Buffer Allocation is selected, the requested frame buffer memory size may or may not be granted by Linux. If Request Forceful Frame Buffer Allocation is selected, almost all of the computer system memory can be used for frame buffers, leaving the minimum required by Linux. However, the user must be careful to select the correct option each time Linux boots. Also, the video display rate (and image processing) may be slower, but the video capture rate (such as Capture - Video to Frame Buffers) is not adversely affected.
The Request Forceful Frame Buffer Allocation option is not available for the nVidia TK1 (ARM Cortex-A15), the nVidia Nano, TX1, TX2, Xavier, Xavier NX (ARM Cortex-A57), or the Boundary Devices NITROGEN6 (ARM imx6).
Installation of these features require running XCAP with super-user privileges. Alternately, in conjunction with many Linux distributions supporting the ''gnome terminal'' or ''xterm'', the Driver Assistant will open a ''terminal'' window, use ''sudo'' to prompt the user for the appropriate password, and have ''sudo'' execute a prepared shell script. This allows using XCAP's Driver Assistant on Linux distributions which prohibit the running of GUI applications with super-user privileges, and avoids running the entire XCAP application as super-user.
The Set PIXCI® Driver Advanced Options provides various advanced options, some of which may be suggested by EPIX, Inc. Technical Support to help diagnose problems.
If multiple PIXCI® frame grabber are installed, the reserved frame buffer memory is divided evenly amongst all boards even if fewer than all installed boards are being opened (as selected by PIXCI® - Multiple Boards). If Reserve & Share Frame Buffer Memory is not selected, no memory is reserved for boards which are not being opened, providing more memory for those boards which are being opened.
For Windows NT, 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, and 11 64-Bit configurations using more than 1 or 2 GiBytes of frame buffer memory, the Map Frame Buffer Direct into App(lication) may have to be de-selected and the Map Frame Buffer on Demand in Sys(tem) may have to be selected to eliminate errors upon opening the PIXCI® frame grabbers. Deselecting Map Frame Buffer Direct into App(lication) may improve the live image display rate when Request Forceful Frame Buffer Allocation is used under Windows NT, 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, and 11 64-Bit (see PIXCI® - Driver Assistant). The Init Clear of Frame Buffers allows disabling the one time clearing (i.e. set to zero) of frame buffer memory; minimizing delay when the driver is loaded.
The Clear Frame Buffers on Format Change enables clearing (i.e. set to zero) of frame buffer memory and memory used for recording per frame buffer's capture status whenever the capture format resolution, bit depth, bit packing, or color space options are changed. This is intended so that display of the contents of the frame buffer(s), under the new format but before a new image is captured, will show a black image (or green for YUYV formats) rather than ''garbled'' pixel data. This option is ignored when using forceful image frame buffer allocation, or for PIXCI® CL3SD and SI2 frame grabbers with on-board frame buffer memory.
If Per-Frame Buffer Status: Use System Memory is selected, the per-frame status is recorded into system memory; the per-frame buffer capture status is not supported under Windows 95, 98, ME when using this option and the per-frame status is discarded upon closing the PIXCI® frame grabber(s). If Per-Frame Buffer Status: Use Frame Buffer Memory is selected, the per-frame buffer status is recorded into frame buffer memory; the per-frame buffer capture status may not be supported in conjunction with Forceful Frame Buffer Allocation when using this option. No error is displayed if the per-frame buffer capture status feature can't be provided.
For Windows XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, 11 64-Bit, and Linux 64 bit, if Restrict Non-Forceful Memory to be below 4 GiByte is selected, frame buffer memory is allocated below the 4 GiByte address boundary, allowing use of 32 bit PIXCI® frame grabbers that can't DMA to memory above the 4 GiByte address. For Windows (x64), it also allows use of 32 bit software that can't use frame buffer memory above the 4 GiByte address. This option only applies to Request Normal Frame Buffer Allocation, described above.
The Allocated/Assumed Size, Memory Partition Size, Allocated Hole Size, BIOS Hole Size, and Assumed Physical Address shows the requested memory configuration as set by the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant.
The Allow Share IRQ selects whether the PIXCI® driver is allowed to share an IRQ with other devices. Depending on the devices involved, IRQ sharing may be the cause of various problems, deselecting Allow Share IRQ provides a quick test whether the IRQ is being shared, although by itself, does not solve the problem(s). IRQ sharing is possible problem for cards using the older PCI bus w. IRQ pins, but not for cards using PCI Express and its Message Signaled Interrupts (MSI).
The Use IRQ selects whether the PIXCI® driver attempts to ''hook'' an IRQ. Deselecting Use IRQ provides a quick test whether configuration problems are due to IRQ assignment, or due to other causes. When the IRQ is not being used, the Poll Period specifies the frequency at which the driver should poll for status normally acquired via interrupt. The poll period should be no larger than ¼ of the expected video frame period.
Note:
The PIXCI® frame grabber requires an IRQ for proper operation,
Selecting
Disable IRQ
is intended only for diagnostic purposes.
If Stamp Per-Frame Buffer Status is selected, capture status is recorded and maintained for each captured buffer. Otherwise, status is recorded only for the most recent captured buffer.
Time stamping of captured frames, such as optionally used by Capture - Video to Frame Buffers, uses a timer service provided by the operating system. Under Windows 95, 98, and ME, Time Stamping Disabled (-TI) or Time Stamping w. System Time (-TI) (using Windows Get_Last_Updated_System_Time() service) can be selected. Under Windows NT Time Stamping Disabled (-TI) or Time Stamping w. System Time (-TI) (using Windows KeQuerySystemTime() service) can be selected. Under Windows 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, and 7 32/64-Bit, Time Stamping Disabled (-TI), Time Stamping w. System Time (-TI) (using Windows KeQuerySystemTime() service), Time Stamping w. Tick Count (-TI) (using Windows KeQueryTickCount() service), Time Stamping w. Interrupt Time (-TI) (using Windows KeQueryInterruptTime() service), or Time Stamping w. Performance Counter (-TI) (using Windows KeQueryPerformanceCounter() service) can be selected. Under 8/10 32/64-Bit and 11 64-Bit Time Stamping Disabled (-TI), Time Stamping w. System Time (-TI) (using Windows KeQuerySystemTime() service), Time Stamping w. Tick Count (-TI) (using Windows KeQueryTickCount() service), Time Stamping w. Interrupt Time (-TI) (using Windows KeQueryInterruptTime() service), Time Stamping w. Performance Counter (-TI) (using Windows KeQueryPerformanceCounter() service), or Time Stamping w. System Time Precise (-TI) (using Windows KeQuerySystemTimePrecise() service), can be selected. Under Linux, Time Stamping Disabled (-TI), Time Stamping w. Jiffies Time (-TI) (using Linux HZ & jiffies() service), Time Stamping w. Time of Day Time (-TI) (using Linux do_gettimeofday() for earlier kernels, or getnstimeofday() for kernel 5.x and later, service), Time Stamping w. Raw Monotonic Time (-TI) (using Linux getrawmonotonic() and falling back to Time Stamping w. Time of Day Time (-TI) if unavailable), or Time Stamping w. Jiffies_64 Time (-TI) (using Linux HZ & get_jiffies_64() service), can be selected.
Disabling use of time stamps may reduce system overhead, particularly when using very high frame rate cameras (1000+ fps). Other options have various advantages and disadvantages, and are best explained by the operating system's documentation.
The Unit Selection shows the numerical selection of multiple PIXCI® frame grabbers, as set by PIXCI® - Multiple Boards.
If Allow Shared Units is selected, multiple applications can open a PIXCI® frame grabber at the same time and share its use. Shared use of a PIXCI® frame grabber is only supported under Windows NT, 2000, XP, XP(x64), Vista 32/64-Bit, 7 32/64-Bit, 8/10 32/64-Bit, and 11 64-Bit and is typically used so that one application can control a camera via a Camera Link PIXCI® frame grabber's serial port, while another application handles video capture.
For PIXCI® E8CAM, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers, the I2C Speed allows adjusting the data rate of I2C communication to the camera head. When the camera head is connected via a shorter cable, a faster data rate allows quicker response to changes of gain, exposure, and other camera parameters. The I2C Speed is the requested rate; the actual rate may be slower.
For PIXCI® frame grabbers supporting Camera Link, the Serial Buffer Size allows adjusting the size of the transmit and receive serial data buffers. A value larger than the default, 1024 Bytes, might be needed for cameras using high baud rates and using large data ''packets''.
For PIXCI® frame grabbers supporting Camera Link, the Retain Camera Power (PoCL) after Close allows Power over Camera Link (PoCL) to be maintained after the PIXCI® frame grabber is closed and later reopened by software. Only selected versions of Camera Link PIXCI® frame grabbers support PoCL; older versions apply PoCL whenever the frame grabber is powered on; newer versions disable PoCL when the PIXCI® frame grabber is closed by software - subject to this option. Setting this option will also disable running of ''Data Path'' startup diagnostics.
For PIXCI® frame grabbers supporting Camera Link, the Ignore Serial Framing Error selects the ignoring of serial ''framing errors'' - the serial line signalling an invalid state. Otherwise, framing errors are reported in the Utilities - Message Log. Some cameras knowingly generate framing errors while the camera is initializing or changing video modes; ignoring framing errors helps eliminate unnecessary log entries.
The Advanced button provides various advanced options, some of which may be suggested by EPIX, Inc. Technical Support to help diagnose problems. It is a shortcut to the Driver Assistant - Advanced Options.
The PIXCI® - Video Setup window allows adjusting the PIXCI® frame grabber's, video format, video resolution, color space, or other board specific parameters, as appropriate for the particular board model.
The contents of the PIXCI® - Video Setup menu differs according to the PIXCI® frame grabber; typically the menu offers access to Format, Resolution, and Sync pages providing the adjustments needed for most applications. The PIXCI® - Video Setup menu typically also provides several choices under Custom; these are highly technical parameters; alteration of which should be avoided by most applications. The choices under Custom are not described here.
Changes to any of the PIXCI® - Video Setup parameters do not have immediate effect. The OK button implements the changes and closes the window, the Apply button implements the changes without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the changes.
The Select - Format subwindow offers selection of several predefined video formats.
For the PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, and SV5L frame grabbers the format window allows choosing Reset to default format ... ... RS-170, ... RS-170 (Sqr), ... NTSC S/Video, ... NTSC S/Video (Sqr), ... NTSC, ... NTSC (Sqr), ... CCIR, ... CCIR (Sqr), ... PAL S/Video, ... PAL S/Video (Sqr), ... PAL, or ... PAL (Sqr). The ''(Sqr)'' variations offer square pixels rather than maximum resolution. For the PIXCI® SV4, SV5, and SV5L frame grabbers additional, less frequently used, video formats are also shown.
For the PIXCI® SV5A and SV5B frame grabbers the format window allows choosing Reset to default format ... ... RS-170, ... RS-170 (Sqr), ... NTSC, ... NTSC (Sqr), ... CCIR, ... CCIR (Sqr), ... PAL, or ... PAL (Sqr). The ''(Sqr)'' variations offer square pixels rather than maximum resolution. Additional, less frequently used, video formats are also shown.
For the PIXCI® SV7 frame grabber the format window allows choosing Reset to default format ... ... RS-170, ... RS-170 (Sqr), ... NTSC, ... NTSC (Sqr), ... CCIR, ... CCIR (Sqr), ... PAL, or ... PAL (Sqr). The ''(Sqr)'' variations offer square pixels rather than maximum resolution.
For the PIXCI® SV8 frame grabber the format window allows choosing Reset to default format ... ... RS-170, ... RS-170 (Sqr), ... NTSC, ... NTSC (Sqr), ... NTSC/YC, ... NTSC/YC (Sqr), ... CCIR, ... CCIR (Sqr), ... PAL, ... PAL/YC, ... PAL (Sqr). or ... PAL/YC (Sqr). The ''(Sqr)'' variations offer square pixels rather than maximum resolution.
For the PIXCI® A310 frame grabber the format window allows choosing Reset to default format ... ... Video 720x480i 60Hz (RS-170), ... Video 720x480i 60Hz RGB, ... Video 720x576i 50Hz (CCIR), ... Video 720x576i 50Hz RGB, ... Video 1920x1080i 60Hz, ... Video 1920x1080i 60Hz RGB, ... Video 1920x1080i 50Hz, ... Video 1920x1080i 50Hz RGB, ... Video 1280x720p 50Hz, ... Video 1280x720p 50Hz RGB, ... Video 1280x720p 60Hz, ... Video 1280x720p 60Hz RGB, ... RS330 720x480i 60Hz, ... RS343 875i 60Hz, ... RS343 875i 60Hz RGB, ... SVGA 800x600 60Hz, ... SVGA 800x600 60Hz RGB, ... SXGA 1280x1024 60Hz, ... SXGA 1280x1024 60Hz RGB, ... VGA 640x480 60Hz, ... VGA 640x480 60Hz RGB, ... XGA 1024x768 60Hz, or ... XGA 1024x768 60Hz RGB. Other video formats can be supported by modifying the the PLL, A/D, and sync processor parameters under Select - Custom. For the PIXCI® A110 model, the format window is similar, but does not allow selecting RGB formats.
The Current Format shows the current format selection; or shows Customized if any significant parameters (typically excluding brightness, contrast, and similar tweaks) have been changed from the format's default settings.
For the PIXCI® CL1, CL2, CL3SD, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, D3XE, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, EL1DB, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers, where each frame grabber is camera specific, or a selected camera is coded as the frame grabber's default, no format window is provided.
The Select - Resolution subwindow offers selection of video resolution.
Every sampling process is subject to the fundamental tradeoff: resolution versus storage requirements. Selected PIXCI® frame grabbers allows the user to select the sampling resolution needed for a given application. Tuning the parameters for low resolution (subsampling) allows more frame buffers, longer sequence capture/display, faster image processing, and smaller file sizes when saved to disk. Separately, selected PIXCI® frame grabbers allow the active video window size (partial sampling) to be modified, allowing a smaller field of view and more frame buffers, while maintaining high resolution within the field of view.
The horizontal axis is denoted ''x'', the vertical axis is denoted ''y''. The coordinate of the upper left pixel is x=0, y=0; with coordinates increasing with movement right and down.
A video pixel is the smallest discrete dimensional unit that can be sampled from a camera, or the smallest discrete dimensional unit that can be displayed on a monitor. In the horizontal dimension it is commonly identified with the pixel clock period: one pixel clock period produces one video pixel.[19] In the vertical dimension, a video pixel is defined by the number and interlacing of scan lines; the horizontal scan period versus the vertical scan period.
A data pixel is a value (or set of values, if color) in the frame grabber's, or the computer's, memory.
For the sake of example, assume a camera with a maximum of eight video pixels on a line or column. For maximum resolution, each of these can be sampled, or converted, into a data pixel:
This uses a ''video size'', the number of video pixels used (and thus the camera's field of view), of eight; and eight ''pixels sampled''; each video pixel corresponds to one data pixel.D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 (data pixels)
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 V8 (video pixels)
The field of view can be narrowed, but still sampled at maximum resolution within the field of view:
This uses a video size of four, at a ''video left edge'' of three (the first three video pixels are ignored), and four pixels sampled; each video pixel that is used still corresponds to one data pixel.- - - D1 D2 D3 D4 -
^ ^ ^ ^ - - - V4 V5 V6 V7 -
For any field of view, there can be fewer data pixels than video pixels.
This uses a video size of eight, at a video left edge of zero, and four data pixels sampled; each data pixel has a video ''pixel width'' of 2.[20] During capture, one video sample is taken every two pixel periods. For display, each sample value determines the grey level of two displayable pixels. The resolution is halved, but so is the image's memory requirements.-D1-- -D2-- -D3-- -D4--
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 V8
The data pixels need not correspond to an integer number of video pixels:
This uses a video size of five, at a video left edge of one, and two pixels[21] sampled. Each data pixel has a video pixel width of 2.5.--D1---- ---D2---- ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ - V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 - -
The maximum number of video and data pixels per horizontal line, per vertical line, and other constraints on the video sampling parameters is a function of the video format, and of the PIXCI® frame grabber being used. The values entered under Resolution are always adjusted so as to be valid.
The Data Pixels per Line specifies the number of data pixels to be sampled or displayed per line. For PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, SV5L frame grabbers, the Video Pixels per Line specifies the number of video pixels which may be equal to, or larger, than Data Pixels per Line; if larger, the video is subsampled and each pixel's width is the ratio of Video Pixels per Line to Data Pixels per Line. For PIXCI® A110, A310, CL1, CL2, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, D3XE, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, EL1DB, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, SI4, SV7, and SV8 frame grabbers, the Video Pixels per Line and Data Pixels per Line must be identical. The Video Left Edge specifies the video left edge offset; the Video Right Edge notes the video right edge.
If Force Video L/R Centering is selected, the Video Left Edge is automatically set so as to center the active video window. If Force Max Data Pixels is selected, then Data Pixels per Line is adjusted to the maximum allowable. If Force Max Video Pixels is selected, then Video Pixels per Line is adjusted to the maximum allowable.
Parameters controlling the sampling in the vertical dimension are analogous to the parameters of the horizontal dimension, with an additional vertical parameter involving interlace, to be described. The above discussion for the horizontal dimension applies to the vertical dimension if ''line'' is substituted for ''pixel'', ''height'' for ''width'', ''top'' for ''left'', etc.
Selection of vertical sampling parameters is complicated by the vertical interlace used in RS-170 and other common formats. Briefly, the horizontal lines which constitute one frame of displayable video are split into two fields, each field composed of alternate lines. In RS-170 the number of vertical lines, and thus the maximum vertical dimension, is 480 split into two fields of 240 lines each.
If the video format is interlaced (such as RS-170): If Frame Buffer: 2 Fields is selected, then each field is stored in image memory and the total vertical dimension is twice the Data Lines per Field parameter; this provides highest vertical resolution. If Frame Buffer: 1 Field is selected, then image memory stores only one field; when displayed, both fields contain the same information. This is lower resolution, and uses less memory.
The Data Lines per Field, Video Lines per Field, Video Top Edge, Video Bottom Edge, all refer to lines within a single field directly analogous to pixels within a line (see above). If Frame Buffer: 1 Field is selected in an interlaced video format, then each line's height is effectively, and additionally, doubled.
This method of handling the Frame Buffer: 2 Fields versus Frame Buffer: 1 Field option might at first appear counter-intuitive. But, the choice for the Frame Buffer: 2 Fields versus Frame Buffer: 1 Field must be based on more than the desired sampling resolution. Specifically, if Frame Buffer: 2 Fields is selected, capturing a camera view with any movement will cause, when displayed, appearance of shaking or oscillating in addition to blur. This is due to the time differential between the two fields. If a camera view with movement is captured with Frame Buffer: 1 Field selected, then only blur will result.
As use of Frame Buffer: 2 Fields versus Frame Buffer: 1 Field is often constrained by the current camera subject, the selected method of handling these parameters allows modifying the Frame Buffer: 2 Fields versus Frame Buffer: 1 Field parameters without having to modify the other vertical parameters. The perceived video height, for example, will remain constant regardless of the Frame Buffer: 2 Fields versus Frame Buffer: 1 Field selection. Note that in video formats which are not interlaced, the Frame Buffer: 1 Field is always selected.
A few, rare, cameras use horizontal interlacing of multiple ''Phylds''. The above discussion for the vertical interlacing applies to horizontal interlacing if Phylds is substituted for Fields, ''horizontal'' for ''vertical'', etc.
The Data Pixel Format selects or shows the pixel color space and number of color components per pixel, while the Bits per Data Pixel selects or shows the number of bits per color component. If Force Max Pixies & Bits is selected, the maximum grey level or color resolution is selected. If Default Max Pixies & Bits is selected, the default grey level or color resolution is selected. Whether these parameters are actually alterable, or only display current values, is dependent on the features of the current frame grabber.
The Memory per Image Buffer shows the number of bytes of memory required to store a single frame, as specified by the above parameters. The Frame Buffers in Memory is the number of image frame buffers that fit within the current frame buffer memory.
In some video formats, it may be possible to specify an image size so large that not even one image can fit into image memory. In such an event, the parameters will automatically be adjusted until at least one image can fit.
The Select - Sync subwindow offers selection of additional video modes affecting synchronization or timing.
If Switch after Even Field is selected, when terminating continuous digitization, or switch from one buffer to another, the termination or switch has effect after the next even field. If Switch after Odd Field is selected, the termination or switch has effect after the next odd field. If Switch after Any Field is selected, the termination or switch has effect after the next field. The parameter has no effect on PIXCI® frame grabbers which don't support, or are not currently using, an interlaced video format.
If Genlock in Digitize is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber locks to the video source; otherwise the video source is expected to lock to the PIXCI® frame grabber. All current PIXCI® A110, A310, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, SV5L, SV7, and SV8 frame grabbers only operate in genlock mode. The Genlock in Digitize selection is not used by the PIXCI® CL1, CL2, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, D3XE, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, EL1DB, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers, which support digital cameras.
The PIXCI® - Export Video Setup allows saving the PIXCI® frame grabber's current video format, video resolution, color space, or other board specific parameters as appropriate for the particular board model. The parameters saved correspond to the parameters set under PIXCI® - Video Setup.
The PIXCI® - Export Video Setup exports the video state as ``C'' structure initializers. These exported structures are useful to programs using the PIXCI® ``C'' Library bearing the same version number as XCAP, particularly in conjunction with customized video formats. Refer to the PIXCI® XCOBJ ``C'' LIBRARY REFERENCE MANUAL or PIXCI® XCLIB ``C'' LIBRARY REFERENCE MANUAL for proper use of these initializers.
For selected Camera Link cameras, and if Include Camera Link Serial Commands is selected, the serial commands necessary to put the camera into its current state is also saved in the video setup. These commands are sent to the camera when the video setup is loaded via the XCLIB ''C'' library.
For SILICON VIDEO® cameras, if Include I2C Commands or Include SPI Commands is selected, the necessary I2C or SPI commands, respectively, to put the camera into its current state are also saved in the video setup. These commands are sent to the camera when the video setup is loaded via the XCLIB ''C'' library.
The PIXCI® - Import Video Setup allows loading a video setup, previously saved by the same, or a compatible version of, XCAP. For selected Camera Link cameras, if the video setup includes Camera Link serial commands, these commands are sent to the camera.[22] For SILICON VIDEO® cameras, if the video setup includes I2C commands, these commands are sent to the camera.
The PIXCI® - Status window allows inspection and alteration of certain low level PIXCI® frame grabber parameters. The features within the PIXCI® - Status window are dependent on the PIXCI® frame grabber's model and submodel; some features described may not appear, or may not be applicable.
The Update button causes an update of the PIXCI® - Status. If Live is selected, the PIXCI® - Status is automatically updated periodically, with the update period selected by Live Period.
The Video Status section shows the current video status, such as the current field/frame count, the current line count, the current field oddness or evenness, the last video timing event, and a tally of video timing and capture errors. The value of the general purpose inputs (formerly referred to as external TTL inputs) as of the last video field, and a tally of general purpose inputs transitions are shown.
The G.P.I.O (i.e. General Purpose Inputs and Outputs, formerly referred to as external TTL inputs and outputs) section shows the current value of the general purpose inputs, allows resetting latched general purpose inputs, and allows setting the value of the general purpose outputs.
For PIXCI® frame grabbers supporting Camera Link, the Camera Link CC G(eneral) P(urpose) Outputs allows setting the value of the Camera Link CC output lines, for those CC lines which are not otherwise used (or reserved) for video control. (Both for historical reasons and to be conservative, video formats typically reserve all of the CC lines to be used for video control — so as to avoid accidental interference with video). Camera Link CC lines whose corresponding checkbox is active are available as general purpose outputs; see the PIXCI® - Video Setup to specify whether one or more CC lines are to be available as general purpose outputs. Changes via Camera Link CC G(eneral) P(urpose) Outputs are not synchronized to, or delayed waiting for, horizontal or vertical video timing. Generally, for most if not all frame grabbers, they are synchronized to the camera's pixel clock and thus require the presence of the camera's clock.
The Device Info section show the current PIXCI® frame grabber's model and submodel or preset, the amount of memory available for frame buffers, the number of PIXCI® frame grabbers currently in operation, some of the resources assigned to the PIXCI® frame grabber(s), and version identification of the PIXCI® library and drivers.
The PIXCI® Connections window provides, as appropriate for the specific model of PIXCI® frame grabber, a map of the board's connections, connectors, option jumpers, and adjustments, if any.
For the PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, and SV5L the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the video and general purpose input/output (GIO) connections on the board's bracket and on the header connector(s) on the board. There are no option jumpers or adjustments.
For the PIXCI® SV7 the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the video and general purpose input/output (GIO) connections on the board's bracket and on the header connector(s) on the board. There are no option jumpers or adjustments.
For the PIXCI® SV8 the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the video and general purpose input/output (GIO) connections on the board's bracket and on the header connector(s) on the board. There are no option jumpers or adjustments.
For the PIXCI® A110 and A310 the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the video, various sync connections, and general purpose input/output (GIO) connections on the board's bracket and on the header connector(s) on the board. There are no option jumpers or adjustments.
For the PIXCI® CL1, CL2, CL3SD, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, D3XE, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E8CAM, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, EL1DB, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the connector(s) on the board's bracket, describes the header connector(s) on the board, and, where applicable, the connector of the optional differential to TTL converter. There are no option jumpers or adjustments.
For the PIXCI® E4 and E4DB the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the connector(s) on the board's bracket, describes the header connector(s) on the board, and the connector of the optional differential to TTL converter. For boards prior to Rev 4 there are no option jumpers or adjustments. For Rev 4 boards, the PIXCI® E4 versus E4DB option switch is also described; some boards also have a switch to enable or disable Power over Camera Link (PoCL).
For the PIXCI® E8 and E8DB the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the connector(s) on the board's bracket, describes the header connector(s) on the board, the connector of the optional differential to TTL converter, and the PIXCI® E8 versus E8DB option switch. Some boards also have a switch to enable or disable Power over Camera Link (PoCL).
For the PIXCI® e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, and e104x4-f2b, the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the connector(s) on the board, and describes the header connector(s) on the board.
For the PIXCI® E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, and E4G2-F2B, the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the connector(s) on the board's bracket, and describes the connector(s) on the board.
For the PIXCI® E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, and E4TX2-F2B, the PIXCI® Connections illustrates the connector(s) on the board, and describes the header connector(s) on the board.
For the PIXCI® CL1, CL2, CL3SD, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, and EL1DB Camera Link compatible frame grabbers, the PIXCI® - Serial Terminal allows ''raw'' serial communication with a Camera Link camera. For many cameras, XCAP includes more convenient, camera-specific ''smart'' controls, provided after a camera-specific frame grabber is opened, via the Capture - Adjustments; the PIXCI® - Serial Terminal is not needed.
The PIXCI® - Serial Terminal provides the same features as described for Utilities - RS-232 Terminal, except that the Setup allows enabling or disabling use of the Camera Link serial ''port'', rather than specifying a ''COM'' port (under Windows) or a ''ttyS'' device (under Linux).
The
PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery
and
PIXCI® Image-Pro Sourcery
feature allows using XCAP, in conjunction with the
''XCAP Sourcery''
TWAIN driver
and/or the
''XCAP Sourcery''
Image-Pro driver,
as a component of a
''smart''
TWAIN Source (TWAIN terminology) or
Video/Digital source (Image-Pro terminology),
allowing other TWAIN compliant applications and/or Image-Pro
to capture images from the PIXCI® frame grabber,
while XCAP provides frame grabber, camera controls,
and, optionally, image preprocessing.[23]
The
PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery
and
PIXCI® Image-Pro Sourcery
features are available only under Windows.
The On button activates XCAP support for both TWAIN and Image-Pro ''XCAP Sourcery'' drivers; once activated, XCAP can respond to requests from the TWAIN application or from Image-Pro via the ''XCAP Sourcery'' drivers. The Off button de-activates support for both TWAIN and Image-Pro ''XCAP Sourcery'' drivers. The Hide button hides the PIXCI® - TWAIN Sourcery and Image-Pro Sourcery window, but does not de-activate support for the TWAIN and Image-Pro ''XCAP Sourcery'' drivers. The PIXCI® frame grabber must remain open (see PIXCI® - Open/Close) for the PIXCI® - TWAIN Sourcery and Image-Pro Sourcery to provide support for the TWAIN and Image-Pro ''XCAP Sourcery'' drivers.
The
TWAIN Force Bits per Sample,
TWAIN Default Bits per Sample,
TWAIN Allow File Xfer Mode,
TWAIN Force/Default Bits,
and
TWAIN Auto Live on Show
set options as described in the
''XCAP Sourcery''
TWAIN driver documentation.
Upon use of the TWAIN application's ''Acquire'' (the terminology used within the TWAIN application may differ), or upon use of the Image-Pro ''Preview'', the PIXCI® - TWAIN Sourcery and Image-Pro Sourcery presents the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window. This implies automatically un-minimizing or de-iconizing XCAP, if XCAP was previously minimized or iconized, and opening a PIXCI® Image Viewer Window if one was not previously open. The PIXCI® Image Viewer Window is brought to the foreground and in front of the TWAIN or Image-Pro application. If Create Image Viewer as Default Size is selected and a PIXCI® Image Viewer Window is opened, its size is always set to Size Window: Default (see Display - Window) so as not to entirely obscure the TWAIN or Image-Pro application. If Activate Image Viewer as Always-On-Top is selected, the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window and its subwindows, are set to always be ''above'' other windows; subject to the other windows' also requesting Always-On-Top, and the whims of the host operating system. (see Image Viewer - View).
Normal XCAP controls such as Snap, Live, and UnLive, (see PIXCI® Image Viewer Window) can be used to capture images into the PIXCI® image frame buffer(s). A ''Snap'' button in the TWAIN popup window[24] duplicates the function of Snap.
Using the ''Acquire'' button in the TWAIN popup window, or the ''Snap'' button in the Image-Pro popup window acquires the image in the currently displayed PIXCI® image frame buffer into the TWAIN application or into an Image-Pro workspace.
Depending on the relative size and position of XCAP's windows and the TWAIN application's or Image-Pro's windows, the TWAIN popup window or the Image-Pro popup window may be hidden. Duplicate controls are provided within the PIXCI® - TWAIN Sourcery and Image-Pro Sourcery; the Acquire Image into TWAIN Application and Cancel TWAIN Application Acquire duplicating the TWAIN popup dialog's ''Acquire'' and ''Cancel'' buttons, and Snap Image into Image-Pro Workspace and Cancel Image-Pro Acquisition Preview duplicating Image-Pro's popup dialog's ''Snap'' and ''Close'' buttons.[25] For convenience, the same functions are duplicated under Capture in the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window as TWAIN App: Acquire Image, TWAIN App: Cancel Acquire, Image-Pro: Snap Image, and Image-Pro: Cancel Preview.
Using the ''Cancel'' button in the TWAIN popup window, or either the ''Stop Preview'' or the ''Cancel'' button in the Image-Pro popup window (or their duplicated equivalents), the PIXCI® - TWAIN Sourcery and Image-Pro Sourcery releases the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window. This implies closing the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window if one was previously opened, and re-minimizing or re-iconizing XCAP as per its previous state.
If the
Show TWAIN Popup Controls
if selected, the TWAIN popup window does not appear,
in favor of using the
Acquire Image into TWAIN Application
and
Cancel TWAIN Application Acquire
buttons.
There are (at least) three popular styles of arranging XCAP and the TWAIN or Image-Pro application.
One style is to share screen real estate: Using standard Window's move and resize features, resize XCAP to one half or one third of the screen, and resize the TWAIN or Image-Pro application to one half or two thirds of the screen, positioning each so as not to overlap. This allows easy switching between the two applications, with neither covering the other.
A second style is to let XCAP and the TWAIN or Image-Pro application be their default size - typically full screen. Upon use of the TWAIN application's ''Acquire'' or upon use of the Image-Pro ''Preview'', XCAP will be brought to the foreground and in front of the TWAIN or Image-Pro application, effectively hiding the TWAIN or Image-Pro application's ''Acquire'', ''Snap'', and/or ''Cancel'' controls. However, the duplicate controls provided by XCAP are also brought to the foreground, and can be used instead.
Finally, the TWAIN or Image-Pro application's size can be left as their default size, and XCAP's ''footprint'' reduced by selecting PIXCI® Viewer is Main Window (see Utilities - Program Setup) and Create Image Viewer as Default Size. This eliminates the XCAP Main Window, and maintains the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window size so as not to obscure the TWAIN or Image-Pro application.
If XCAP's primary, or only, intended use is support of the PIXCI® frame grabber via the TWAIN or Image-Pro application, selecting all of Minimize after Startup, Background Task in System Tray, Auto Startup w. Windows, Open PIXCI® on Startup, TWAIN Sourcery on Startup, Image-Pro Sourcery on Startup, PIXCI® Viewer is Main Window, PIXCI® Viewer is Minimal TWAIN Sourcery, and PIXCI® Viewer is Minimal Image-Pro Sourcery (see Utilities - Program Setup), and Create Image Viewer as Default Size will configure XCAP to automatically start with Windows, automatically appear only as needed by the TWAIN or Image-Pro application, and remove features from XCAP that are not needed for TWAIN or Image-Pro support. The PIXCI® Viewer is Minimal TWAIN Sourcery, and PIXCI® Viewer is Minimal Image-Pro Sourcery options also add shortcuts (see PIXCI® Image Viewer - Capture - Shortcuts) which duplicate the effect of the Acquire Image into TWAIN Application, Cancel TWAIN Application Acquire, Snap Image into Image-Pro Workspace, and Cancel Image-Pro Acquisition Preview buttons.
The windows accessible under Image Viewer Window - File allows saving, loading, or printing the image, and shows information about the image's dimensions, pixel depth and color space.
Two items under Image Viewer Window - File have direct effect, rather than activating a window. The Close Viewer closes the Image Viewer Window, but does not destroy the image (sequence). The Close & Dispose of Image closes the Image Viewer Window and destroys the image (sequence). The image viewer window associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffer(s) does not provide a Close & Dispose of Image; an image viewer window is available whenever the PIXCI® frame grabber is open for use.
The Image File - Save window allows saving the current image in a variety of file formats. Images can also be saved directly to an FTP URL.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
If File is selected, the image is to be saved to a file pathname. If URL is selected, the image is to be saved to an FTP URL.
The
File Name
field allows explicit entry of a path and file name;
alternately, the
Browse
button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style
file browsing dialog box.
XCAP does not force the file name's extension
to be the customary extension;
although using
.btf
for BigTIFF format,
.bmp
for BMP format,
.fts
for FITS format,
.tif
for TIFF format,
etc., is recommended.
The OK or Apply may be clicked without a File Name; the effect of the Browse button and OK or Apply, respectively, is combined.
The Image URL field allows explicit entry of an FTP URL to which the image is to be saved. The URL should have a format similar to:
The FTP User ID and FTP Password must be set with the used ID and password that allows access to the Image URL. If FTP to .tmp and Rename the image is saved to the specified Image URL with ''.tmp'' appended, then renamed to Image URL; this prevents other programs or users from seeing a partial file while the save operation is in progress. The FTP Timeout limits the period of time used by the save operation.ftp://domain.com/pretty.tif ftp://ftp.domain.com/images/pretty.tif
One of the industry standard file formats TIFF, BigTIFF, JPEG/JFIF, BMP, FITS, or Portable Map, or ''raw'' formats X/Y Binary or X/Y ASCII, can be selected.
The
TIFF
selects saving the image as a TIFF format file (i.e.
.tif
).
For TIFF, the file size may be as large as 4 GiByte.
subject to the operating system's limitations on file size.
Several options pertaining to TIFF format files are under the TIFF What, TIFF With, TIFF How and similar sections.
If Save All Bits per Pixie is selected, each pixel is saved with necessary and sufficient bits - none lacking and none added. If Save Other Bits per Pixie is selected, the Save Bits per Pixie allows saving fewer, or more, bits per pixel value component. For example, assuming a 10 bit per pixel grey level image, setting Save Bits per Pixie to 8 allows saving the 8 most significant bits of each pixel, producing a TIFF file which is acceptable for programs limited to 8 bit pixels. Or, setting Save Bits per Pixie to 16 allows saving each pixel as two bytes; wasteful, but other imaging programs may require a 16 bit representation for pixels with 9 through 16 bits. The Save 8 Bits per Pixie and Save 16 Bits per Pixie selections are shortcuts to select these two, commonly used, options.
If the combined settings of Save 8 Bits per Pixie, Save 16 Bits per Pixie, Save Other Bits per Pixie, and Save Bits per Pixie specify that additional bits are to be saved, then if Postfix 0 bits is selected, the pixel value component is extended with 0 bits on the right, if Prefix 0 bits is selected, the pixel value component is extended with 0 bits on the left. For example, if saving a 10 bit pixel with value 1023 (11111111112) as a 16 bit pixel, if Postfix 0 bits is selected the value saved is 65472 (11111111110000002), if Prefix 0 bits is selected the value saved is 1023 (00000011111111112).
The Save w. Palette Data is only an option for images with an attached palette. For such images, if Save w. Palette Data is selected, the attached palette is saved along with the image, otherwise the attached palette is not saved.
The Image Description Tag can be used to add a description to the saved image. If Description Tag: Add Camera Settings is selected, the current camera settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Description Tag: Add Camera Status is selected, the current camera status (such as temperature, for cameras that report temperature and where the displayed temperature is updated automatically) from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Description Tag: Add Camera Info is selected, the camera's static info (such as model and serial number), if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Description Tag: Add A-D Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current analog to digital conversion settings, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Description Tag: Add Trig(ger) & Timing Gen(erator) Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current trigger generator settings, timing generator settings, and other settings which configure the camera, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Description Tag: Add All Capture & Adjust Settings is selected, all settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. The Copyright Notice Tag can be used to add a copyright notices to the saved image.
The Date&Time Tag with date and time will be saved with the image. If Current Date&Time is selected, the current date and time is used. If Edit Date&Time is selected, an arbitrary date and time can be entered. If Image's Date&Time Stamp is selected, the image's date and time capture stamp is used; if the image does not have a date and time capture stamp then the current date and time is used. If TIFF Compliant is selected, the Date&Time Tag is in TIFF standard format with one second resolution. If TIFF.millisec or TIFF.millisec.microsec is selected, the Date&Time Tag provides millisecond or microsecond resolution respectively, but is not in TIFF standard; other programs may not be able to interpret the extended Date&Time Tag.
If Use Resolution Tag is selected, a notice of horizontal and vertical image resolution specified numerically by Horizontal Resolution Tag and Vertical Resolution Tag along with units specified as Dimensionless Ratio, Inches, or Centimeters is saved with the image.
If Compression: None is selected, the image is saved with no compression (also termed Packed in TIFF terminology). If Compression: PackBits Lossless is selected, the image is saved with TIFF standard PackBits type compression. The Compression: PackBits Lossless is most effective when used with monochrome images, or index+palette images, of 1, 2, 4 or 8 bit pixels. If Compression: LZW (Lempel-Ziv-Welch) Lossless is selected, the image is saved with TIFF standard LZW type compression without predictors, if Compression: LZW-HP (Lempel-Ziv-Welch) Lossless is selected, the image is saved with TIFF standard LZW type compression with horizontal predictors. The Compression: LZW (Lempel-Ziv-Welch) Lossless and Compression: LZW-HP (Lempel-Ziv-Welch) Lossless are most effective when used with images of 1, 2, 4 or 8 bit pixels. If Compression: EPIX® Lossless or Compression: EPIX® Lossless-HP are selected, the image is saved in a ''private'' (to use the TIFF terminology) compression method defined by EPIX, Inc., and should not be used for image files being exported to non-EPIX® imaging programs. The Compression: EPIX® Lossless and Compression: EPIX® Lossless-HP are not supported for pixel components larger than 12 bit.
Generally, the Compression: LZW-HP (Lempel-Ziv-Welch) Lossless and Compression: EPIX® Lossless-HP provide the most compression with highest CPU overhead, the Compression: EPIX® Lossless and Compression: EPIX® Lossless-HP provide less compression with less CPU overhead, and Compression: PackBits Lossless provide the least compression with minimal CPU overhead. The ''HP'' variations of Compression: LZW-HP (Lempel-Ziv-Welch) Lossless and Compression: EPIX® Lossless-HP use a ''Horizontal Predictor'' to increase compression on some types of images.
The File Strip Size parameter allows control over the saved TIFF file internal format, namely the strip size. This option is useful when exporting TIFF files from XCAP for use by other programs that can't accept standard TIFF strip size (typically, only some older programs, running on 16 bit processors, have strip size limitations). If File Strip Size: Default is selected, the standard TIFF strip size is used. If the saved file can't be imported into the other program, a file saved with File Strip Size of 1 (i.e. minimum strip size), and a file saved with File Strip Size of 9999999 (i.e. maximum strip size) should each be tried. These options don't affect reloading of saved files by XCAP, which supports all strip sizes.
The
BigTIFF
selects saving the image as a BigTIFF format file (i.e.
.btf
).
For BigTIFF, the file size may be as large as 16 EiByte
(264 bytes),
subject to the operating system's limitations on file size.
Several options pertaining to BigTIFF format files are under the BigTIFF What, BigTIFF With, BigTIFF How and similar sections; and provide similar options as for TIFF Format, above.
The
JPEG/JFIF
selects saving the image as a JPEG/JFIF format file (i.e.
.jpg
)
with lossy compression.
Several options pertaining to JPEG/JFIF format files are under
the
JPEG Quality,
JPEG Aspect,
JPEG Info
and similar sections.
The saved image quality can be set, and the compression rate indirectly set, as Compression Quality. A Compression Quality of 100.0% yields the highest quality, but still has significant compression and is lossy; i.e. the restored image will not match, bit for bit, the original image. A Compression Quality of 0.1% yields the maximum compression. The actual compression rate (i.e. bits per pixel) and the visual effect of any given Compression Quality depends upon the image size, resolution, and content.
The Encode Mode allows selecting the use of Floating (Point) Code or Integer Code. The Integer Code yields slightly lower quality images, but, on some computers, is faster.
The Resolution Units, Horizontal Resolution, and Vertical Resolution specify the saved image's aspect ratio or dimensions. The Image Comment can be used to add a comment to the image. If Comment: Add Camera Settings is selected, the current camera settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Comment when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Camera Status is selected, the current camera status (such as temperature, for cameras that report temperature and where the displayed temperature is updated automatically) from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Camera Info is selected, the camera's static info (such as model and serial number), if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Comment: Add A-D Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current analog to digital conversion settings, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Comment when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Trig(ger) & Timing Gen(erator) Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current trigger generator settings, timing generator settings, and other settings which configure the camera, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Comment when the image is saved. If Comment: Add All Capture & Adjust Settings is selected, all settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Comment when the image is saved.
The Date&Time Comment with date and time can be saved with the image. If Current Date&Time is selected, the current date and time is used. If Edit Date&Time is selected, an arbitrary date and time can be entered. If Image's Date&Time Stamp is selected, the image's date and time capture stamp is used; if the image does not have a date and time capture stamp then the current date and time is used. If Second Resolution is selected, the Date&Time Comment is in format
with one second resolution. If Millisec. Resolution or Microsec. Resolution is selected, the Date&Time Comment is in formatDate&Time=YYYY.MM.DD HH.MM.SS
orDate&Time=YYYY.MM.DD HH.MM.SS.MMM
with millisecond or microsecond resolution, respectively, If None is selected, the Date&Time Comment is not saved with the image.Date&Time=YYYY.MM.DD HH.MM.SS.MMM.UUU
The
BMP
selects saving the image as a
Windows Device Independent Bitmap format file (i.e.
.bmp
).
Several options pertaining to BMP format files are under
the
BMP What,
BMP With,
and similar sections.
For monochrome image, with attached palette, if Save w. Palette Data is selected, the images attached palette is saved along with the image, otherwise a monochromatic, identity, palette is saved. The Save w. Palette Data has no effect when used with color images.
For monochrome images, either 1 Bit per Pixie, 2 Bits per Pixie, or 8 Bits per Pixie can be saved. This selection has no effect for color images, for which the BMP format only supports 8 bits per pixel component.
The Horizontal Pixels per Meter Info and Vertical Pixels per Meter Info allow specifying the image's aspect ratio coded into the file, but does not affect the pixel data stored.
The
FITS
selects saving the image as a FITS format file (i.e.
.fts
).
Several options pertaining to FITS format files are under
the
FITS What
FITS With
and similar sections.
If Save All Bits per Pixie is selected, each pixel is saved with necessary and sufficient bits - none lacking and none added. If Save Other Bits per Pixie is selected, the Save Bits per Pixie allows saving fewer, or more, bits per pixel value component. For example, assuming a 10 bit per pixel grey level image, setting Save Bits per Pixie to 8 allows saving the 8 most significant bits of each pixel, producing a FITS file which is acceptable for programs limited to 8 bit pixels. Or, setting Save Bits per Pixie to 16 allows saving each pixel as two bytes; wasteful, but other imaging programs may require a 16 bit representation for pixels with 9 through 16 bits. The Save 8 Bits per Pixie and Save 16 Bits per Pixie selections are shortcuts to select these two, commonly used, options.
If the combined settings of Save 8 Bits per Pixie, Save 16 Bits per Pixie, Save Other Bits per Pixie, and Save Bits per Pixie specify that additional bits are to be saved, then if Postfix 0 bits is selected, the pixel value component is extended with 0 bits on the right, if Prefix 0 bits is selected, the pixel value component is extended with 0 bits on the left. For example, if saving a 10 bit pixel with value 1023 (11111111112) as a 16 bit pixel, if Postfix 0 bits is selected the value saved is 65472 (11111111110000002), if Prefix 0 bits is selected the value saved is 1023 (00000011111111112).
For images with attached palette, if Save Palette Data is selected, the attached palette data is saved instead of the image, if Save Image Data is selected, the image data is saved without the palette.
The Object Card, Observer Card, Origin Card, Comment Card(s), and History Card(s), can be used to add a description of the date of observation, a description of the object, a description of the observer, a description of the origin, and other comments and history, respectively, to the saved image. If Comment: Add Camera Settings is selected, the current camera settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Comment Card(s) when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Camera Status is selected, the current camera status (such as temperature, for cameras that report temperature and where the displayed temperature is updated automatically) from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Camera Info is selected, the camera's static info (such as model and serial number), if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Comment: Add A-D Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current analog to digital conversion settings, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Comment Card(s) when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Trig(ger) & Timing Gen(erator) Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current trigger generator settings, timing generator settings, and other settings which configure the camera, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Comment Card(s) when the image is saved. If Comment: Add All Capture & Adjust Settings is selected, all settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Comment Card(s) when the image is saved.
The Date Card with date and time will be saved with the image. If Current Date&Time is selected, the current date and time is used. If Edit Date&Time is selected, an arbitrary date and time can be entered. If Image's Date&Time Stamp is selected, the image's date and time capture stamp is used; if the image does not have a date and time capture stamp then the current date and time is used. If Sec(ond) Resolution is selected, the Date Card is in format
with one second resolution. If Millisec. Resolution is selected, the card is in formatyyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss
with millisecond resolution.yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss.sss
The Date-Obs Card with date and time will be saved with the image; with similar, but independent, options as described for the Date Card.
If Color in Planar Format is selected, a color image of size X×Y will be saved as a data array with three axes, dimensioned with X, Y, and 3 elements (assuming, for example, 3-component RGB color), respectively. If Color in Packed Format is selected, a color image of size X×Y will be saved as a data array with three axes, dimensioned with 3, X, and Y elements (assuming, for example, 3-component RGB color), respectively. If Monochromatic as 3-Axis Data is selected, a grey or monochromatic (e.g. a color slice) image of size X×Y will be saved as a data array with three axes, dimensioned with X, Y, and 1 elements or with 1, X, and Y elements, as selected above. If Monochromatic as 2-Axis Data is selected, a grey or monochromatic (e.g. a color slice) image of size X×Y will be saved as a data array with two axes, dimensioned with X and Y elements.
As the FITS format does not make provision for describing an image's color space or aspect ratio, such information is added by XCAP to the FITS file header as comments upon ''BLANK'' records. Such notations will be ignored by other FITS readers.
The
Portable Map
selects saving the image as a Portable Bit Map, Portable Gray Map, or Portable Pixel Map, format file
(i.e.
.pbm
,
.pgm
,
or
.ppm
).
Several options pertaining to Portable Map format files are under
the
Pxm What,
PxM With,
and similar sections.
If Save All Bits per Pixie is selected, each pixel is saved with necessary and sufficient bits - none lacking and none added. If Save Other Bits per Pixie is selected, the Save Bits per Pixie allows saving fewer, or more, bits per pixel value component. For example, assuming a 10 bit per pixel grey level image, setting Save Bits per Pixie to 8 allows saving the 8 most significant bits of each pixel, producing a Portable Map file which is acceptable for programs limited to 8 bit pixels. Or, setting Save Bits per Pixie to 16 allows saving each pixel as two bytes; wasteful, but other imaging programs may require a 16 bit representation for pixels with 9 through 16 bits. The Save 8 Bits per Pixie and Save 16 Bits per Pixie selections are shortcuts to select these two, commonly used, options.
If the combined settings of Save 8 Bits per Pixie, Save 16 Bits per Pixie, Save Other Bits per Pixie, and Save Bits per Pixie specify that additional bits are to be saved, then if Postfix 0 bits is selected, the pixel value component is extended with 0 bits on the right, if Prefix 0 bits is selected, the pixel value component is extended with 0 bits on the left. For example, if saving a 10 bit pixel with value 1023 (11111111112) as a 16 bit pixel, if Postfix 0 bits is selected the value saved is 65472 (11111111110000002), if Prefix 0 bits is selected the value saved is 1023 (00000011111111112).
For images with attached palette, if Save Palette Data is selected, the attached palette data is saved instead of the image, if Save Image Data is selected, the image data is saved without the palette.
The Image Comment can be used to add a comment to the image. If Comment: Add Camera Settings is selected, the current camera settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Comment when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Camera Status is selected, the current camera status (such as temperature, for cameras that report temperature and where the displayed temperature is updated automatically) from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Camera Info is selected, the camera's static info (such as model and serial number), if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Comment: Add A-D Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current analog to digital conversion settings, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Comment when the image is saved. If Comment: Add Trig(ger) & Timing Gen(erator) Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current trigger generator settings, timing generator settings, and other settings which configure the camera, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Comment when the image is saved. If Comment: Add All Capture & Adjust Settings is selected, all settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Comment when the image is saved.
The Date&Time Comment with date and time can be saved with the image. If Current Date&Time is selected, the current date and time is used. If Edit Date&Time is selected, an arbitrary date and time can be entered. If Image's Date&Time Stamp is selected, the image's date and time capture stamp is used; if the image does not have a date and time capture stamp then the current date and time is used. If Second Resolution is selected, the Date&Time Comment is in format
with one second resolution. If Millisec. Resolution or Microsec. Resolution is selected, the Date&Time Comment is in formatDate&Time=YYYY.MM.DD HH.MM.SS
orDate&Time=YYYY.MM.DD HH.MM.SS.MMM
with millisecond or microsecond resolution, respectively, If None is selected, the Date&Time Comment is not saved with the image.Date&Time=YYYY.MM.DD HH.MM.SS.MMM.UUU
The X/Y Binary selects saving the image pixels in a simple left-to-right, top-to-bottom scan with each pixel saved in binary. There is no file header or trailer. Several options pertaining to binary format files are under the Binary What, Binary How and similar sections.
If Unpacked is selected, each pixel value component is stored in as many bytes as required by the pixie's size (e.g. two 12 bit pixels are not packed into three 8 bit bytes). For example, for eight bit monochrome pixels, each pixel is stored as 1 byte; an image of size 752×480 of 8 bit monochrome pixels results in a 752×480 byte file. For 24 bit RGB pixels, each pixel is stored as 3 bytes; the red, the green, and the blue value.
If Packed: MSB to LSB or Packed: LSB to MSB is selected, pixel values of each image line are packed together; the Packed: LSB to MSB packing right to left (least significant to most significant bits) within each byte and the Packed: MSB to LSB packing left to right (most significant to least significant bits) within each byte. Pixel values from the end of one line and the start of the next are not packed together. For example, for 1 bit monochrome pixels, each pixel is stored as 1 bit; an image of size 644×480 of 1 bit monochrome pixels results in 81 bytes per line and 38880 bytes per image.
The X/Y Binary format, particularly the Unpacked option, minimizes the effort required for user written application programs to read and write image files. However, it provides no safeguard against later loading of a stored image into an image buffer (or area of interest) of incorrect dimensions; potentially causing image ''tearing''.
For images with attached palette, if Save Palette Data is selected, the attached palette data is saved instead of the image, if Save Image Data is selected, the image data is saved without the palette.
The X/Y ASCII selects saving the image pixels in a simple left-to-right, top-to-bottom scan with each pixel's value saved as one or more ASCII, decimal, text values with space delimiters. Several options pertaining to ASCII format files are under the ASCII What, ASCII How and similar sections.
If Save Image Data is selected, the image data is saved without the palette, if any. For images with attached palette, if Save Palette Data is selected, the attached palette data is saved instead of the image.
After writing the last pixel, or palette value, of each image line, the Pixel Line Delimiter character and new-line character(s) (as customary for the host operating system) are written. The Max Pixels per File Line allows limiting the text line length, forcing a new-line character(s) after the specified number of pixels or palette values, enhancing compatibility with text editors that might limit the number of characters per line. For example, the first two lines of a monochrome image with 64 pixels per line, with Max Pixels per File Line specified as 20, and with Pixel Line Delimiter specified as '','', would be:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63, 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163,
If Save Date&Time Data is selected, the image's date and time capture stamp is saved instead image data. The Save Date&Time Data is saved as one line with format specified by Date & Time Format.
If Save Settings Data is selected, various settings are saved. If Data: Add Camera Settings is selected, the current camera settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are saved. If Data: Add Camera Status is selected, the current camera status (such as temperature, for cameras that report temperature and where the displayed temperature is updated automatically) from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Data: Add Camera Info is selected, the camera's static info (such as model and serial number), if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Data: Add A-D Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current analog to digital conversion settings, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are saved. If Data: Add Trig(ger) & Timing Gen(erator) Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current trigger generator settings, timing generator settings, and other settings which configure the camera, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are saved. If Data: Add All Capture & Adjust Settings is selected, all settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are saved. If Settings: One Line is selected, all settings are saved as one long line of text; if Settings: One per Line is selected, each setting is saved as one line of text.
For images with a date and time capture stamp, if Set File Date&Time to Image's Date&Time Stamp is selected, the file's ''last modified'' time is set to the image's date and time stamp. For images without date and time capture stamps, or if Set File's Date&Time to Date&Time Saved is selected, the file's ''last modified'' time is left at the operating system's assigned default.
If I/O Buffer Size: Default is selected, file I/O uses default size buffers. Otherwise, the buffer size is specified by I/O Buffer Size which must be a power of 2. Tuning the I/O buffer size can decrease the time required to save an image.
To help speed up JPEG/JFIF, TIFF, or BigTIFF coding and compression, multiple threads and CPU's (or CPU cores) can be assigned to the operation. The Process Threads allows selecting the number of CPU threads to perform the operation. The 1 Thread, 2 Threads, etc. selects the specified number of threads; regardless of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system. The All CPUs, 50% CPUs, and 25% CPUs select use of multiple threads, based on the specified percentage of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system.
For a typical image, typical operation, and typical computer: using more threads will speed up execution of the operation. Using more threads than available CPUs (or CPU cores), or using multiple threads with a small image or small image ROI, may be counter productive and slow execution. Some variations of the operation, depending on options, may execute in whole or part in only one thread. Using Show Process Report under Program Setup - GUI can be used to determine the benefits, on the current system, of using multiple threads.
The Image File - Save Sequence window allows saving the current image sequence in a variety of file formats.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
For formats in which multiple images are saved to a single file,
the
File Name
field allows explicit entry of a path and file name;
alternately, the
Browse
button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style
file browsing dialog box.
XCAP does not force the file name's extension
to be the customary extension;
although using
.avi
for AVI format,
.tif
for TIFF format,
etc., is highly recommended.
For formats in which multiple images are saved to multiple files, the File Name Pattern, Indexing, as, and thru fields allows explicit entry of a path and numeric sequence of file names. The File Name Pattern is expected to contain one or more ''?'' characters; all such characters are replaced with decimal numbers incrementing from the sequence starting number (following as) through the sequence ending number (following thru). The Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box; after selecting a specific file name with the browser, the result in File Name Pattern can be modified, inserting ''?'' characters to represent the sequencing characters. If Check Exist is not selected, no warning is given if any of the specified files already exist.
The OK or Apply may be clicked without a File Name; the effect of the Browse button and OK or Apply, respectively, is combined. The file name selected by the Windows or Linux file browsing Dialog box (e.g. ''my.tif'') is automatically extended with sufficient numeric characters (e.g. ''my00.tif'', ''my01.tif'', etc.) to represent the range of files to be saved.
For image sequences with a date and time capture stamp, if Set File Date&Time to Image's Date&Time Stamp is selected, the file's ''last modified'' time is set to the first image of the sequence's date and time stamp. For images without date and time capture stamps, or if Set File's Date&Time to Date&Time Saved is selected, the file's ''last modified'' time is left at the operating system's assigned default.
One of the file formats, One AVI/DIB w. Sequence, One AVI/MJPG w. Sequence, One BigTIFF w. Sequence, One FITS w. Sequence, One Portable Map w. Sequence, One TIFF w. Sequence, One X/Y Binary w. Sequence, One X/Y ASCII w. Sequence, Sequence of BigTIFF's, Sequence of BMP's, Sequence of FITS's, Sequence of JPEG/JFIF's, Sequence of Portable Map's, Sequence of TIFF's, Sequence of X/Y Binary's, or Sequence of X/Y ASCII's can be selected.
The
One TIFF w. Sequence
format
saves all images of the sequence
to a single TIFF format file (i.e.
.tif
).
Note that other imaging programs may not support reading
multiple images from a single TIFF file.
The
One BigTIFF w. Sequence
format
saves all images of the sequence
to a single BigTIFF format file (i.e.
.btf
).
For BigTIFF, the file size may be as large as 16 EiByte
(264 bytes),
subject to the operating system's limitations on file size.
The
One AVI/DIB w. Sequence
format
saves all images of the sequence
to a single Windows Video format file (i.e.
.avi
)
using the
''DIB''
codec (lossless).
The
One AVI/MJPG w. Sequence
format
saves all images of the sequence
to a single Windows Video format file
using the
''MJPG''
codec (lossy compression).
The One X/Y Binary w. Sequence format saves all images of the sequence to a X/Y Binary format file; saving the image pixels in a simple left-to-right, top-to-bottom, first-to-last-image scan with each pixel saved in binary. There is no file header or trailer.
The One X/Y ASCII w. Sequence format saves all images of the sequence to a X/Y ASCII format file with space delimited, decimal representation of pixel values; saving the image pixels in a simple left-to-right, top-to-bottom, first-to-last-image scan. There is no file header or trailer. If Save Image Data is selected, the image data is saved without the palette, if any. For images with attached palette, if Save Palette Data is selected, the attached palette data is saved instead of the image. The optional Pixel Line Delimiter character is written after each line of pixel values. The optional Image Delimiter character is written after the last line of pixel values of each image, instead of the Pixel Line Delimiter. If Save Date&Time Data is selected, each image's date and time capture stamp is saved instead image data. The Save Date&Time Data is saved as one line per image with format specified by Date & Time Format.
The remaining formats save each image to an individual file, as represented by the File Name Pattern.
Various options and details of the formats are the same as described for single images, described above under Image File - Save. Options and details of the AVI format are described below. Additional details of the FITS format are described below.
The Auto Inc after Save allows repeating saving the same buffer(s) to a sequence of files. Typically, the Set AOI is set to a single image buffer, and the File Name Pattern, Indexing, as, and thru are set to specify a sequence of files. If Auto Inc after Save is selected, each click of the Apply button saves the image to the indexed file, and increments the sequence starting number, ready to save to the next file of the sequence.
The
One AVI/DIB...
selects saving the image as a
Windows Video format file
(i.e.
.avi
)
using the
''DIB''
codec (lossless).
The
One AVI/MJPG ...
selects saving the image as a
Windows Video format file
using the
''DIB''
codec (lossless).
Several options pertaining to AVI format files are under the AVI What, AVI With, and similar sections.
Options allow selecting AVI 1.0 format versus AVI 2.0 (AVIX, OpenDML) format. For AVI 1.0, the saved file size may be as large as 4 GiByte. For AVI 2.0, the file size may be larger than 4 GiByte, subject to the operating system's limitations on file size. However, other programs may not be able to read AVI 1.0 files larger than 2 GiByte, or may not support AVI 2.0 files, depending upon which Microsoft API was chosen by that program.
The Horizontal Pixels per Meter Info and Vertical Pixels per Meter Info allow specifying the image's aspect ratio coded into the file, but does not affect the pixel data stored.
The Default Frame Rate Info or Alternate Frame Rate Info specifies the frame rate coded into the file, which may be used by ''Media Player'' or other software to determine the playback rate.
The Comments Info can be used to add a description to the saved image. If Comments Info: Add Camera Settings is selected, the current camera settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Comments Info when the image is saved. If Comments Info: Add Camera Status is selected, the current camera status (such as temperature, for cameras that report temperature and where the displayed temperature is updated automatically) from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Comments Info: Add Camera Info is selected, the camera's static info (such as model and serial number), if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Image Description Tag when the image is saved. If Comments Info: Add A-D Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current analog to digital conversion settings, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Comments Info when the image is saved. If Comments Info: Add Trig(ger) & Timing Gen(erator) Converter Settings is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber's current trigger generator settings, timing generator settings, and other settings which configure the camera, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Comments Info when the image is saved. If Comments Info: Add All Capture & Adjust Settings is selected, all settings from the Capture - Adjustments dialog are appended to the Comments Info when the image is saved. The Copyright Info and Software Info can be used to add notices and descriptions to the saved image.
The Date&Time Info with date and time will be saved with the image. If Current Date&Time is selected, the current date and time is used. If Edit Date&Time is selected, an arbitrary date and time can be entered. If Image's Date&Time Stamp is selected, the image's date and time capture stamp is used; if the image does not have a date and time capture stamp then the current date and time is used. If AVI Compliant is selected, the Date&Time Tag is in AVI standard format with one day resolution. If AVI H-M-S, AVI H-M-S.millisec, or AVI H-M-S.millisec.microsec is selected, the Date&Time Tag provides second, millisecond, or microsecond resolution respectively, but is not in AVI standard; other programs may not be able to interpret the extended Date&Time Info.
For monochrome image, with attached palette, if Save w. Palette Data is selected, the images attached palette is saved along with the image, otherwise a monochromatic, identity, palette is saved. The Save w. Palette Data has no effect when used with color images.
For monochrome images, either 1 Bit per Pixie, 2 Bits per Pixie, or 8 Bits per Pixie can be saved. This selection has no effect for color images, for which the DIB format only supports 8 bits per pixel component.
The saved image quality can be set, and the compression rate indirectly set, as Compression Quality. A Compression Quality of 100.0% yields the highest quality, but still has significant compression and is lossy; i.e. the restored image will not match, bit for bit, the original image. A Compression Quality of 0.1% yields the maximum compression. The actual compression rate (i.e. bits per pixel) and the visual effect of any given Compression Quality depends upon the image size, resolution, and content.
The Encode Mode allows selecting the use of Floating (Point) Code or Integer Code. The Integer Code yields slightly lower quality images, but, on some computers, is faster.
If Color in Planar Format is selected, Z color images of size X×Y will be saved as a data array with four axes, dimensioned with X, Y, 3, and Z elements (assuming, for example, 3-component RGB color), respectively. If Color in Packed Format is selected, Z color images of size X×Y will be saved as a data array with four axes, dimensioned with 3, X, Y, and Z elements (assuming, for example, 3-component RGB color), respectively. If Monochromatic as 3-Axis Data is selected, Z grey or monochromatic (e.g. a color slice) images of size X×Y will be saved as a data array with three axes, dimensioned with X, Y, 1, and Z elements or with 1, X, Y, and Z elements, as selected above. If Monochromatic as 2-Axis Data is selected, Z grey or monochromatic (e.g. a color slice) images of size X×Y will be saved as a data array with three axes, dimensioned with X, Y, and Z elements.
To help speed up JPEG/JFIF, TIFF, or BigTIFF coding and compression, multiple threads and CPU's (or CPU cores) can be assigned to the operation. The Process Threads allows selecting the number of CPU threads to perform the operation. The 1 Thread, 2 Threads, etc. selects the specified number of threads; regardless of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system. The All CPUs, 50% CPUs, and 25% CPUs select use of multiple threads, based on the specified percentage of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system.
For a typical image, typical operation, and typical computer: using more threads will speed up execution of the operation. Using more threads than available CPUs (or CPU cores), or using multiple threads with a small image or small image ROI, may be counter productive and slow execution. Some variations of the operation, depending on options, may execute in whole or part in only one thread. Using Show Process Report under Program Setup - GUI can be used to determine the benefits, on the current system, of using multiple threads.
The Image File - Save Sequence window allows directly e-mail'ing the current image from within XCAP.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The E-Mail Recipient specifies the recipient's e-mail address, such as ''jane.doe@aol.com''. The E-Mail Subject specifies the e-mail's subject. The E-Mail server's host name and sender's address must have been previously setup in Program Setup - E-Mail.
The selection of image file format is the same as described for Image File - Save.
The Image File - Load window allows loading from an image file into the current image buffer. Images can also be loaded into the current image buffer directly from an Internet URL. Unlike the File - Load New Image of the Main Window, the Image File - Load window loads an image file into the current image buffer, resizing and/or color converting to fit the image buffer's existing dimensions, pixel depth, and color space.
Image files in TIFF or JPEG/JFIF formats which are industry standards; image files in BMP or AVI format which are Windows standards; image files in BigTIFF format; image files in Portable Bit Map, Portable Gray Map, or Portable Pixel Map; image files in X/Y Binary or X/Y ASCII formats; and some images in FITS format, can be loaded.
If File is selected, the image is to be loaded from a file pathname. If URL is selected, the image is to be loaded from an Internet URL.
The
File Name
field allows explicit entry of a path and file name;
alternately, the
Browse
button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing
dialog box.
XCAP does not require the customary file name extension
to be present;
although using
.btf
for BigTIFF format,
.bmp
for BMP format,
.fts
for FITS format,
.jpg
for JPEG format,
.tif
for TIFF format,
etc., is recommended.
After specifying an image file name, if the file contents (e.g. not just the file name extension) appear to be in AVI format, appear to be in BMP format, appear to be in BigTIFF format, appear to be in FITS format, appear to be in JPEG/JFIF format, appear to be in Portable Bit Map, Portable Gray Map, or Portable Pixel Map format, or appear to be in TIFF format, then the AVI format indicator, then the BMP format indicator, the BigTIFF format indicator, the FITS format indicator, the JPEG/JFIF format indicator, the Portable Map format indicator, or the TIFF format indicator, respectively, will automatically be selected. Otherwise, the user can select whether the image file is in X/Y Binary or in X/Y ASCII format.
For images which support a date and time capture stamp, if Image's Date&Time Stamp: Set from File's Date&Time is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the file's ''last modified'' time as reported by the operating system. If Image's Date&Time Stamp: Don't Set is specified, the image's date and time stamp is not changed.
The Image URL field allows explicit entry of an Internet URL of an image ''file''. The URL should have a format similar to:
and be publicly accessible (i.e. via ''anonymous'' login). The same file formats as above are supported, however when loading from an Internet URL the customary file name extension must be present. The Image's Date&Time Stamp: Set from File's Date&Time feature is not applicable.ftp://domain.com/pretty.tif ftp://ftp.domain.com/pretty.tif http://domain.com/sequence/picture00.tif http://www.domain.com/sequence/picture00.tif
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
For image files identified as being in TIFF or BigTIFF format, several options may be specified.
For TIFF or BigTIFF format files which contain multiple images, the Load Subfile specifies which subimage is to be loaded. For TIFF or BigTIFF format files which contain a single image, the Load Subfile is 1.
For monochrome images with attached palette, if Load w. Palette is selected, the TIFF or BigTIFF file's palette, if any, is loaded.
When the specified image buffer (area of interest) is not the same dimensions as the TIFF or BigTIFF image, the TIFF or BigTIFF image is resized to fit the area of interest. If Resize: Bilinear is selected, resizing is done by bilinear interpolation; most often used for continuous tone images. If Resize: Nearest Neighbor is selected, resizing is done by nearest neighbor interpolation; most often used for images containing graphics.
For images which support a date and time capture stamp, if Image's Date&Time Stamp: Set from TIFF Date&Time Tag is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the TIFF or BigTIFF file's internal date and time tag, if any.
Note that TIFF or BigTIFF format files may be uncompressed or utilize various, sometimes proprietary, compression techniques. XCAP is not intended to load and view all TIFF or BigTIFF format files, but will, of course, load files previously saved by XCAP as well as other files using similar options.
For image files identified as being in JPEG/JFIF format, several options may be specified.
When the specified image buffer (area of interest) is not the same dimensions as the JPEG/JFIF image, the JPEG/JFIF image is resized to fit the area of interest. If Resize: Bilinear is selected, resizing is done by bilinear interpolation; most often used for continuous tone images. If Resize: Nearest Neighbor is selected, resizing is done by nearest neighbor interpolation; most often used for images containing graphics.
For images which support a date and time capture stamp, if Image's Date&Time Stamp: Set from JPEG Date&Time Comment is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the JPEG/JFIF file's internal date and time comment, if any.
Note that JPEG/JFIF format files may be uncompressed or utilize various compression techniques. XCAP is not intended to load and view all JPEG/JFIF format files, but will, of course, load files previously saved by XCAP as well as other files using similar options.
For image files identified as being in BMP format, several options may be specified.
For monochrome images with attached palette, if Load w. Palette is selected, the BMP file's palette, if any, is loaded.
When the specified image buffer (area of interest) is not the same dimensions as the BMP image, the BMP image is resized to fit the area of interest. If Resize: Bilinear is selected, resizing is done by bilinear interpolation; most often used for continuous tone images. If Resize: Nearest Neighbor is selected, resizing is done by nearest neighbor interpolation; most often used for images containing graphics.
Note that BMP format files may be uncompressed or utilize various compression techniques. XCAP is not intended to load and view all BMP format files, but will, of course, load files previously saved by XCAP as well as other files using similar options.
For image files identified as being in Portable Bit Map, Portable Gray Map, or Portable Pixel Map format, several options may be specified.
For Portable Map format files which contain multiple images, the Load Subfile specifies which subimage is to be loaded. For Portable Map format files which contain a single image, the Load Subfile is 1.
When the specified image buffer (area of interest) is not the same dimensions as the Portable Map image, the Portable Map image is resized to fit the area of interest. If Resize: Bilinear is selected, resizing is done by bilinear interpolation; most often used for continuous tone images. If Resize: Nearest Neighbor is selected, resizing is done by nearest neighbor interpolation; most often used for images containing graphics.
For images which support a date and time capture stamp, if Image's Date&Time Stamp: Set from PxM Date&Time Comment is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the Portable Map file's internal date and time comment, if any.
For image files identified as being in AVI format, several options may be specified.
For AVI format files which contain multiple images, the Load Subfile specifies which subimage is to be loaded. For AVI format files which contain a single image, the Load Subfile is 1.
For monochrome images with attached palette, if Load w. Palette is selected, the AVI file's palette, if any, is loaded.
When the specified image buffer (area of interest) is not the same dimensions as the AVI image, the AVI image is resized to fit the area of interest. If Resize: Bilinear is selected, resizing is done by bilinear interpolation; most often used for continuous tone images. If Resize: Nearest Neighbor is selected, resizing is done by nearest neighbor interpolation; most often used for images containing graphics.
For images which support a date and time capture stamp, if Image's Date&Time Stamp: Set from AVI Date&Time Info is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the AVI file's internal date and time information, if any.
Note that AVI format files may be uncompressed or utilize various compression techniques. XCAP is not intended to load and view all AVI format files, but will, of course, load files previously saved by XCAP as well as other files using similar options.
For image files identified as being in FITS format, several options may be specified.
For FITS format files which contain multiple images, the Load Subfile specifies which subimage is to be loaded. For FITS format files which contain a single image, the Load Subfile is 1.
For images with attached palette, if Load Palette Data is selected, the image file is loaded into the attached palette instead of the image buffer, if Load Image Data is selected, the image file is loaded into the image buffer, the attached palette is not affected.
If Resize: Bilinear is selected, resizing is done by bilinear interpolation; most often used for continuous tone images. If Resize: Nearest Neighbor is selected, resizing is done by nearest neighbor interpolation; most often used for images containing graphics.
For images which support a date and time capture stamp, if Image's Date&Time Stamp: Set from FITS Date Card is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the FITS file's internal Date Card, if any. if Image's Date&Time Stamp: Set from FITS Date-Obs Card is selected, the image's date and time stamp will be set from the FITS file's internal Date Card-Obs, if any.
Some FITS format files may not contain a simple two dimensional image - the general FITS format allows storage and retrieval of data arrays with up to 999 dimensions. XCAP is not intended to load and view all FITS format files, but will, of course, load files previously saved by XCAP as well as other files with a similar design.
For image files specified as being in X/Y Binary format, several options may be specified.
For images with attached palette, if Load Palette Data is selected, the image file is loaded into the attached palette instead of the image buffer, if Load Image Data is selected, the image file is loaded into the image buffer, the attached palette is not affected.
The File Offset specifies an offset into the file, in bytes, at which reading and loading is to start. A File Offset of 0 specifies reading and loading from the start of the file.
Data retrieved from the file is stored in the image buffer's area of interest, left to right and top to bottom. The pixel size, color space, and image dimensions being filled should, generally, match the image which was originally saved.
If Unpacked is selected, each pixel value component is stored in as many bytes as required by the pixie's size (e.g. two 12 bit pixels are not packed into three 8 bit bytes). If Packed: MSB to LSB or Packed: LSB to MSB is selected, pixel values of each image line are packed together; the Packed: LSB to MSB packing right to left (least significant to most significant bits) within each byte and the Packed: MSB to LSB packing left to right (most significant to least significant bits) within each byte. Pixel values from the end of one line and the start of the next are not packed together.
For image files identified as being in X/Y ASCII format, several options may be specified.
For images with attached palette, if Load Palette Data is selected, the image file is loaded into the attached palette instead of the image buffer, if Load Image Data is selected, the image file is loaded into the image buffer, the attached palette is not affected.
If the End Of (image) Line character specified by Pixel Line Delimiter is not blank, each delimiter character of the input file is taken to be the end of an image line. If the file's image dimensions are smaller than the image buffer's (area of interest) dimensions, the image is loaded in the upper left corner of the image buffer and the remainder of the image buffer is not modified. If the file's image dimensions are larger than the image buffer's (AOI) dimensions, the upper left corner of the file's image is loaded. Characters in the image file other than decimal digits, and the delimiter character, are ignored. If Pixel Line Delimiter is blank, the image buffer's (AOI) dimensions being filled should, generally, match the image which was originally saved.
If Load Date&Time Data is selected, the image's date and time capture stamp is loaded instead image data. The Load Date&Time Data expects one line in the file with format specified by Date & Time Format.
If I/O Buffer Size: Default is selected, file I/O uses default size buffers. Otherwise, the buffer size is specified by I/O Buffer Size which must be a power of 2. Tuning the I/O buffer size can decrease the time required to load an image.
The Image File - Load Sequence window allows loading the current image buffer sequence from a variety of file formats.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File Name Pattern, Indexing, as, and thru fields allows explicit entry of a path and numeric sequence of file names. The File Name Pattern is expected to contain one or more ''?'' characters; all such characters are replaced with decimal numbers incrementing from the sequence starting number (following as) through the sequence ending number (following thru). The Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box; after selecting a specific file name with the browser, the result in File Name Pattern can be modified, inserting ''?'' characters to represent the sequencing characters. If Check Exist is not selected, no warning is given if any of the specified files do not exist.
After specifying an image file name pattern, if the single file contents (e.g. not just the file name extension) appears to be in AVI format, appears to be in BigTIFF format with multiple images, appears to be in FITS format with multiple images, appears to be in Portable Bit Map, Portable Gray Map, or Portable Pixel Map format with multiple images, or appears to be in TIFF format with multiple images, then the One AVI w. Sequence format indicator, One BigTIFF w. Sequence format indicator, One FITS w. Sequence format indicator, One Portable Map w. Sequence format indicator, or One TIFF w. Sequence, format indicator, will automatically be selected.
After specifying an image file name pattern, if the files contents (e.g. not just the file name extensions) appear to be in BMP format, appear to be in BigTIFF format, appear to be in FITS format, appear to be in JPEG/JFIF format, appear to be in Portable Bit Map, Portable Gray Map, or Portable Pixel Map format, or appear to be in TIFF format, then the Sequence of BMP format indicator, the Sequence of BigTIFF format indicator, the Sequence of FITS format indicator, the Sequence of JPEG/JFIF format indicator, the Sequence of Portable Map format indicator, or the Sequence of TIFF format indicator, respectively, will automatically be selected.
Otherwise, the user can select whether the image file(s) are in One X/Y Binary w. Sequence, One X/Y ASCII w. Sequence, Sequence of X/Y Binary's, or Sequence of X/Y ASCII's format.
The One AVI w. Sequence, loads multiple images of the sequence from a single AVI format file, starting with the file's First Loaded Subfile; only the first file name represented by the File Name Pattern is used.
The One BigTIFF w. Sequence, loads multiple images of the sequence from a single BigTIFF format file, starting with the file's First Loaded Subfile; only the first file name represented by the File Name Pattern is used.
The One FITS w. Sequence, loads multiple images of the sequence from a single FITS format file, starting with the file's First Loaded Subfile; only the first file name represented by the File Name Pattern is used.
The One Portable Map w. Sequence, loads all images of the sequence from a single Portable Bit Map, Portable Gray Map, or Portable Pixel Map format file, starting with the file's First Loaded Subfile; only the first file name represented by the File Name Pattern is used.
The One TIFF w. Sequence, loads multiple images of the sequence from a single TIFF format file, starting with the file's First Loaded Subfile; only the first file name represented by the File Name Pattern is used.
The One X/Y Binary w. Sequence, loads multiple images of the sequence from a single X/Y Binary format file; loading the image pixels in a simple left-to-right, top-to-bottom, first-to-last-image scan with each pixel loaded in binary. There is no file header or trailer. Only the first file name represented by the File Name Pattern is used. The File Offset specifies an offset into the file, in bytes, at which reading and loading is to start. The Image Pad specifies an offset, in bytes, after one image and before the next. Thus, the first image in the file is read starting at File Offset, the second is read at File Offset plus the size of the image data plus Image Pad, and the third is read at the second is read at File Offset plus the twice the size of the image data plus twice Image Pad,
The One X/Y ASCII w. Sequence, loads multiple images of the sequence from a single X/Y ASCII format file with decimal representation of pixel values; loading the image pixels in a simple left-to-right, top-to-bottom, first-to-last-image scan. There is no file header or trailer. Only the first file name represented by the File Name Pattern is used. If Load Image Data is selected, the image data is loaded but not the palette, if any. For images with attached palette, if Load Palette Data is selected, the attached palette data is loaded instead of the image. As for X/Y ASCII Format, the optional Pixel Line Delimiter character of the input file is taken to be the end of an image line. The optional Image Delimiter character of the input file is taken to be the end of an image. If Load Date&Time Data is selected, each image's date and time capture stamp is loaded instead image data. The Load Date&Time Data expects one line in the file per image with format specified by Date & Time Format.
The remaining formats load each image from an individual file, as represented by the File Name Pattern.
For all formats, various options and details of the format are the same as described for Image File - Load.
The Auto Inc after Load allows repeating loading the same buffer(s) from a sequence of files. Typically, the Set AOI is set to a single image buffer, and the File Name Pattern, Indexing, as, and thru are set to specify a sequence of files. If Auto Inc after Load is selected, each click of the Apply button loads the indexed file, and increments the sequence starting number, ready to load the next file of the sequence.
Industry | Windows | File | Image | Data | Image | |
Standard | Support | Extension | Sequence | Compress | Time | |
(s) | Stamps | |||||
AVI/DIB | Yes | Yes | .avi | Yes | No | 1 |
AVI/DIB | Yes(a) | Yes | .avi | Yes | No | 1 |
OpenDML | ||||||
AVI/MJPG | Yes | Yes | .avi | Yes | Lossy | 1 |
AVI/MJPG | Yes(a) | Yes | .avi | Yes | Lossy | 1 |
OpenDML | ||||||
BigTIFF | ?? (c) | No | .btf | Yes | Lossless | Per |
options | image | |||||
(f) | ||||||
BMP | Yes | Yes | .bmp | No | No | No |
JPEG/JFIF | Yes | Yes | .jpg | No | Lossy | 1 (d) |
FITS | Yes | No | .fts | Yes | No | 1. |
Per | ||||||
image(d) | ||||||
Portable | Yes | No | .pgm | Yes | No | 1 (d) |
Map | .pbm | |||||
.ppm | ||||||
TIFF | Yes | Yes(b) | .tif | Yes | Lossless | Per |
options | Image | |||||
(f) | ||||||
X/Y ASCII | Raw | No | .asc | Yes | No | No (e) |
Data | ||||||
X/Y Binary | Raw | No | .bin | Yes | No | No |
Data | ||||||
Max Seq | Max | Max | Pixel | |
File Size | Image | Image | Formats | |
(g) | Dimension | Size | ||
AVI/DIB | 1, 2 or | 2 Gi -1 | 4 MiB -1 | Grey-1/4/8 |
4 GiB (h) | Byte | RGB-24 | ||
AVI/DIB | 32 TiB | 2 Gi -1 | 4 GiB -1 | Grey-1/4/8 |
OpenDML | RGB-24 | |||
AVI/MJPG | 1, 2 or | 2 Gi -1 | 4 GiB -1 | Grey-8 |
4 GiB (h) | (compressed) | RGB-24 | ||
AVI/MJPG | 32 TiB | 2 Gi -1 | 4 GiB -1 | Grey-8 |
OpenDML | (compressed) | RGB-24 | ||
BigTIFF | 16 EiB | 4 Gi -1 | None | All |
BMP | N/A | 32 Ki -1 | 4 GiB -1 | Grey-1/4/8 |
RGB-24 | ||||
JPEG/JFIF | N/A | 64 Ki -1 | None | Grey-8 |
RGB-24 | ||||
FITS | None | None | None | All |
Portable | None | None | None | Grey |
Map | RGB | |||
TIFF | 4 GiB | 4 Gi -1 | None | All |
X/Y ASCII | None | N/A | None | N/A |
X/Y Binary | None | N/A | None | N/A |
Note: This summary of various file formats reflects those options and/or features supported by XCAP®.
Note (a): AVI OpenDML, also known as AVIX or AVI V2.0, has not been formalized as industry standard, but is supported by Windows and most other systems and is a defacto standard
Note (b): Windows supports TIFF Grey-8 and RGB-24 formats; support for other bit depths and color spaces is unknown/variable. Windows support for image sequences within TIFF is unknown.
Note (c): BigTIFF is popular amongst GIS Domain and other applications using large cameras and datasets. See www.loc.gov/preservation/formats/ .
Note (d): Time stamps in JPEG/JFIF and in Portable Map are by virtue of using ''comment'' fields. FITS supports a single time stamp; per-image time stamps is by virtue of using ''comment'' fields.
Note (e): Image time stamps can be written to a separate ASCII file.
Note (f): TIFF options for no compression, industry standard lossless compression, and for EPIX(® private lossless compression.
Note (g): Maximum file size is also, of course, also limited by the host computer operating system and by the HDD/SSD hardware.
Note (h): Maximum file size depends upon which Microsoft API, or third party libraries, are used to create or read the AVI file. XCAP supports 4 GiByte.
Note (s): Windows support without installing optional codecs and/or other third party applications. Linux is too mutable, and imaging handled by add-on libraries and applications, for a concise statement as to which formats are supported.
The Image File - Print window allows printing the current image, either via the operating system's built-in image printing feature(s) which typically supports a wide variety of printers, or via EPIX® imaging drivers which support only the most popular printers, but providing precise control of print options.
The Print via Windows Drivers under Windows, or Print via Linux Drivers selects printing via the operating system's built-in image printing feature(s). The Print via EPIX® Imaging Drivers selects printing via the EPIX® imaging drivers, which supports printing of grey scale images, or a single color separation of a color image.
For Print via Windows Drivers or Print via Linux Drivers a printer and the area of the page to be printed can be selected. The Printer Setup button provides access to a standard Windows printer setup dialog box, or a Linux printer setup dialog box, allowing selection of a previously configured printer. The Page Width and Page Height notes the current printer's page size. The Print Width and Print Height specifies the width and height of the area to be printed; the Upper Left X, Upper Left Y, Lower Right X, and Lower Right Y specifies the position of the printed area on the page. If Force Aspect is selected, the Print Width and Print Height are automatically corrected so as print with the correct aspect ratio; on rare occasions it may be desirable to deselect Force Aspect to allow elongated printing. The Full Size allows convenient selection of the full Page Width and Page Height, subject to correction for aspect ratio. A graphic representation of the page and the area to be printed is shown; the area to be printed can be selected interactively by clicking and dragging over the ''page''.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
Options provide for selecting preprocessing image enhancements; size, orientation, position, and copies; the type of printer and printer resolution (where applicable); and the type and the density (where applicable) of the halftoning technique.
The image can be preprocessed by sharpening edges and/or being made lighter or darker, improving the quality of the printed image. Selecting these options does not modify the original image.
The Sharpen specifies the degree of sharpening, between 0 (no sharpening) and 10 (maximal sharpening). Sharpening should generally be disabled whenever the original image contains noise, otherwise the intensity of the noise would be increased. Sharpening should also be disabled when the original image is already a sharp, bi-level graphics image.
The Gamma allows non-linear brightening or darkening of the printed image. A gamma of 1.00 is the default, neutral value which neither lightens nor darkens the image. A gamma less than 1.00 lightens the image, a gamma greater than 1.00 darkens the image; the farther the gamma is from 1.00 the stronger the corresponding effect.
The image's print size, aspect ratio, orientation, and position on the page can be selected.
Either Resize w. Interpolation or Resize w. Replication can be chosen. The interpolation provides the best quality results for grey scale images and allows specifying the precise Horizontal Size and Vertical Size, in centimeters, of the printed image. The horizontal and vertical print sizes need not be related, allowing arbitrary adjustment for aspect ratio.
Alternately, pixel replication is quicker than interpolation, but the image print size is adjusted by a Horizontal Replication and Vertical Replication factor. The actual print size is dependent on the dimensions of the selected image, and the printer's resolution, with each replicated pixel occupying one printer dot. Replication generally provides a better result than interpolation when printing bi-level graphics images. The pixel replication is not available for PostScript printers.
The Horizontal Margin specifies an optional margin from the left edge, the Vertical Margin specifies an optional margin from the top edge (bottom edge for PostScript), both in centimeters.
The Copies specifies the number of copies to be printed, for those printers supporting a copies feature: HP Laserjet II, III, 4, and IBM 4019. Specifying 0 prevents software specification of copies, allowing use of the printer's front panel selection.
The Portrait specifies the ''normal'' print orientation. The Landscape causes the printed image to be rotated by 90 degrees.
For printers which buffer print data until the page is complete (HP Laserjet II, III, 4, and IBM 4019) the Eject Page option allows printing several images on the same page at different locations. If selected, the printer is instructed to eject the page after the image has been received. Otherwise, the image remains in the printer's buffer for later printing. To print several images on the same page at different locations, only the last image should be printed with the Eject Page selected. This option has no effect on printers which feed paper as each line is printed.
The Printer selects the printer to be used, and where applicable, the printer's resolution. Current choices are:
Although not listed, many other printers emulate one or more of the printers listed. For example, the HP LJ5 can be used by selecting HP LJ4, and most non-HP laser printers are 100% compatible with an HP LaserJet of the same generation.HP LaserJet2 300 DPI, 150 DPI, 100 DPI, 75 DPI HP LaserJet3 300 DPI, 150 DPI, 100 DPI, 75 DPI HP LaserJet4 600 DPI, 300 DPI, 200 DPI, 150 DPI, 100 DPI, 75 DPI IBM 4019 LaserPrinter, 300 DPI, 150 DPI, 100 DPI, 75 DPI Alden 9315CT (grey level, approx 203 DPI) CalComp PlotMaster (monochrome film, approx 200 DPI) IBM Dot Matrix Graphics (dot matrix, 120x72 DPI) EPSON Dot Matrix Graphics (dot matrix, 120x72 DPI) PostScript
The PostScript selection doesn't choose a particular printer, rather an encapsulated PostScript file containing the full resolution image is generated; resizing and halftoning are performed by the printer.
The type and the density (where applicable) of the halftoning technique can be selected. The halftoning options are not used if the Alden 9315CT printer is selected, as the Alden is directly capable of producing dots in varying shades of grey. For PostScript printers, only the Screening and Thresholding options, below, are used; the type of screening and the Screen Density are determined by the printer.
The Dithering halftones the image by a dithering technique, while Screening halftones the image by a screen construction technique. For grey level imagery, the Dithering is recommended for low resolution printers, such as the IBM Graphics and Epson dot matrix printers, the Screening is recommended for high resolution printers, such as the HP LaserJet, IBM LaserPrinter, and CalComp PlotMaster. The Thresholding is intended for images which are already bi-level graphics, for all printers; the most significant bit of each image pixel is used.
If Screening is selected, the Screen Density specifies the requested density of constructed dots, in dots per centimeter. Higher values form smaller dots, sacrificing grey level resolution for better spatial resolution; a desirable trade-off for some low resolution printers. Lower values form larger dots, more suitable for facsimile or xerography. Achievable screen densities are constrained by the selected printer and by the limits of discrete constructions; the actual screen density used will be as close as possible to the requested value, but will not be shown in the menu.
Some of the values currently achievable when using 300 DPI printer resolution are: 41.8, 32.8, 27.8, 23.6, 20.9, 18.4, 16.7, 15.1, 13.9, 12.8, 11.9, 11.1, and 10.4 screen dots per centimeter, with additional values lower than 10 dots per centimeter. Twice these densities are achievable when using 600 DPI printer resolution. The default of 21 screen dots per centimeter is suitable for 300 DPI laser printers, although experimentation with higher and lower values may, depending on the individual image and printer, improve the result.
The screen dots per centimeter should not be confused with printer resolution, usually expressed in dots per inch, or DPI. Halftone screening uses ''clumps'' of printer dots to form each screen dot. Fewer printer dots used in each ''clump'', translates into more screen dots per centimeter, more spatial resolution and fewer grey levels. The concept and measurement of screen dots per centimeter is the same, after translation from centimeters to inches, as used by the printing trade, there termed ''lines per inch''. For example, an 85 line screen may be approximated by using a Screen Density of 33 screen dots per centimeter (i.e. 85/2.54).
If to Printer is selected: Under Windows, the printer attached to the computer's specified Port ''LPT1'', ''LPT2'', or ''LPT3'', is used. Under Linux, the printer attached to the computer's specified Device ''/dev/lp0'', ''/dev/lp1'', or ''/dev/lp2'' is used.
If to File is selected, the coded data that would have been sent to the printer is instead saved to a file, for later printing or transmission to a print server. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box.
General.
High quality printed representation of
grey scale imagery on black and white printers is subject to many variables.
The most important factor is the original image quality,
particularly sharpness and contrast.
Image processing operations such as filtering
and contrast enhancement can be used prior to printing to improve
the printed image's quality.
Other variables are the content of the original image (fine, periodic patterns being more difficult), ribbon or toner adjustments, resolution of the original image, and size of the result image. Additional concerns are whether the result is to be reproduced by xerography or facsimile.
The dithering techniques are particularly suitable for low resolution printers, but are very sensitive to the image's contrast and may reproduce and FAX with poor quality. The screen construction technique yields high quality print when used with a high resolution printer, reproduces well, and is relatively insensitive to the image's contrast.
The execution time of the print operation is primarily a function of the number of printer dots being generated, and secondarily of the halftoning method used; as well as, of course, the speed of the computer system.
LaserJet II.
The memory of the standard LaserJet II
(0.5 MiByte) limits the maximum print size of an image
to approximately ¼ page at 300 dots per inch.
This limitation is inherent to the LaserJet printer
and not affected by the amount of computer system memory or disk space,
or frame grabber's memory.
Additional printer memory can be obtained from Hewlett-Packard
and other vendors,
or use of lower print resolutions of 150 or 100 dots per inch
will increase the image size that can be printed.
LaserJet 4.
The suggested printer setup is:
along with Screening, Screen Density of 42, and Gamma of 0.80. The LaserJet 4 can provide 600 dots per inch resolution, but only if the printer is set to 600 DPI mode. Software does not select the 600 DPI mode; it would force a page eject and prevent use of the controlled Eject Page option. Selecting HP LaserJet4 600 DPI with the printer's resolution set to 300 will result in a printed image twice as large as intended, at 300 DPI resolution.Job Menu Resolution=600 Printing Menu RET=OFF (Resolution Enhancement Technology) Config Menu Density=1 or 2
The memory of the standard LaserJet 4 (2 MiByte) limits the maximum print size of an image to approximately ¼ page at 600 dots per inch. Unlike the LaserJet II, for which exceeding available memory results in an obvious defect, a truncated image, the LaserJet 4 instead prints the full image, but with significantly degraded quality. If the image quality at 600 DPI looks worse than at 300 DPI, select a smaller print size or add memory to the printer.
Print to File.
Files created by the
to File
option should not be printed by the standard DOS PRINT command.
These files typically contain all possible byte values,
as necessary to code image data to the printer,
whereas the PRINT command interprets a CTRL-Z byte as an end of file,
expands tabs to spaces, and other inappropriate interpretations.
Use of PRINT on such a file may result in a partial image,
with the printer left in an unknown state.
Print programs which are able to process
''binary''
data must be used.
Use of
works correctly on most DOS and Windows systems, although COPY does not behave as a spooling program and should not be used while the printer is already busy. Use ofCOPY /B PRINT_FILE LPT1
is suitable under Linux.cp print_file /dev/lp0
Bi-Level Graphics.
The default selections
are intended for printing grey level imagery.
Images which are bi-level graphics, such as line drawings
or captured graphics screens,
will appear better if:
The Image File - Attributes window shows the characteristics of the current image (sequence).
The Image Name is the name associated with the image. The Image Description is the optional description associated with the image. The Original Pathname is the original pathname of the image, when The Image Viewer Window was created by loading an image (sequence) from file(s); for sequences composed of individual files, the Original Pathname reflects the pathname of the currently displayed image buffer.
The Image Width is the number of pixels per row, the Image Height is the number of pixels per column, and Sequence Length is the number of images in the sequence, or 1 for a single image.
The Pixies per Pixel is the number of numeric components per pixel. The Pixel Interpretation is the interpretation given to the pixel value components, such as a color space.
The Pixie Type specifies ''Unsigned Integer'' numeric pixel component values, the Bits per Pixie is the number of bits which represent each numeric pixel component, the Pixie Size (bytes) is the space required per numeric component, and Pixel Size (bytes) is the space required per pixel. If the Bits per Pixie doesn't fully occupy the Pixie Size (bytes), then Significant Bits Aligned indicates whether the useful bits are left or right justified.
For images which are an index into a palette, the above characteristics are shown for the image, and shown again regarding the palette, replacing Image Width and Image Height with Palette/Lut Entries, the total number of entries in the table.
The Pixel Width and Pixel Height are the real-world dimensions of, or a dimensionless value associated with, a pixel's width and height. For image sequences, the Pixel Depth is the real-world dimension between corresponding pixels in adjacent images. The Pixel Aspect Ratio is the ratio of Pixel Width and Pixel Height; the Image Aspect Ratio is the ratio of the product of Image Width and Pixel Width versus Image Height and Pixel Height.
For image sequences, if the physical buffer order and apparent buffer order are not the same, Buffer: B=>B' shows the mapping of buffer number 0. Otherwise, Buffer: B=>B' shows ''None''.
If Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration is in use, the Spatial: XY=>HV shows the mapping of pixel coordinate 0, 0. Otherwise, Spatial: XY=>HV shows None.
If Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration is in use, the Intensity: Z=>I shows the mapping of pixel value 0. Otherwise, Intensity: Z=>I shows ''None''.
The Time Stamp and Date&Time Stamp are optional date and time stamps associated with the image; the former is formatted as seconds and fractional seconds since an operating system dependent epoch, the latter is formatted into the customary calendar date and time.
The Image File - Duplicate allows creating a new image buffer, and copying the image, in one step. It optionally allows copying the image's current appearance, as modified by the palette and graphics, instead if the underlying image.
The Image Name field allows entering a short name which appears in the title of windows associated with the new image buffer. The Description field allows entering a longer, arbitrary, description which is attached to the new image buffer. After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
If Copy as per AOI & Color Space is selected, the image copied is selected in the same manner as image processing operations, loads, saves, etc.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If Copy as Shown, RGB+Palette+Graphics the image copied is the current image being shown. The image copy is in RGB format, showing the effects of the palette, if used, and showing graphic overlays.
The Image File - BlackBoard allows copying the image's pixel values into the Black Board. Pixels values are copied to a rectangle of black board cells, positioned with the upper left corner at the specified Black Board Corner Cell.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The windows accessible under Image Viewer Window - View provides options governing the appearance of the displayed image.
The Launch 2nd Viewer creates a second image viewer window into the same image buffer (sequence), allowing, for example, viewing the same image buffer (sequence) both magnified and unmagnified or simultaneous viewing of two portions of the same sequence.
The View - Image's Palette and View - Viewer's Palette window allows manipulating a palette, such as to perform contrast enhancement, black level and gain adjustment, or false color assignment.
The View - Image's Palette modifies the palette associated with images composed of index pixels with an attached palette, and is not available for images composed of other types of pixels. The View - Viewer's Palette modifies a palette provided by The Image Viewer Window, and is available for all type of images. For monochrome images, the viewer's palette provides a color lookup table indexed by each pixel value, thus assigning an RGB color for each monochrome pixel value. For RGB (or BGR) color images, the viewer's palette provides a red lookup table indexed by the pixel's red component, a blue lookup table indexed by the pixel's blue component, and a green lookup table indexed by the pixel's green component. For non-RGB color images, the viewer's palette provides red, green, and blue lookup tables, applied as for RGB, as the image is converted to RGB for display.
Regardless of whether used for an image's attached palette, or the viewer's palette, the same controls provide manipulation of the palette. The dimensions of the palette, and thus the range of values used by the palette manipulation window, is dependent on the image's pixel size.
The Image View - Palette provides three forms of display of the current palette, and five paradigms for adjusting the palette.
The Image View - Palette provides three forms of display of the current palette, selected by the menu-bar View.
The View - Numeric Red, View - Numeric Green, and View - Numeric Blue each select display of the numeric red, green, or blue values, respectively.
The View - Three Graph selects display of the red, green, and blue values in three independent graphs. The abscissa represents the input index, the ordinate represents the output value. If Palette - Modify - Numerical & Mouse, below, is selected, clicking and dragging the mouse over any of the graphs allows interactive adjustment of the corresponding color.
The View - One Graph selects display of the red, green, and blue values in a single graph. The abscissa represents the input index, the ordinate represents the output value. If Palette - Modify - Numerical & Mouse, below, is selected, clicking and dragging the mouse over the graph allows interactive adjustment of all three colors.
The Modify - Numerical & Mouse provides explicit numerical assignment to the red, green, and blue tables, such as by specification of linear ramps, logarithmic curves, polynomials, gamma correction, inversion, and transposition.
If Set Linear Ramp is specified, the selected tables are set to the identity mapping (correspondence); monotonically increasing values (e.g. 0 to 255 for eight bit pixels). This represents normal, unmodified contrast.
If Set Logarithmic Curve is specified, the selected tables are set to an increasing logarithmic curve. This can be useful in compensating for nonlinear cameras and monitors, or for enhancing images captured with low light levels.
If Set Exponential Curve is specified, the selected tables are set to an increasing exponential curve.
If Set Gamma Curve is specified, the selected tables are set to a nonlinear power curve specified by the Gamma parameter. A Gamma of 1.00 is linear, producing unmodified contrast. A Gamma less than 1.00 brightens the image, with stronger effect as the gamma approaches 0.01. A Gamma greater than 1.00 darkens the image, with stronger effect as the gamma approaches 10.00. If correcting for a camera with known gamma, use the inverse of the camera's gamma. For example, enter:
to correct for a camera with stated gamma of 0.7.1.43 (1.0/0.7)
If Set Gamma Inverse Curve is specified, the selected tables are set to a nonlinear power curve specified by the inverse of the Gamma parameter.
If Set Rec. 709 Curve is specified, the selected tables are set to the transfer function specified by the CIE Rec. 709 video standard.
If Set Rec. 709 Inverse Curve is specified, the selected tables are set to the inverse of the transfer function specified by the CIE Rec. 709 video standard.
If Set sRGB Curve is specified, the selected tables are set to the transfer function specified by the sRGB color space standard.
If Set sRGB Inverse Curve is specified, the selected tables are set to the inverse of the transfer function specified by the sRGB color space standard.
If Set Gray Code is specified, the selected tables are set to the Gray code - a binary coding such that the transition between adjacent values requires changing of exactly one bit.
If Set Gray Inverse Code is specified, the selected tables are set to the inverse of the Gray code.
If Complement Values is specified, the current entries of the selected tables are complemented. Specifically, table entry with value ''i'' is replaced by the maximum pixel value (255 for eight bit pixels) minus ''i''.
If Set User-Defined f(C,V) is specified, the selected tables are set by the evaluation of a Mathematical Expression, specified by Curve f(C,V) with the addition of variables ''C'' representing the table index, and ''V'' for the current value of table entry ''C''. For example:
yields an inverted linear ramp (assuming eight bit pixels), and(255-C)
orifel(C>=10 && C<=100, 3, V)
sets table entries 10 through 100 to value 128 and leaves all other table entries unchanged. An expression, such as:((C>=10&&C<=100))*3 + (!(C>=10&&C<=100))*V
is an easy way of setting the entire table to a constant.123
The Modify Red, Modify Green, Modify Blue, or Modify R,G&B selects whether the operation should be applied to the red, the green, the blue, or all three tables. The Apply button applies the selected operation to the selected tables.
The Modify - Black & Gain allows manipulating each of the red, green, and blue tables with an independent set of Black Level; Gain, Contrast, or White Level; Gamma or other nonlinear function; and Invert controls.
The Black Level provides a subtractive correction; pixels below the black level are displayed with no intensity.
If Gain Controls is selected, the Gain provides a multiplicative or scaling correction. If Gain dB Controls is selected, the Gain provides a multiplicative or scaling correction specified in decibels (dB). If Contrast Controls is selected, the Contrast provides an effect similar to Gain, but ''pivots'' the scaling at the pixel values midpoint rather than at the black level. If White Controls is selected, the White Level specifies the value above which pixels are displayed as white; the smaller the difference between White Level and Black Level the greater the effective gain.
If Gamma Controls is selected and Gamma is not 1.00, the intensities are scaled by the nonlinear power curve specified by Gamma. If sRGB Controls is selected and sRGB is not ''Off,'' the intensities are scaled by the nonlinear curve specified by the sRGB color space standard (for sRGB set to ''On'') or the its inverse (for sRGB set to ''Reciprocal''). If Rec. 709 Controls is selected and Rec. 709 is not ''Off,'' the intensities are scaled by the nonlinear curve specified by the Rec. 709 color space standard (for Rec. 709 set to ''On'') or the its inverse (for Rec. 709 set to ''Reciprocal'').
If Invert is selected, the intensities produced are complemented, or inverted.
If R=G=B is selected, the red, green, and blue values of Black Level, Gain, Contrast, Gamma, sRGB, Rec. 709, and Invert are forced to be identical, providing easy adjustments to monochrome images.
If RGB Gang is selected, the red, green, and blue values of Black Level, Gain, Contrast, and Gamma, ''track'' one another, so that each set can be adjusted higher or lower while maintaining the relative differences.
The Normal Palette button resets the Black Level, Gain, Contrast, Gamma, sRGB, Rec. 709, and Invert for all three colors to the ''normal'' default; effectively disabling the effects of the palette.
The Modify - Band Coloring allows assigning colors to bands of pixel values, in order to help distinguish and visualize regions of similar pixel values, or isobars.
Selecting Banding enables band coloring of the palette. Assuming that neither Manual Color nor Manual Slicing is selected, the palette tables are partitioned into Number of Bands approximately equal bands, and each band is assigned a default color. Assuming eight bit pixels and Number of Bands of 64, each band covers 4 table entries, the first band covering table entries 0 through 3. If Sharp Boundary is selected, each band of pixel values is assigned a common color. If Smooth Boundary is selected, the assigned pixel values are smoothed or averaged so that the the color transition from band to band is not abrupt.
Selecting Manual Color allows specifying an explicit color for one or more bands. The Color Band Number specifies the band to be re-colored, the Pixel Value allows selection of an explicit pixel value, as described in Pick Pixel Value, and the Set Band's Color button actually sets the Band Number to the Pixel Value.
Selecting Manual Slicing along with Manual Color allows selecting arbitrary, and perhaps unequal, size bands. The Slice Start and Slice End specify the lowest and highest table index to be included in the band, the Set Color button actually sets the band to the Pixel Value.
For example, the palette can be set to a ''rainbow'' by selecting
and setting the seven bands to RGB colors:Number of Bands: 7 Smooth Boundary: Check Manual Color: Check Manual Slice: Uncheck
as a percentage of maximum pixel value.Red Green Blue ==== ===== ==== 100% 0% 0% 100% 65% 0% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 0% 0% 0% 100% 30% 0% 50% 90% 50% 90%
The Modify - Bit Slice allows creating a palette with which only a selected group of bits ''sliced'' from each pixel are viewed. The Bits Used selects how many of the pixel's bits are to be used, and Bits MSB specifies the bit position of the most significant used bit. For example, assuming eight bit pixels, Bits Used of 3 Bits MSB of 8 allows viewing only the 3 most significant bits of each pixel, while Bits Used of 4 Bits MSB of 6 allows viewing the center 4 bits of each pixel.
The Modify - Bit Transposition allows creating a palette with which selected bits of each pixel are used, and transposed into other bit positions. For each displayed pixel bit, Set Bit i from Bit specifies which original pixel bit provides that displayed bit's value. For four bit pixels:
displays the pixel's normal value, whileSet Bit 0 from Bit: 0 Set Bit 1 from Bit: 1 Set Bit 2 from Bit: 2 Set Bit 3 from Bit: 3
displays the least significant bit as the brightest shade of grey, the next least significant bit as the next brightest shade of grey, etc. Each Set Bit i from Bit can also be ignored by deselecting its associated Use, forcing that displayed pixel bit to 0.Set Bit 0 from Bit: 3 Set Bit 1 from Bit: 2 Set Bit 2 from Bit: 1 Set Bit 3 from Bit: 0
The Modify - White Balance allows modifying the intensities of the red, green, and blue pixels so as to achieve ''white balance''.
The Red Black Reference, Green Black Reference, and Blue Black Reference specify reference pixel values, perhaps as observed with Image Examination - Pixel Peek & Poke, of a ''black'', scene. A target (i.e. desired) black balance value is (internally) determined from the Black References, as per the Black Balance to selection; if Minimum is selected, the target value is the minimum of the Black References, if Maximum is selected, the target value is the maximum of the Black References, if Average is selected, the target value is the average of the Black References, and if Min Pixel Value is selected, the target value is 0.
The Red Bright Reference, Green Bright Reference, and Blue Bright Reference specify reference pixel values, perhaps as observed with Image Examination - Pixel Peek & Poke, of a bright, white scene. A target (i.e. desired) bright balance value is (internally) determined from the Bright References, as per the Bright Balance to selection; if Minimum is selected, the target value is the minimum of the Bright References, if Maximum is selected, the target value is the maximum of the Bright References, if Average is selected, the target value is the average of the Bright References, and if Max Pixel Value is selected, the target value is the maximum permissible pixel value.
The palette is modified so that for each color, pixel values at the Black Reference are displayed with the target black balance value, and pixel values at the Bright Reference value are displayed with the target bright balance value. The palette modification uses a subtractive correction for the black balance, and uses a multiplicative selection for the bright balance. If Gamma is not 1.00, the intensities are further scaled by the nonlinear curve specified by Gamma.
The Extract Bright Reference and Extract Black Reference can be used to automatically extract the Bright Reference and Black Reference values from an image. The Extract Bright Reference should be Apply'ed to a captured image of a bright, but not overexposed, white, surface. The Extract Black Reference should be Apply'ed to a captured image of a ''black'', surface.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The
File - Save
allows saving the current palette,
and the parameters which specified the palette;
the
File - Load
allows loading a palette previously saved.
The
File - Save
file format is intended for use only by the current version of XCAP,
and may not be reloadable in other versions.
XCAP does not force the file name's extension
to the customary extension;
although using
.set
is highly recommended.
File - Export
allows saving the current palette's values as a TIFF file,
but does not save the parameters which generated the palette's values.
The
File - Import
allows loading palette values previously saved
with
File - Export.
XCAP does not force the file name's extension
to the customary extension;
although using
.tif
is highly recommended.
As
File - Export
does not save, and
File - Import
does not load the parameters which specified the palette,
only the palette generated, the
Palette - Modify - Numerical & Mouse
paradigm is automatically selected to avoid implying that any
paradigm's parameters generated the current palette.
For all of these features, the File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box.
The Image View - Sequence Play window allows playing a sequence, image by image, at a selected rate.
The First Image (Displayed) specifies the first image buffer of the sequence, and Last Image (Displayed) specifies the last image buffer of the sequence to be displayed. If First/Last All Images is selected, the First Image (Displayed) and Last Image (Displayed) are forced to the first and last image of the sequence, respectively.
The Image Display Rate specifies the desired image sequence display rate. If Rate per Ave Time Stamps is selected, the Image Display Rate is derived from first and last image time stamps, so as to display the sequence at the same rate as it was (presumably) captured. If Rate per Image Time Stamp is selected, the instantaneous display rate is derived from the current image and the next image to be displayed, so as to allow for non-uniform capture rates. The Rate per Ave Time Stamps and Rate per Image Time Stamp are ignored if the image(s) do not have time stamps.
If Continuous Run is selected, the image sequence display endlessly repeats. If Reverse Order is selected, the image sequence display is in reverse order.
After selecting the operation's parameters, the Play button implements the operation, the Pause button pauses the operation, the Stop button terminates the operation without closing the window, and Cancel terminates the operation (if playing) and closes the window. If Start w. Current Image is selected, Play starts with the Current Image rather than with the First Image (Displayed) or Last Image (Displayed).
While playing, the Current Image shows the currently displayed image's index. The various options, above, such as Image Display Rate, Continuous Run, and Reverse Order can be changed while playing.
Depending on the host computer's speed, graphic display system, image resolution, image display size, and other variables, the image sequence may not be displayable at the rate specified. If Slow Rate to Display Images is selected, each image of the sequence is displayed even though the effective display rate is slower than specified. If Skip Images to Maintain Rate is selected, images in the sequence are skipped, as needed, so as to effectively maintain the specified display rate.
The Set (First Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the First Image (Displayed) to the Current Image. The Set (Last Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the Last Image (Displayed) to the Current Image. The Reset (First Image) button facilitates adjusting the First Image (Displayed) to the start of the sequence. The Reset (Last Image) button facilitates adjusting the Last Image (Displayed) to the end of the sequence. As a group, they allow tweaking the which image are to be displayed without having to enter image indices.
If First/Last <=> Default AOI is selected, the First Image (Displayed) and Last Image (Displayed) are initially set to the Image Viewer Window - Aoi default sequence; also, the Image Viewer Window - Aoi default sequence is set to the First Image (Displayed) and Last Image (Displayed) as they are changed.
Hint: The Current Image adjusts the current image buffer of the The Image Viewer Window; and can be used for such when not playing; the Current Image offering a larger ''slider'' for adjusting the current image buffer than most other features. Also, the slider can be enlarged by resizing the Image View - Sequence Play window via standard Windows or Linux desktop manipulation techniques.
The Image View - Sequence Thumbnails window shows each image of a sequence as a small ''thumbnail'' image, allowing compact presentation and review of the entire image sequence. The image viewer's current image buffer is marked; clicking a thumbnail selects a different image buffer. The image viewer's default AOI image buffer sequence is marked; clicking a pair of thumbnails selects a different AOI image buffer sequence. The thumbnail corresponding to a modified image buffer, such as via Image File - Load, Image Viewer Window - Modify, or Capture - Live Options is automatically updated and displayed.
If Auto Thumbnail Size is selected, the image ''thumbnails'' are automatically sized and arranged to fit within the Sequence Thumbnails window - which can be resized by standard Windows or Linux desktop manipulation techniques. Thumbnails will not be smaller than the Min(imum) Thumbnail Size (unless the window itself is smaller than Min(imum) Thumbnail Size) so as to prevent the thumbnails of a long image sequence from shrinking to a useless size while forcing them to fit within the window.
If Auto Thumbnail Size is not selected, the image ''thumbnails'' are of size Thumbnail Size (again, unless the window is smaller than Thumbnail Size), and arranged to fit within the Sequence Thumbnails window.
The Size + and Size - menu buttons provide convenient adjustment of thumbnail size via Auto Thumbnail Size or Thumbnail Size.
Depending on the number of images in the sequence and the size of the Sequence Thumbnails window, only a portion of the sequence's images may be shown, along with a scroll bar to access the remaining thumbnails.
If Tile L-to-R/T-to-B is selected, thumbnails are tiled left to right, top to bottom with an up/down scroll bar; if Tile T-to-B/L-to-R is selected, thumbnails are tiled top to bottom, left to right with a left/right scroll bar. Either option can be used with a thin, one image wide window or a short, one window high window ''film strip''; differing only in whether the scroll bar is vertical or horizontal.
If Nearest Neighbor is selected, images are resized via nearest neighbor interpolation. If Bilinear is selected, images are resized via bilinear interpolation. The Flip and Mirror allows mirroring (left to right) and flipping (top to top, left, right, or bottom) the resized images to one of eight orientations.
The Buffer Coord(inate) selects a thumbnail and thus a image of the sequence; a thumbnail can also be selected via mouse click. If B Coord<=>Viewer is selected, the Buffer Coord(inate) becomes synonymous with the image buffer selection of the The Image Viewer Window. Deselecting B Coord<=>Viewer allows multiple Image View - Sequence Thumbnails windows to view different groups of the image sequence's thumbnails.
If Mark Buffer is selected, the image corresponding to the selected buffer is graphically marked with a colored frame. If Click-Select Buffer is selected, clicking a thumbnail sets the image viewer's current display buffer.
The Seq(uence) Buffer Start and Seq(uence) Buffer End selects a sequence of thumbnails and thus a sequence of images; the thumbnail sequence can also be selected via mouse click. If Seq(uence) Buffer<=>Viewer is selected, the Seq(uence) Buffer Start and Seq(uence) Buffer End becomes synonymous with the default AOI image buffer sequence selection of the The Image Viewer Window.
The B Coord<=>Viewer or Seq(uence) Buffer<=>Viewer allows using Image View - Sequence Thumbnails Image View - Sequence Thumbnails to set an Aoi - Set Area of Interest buffer or buffer sequence, or to modify the Image Examination - Pixel Peek Image Examination - Pixel Peek or Image Examination - Pixel Plot Image Examination - Pixel Plot buffer or buffer sequence, among other features, by clicking on the desired thumbnail(s).
If Mark Seq(uence) Buffer is selected, the images corresponding to the sequence of images is graphically marked with a colored frame. If Click-Select Seq(uence) Buffer is selected, clicking a thumbnail's left side sets the Seq(uence) Buffer Start, clicking a thumbnail's right side sets the Seq(uence) Buffer End. If both Click-Select Buffer and Click-Select Seq(uence) Buffer are selected, clicking a thumbnail in mid-left side[26] sets the Seq(uence) Buffer Start, clicking a thumbnail in mid-right side[27] sets the Seq(uence) Buffer End, and otherwise sets the Buffer Coord(inate).
If Show Buffer Index is selected, the image buffer number is overlaid within each image thumbnail, space permitting. If Show Seq(uence) Index is selected, the index relative to the start of sequence is overlaid within each image thumbnail, space permitting. If is selected, the time stamp associated with the image (if any), in the customary time format, is overlaid within each image thumbnail, space permitting. If is selected, the time stamp associated with the image (if any), in the customary calendar date and time format, is overlaid within each image thumbnail, space permitting. The text size, position, and color can be adjusted as described in Graphic Text.
The Scroll Bar allows removing the scrollbar; the slider or scrollpad of the Buffer Coord(inate) are still available for scrolling of the thumbnails. The Menu Bar allows removing the menu bar; a mouse right click over the thumbnails can be used to restore the menu bar. The Frame Thickness allows adjusting the thickness of the colored frame around each thumbnail; the Frame Color allows selecting the color of the frame around each thumbnail. The Border Thickness allows adjusting the thickness of the border between thumbnails. These options allow customizing the thumbnail presentation, allowing more thumbnails to fit within the size of the Image View - Sequence Thumbnails.
As the Sequence Thumbnails is a condensation of the entire image sequence, delays are to be expected when a large number of images from a long image sequence are being displayed as thumbnails.
In addition to various controls, above, and their customary manipulation via mouse and keyboard, the Image View - Sequence Thumbnails provides the following.
Key | Mouse | Action | ||
Up | | Scroll display up | ||
Pg-Up | | (if tiled L-to-R) | ||
| | or left (if tiled T-to-B) | ||
Dn | | Scroll display down | ||
Pg-Dn | | (if tiled L-to-R) | ||
| | or right (if tiled T-to-B) | ||
| R-Drag | Scroll display | ||
Enter | R-Click | Popup menu | ||
Numeric '+' | | Thumbnail size increment | ||
Numeric '-' | | Thumbnail size decrement | ||
| | | ||
Left | L-Click | Select as current | ||
Right | thumbnail | buffer | ||
Ctrl+Left | L-Click | Select as sequence | ||
Ctrl+Right | thumbnail | start buffer | ||
| left side | | ||
Shift+Left | L-Click | Select as sequence | ||
Shift+Right | thumbnail | end buffer | ||
| right side| | ||
'[' | | Select first or | ||
']' | | last as current buffer | ||
Ctrl+'[' | | Select first or last | ||
Ctrl+']' | | as sequence start buffer | ||
Shift+'[' | | Select first or last | ||
Shift+']' | | as sequence end buffer |
The Image View - Cursor window provides a full image cross-hair cursor over the displayed image.
If Cursor On is selected, the cross-hair cursor is activated and appears over the displayed image. The cursor's image pixel coordinates can be explicitly set as Cursor X Coord. and Cursor Y Coord.. If Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the Cursor H Coord. and Cursor V Coord.. allows setting the cursor in user-defined H and V units. The Cursor Color allows specifying the cursor's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color.
If Cursor Interact is selected, the cursor may be positioned by left clicking, or left dragging, over the displayed image. The Cursor X Coord., Cursor Y Coord., and Cursor H Coord., Cursor V Coord., as appropriate, display the cursor's position.
The Image View - Display window allows selecting how the image is displayed. For the image viewer window associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffer(s), the Image View - Display provides additional features, and is identical to the Capture - Live Options.
If Resize: None (Image Pixel = Display Pixel) is selected, the image is displayed without resizing so that there is a one to one relationship between an image pixel and a graphic display system's pixel. This avoids any image artifacts due to resizing, but the displayed image will only have the correct aspect ratio if the image's and display's aspect ratio match - typically square or 1-to-1. The entire image may not fit within the image viewer window, the displayed portion of the image can be panned and scrolled as described in Image View - Zoom, Pan, Scroll. Of the various resize options, this selection provides the fastest drawing speed.
If Resize: Pixel Replication/Decimation is selected, the image is enlarged by pixel replication, or reduced by pixel decimation, to fit within the image viewer window. As for Resize: None (Image Pixel = Display Pixel), this avoids any image artifacts due to resizing, but the displayed image will only have the correct aspect ratio if the image's and display's aspect ratio match - typically square or 1-to-1. Unlike Resize: None (Image Pixel = Display Pixel), low resolution images on high resolution displays have a useful display size.
If Resize: To Window & Aspect Ratio is selected, the image is resized by interpolation so as to fit within the image viewer window while maintaining the correct aspect ratio. If Resize: Nearest Neighbor Interpolation is selected, the image is resized by nearest neighbor interpolation; this selection provides the correct aspect ratio, and is faster than Resize: Bilinear Interpolation. If Resize: Near Neighbor Deflicker Interpolation is selected, the image is resized by a near neighbor interpolation which reduces display artifacts due to the image being interlaced; this selection provides the correct aspect ratio, and is almost as fast as Resize: Nearest Neighbor Interpolation. If Resize: Bilinear Interpolation is selected, the image is resized by nearest bilinear interpolation; this selection may produce better results for continuous tone images, but is slower.
The image viewer window can be resized by standard Windows or Linux desktop manipulation techniques. Depending upon the size of the image viewer window, the Resize mode, and the image's aspect ratio, portions of the image viewer window, either below or to the right of the displayed image, may be intentionally unused; in Resize: None (Image Pixel = Display Pixel) if the image viewer window is larger than the image, in Resize: Pixel Replication/Decimation mode and the size of the image viewer window is not an integer multiple or sub-multiple of the image size, or in the interpolation modes if the image viewer window's aspect ratio doesn't match the image's aspect ratio.
The image pixel's displayed aspect ratio is automatically set and shown as Default Aspect Ratio. A different aspect ratio can be selected with Alternate Aspect Ratio. Neither setting has effect if Resize: None (Image Pixel = Display Pixel) or Resize: Pixel Replication/Decimation is selected; the displayed pixel aspect ratio is that of the graphic display system.
If Ignore Odd Lines or Ignore Even Lines is selected, the odd or even lines, respectively, of the image are not displayed. This is intended to avoid displaying interlace artifacts, for images captured from interlaced video sources of moving objects.
If AWT API? is selected, images are displayed using the native Java image display method, under Windows or Linux.
If GDI API? is selected, images are displayed using the Windows Graphic Device Interface, an API available on all versions of Windows and all graphic display systems.
If Video For Windows API? is selected, images are displayed using the Windows Video for Windows Interface, an API available on all versions of Windows and all graphic display systems.
If DirectX API? is selected, images are displayed using Windows DirectX/DirectDraw, available on some versions of Windows and some graphic display systems. The DirectX API? may be faster than GDI API?.
If either DirectX Dual Buffer ... API? is selected, images are displayed using Windows DirectX/DirectDraw using double buffers and overlay hardware, available on some versions of Windows and some graphic display systems. The DirectX Dual Buffer ... API? may be faster than GDI API?. The DirectX Dual Buffer ... API? eliminates the transient ''switchover'' effect seen just as a displayed image is updated often; due to the update, and the graphic display system, being asynchronous to each other. The DirectX Dual Buffer RGB API? requests a RGB format graphic display system buffer, the DirectX Dual Buffer YUV API? requests a YUV format graphic display system buffer. For the former, some graphic display systems cards may introduce additional distortion (such as by internally, and imprecisely, converting RGB to YUV), or may only support 64 grey levels. The latter may be quicker, but the resolution is reduced by conversion of RGB to YUV.
The DirectX API requires that the graphic display system be in 24 or 32 bit per pixel mode. A graphic display system in 16 bit per pixel mode can use the GDI API, AWT API, or Video For Windows API.
The availability of DirectX Dual Buffer ... API, and the supported graphic display system pixel depth is completely dependent on the graphic display system. Availability is also dependent on the size of the graphic display system's memory and the size of the image viewer window, and may be available only for one image viewer window.
If XWindows/X11 API is selected, images are displayed using the Linux XWindows interface.
The AWT API?, GDI API?, Video For Windows API?, DirectX API?, DirectX Dual Buffer RGB API?, DirectX Dual Buffer YUYV API?, and/or XWindows/X11 API may be selected as a primary, secondary, or tertiary choice; XCAP flags the API actually used (adjacent to the selection).
The Render w. (Threads) allows selecting use of multiple threads and CPU's (or CPU cores) for rendering images and video for display; potentially increasing the display rate. The Render w. (Threads) allows selecting 1 Thread through 8 Threads; selecting more threads than the current computer's number of CPU's (or CPU cores) may be counter-productive. The Render w. (Threads) also allows selecting All CPUs, 50% CPUs, and 25% CPUs with the number of threads based on the specified percentage of the number of CPU's (or CPU cores); the Threads Used shows the number of threads actually used. The Video For Windows API? and XWindows/X11 API? selections support use of multiple threads.
If Apply Palette at Display's Bit Depth is selected, the palette, if any is converted to and applied at the graphic display system's bit depth. If Apply Palette Apply at Image's Bit Depth is selected, the palette, if any, is applied as per the image's bit depth. The distinction is only important with images with more than 8 bits per pixel component, the former option is quicker and suffices for false coloring, coarse contrast adjustments, or grey level inversion. The latter option allows viewing the image's full dynamic range and avoids ''banding'' artifacts when a small range of the original pixel values are being enhanced for display. If Apply Palette at - Auto Select is selected, the palette will be applied at either the graphic display system's bit depth or the image's bit depth, automatically chosen so as to avoid banding artifacts while minimizing display overhead.
For images with attached palette, if View with Image's Palette is selected, the image is viewed with its attached palette. If View with Viewer's Palette is selected, the image is viewed with the viewer's palette. If View without Palette is selected, the image pixels are viewed without modification by a palette. Requesting modification of a palette, with View - Image's Palette or View - Viewer's Palette automatically selects viewing with that palette. Once a palette is selected, the View without Palette allows de-selecting use of either palette.
Selecting Load/Save with Image's Palette, Load/Save with Viewer's Palette, or Load/Save without Palette, affects later use of Image File - Save, Image File - Save Sequence, Image File - Load, or Image File - Load Sequence; allowing the viewer's palette to be substituted for the images attached palette (if any), or attaching a palette to a monochrome image, turning it into an image of index pixels plus palette.
If Size Window: Default is selected, the image viewer window is set to a default size and position which is dependent in part on whether the image viewer window supports image capture and how many such image viewer windows are to be created. If Size Window: Cascade is selected, the image viewer window is set to a default size with multiple windows cascading on a diagonal across the graphic display. If Size Window: Fill Window is selected, the image viewer window is sized to fill, but not obscure, the Main Window. If Size Window: Full Window is selected, the image viewer window is set to XCAP's full display area, obscuring the Main Window, with the window, its title bar, its menu bar, and its displayed image all shown. If Size Window: Fill Screen is selected, the image viewer window is set to full screen size, with the window, its title bar, its menu bar, and its displayed image all shown. The Size Window: Fill Screen is useful if the Max Screen Area Width and max Screen Area Height (see Utilities - Program Setup) are limiting XCAP's default screen area to an area smaller then the full screen size.
If Size Window: Full Screen is selected, the image viewer window is set to display the image in the full graphic display screen without the menu bar, centered with black border (if needed), and with little or no window ''frame'' around the image. On systems with multiple monitors, the monitor on which the image viewer window was originally positioned will be used. The previous display mode is restored via a mouse right-click.
If Shortcuts: Attached is selected, the Image View - Shortcuts when activated, are attached to and part of the image viewer window. If Shortcuts: Detached is selected, the Image View - Shortcuts when activated, are detached into its own window.
If Zoom On is selected, the displayed image is magnified by a factor of Zoom Ratio. For sequences, the image of the sequence being displayed is shown, and can be changed, with Sequence Buffer.
When magnified, only a portion of the image is viewable, the Pan Position (X) and Scroll Position (Y) allows explicit specification of the viewed area's upper left X and Y coordinates.
Interactively, the portion of the image viewed can be adjusted via scrollbars to the right and below the image, or by holding the right mouse button and dragging the mouse over the image; the effect of dragging the mouse can be selected as either Drag Viewer over Image or the opposite Drag Image under Viewer.
If Zoom Interact a mouse click on the image can increase the Zoom Ratio, decrease the Zoom Ratio, or sets the Zoom Ratio to one. The Zoom Interact and mouse clicks also adjust the Pan Position (X) and Scroll Position (Y) so as to visually center the image point clicked. If Interact w. Left Mouse Button is selected, a a single mouse left click on the image increases the Zoom Ratio, a double mouse left click decreases the Zoom Ratio, and a triple mouse left click sets the Zoom Ratio to one. If Interact w. Right Mouse Button is selected, a a double mouse right click on the image increases the Zoom Ratio, a triple mouse right click decreases the Zoom Ratio, and a quadruple mouse right click sets the Zoom Ratio to one.
The same scrolling and panning techniques apply when a Display - Resize mode of Resize: None (Image Pixel = Display Pixel) is selected and the image is larger than the image viewer window.
The Image Mirror: Normal versus Image Mirror: Mirrored selects whether the image display is mirrored right to left instead of left to right.
The Image Flip: Top => Top, Image Flip: Top => Bottom, Image Flip: Top => Left Side, versus Image Flip: Top => Right Side selects whether the image display is flipped so that the image top is oriented to the to the left, right, or bottom.
If Status Bar: Cursor Coordinates is selected, the status bar provides the current cursor coordinates if the cursor is being displayed. If Status Bar: Pixel at Cursor is selected and if the cursor is being displayed, the status bar provides the current value of the pixel at the current cursor coordinates; the pixel value's presentation, such as color space and related options, can be set via Image Examination - Pixel Peek. If Status Bar: Buffer Coordinate is selected, the status bar provides the current buffer number, if more than one image buffer is used. If Status Bar: Image Size is selected, the status bar provides the image's dimensions. If Status Bar: Zoom Ratio is selected, the status bar provides the current zoom ratio. If Status Bar: Pan&Scroll Position is selected, the status bar provides the current pan & scroll position. If Status Bar: Flip & Mirror is selected, the status bar provides the current image flip and mirror selections. If Status Bar: Resize Ratio is selected, the status bar provides the current ratio by which the image is resized for display. If Status Bar: Palette Usage is selected, the status bar advises whether the Display - Palette is in use and therefore modifying the displayed image. If Status Bar: Date & Time Stamp is selected, the status bar provides the current image's date and time stamp, if any.
If Status Bar: User-Defined is selected, the status bar displays the contents of Status Bar: User-Defined Text, which typically is set via the Black Board so as to display customized status derived from numeric and text fields of various windows.
The status bar scrolls if the amount of information exceeds the available display area; the Status Bar: Scroll Rate allows adjusting the scroll rate. A rate of zero can be used to pause the status bar scroll; hovering the mouse on the status bar also pauses its scroll.
The Image View - Zoom, Pan, Scroll window allows magnifying the displayed image, panning and scrolling to view different portions of the image under magnification. For image sequences, a specific image of the sequence can be selected for display.
The Zoom On, Zoom Ratio, Sequence Buffer, Pan Position (X), and Scroll Position (Y) duplicate the controls under Display - Zoom, Pan, Scroll, above; the Image View - Zoom, Pan, Scroll provides a smaller window — obstructing less of the display, with the often used controls.
The Image View - Flip & Mirror allows flipping and mirroring the displayed image so that the top is displayed to the top, left, right, or bottom.
The Image View - Shortcuts provides a tool bar of icons with shortcuts for accessing often used features of The Image Viewer Window. The shortcuts provided are:
The shortcuts may either be attached and part of The Image Viewer Window, or may be detached into its own window, as set by Image View - Display.
The windows accessible under Image Viewer Window - Examine provides interactive examination of the image.
The Image Examination - Pixel Peek allows numeric display of the pixel values in the vicinity of the image cursor — within a single image, or across a sequence of images. The feature also graphically displays each pixel's value or trends.
For as in Image or thru Palette modes, the Color Space, allows selecting the numerical pixel's value color space. Viewed values may be in the monochrome (i.e. Grey), RGB, YCrCb, HSB, CMY, or CMYK color space, and for the colored spaces either all components (e.g. R, G & B) or one component (e.g. R of RGB) can be displayed. For as in Image mode, when the underlying image is produced by a camera outputting raw Bayer format pixel data, the Bayer Color Space may be selected. The Color Space does not modify the image's pixels, only the displayed values. Using the menu-bar Options, the values can be displayed in binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal.
For the thru Z=>I Calib. mode, and if the Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration has been activated, the displayed values are intensities rather than physical pixel values, and using the menu-bar Options, the intensities can be displayed in fixed point or scientific notation with selected digits of precision. The I Units appears, showing the name of the I units in use. The Color Space selection is not applicable.
If X/Y is selected, a table of pixel values of one image are displayed, with the X coordinate arranged horizontally, the Y coordinate arranged vertically, and the Buffer coordinate constant. If X/B is selected, a table of pixel values of a sequence of images are displayed, with the X coordinate arranged horizontally, the Buffer coordinate arranged vertically, and the Y coordinate constant. If B/Y is selected, a table of pixel values of a sequence of images are displayed, with the Buffer coordinate arranged horizontally, the Y coordinate arranged vertically. and the X coordinate constant.
Typically, only a portion of the image's pixels, displayed numerically, fit within the Image Examination - Pixel Peek window. The viewed portion can be panned or scrolled via the horizontal and vertical scroll bars or via the explicit X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, and/or B Coordinate. The displayed pixel value at X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, and B Coordinate. is marked as specified by Mark Coord. with a Box, Underline, Highlight, or None.
If X,Y Coord<=>Cursor is selected, the X Coordinate and Y Coordinate become synonymous with the Image View - Cursor; moving the image cursor (left click over the displayed image) also pans or scrolls the numeric pixel display, and inversely, allowing convenient and simultaneous adjustment of both. Deselecting X,Y Coord<=>Cursor allows multiple Image Examination - Pixel Peek windows to view different areas of the image. If B Coord<=>Viewer is selected, the Buffer Coordinate become synonymous with the image buffer selection of the The Image Viewer Window. Deselecting B Coord<=>Viewer allows multiple Image Examination - Pixel Peek windows to view different image buffers.
If Y Image Stack or X Image Plank is selected, the sequence of images is presented and viewed as a single image composed of a concatenated vertical ''stack'' or a horizontal ''plank'' of the images, respectively; the B Coordinate and B Coord<=>Viewer are not used.
If Ave. Image Stack is selected, a sequence of images is presented and viewed as a single image composed by the averaging of corresponding pixels of the sequence. The B Coordinate and B Coord<=>Viewer are not used; the Seq(uence) Buffer Start and Seq(uence) Buffer End allow selecting the start and end sequence buffers to be averaged. If Seq(uence) Buf(fer)<=>Viewer is selected, the Seq(uence) Buffer Start and Seq(uence) Buffer End becomes synonymous with the default AOI image buffer sequence selection of the The Image Viewer Window.
If Show Peek Window is selected, a box is drawn over the image indicating the portion of the image displayed numerically. If Show Viewer Cursor is selected, a cross-hair is drawn across the numeric pixel values indicating the position of the image cursor.
The Highlight f(...) allows selecting pixel values to be highlighted by evaluation of a Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variables ''GreyLevel'' to represent the pixel's grey level, ''RofRGB'' to represent the pixel's red component in RGB color space, ''GofRGB'' to represent the pixel's green component in RGB color space, ''BofRGB'' to represent the pixel's blue component in RGB color space, ''HofHSB'' to represent the pixel's hue component in HSB color space, ''SofHSB'' to represent the pixel's saturation component in HSB color space, ''BofHSB'' to represent the pixel's brightness component in HSB color space, ''YofYCrCb'' to represent the pixel's Y component in YCrCb color space, ''CrofYCrCb'' to represent the pixel's Cr component in YCrCb color space, ''CbofYCrCb'' to represent the pixel's Cb component in YCrCb color space, ''CofCMY'' to represent the pixel's cyan component in CMY color space, ''MofCMY'' to represent the pixel's magenta component in CMY color space, ''YofCMY'' to represent the pixel's yellow component in CMY color space, ''CofCMYK'' to represent the pixel's cyan component in CMYK color space, ''MofCMYK'' to represent the pixel's magenta component in CMYK color space, ''YofCMYK'' to represent the pixel's yellow component in CMYK color space, ''KofCMYK'' to represent the pixel's black component in CMYK color space, or ''I'' to represent the pixel's intensity if the thru Z=>I Calib. mode is selected. For example,
highlights pixels whose red and blue components are identical and whose grey level is greater than 50. The Highlight f(...) is not available when displaying pixel values in the Bayer color space.RofRGB == BofRGB && GreyLevel > 50
If Bar Graph is selected, the size of the contrasting background behind each pixel value is proportional to the pixel's value. If Trends Graph is selected, the background contrast plots the recent historical values of the pixel; if Delta is also selected, the difference of historical trends is plotted. If Linear is selected, the bar graph or trends graph scale is linear; if Log is selected, the bar graph scale or trends graph scale is logarithmic. If Vert(ical) is selected, the bar graph is oriented vertically, If Horz(Horizontal) is selected, the bar graph is oriented horizontally. If ×10 and/or ×100 is selected, the graph is scaled by a factor of 10 or 100, so as to magnify the visibility of small pixel values, or small differences. The Bar Graph or Trends Graph is not available if thru Z=>I Calib. is selected.
If Use Default Font is selected, the pixel values are displayed using a default font and size. (See Window Style - Fonts). Alternately, the Alt. Point Size, Alt. Font Name, and whether the text should be Plain, Bold, or Italic can be specified. The range of allowable choices is dependent on the host operating system. The Text + and Text - menu buttons provide convenient adjustment of text size via Alt. Point Size.
If Use Default Color is selected, the pixel value display uses default colors. (See Window Style - Color). Alternately, the color of the Background, Foreground, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Cursor Marker, Highlight (used by Highlight f(...) above), and the Peek Window, (see Show Peek Window above) can each be selected as described for Pick Graphics Color.
If Pixel's Background or Pixie's Background is selected, the background of each numeric pixel value is replaced with the RGB color of the corresponding pixel, or the grey level of the corresponding pixel component value, respectively.
The Coordinates allows removing the coordinate labels. The Scroll Bars allows removing the scrollbars; the scrollpads of the X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, and/or B Coordinate are still available. The Menu Bar" allows removing the menu bar; a mouse right click over the numeric pixel values can be used to restore the menu bar. These options provide more space for numeric pixel values and/or allows reducing the size of the Image Examination - Pixel Peek window. The RGB Vert(ical) selects displaying RGB (or other color space) pixels values vertically, the RGB Horz(Horizontal) selects displaying the multiple values of color pixels horizontally.
The File - Save Data allows saving the data shown by Image Examination - Pixel Peek. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. Upon selection of a file name, the data is saved as ASCII text, one text line per row of pixel value components. Like most image processing features, this operation may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest can be selected with the Set AOI button.
In addition to various controls, above, and their customary manipulation via mouse and keyboard, the Image Examination - Pixel Peek provides the following.
Key | Mouse | Action | ||
Enter | R-Click | Popup menu | ||
Numeric '+' | | Increment text size | ||
Numeric '-' | | Decrement text decrement | ||
Left | | Adjust X Coordinate | ||
Right | | or Y Coordinate, | ||
Ctrl+Left | | depending on X/Y, | ||
Ctrl+Right | | X/B or B/Y selection | ||
Up | | Adjust B Coordinate | ||
Down | | or Y Coordinate, | ||
Ctrl+Up | | depending on X/Y, | ||
Ctrl+Down | | X/B or B/Y selection | ||
| L-Click | Set X Coordinate, | ||
| pixel | Y Coordinate, and/or | ||
| | B Coordinate to pixel's | ||
| | coordinates |
The Image Examination - Pixel Peek & Poke window allows viewing an image's individual pixels as numeric values and color swatches, and altering their values. The Image Examination - Pixel Peek & Poke also allows precise, single pixel, image editing.
The X Coordinate and Y Coordinate specify the coordinates of the single pixel being displayed. If Coord<=>Cursor is selected, the X Coordinate and Y Coordinate becomes synonymous with the Image View - Cursor; moving the image cursor (left click over the displayed image) also selects the pixel value to be displayed, and inversely. Deselecting Coord<=>Cursor allows multiple Image Examination - Pixel Peek & Poke windows to view different pixels of the image.
The selected pixel's value is shown in monochrome, RGB, HSB, YCrCb, CMY, and CMYK color spaces as described in Pick Pixel Value. Entering new numeric value(s), or clicking the Pick Graphics Color color wheel (hint: click the color swatch to bring up the color wheel), immediately alters the selected pixel.
The Copy Pixel (Value), Paste Pixel (Value), and Undo Pixel (Value) allows copying the current pixel value, pasting it where desired, and reversing the paste. The Undo Pixel (Value) also reverse pixel any modifications via numeric entry or clicking the color swatch (above). If Auto Paste is selected, the copied pixel value is automatically pasted as the X Coordinate and Y Coordinate are changed or the image cursor moved.
The Image Examination - Pixel Plot window displays a two-dimensional graph of pixels values along a selected image line or column, of all image lines or columns, of an image pixel as it varies across an image sequence, or rows or columns as they vary across an image sequence. The recent trends of pixel values can also be shown, as an fading ''echo,'' to help visually evaluate the fluctuations of live video or the effects of camera adjustments. Features attached to the graph show specific pixel values and descriptive statistics such as lowest value, highest value, mean value, and standard deviation.
From the Pixel Plot menu-bar, the File's Save Graphics, Save Data, Copy Data to Clipboard, and Print Graphics features; the Controls' Format, Color, Axis, MinMax, Label, Probe, and Reference features; and the Stats' Descriptive and Outlier features provides standard features common to, and described in, 2-D Graphs.
In addition, the Controls' Where provides additional options unique to the Pixel Plot.
The X Coord(inate) and Y Coord(inate) specify the X and Y coordinate of the pixel values to be graphed. If Coord<=>Cursor is selected, the X Coord(inate) and Y Coord(inate) becomes synonymous with the Image View - Cursor; moving the image cursor (left click over the displayed image) also affects which row or column is graphed, and inversely. Deselecting Coord<=>Cursor allows multiple Image Examination - Pixel Plot windows to view different areas of the image. The Buffer Coord(inate) specifies the image buffer (of a sequence) of the pixel values to be graphed. If B Coord<=>Viewer is selected, the Buffer Coord become synonymous with the image buffer selection of the The Image Viewer Window, tracking the current buffer selection.
If Plot Row is selected, the pixels at the Y Coord of the selected (or current) buffer are graphed. If Plot Column is selected, the pixels at the X Coord of the selected (or current) buffer are graphed. If PlotPixel×B" is selected, the pixels at the X Coord and Y Coord across the sequence of buffers are graphed. If Plot Rows × Y is selected, the pixels of all rows of the selected (or current) buffer are graphed. If Plot Rows × B is selected, the pixels in the rows at the Y Coord across the sequence of buffers are graphed. If Plot Columns × X is selected, the pixels of all columns of the selected (or current) buffer are graphed. If Plot Columns × B is selected, the pixels in the columns at the X Coord across the sequence of buffers are graphed.
If Vert. Image Stack or Horz. Image Plank is selected, the sequence of images is presented and viewed as a single image composed of a concatenated vertical ''stack'' or a horizontal ''plank'' of the images, respectively; the Buffer Coord and B Coord<=>Viewer are not used.
If Ave. Image Stack is selected, a sequence of images is presented and viewed as a single image composed by the averaging of corresponding pixels of the sequence. The Buffer Coord and B Coord<=>Viewer are not used; the Seq. Buffer Start and Seq. Buffer End allow selecting the start and end sequence buffers to be averaged.
If Cursor >= Probe is selected, the Controls - Probe is linked to the image cursor or to the current sequence buffer number. If Plot Row is selected, the probe is set to the cursor X coordinate. If Plot Column is selected, the probe is set to the cursor Y coordinate. If PlotPixelxB" is selected, the probe is set to the current image sequence buffer number.
If the Pixel Values of as in Image is selected, the numeric values of pixels in the image buffer(s) are shown. If thru Palette is selected and The Image Viewer Window's palette is in use, the numeric pixel values as seen through the effects of the palette are shown. If thru Z=>I Calib. is selected and the Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration is in use, the intensities as computed by the Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration are shown.
For as in Image or thru Palette modes, the Color Space, allows selecting the numerical pixel's value color space. Viewed values may be in the monochrome, RGB, YCrCb, HSB, CMY, or the CMYK color space, and for the colored spaces either all components (e.g. R, G & B) or one component (e.g. R of RGB) can be displayed. For as in Image mode, when the underlying image is produced by a camera outputting raw Bayer format pixel data, the Bayer Color Space may be selected. The Color Space does not modify the image's pixels, only the displayed values.
For the thru Z=>I Calib. mode, and if the Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration has been activated, the displayed values are intensities rather than physical pixel values. The Color Space selection is not applicable.
The Menu Bar allows removing the menu bar; a mouse right click over the graph can be used to restore the menu bar. This option provides more space for the graph and/or allows reducing the size of the Image Examination - Pixel Plot window.
In addition to various controls, above, and their customary manipulation via mouse and keyboard, the Image Examination - Pixel Plot provides the following.
Key | Mouse | Action | ||
Up | | Ordinate Zoom | ||
Ctrl-Up | | in | ||
Dn | | Ordinate Zoom | ||
Ctrl-Dn | | out | ||
Shift-Up | | Ordinate Zoom | ||
Shift-Ctrl-Up | | shift up | ||
Shift-Dn | | Ordinate Zoom | ||
Shift-Ctrl-Dn | | shift down | ||
Alt-Dn | | Ordinate Min & Max | ||
| | default values | ||
Right | | Abscissa Zoom | ||
Ctrl-Right | | in | ||
Left | | Abscissa Zoom | ||
Ctrl-Left | | out | ||
Shift-Right | | Abscissa Zoom | ||
Shift-Ctrl-Right| | shift right | ||
Shift-Left | | Abscissa Zoom | ||
Shift-Ctrl-Left | | shift left | ||
Alt-Left | | Abscissa Min & Max | ||
| | default values | ||
Enter | R-Click | Popup menu |
The Image Examination - Pixel Plot 3D window displays the numeric values of pixels as as a three-dimensional graph — from a single image or from a multi-image ''stack'' — with the image X and Y coordinates composing two dimensions, and the pixel values composing the third dimension.
From the Pixel Plot 3D menu-bar, the File's Save Graphics and Print Graphics features; and the Controls' Format, Color, and Labels provides standard features common to, and described in, 3-D Graphs.
In addition, the Controls' Where and What provides additional options unique to the Pixel Plot 3D.
The Where allows specification of the area of interest of the current buffer to be graphed. The area of interest is specified via a Graphic Window, allowing setting an area of interest by using explicit coordinates, or by drawing over the image.
The What allows specification of the pixel values and color space to be graphed, whether to use the current image buffer or a specified image buffer, and whether to use a single image buffer or a stack of image buffers. The Aoi - Set Area of Interest provides a detailed explanation of the What options. If the Pixel Values of as in Image is selected, the numeric values of pixels in the image buffer(s) are shown. If thru Palette is selected and The Image Viewer Window's palette is in use, the numeric pixel values as seen through the effects of the palette are shown. If thru Z=>I Calib. is selected and the Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration is in use, the intensities as computed by the Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration are shown.
For as in Image or thru Palette modes, the Color Space, allows selecting the numerical pixel's value color space. Viewed values may be in the monochrome, RGB, YCrCb, HSB, CMY, or the CMYK color space, and for the colored spaces which color component (e.g. R of RGB) should be displayed. For as in Image mode, when the underlying image is produced by a camera outputting raw Bayer format pixel data, the Bayer Color Space may be selected. The Color Space does not modify the image's pixels, only the displayed values.
For the thru Z=>I Calib. mode, and if the Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration has been activated, the displayed values are intensities rather than physical pixel values. The Color Space selection is not applicable.
The Menu Bar allows removing the menu bar; a mouse right click over the graph can be used to restore the menu bar. This option provides more space for the graph and/or allows reducing the size of the Image Examination - Pixel Plot 3D window.
In addition to various controls, above, and their customary manipulation via mouse and keyboard, the Image Examination - Pixel Plot 3D provides the following.
Key | Mouse | Action | ||
Up | | Increment | ||
Ctrl-Up | | Y Rotation | ||
Dn | | Decrement | ||
Ctrl-Dn | | Y Rotation | ||
Down | | Increment | ||
Ctrl-Down | | X Rotation | ||
Down | | Decrement | ||
Ctrl-Down | | X Rotation | ||
Pg-Up | | Increment Z Height | ||
Pg-Down | | Decrement Z Height | ||
Numeric '+' | | Increment Image Density | ||
Ctrl '+' | | or Plot Fill | ||
Numeric '-' | | Decrement Image Density | ||
Ctrl '-' | | or Plot Fill | ||
Enter | R-Click | Popup menu |
The Image Examination - Pixel Magnifier window allows enlarging an area of the displayed image, with an effect similar to using a magnifying lens. Optionally, contrast and other enhancements can be applied to the magnified area.
The Magnification selects the magnification ratio; allowing both integer and fractional ratios.
The Square or Circle selects a square or circular magnification area, respectively. The Magnifier Size selects the size of the area of the image to be replaced by the magnifier, as a percentage of the image width. If Height per Aspect Ratio is selected, the magnifier's height is adjusted for a visually correct square or circle; otherwise the magnifier's pixel height and pixel width are identical.
The area of the image to be magnified can be selected via the explicit X Coordinate and Y Coordinate,
If Coord<=>Cursor is selected, the X Coordinate and Y Coordinate become synonymous with the Image View - Cursor; moving the image cursor (left click over the displayed image) also moves the magnification area, and inversely, allowing convenient and simultaneous adjustment of both. Deselecting Coord<=>Cursor allows multiple Image Examination - Pixel Magnifier windows to magnify different areas of the image.
If Nearest Neighbor is selected, the image area is resized via nearest neighbor interpolation. If Bilinear is selected, the image area is resized via bilinear interpolation.
The Magnify On allows enabling or disabling magnification and enhancements (below).
If Rim Show the rim of the magnified area (i.e. what would be the rim of a magnifying lens) is marked using Rim Color and Rim Thickness.
Optionally, the magnified area may be enhanced.
If Contrast Stretch is selected, pixel values are ''stretched'' so that pixel value Low Endpoint becomes 0 (typically black) and pixel value High Endpoint becomes the maximum pixel value (typically white).
If Black & Gain is selected, pixel values are adjusted by subtraction of Black Level and multiplication by Gain.
If Negative is selected, pixel values are inverted (complemented).
The Enhance On allows enabling or disabling all of these enhancements.
Hint: With Magnification set to 1.0 and Rim Show disabled, the Image Examination - Pixel Magnifier can be used for ''spot'' contrast enhancements of the displayed image - without magnification or rim graphics.
The Image Examination - SMPTE VITC window allows searching the image for valid SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC) information, and displaying the decoded Time Code.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Apply button implements the operation and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the image is modified.
The Decode SMPTE VITC operation assumes that an image has been previously captured, with the video format adjusted (see PIXCI® - Video Setup) so as to capture portions of the vertical blanking interval (i.e. several lines above the first line normally captured). Thus, the image buffer contains one or more lines with VITC pulses, seen as a black line with white dots and dashes.
Executing Decode SMPTE VITC scans the image area of interest, from top to bottom, stopping at the first line which can be successfully decoded, as per the VITC specification. The VITC information is decoded and shown as the Time, in HH:MM:SS format, the Frame & Field, the Drop Mark, the Color Mark and the user-defined Bin Groups and Bin Group Flag. Also shown as Found at Line (Y) is the image buffer Y coordinate where the VITC information was found. All of these fields are set to 0 (for numbers), or blanked (for non-numbers) if no VITC information is found.
As interlaced images contain four lines of VITC (each of the two fields containing two identical lines), the various VITC lines can be decoded by choosing an image area of interest other than the full image buffer. For example, Decode SMPTE VITC may be executed once upon the full image buffer, noting the Found at Line (Y), and executed again while selecting an image area of interest which starts immediately after the reported Found at Line (Y).
The windows accessible under Image Viewer Window - Modify provides image processing operations such as filters, transforms, convolutions, and similar operations which set all of the pixels of an image's area of interest based upon an original image's area of interest.
The Image Processing - Patterns window allows drawing a variety of predefined image patterns into an existing image.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Linear Ramp draws patterns which linearly change from the lowest to the highest pixel values. The Log Ramp draws patterns which change from the lowest to the highest pixel values logarithmically. The (Cos(x)+1)×(Cos(y)+1) draws patterns which change from the lowest to the highest pixel values as a product of cosines. The Horizontal Frequency and Vertical Frequency specify the number of cycles, within the image AOI if selected, in the horizontal and vertical directions; either can be set to 0 for a one-dimensional pattern in the other direction.
For each direction, with Invert and Half Cycle parameters off, the patterns begin with high values (e.g. white), fall to low values (black) and rise to high values. The Invert, Horizontal and Invert, Vertical parameters cause the patterns to begin low, rise high, and fall low in the indicated direction. The Half Cycle, Horizontal and Half Cycle, Vertical parameters cause the patterns to begin high, fall to low values, and immediately return to high values in the indicated direction.
The Step Max Values, Horizontal and Step Max Values, Vertical parameters cause the maximum intensity of each cycle to vary, with the minimum pixel value remaining at 0. The Step Min Values, Horizontal and Step Min Values, Vertical parameters cause the minimum intensity of each cycle to vary, with the maximum pixel value constant relative to the minimum value. The Step Max Values, Horizontal and Step Max Values, Vertical and the Step Min Values, Horizontal and Step Min Values, Vertical options are mutually exclusive.
The Cos(x+y)+1 generates a two-dimensional pattern with frequencies specified Horizontal Frequency and Vertical Frequency.
The Gaussian generates a two-dimensional Gaussian curve (i.e the ''normal'' distribution), repeated horizontally and vertically as per the Horizontal Frequency, Vertical Frequency, Step Max Values, Horizontal, Step Max Values, Vertical, Step Min Values, Horizontal, and Step Min Values, Vertical parameters. The ''steepness'' of the Gaussian curve is specified by Width @ 50% Amplitude and Height @ 50% Amplitude, the width and height, in pixels, at which the curve decays to ½ intensity.
Gaussian Grid generates a two-dimensional grid of lines whose cross-section is a Gaussian curve (i.e the ''normal'' distribution), with lines repeated as per the Horizontal Frequency, and Vertical Frequency. The Half Cycle, Horizontal and Half Cycle, Vertical parameters cause the grid to be shifted by one half of the horizontal or vertical period, respectively. The ''steepness'' of the Gaussian curve is specified by Width @ 50% Amplitude and Height @ 50% Amplitude, the width and height, in pixels, at which the curve decays to ½ intensity.
The Fiducial generates an alignment fiducial target repeated horizontally and vertically as per the Horizontal Frequency, Vertical Frequency, Step Max Values, Horizontal, Step Max Values, Vertical, Step Min Values, Horizontal, and Step Min Values, Vertical parameters.
The Alignment Pattern generates a specific pattern favored by EPIX, Inc. manufacturing and technical support with image areas of high frequency content, ramps, and edges.
The Color Bars generates an eight color bar pattern, with a maximum amplitude as specified by Amplitude/Brightness in percentage of the pixel maximum value.
The Monochrome Steps generates ascending and descending monochrome steps, with Steps specifying the number of steps. The Color Steps generates ascending and descending color steps, with Steps specifying the number of steps.
The ColorChecker, ColorChecker (Line), and ColorChecker DC generates a pattern of 24 or 237 color patches which closely match the 24 or 237 color patches of the Macbeth® ColorChecker®, a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker® which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips, or the ColorChecker® DC, respectively. These patterns can be used for the precise and consistent adjustment of the graphic display, by comparing the displayed pattern against an actual ColorChecker®. The pattern can also be used for precise and consistent adjustment of a color camera, by comparing the displayed pattern against a captured image of an actual ColorChecker®.
The HSB Slice generates one ''slice'' of an HSB cylinder, with fixed brightness as specified by Amplitude/Brightness. The HSB Slices generates an array of Horizontal Frequency by Vertical Frequency slices of an HSB cylinder, each with fixed brightness varying from 0% to 100%.
The User-Defined f(X,Y) and Pattern f(X,Y) allows generating arbitrary patterns by evaluation of a Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variables ''X'' and ''Y'', to represent the pixel X and Y coordinates, relative to the image AOI and variables ''XDIM'' and ''YDIM'', to represent the image AOI's X and Y dimension. For example,
yields vertical bars spaced 10 pixels apart. In evaluating any expression, results less than 0 are set as 0 and results greater than the maximum pixel value are set to the maximum value (255 for eight bit pixels).IFEL (X%10, 0, 255)
The Pseudo Random generates random ''wallpaper''. (Hint: Choose Pseudo Random and connect the Apply button to the Black Board for continuously changing random wallpaper).
The Image Processing - Sequence Patterns window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Patterns, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Set Pixels window allows setting pixels of an image to a specified, constant, value. The pixel value to be used is set as described in Pick Pixel Value.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Set Pixels may also be used on an arbitrary shaped region of interest, selected via the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Image Processing - Sequence Set Pixels window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Set Pixels, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Pixel Arithmetic window provides several pixel arithmetic operations on an image.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Complement Pixels, Bit-Wise Logical AND Pixels w. Mask, Bit-Wise Logical XOR Pixels w. Mask, Bit-Wise Logical OR Pixels w. Mask, Bit Shift Left, Bit Shift Right, Bit Rotate Left, Bit Rotate Right, Bit Gray Code, Bit Gray Decode, Bit Reverse, Signed Bias to/from 2's Complement, Add Constant with Pixels, Multiply Constant with Pixels, Pixie Minimum, Pixie Maximum, Pixie Mean, Pixie Copy, and Gamma Correction operations may also be used on an arbitrary shaped region of interest, selected via the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Complement Pixels operation replaces each pixel with its complement; the maximum permissible value minus the current value.
The Bit-Wise Logical AND Pixels w. Mask, Bit-Wise Logical XOR Pixels w. Mask, and Bit-Wise Logical OR Pixels w. Mask operations perform the boolean AND, XOR, or OR, respectively, with the specified Bit-Wise Mask on each pixel's bit pattern.
The Bit Shift Left and Bit Shift Right operation shifts each pixel's binary value by the specified number of Shift Bits left or right, respectively.
The Bit Rotate Left and Bit Rotate Right operation rotates each pixel's binary value by the specified number of Shift Bits left or right, respectively.
The Bit Gray Code operation encodes each pixel's binary value as a ''Gray Code'' — a reflected binary code in which each two successive values differ in only one bit.[28] The Bit Gray Decode operation performs the inverse.
The Bit Reverse operation reverses the order of bits of each pixel's bit pattern.
The Signed Bias to/from 2's Complement converts a signed 2's complement representation of a pixel's value into a biased, or offset, signed representation.
The Add Constant with Pixels operation adds the specified Additive Constant to each pixel.
The Multiply Constant with Pixels operation multiplies the specified Multiplicative Constant with each pixel.
For all of the addition or multiplication operations, computed values which would exceed the permissible pixel value are bounded to the permissible pixel value (e.g. adding 100 to an eight bit pixel with value 200 yields 255).
The Halftone Image operation replaces each pixel with either the minimum or maximum value (0 and 255 for eight bit pixels), in such manner that (to the extent possible) the average grey level of any image area is unchanged using the sum of white/black method. For best results, the original image should have good contrast and strong edges Some random noise (dither) may also be beneficial.
The Halftone, Dot Construction operation replaces each pixel with either the minimum or maximum value (0 and 255 for eight bit pixels), in such manner that (to the extent possible) the average grey level of any image area is unchanged using a dot construction method, with dot size as specified by Dot Diameter.
The Pixie Minimum operation replaces each component of each color pixel with the minimum value of the pixel's components. The Pixie Maximum operation replaces each component of each color pixel with the maximum value of the pixel's components. The Pixie Mean operation replaces each component of each color pixel with the mean, or average, value of the pixel's components. The Pixie Minimum, Pixie Maximum, and Pixie Mean have no effect when used on a monochrome image.
The Pixie Copy operation replaces one or more components of each color pixel with the value of one of the pixel's components. The Src Pixie 0, Src Pixie 1, etc. select one of the pixel's components to be copied, the Dst Pixie 0, Dst Pixie 1, etc. select one or more of the pixel's components to be replaced; the pixie indexing is relative to the color space selected via the Set AOI button. The Pixie Copy have no effect when used on a monochrome image.
The Gamma Correction operation non-linearly scales each pixel according to the specified Gamma parameter. A Gamma of 1.00 has no effect; a Gamma less than 1.00 brightens the image, with stronger effect as the Gamma approaches 0.01; a Gamma greater than 1.00 darkens the image, with stronger effect as the gamma approaches 10.00. If correcting for a camera with known gamma, use the inverse of the camera's gamma. For example, enter:
to correct for a camera with stated gamma of 0.7.1.43 (1.0/0.7)
The Image Processing - Sequence Pixel Arithmetic window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Pixel Arithmetic, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Pixel Arithmetic window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Pixel Arithmetic, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Binning window allows summing or integrating rectangular subregions of an image.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Bin Size, X and Bin Size, Y specifies the partitioning of the image into a grid of bins, specifying each bin's width and height; bins along the right or bottom edges may be smaller if the image AOI width or height is not evenly divisible by the Bin Size, X or Bin Size, Y, respectively.
If Bin with Sum of Pixels is selected, pixels in each bin are summed. If Bin with Average of Pixels is selected, pixels in each bin are averaged.
The Bin Pixel Values to Bin operation replaces all pixels in each ''bin'' with the bin's sum or average. The Bin Pixel Values to Single Pixel tightly packs one pixel for each bin, with the bin's sum or average, in the upper left corner of the image AOI, and sets the remaining pixels of the AOI to 0.
The Image Processing - Sequence Binning window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Binning, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Binning window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Binning, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Contrast Modification window allows modifying an image's contrast. These operations are useful for enhancing the contrast, and thereby the visibility, of image features at the expense of ignoring other image features.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Stretch Contrast, Pixel Value Endpoints and Stretch Contrast, Histogram Percentile Endpoints operations may also be used on an arbitrary shaped region of interest, selected via the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Stretch Contrast, Pixel Value Endpoints expands the contrast (range of values) used for some pixels, while compressing the contrast used for other pixels, based upon each pixel's original value. As specified by the Low Pixel Endpoint and High Pixel Endpoint parameters, each pixel is replaced by:
In other words, pixels with values less than Low Pixel Endpoint are forced to 0, pixels with values greater than High Pixel Endpoint are forced to the maximum pixel value, and the values of pixels between Low Pixel Endpoint and High Pixel Endpoint are linearly expanded into the range of 0 through the maximum pixel value.(PixelValue - LowPixelEndPoint) * (MaximumPixelValue / (HighPixelEndpoint - LowPixelEndpoint))
The Low Pixel Endpoint and High Pixel Endpoint used for Stretch Contrast, Pixel Value Endpoints, are often found by examining a Image Measurement - Histogram. The Stretch Contrast, Histogram Percentile Endpoints operation combines the histogram and Stretch Contrast; it performs a histogram, and then performs the Stretch Contrast, Pixel Value Endpoints using the pixel value corresponding to Low Percentile Endpoint histogram percentile as the Low Pixel Endpoint, and using the pixel value corresponding to High Percentile Endpoint histogram percentile as the High Pixel Endpoint. If Report Endpoints Used is selected, the pixel values found via the histogram are reported as Low Pixel Endpoint and High Pixel Endpoint.
The Invert Contrast operation, also known as statistical scaling, modifies the high contrast areas of the image to be lower contrast and modifies low contrast areas of the image to be higher contrast, using the Neighborhood Size pixels surrounding each pixel being scaled as the basis for computation. The result exaggerates detail which was previously ''faint'', at the expense of eradicating stronger image details.
The Histogram Modification operation modifies an image's contrast so that the image's histogram is a specified shape. Selecting Histogram: Linear results in a flat histogram. A perfectly flat histogram is impossible if the number of pixels in the image window is not a multiple of the number of distinct pixel values (e.g. 256 for eight bit pixels); but the resulting frequencies of each pixel values occurrence will differ by at most one count.
Selecting Histogram: Exponential results in a histogram with an increasing exponential curve. Selecting Histogram: Exponential Transposed results in a histogram with a decreasing exponential curve. Selecting Histogram: Logarithmic results in a histogram with an increasing logarithmic curve. Selecting Histogram: Logarithmic Transposed results in a histogram with a decreasing logarithmic curve. Selecting Histogram: Half Sine Wave, Centered results in a histogram with the positive half of a sine wave, centered, curve.
Selecting Histogram: User-Defined and Histogram Shape f(Z) allows specifying a custom histogram curve, by evaluation of the Mathematical Expression with the addition of variable ''Z'' to represent the curve's index, between 0 and 255. For example:
results in a descending ramp shape, or255-Z
results in centered ''hump'' (half cycle of a sine wave), orsin(pi*Z/255.0)
results in a centered ''trough''. Note that the curve's index is always between 0 and 255, regardless of the image's pixel type and precision.1-sin(pi*Z/255.0)
The Histogram: Linear is the most commonly used variation, tending to improve the contrast of most images. Unlike Stretch Contrast, Pixel Value Endpoints or Stretch Contrast, Histogram Percentile Endpoints which can also be used to improve image contrast, the Histogram Modification does not require explicit selection of parameters.
The Image Processing - Sequence Contrast Modification window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Contrast Modification, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Contrast Modification window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Contrast Modification, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Convolution window allows performing convolutions on an image - a sum of products between the neighborhood of each pixel and specified coefficients - using user-defined coefficients.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Neighborhood Size specifies the neighborhood size around each pixel upon which the convolution is applied; from a 3×3 through a 49×49 (always odd). The coefficients corresponding to each pixel in the neighborhood are labeled as an offset from the center, target, pixel, and displayed in a table. Such as, for a 3×3 neighborhood:
After clicking a selected coefficient in the table, such as (-1, 1), the numeric entry field labeled Coefficient (-1, 1) allows altering that coefficient.-1 0 1 -1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 0.00 0.00 0.00
Alternately, the Coefficients via f(X,Y,V) allows setting the coefficient by evaluation of a Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variables ''X'' and ''Y'', to represent the offset from neighborhood center, and variable ''V'' to represent the coefficient's current value. For example,
sets all coefficients to unity,1
sets the center 3×3 coefficients to -1 and all others to 1, andifel( abs(x)<=1 || abs(y)<=1? -1: 1)
increments the center column of coefficients by 2.ifel(x==0, v+2, v)
If Integer Arithmetic is selected, any coefficients with decimal fractions are truncated to integers and the convolution is performed with integer arithmetic. If Floating Point Arithmetic is selected, the convolution is performed with floating point arithmetic, with the result converted to integer when the pixel's new value is set.
The convolutions operate on the specified neighborhood size; multiplying each pixel in the neighborhood by the corresponding coefficient, summing all such products, adding the Additive Offset and dividing by the Divisor. If the Divisor=0, the sum of coefficients is used as the divisor, thus setting both Additive Offset and Divisor to 0 results in the standard ''pure'' convolution operation. Note that the coefficients are initially 0, performing a convolution without setting any coefficients will result in an all 0 (black for grey level imagery) result.
Four convolution variations are available. The Convolve(PixelValue) computes the convolution, with results less than 0 or greater than the maximum pixel value replaced by 0 or the maximum value, respectively. The Abs(Convolve(PixelValue)) computes the convolution and forms the absolute value of the result. The PixelValue-Convolve(PixelValue) subtracts the computed convolution from the original pixel value, with results less than 0 or greater than the maximum pixel value replaced by 0 or the maximum value, respectively. Finally, the PixelValue-Abs(Convolve(PixelValue)) subtracts the absolute value of the computed convolution from the original pixel value, with results less than 0 or greater than the maximum pixel value replaced by 0 or the maximum value, respectively.
The Image Processing - Sequence Convolution window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Convolution, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Convolution window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Convolution, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Correlation Map window allows performing correlations on an image - matching one image against a second, larger, image - resulting in a profile image whose intensity, at each location, varies in proportion to the degree of match, at that location.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button. Two image AOIs must be selected, the mask image which is not modified, and a subject image. The mask image must be smaller than the second, subject, image.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Correlate performs a correlation between the mask and subject images; image areas which perfectly match the mask are set to the maximum pixel intensity (255 for eight bit pixels), areas which don't match are set to 0, areas with partial matches are set to corresponding values between 0 and the maximum intensity.
If Unnormalized is selected, the correlation is based on the absolute differences of values between the mask and the subject image; A perfect match is achieved only if the mask and the area of the subject image under the mask are identical.
If Normalized: Add, Mult is selected, a normalized correlation is performed; the degree of match between the mask and the area of the subject image under the mask is insensitive to differences arising from additive offsets and multiplicative scaling of pixel values.
The time required for correlation can be significantly reduced, at the expense of accuracy, by subsampling. If X SubSample and Y SubSample are both one, every pixel of the mask, and every corresponding pixel of the image, are used in the correlation. Either X SubSample and/or Y SubSample may be larger than one; every X SubSample'th pixel in the horizontal direction and every Y SubSample'th pixel in the vertical direction are used in the correlation. Furthermore, the mask is repositioned over the image at intervals of X SubSample and Y SubSample. For example, with X SubSample=2 and Y SubSample=2, processing is 16 times quicker; at each location of the mask on the image a factor of 22 fewer pixels are correlated, and the mask is positioned at a factor of 22 fewer locations on the image.
The Image Processing - Sequence Correlation Map window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Correlation Map, but matching one image against each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Correlation Map window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Correlation Map, but allows specifying distinct source and destination subject images, in addition to the mask image.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Edge Detection window allows performing edge detection filters over an image - computing the strength of an edge based upon the neighborhood of each pixel.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Edge Magnitude: Laplacian 4 replaces each pixel with the absolute value of the convolution:
yielding the second order edge gradient and responds equally to light-on-dark and to dark-on-light edges. The Edge Magnitude: Laplacian 4, Light on Dark replaces each pixel with the bounded value of the convolution:0 -1 0 -1 4 -1 0 -1 0
and has a stronger response to a light over dark area, and weaker response to a dark over light area. The Edge Magnitude: Laplacian 4, Dark on Light replaces each pixel with the bounded value of the convolution:0 -1 0 divisor=4 -1 4 -1 0 -1 0
and has the opposite, asymmetrical, response.0 1 0 divisor=4 1 -4 1 0 1 0
The Edge Magnitude: Laplacian 8 replaces each pixel with the absolute value of the convolution:
yielding the second order edge gradient and responds equally to light-on-dark and to dark-on-light edges. The Edge Magnitude: Laplacian 8, Light on Dark replaces each pixel with the bounded value of the convolution:-1 -1 -1 -1 8 -1 -1 -1 -1
and has a stronger response to a light over dark area, and weaker response to a dark over light area. The Edge Magnitude: Laplacian 8, Dark on Light replaces each pixel with the bounded value of the convolution:-1 -1 -1 divisor=8 -1 8 -1 -1 -1 -1
and has the opposite, asymmetrical, response.1 1 1 divisor=8 1 -8 1 1 1 1
The Edge Magnitude: Vertical replaces each pixel with the absolute value of the convolution:
yielding the magnitude of vertically oriented edge gradient. The Edge Magnitude: Vertical, Light to Dark replaces each pixel with the bounded value of the convolution:-1 0 1 -1 0 1 -1 0 1
and has a stronger response to a light area left of a dark area, and a weaker response to a dark area left of a light area. The Edge Magnitude: Vertical, Dark to Light replaces each pixel with the bounded value of the convolution:1 0 -1 1 0 -1 1 0 -1
and has the opposite, asymmetrical, response.-1 0 1 -1 0 1 -1 0 1
The Edge Magnitude: Horizontal replaces each pixel with the absolute value of the convolution:
yielding the magnitude of horizontally oriented edge gradient. The Edge Magnitude: Horizontal, Light over Dark replaces each pixel with the bounded value of the convolution:-1 -1 -1 0 0 0 1 1 1
and has a stronger response to a light over dark area, and a weaker response to a dark over light area. The Edge Magnitude: Horizontal, Dark over Light replaces each pixel with the bounded value of the convolution:1 1 1 0 0 0 -1 -1 -1
and has the opposite, asymmetrical, response.-1 -1 -1 0 0 0 1 1 1
The Edge Magnitude: Sobel (on 3×3 neighborhood), Edge Magnitude: Sobel-Absolute (on 3×3), Edge Magnitude: Kirsch (on 3×3), and Edge Magnitude: Roberts (on 2×2) compute the named edge detection operations, replacing each pixel with the magnitude of the gradient computed by the operation, bounded to the maximum pixel value (255 for eight bit pixels). The Sobel variant performs the root-mean-square, while the Sobel-Absolute variant uses the quicker absolute value method.
The Edge Magnitude: Scaled Sobel, Edge Magnitude: Scaled Sobel-Absolute, Edge Magnitude: Scaled Kirsch, and Edge Magnitude: Scaled Roberts variants replace each pixel with the magnitude of the gradient computed by the operation, scaled to the maximum pixel value (255 for eight bit pixels). The non-scaled variants allow encoding weak edges but strong edges are indistinguishable as the maximum pixel value; the scaled variants allow differentiating strong edges at the expense of not encoding small differences of edge magnitude.
The Edge Gradient: Log Sobel, Edge Gradient: Log Sobel-Absolute Edge Gradient: Log Kirsch Edge Gradient: Log Roberts compute the gradient using the named edge detector, place the scaled log magnitude of the gradient in the upper 5 bits of each pixel, and place the angle of the gradient coded in the next 3 bits. 'ne 1i The encoding of angles is:
where ''*'' represents the pixel under consideration. Thus, angle code 0 represents angles from -22.5° to +22.5° of east, angle code 1 represents angles from +22.5° to +67.5° of east, etc.3 2 1 4 * 0 5 6 7
This manner of encoding gradient angles in the lesser significant bits invites use of various operations upon the magnitude, while ignoring the angular component.
The Edge Gradient: Thin, Minimal Effect and Edge Gradient: Thin, Maximal Effect operations thin the edges previously produced by using an Edge Gradient operation, above. The gradient coded edges are thinned by evaluation of each edge and its local 3×3 neighborhood. Any gradient edge which is weaker than its two orthogonal neighbors, or which is neither preceded nor followed by another gradient edge in the same direction ±1, is removed. The criteria is strengthened if the Maximal version is used; retained gradient edges must be stronger than its two orthogonal neighbors, and must be both preceded and followed by another gradient edge in the same direction ±1. The Thin Edge Gradient may be repeated for additional effect, although it is not a ''relaxation'' type algorithm and repetitions beyond two or three will have little beneficial effect.
The Image Processing - Sequence Edge Detection window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Edge Detection, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Edge Detection window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Edge Detection, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Interlace & Flicker window allows reducing interlace artifact in an image, and provides operations which alter the interlacing of rows or columns.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Shuffle Line Order to Field Order and Shuffle Field Order to Line Order operations shuffle image lines, translating the contents of the selected image buffer between the two common interlace image memory storage organizations: all lines consecutive, or all lines in each field consecutive. These operations are not necessary when capturing and then processing ''normal'' interlaced images; but may be useful for special, nonstandard video applications.
Using an example image with 8 lines, the effect of the Shuffle Line Order to Field Order conversion is:
putting all even lines in the first half of the image and all odd lines in the second half of the image, resulting in the ''Field Order'' organization. The effect of the Shuffle Field Order to Line Order conversion is:BEFORE AFTER
Line 0 Line 0 Line 1 Line 2 Line 2 Line 4 Line 3 Line 6 Line 4 Line 1 Line 5 Line 3 Line 6 Line 5 Line 7 Line 7
taking an image in ''Field Order'' organization and restoring it to ''Line Order'' organization.BEFORE AFTER
Line 0 Line 0 Line 1 Line 4 Line 2 Line 1 Line 3 Line 5 Line 4 Line 2 Line 5 Line 6 Line 6 Line 3 Line 7 Line 7
The Shuffle Line Order to N Field Order and Shuffle N Field Order to Line Order shuffle image lines to/from a consecutive line order from/to a grouping into sections according to the remainder of the line's coordinate after division by Field N. These are generalizations of the Shuffle Line Order to Field Order and Shuffle Field Order to Line Order, and have identical effect when Field N is 2.
The Transpose Line Pairs: 0<=>1; 2<=>3; ... swaps the lines of each even line pair. If the selected image AOI contains an odd number of lines, the last line is unchanged. The Transpose Line Pairs: 1<=>2; 3<=>4; ... is similar, but operating on each odd line pair. The first line is unchanged; if the selected image AOI contains an even number of lines, the last line is unchanged. The Transpose Column Pairs: 0<=>1; 2<=>3; ... and Transpose Column Pairs: 1<=>2; 3<=>4; ... are similar, but operate upon pairs of columns, rather than pairs of lines.
The Shuffle Line Pairs to Pixel Pairs and Shuffle Pixel Pairs to Line Pairs operations shuffle pixels within pairs of image lines. Using an example image with 4 lines, 8 pixels per line:
the result of the Shuffle Line Pairs to Pixel Pairs is:A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f
The effect of Shuffle Pixel Pairs to Line Pairs is the inverse of Shuffle Line Pairs to Pixel Pairs. Both shuffle operations are defined above, for images with an even number of pixels per line and even number of lines. Should the image AOI have an odd number of pixels per line, or an odd number of lines, then the right odd pixel, and/or the bottom odd line, are unchanged; with the shuffle operation performed on the remaining pixels and lines.A I B J C K D L E M F N G O H P Q Y R Z S a T b U c V d W e X f
The Deflicker: Average Line Pairs operation eliminates interlace flicker by averaging corresponding pixels in each even/odd pair of lines, with the average replacing both pixels. Although flicker is eliminated, it is at the expense of a reduction in vertical resolution. For example, an image of five pixels and four lines:
would be replaced by:1 2 3 4 5 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 5 4 3 2 1
5 6 6 7 7 5 6 6 7 7 12 12 11 11 10 12 12 11 11 10
The Deflicker: Filter Singularity operation is intended to reduce interlace flicker caused by fine line graphics, without reducing the resolution of grey scale imagery. Each vertical column of three pixels in the image buffer are examined, and modified if the difference between the end pixels and the center pixel's value is greater than the Singularity Filter Threshold. If the value of the column's center pixel is greater than the value of the end pixels, some of the center pixel's intensity is ''pushed'' into the end pixels. If the value of the column's center pixel is less than the value of the end pixels, some of the end pixels' intensity is ''pushed'' into the center pixel. The overall effect is to mildly ''smear'' high contrast single pixel horizontal lines into the adjacent lines, without modifying grey level components or edges of high contrast multiple line graphics.
The Deflicker: Duplicate Even Lines operation eliminates interlace flicker by replacing the contents of each odd line with the contents of the adjacent even line. The Deflicker: Duplicate Odd Lines operation eliminates interlace flicker by replacing the contents of each even line with the contents of the adjacent odd line.
The Shuffle Column Order to Left-Right Halves operation shuffles the content of image lines, rearranging pixels at even locations to the left half of the line and pixels at odd locations to the right half of the line. Using an example image with 1 line, 8 pixels per line:
the result of the Shuffle Column Order to Left-Right Halves is:A B C D E F G H
The Shuffle Left-Right Halves to Column Order is the inverse of Shuffle Column Order to Left-Right Halves.A C E G B D F H
The Shuffle Column Order to N Section Order and Shuffle N Field Order to Section Order shuffle image columns to/from a consecutive column order from/to a grouping into sections according to the remainder of the column's coordinate after division by Section N. These are generalizations of the Shuffle Column Order to Left-Right Halves and Shuffle Left-Right Halves to Column Order, and have identical effect when Section N is 2.
The Shift Half-Line Down shifts the image one half line down, by interpolation. The Shift Half-Line Up shifts the image one half line up, by interpolation. Either can be used to modify an image containing a single interlaced field so as to better align with an image containing the opposite interlaced field.
The Tap Correction: User Defined f(X,Y) permits arbitrary interlace and tap corrections by evaluation of two Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variables ''X'' and ''Y'', to represent the pixel X and Y coordinates, relative to the image AOI and variables ''XDIM'' and ''YDIM'', to represent the image AOI's X and Y dimension. For each pair of coordinates of the result image, the X Coordinate f(X,Y) and Y Coordinate f(X,Y) specifies the corresponding pixel coordinates in the original image. For example,
has no effect on the image, and the default expressions:X Coordinate f(X,Y): x Y Coordinate f(X,Y): y
corrects for a common 2-tap scheme where each sensor line's first and last pixels, followed by second and next to last pixels, etc. were stored in the first, second, third, fourth, etc. pixels of each image line. The Tap Correction: User Defined f(X,Y) is not intended for image resizing or interpolation, and does not perform interpolation should either expression yield a fractional result.X Coordinate f(X,Y): ifel((x&1)==0, x/2, xdim-1-x/2) or X Coordinate f(X,Y): ((x&1)==0)*(x/2) + ((x&1)!=0)*(xdim-1-x/2) or X Coordinate f(X,Y): ((x+1)%2)*(x/2) + (x%2)*(xdim-1-x/2) Y Coordinate f(X,Y): y
The Image Processing - Sequence Interlace & Flicker window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Interlace & Flicker, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Interlace & Flicker window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Interlace & Flicker, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Morphology window provides bi-level morphological operations on an image.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
All of the operations interpret the image, or image window, as binary, or bi-level, and produce a binary image result. Binary image pixels may have more than 1 bit, however, only the most significant bit is used. Thus, these operations interpret all pixels with values from 0 through 127 as background, and all pixels with values from 128 through 255 as foreground; the results of these operations follow the same convention, producing pixels with values either 0 (background) or 128 (foreground) (assuming eight bit pixels).
The discussion which follows assumes familiarity with the definition and use of morphological operations. See, for example, FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING by Anil K. Jain.
The erosion, dilation, open, close, boundary and hit-miss operations apply a ''morphological structure element'' to the binary image. The effect of the operation is strongly affected by choice of a structure element! One of the structure elements shown can be chosen, or a user-defined structure element can be chosen, and either optionally rotated, before applying a morphological operation to the image.
Each structure element consists of object, or foreground, elements denoted ''X'', and may also have background elements denoted ''O''. Any background elements are used only by the hit-miss operation, and are ignored by the other operations.
The Box Element selects a box shaped structure of the specified Box Width and Box Height of foreground elements. For example, with Width=4 and Height=3 the structure:
is selected. The Circle Element selects a circle shaped (a discrete approximation) structure of the specified Circle Diameter of foreground elements. For example, with Circle Diameter=4 the structure:X X X X X X X X X X X X
is selected.. X X . X X X X X X X X . X X .
The H Element selects the structure:
The T Element selects the structure:X X X . X . O O O
The I Element selects the structure:X X X . O . . . .
The Inner Corner Element selects the structure:O O O O X O . . .
The Outer Corner Element selects the structure:. O X O O X X X X
The Crosshair Element selects a structure of background elements except for a vertical and horizontal line of foreground elements. For example, with Width=5 and Height=3 the structure:. X O X X O O O O
is selected.O O X O O X X X X X O O X O O
Any of the selected structure elements may be rotated before use. The Element Rotation specifies the counterclockwise rotation in 45 degree units. The rotation is performed around the structure's center, within the limits of the discrete array. For example, a 5×5 array:
rotated 45 degrees around the origin ''m'' would yield:a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y
No Element Rotation should be used on circle elements, or on box elements where either dimension is even. The result in these cases is counter-intuitive, due to limitations of the discrete array and lack of symmetry.c d e j o b h i n t a g m s y f l q r x k p u v w
The Erode performs erosion. A pixel result is nonzero if the foreground of the structure element, centered over the pixel, covers only pixels with the most significant bit set. Any background elements of the structure are ignored.
The Dilate performs dilation. A pixel result is nonzero if the foreground of the structure element, centered over the pixel, covers any pixels with the most significant bit set. Any background elements of the structure are ignored.
The Open effectively performs an erosion followed by dilation. Any background elements of the structure are ignored.
The Close effectively performs a dilation followed by erosion. Any background elements of the structure are ignored.
The Boundary produces a nonzero result at the boundary which is the outer edge of each nonzero object in the image. Essentially it is the set difference between the original image and the erosion of the image. Any background elements of the structure are ignored. The 3×3 box element is suggested.
The Hit-Miss compares the structure element as a ''mask'' against the source image; the result is nonzero where the structure element exactly matches the source pixels, specifically foreground elements over pixels with the most significant bit set and background elements over pixels with the most significant bit not set.
The Medial Axis Thin performs medial axis thinning on the image; nonzero pixels that are at the edge of a nonzero object are removed if connectivity of the object is not affected. If Repeat till Done is selected, Medial Axis Thin operates until all objects are thinned to single width lines, otherwise one thinning pass is performed.
The Skeleton Thin performs skeletization on the image. If Repeat till Done is selected, Skeleton Thin operates until all objects are thinned to single width lines, otherwise one thinning pass is performed.
The distinction between the thin and skeleton operations can best be demonstrated by example. The object:
when reduced to a minimal skeleton would be, approximately:X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
and after repeated thinning would be, approximately:X . . . . . . X . X . . . . X . . . X X X X . . . X . . . . X . X . . . . . . X
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The skeleton operation is inherently slow. A faster, minimal skeleton can be produced for most images by performing one pass of the Skeleton Thin, followed by Medial Axis Thin repeated until done.
If Report Results is specified, all of the morphological, skeleton, and medial axis operations report the number of nonzero pixels in the result image as Pixels Set, and report whether the last operation changed any pixels in the image as Result Changed?. Otherwise the number of nonzero pixels and whether the last operation changed any pixels are not reported, allowing faster operation of some operations.
The Image Processing - Sequence Morphology window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Morphology, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Morphology window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Morphology, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Noise Generator window allows adding pseudo-random noise with uniform and other probability distributions to an image.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Add Uniform Noise adds pseudo-random noise with a uniform distribution to the pixels of the image with a variance of Noise Variance.
The Add Gaussian Noise adds pseudo-random noise with a Gaussian (i.e. Normal) distribution to the pixels of the image with a variance of Noise Variance.
The Add Rayleigh Noise adds pseudo-random noise with a Rayleigh distribution to the pixels of the image with a variance of Noise Variance.
The Add Negative Exponential Noise adds pseudo-random noise with a negative exponential distribution to the pixels of the image with a variance of Noise Variance.
The Set Salt & Pepper Noise sets randomly selected pixels to the minimum or maximum pixel values, with the probability of a pixel being modified specified by Noise Probability.
If Consistent Pseudo-Random is selected, a preselected pseudo-random number generator is used; multiple operations on identical images will have the same effect. If Pseudo-Unique Pseudo-Random is selected, a different pseudo-random number generator is pseudo-randomly selected; multiple operations on identical images will, probably, have different effect.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Image Processing - Sequence Noise Generator window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Noise Generator, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Noise Generator window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Noise Generator, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Normalization window allows automatically normalizing various attributes of an image. These operations are single image, i.e. not using a second reference image as the basis for normalization.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Normalize Intensity, Blobs & Background ''flattens'' the image's intensity variance. Areas of the image that are darker than average are made lighter; areas lighter than average are made darker. The operation is intended for images consisting of small blobs scattered over a background, where the background is expected to be a uniform intensity, but which exhibits shading effects due to non-uniform illumination. Typically, the image is about to be thresholded or subject to Image Measurement - Blob Analysis. This operation is not intended to eliminate shadows with sharp boundaries.
The Normalize Row Mean normalizes each line of the image by multiplying the pixels of each line by the Row Scaling Factor scaling factor divided by the line's original mean value.
The Normalize Column Mean normalizes each column of the image by multiplying the pixels of each column by the Column Scaling Factor scaling factor divided by the column's original mean value.
The Image Processing - Sequence Normalization window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Normalization, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Normalization window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Normalization, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Rotation & Shift window allows performing rotations and various shifts on an image.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The X,Y Shift operation shifts an image's pixels up/down and/or left right. The number of pixel positions shifted left/right is specified as Left(-X) Right(+X) Shift; a negative value is a left shift, a positive value is a right shift. The number of pixel positions shifted up/down is specified as Up(-Y) Down(+Y) Shift; a negative value is an up shift, a positive value is a down shift. The area of the image from which image data was ''shifted out'' is set to pixel value 0 (black for grey level imagery).
The Flip operation creates a ''mirror'' image. If Flip Left/Right is specified, the image is rotated around its vertical center line. If Flip Up/Down is specified, the image is rotated around its horizontal center line.
The Skew Left/Right and Skew Up/Down skews or ''tilts'' the image either left and right or up and down. The skew operation can be used to correct for small amounts of image rotation, for example due to camera tilt, without invoking the full capability of the rotation operation.
The Skew Left/Right copies an image, with the top line skewed by Skew at Top pixels (right if positive, left if negative), the bottom line skewed by Skew at Bottom pixels (interpreted as before), and intermediate lines skewed proportionally. The area of the result image from which image data was ''skewed out'' is set to pixel value 0 (black for grey level imagery). 'ne 1i For example, an image of dimension 8×8:
skewed +2 at the top and -1 at the bottom results in:1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 skewed +2 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 skewed +2 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 skewed +1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 skewed +1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 skewed 0 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 skewed 0 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 0 skewed -1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 0 skewed -1
The Skew Up/Down copies an image, with the left column skewed by Skew at Left pixels (down if positive, up if negative), the right column skewed by Skew at Right pixels (interpreted as before), and intermediate lines skewed proportionally. The area of the result image from which image data was ''skewed out'' is set to pixel value 0 (black for grey level imagery).
The Rotate and Rotate w. Offset rotates an image with the rotation specified by Rotation Angle, clockwise, relative to center of the image. If Bilinear Interpolation is specified, bilinear interpolation is performed. If Nearest Neighbor Interpolation is specified, a faster, but slightly lower quality, nearest neighbor interpolation is performed. The rotation operation corrects for the image display's aspect ratio; the Rotation Aspect Ratio specifies scaling in the horizontal versus vertical directions during rotation, and is preset to the current image's aspect ratio (i.e. horizontal dimension in pixels, divided by the vertical dimension in lines, of a rectangle which appears to be square).
The Rotate w. Offset operation provides additional options. The image is also shifted by Rotation Offset X and Rotation Offset Y. If Rotation Origin = Image Center is specified, the rotation is relative to the center of the image. Otherwise, the rotation is relative to the Rotation Origin X and Rotation Origin Y.
The Image Processing - Sequence Rotation & Shift window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Rotation & Shift, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Rotation & Shift window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Rotation & Shift, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Spatial Filtering window allows performing various spatial filters on an image, such as low pass, high pass, median, rank, and edge enhancement filters.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Low Pass Filter: Fast Average replaces each pixel with the result of a 3×3 convolution with the kernel:
quickly performing a mild low pass effect. The Low Pass Filter: Weighted Center Average replaces each pixel with the result of a 3×3 convolution with the kernel:1 2 1 2 4 2 1 2 1
where the value for CPW is the specified Average Center Weight parameter. A CPW of 1 creates a strong low pass effect with some edge smear; values greater than one produce a proportionally weaker low pass effect with less edge smear. The Low Pass Filter: Low Smear examines each of the 9 pixels in the 3×3 neighborhood. Pixels with value within plus/minus the Low Smear Threshold of the center pixel's value are used to form an average which replaces the center pixel. The effect, with proper choice of the Low Smear Threshold value, is to reduce noise but minimize edge smear. The proper value of Low Smear Threshold is dependent upon image content.1 1 1 1 CPW 1 1 1 1
The Sharpen Filter: Mild replaces each pixel with the result of the convolution:
effecting mild sharpening, or deblurring. In brief, this enhances edges by subtracting a blurred image from the original image. The resulting image appears sharper and more ''well defined''. The Sharpen Filter: Laplacian replaces each pixel with the result of the convolution:0 -1 0 -1 6 -1 0 -1 0
effecting intermediate sharpening, or deblurring. The Sharpen Filter: Strong replaces each pixel with the result of the convolution:0 -1 0 -1 5 -1 0 -1 0
effecting strong sharpening, or deblurring. The Horizontal Sharpen Filter: Mild replaces each pixel with the result of the convolution:-1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 1 -1 -1 1 9 1 -1 -1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
effecting mild horizontal sharpening, or deblurring. The Vertical Sharpen Filter: Mild replaces each pixel with the result of the convolution:0 0 0 -1 4 -1 0 0 0
effecting mild vertical sharpening, or deblurring.0 -1 0 0 4 0 0 -1 0
The Median Filter sorts the 9 pixels in the 3×3 neighborhood; the middle (median) value after sorting replaces the center pixel. This operation removes impulse noise — isolated pixels with values significantly different than its neighbors — with less blurring than a low pass filter. The Median Filter: for Binary Images interprets the original image as binary, examining only the most significant bit of each pixel, and producing a result with pixels either having a value of 0 or the value of the most significant bit (e.g. 0 and 128 for eight bit pixels). For binary images, the Median for Binary Images has the same result as the Median Filter, but is quicker. The Median Filter: Center Weight 3 is similar to the Median Filter, but 11 pixels are sorted: the 8 neighbors and 3 copies of the center pixel. As before, the middle (median) value after sorting replaces the center pixel. By giving the center pixel additional weight, certain types of edge and corner smear of single pixel width lines can be avoided. (See D.R.K Brownrigg, The Weighted Median Filter, COMMUNICATIONS OF THE ACM, Vol. 27-8, August 1984, pp. 807-818).
The Rank Low (Erode) Filter sorts the 9 pixels in the 3×3 neighborhood; the lowest value after sorting replaces the center pixel. This operation is often considered a grey level analog to the morphological erosion operation. The Rank High (Dilate) Filter sorts the 9 pixels in the 3×3 neighborhood; the highest value after sorting replaces the center pixel. This operation is often considered a grey level analog to the morphological dilation operation.
The Edge Enhance: Sobel, Edge Enhance: Sobel Absolute, Edge Enhance: Kirsch, and Edge Enhance: Roberts operations enhance the contrast of edges by subtracting the magnitude of the edge gradient, computed by the Sobel edge detector, the Sobel w. absolute value, the Kirsch, or the Roberts edge detectors, respectively, from the image. This type of operation is sometimes referred to as ''unsharp masking''.
The Emboss Enhance × 1, Emboss Enhance × 2, and Emboss Enhance × 4 operations enhance the contrast of edges by adding the difference of the pixel with a nearby pixel, adding twice the difference of the pixel with a nearby pixel, or adding four times the difference of the pixel with a nearby pixel, respectively. The Direction of the nearby pixel can be chosen as North, South, East, West, Northeast, Northwest, Southeast, or Southwest; the Sharpness/Offset selects the horizontal and vertical distance. This type of operation is sometimes referred to as ''embossing''. The Embossed Edges × 1, Embossed Edges × 2, and Embossed Edges × 4 are similar, but replace the pixel with the difference of the pixel with a nearby pixel, twice the difference of the pixel with a nearby pixel, or four times the difference of the pixel with a nearby pixel, respectively.
The Image Processing - Sequence Spatial Filtering window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Spatial Filtering, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Spatial Filtering window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Spatial Filtering, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Spatial Normalization window allows spatial normalization of an image.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
If Shift Center of Mass to Center is selected, the image's center of mass is found (interpreting pixel intensity as mass) and the image shifted so that the center of mass is at the image's center. Image areas left ''uncovered'' by the shift are set to pixel value 0.
The Image Processing - Sequence Spatial Normalization window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Spatial Normalization, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Spatial Normalization window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Spatial Normalization, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Threshold window allows performing threshold operations on an image - assigning each pixel one of two values according to whether the original pixel value is below, or between, threshold level(s).
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The pixel value for a Lower Threshold limit, and a pixel value for the Upper Threshold limit are set as described in Pick Pixel Value. Similarly, a pixel value for New Value, Within Bounds and a pixel value for New Value, Out of Bounds are set as described in Pick Pixel Value.
The Threshold: Set New Values, Within Bounds operation compares pixels to the Lower Threshold and Upper Threshold, pixels between the two threshold values are set to New Value, Within Bounds, other pixels are not changed.
The Threshold: Set New Values, Out of Bounds operation compares pixels to the Lower Threshold and Upper Threshold, pixels between the two threshold values are not changed, other pixels are set to New Value, Out of Bounds.
The Threshold: Set New Values, Within & Out of Bounds operation compares pixels to the Lower Threshold and Upper Threshold, pixels between the two threshold values are set to New Value, Within Bounds, other pixels are set to New Value, Out of Bounds.
The Lower > Upper? Use: (Upper <= value <= Lower) and Lower > Upper? Use: (value <= Lower OR value >= Upper) selections have effect only if one or more of the Lower Threshold component values are greater than the corresponding Upper Threshold component values. If Lower > Upper? Use: (Upper <= value <= Lower) is selected, the component value is considered to be ''within'' the lower and upper threshold levels if the component value is between the lower and upper values. If Lower > Upper? Use: (value <= Lower OR value >= Upper) is selected, the component value is considered to be ''within'' the lower and upper threshold levels if the component value is above the upper value and below the lower value; i.e. an circular interpretation where the maximum pixel component value plus one is identical to 0.
The Image Processing - Sequence Threshold window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Threshold, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Threshold window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Threshold, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Threshold Adaptive window allows performing threshold operations on an image - assigning each pixel one of two values according to whether the original pixel value meets specified conditions.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Threshold against Neighborhood Mean operation compares each pixel to a percentage of the average value of the pixel's neighborhood. The Neighborhood Size specifies the size of the neighborhood over which the average value is computed, the Low Limit and High Limit specify the percentage of the neighborhood average used as the comparison limits. A pixel is set to its maximum value if
otherwise the pixel is set to value 0.(Average_of_NxN * LowLimit) <= PixelValue <= (Average_of_NxN * HighLimit)
The Image Processing - Sequence Threshold Adaptive window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Threshold Adaptive, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Threshold Adaptive window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Threshold Adaptive, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Warping window allows performing ''rubber-sheet'' transformations on the image, governed by a list of initial and final fiducial locations, governed by pincushion/barrel lens distortion, or specified by mathematical expressions.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Warp: Src => Dst Fiducials operation provides ''rubber sheet'' distortion of an image. Two series of points serve as fiducials which govern the warping. Clicking Set Fiducials provides two dialogs, each as described in Graphic Points, in which a series of source and series of destination fiducials are positioned. The source series of fiducials define original image locations and the destination series of fiducials define corresponding result image locations. At least four pairs of fiducials are required.
The Warp: Src => Dst Fiducials and as Partitioned Quadrilaterals uses the fiducials to partition the image into quadrilaterals; each quadrilateral is warped separately. Each source fiducial coordinate is mapped exactly to the corresponding destination fiducial coordinate, but there may be discontinuities in the result image at the edges of each quadrilateral. Only the image area which is bounded by fiducials is warped; any image area not bounded is ignored. Thus, to copy an image without warping (albeit inefficiently), a fiducial pair would be positioned at each corner of the image.
The Src => Dst Fiducials and as Best-Fit Polynomials uses the fiducials to define a single set of polynomial equations used to map all pixels. Any pixels of the result image for which the polynomials evaluate to coordinates out of the source image are set to value 0. As a single set of polynomials is used for all pixels, there are no discontinuities in the result image at the edge of each quadrilateral, however the source fiducial coordinates may not map exactly to the corresponding destination fiducial coordinates. The Src => Dst Fiducials and as Best-Fit Polynomials is expected to be used with fiducial coordinates that represent real-world distortions due to optics or rotated and angled views. It may not perform well with fiducials drawn at arbitrary coordinates.
The Warp: Pincushion Distortion applies a geometric ''pincushion'' and the Warp: Barrel Distortion applies a geometric ''barrel'' distortion, which corrects for symmetric distortion of many lenses. If Pincushion/Barrel: Third Order is selected, a third order equation is used with the Pincushion 3rd Order Coef(ficient) with an implied Pincushion 1st Order Coef(ficient) equal to 1.0. If Pincushion/Barrel: Fifth Order is selected, a fifth order equation is used with the ''Pincushion 1st Order Coef(ficient)'', Pincushion 2nd Order Coef(ficient), Pincushion 3rd Order Coef(ficient), Pincushion 4th Order Coef(ficient), and Pincushion 5th Order Coef(ficient). If Pincushion/Barrel: Seventh Order is selected, a seventh order equation is used with the ''Pincushion 1st Order Coef(ficient)'', Pincushion 2nd Order Coef(ficient), Pincushion 3rd Order Coef(ficient), Pincushion 4th Order Coef(ficient), Pincushion 5th Order Coef(ficient), Pincushion 6th Order Coef(ficient), and Pincushion 7th Order Coef(ficient). In general, the 2nd and higher coefficient(s) specify the degree of distortion - a value of 0 yields no distortion, increasing values yield increasing distortion. In specific, a polynomial with the specified coefficients is evaluated to map old coordinates to new coordinates relative to the optical center; for the purpose of polynomial evaluation, pixel coordinates range from -1 thru 1.
The Warp: Pincushion Distortion, 1-D and Warp: Barrel Distortion, 1-D are similar, but applying distortion only in the horizontal axis, as might be needed for line scan applications.
The Warp: Fisheye Lens Distortion applies a geometric spherical lens distortion and the applies a geometric correction for spherical lens distortion. The Lens Radius specifies the radius of the spherical lens, in units of, and relative to, the size of the image sensor.
If Precision: Better is selected, warping equations are evaluated precisely. If Precision: Quicker is selected, computational shortcuts are used to speed up the image processing; this may cause pixels on the borderline of two locations to be shifted.
If Image Center is Optical Center is selected, the distortion is centered at the area of interest's center; otherwise, the distortion is centered at the Optical Center, X and Optical Center, Y coordinates. Image processing may be slightly faster when using the default optical center.
The Aspect Ratio specifies scaling in the horizontal versus vertical directions during warping, and is preset to the current image's aspect ratio. The Aspect Ratio scaling allows the same non-linear warping equations to be applied and have the same visual effect both vertically and horizontally, even though the image dimensionality differs.
The Post Warp Scaling allows the computed warped image to be enlarged, or shrunk, before truncation to fit into the rectangular image. As warping of a rectangular image inherently produces a non-rectangular result, the Post Warp Scaling allows choosing whether ''bulges'' along the image boundary will be visible along with black areas, or whether black areas along the image boundary will be ''clipped'' along with bulging areas of the original image.
The Warp: User Defined f(X,Y) permits arbitrary geometric transformations by evaluation of two Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variables ''X'' and ''Y'', to represent the pixel X and Y coordinates, relative to the image AOI and variables ''XDIM'' and ''YDIM'', to represent the image AOI's X and Y dimension. For each pair of coordinates of the result image, the X Coordinate f(X,Y) and Y Coordinate f(X,Y) specifies the corresponding pixel coordinates in the original image. For example,
has no effect on the image, and the default expressions:X Coordinate f(X,Y): x Y Coordinate f(X,Y): y
turns the image ''inside-out'' so that pixels near the center are repositioned farther away, and pixels farther from the center are repositioned closer to the center. The Warp: User Defined f(X,Y) feature could, with the correct expressions, also be used for image resizing and rotations; however, the built-in features for resizing and rotations are inherently more efficient and faster.X Coordinate f(X,Y): (hypot(ydim/2, xdim/2)-hypot(y-ydim/2, x-xdim/2)) *cos(atan2(y-ydim/2, x-xdim/2))+xdim/2 Y Coordinate f(X,Y): (hypot(ydim/2, xdim/2)-hypot(y-ydim/2, x-xdim/2)) *sin(atan2(y-ydim/2, x-xdim/2))+ydim/2
If Bilinear Interpolation is specified, bilinear interpolation is performed. If Nearest Neighbor Interpolation is specified, a faster, but slightly lower quality, nearest neighbor interpolation is performed.
The Image Processing - Sequence Warp window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Warping, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Warp window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Warping, but allows specifying distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Copy & Resize window allows copying, resizing, and reorienting images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Copy copies an image from the source area of interest (AOI) to the destination area of interest. The two AOIs must be the same size. The Copy may also be used on an arbitrary shaped region of interest, selected via the Set AOI button.
The Copy & Resize copies an image from the source area of interest (AOI) to the destination area of interest. The two AOIs need not be the same size.
If the AOIs are not the same size, using Bilinear Interpolation is the most often used interpolation method, but if either result dimension is less than half of the corresponding source dimension, some data of the source image will be ignored and not contribute to the result. Using Nearest Neighbor Interpolation is similar, but uses nearest neighbor interpolation, providing a quicker operation but also a potentially ''blockier'' result. Using Linear Area Interpolation provides an area based interpolation, wherein all of the source image contributes to the result, regardless of the relative image dimensions. It is also significantly more time consuming than Bilinear Interpolation or Nearest Neighbor Interpolation. Using Gaussian Area Interpolation is similar, but performs Gaussian weighted interpolation which provides improved results when an image is greatly enlarged, although at the expense of additional execution time.
The Copy & Resize with Pixel Replication copies the source AOI to destination AOI, duplicating each pixel horizontally by the X Factor and vertically by the Y Factor; if the destination AOI size is not the proper multiple of the source AOI size, the copied image is truncated or the unused area of the destination set to 0. The Copy & Resize with Pixel Decimation copies the source AOI to destination AOI, skipping pixels horizontally by the X Factor and vertically by the Y Factor; if the destination AOI size is not the proper sub-multiple of the source AOI size, the copied image is truncated or the unused area of the destination set to 0.
If Bilinear Interpolation, Nearest Neighbor Interpolation, Pixel Replication, or Pixel Decimation is selected, the image can also be oriented. If Orient Top => Top is selected, the result image has the same orientation as the original image. Optionally, the Orient Top => Left Side, Orient Top => Bottom, or Orient Top => Right Side can be selected to orient the top of the original image to the left, down, or to the right, respectively. Additionally, Orient w. Mirror Flip can be selected to flip the image around the vertical axis before orientation to the top, left, down, or right.
The Copy & Flip copies a ''mirror'' image of an image from the source area of interest (AOI) to the destination area of interest. The two AOIs must be the same size. If Flip Left/Right is specified, the image is rotated around its vertical center line. If Flip Up/Down is specified, the image is rotated around its horizontal center line.
The Copy and Overlay copies the non-zero pixels from the source area of interest (AOI) to the destination area of interest. The two AOIs need not be the same size. The Chroma Key: Pixel Value 0 serves as a reminder of the pixel values which are ''transparent''. If the AOIs are not the same size, the image is resized by either Nearest Neighbor Interpolation, Bilinear Interpolation, Gaussian Area Interpolation, or Linear Area Interpolation described above for Copy & Resize. The Copy and Overlay antialias', or ''blends'' edges (between zero and non-zero pixels) of the source as they are being overlay-ed on the destination.
The Copy & Retype copies an image from the source area of interest (AOI) to the destination area of interest, and also allows that the the source and destination be of different types; i.e. bit depths. The two AOIs must be the same size. If Align MSB is selected, pixel values are shifted so that the most significant bit of the source aligns with the most significant bit of the destination. If Align LSB is selected, pixel values are shifted so that the least significant bit of the source aligns with the least significant bit of the destination. If Align None is selected, pixel values are not shifted.
The Copy & Reorder permits arbitrary rearrangement of the image's pixels by evaluation of two Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variables ''X'' and ''Y'', to represent the pixel X and Y coordinates, relative to the destination image AOI, variables ''XDIM'' and ''YDIM'' to represent the destination image AOI's X and Y dimension, and variables ''IXDIM'' and ''IYDIM'' to represent the source image AOI's X and Y dimension. For each pair of coordinates of the destination image, the X Coordinate f(X,Y) and Y Coordinate f(X,Y) specifies the corresponding pixel coordinates in the source image. For example,
has no effect on the image, and the default expressions:X Coordinate f(X,Y): x Y Coordinate f(X,Y): y
corrects for a common 2-tap camera scheme where each pair of sensor lines are stored as one image line - the first image line contains, from left to right, the first pixel of the first sensor line, the first pixel of the second sensor line, the second pixel of the first sensor line, the second pixel of the second sensor line, etc. - and expects that the destination image be half the width and twice the height of the source image. The Copy & Reorder does not perform interpolation, in the event that either expression yields a fractional result.X Coordinate f(X,Y): ((x*2)+(y&1)) Y Coordinate f(X,Y): (y/2)
The Copy & Tile fills the destination image with multiple copies of the (typically) smaller source image. For example, it can be used to duplicate one line or column throughout the destination image.
The Image Processing - Sequence Copy & Resize window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Copy & Resize, but on corresponding images of two sequences.
Unlike Image Processing - Copy & Resize, the Copy feature of Image Processing - Sequence Copy & Resize does not allow an arbitrary shaped region of interest.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Processing - Pair Arithmetic window provides several pixel arithmetic operations on pairs of image.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Add: Dst+Src Modulo PixelSize operation sums corresponding pixels of the source and destination images. A result greater than the pixel binary word size is truncated to the pixel's binary word size, (for eight bit pixels, the lower 8 bits are kept).
The Add: Min(Dst+Src, MaxPixValue) operation sums corresponding pixels of the source and destination images. A result greater than the maximum pixel value (255 for eight bit pixels) is limited to the maximum value.
The Subtract: (MaxPixValue+(Dst-Src))/2 operation subtracts source image pixels from corresponding destination image pixels, divides the difference by two and adds ½ the maximum pixel value (128 for eight bit pixels). The result is mid-level grey (for grey level images) where the two images are the same. The Subtract: (MaxPixValue+(Src-Dst))/2 is similar, exchanging the order of subtraction.
The Subtract: (MaxPixValue/2+(Dst-Src)) operation subtracts source image pixels from corresponding destination image pixels, adds ½ the maximum pixel value, bounded by 0 and the the maximum pixel value (255 for eight bit pixels). The Subtract: (MaxPixValue/2+(Src-Dst)) is similar, exchanging the order of subtraction.
The Subtract: (MaxPixValue/2+(Dst-Src)×2) operation adds ½ the maximum pixel value to twice the difference of the source image pixels and corresponding destination image pixels, bounded by 0 and the the maximum pixel value (255 for eight bit pixels). The Subtract: (MaxPixValue/2+(Src-Dst)×2) is similar, exchanging the order of subtraction.
The Subtract: (Dst-Src) Modulo PixelSize operation subtracts source image pixels from corresponding destination image pixels. A result less than 0 is truncated to pixel binary word size (for eight bit pixels, the lower 8 bits are kept). The Subtract: (Src-Dst) Modulo PixelSize is similar, exchanging the order of subtraction.
The Subtract: Max(Dst-Src, 0) operation subtracts source image pixels from corresponding destination image pixels. A result less than 0 is limited to 0. The Subtract: Max(Src-Dst, 0) is similar, exchanging the order of subtraction.
The Subtract: Abs(Dst-Src) operation subtracts source image pixels from corresponding destination image pixels. A result less than 0 is negated.
The Bit-Wise AND: Dst & Src, Bit-Wise XOR: Dst ^ Src, and Bit-Wise OR: Dst | Src operations perform the boolean AND, XOR, or OR, respectively, on corresponding pixels of the source and destination images.
The Average: (Src+Dst) / 2 operation averages corresponding pixels of the source and destination images.
The Maximum: Max(Src,Dst) and Minimum: Min(Src,Dst) operations select the maximum value or minimum value, respectively, of corresponding pixels of the source and destination images.
The Add: Max(0, Min(MaxPixValue, Dst+(Dst-Src))) operation adds the difference of the corresponding destination and source image pixels to the destination image pixels, bounded by 0 and the the maximum pixel value (255 for eight bit pixels). The Add: Max(0, Min(MaxPixValue, Dst+(Dst-Src)×2)) and Add: Max(0, Min(MaxPixValue, Dst+(Dst-Src)×4)) are similar, adding twice or four times, respectively, of the difference of the corresponding destination and source image pixels to the destination image pixels, bounded by 0 and the the maximum pixel value (255 for eight bit pixels).
The Product: (c0×Src+c1) × (c2×Dst+c3) / c4 operation forms the weighted product of corresponding pixels of the source and destination images. Specifically, the value of:
is computed for each pixel using the five Product Coefficients. Results less than 0 are set to 0, results greater than the maximum pixel value are set to the maximum value (255 for eight bit pixels). If Product Coef. 4 is 0, no division is performed.(Coef0 × Src + Coef1) × (Coef2 × Dst + Coef3)) / c4
The Ratio: (c0×Dst+c1) / (c2×Src+c3) operation forms the weighted ratio of corresponding pixels of the source and destination images. Specifically, the value of:
is computed for each pixel using the four Ratio Coefficients. Results less than 0 are set to 0, results greater than the maximum pixel value are set to the maximum value (255 for eight bit pixels). If the divisor's value is 0, the result is set to the maximum pixel value.(Coef0 × Dst + Coef1) / (Coef2 × Src + Coef3)
The User-Defined f( A(Src), B(Dst) ) and f(A, B) allows computing an unlimited variety of functions upon corresponding pixels of the source and destination images by evaluation of a Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variables ''A'' and ''B'' to represent pixel values from the source and destination images, respectively. The variables ''X'' and ''Y'', to represent the pixel X and Y coordinates, relative to the image window, and variables ''XDIM'' and ''YDIM'', to represent the image window's X and Y dimension, can also be used; allowing expressions dependent upon pixel location. In evaluating any expression, results less than 0 are set as 0 and results greater than the maximum pixel value are set to the maximum value (255 for eight bit pixels).
For example,
yields an unequally weighted average, and.75*A + .25*B
yields a log scaled average. The lengthy expression:exp(.5*ln(A+1)+.5*ln(B+1))-1
yields a weighted average which varies according to distance from the image window center; the source pixel weighting becomes 0 at the center, the destination pixel weighting becomes 0 at the edges.A*hypot(X-XDIM/2,Y-YDIM/2)/hypot(XDIM/2,YDIM/2) +B*(1-hypot(X-XDIM/2,Y-YDIM/2)/hypot(XDIM/2,YDIM/2))
As the mathematical expression is interpreted rather than compiled, the User-Defined f( A(Src), B(Dst) ) operation requires significantly longer execution time than similar ''built-in'' operations, such as those described above. Whenever possible, one or a combination of ''built-in'' operations should be used in preference to the User-Defined f( A(Src), B(Dst) ).
For Add: and Subtract: operations, if Src: Use Replicated Top Line Throughout is selected, the top line of the source image is replicated and used as each line of the source image during the operation.
The Image Processing - Sequence Pair Arithmetic window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Pair Arithmetic, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The destination image must be the same size as (each image) of the source sequence. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used for the sequence source and image destination, these operations should be selected from the destination image's viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's sequence source can be selected from any image sequence, or any image buffer(s) of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Pair Arithmetic window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Pair Arithmetic, but allows specifying a pair of distinct source and destination images. For clarity, the labels of the various operations are changed from, for example, Add: Dst+Src Modulo PixelSize to Add: SrcB+SrcA Modulo PixelSize as neither of the source images need be the same as the destination image.
Like most image processing features which operate on a triplets of image buffers, these operations may be applied to three full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's two source images can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Pair Normalization window allows automatically normalizing various attributes of an image, based upon a second reference, or background, image.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Contrast Modify & Match operation performs contrast modification on the destination image so that the first two moments of the destination are identical, within the limits of the allowable range of pixel values, to that of the source image. The source image is unmodified. This operation is useful before subtraction of two images taken under different exposure conditions, such as subtractive radiography. (See, for example, Ruttimann, et. al., SPIE Vol. 314, p. 372).
The Background Correction, Subtractive analyzes the source image, calculates the subtractive correction so that the source would have uniform intensity, and applies the correction to the destination image. The Background Correction, Ratio is similar, but calculates a multiplicative correction. For both operations, the source image is unmodified.
Typical use of these background corrections is for microscopy; with the source image captured without a slide under the microscope, and should, nominally, be a uniform field, while the destination image is captured with a slide under the microscope.
The Spot Mask Correction is intended to remove ''spots'' caused by imperfect sensors; i.e. bad pixels which consistently occur in the same location. The operation uses the source image as a location map of the bad pixels; pixels with value 0 are considered to be bad. For each bad pixel specified by the source image, the corresponding pixel of the destination image is replaced by a nearby pixel of the destination image. Specifically, the pixel to the left of the bad pixel is used as the replacement, however if also bad (or if due to boundary conditions no such pixel exists) then the first of: the pixel to the right, to the left of left, or to the right of right, are used, if not also bad.
The Image Processing - Sequence Pair Normalization window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Pair Normalization, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The destination image must be the same size as (each image) of the source sequence. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used for the sequence source and image destination, these operations should be selected from the destination image's viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's sequence source can be selected from any image sequence, or any image buffer(s) of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Pair Normalization window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Pair Normalization, but allows specifying a pair of distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a triplets of image buffers, these operations may be applied to three full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's two source images can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Triplet Normalization window allows automatically normalizing various attributes of an image, based upon two references images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a triplets of image buffers, these operations may be applied to three full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's two source images can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Gain & Offset Normalization: MeanSrcB*(Dst-SrcA)/(SrcB-SrcA) performs flat field correction by subtracting a black reference image (SrcA) and dividing by a white reference image (SrcB) scaling the result to the mean of the white reference image. The Gain & Offset Normalization: MaxSrcB*(SrcC-SrcA)/(SrcB-SrcA) is similar, scaling the result to the maximum value of the white reference image. The Gain & Offset Normalization: MinSrcB*(SrcC-SrcA)/(SrcB-SrcA) is similar, scaling the result to the minimum value of the white reference image.
Scaling the result to the maximum of the white reference image helps preserve small differences among the original image's low pixel values, but at the risk of causing high pixel values to be limited by the maximum pixel value. Scaling the result to the minimum of the white reference image helps avoid the risk of limiting the original image's high pixel values to the maximum pixel value, but at the risk of loosing differences among low pixel values. Scaling to the average of the white reference image is the common compromise.
The Image Processing - Sequence Triplet Normalization window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Triplet Normalization, but on each image of a sequence.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The destination image must be the same size as (each image) of the source sequence. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used for the sequence source and image destination, these operations should be selected from the destination image's viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's two source images can be selected from any image sequence, or any image buffer(s) of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
The Image Processing - Src+Dst Triplet Normalization window does the same operation(s) as Image Processing - Triplet Normalization, but allows specifying a pair of distinct source and destination images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a quadruplets of image buffers, these operations may be applied to four full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's three source images can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Image Processing - Average Sequence window allows averaging or integrating (summing) corresponding pixels of a sequence of images.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The destination image must be the same size as (each image) of the source sequence. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used for the sequence source and image destination, these operations should be selected from the destination image's viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's sequence source can be selected from any image sequence, or any image buffer(s) of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
The Average Sequence operation averages corresponding pixels in the sequence of image buffers, placing the result into the destination image. This operation can be used to improve the quality of captured images from noisy sources if the camera's field of view is stationary, by capturing and then averaging an image sequence. Unlike use of a low pass filter, the image noise can be reduced without causing blurring.
The Integrate Sequence operation sums corresponding pixels in a sequence of image buffers, divides by the specified Divisor, limits the value to the maximum pixel value, and places the result into the corresponding pixel of the destination image. A divisor of 1 yields summation, a divisor equal to the number of image buffers in the sequence yields averaging, intermediate divisors allow selecting the degree of integration versus averaging.
The Pixel Mean of Sequence, Pixel Std. Dev. of Sequence, or Pixel Variance of Sequence computes the mean, standard deviation, or variance of corresponding pixels in a sequence of image buffers, multiplies the result by the Scaling Factor and places the result into the corresponding pixel of the destination image. The Pixel Mean of Sequence is essentially identical to Integrate Sequence, albeit using the multiplicative Scaling Factor instead of an integer Divisor.
The Image Processing - Difference Sequence window allows forming the difference of image pairs through a sequence of images.
Like most image processing features which operate on a pair of image buffers, these operations may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, in the same or different images. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used, these operations should be selected from the destination image viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's source can be selected from any image, or any image buffer of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The Pairwise Difference operation forms the difference of each pair of images, the last image of the sequence is unchanged. If (MaxPixValue + (Buffer (i+1) minus Buffer (i)))/2 is selected, image ''i'' of the sequence is replaced by subtracting corresponding pixels of buffer ''i'' from pixels in buffer ''i+1'', dividing the difference by two and adding ½ the maximum pixel value (128 for eight bit pixels). The result is mid-level grey (for grey level images) where the two images are the same. The (MaxPixValue + (Buffer (i) minus Buffer (i+1)))/2 is similar, exchanging the order of subtraction.
The Image Processing - Tile Sequence window allows ''tiling'' a sequence of images, combining small copies of each image in the sequence, into a destination image.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, these operations may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The destination image need not be the same size as (each image) of the source sequence. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; alternate areas of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If different images (i.e. from different image viewer windows) are to be used for the sequence source and image destination, these operations should be selected from the destination image's viewer window; via the Set AOI the operation's sequence source can be selected from any image sequence, or any image buffer(s) of the current image (if a sequence), but the destination can not be directed into an image other than the current image viewer.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation. If Live is selected, the operation is automatically applied whenever the source image is modified.
Each image of the source sequence is resized and positioned in the destination image from left to right and top to bottom. Surrounding each resized image is a ''frame'', of Frame Width and Frame Height, of Frame Value pixel color specified as described in Pick Pixel Value. Surrounding each framed, resized image is a border no smaller than Border Width and Border Height of Border Value pixel color specified as described in Pick Pixel Value. The border may be drawn larger than specified, so as to fill unused space in the destination image. Each image of the source sequence is resized so as to be as large as possible, while fitting all images of the sequence and maintaining the same aspect ratio.
The windows accessible under Image Viewer Window - Measure provides features for image measurements, including user-defined coordinate systems and mapping intensities into user-defined units.
The Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration window allows creating a mapping (correspondence) from monochrome pixel values (denoted Z), into a user-defined units (denoted I), such as from grey level into brightness, or grey level into density of material.
The I units are initially identical to pixel values (Z). Calibration of I units is either by entering two to six corresponding I and Z reference values, or by using an arbitrary user entered mathematical expression. As a calibration reminder, the name of the I units being used can be entered as Units Named. This name will appear in other image measurement windows.
The current mapping (correspondence) is displayed as a graph, with pixel value Z on the abscissa and user-defined units I on the ordinate.
If Z=>I Mapping: Cubic Spline or Z=>I Mapping: Cubic Piecewise Linear is selected, two to six pairs of corresponding I and Z reference values define the calibration. The Calibration Points specifies the number of corresponding reference values to be used.
Each reference is entered as a Z Value (0 to the maximum pixel value, 255 for eight bit pixels) and an arbitrary corresponding I Value pair of values. For example, entering:
specifies that pixel value 0 corresponds to 33.6 (of arbitrary units), pixel value 87 corresponds to 105.06, and pixel value 195 corresponds to 1045.7.Point 1 Z Value 0 I Value 33.6000 Point 2 Z Value 87 I Value 105.0600 Point 3 Z Value 195 I Value 1045.7000
The Z Values are often derived from a calibration image, using image areas of known intensity. After positioning the Image View - Cursor over a desired point of the displayed image, the at Cursor button conveniently sets the Z Value to the value under the cursor.
If Z=>I Mapping: Cubic Piecewise Linear is selected, Z values other than those explicitly specified as calibration points are mapped to I values by piecewise linear interpolation based upon the two closest specified Z values. Some applications may prefer use of the Z=>I Mapping: Cubic Spline which provides a smooth curve through all calibration points, but with the possibility of overshoot or oscillations depending upon the reference values used.
If Z => I Mapping: Expression f(Z) is selected, the Mapping f(Z) specifies an explicit definition of the intensity mapping (correspondence) by evaluation of a Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variable ''Z'' to represent pixel value. For example,
yields a logarithmic mapping (correspondence) (the ''+.001'' avoids the undefined evaluation of ''ln(0)'').ln(Z+.001)
If Z => I Mapping: Off is selected, the intensity calibration is disabled and the I units are identical to pixel values (Z).
The
Save
allows saving the current intensity calibration settings;
the
Load
allows loading intensity calibration settings previously saved.
The
Save
file format is intended for use only by the current version of XCAP,
and may not be reloadable in other versions.
XCAP does not force the file name's extension
to the customary extension;
although using
.set
is highly recommended.
The Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration window allows creating a mapping (correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system.
The H,V are horizontal and vertical coordinates, initially identical to the pixel X,Y coordinates. The XY=>HV Mapping: Off allows disabling the mapping (correspondence), if previously set. The XY=>HV Mapping: Scaled X & Y, from Known Length and Aspect Ratio and XY=>HV Mapping: Scaled X & Y, from Known Width and Height allow defining H,V coordinates as scaled and offset with respect to X,Y; the former being slightly simpler to use, but is dependent on the image's Aspect Ratio (see Image View - Display) being set accurately. The XY=>HV Mapping: Scaled & Rotated, from Known 3 Points allow defining H,V coordinates as scaled, offset, and rotated with respect to X,Y; the former two methods are simpler to use when the rotation is not required.
The XY=>HV Mapping: Scaled X & Y, from Known Length and Aspect Ratio defines the relationship between H,V and X,Y by the correspondence between a drawn line with length and origin in X,Y units, and a specified length and origin in H,V units. Under ''Draw Line over Calibration Length'', the standard controls for drawing a line (see Graphic Line) allow interactively or numerically specifying a line's origin and length, in X,Y units. The HV Length, H Origin, and V Origin allow specifying the corresponding, arbitrary, user-defined, length and origin in H,V units.
The XY=>HV Mapping: Scaled X & Y, from Known Width and Height defines the relationship between H,V and X,Y by the correspondence between the width, height, and origin of a drawn box in X,Y units, and a specified width, height, and origin in H,V units. Under ''Draw Box over Calibration Block'' the standard controls for drawing a rectangle (see Graphic Window) allow interactively or numerically specifying a rectangle's width, height, and origin, in X,Y units. The H Width, V Height, H Origin, and V Origin allow specifying the corresponding, arbitrary, user-defined, width, height and origin in H,V units.
The XY=>HV Mapping: Scaled & Rotated, from Known 3 Points defines the relationship between H,V and X,Y by the correspondence between three pairs of X,Y and H,V points. Under ''Draw Marks over Calibration Points'' the standard controls for drawing a series of points (see Graphic Points) allow interactively or numerically specifying three points in X, Y coordinates (the standard controls for drawing points actually allows specifying more than three points, only the first three are used). The Point 0: H Coord., Point 0: V Coord., through Point 2: H Coord., Point 2: V Coord., allow specifying the corresponding, arbitrary, user-defined, coordinates in H,V units.
For all methods, as a reminder, the name of the H,V units in use can be entered as HV Units are Named. This name will appear in other image measurement windows.
After setting the X,Y and corresponding H,V values, the OK button implements the spatial calibration and closes the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the calibration. Should the calibration points be insufficient, such as a width or height of 0, or three points collinear, the OK button shows a message in the Utilities - Message Log, and does not close the window.
The
Save
allows saving the current spatial calibration settings;
the
Load
allows loading spatial calibration settings previously saved.
The
Save
file format is intended for use only by the current version of XCAP,
and may not be reloadable in other versions.
XCAP does not force the file name's extension
to the customary extension;
although using
.set
is highly recommended.
The Image Measurement - Histogram window allows computing and displaying a histogram of pixel values as a two-dimensional graph.
From the Histogram menu-bar, the File's Save Graphics, Save Data, Copy Data to Clipboard, and Print Graphics features; the Controls' Format, Color, Axis, MinMax, Label, Probe, and Reference features; and the Stats' Descriptive and Outlier features provides standard features common to, and described in, 2-D Graphs.
In addition, the Controls' Apply provides additional options unique to the Histogram.
Like most image measurement and analysis features, the histogram may be applied to the full image, or a region of interest. The default region of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate region of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set ROI button. The Apply button (re)computes the histogram; and the Cancel button closes the window.
If Live is selected, the histogram is automatically recomputed whenever the image is modified.
The Process Threads allows selecting the number of CPU threads to perform the operation. The 1 Thread, 2 Threads, etc. selects the specified number of threads; regardless of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system. The All CPUs, 50% CPUs, and 25% CPUs select use of multiple threads, based on the specified percentage of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system.
For a typical image, typical operation, and typical computer: using more threads will speed up execution of the operation. Using more threads than available CPUs (or CPU cores), or using multiple threads with a small image or small image ROI, may be counter productive and slow execution. Some variations of the operation, depending on options, may execute in whole or part in only one thread. Using Show Process Report under Program Setup - GUI can be used to determine the benefits, on the current system, of using multiple threads.
If Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration has been activated, the displayed values are intensities rather than physical pixel values, and using the menu-bar Options, the intensities can be displayed in fixed point or scientific notation with selected digits of precision. The Set ROI's Color Space selection is not applicable.
The Image Measurement - Histogram window allows computing and displaying a histogram as two-dimensional graph of the difference of corresponding pixels of a pair of images.
From the Histogram Pair menu-bar, the File's Save Graphics, Save Data, Copy Data to Clipboard, and Print Graphics features; the Controls' Format, Color, Axis, MinMax, Label, Probe, and Reference features; and the Stats' Descriptive and Outlier features provides standard features common to, and described in, 2-D Graphs.
In addition, the Controls' Apply provides additional options unique to the Histogram Pair.
Like most image measurement and analysis features which operate on a pair of image buffers, the histogram may be applied to two full images, or two areas of interest, or two regions of interest, in the same or different images. The default regions of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; alternate regions of interest, color space, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set ROI button.
The Apply button (re)computes the histogram; and the Cancel button closes the window.
If Live is selected, the histogram is automatically recomputed whenever the image is modified.
The Process Threads allows selecting the number of CPU threads to perform the operation. The 1 Thread, 2 Threads, etc. selects the specified number of threads; regardless of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system. The All CPUs, 50% CPUs, and 25% CPUs select use of multiple threads, based on the specified percentage of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system.
For a typical image, typical operation, and typical computer: using more threads will speed up execution of the operation. Using more threads than available CPUs (or CPU cores), or using multiple threads with a small image or small image ROI, may be counter productive and slow execution. Some variations of the operation, depending on options, may execute in whole or part in only one thread. Using Show Process Report under Program Setup - GUI can be used to determine the benefits, on the current system, of using multiple threads.
Selecting A-B or B-A specifies the simple, signed, difference of corresponding pixel values, and selecting Abs(A-B) specifies the absolute value of the signed difference of corresponding pixel values.
Note that the Descriptive statistics shown are those of the result of the selected operation, not the underlying values. For example, if Abs(A-B) is chosen, the Mean statistic is the average value of the absolute value of differences.
Any Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration that may have been activated is ignored by the Histogram Pair feature.
The Image Measurement - Mass & Moments window allows computing and displaying various moments of the image.
Like most image measurement and analysis features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or a region of interest. The default region of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate region of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set ROI button.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the Apply button implements the operation and displays the result, and the Cancel button closes the window.
If Live is selected, the histogram is automatically recomputed whenever the image is modified.
If Center of Mass is selected, the image's center of mass is computed, where each pixel's numeric value is interpreted as its mass, and reported as Mass Center, X and Mass Center, Y. The number of pixels is also shown as Number of Pixels.
If Center of Mass, 8'th Power is selected, the image's center of mass is computed, where each pixel's numeric value to the 8'th power is interpreted as its mass, and reported as Mass Center, X and Mass Center, Y. The number of pixels is also shown as Number of Pixels. Use of a nonlinear function of pixel value is helpful when finding the location of a single bright spot in an otherwise dark background, but where the background is not perfectly 0; the non-linear 8'th power diminishes the effect of the many small background values.
If Center of Mass, Binary, is selected, the image's center of mass is computed, where background pixel values of 0 are ignored, and all nonzero pixels are considered to be a foreground object and given equal weight, and reported as Mass Center, X and Mass Center, Y. The number of pixels is also shown as Number of Pixels.
If Moments is selected, all third order moments over the image is computed, where each pixel's numeric value is interpreted as its mass. Several screens of results can be selected from the menu-bar's Show.
The Show - Mass shows the image's center of mass and number of pixels.
The Show - Central Moments shows the seven moments about the center of mass, or mean, as follows:
Item Name | Moment about the Mean |
Mu x1 y1 | x1y1 |
Mu x2 y0 | x2y0 |
Mu x0 y2 | x0y2 |
Mu x2 y1 | x2y1 |
Mu x1 y2 | x1y2 |
Mu x3 y0 | x3y0 |
Mu x0 y3 | x0y3 |
The Show - Scale Invariant shows seven corresponding moments about the mean, numerically scaled so as to be (approximately) invariant of image scale, as follows:
Item Name | Scale Invariant Moment about the Mean |
Eta x1 y1 | x1y1 |
Eta x2 y0 | x2y0 |
Eta x0 y2 | x0y2 |
Eta x2 y1 | x2y1 |
Eta x1 y2 | x1y2 |
Eta x3 y0 | x3y0 |
Eta x0 y3 | x0y3 |
The Show - Statistics shows seven descriptive statistics based upon moments, the Phi 1 through Phi 7 numerically scaled so as to be (approximately) invariant of image scale, rotation and reflection. These moment statistics can be used for image recognition and classification.
The Show - Raw Moments shows seven raw moments, as follows:
Item Name | Moment |
Mom x1 y1 | xau1y1 |
Mom x2 y0 | x2y0 |
Mom x0 y2 | x0y2 |
Mom x2 y1 | x2y1 |
Mom x1 y2 | x1y2 |
Mom x3 y0 | x3y0 |
Mom x0 y3 | x0y3 |
For discussion on the use of moments, see, for example, DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING, Gonzalez and Wintz (Addison-Wesley, 1987).
The menu-bar's File - Save Moments allows saving the current displayed moments to a text file in a format suitable for incorporation in a spreadsheet, such as:
"Number of Pixels" 0.0 "Mass Center, X" 0.0 "Mass Center, Y" 0.0 "Mom x0 y0" 0.0 ... "Mom x3 y3" 0.0 "Mu x0 y0" 0.0 ... "Mu x3 y3" 0.0 "Eta x0 y0" 0.0 ... "Eta x3 y3" 0.0 "Phi 0" 0.0 ... "Phi 6" 0.0
If Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration or Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the computed moments and center of mass are based upon the calibrated intensity values (I), and calibrated spatial coordinates (H,V), instead of pixel values (Z) and pixel coordinates (X,Y). The Set ROI's Color Space selection is not applicable.
If Center => Cursor if selected, updated values of Mass Center, X and Mass Center, Y will update the Image View - Cursor position.
The Image Measurement - Line Profile window allows viewing the numeric values of pixels along arbitrary lines as curves as a two-dimensional graph.
From the Line Profile's menu-bar, the File's Save Graphics, Save Data, Copy Data to Clipboard, and Print Graphics features; the Controls' Format, Color, Axis, MinMax, Label, Probe, and Reference features; and the Stats' Descriptive and Outlier features provides standard features common to, and described in, 2-D Graphs.
In addition, the Controls' Where provides additional options unique to the Line Profile.
Using Color Space, the viewed values may be in the monochrome, RGB, YCrCb, HSB, CMY, or the CMYK color space, and for the colored spaces either all components (e.g. R, G & B) or one component (e.g. R of RGB) can be displayed.
If Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration has been activated, the displayed values are intensities rather than physical pixel values. The Color Space selection is not applicable.
The Line Profile tool selecting the pixel intensities to be graphed may be any of, and is controlled as described in , Graphic Window, Graphic Rectangle, Graphic Line, Graphic Circle, Graphic Diamond, Graphic Ellipse, Graphic Path Enclosed, Graphic Path Curve, Graphic Polygon, Graphic Polyline, Graphic Circle Arc, Graphic Ellipse Arc, Graphic Ellipse Arc, Graphic Bezier Curve, or Graphic Bezier Region. For regions, the Line Profile tool is the boundary of the region. These controls allowing setting a tool by using explicit coordinates and dimensions, or by interactive drawing over the image. The Line Profile is not updated while interactively drawing.
The Other Graphic button allows creating a tool of a new type, and provides access to graphical objects previously created with the Graphic Manager. If Other, New is chosen, the New Graphic allows selecting a new graphic type eligible to be a Line Profile tool. If Other, from List is chosen, the Listed Graphic shows the names of all eligible graphical objects created by the Graphic Manager, and also shows ''Current'' which represents the current tool. The Other OK button selects the New Graphic or Listed Graphic, the Other Cancel button selects the current tool.
The Image Measurement - Radial Mass Plot window allows viewing the relationship between distance from an origin versus the sum of all pixel values within said distance, as a two-dimensional graph.
From the Radial Mass Plot's menu-bar, the File's Save Graphics, Save Data, Copy Data to Clipboard, and Print Graphics features; the Controls' Format, Color, Axis, MinMax, Label, Probe, and Reference features; and the Stats' Descriptive and Outlier features provides standard features common to, and described in, 2-D Graphs.
In addition, the Controls' AOI and the Controls' Apply provides additional options unique to the Radial Mass Plot.
If From Center of Mass is selected, a center of mass computation is performed, and the resulting center used as the origin for the Radial Mass Plot.
If From Coordinates is selected, the X Coord(inate) and Y Coord(inate) are used as the origin for the Radial Mass Plot. Further, if Coord<=>Cursor is selected, the X Coord(inate) and Y Coord(inate) become synonymous with the Image View - Cursor; moving the image cursor (left click over the displayed image) also modifies the origin for the Radial Mass Plot, and inversely.
If Show Mass is selected, the distance from the origin versus mass at the given distance is shown. If Show Total Mass is selected, the distance from the origin versus total mass found from the origin through the given distance from the origin is shown. If Show Total Mass, % is selected, the distance from the origin versus total mass found from the origin through the given distance from the origin is shown as a percentage of total mass in the image.
If Live is selected, the Radial Mass Plot is automatically recomputed and redrawn whenever the image is modified or the origin changed in From Coordinates mode. The Apply button recomputes and redraws the Radial Mass Plot.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
The Image Measurement - Shape Analysis window provides descriptive statistics about circular, elliptical, rectangular, arbitrary path enclosed, or polygonal region's shapes. Regions may be defined by using explicit coordinates and dimensions, or by drawing over the image.
If Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the descriptive statistics are in calibrated spatial coordinates (H,V), instead of pixel coordinates (X,Y).
The Apply button (re)computes the shape analysis; and the Cancel button closes the window. If Live is selected, the shape analysis is automatically recomputed whenever the shape is modified.
The region of interest is specified via controls as described in Graphic Window, Graphic Rectangle, Graphic Circle, Graphic Diamond, Graphic Ellipse, Graphic Path Enclosed, or Graphic Polygon, according to the type of region, allowing setting a region of interest by using explicit coordinates and dimensions, or by interactive drawing over the image. The Other ROI button allows creating a region of a new type, and provides access to regions of interest previously created with the AOI/ROI Manager, as described under Aoi - Set Region of Interest.
As a region is selected or modified, descriptive statistics about the region's shape are displayed.
The Number of Pixels shows the number of pixels in the region. The Width, Projected on H and Height, Projected on V shows the region's width and height, in H,V units, as projected on the H and V axis.
The Major Axis Length, H,V shows the distance, in H,V units, between the two farthest boundary pixels of the region; this statistic is also known as ''diameter''. The Major Axis Angle, H,V shows the angle of the major axis, with respect to the H,V axis. The Minor Axis Length, H,V shows the width of a rectangle, whose length would be equal to, and parallel to, Major Axis Length, H,V, which encloses the region.
The Area, H,V is the region's area in H,V units. The Circumference, H,V shows the sum of distances from pixel to pixel around the region's boundary. The ratio:
Circumference,H,V * Circumference,H,V ------------------------------------- 4 PI Area,H,V
Various statistics are shown based upon interpreting the region as a uniform mass. The Center of Uniform Mass, H and Center of Uniform Mass, V are the H,V coordinates of center of mass. The Min Radius from C.O.U.M, H,V and Max Radius from C.O.U.M, H,V are the minimum and maximum distances, respectively, from the Center of Uniform Mass (C.O.U.M.) to the boundary. The ratio:
MaxRadius --------- MinRadius
The Image Measurement - Blob Analysis window allows identifying image blobs, based upon segmenting the image into foreground (i.e. blobs) and background, and provides descriptive statistics about the blobs found. The found blobs may also be added to the list maintained by the AOI/ROI Manager, so that other analyses, such as Image Measurement - Histogram or Image Measurement - Mass & Moments can be applied.
If Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration or Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the descriptive statistics are based upon the calibrated intensity values (I), and calibrated spatial coordinates (H,V), instead of pixel values (Z) and pixel coordinates (X,Y).
From the menu-bar, the Setup - Segmentation allows setting the segmentation which differentiates between foreground (i.e. blobs) and background, the Setup - Analysis allows setting blob analysis parameters and constraints as well as performing the analysis and tabulation of blobs. For convenience, analysis may also be performed from the menu-bar's Analyze - Analyze and Add which adds any blobs found to the current tabulation, Analyze - Clear and Analyze in which the blobs found replace the current tabulation, and Analyze - Clear Analysis which simply clears the current tabulation.
The menu-bar's the Customize - Derived allows specifying user-defined statistics that are derived from the predefined statistics, the Customize - Constraints allows setting the acceptable range of descriptive statistics with blobs which exceed the constraints being discarded, the Customize - Ordering allows changing the order of the tabulated blobs, and the Customize - Report allows customizing the tabulation's columns and headings.
The menu-bar's Show - Results, List shows the entire blob tabulation in tabular format, the Show - Results, Summary shows statistics about the entire blob tabulation, and Show - Results, One shows detailed statistics about a single blob.
The menu-bar's File - Save Summary Stats saves the statistics about the entire blob tabulation, the File - Save Blob Stats saves detailed statistics about each blob tabulated, the Copy Blob Stats to Black Board copies detailed statistics about each blob tabulated to the Black Board, and the Copy Blob Stats to Clipboard copies detailed statistics about each blob tabulated to the Windows or Linux clipboard.
The Setup - Segmentation allows setting a) The threshold(s) which differentiates foreground (the blobs of interest) from background (which separate the blobs), and b) Optional filtering of the thresholded result to remove noise and thin protrusions and to separate touching blobs.
The Numeric Threshold allows setting the segmentation threshold explicitly, the Sample within Object allows setting the segmentation by roughly marking a region within a blob, and Gradient over Boundary allows setting the segmentation by drawing an arrow over a blob's boundary.
The Use Color Space selects which color space, or ''slice'' of a color space, is to be used for blob segmentation. The Image's Color Space provides a reminder of the image's native color space.
If Show Segmentation is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is modified to be bi-level, showing the effect of the threshold selected, with blobs (nominally) white and background (nominally) black. If Show Monotone Background is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is modified so that the background is (nominally) black and the blobs are unaffected. If Show Normal is selected, the effect of the segmentation is not displayed. The Show Segmentation and Show Monotone Background nominal colors are for grey level or RGB images, other color spaces may result in other colors. These features may not be available if other windows are simultaneously forcing their own interpretations upon The Image Viewer Window.
The Numeric Threshold allows setting the segmentation threshold explicitly. The Threshold Lower Bound and Threshold Upper Bound are each set as described in Pick Pixel Value. If Objects within Lower/Upper Threshold is selected, the values between the Threshold Lower Bound and Threshold Upper Bound are considered foreground, other values are background. If Objects without Lower/Upper Threshold is selected, the values between the Threshold Lower Bound and Threshold Upper Bound are considered background, other values are foreground.
The Sample within Object allows setting the segmentation threshold by roughly marking a region within a blob. An ellipse is drawn, as described in Graphic Ellipse, within a typical blob. The ellipse need not be drawn precisely - specifically it need not be drawn touching the blob's boundary - but must be drawn so as to enclose a reasonable sampling (i.e. variety) of pixel values within the blob. The mean and standard deviation of the pixels within the ellipse are used to determine suitable thresholds to segment the foreground from the background.
The Scale Pixel Value Std. Dev. allows scaling the standard deviation. On high contrast images with sharp distinctions between foreground and background, the Scale Pixel Value Std. Dev. may have no effect. On low contrast images with gradual distinctions between foreground and background, larger values of Scale Pixel Value Std. Dev. tend to increase the blob size.
The Gradient over Boundary allows setting the segmentation threshold by drawing an arrow over a typical blob's boundary. An arrow is drawn, as described in Graphic Arrow, from the background, over a typical blob's boundary, and into the blob. The pixel values under the arrow are used to determine suitable thresholds to segment foreground from background.
The Filter Type 1 and Filter Repetitions 1 through Filter Type 5 and Filter Repetitions 5 allow optional filtering of the thresholded result. These filters can be used to remove noise and ''clean up'' the blobs' boundaries by smoothing out thin protrusions and filling in narrow intrusions. The filters can also be used to separate blobs that touch.
Each of the Filter Type can be n/a for no filter, Dilation for a morphological dilation filter, Erosion for a morphological erosion filter, Opening for a morphological open filter, Closing for a morphological close filter, or Median for a median filter. The selected Filter Type 1 is executed Filter Repetitions 1 times, then Filter Type 2 is executed Filter Repetitions 2 times, etc.
The Setup - Analysis allows specifying blob analysis parameters and constraints, and also performs the actual search of the image and tabulation of blobs.
Constraints may be placed upon the blobs found, to avoid tabulating undesirable blobs. Only blobs with an X width between (inclusive) Min Blob Width, X and Max Blob Width, X and with a Y height between (inclusive) Min Blob Height, Y and Max Blob Height, Y are tabulated.
If Compute Full Statistics is selected, the full suite of statistics, described below, are computed for each blob. Otherwise only minimal statistics are computed, increasing execution speed especially on computers which lack a coprocessor, or where large blobs are used.
If Ignore Blobs on Image Edge is selected, any blobs which touch the image area of interest edge are not tabulated.
If Include Holes Within Blob is not selected, pixels contained within a blob that are not part of the foreground, i.e. a ''hole'', are not included as part of the blob. Otherwise, all pixels within the blob's perimeter are included as part of the blob, regardless of pixel value. If the image's blobs have no holes, the Include Holes Within Blob option has no effect on the result, and should not be selected, thereby increasing execution speed.
If Assume Convex & Solid Blobs is selected, blob analysis may be faster; but any non-convex blobs may be reported as two or more separate blobs.[29]
If Analyze and Add is selected, analysis adds any blobs found to the current tabulation. If Clear and Analyze the blobs found during each analysis replace the current tabulation,
Like most image processing features, blob analysis may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button. Note that the Use Color Space selected under Setup - Segmentation governs the color space used for segmenting the blobs from the background. The color space selected via Set AOI governs the color space used for analysis of the contents of the blob, and affects only descriptive statistics that are dependent on pixel value (such as weighted mass).
If Find All Blobs is selected, blob analysis searches the image's area of interest and tabulates all blobs found that matches the specified constraints. If Find Blob at Cursor is selected, only the one blob under the cursor's current coordinates and within the area of interest (see Image View - Cursor) is analyzed.
If Retain Region for Analysis is selected, each blob's shape is retained so that it can, optionally, be added to the list maintained by the AOI/ROI Manager, at the expense of additional execution time. If Retain Statistics Only is selected, each blob is analyzed, but not retained.
After selecting the various options, the Apply button analyzes the image and tabulates the blobs found, and their descriptive statistics. If Live is selected, the image is automatically re-analyzed and the blobs tabulated whenever the image, segmentation parameters, or analysis parameters are modified.
The following descriptive statistics are computed:
The Experiment ID shows the user-defined ID entered when the analysis was performed. The Number of Pixels shows the number of pixels in the blob. The Enclosing Window Origin, X and Enclosing Window Origin, Y shows the X,Y coordinates of the upper left corner of the smallest box enclosing the blob. The Enclosing Window Width, X and Enclosing Window Height, Y shows the width and height, in X,Y coordinates of the smallest box enclosing the blob. The Center of Uniform Mass, H and Center of Uniform Mass, V are the H,V coordinates of the blob's center of mass, interpreting the blob as a uniform mass.Short Form Long Form Variable Heading Heading Name ================= ========================================== =============== ID Experiment ID ID Pixels Number of Pixels Pixels Window Origin, X Enclosing Window Origin, X WindowOriginX Window Origin, Y Enclosing Window Origin, Y WindowOriginY Window Width Enclosing Window Width, X WindowWidth Window Height Enclosing Window Height, Y WindowHeight Center, H Center of Uniform Mass, H CenterH Center, V Center of Uniform Mass, V CenterV Width on H Width, Projected on H WidthonH Height on V Height, Projected on V HeightonV Major Axis Length Major Axis Length, H,V MajorAxisLength Major Axis Angle Major Axis Angle, H,V MajorAxisAngle Minor Axis Length Minor Axis Length, H,V MinorAxisLength Area Area, H,V Area Circumference Circumference, H,V Circumference Mass Mass Mass Min Radius Min Radius from Center of Uniform Mass, H,V MinRadius Max Radius Max Radius from Center of Uniform Mass, H,V MaxRadius L.M.I. Least Moment of Uniform Mass Inertia, H,V LMI Mass Center, H Center of Weighted Mass, H MassCenterH Mass Center, V Center of Weighted Mass, V MassCenterV Mass L.M.I. Least Moment of Weighted Mass Inertia, H,V MassL.M.I. Roundness Roundness Roundness Elongation Elongation Elongation User 1 User-Defined 1 User1 User 2 User-Defined 2 User2 User 3 User-Defined 3 User3 User 4 User-Defined 4 User4 User 5 User-Defined 5 User5
The Width, Projected on H and Height, Projected on V shows the blob's width and height, in H,V units, as projected on the H and V axis.
The Major Axis Length, H,V shows the distance, in H,V units, between the two farthest boundary pixels of the blob; this statistic is also known as ''diameter''. The Major Axis Angle, H,V shows the angle of the major axis, with respect to the H,V axis. The Minor Axis Length, H,V shows the width of a rectangle, whose length would be equal to, and parallel to, Major Axis Length, H,V, which encloses the blob.
The Area, H,V is the blob's area in H,V units. The Circumference, H,V shows the sum of distances from pixel to pixel around the blob's boundary.
The Mass is the sum of the blob's pixels' intensity (I) values.
Various statistics are shown based upon interpreting the blob as a uniform mass. The Min Radius from Center of Uniform Mass, H,V and Max Radius from Center of Uniform Mass, H,V are the minimum and maximum distances, respectively, from the Center of Uniform Mass to the boundary. The Least Moment of Uniform Mass Inertia, H,V is the angle, with respect to the H,V axis, of the line of least moment of inertia.
Various statistics are shown based upon interpreting each pixel's intensity (I) value as its mass. The Center of Weighted Mass, H and Center of Weighted Mass, V are the H,V coordinates of center of mass. The Least Moment of Weighted Mass Inertia, H,V is the angle, with respect to the H,V axis, of line of least moment of inertia.
Additional statistics are derived from others, but show explicitly for convenience. The Roundness, or:
Circumference,H,V * Circumference,H,V ------------------------------------- 4 PI Area,H,V
MaxRadiusfromCenterofUniformMass,H,V ------------------------------------ MinRadiusfromCenterofUniformMass,H,V
The Customize - Derived allows specifying user-defined statistics that are derived from the predefined statistics.
The User-Defined 1 f(...) through User-Defined 5 f(...) allows defining five different user-defined statistics by evaluation of a Mathematical Expression. Each expression may contain variables representing each of the predefined statistics, or other user-defined statistics. The variable names are defined from the short form of the tabulation headings, with spaces and punctuation removed, as shown above in Setup - Analysis.
For example,
yields the blob's aspect ratio (using ''1.0*'' to force floating point arithmetic, as the two ''WindowWidth'' and ''WindowHeight'' operands are both integer).(1.0*WindowWidth)/WindowHeight
The Customize - Constraints allows setting the acceptable range of descriptive statistics with blobs which exceed the constraints being discarded and not tabulated.
Under Simple, each descriptive statistic has an independent Constraint Condition and two Constraint Values.
Blobs for which any descriptive statistic fails any constraint are discarded.Constraint Condition Test ===================== =============================================
n/a constraint is ignored
Equal equal to constraint value 1
Not Equal not equal to constraint value 1
Less less than constraint value 1
Less or Equal less than or equal to constraint value 1
Greater greater than constraint value 1
Greater or Equal greater than or equal to constraint value 1
Within greater than or equal to constraint value 1 and less than or equal to constraint value 2
Not Within less than constraint value 1 or greater than constraint value 2
Under Expert, the Constraints f(...) allows entering a Mathematical Expression with variables as described above in Customize - Derived. Blobs for which the evaluated expression is false or 0 are discarded. For example,
discards blobs whose width is less than height.WindowWidth >= WindowHeight
The Customize - Ordering allows changing the order of the tabulated blobs.
Under Simple, each descriptive statistic has an independent Ordering Condition and Ordering Priority. The Ordering Condition may be n/a if the statistic is not be used for ordering blobs, Low to High if the statistic is to order blobs with lowest values first, or High to Low, if the statistic is to order blobs with highest values first. If only one statistic is used for ordering, the Ordering Priority has no effect. With more than one ordering statistic, the statistic with the lowest Ordering Priority is first sorted value, the statistic with the next lowest Ordering Priority is next sorted value, etc. If two or more ordering statistics have the same Ordering Priority value, the statistics are sorted in the same order as they appear in Customize - Ordering.
Under Expert, the Ordering f(...) allows entering a Mathematical Expression with variables as described above in Customize - Derived. The expression is evaluated for each blob, and resulting value used to order the blobs with lowest values first. For example,
orders the blobs according to their aspect ratio.(1.0*WindowWidth)/WindowHeight
The Customize - Report allows customizing the tabulation's columns and headings.
Each descriptive statistic has an independent Stat Show, Stat Order, and Stat Heading.
If Stat Show is selected, the descriptive statistic is shown. With more than one statistic shown, the statistic with the lowest Stat Order is shown first (to the left), the statistic with the next lowest Stat Order is next, etc. If two or more statistics have the same Stat Order value, the statistics are shown, left to right, in the same order as they appear in Customize - Report. If Show All Stats is selected, all descriptive statistics are shown regardless of the individual Stat Show selections.
If
Std. Long Headings
is selected, the statistic's headings
are set to the standard long form.
If
Std. Short Headings
is selected, the statistic's headings
are set to the standard long form.
If
Customized Headings
is selected, each statistic's heading can be customized
The Show - Results, Summary shows statistics about the entire blob tabulation. The Blobs Founds shows the number of blobs found and tabulated; i.e. that met the specified constraints.
For the entire set of blobs found, which did meet the constraints, Number of Pixels, Width, on H, Height, on V, Area, HV, Circumference, HV, and Mass, HV are each shown as a Mean value for all blobs, the mean's Std Dev., and the Low and High value over the set of blobs.
The Show - Results, One shows detailed descriptive statistics about a single blob, listing all descriptive statistics as described above in Setup - Analysis.
The Blobs Found shows the number of blobs found and tabulated; i.e. that met the stated constraints. The Blob # selects the blob for which detailed statistics are shown. The Set Cursor button moves the Image View - Cursor to the center of mass of the blob selected by Blob #, allowing easy visual recognition of the blob. If Click & Pick is selected, mouse clicking within a blob's window selects that Blob # for showing detailed statistics.
If Show Blob Window is selected, a box is drawn around the currently selected Blob #. If Show Blob Label is selected, each blob is labeled with its assigned blob number. Show Blob ROI is selected, the area of each blob is overdrawn. The Window Color, Label Color, and ROI Color, allow selecting the color of the box, labels, or ROI, respectively, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Window Thickness allows selecting the thickness of the box. The Mark Image writes the Show(n) Blob Window, Show(n) Blob Label, and Show(n) Blob ROI permanently into the image, using the Window Color, Label Color, and ROI Color, respectively, translated as needed to the image's color space;
If Retain Region for Analysis was specified when the blob was found, the List Blob as ROI adds the blob's region to the list maintained by the AOI/ROI Manager. The Delete Blob from Results deletes the blob from the results; so that the list of blobs can be ''edited'' before being saved via File - Save Summary Stats, File - Save Blob Stats, or Copy Blob Stats to Black Board.
The Show - Results, List shows detailed descriptive statistics about all blobs in a tabular format.
The Setup - Ordering and Setup - Report affects the Show - Results, List; selecting order of blobs and selecting descriptive statistics, their order, and headings.
The File - Save Summary Stats saves the statistics about the entire set of blobs found, creating a tabular ASCII text file such as:
These values are interpreted as described for Show - Results, Summary.Mean Std. Dev. Low High "Number of Pixels" 2275.55 1172.79 1280.0 5120.0 "Width, on H" 57.33 20.27 43.0 86.0 "Height, on V" 57.33 20.27 43.0 86.0 "Area, HV" 2275.55 1172.79 1280.0 5120.0 "Circumference, HV" 190.96 40.375 148.66 262.67 "Mass, HV" 507281.77 261447.04 285345.99 1141383.98
The File - Save Blob Stats saves detailed statistics about each blob tabulated.
A header row containing the descriptive statistics' titles followed by one row for each blob tabulated with values for each of the descriptive statistics, are saved. The format of each line is ASCII text decimal numbers, or double quoted ASCII text separated by tabs.
The Setup - Ordering and Setup - Report affects the File - Save Blob Stats; selecting order of blobs and selecting descriptive statistics, their order, and headings.
If Save w. Titles is not selected, the header row containing the descriptive statistics' titles is not saved. If Blob per Column is selected instead of Blob per Row, each blob is saved as a column instead of a row, and the optional Save w. Titles is saved as a left-most column instead of a top-most row.
The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Copy Blob Stats to Black Board copies detailed statistics about each blob tabulated to the Black Board.
A header row containing the descriptive statistics' titles followed by one row for each blob tabulated with values for each of the descriptive statistics, are copied to the black board using the Black Board Cell as the initial upper left corner. The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The Setup - Ordering and Setup - Report affects the File - Copy Blob Stats to Black Board; selecting order of blobs and selecting descriptive statistics, their order, and headings.
If Save w. Titles is not selected, the header row containing the descriptive statistics' titles is not copied. If Blob per Column is selected instead of Blob per Row, each blob is saved as a column instead of a row, and the optional Save w. Titles is saved as a left-most column instead of a top-most row.
The File - Copy Blob Stats to Clipboard copies detailed statistics about each blob tabulated to the Windows or Linux clipboard.
A header row containing the descriptive statistics' titles followed by one row for each blob tabulated with values for each of the descriptive statistics, are copied to the clipboard. The format of each line is ASCII text decimal numbers, or double quoted ASCII text separated by tabs.
The Setup - Ordering and Setup - Report affects the File - Copy Blob Stats to Clipboard; selecting order of blobs and selecting descriptive statistics, their order, and headings.
If Save w. Titles is not selected, the header row containing the descriptive statistics' titles is not copied. If Blob per Column is selected instead of Blob per Row, each blob is saved as a column instead of a row, and the optional Save w. Titles is saved as a left-most column instead of a top-most row.
The Image Measurement - Particle Tracking window finds and tracks particles across a sequence of images, and reports and/or draws each particle's position in the image sequence. Before using Image Measurement - Particle Tracking, an image sequence should be captured containing one or more discernible particles which remain in view for the entire sequence.
If Image Measurement - Intensity Calibration or Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the particle tracking is based upon the calibrated intensity values (I), and calibrated spatial coordinates (H,V), instead of pixel values (Z) and pixel coordinates (X,Y).
Particles are characterized by a thresholded segmentation of the image; a pixel value is interactively chosen to segment the image into light and dark (i.e. bi-level) areas. Particles are then defined as either the light area(s) against the dark background, or dark area(s) against the light background. The image pixels are not actually modified (made bi-level) by the threshold.
There are three particle-tracking methods.
In the first method, multiple occurrences of a common particle are identified across a sequence of images by position extrapolation and verification. This method requires at least three images in the sequence and can be used to track particles which move[30] ''faster than the acquisition rate'' with each particle having a near consistent trajectory. An example is inanimate particles in a fluid.
In the second method, vectors of particles that are close together are compared and expected to yield mutually consistent magnitude and direction. This method can operate with two or more images in the sequence and can be used to track particles which move[31] ''faster than the acquisition rate'' with groups of particles having consistent trajectories, but can't be used to track particles with random trajectory.
In the third method, a particle in one image is ''paired'' with the neighboring particle in the subsequent image which produces a vector closest to the expected vector magnitude. This method can operate with two or more images in the sequence, can be used to track particles with random trajectory (such as living creatures), but can only be used to track particles that move ''slower than the acquisition rate''. This method has the fewest associated parameters.
From the menu-bar, the Setup - Segmentation allows setting the threshold by which particles (blobs) are distinguished from the background. This is identical to, and described in, Image Measurement - Blob Analysis, Setup - Segmentation. The Setup - Analysis allows setting blob analysis parameters and constraints; as described in Image Measurement - Blob Analysis, Setup - Analysis; and setting particle tracking parameters and constraints, and finally performing the analysis. For convenience, analysis may also be performed from the menu-bar's Analyze - Analyze and Add which adds any particle tracks found to the current tabulation, Analyze - Clear and Analyze in which the particle tracks found replace the current tabulation, and Analyze - Clear Analysis which simply clears the current tabulation. The menu-bar's Show - Results, List shows the entire particle track tabulation in tabular format, and Show - Results, One shows detailed statistics about a single particle track in tabular format, and provides options for showing graphic track(s) overlaid on the displayed image. The menu-bar's File - Save Track Coordinates saves vector coordinates for each particle track tabulated, the File - Copy Track Coordinates to Black Board copies vector coordinates for each particle track tabulated to the Black Board, and the File - Copy Track Coordinates to Clipboard copies vector coordinates for each particle track tabulated to the Windows or Linux clipboard. The menu-bar's Customize - Report allows customizing the information shown under Show - Results, List, and the information saved or copied by File - Save Track Coordinates, File - Copy Track Coordinates to Black Board, and File - Copy Track Coordinates to Clipboard.
After particles in each image of the sequence have been found, each particle in the first image of the sequence is tested for occurring in, and tracking through, each of the following images. A particle is identified from one image to the next by prediction of motion and size, and verification in subsequent images of the predicted position and size.
Depending on the relative speed of the particles vis-a-vis the image acquisition rate, some particles may not be tracked and/or some false tracks (misidentification of two or more particles as a single track) may be found. Use of a acquisition rate such that in two consecutive images the distance moved by a particle is less than ½ the distance between particles (in a single image) is highly desirable, and prevents false tracking. However, this method can track particles which move ''faster'' than the acquisition rate, where two adjacent particles, from image to image, may ''pass each other''; false tracking can be reduced by using a longer image sequence, thereby increasing the number of predictions that must be satisfied before confirming a particle track.
The Vectors and Extrapolate & Verify control the identification of particles across the image sequence. For every blob in the first image, time T0, subject to minimum area Minimum Particle Area, XY and maximum area Maximum Particle Area, XY the particle tracking operation will search for a corresponding blob at time T1. A blob at time T1 will be considered as corresponding to a blob at time T0 if their relative distance and relative area are within specified bounds. Their relative distance must be greater than Minimum Vector Magnitude, HV and less than Maximum Vector Magnitude, HV. The difference of their areas, in pixels, must be smaller than Max Particle Area Change, Fixed, if Use Fixed is selected; or no larger than Max Particle Area Change, Perc. percentage of the area of the blob at time T0, if Use Perc. is selected.
If a corresponding blob is found at time T1, the distance between the blobs at time T0 and T1, DeltaXY, is calculated and added to the position of the blob at time T1 to give the predicted coordinates for the blob at time T2. If a blob is found at time T2 with relative area within the specified bounds, and within a specified radius of the predicted location, it is accepted as the same particle, and the search and verification repeated at time T3, T4, etc. The allowable error in predicted location, in H,V units must be smaller than Max Velocity Change, Fixed, if Use Fixed is selected; or no larger than Max Velocity Change, Perc. of the particle's T0 to T1 velocity, if Use Perc. is selected.
If Adapt Allowed Velocity Change is selected, the DeltaH,V are updated at each time Ti, based upon the displacement from time Ti-1; allowing piecewise curved particle tracks. If Adapt Allowed Velocity Change is not selected, the DeltaH,V computed as the displacement from time T0 to time T1 is used without modification, expecting the particle track to be straight, with allowance for error. If Adapt Allowed Area Change is selected, the Max Particle Area Change constraint is applied to the difference of sizes of the blobs at time Ti and Ti-1; allowing growing or shrinking blobs. If Adapt Allowed Area Change is not selected, the Max Particle Area Change constraint is applied to the difference of sizes of the blobs at time Ti and T0; expecting the blob area to remain fixed, with allowance for error.
If the predicted position and size are verified through the entire image sequence, the particle is added to the tabulation.
After particles in each image of the sequence have been found, each pair of images is independently analyzed for particle vectors, looking for vector groups that are mutually consistent - the closer two vectors are to one another, the more consistent their magnitude and direction. Each particle track consists of a sequence of such vectors, head to tail, from the first image of the sequence to the last.
Within each pair of images, all combinations of particles in the first and second image form the set of potential vectors; limitations on minimal and maximal vector length reduce the number of vectors to be considered further. Among the remaining vectors, each pair of vectors is ''graded'' for mutual consistency as a function of separation; a vector which is ''supported'' by having other nearby vectors share a similar magnitude and direction is graded higher than non-conformist vectors. Vectors with a grade or ''confidence'' above a predetermined threshold are considered valid.
The Vectors parameters govern creation of potential vectors from all combinations of particles in a pair of images. Particles whose area is below the Minimum Particle Area, XY or above the Maximum Particle Area, XY are discarded. Vectors whose length is below Minimum Vector Magnitude, HV or above Maximum Vector Magnitude, HV are discarded. Further, vectors which are constructed from a pair of particles whose difference in relative area exceeds Maximum Particle Pair Area Difference, XY are discarded. Remaining are vectors of an acceptable length, constructed of two particles of similar areas.
The Consistency parameters govern the ''grading'' potential vectors, combined of several factors. Vector pairs whose average magnitude is Expected Vector Magnitude, HV (found under Vectors) plus or minus Midpoint: Difference of Vector and Expected Magnitude are assigned a median grade on this factor; vectors pairs with average magnitude nearer (farther) to Expected Vector Magnitude, HV receive a higher (lower) grade.
Vector pairs whose difference in direction is Midpoint: Difference of Vector Pair Direction (square root of sum of squares of difference of x and y components of the velocity of the vectors) are assigned a median grade on this factor; vectors pairs with a difference in direction less (greater) than Midpoint: Difference of Vector Pair Direction receive a higher (lower) grade.
Vector pairs whose difference in relative magnitude is Midpoint: Difference of Vector Pair Magnitude are assigned a median grade on this factor; vector pairs with a difference in relative magnitude less (greater) than Midpoint: Difference of Vector Pair Magnitude receive a higher (lower) grade.
Vector pairs whose distance between midpoints is Midpoint:SeparationofVectorPairCenters" are assigned a median grade on this factor; vector pairs with distance between midpoints less (greater) than Midpoint:SeparationofVectorPairMidPoints" receive a higher (lower) grade.
Vector pairs whose difference in particle area is Midpoint: Difference of Vector Pair Particle Area are assigned a median grade on this factor; vector pairs with difference in particle area less (greater) than Midpoint: Difference of Vector Pair Particle Area receive a higher (lower) grade.
Vectors are graded against other vectors within a distance of Max Vector Pair Interaction Distance. Each vector must find ''support'' from other vectors within this region. A vector without support of neighbors receives a grade of 0.
Vectors pairs whose final grade is below Minimum Acceptable Vector Confidence are discarded.
Each of the above factors can be disabled by deselecting the corresponding Use. Tuning parameters by starting with two factors, and then adding factors one at a time is helpful.
The Partial parameters allow tracking particles which may disappear before the end of the sequence, or appear after the start of the sequence, or both. If Allow Partial Tracks is selected, a particle which is not present during the entire sequence is accepted if the number of images in which the particle occurs is between Partial Track: Minimum Length and Partial Track: Maximum Length, inclusive. If Partial Track: Shift Report to Time 0 is selected, all particles are tabulated as if they started in the first image. If Allow Partial Tracks is not selected, a particle which is not present during the entire sequence is discarded.
After particles in each image of the sequence have been found, each pair of images is independently analyzed for particle vectors; a particle in one image is ''paired'' with the neighboring particle in the subsequent image which produces a vector closest to the expected vector magnitude. Each particle track consists of a sequence of such vectors, head to tail, from the first image of the sequence to the last.
Within each pair of images, all combinations of particles in the first and second image form the set of potential vectors; limitations on minimal and maximal vector length reduce the number of vectors to be considered further.
The Vectors parameters govern creation of potential vectors from all combinations of particles in a pair of images. Particles whose area is below the Minimum Particle Area, XY or above the Maximum Particle Area, XY are discarded. Vectors whose length is below Minimum Vector Magnitude, HV or above Maximum Vector Magnitude, HV are discarded. Further, vectors which are constructed from a pair of particles whose difference in relative area exceeds Maximum Particle Pair Area Difference, XY are discarded. Of the remaining vectors, for each particle, the one vector whose magnitude is closest to the Expected Vector Magnitude, HV is retained.
The Partial parameters allow tracking particles which may disappear before the end of the sequence, or appear after the start of the sequence, or both. If Allow Partial Tracks is selected, a particle which is not present during the entire sequence is accepted if the number of images in which the particle occurs is between Partial Track: Minimum Length and Partial Track: Maximum Length, inclusive. If Partial Track: Shift Report to Time 0 is selected, all particles are tabulated as if they started in the first image. If Allow Partial Tracks is not selected, a particle which is not present during the entire sequence is discarded.
If Analyze and Add is selected, analysis adds all particle tracks found to the current tabulation. If Clear and Analyze the particle tracks found during each analysis replaces the current tabulation. If Verbose Analysis is selected, the results of the preliminary blob analysis are reported to the Utilities - Message Log, as an aid to ''tuning'' the various parameters.
Like many image processing features which operate on a sequence of image buffers, particle tracking may be applied to a sequence of full images, or a sequence of areas of interest. The default areas of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffers (for image sequences) are shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, and/or image buffers can be selected with the Set AOI button. Note that the Use Color Space selected under Setup - Segmentation governs the color space used for segmenting the blobs from the background. The color space selected via Set AOI is not currently used during the particle tracking.
After selecting the various options, the Apply button implements the particle tracking. If Live is selected, the image sequence is automatically re-analyzed and the particles tracked whenever the image, segmentation parameters, or analysis parameters are modified.
The Particle Tracks Found shows the number of particle tracks found that meet the various constraints.
A detailed list of vector coordinates for one track, as selected by Particle Track Shown is shown under H Coord(inate) and V Coord(inate) with one pair of coordinates for each image in the sequence. For particles which are not present in a given image, a coordinate of NaN (Not-A-Number) is shown. Also shown are the differences in H and V coordinates between time i and time i+1 as Delta H (Coordinate) and Delta V (Coordinate), etc. with one pair of values for each image in the sequence except the last. Also shown are the vector magnitudes and angles as Vector Magn(itude) and Vector Angle, etc. with one pair of values for each image in the sequence except the last. Also shown are the mean and standard deviation of the vector magnitudes and angles as Track Magn(itude) Mean, Track Magn(itude) Std. Dev., Track Angle Mean, and Track Angle Std. Dev..
If Show Track is selected, the track of the particle selected by Particle Track Shown is graphically overlaid on the image. If Show Tracks is selected, all particle tracks are graphically overlaid on the image. The Track Color and Tracks Color allows specifying the color of the selected particle track, and of the remaining tracks, respectively, as described in Pick Graphics Color.
The Show - Results, List shows particle coordinates, the difference in particle coordinates, and the vector magnitude and angle of particle tracks for each track found in a tabular format. For particles which are not present in a given image, a coordinate of NaN (Not-A-Number) is shown.
The Customize - Report allows customizing the information shown by Show - Results, List, and saved or copied by File - Save Track Coordinates, File - Copy Track Coordinates to Black Board, and File - Copy Track Coordinates to Clipboard. If Report H Coordinates is selected, the H coordinate of the particle's position is shown. If Report V Coordinates is selected, the V coordinate of the particle's position is shown. If Report Delta H Coordinates is selected, the difference in H coordinates of the particle's position between time i and time i+1 is shown. If Report Delta V Coordinates is selected, the difference in V coordinates of the particle's position between time i and time i+1 is shown. If Report Vector Magnitude is selected, the magnitude of the vector between the particle's position at time i and time i+1 is shown. If Report Vector Angle is selected, the angle of the vector between the particle's position at time i and time i+1 is shown.
The File - Save Track Coordinates saves coordinates and vectors for each track found.
A tabular ASCII text file is created with one header line, and one line for each track found. The header line has one group of coordinates and vectors for each image in the sequence:
Following the header line, one line for each track found provides that track's coordinates and vectors."Time 0, H" "Time 0, V" "Time 0, Delta H" "Time 0, Delta V" "Time 0, Magn." "Time 0, Angle" "Time 1, H" "Time 1, V" "Time 1, Delta H" "Time 1, Delta V" "Time 1, Magn." "Time 1, Angle" ...
If Save w. Titles is not selected, the header line with titles is not saved. If Track per Column is selected instead of Track per Row, each track is saved as a column instead of a row, and the optional Save w. Titles is saved as a left-most column instead of a top-most row.
The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Copy Track Coordinates to Black Board copies coordinates and vectors for each track found to the Black Board.
A header row containing the coordinates and vectors titles, followed by one row for each track found with that track's coordinates and vectors, are copied to the black board using the Black Board Cell as the initial upper left corner.
If Save w. Titles is not selected, the header line with titles is not saved. If Track per Column is selected instead of Track per Row, each track is saved as a column instead of a row, and the optional Save w. Titles is saved as a left-most column instead of a top-most row.
The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Copy Track Coordinates to Clipboard copies coordinates and vectors for each track found to the Windows or Linux clipboard.
A header row containing the coordinates and vectors titles, followed by one row for each track found with that track's coordinates and vectors, are copied to the clipboard. The format of each line is ASCII text decimal numbers, or double quoted ASCII text separated by tabs.
If Save w. Titles is not selected, the header line with titles is not saved. If Track per Column is selected instead of Track per Row, each track is saved as a column instead of a row, and the optional Save w. Titles is saved as a left-most column instead of a top-most row.
The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
An example sequence of ants in motion, files ''ANTA08.TIF'' through ''ANTA18.TIF'', are included on the XCAP software CD. A few simple steps will provide tracks, or vectors, for the movement of the (approximately) half dozen ants within the camera's field of view.
as all of the ants are about the same size and there is no need to eliminate other objects, such as would be the case if several aphids (smaller than ants) or roaches (larger than ants) were also in the camera's field of view.Max Blob Height, Y 9999 Min Blob Height, Y 3 Max Blob Width, X 9999 Min Blob Width, X 3 Assume Convex & Solid Blobs no Include Holes Within Blob no Ignore Blobs on Image Edge no
The Image Measurement - SubPixel Edger window allows measurement of the position and strength (contrast) of edges and lines - to subpixel precision within suitable high quality images - by analyzing pixel values under the SubPixel Edger tool.
If Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the edge coordinates are reported in the calibrated spatial coordinates (H,V), instead of pixel coordinates (X,Y). The HV Units shows the name of the H,V units in use.
The SubPixel Edger tool may be any of, and is controlled as described in, Graphic Window, Graphic Rectangle, Graphic Line, Graphic Circle, Graphic Ellipse, Graphic Parallel Lines, Graphic Path Enclosed, Graphic Path Curve, Graphic Diamond, Graphic Polygon, Graphic Polyline, Graphic Circle Arc, Graphic Ellipse Arc, Graphic Ellipse Arc, Graphic Bezier Curve, or Graphic Bezier Region. For closed regions, such as a circle, the SubPixel Edger analyzes the boundary of the region. These controls allowing setting a tool by using explicit coordinates and dimensions, or by interactive drawing over the image.
The Other Shape button allows creating a tool of a new type, and provides access to graphical objects previously created with the Graphic Manager. If Other, New is chosen, the New Shape allows selecting a new graphic type eligible to be a SubPixel Edger tool. If Other, from List is chosen, the Listed Shape shows the names of all eligible graphical objects created by the Graphic Manager, and also shows ''Current'' which represents the current tool. The Other OK button selects the New Shape or Listed Shape, the Other Cancel button selects the current tool.
The Find Edges (One Boundary) selects finding the position and strength (contrast) of edges; an ''edge'' is the single boundary between two contrasting image regions. The Find Lines (Two Boundary) selects finding the position and strength (contrast) of lines; a ''line'' is the pair of boundaries of a narrow contrasting image region. The position of the center of the line is reported. (Selecting edges versus lines to be found is independent of the whether the tool's shape is a line, parallel lines, or other shape).
The Maximum Edges/Lines Reported selects the number of edges or lines to be found and reported.
If the parallel lines tool is used, the Multiple Shapes selects one of three modes. If Average Pixels of Shapes is selected, the corresponding pixels of the tool's line segments are averaged together, and the result analyzed in the same manner as a single line tool's segment. If One Edge/Line per Shape is selected, each line tool's segment, up to the limit specified by Maximum Edges/Lines Reported, is analyzed individually for a single edge.
If Median of Shape's Edges is selected, each line tool's segment is analyzed for one or two edges, or one line, and the median value reported. For finding edges, the Maximum Edges/Lines Reported may be one or two; if two, then a pair of Rising & Falling edges are to be found. For finding lines, the Maximum Edges/Lines Reported must be one.
The Analysis Neighborhood along Shape specifies the size of the analysis window, along the length or boundary of the subpixel edger tool, used at each pixel position along the edger. A longer length or boundary of the subpixel edger tool allows searching a wider image area for edges and lines, a shorter length or boundary of the subpixel edger tool allows localizing analysis to a specific image area. A smaller Analysis Neighborhood along Shape allows finding one of several closely spaced edges or lines; a larger Analysis Neighborhood along Shape helps reduce the effect of image noise.
For edges, the Find Edges of Type selects the type of edges to be found as Rising & Falling, Rising, or Falling in pixel value (relative to the origin of the selected tool). For lines, the Find Lines of Type selects the type of lines to be found as Light & Dark, Light over Dark, or Dark over Light.
For finding lines, the Match Boundary Strength selects the allowable variance of edge strength, as a percentage, of the two boundaries of the line.
For finding lines, the Min(imum) Line Width and Max(imum) Line Width restricts lines found to have the specified minimum and maximum line width (i.e. perpendicular to the direction of the selected edger tool).
The Sort Edges/Lines of Equal Strength selects From Start to End, From End to Start, Middle to Ends, or Ends to Middle prioritization, for edges or lines with the same strength. This selects the single edge or line reported, or the ordering of multiple edges or lines reported. If Edge/Line Strength Threshold is selected, any edges or lines with absolute strength less than Edge/Line Strength Threshold are ignored and remaining edges or lines are sorted as of equal strength.
The Use Color Space selects which component of which color space is to be analyzed.
The Apply button (re)performs the ellipse-fitting search; and the Cancel button closes the window.
If Live is selected, the ellipse-fitting is automatically recomputed whenever the image is modified, or the elliptical annulus is modified.
For simplicity, the reported results uses ''edge'' to refer to the results of finding edges or finding lines.
The SubPixel Edger analyzes the pixel values under the edger, and finds and reports the strongest edges. For each edge, in order of decreasing strength, the Edge ?, H Coord. (inate) and Edge ?, V Coord. (inate) show the edge's H,V coordinates; the Edge ?, Angle shows the angle of the edge's position relative to the H Coord and V Coord (primarily useful in conjunction with circle and ellipse tools); and Edge ?, Strength shows the edge's relative strength. The absolute value of Edge ?, Strength is the relative strength of the edge, ranging between 0 and 100. For edge finding, the sign of Edge ?, Strength is positive if the corresponding pixels as read along the length of the edger tool are rising in value, or negative if the corresponding pixels as read along the length of the edger tool are falling in value. For line finding, the sign of Edge ?, Strength is positive for light lines over a dark background, or negative for dark lines over a light background.
The Edge 1=>2, Distance and Edge 1=>2, Angle shows the distance between edge 1 and 2, and the angle of that line segment relative to the origin. Similarly, the Edge 1=>3, Distance and Edge 1=>3, Angle shows the distance between edge 1 and 3, and the angle of that line segment relative to the origin.
The Edge 1+2=>3+4, Distance and Edge 1+2=>3+4, Angle shows the distance from the midpoint of edges 1&2 to the midpoint of edges 3&4, and the angle of that line segment relative to the origin. This result is intended for measuring the relative distance between two lines in the image (such as between two wires) in contrast to measuring the distance between two edges in the image.
The Best Fit Line: A, Best Fit Line: B, and Best Fit Line: C shows the coefficients in general form,
of the line which best fits the position of the edges. The Best Fit Line: M and Best Fit Line: B shows the coefficients in slope intercept form,Ax + By + C = 0
of the line which best fits the edges; the equation is not valid for vertical lines. The Best Fit Line: Theta and Best Fit Line: Rho shows the coefficients in polar form,y = Mx + B
of the normal to the line which best fits the edges. The Best Fit Line: N shows the number of edges used in the computation of the best fit line. These best fit line results are typically used along with a Graphic Parallel Lines tool shape and with One Edge per Shape.x cos theta + y sin theta = rho
The SubPixel Edger determines the subpixel edge position on synthetic images to a precision of better than 0.1 pixel. The obtainable precision on actual images may be less than 0.1 pixel, particularly images containing random noise. The SubPixel Edger is most accurate for single line tools positioned at a multiple of 45 degrees (in X,Y coordinates), or averaged parallel lines positioned at a multiple of 90 degrees (in X,Y coordinates); the High Precision indicator is set as a reminder when those conditions are met and aliasing artifacts are avoided.
If Show Ticks is specified, the location of the edge ''ticks'', are shown overlaid on the image. The Tick Color allows selecting the edges' color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Tick Length selects the size of the tick overlaid for edge 1; the ticks overlaid for other edges are progressively larger by Tick Increment. The Tick Thickness selects the thickness of the tick overlaid for each edge.
If Show Fit Line is specified, the location of the best fit line is shown overlaid on the image. The Fit Line Color allows selecting the overlaid line's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Fit Line Thickness selects the thickness of the overlaid line.
The Edges Found reports the total number of edges found. The Image Buffer Stamp reports the image buffer number (of a sequence) upon which the measurements were performed. The Date&Time Stamp reports the date and time at which the measurements were performed.
The Image Measurement - Distance & Angle Crosshairs window provides spatial calibration and measurement of absolute position, relative position, length and angles. While these capabilities are also available elsewhere (using several features in Image Viewer - Measure and Image Viewer - Draw), the Distance & Angle Crosshairs collects chosen features to provide a single dialog with the equivalent of a so-called ''Video Crosshair Overlay & Measurement'' system.
The Format, Size & Color button allows accessing optional controls for adjusting the text size and style, color, and numeric format and precision of the information overlaid on the associated image window. The Operate button (only visible after Format, Size & Color is clicked) restores the most commonly used features and controls of Distance & Angle Crosshairs.
The Move Origin button allows interactive moving of the Origin cross-hair by clicking or dragging over the associated image window. The Move None button disables interactive moving of the Origin. If the Show Origin button is activated, the Origin is marked even when interactive moving is disabled. If the Show Origin Coordinates button is activated, the Origin's absolute coordinates are displayed next to the Origin.
The Move Point 1 button allows interactive moving of the Point 1 cross-hair by clicking or dragging over the associated image window. The Move None button disables interactive moving of the Point 1 cross-hair. If the Show Point 1 button is activated, Point 1 is marked even when interactive moving is disabled. If the Show Point 1 Coordinates Relative to Origin button is activated, Point 1's coordinates, relative to the Origin, are displayed next to Point 1.
If the Show Line 1 button is activated, the line connecting Point 1 and the Origin is shown. If the Show Line 1 Distance and Angle from Origin button is activated, the length and angle (relative to horizontal) of the line connecting Point 1 and the Origin is shown along the line.
The Move Point 2 button, and the Show Point 2, Show Point 2 Coordinates Relative to Origin, Show Line 2, and Show Line 2 Distance and Angle from Origin buttons provide analogous features for a second Point.
The Move All button allows interactive moving of the Origin, Point 1, and Point 2 by clicking or dragging over the associated image window; shifting all of the measurement points to a new position. In contrast, the Move Origin button allows interactive moving of the Origin, leaving the position of Point 1 and Point 2 unchanged. The Move None button disables interactive moving of the Origin, Point 1, and/or Point 2.
If the Show Angle between Line 1 & Line 2 button is activated, the angle enclosed between Line 1 and Line 2 (i.e. the lines drawn between Point 1 and the Origin, and Point 2 and the Origin) are shown between the lines. If the Show Units button is activated, the name of the H,V units in use is shown at the bottom of the image.
The Calibrate from Line 1 allows creating a mapping (correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system.
If Set HV Calibration is selected, the HV Length of Line 1 allows specifying the length of Line 1 in arbitrary, user-defined, H,V units. As a reminder, the name of the H,V units in use can be entered as Units are Named. The OK button activates the specified correspondence.
By drawing Line 1 over an area of the image known to be two inches long (for example), entering 2.0 for HV Length of Line 1, and clicking OK, coordinates will thereafter be read off in inches, instead of pixels.
If Disable HV Calibration is selected, the OK button deactivates any user-defined correspondence; all coordinates are shown in units of pixels.
The easy-to-use calibration performed by Distance & Angle Crosshairs - Calibrate is based upon a single measured length over the two-dimensional image, and depends upon Aspect Ratio (see Image View - Display) being set accurately. This should not be a source of concern for digital output cameras with an inherent (i.e. due to physical sensor geometry) aspect ratio of 1:1; but is a concern for analog output cameras whose aspect ratio is approximated. When in doubt, the calibration performed by Distance & Angle Crosshairs - Calibrate should be checked (at three or more points not on a line) before use, or the more advanced features of Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration can be used for calibration using two measured lengths, thereby avoiding assumptions regarding the camera's or image's aspect ratio.
Lesser used formatting options are accessed by clicking the Format, Size & Color button, and are then shown divided into ''Labels'', ''Origin'', ''Point 1'' and ''Point 2'' sections. These allow adjusting the text size and style, color, and numeric format and precision of the information overlaid on the associated image window.
The ''Labels'' provides controls for text overlays, as described in Graphic Text. The ''Origin'' provides controls for the origin marker, as described in Graphic Point.
The ''Point 1'' and ''Point 2'' each provides controls for Point 1 and its associated line to the origin, and Point 2 and its associated line to the origin, as described in Graphic Point and Graphic Line.
The Image Measurement - Correlation Finder window allows correlating, or matching, a mask image over a larger image, showing the coordinates of, and displaying a box around, the best match(es).
If Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the match coordinates are reported in the calibrated spatial coordinates (H,V), instead of pixel coordinates (X,Y). The HV Units shows the name of the H,V units in use.
Like most image processing features, these operations may be applied to the full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button. Two image AOIs must be selected, the mask image which is not modified, and a subject image. The mask image must be smaller than the second, subject, image.
If Unnormalized is selected, the correlation is based on the absolute differences of values between the mask and the subject image; A perfect match is achieved only if the mask and the area of the subject image under the mask are identical.
If Normalized: Add, Mult is selected, a normalized correlation is performed; the degree of match between the mask and the area of the subject image under the mask is insensitive to differences arising from additive offsets and multiplicative scaling of pixel values.
The time required for correlation can be significantly reduced, at the expense of accuracy, by subsampling. To speed the search, but maintain accuracy, the correlation can be done in two passes. In the first pass, the Coarse Subsampling specifies that only every Coarse Subsampling'th pixel of the mask, and corresponding pixel of the subject image, is to be used. In the second pass, performed only in the immediate neighborhood of the best match found with Coarse Subsampling, the correlation is performed with Fine Subsampling.
The Apply button (re)performs the correlation search; and the Cancel button closes the window.
If Live is selected, the correlation is automatically recomputed whenever the image is modified.
The Correlation Finder correlates the mask image over the subject image, and reports the strongest matches. The Matches Reported selects the number of matches to be found and reported.
For each match, in order of decreasing correlation coefficient, the Match ?, H Coord. and Match ?, V Coord. show the H,V coordinates of the match's center. The Match ?, Coefficient shows the correlation coefficient, or quality of match, with 1.0 being a perfect match.
Any matches whose correlation coefficient is less than Coefficient Minimum is ignored.
If Show Box is selected, a box is displayed around each correlation match found. The Box Color allows selecting the box color, as described in Pick Graphics Color.
The Image Measurement - Ellipse Fitter overlays an elliptical pattern of subpixel edger tools on the image, and computes a best-fit elliptical curve from the edges or lines found by the subpixel edger tools.
If Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the ellipse coordinates are reported in the calibrated spatial coordinates (H,V), instead of pixel coordinates (X,Y). The HV Units shows the name of the H,V units in use.
The approximate position where the image's ellipse is to be found is specified by drawing a Graphic Circle, Graphic Ellipse, Graphic Annulus, Graphic Ellipse Annulus, or Graphic Elliptical Annulus Arc region. Edger tools are then automatically arranged between the annulus's inner and outer curves or the non-annulus's curve and its center. The drawn region does not have to be a ''good'' fit to the expected image ellipse, but the edger tools (which may be optionally overlaid on the image for visual verification) should intersect only the image's ellipse's border.
Preferably, the edger tools should intersect the image's ellipse at evenly spaced radial positions around the entire ellipse. This provides the highest accuracy of ellipse fitting. However, the drawn annulus is allowed to be an annulus arc (i.e. a portion of a two-dimensional donut) so that partial image ellipses (e.g. a semicircle) or image ellipses connected to other objects (e.g. an image of a sphere mounted at the end of a rod) can be analyzed. In such cases, the annulus arc can be arranged to include only the elliptical object in the image.
The Other Shape button allows creating a region of a new type, and provides access to graphical objects previously created with the Graphic Manager. If Other, New is chosen, the New Shape allows selecting a new graphic type eligible to be a region. Other, from List is chosen, the Listed Shape shows the names of all eligible graphical objects created by the Graphic Manager, and also shows ''Current'' which represents the current region. The Other OK button selects the New Shape or Listed Shape, the Other Cancel button selects the current region.
The Find Edges (One Boundary) selects finding the position and strength (contrast) of edges; an ''edge'' is the single boundary between two contrasting image regions. The Find Lines (Two Boundary) selects finding the position and strength (contrast) of lines; a ''line'' is the pair of boundaries of a narrow contrasting image region. The position of the center of the line is reported.
The Number of Edgers specifies the number of subpixel edger tools which are arranged between the annulus's inner and outer curves. The Edge Analysis Region specifies the size of the analysis window, within the length or boundary of the subpixel edger tool, used at each pixel position along the edger. A smaller Edge Analysis Region provides greater sensitivity to narrow edges and thin lines, a larger Edge Analysis Region helps reduce the effect of image noise. The Edge Strength Threshold specifies that any edges or lines found whose strength is less than Edge Strength Threshold, in percent of maximum, are to be ignored.
For finding lines, the Match Edge Contrast selects the allowable variance of edge strength, as a percentage, of the two boundaries of the line.
For finding lines, the Min(imum) Line Width and Max(imum) Line Width restricts lines found to have the specified minimum and maximum line width (i.e. perpendicular to the direction of the edger tool).
If Hi Precision is specified, the position of the subpixel edger tools, arranged at evenly spaced radial positions around the entire ellipse, are adjusted so that each tool's angle is at the closest multiple of 45 degrees. This provides greater accuracy in measurement of the edge or line to subpixel accuracy.
The Use Color Space selects which component of which color space is to be analyzed.
The Apply button (re)performs the ellipse fitting search; and the Cancel button closes the window.
If Live is selected, the ellipse fitting is automatically recomputed whenever the image is modified, or the elliptical annulus is modified.
If Show Edgers is specified, the position of each edger tool is overlaid on the image. If Show Ticks is specified, the position of each edge or line found is overlaid on the image with length and thickness specified by Tick Length and Tick Thickness. The Edger Color and Tick Color allows specifying the edgers' and ticks' colors, as described in Pick Graphics Color.
Based on the edges or lines found, the best-fit ellipse is computed. The Ellipse Center, H, Ellipse Center, V, Ellipse Width, Ellipse Height, and Ellipse Angle numerically show the computed center, width, height, and angle; or show values of 0 if no ellipse could be computed for the specified points.
If Show Ellipse is specified, the best-fit ellipse is shown overlaid on the image with thickness specified by Ellipse Thickness. The Ellipse Color allows specifying the ellipse's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color.
The Image Measurement - Ruler, Image Measurement - Protractor, Image Measurement - Cartesian Reticle, and Image Measurement - Polar Reticle window allows drawing a graphic measurement overlay over the image, non-destructively. If Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration has been activated, the measurement overlay's position, size, and indexing (tick marks) are all in calibrated units. Otherwise, the measurement overlay's position, size, and indexing are in pixel units.
The Graphic Ruler window allows drawing a ruler over or into an image. The ruler may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The ruler is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the ruler's origin; changing either shifts the ruler's start and end coordinates - a translation. The Start, X and Start, Y specifies the ruler's start coordinate; changing either does not affect the ruler's end coordinates. The End, X and End, Y specifies the ruler's end coordinate; changing either does not affect the ruler's start coordinates.
The Angle and Length specifies the ruler's angle and length, starting from the Start, X and Start, Y coordinates. If Rotate @ Start is selected, the Start coordinates are fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the End coordinates. If Rotate @ End is selected, the End coordinates are fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the Start coordinates. If Rotate @ Middle is selected, the ruler's midpoint coordinates are fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the Start and End coordinates.
The Ruler Width specifies the ruler's width.
The Tick Interval specifies the spacing of major ticks. The SubTicks allows adding minor ticks at intervals of 1/2, 1/4, 1/5, 1/8, 1/10, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, or 1/100 of the major ticks, or None for no subticks. For example, if the Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration is used, with H,V calibrated to inches, then Tick Interval might be 1 (inch) and a SubTicks of 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, or 1/32 (depending upon desired density) would give the appearance of an English ruler.
If Interact is enabled, the ruler may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines the Start coordinates, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the End coordinates. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate is enabled, dragging the mouse rotates the ruler relative to, and fixed at, the Rotate @ Start, Rotate @ Middle, or Rotate @ End, as selected.
The Color, Border Color, and Tick Color, allows specifying the colors of the ruler's base line, the ruler's other three borders, and the ruler's ticks, respectively, each as described in Pick Graphics Color. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color which can be quickly drawn and erased is used instead. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the ruler is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the ruler permanently into the image, using the Color, Border Color, and Tick Color, each translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the ruler permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid ruler may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Start, H, Start, V, etc.
The Graphic Protractor window allows drawing a protractor over or into an image. The protractor may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The protractor is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the protractor's origin, and the Circle Radius specifies the protractor's outer radius. The Aspect Ratio specifies the protractor's aspect ratio, by which its outer radius's drawn height is the specified Circle Radius divided by the Aspect Ratio. The Arc Start specifies the angular position at which the protractor's arc starts, the Arc Subtends specifies the angle subtended by the protractor's arc, and the Arc Bisect specifies the angular position of the midpoint of the protractor's arc.
The Inner Radius specifies the protractor's inner radius, which is drawn with the same Aspect Ratio as the Circle Radius. The Tick Interval specifies the spacing of major ticks, in angular units. The SubTicks allows adding minor ticks at angular intervals of 1/2, 1/4, 1/5, 1/10, 1/15, 1/30, 1/60, or 1/100 of the major ticks, or None for no subticks. If Style is 0 Start, ticks are drawn with reference to the Arc Start; If Style is 0 Center, ticks are drawn with reference to the Arc Bisect.
If Interact is enabled, the protractor may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing box, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing box. If Click & Draw C&O is selected, clicking the mouse button suggests one end point of the protractor arc's chord, clicking a second time defines the second end point of the protractor arc's chord, clicking a third time defines a circle's origin and terminates the draw mode.[31] If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate Arc is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Start angle. If Click & Open/Close is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Subtends angle.
The Color and Tick Color allows specifying the protractor's color, and the ticks' color, each as described in Pick Graphics Color. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color which can be quickly drawn and erased is used instead. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the protractor is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the protractor permanently into the image, using the Color and Tick Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the protractor permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid protractor may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Cartesian Reticle window allows drawing a Cartesian reticle over or into an image. The reticle may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The reticle is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the reticle's center. The Width, X specifies the length of the reticle's axis which is horizontal when Angle=0, the Height, Y specifies the length of the reticle's axis which is vertical when Angle=0. The Angle specifies the reticle's angle of rotation.
The Grid Interval, X and Grid Interval, Y specify the interval of the interior grid lines. Within each grid, SubTicks specifies the density of subticks, at 1/4, 1/4, 1/8, 1/10, 1/16, 1/32, 1/64, or 1/100 of the interior grid, or None for no subticks, with a drawn tick length of Tick Size.
If Interact is enabled, the reticle may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of the reticle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the reticle. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate is enabled, dragging the mouse rotates the reticle. If Rotate @ Middle is selected, the reticle is rotated around its center. If Rotate @ Corner is selected, the reticle is rotated around its corner which is farthest from the mouse.
The Color and Tick Color allows specifying the colors of the reticle, and the reticle's ticks, respectively, each as described in Pick Graphics Color. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color which can be quickly drawn and erased is used instead. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the ruler is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the reticle permanently into the image, using the Color and Tick Color, each translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the reticle permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid ruler may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Width, H, Height, V, etc.
The Graphic Polar Reticle window allows drawing a polar reticle over or into an image. The reticle may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The reticle is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the reticle's center. The Width, X specifies the length of the reticle's axis which is horizontal when Angle=0, the Height, Y specifies the length of the reticle's axis which is vertical when Angle=0. The Angle specifies the reticle's angle of rotation.
The Radius Intervals specifies the interval of the interior elliptical curves which are drawn at the same Angle, and with proportional Width and Height, as the reticle's outer ellipse. The Radials specifies the angular spacing of radials drawn from the Origin to the reticle's outer ellipse, as 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, or 90 degrees, or None for no radials.
If Interact is enabled, the reticle may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing rectangle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing rectangle. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinate. If Click & Rotate is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Angle, relative to the reticle's Origin.
The Color allows specifying the reticle's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color which can be quickly drawn and erased is used instead. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the reticle is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the reticle permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the reticle permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid reticle may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Width, H, Height, V, etc.
The windows accessible under Image Viewer Window - Draw provides features for drawing graphics and text over the image.
The Graphic Object windows allows drawing various graphics or text over or into an image. The graphics or text can be positioned numerically or interactively. The graphics or text are overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
Two or more Graphic Objects may be present at the same time. In interactive mode, each picks up and processes mouse clicks within the associated image window; This can be used intentionally, allowing several graphic objects to be moved as a group, or can be disabled by deselecting Interact in all but a single graphic object.
The Graphic Annulus window allows drawing an annulus (i.e. a two-dimensional donut), with correction for aspect ratio, over or into an image. The annulus may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The annulus is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the annulus may be a visual graphic, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the annulus's center. The Inner Diameter and Outer Diameter specifies the annulus's inner and outer diameters; for convenience the two are, in fact, interchangeable with the smaller taken as the inner diameter. The Aspect Ratio specifies the annulus's aspect ratio, by which its drawn height is the specified Diameter divided by the Aspect Ratio. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the annulus.
If Interact is enabled, the annulus may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing box, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing box. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
The Color allows specifying the annulus's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the annulus. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the annulus is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the annulus permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the annulus permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid annulus may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn annulus is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the annulus is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the annulus is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Annulus Arc window allows drawing an arc of an annulus (i.e. a portion of a two-dimensional donut), with correction for aspect ratio, possibly rotated, over or into an image. The annulus arc may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The annulus arc is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the annulus arc may be a visual graphic, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the annulus arc's center. The Inner Diameter and Outer Diameter specifies the annulus's inner and outer diameters; for convenience the two are, in fact, interchangeable with the smaller taken as the inner diameter. The Aspect Ratio specifies the annulus's aspect ratio, by which its drawn height is the specified Diameter divided by the Aspect Ratio. The Arc Start specifies the angular position at which the annulus arc starts, the Arc Subtends specifies the angle subtended by the annulus arc, and the Arc Bisect specifies the angular position of the midpoint of the annulus arc.
If Interact is enabled, the annulus arc may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing box, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing box. If Click & Draw C&O is selected, clicking the mouse button suggests one end point of the arc's chord, clicking a second time defines the second end point of the arc's chord, clicking a third time defines a circle's origin and terminates the draw mode.[32] If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate Arc is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Start angle. If Click & Open/Close is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Subtends angle.
The Color allows specifying the annulus arc's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the annulus arc. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the annulus arc is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the annulus arc permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the annulus arc permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid annulus arc may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn annulus arc is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the annulus arc is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Arrow window allows drawing an arrow over or into an image. The arrow may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The arrow is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the arrow may be a visual graphic, or define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis (the pixels analyzed are those under the ''shaft'' of the arrow, the arrow's head and tail are mere decoration).
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the arrow's origin; changing either shifts the arrow's start and end coordinates - a translation. The Start, X and Start, Y specifies the arrow's tail coordinate; changing either does not affect the arrow's end coordinates. The End, X and End, Y specifies the arrow's head coordinate; changing either does not affect the arrow's start coordinates.
The Angle and Length specifies the arrow's angle and length, starting from the Start, X and Start, Y coordinates. If Rotate @ Start is selected, the Start coordinates are fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the End coordinates. If Rotate @ End is selected, the End coordinates are fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the Start coordinates. If Rotate @ Middle is selected, the midpoint of the arrow's Start and End coordinates is fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the Start and End coordinates.
The Head Size and Tail Size specifies the length of the arrow's head and tail fluke's. The Head Angle and Tail Angle specifies the angle of the arrow's fluke's with respect to the shaft. Appropriate selection of these values allows drawing arrows without a visible tail, or double headed arrows.[33]
If Interact is enabled, the arrow may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines the tail and Start coordinates, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the head and End coordinates. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Angle, relative to, and fixed at, the Rotate @ Start, Rotate @ Middle, or Rotate @ End, as selected.
The Color allows specifying the arrow's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the arrow. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the arrow is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the arrow permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the arrow permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid line may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Start, H, Start, V, etc.
The Graphic Bezier Curve window allows drawing a Bezier Curve over or into an image. The curve may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The curve is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the curve may be a visual graphic, or define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis.
This discussion assumes familiarity with the concepts and terminology of Bezier Curves. See any text on computer graphics, such as Computer Graphics - Principles and Practice by Foley, et. al.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the curve's origin; changing either shifts all of the curve's control point coordinates - a translation. The Control Pts specifies the number of ''control points'' which define the curve, and may range from 2 through 6. The Cntl Pt 0, X, Cntl Pt 0, Y through Cntl Pt 5, X, Cntl Pt 5, Y specify the coordinates of each of the control points. The Bezier Curve starts at control point 0 and ends at the last control point, but is only loosely tied (via mathematical springs) to the intermediate control points.
If Interact is enabled, the curve may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button over a control point (as displayed in the image window) allows the mouse and control point to be dragged to a new location, as defined by releasing the mouse button. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
The Color allows specifying the curve's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the curve. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the curve is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the curve permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the curve permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid curve may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
The Graphic Bezier Region window allows drawing a closed Bezier Curve over or into an image. The curve may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The curve is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the curve may be a visual graphic, define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
This discussion assumes familiarity with the concepts and terminology of Bezier Curves. See any text on computer graphics, such as Computer Graphics - Principles and Practice by Foley, et. al.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the curve's origin; changing either shifts all of the curve's control point coordinates - a translation. The Control Pts specifies the number of ''control points'' which define the curve, and may range from 2 through 6. The Cntl Pt 0, X, Cntl Pt 0, Y through Cntl Pt 5, X, Cntl Pt 5, Y specify the coordinates of each of the control points. The Bezier Curve starts at control point 0 and ends at the last control point, but is only loosely tied (via mathematical springs) to the intermediate control points.
If Interact is enabled, the curve may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button over a control point (as displayed in the image window) allows the mouse and control point to be dragged to a new location, as defined by releasing the mouse button. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
The Color allows specifying the curve's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the curve. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the curve is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the curve permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the curve permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid curve may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Cntl Pt 0, H, Cntl Pt 0, V, etc.
The Graphic Circle window allows drawing a circle, with correction for aspect ratio, over or into an image. The circle may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The circle is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the circle may be a visual graphic, define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the circle's center. The Diameter specifies the circle's diameter. The Aspect Ratio specifies the circle's aspect ratio, by which its drawn height is the specified Diameter divided by the Aspect Ratio. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the circle.
If Interact is enabled, the circle may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing box, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing box. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
The Color allows specifying the circle's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the circle. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the circle is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the circle permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the circle permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid circle may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn circle is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the circle is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the circle is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Circle Arc window allows drawing an arc of a circle, with correction for aspect ratio, over or into an image. The arc may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The arc is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the arc may be a visual graphic, or define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the circle's center, and the Circle Radius specifies the circle's radius. The Aspect Ratio specifies the circle's aspect ratio, by which its drawn height is the specified Circle Radius divided by the Aspect Ratio. The Arc Start specifies the angular position at which the arc starts, Arc Subtends specifies the angle subtended by the arc, and the Arc Bisect specifies the angular position of the midpoint of the arc.
If Interact is enabled, the arc may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing box, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing box. If Click & Draw C&O is selected, clicking the mouse button suggests one end point of the arc's chord, clicking a second time defines the second end point of the arc's chord, clicking a third time defines a circle's origin and terminates the draw mode.[34] If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate Arc is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Start angle. If Click & Open/Close is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Subtends angle.
The Color allows specifying the arc's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the arc. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the arc is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the arc permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the arc permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid arc *may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Diamond window allows drawing a diamond - a square rotated by 45 degrees - over or into an image. The diamond may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The diamond is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the diamond may be a visual graphic, define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the diamond's center. The Diameter specifies the width and height the diamond. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the diamond.
If Interact is enabled, the diamond may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing rectangle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of a rectangle enclosing the diamond. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
The Color allows specifying the diamond's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the diamond. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the diamond is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the diamond permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the diamond permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid rectangle may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn diamond is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the diamond is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the diamond is filled with the specified Color.
The Graphic Diamond always uses pixel X,Y coordinates, not the user-defined H,V coordinate system (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration) currently in use, if any.
The Graphic Ellipse window allows drawing an ellipse, possibly rotated, over or into an image. The ellipse may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The ellipse is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the ellipse may be a visual graphic, define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the ellipse's center. The Width, X specifies the length of the ellipse's axis which is horizontal when Angle=0, the Height, Y specifies the length of the ellipse's axis which is vertical when Angle=0. The Angle specifies the ellipse's angle of rotation. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the ellipse.
If Interact is enabled, the ellipse may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing rectangle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing rectangle. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinate. If Click & Rotate is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Angle, relative to the ellipse's Origin. If Click & Slide is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates constrained so as to slide in the direction of the Angle. If Click & Shift is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates constrained so as to shift orthogonal to direction of the Angle.
The Color allows specifying the ellipse's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the ellipse. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the ellipse is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the ellipse permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the ellipse permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid ellipse may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn ellipse is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the ellipse is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the ellipse is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Width, H, Height, V, etc.
The Graphic Ellipse Arc window allows drawing an arc of a possibly rotated ellipse over or into an image. The arc may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The arc is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the arc may be a visual graphic, or define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the ellipse's center. The Ellipse Width, X specifies the length of the ellipse's axis which is horizontal when Angle=0, the Ellipse Height, Y specifies the length of the ellipse's axis which is vertical when Angle=0. The Ellipse Angle specifies the ellipse's angle of rotation. The Arc Start specifies the angular position at which the arc starts, the Arc Subtends specifies the angle subtended by the arc, and the Arc Bisect specifies the angular position of the midpoint of the arc. The Arc Start, Arc Subtends, and Arc Bisect are not relative to Ellipse Angle; i.e. a Arc Start=90 and Arc Subtends=180 (in degrees) specifies the ''left half'' of the ellipse, regardless of the angular shape specified by Ellipse Angle.
If Interact is enabled, the arc may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing rectangle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing rectangle. If Click & Draw C&O is selected, clicking the mouse button suggests one end point of the arc's chord, clicking a second time defines the second end point of the arc's chord, clicking a third time defines a circle's origin and terminates the draw mode.[35] If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate Axis is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Angle, relative to the ellipse's Origin. If Click & Rotate Arc is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Start angle. If Click & Open/Close is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Subtends angle.
The Color allows specifying the arc's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the arc. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the arc is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the arc permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the arc permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid arc may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Ellipse Width, H, Ellipse Height, V, etc.
The Graphic Elliptical Annulus window allows drawing an elliptical annulus (i.e. a two-dimensional donut), possible rotated, over or into an image. The annulus may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The annulus is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the annulus may be a visual graphic, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the annulus's center. The Inner Width, X and Outer Width, X specifies the length of the annulus's inner and outer ellipse axis which is horizontal when Angle=0, Inner Height, Y and Outer Height, Y specifies the length of the annulus's inner and outer ellipse axis which is vertical when Angle=0. The Angle specifies the ellipses' angle of rotation. For convenience the inner and outer dimensions are interchangeable, with the smaller taken as the inner ellipse. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the annulus.
If Interact is enabled, the annulus may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing box, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing box. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
The Color allows specifying the annulus's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the annulus. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the annulus is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the annulus permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the annulus permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid annulus may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn annulus is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the annulus is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the annulus is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Elliptical Annulus Arc window allows drawing an arc of an elliptical annulus (i.e. a portion of a two-dimensional donut), possibly rotated, over or into an image. The annulus arc may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The annulus arc is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the annulus arc may be a visual graphic, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the annulus arc's center. The Inner Width, X and Outer Width, X specifies the length of the annulus's inner and outer ellipse axis which is horizontal when Angle=0, Inner Height, Y and Outer Height, Y specifies the length of the annulus's inner and outer ellipse axis which is vertical when Angle=0. For convenience the inner and outer dimensions are interchangeable, with the smaller taken as the inner ellipse. The Angle specifies the ellipses' angle of rotation. The Arc Start specifies the angular position at which the annulus arc starts, the Arc Subtends specifies the angle subtended by the annulus arc, and the Arc Bisect specifies the angular position of the midpoint of the annulus arc. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the annulus arc.
If Interact is enabled, the annulus arc may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing box, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing box. If Click & Draw C&O is selected, clicking the mouse button suggests one end point of the arc's chord, clicking a second time defines the second end point of the arc's chord, clicking a third time defines a circle's origin and terminates the draw mode.[36] If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse button changes the Origin coordinate. If Click & Rotate Axis is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Angle, relative to the ellipse's Origin. If Click & Rotate Arc is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Start angle. If Click & Open/Close is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Arc Subtends angle.
The Color allows specifying the annulus arc's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the annulus arc. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the annulus arc is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the annulus arc permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the annulus arc permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid annulus arc may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn annulus arc is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the annulus arc is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the annulus arc is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Rectangular Frame window allows drawing a rectangular frame, possible rotated, over or into an image. The frame may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The frame is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the frame may be a visual graphic, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the frame's center. The Inner Width, X and Outer Width, X specifies the length of the frame's inner and outer rectangle axis which is horizontal when Angle=0, Inner Height, Y and Outer Height, Y specifies the length of the frame's inner and outer rectangle axis which is vertical when Angle=0. The Angle specifies the rectangles' angle of rotation. For convenience the inner and outer dimensions are interchangeable, with the smaller taken as the inner rectangle. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the frame.
If Interact is enabled, the frame may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of an enclosing box, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing box. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
The Color allows specifying the frame's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the frame. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the frame is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the frame permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the frame permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid frame may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn frame is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the frame is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the frame is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Line window allows drawing a line segment over or into an image. The line may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The line is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the line may be a visual graphic, or define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the line's origin; changing either shifts the line's start and end coordinates - a translation. The Start, X and Start, Y specifies the line's start coordinate; changing either does not affect the line's end coordinates. The End, X and End, Y specifies the line's end coordinate; changing either does not affect the line's start coordinates. The Mid, X and Mid, Y specifies the line's middle coordinate; changing either shifts the line's start and end coordinates - a translation. The Delta, X and Delta, Y specifies the line's difference between end and start coordinates.
The Angle and Length specifies the line's angle and length, starting from the Start, X and Start, Y coordinates. If Rotate @ Start is selected, the Start coordinates are fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the Mid and End coordinates. If Rotate @ End is selected, the End coordinates are fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the Mid and Start coordinates. If Rotate @ Middle is selected, the Mid coordinates are fixed, and modifying Angle or Length affects the Start and End coordinates.
If Interact is enabled, the line may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines the Start coordinates, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the End coordinates. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate is enabled, dragging the mouse rotates the line relative to, and fixed at, the Rotate @ Start, Rotate @ Middle, or Rotate @ End, as selected. If Click & Slide is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates constrained so as to slide in the direction of the Angle. If Click & Shift is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates constrained so as to shift orthogonal to direction of the Angle.
The Color allows specifying the line's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the line. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the line is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the line permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the line permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid line may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Start, H, Start, V, etc.
The Graphic Parallel Lines window allows drawing two or more evenly spaced parallel line segments over or into an image. The lines may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The lines are is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the line segments may be a visual graphic, or define several sets of pixels for analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the line's center. The Width, X specifies the distance between the two outermost line segments, which is vertical when Angle=0, the Length, Y specifies the length of the line segment's, which is horizontal when Angle=0. The Angle specifies the line segments' angle of rotation. The Lines specifies the number of line segments.
If Interact is enabled, the rectangle which encloses the line segments may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of the enclosing rectangle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the enclosing rectangle. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Angle, relative to the enclosing rectangle's Origin. If Click & Slide is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates constrained so as to slide in the direction of the Angle. If Click & Shift is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates constrained so as to shift orthogonal to direction of the Angle.
The Color allows specifying the lines' color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the each line segment. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color, with a thickness of one are used, and only a limited number of line segments are drawn, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the line segments are invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the line segments permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the line segments permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid line segments may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Width, H, Length, V, etc.
The Graphic Path Curve window allows drawing an path curve - a path of arbitrary shape which, generally, is not closed - over or into an image. The pathline may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The path is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the path may be a visual graphic, or define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the path's origin; changing either shifts all of the path's vertices - a translation. The Vertices specifies the number of vertices in the path, and is limited only by processing time and memory space. If Vertices is increased, the added vertices are set to coordinates (0,0). The Vertex # allows selecting one vertex, the Vertex X Vertex Y shows and controls the selected vertex's coordinates, the Vector Length Vector Angle shows the length and angle of the edge from the selected vertex. The coordinates of all vertices and length and angle of all edges also displayed in a table; clicking a vertex's entry in the table sets Vertex # to that point.
If Interact is enabled, the path may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, the first click of the mouse button defines the Origin and the first vertex coordinates, as the mouse is dragged with button held, each coordinate visited is added to the path, finally, three clicks of the mouse in the same position defines the last vertex coordinates, closes the path, and terminates the draw mode. While drawing, the Vertices may be decreased to erase part of a path's end. Or the end of the path can be erased by selecting Click & Erase and positioning the mouse over the path's end with button held. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates, translating the entire path.
The Color allows specifying the path's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the path. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the path is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the path permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the path permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid path may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Vertex H, Vertex V, etc.
The Graphic Path Enclosed window allows drawing a closed path or arbitrary shape over or into an image. The path may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The path is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the closed path may be a visual graphic, define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the path's origin; changing either shifts all of the path's points - a translation. The Vertices specifies the number of vertices in the path, and is limited only by processing time and memory space. If Vertices is increased, the added vertices are set to coordinates (0,0). The Vertex # allows selecting one vertex, the Vertex X Vertex Y shows and controls the selected vertex's coordinates, the Vector Length Vector Angle shows the length and angle of the edge from the selected vertex. The coordinates of all vertices and length and angle of all edges also displayed in a table; clicking a vertex's entry in the table sets Vertex # to that point. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the region enclosed by the path.
If Interact is enabled, the path may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, the first click of the mouse button defines the Origin and the first vertex coordinates, as the mouse is dragged with button held, each coordinate visited is added to the path, finally, three clicks of the mouse in the same position defines the last vertex coordinates, closes the path, and terminates the draw mode. The path should NOT be closed by clicking over the starting coordinate; a small edge is likely to result. While drawing, the Vertices may be decreased to erase part of a path's end. Or the end of the path can be erased by selecting Click & Erase and positioning the mouse over the path's end with button held. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates, translating the entire path.
The Color allows specifying the path's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the path. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the path is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the path permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the path permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid path may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn path is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the path is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the region enclosed by the path is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Vertex H, Vertex V, etc.
The Graphic Point window allows drawing a single point over or into an image. The point may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The point may be marked as a tick, or a full image cross-hair, and is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the location of the point.
If Interact is enabled, then the point may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window.
If Style Tick is selected, the point is shown as a tick of size Tick Size and thickness Thickness. If Style Crosshair is selected, the point is shown as a cross-hair extending over the full width and height of the image.
If Size to Image is selected, the Tick Size and Thickness are relative to pixels of the underlying image; the displayed size varies as the image is resized, and approximates the effect of permanently writing the tick or cross-hair into the image. If Size to Display is selected, the Tick Size and Thickness are all relative to pixels of the display; the displayed size remains constant as the image is resized, but does not approximate the effect of permanently writing the tick or cross-hair into the image.
The Color allows specifying the point's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the point is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Point 0, H, Point 0, V, etc.
The Graphic Points window allows drawing a list of points over or into an image. The points may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The points are overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies a relative origin for all points in the list; changing either shifts all points. The Points specifies the number of points in the list, and is limited only by processing time and memory space. If Points is increased, the added point(s) are set to coordinates (0,0). The Point # allows selecting one point, the Point X Point Y shows and controls the selected point's coordinates. The coordinates of all points are also displayed in a table; clicking a point's entry in the table sets Point # to that point.
The Delete All button removes all points from the list. The Delete One button removes the point specified by Points ? from the list, and consecutively renumbers remaining points.
The Tick Size and Thickness specify the size (width and height) of the tick which marks each point, and the tick's thickness.
If Size to Image is selected, the Tick Size and Thickness are relative to pixels of the underlying image; the displayed tick size varies as the image is resized, and approximates the effect of permanently writing the tick into the image. If Size to Display is selected, the Tick Size and Thickness are all relative to pixels of the display; the displayed tick size remains constant as the image is resized, but does not approximate the effect of permanently writing the tick into the image.
If Interact is enabled, then points may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Add is selected, a mouse click adds a new point at the current coordinates. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates, translating all of the points. If Click & Drag is selected, depressing the mouse button over a point (as displayed in the image window) allows the mouse and point to be dragged to a new location, as defined by releasing the mouse button.
The Color allows specifying the points' color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the points are invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. If Label ID is selected, each point's numeric index is shown next to the cross representing the point. If Label Coord. is selected, each point's coordinates are shown next to the cross representing the point. The Mark Image writes the points permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the points permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid points may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Point H, Point V, etc.
The Graphic Polygon window allows drawing an polygon over or into an image. The polygon may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The polygon is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the polygon may be a visual graphic, define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the polygon's origin; changing either shifts all of the polygon's vertices - a translation. The Vertices specifies the number of vertices in the polygon, and is limited only by processing time and memory space. If Vertices is increased, the added vertices are set to coordinates (0,0). The Vertex # allows selecting one vertex, the Vertex X Vertex Y shows and controls the selected vertex's coordinates, the Vector Length Vector Angle shows the length and angle of the edge from the selected vertex. The coordinates of all vertices and length and angle of all edges also displayed in a table; clicking a vertex's entry in the table sets Vertex # to that point. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the region enclosed by the polygon.
If Interact is enabled, the polygon may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, the first click of the mouse button defines the Origin and the first vertex coordinates, as the mouse is moved each additional click of the mouse button defines the next vertex coordinates, finally, two clicks of the mouse in the same position defines the last vertex coordinates, closes the polygon, and terminates the draw mode. The polygon should NOT be closed by clicking over the starting coordinate; a small edge is likely to result. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates, translating the entire polygon.
The Color allows specifying the polygon's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the polygon. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the polygon is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the polygon permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the polygon permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid polygon may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn polygon is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the polygon is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the region enclosed by the polygon is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Vertex H, Vertex V, etc.
The Graphic Polyline window allows drawing an polyline - a connected series of line segments which, generally, is not closed - over or into an image. The polyline may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The polyline is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the polyline may be a visual graphic, or define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the polyline's origin; changing either shifts all of the polyline's vertices - a translation. The Vertices specifies the number of vertices in the polyline, and is limited only by processing time and memory space. If Vertices is increased, the added vertices are set to coordinates (0,0). The Vertex # allows selecting one vertex, the Vertex X Vertex Y shows and controls the selected vertex's coordinates, the Vector Length Vector Angle shows the length and angle of the edge from the selected vertex. The coordinates of all vertices and length and angle of all edges also displayed in a table; clicking a vertex's entry in the table sets Vertex # to that point.
If Interact is enabled, the polyline may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, the first click of the mouse button defines the Origin and the first vertex coordinates, as the mouse is moved each additional click of the mouse button defines the next vertex coordinates, finally, two clicks of the mouse in the same position defines the last vertex coordinates and terminates the draw mode. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates, translating the entire polyline.
The Color allows specifying the polyline's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the polyline. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the polyline is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the polyline permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the polyline permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid polyline may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Vertex H, Vertex V, etc.
The Graphic Rectangle window allows drawing a rectangle, possibly rotated, over or into an image. The rectangle may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The rectangle is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the rectangle may be a visual graphic, define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the rectangle's center. The Width, X specifies the length of the rectangle's axis which is horizontal when Angle=0, the Height, Y specifies the length of the rectangle's axis which is vertical when Angle=0. The Angle specifies the rectangle's angle of rotation. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the rectangle.
If Interact is enabled, the rectangle may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of the rectangle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the rectangle. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate is enabled, dragging the mouse rotates the rectangle. If Rotate @ Middle is selected, the rectangle is rotated around its center. If Rotate @ Corner is selected, the rectangle is rotated around its corner which is farthest from the mouse. If Click & Slide is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates constrained so as to slide in the direction of the Angle. If Click & Shift is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates constrained so as to shift orthogonal to direction of the Angle.
The Color allows specifying the rectangle's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the rectangle. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the rectangle is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the rectangle permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the rectangle permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid rectangle may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn rectangle is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the rectangle is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the rectangle is filled with the specified Color.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Width, H, Height, V, etc.
The Graphic Rectangle Array window allows drawing an array of rectangles, possibly rotated, over or into an image. The rectangles may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The rectangles are overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the upper left rectangle's center. The Width, X and Height, Y specify the length of each rectangle's axis which is horizontal or vertical, respectively, when Angle=0 and Array Angle=0. The Array Count, X and Array Count, Y specify the number of rectangles in the array, horizontally and vertically, respectively, when Angle=0 and Array Angle=0. The Array Centers, X and Array Centers, Y specify the distance from center to center of rectangles in the array, horizontally and vertically, respectively, when Angle=0 and Array Angle=0. The Angle specifies each individual rectangle's angle of rotation, the Array Angle specifies the rectangle array's angle of rotation.
If Interact is enabled, the rectangles may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of the upper left rectangle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the upper left rectangle - changing Origin, Width, X, and Height, X. If Click & Draw Array is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of the array of rectangles, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the array of rectangles - changing Origin, Array Centers, X, and Array Centers, Y. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates. If Click & Rotate Array is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Array Angle, relative to the rectangles' Origin.
The Color allows specifying the rectangles' color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the rectangles. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the rectangles are invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the rectangles permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the rectangles permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid rectangles may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn rectangles are filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the rectangles are drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, Width, H, Height, V, etc.
The Graphic Text window allows drawing text over or into an image. The text can be adjusted in font, style, size, and angle and can be positioned numerically or interactively. The text is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image.
The characters to be overlaid or written is specified by the Text field.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the text's origin; the left edge and baseline[37]. The Angle specifies the angle of the baseline, extending from the Origin.
If Fast Font is selected, a minimal, functional, but efficient font is used. The Char Height specifies the (nominal) height of typical capital letters, the Char Width specifies the (nominal) width of typical capital letters, both in pixels. The Char Spacing specifies extra horizontal space, in pixels, to be added to the left of the first character, and to the right of all characters. The Line Spacing specifies extra vertical space, in pixels, to be added below and above the characters; its primary used is in conjunction with Use Background, below.
If Fancy Font is selected, a font can be selected from those supported by the host run time environment.[38] The Font Name selects the font family name, the Font Size selects the font size, and Font Style selects a plain, italic, or bold variation. The Char Spacing specifies extra horizontal space, in pixels, to be added to the left of the first character, and to the right of all characters.
If Size to Image is selected, the Char Height, Char Width, or Font Size are all relative to pixels of the underlying image; the displayed character size varies as the image is resized, and approximate the effect of permanently writing the text into the image. If Size to Display is selected, the Char Height, Char Width, or Font Size are all relative to pixels of the display; the displayed character size remains constant as the image is resized, but do not approximate the effect of permanently writing the text into the image.
If Interact is enabled, the text may be moved interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
The Color and Background allows specifying the text's and background's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. If Use Background is enabled, the text and a corresponding background are drawn; otherwise the text characters are drawn without background. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color which can be quickly drawn and erased is used instead of Color; the background is never drawn with Interact. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the text is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the text permanently into the image, using the Color and Background, if selected, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the text permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid line may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image. Note that due to vagaries of resizing text, the text written permanently into the image may not correspond exactly (pixel by pixel) to the text shown as overlaid on the image; this artifact can be avoided if the displayed image is shown without resizing.
If a mapping (i.e. correspondence) from pixel X,Y coordinates into a user-defined H,V coordinate system is in use (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration), then the origin and diameter may be in H,V units rather than pixel units. The HV Units is added, showing the name of the H,V units in use or may allow selecting between the H,V units versus X,Y pixels. As a reminder, labels are changed to Origin, H, Origin, V, etc.
The Graphic Window window allows drawing a rectangle, not rotated, over or into an image. The rectangle may be specified numerically, or drawn interactively. The rectangle is overlaid non-destructively until explicitly written into the image. Depending on the context of use, the rectangle may be a visual graphic, define a 1-d set of pixels for analysis, or define a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis.
Numerically, the Origin, X and Origin, Y specifies the rectangle's upper left corner. The Width, X specifies the rectangle's width, the Height, Y specifies the rectangle's height. The End, Excl. X and End, Excl. Y specifies the rectangle's lower right corner, as exclusive coordinates. The End, Incl. X and End, Incl. Y specifies the rectangle's lower right corner, as inclusive coordinates. If Negative is enabled, and the context of use is as a 2-d set of pixels for processing or analysis, the analysis region is the entire image except for the window.
If Interact is enabled, the rectangle may be drawn interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window. If Click & Draw is selected, depressing the mouse button defines one corner of the rectangle, the mouse is then dragged, and releasing the mouse button defines the opposite corner of the rectangle. If Click & Move is enabled, dragging the mouse changes the Origin coordinates.
If Click & Grid is enabled, a grid is overlaid on the associated image window; clicking a grid area selects that area as the rectangle. The Grid specifies the grid density, partitioning the image into 1×1 through 10×10 areas; grid choices which unevenly partition the image are flagged with a ''~'' (e.g. a 4×4 grid on a 100×100 image yields identically sized areas of 25×25, but a 3×4 grid on a 100×100 image yields some areas of size 33×25 and some of size 34×25).
The Color allows specifying the rectangle's color, as described in Pick Graphics Color. The Thickness allows specifying the thickness of the arrow's components. If Interact is enabled, a temporary color and a thickness of one are used, allowing quicker drawing and erasure. If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the rectangle is invisible; the Overlay Visible has no effect in Interact mode. The Mark Image writes the rectangle permanently into the image, using the Color, translated as needed to the image's color space; the Mark Sequence writes the rectangle permanently into each image of the default sequence specified by the Image Viewer Window - Aoi. Note that for monochrome images, the overlaid rectangle may appear in color, but will be forced to monochrome when written permanently into the image.
If Fill is enabled, the drawn rectangle is filled with the specified Color, otherwise only the boundary of the rectangle is drawn. The Fill has no effect while Interact is enabled ; interactive drawings show only the boundary. If Negative and Fill are enabled, the entire image except for the window is filled with the specified Color.
The Graphic Window always uses pixel X,Y coordinates, not the user-defined H,V coordinate system (see Image Measurement - Spatial Calibration) currently in use, if any.
The Image Overlay window allows overlaying a second image, containing graphics on a ''transparent'' background, over the current image. The overlay is non-destructive.
Like most image processing features, the source of the graphics can be a full image, or an area of interest. The default area of interest, color space (for color images), and image buffer (for image sequences) is shown as a reminder; an alternate area of interest, color space, and/or image buffer can be selected with the Set AOI button.
If Overlay Source Pixel = Display Pixel is selected, the overlay source area of interest is not resized; each pixel of the overlay source corresponds to one pixel of the displayed image. If Resize to Image Dimensions is enabled, the overlay source area of interest is resized to a width of Resize Overlay to, X and a height of Resize Overlay to, Y, relative to the overlaid image. if Resize to Display Dimensions is enabled, the overlay source area of interest is resized to a width of Resize Overlay to, X and a height of Resize Overlay to, Y, relative to the displayed image.
If Resize w. Low Density is selected, the resized graphic overlay has the same number of pixels as the original source image, but if being enlarged lines may become ''sparse''. If Resize w. High Density is selected and the resized graphic overlay is enlarged, the graphics pixels are duplicated so as to minimize sparseness, but depending upon the degree of enlargement the result may be ''blocky''.
The overlay operation uses one color of the source image, the ''chroma key'', to determine whether each pixel of the source image is transparent, or a non-transparent pixel to be overlaid on the current image. If Chroma Key: Pixel Value 0 is selected (currently, the only choice), the chroma key value is pixel value 0; i.e. black for RGB or monochrome pixels.
If Overlay Visible is enabled, the overlay is visible over the current image, with the overlaid image's area of interest upper left corner placed at Origin, X and Origin, Y relative to the overlaid image (i.e. rather than displayed image coordinates). If Overlay Visible is not enabled, the overlay is not visible.
If Interact is enabled, the overlay may be positioned interactively by clicking and dragging over the associated image window; clicking the mouse button over the current image repositions the Origin, X and Origin, Y.
The Paint Brush window allows ''painting'' onto the image; that is, interactively moving a ''paint brush'' of selectable shape, size, and angle around the image and filling the image area covered by the paint brush with a selectable fill pattern and grey or color value.
After selecting the Pattern, Foreground, Background, and Shape, the ON button activates painting, as the paint brush is moved the image area underneath the brush is ''painted'', and the OFF button deactivates painting, allowing the brush to be moved without modifying the image.
The Pattern subwindow allows selecting the painted pattern; i.e. the relationship of background to foreground painted pixel values.
The Horizontal Stripes fill pattern is composed of horizontal lines, spaced at intervals of Vertical Spacing pixels. The Vertical Stripes fill pattern is composed of vertical lines, spaced at intervals of Horizontal Spacing pixels. The Boxes fill pattern produces a grid, with the horizontal lines spaced at Vertical Spacing pixels and the vertical lines spaced at Horizontal Spacing pixels.
The R/L Diagonal Stripes fill pattern is composed of diagonal lines, running from the top right to the bottom left, spaced at intervals of R/L Spacing pixels. The L/R Diagonal Stripes fill pattern is composed of diagonal lines, running from the top left to the bottom right, spaced at intervals of L/R Spacing pixels. The Crosshatch fill pattern produces a rotated grid, which is the combination of both the R/L Diagonal Stripes and L/R Diagonal Stripes and their respective spacing parameters.
The Percentage Filled fill pattern performs a pseudo-random filling so that the proportion of foreground is the specified Fill Percentage. A Fill Percentage of 100 can be used to select solid filling with the selected foreground grey or color value.
If Background Opaque is selected, the selected pattern is painted as a foreground pixel value over a background pixel value. If Background Transparent is selected, the selected pattern is painted as a foreground pixel value, leaving the original image content as the background.
For a specific set of pattern fill parameters, the fill pattern is always synchronized to the image, and independent of the size or shape of the image area filled. Thus, the pattern produced by different paint brush sizes or shapes can be joined seamlessly.
The Foreground and Background subwindows allow selecting the pixel value(s) to be used, as described in Pick Pixel Value.
The Shape subwindow allows selecting the paint brush's shape.
The Region Type allows specifying the paint brush's shape as None, Rectangle, Ellipse, Diamond, Path Enclosed, or Polygon. If Rectangle is selected, the standard controls for drawing a possibly rotated rectangle are provided (see Graphic Rectangle). If Ellipse is selected, the standard controls for drawing a possibly rotated ellipse are provided (see Graphic Ellipse). If Diamond is selected, the standard controls for drawing a possibly rotated diamond are provided (see Graphic Diamond). If Path Enclosed is selected, the standard controls for drawing a region of arbitrary shape are provided (see Graphic Path Enclosed). If Polygon is selected, the standard controls for drawing a polygon are provided (see Graphic Polygon).
The Paint Fill window allows filling (or, sometimes referred to as flooding) an image region with ''paint'' of selectable color and patterns, using specified pixel values as the boundary terminating the filling.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation. If Preview is selected, the image displayed in the associated The Image Viewer Window is temporarily and non-destructively modified to show the effect of the operation.
The Pattern subwindow allows selecting the painted pattern; i.e. the relationship of background to foreground painted pixel values, as described under Paint Brush - Pattern.
The Color subwindow allows selecting the foreground and background pixel value(s) to be used, as described in Pick Pixel Value.
The Boundary subwindow allows selecting the pixel value(s) that define the boundary of the filling operation. The pixel value for a Lower Boundary limit, and a pixel value for the Upper Boundary limit are set as described in Pick Pixel Value; all pixel values within the Lower Boundary and Upper Boundary values serve as a boundary to the filling operation.
The Lower > Upper? Use: (Upper <= value <= Lower) and Lower > Upper? Use: (value <= Lower OR value >= Upper) selections have effect only if one or more of the Lower Boundary component values are greater than the corresponding Upper Boundary component values. If Lower > Upper? Use: (Upper <= value <= Lower) is selected, the component value is considered to be ''within'' the lower and upper boundary levels if the component value is between the lower and upper values. If Lower > Upper? Use: (value <= Lower OR value >= Upper) is selected, the component value is considered to be ''within'' the lower and upper boundary levels if the component value is above the upper value and below the lower value; i.e. an circular interpretation where the maximum pixel component value plus one is identical to 0.
The Fill from Seed at X Coordinate and Fill from Seed at Y Coordinate specify the coordinates of the single ''seed'' pixel; the pixel where filling (flooding) starts. If Coord<=>Cursor is selected, the Fill from Seed at X Coordinate and Fill from Seed at Y Coordinate becomes synonymous with the Image View - Cursor; moving the image cursor (left click over the displayed image) also selects the pixel to be the seed.
If Fill up to Boundary is selected, the filling (flooding) does not include the boundary pixels surrounding the filled (flooded) region. If Fill including Boundary is selected, the filling (flooding) does include the boundary pixels surrounding the filled (flooded) region.
The Graphic Manager maintains a list of often used graphical objects, such as lines, circles, bezier curves, point lists, text, and arrows, so that the same graphic may be used repeatedly. The graphical objects can also saved and loaded.
Although the Graphic Manager is accessed from within the Image Viewer Window, the list of graphical objects is ''global'', and shared by all Image Viewer Windows. Accessing the Graphic Manager from a specific Image Viewer Window selects where the graphic created or selected by (that instance of) the Graphic Manager is to be shown.
The File - New Graphic allows creating a new graphic of a selected type and assigning the graphic a name for future reference.
The New Graphic Name specifies the new graphic's name. The New Graphic Type specifies the new graphic's type. After selecting a type and name, the OK button creates the graphic and closes the ''New Graphic'' window, the Apply button creates the graphic without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without creating the graphic.
The New Graphic Type may be a region, such as: an Annulus as described in Graphic Annulus, an Annulus Arc as described in Graphic Annulus Arc, a Circle as described in Graphic Circle, an Ellipse as described in Graphic Ellipse, an Elliptical Annulus as described in Graphic Elliptical Annulus, an Elliptical Annulus Arc as described in Graphic Elliptical Annulus Arc, a Path Enclosed as described in Graphic Path Enclosed, a Polygon as described in Graphic Polygon, a Rectangle as described in Graphic Rectangle, a Diamond as described in Graphic Diamond, a Rectangle Array as described in Graphic Rectangle Array, a Rectangular Frame as described in Graphic Rectangular Frame, a Window as described in Graphic Window, or a Bezier Region as described in Graphic Bezier Region.
The New Graphic Type may be a curve, such as: a Line as described in Graphic Line, a Circle Arc as described in Graphic Circle Arc, an Ellipse Arc as described in Graphic Ellipse Arc, a Path Curve as described in Graphic Path Curve, a Polyline as described in Graphic Polyline, a Bezier Curve as described in Graphic Bezier Curve, or an Arrow as described in Graphic Arrow.
The New Graphic Type may be of another type, such as: a set of Parallel Lines as described in Graphic Parallel Lines, a single Point as described in Graphic Point, a list of Points as described in Graphic Points, or Text as described in Graphic Text.
After creation, the graphic's standard window is shown, allowing the graphic to be drawn, moved, displayed, etc.
The File - Save Graphic allows saving the current graphic. The saved file is intended for use by the current version of XCAP, and is not intended to be used by other programs. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Load Graphic allows loading a graphic previously saved by File - Save Graphic. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Export Graphic allows saving the morphology of selected graphics in a format compatible with the PXIPL Image Processing Library. Secondary graphic features, such as color, thickness, or fill mode are not included in the exported files. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Import Graphic allows loading a graphic previously saved by File - Export Graphic, or previously saved in a format compatible with the PXIPL Image Processing Library. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Duplicate Graphic allows creating a second copy of the current graphic. The New Graphic Name allows specifying a different name for the new graphic, so that each has a unique name for later reference. The OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Delete Graphic allows deleting the current graphic from the list maintained by the Graphic Manager.
The File - Exit exits the Graphic Manager. Exiting the Graphic Manager does not dispose of the graphical objects, but they are disposed of when XCAP exits.
The menu-bar's Graphic lists all of the graphical objects currently under management. Selecting a graphic provides access to that graphic's standard controls, allowing the graphic to be drawn, moved, displayed, etc.
The windows accessible under Image Viewer Window - Aoi allows defining an area of interest (AOI) or a region of interest (ROI) upon which image processing, measurement, print, load, and save features will operate.
The Aoi - Set AOI window allows setting a default area of interest (AOI) for use by image processing, print, load, save, or other operations which use an AOI.
The Set Area of Interest window can be accessed from The Image Viewer Window's menu-bar's Aoi, Set AOI. The area of interest selected is the default for later image processing, analysis, load, save, or other operations activated from the same The Image Viewer Window which use the default AOI (some analysis and other features instead use the default ROI, described under Aoi - Set Region of Interest).
Each specific operation's window typically has a Set AOI button, which also activates the Set Area of Interest window. The area of interest selected overrides the default for that operation's window, but does not change the default associated with The Image Viewer Window. In some contexts, these Set Area of Interest selections may be included in the operation's window, rather than as a pop-up subwindow.
The contents of the Set Area of Interest varies according to whether The Image Viewer Window represents a single image or a sequence, and according to whether the operation in question,
Source & Destination.
If the operation requires a source and destination,
then the
Set Area of Interest
window has
Source
half and a
Destination
half, each of which activates an independent
selection of the source and destination's buffers,
areas, color spaces, etc.
Image & Color Space.
If used as a source for an operation
needing a pair of images, the
Image Source
allows specifying the name of current image,
or the name of an image in a different
The Image Viewer Window
as the source.
For the destination, or for an operation
not using a distinct source and destination,
the current image is always shown.
If used in conjunction with an operation which supports using ''virtual'' pixel values (typically operations which don't modify the image, such as Image File - Save or Image File - Print), the Use Pixel Data allows selecting Unchanged (or as in Image in some contexts) if the image's actual pixel values are to be used, or may allow selecting thru Palette if the result of the pixel values as seen through the effects of the palette are to be used, or may allow selecting thru Z=>I Calib. if the result of the pixel values as modified by intensity calibration are to be used. A second Use Pixel Data allows selecting w/out Graphics if overlay graphics are to be ignored, or with Graphics if the pixel values as presented with overlay graphics are to be used.
The Use Color Space (or Color Space in some contexts) selects the color space, or ''slice'' of a color space, to be used. The Image's Color Space provides a reminder of the image's native color space.
Buffer or Buffers.
If the selected image is a sequence and the operation requires
a single image, the
Sequence Buffer
selects the buffer of the sequence to be used.
If the operation requires a sequence of images,
the
Sequence Buffer Start
specifies the first buffer of the sequence, and
Sequence Buffer End
specifies the last buffer of the sequence.
The
Sequence Length
provides a reminder of the number of images in the sequence.
If
View Buffer Selection
is selected, any change to
Sequence Buffer,
Sequence Buffer Start,
or
Sequence Buffer End,
causes
The Image Viewer Window
to display the selected buffer.
If Use Vert. Stack of Images is selected and the operation requires a single image, a vertical ''stack'' of images, from Sequence Buffer Start through Sequence Buffer End is operated upon as if it were a single image.
If Use Ave. Stack of Images is selected and the operation requires a single image, a ''stack'' of images, formed by averaging corresponding pixels, from Sequence Buffer Start through Sequence Buffer End is operated upon as if it were a single image.
If Track Current Buffer is selected, the Sequence Buffer is updated with the The Image Viewer Window's current buffer when the the area of interest is put to use by the image processing, print, load, save, or other operation.
If Link Viewer=>Seq Buffer is selected, the Sequence Buffer is updated by changes to the image buffer selection of the The Image Viewer Window. If Link Viewer=>Seq Buffers is selected, the Sequence Buffer Start and Sequence Buffer End are updated by changes to the default AOI image buffer sequence selection of the The Image Viewer Window. The Link Viewer=>Seq Buffer or Link Viewer=>Seq Buffers allows using, for example, Image View - Sequence Thumbnails Image View - Sequence Thumbnails to select image(s) and buffer(s) by clicking on the desired image(s). Or using Image Examination - Pixel Peek Image Examination - Pixel Peek to select an image and buffer by clicking on a numeric pixel value (in its X/B or B/Y modes).
Area.
The area of interest
is specified via a
Graphic Window,
allowing setting an area of interest by
using explicit coordinates, by drawing over the image,
or by clicking a grid location.
The Other AOI button provides access to areas of interest previously created with the AOI/ROI Manager. The Listed AOI shows the names of all Graphic Window's created by the AOI/ROI Manager, and also shows ''Current'' which represents the current area of interest. The Other OK button selects the Listed AOI, the Other Cancel button selects the current area of interest.
When a listed AOI from the AOI/ROI Manager is accessed, the standard Graphic Window controls allow further manipulation of a copy of the AOI; any changes in position or size from within the Set Area of Interest window do not affect the original Graphic Window as known to the AOI/ROI Manager.
The Aoi - Set ROI window allows setting a default region of interest for later use by image analysis and other selected features which accept an ROI.
The Set Region of Interest window can be accessed from The Image Viewer Window's menu-bar's Aoi, Set ROI. The region of interest selected is the default for later image analysis and other selected features activated from the same The Image Viewer Window which use the default ROI. In some contexts, these Set Region of Interest selections may be included in the operation's window, rather than as a pop-up subwindow.
Each specific operation's window typically has a Set ROI button, which also activates the Set Region of Interest window. The region of interest selected overrides the default for that operation's window, but does not change the default associated with The Image Viewer Window.
The contents of the Set Region of Interest varies according to whether The Image Viewer Window represents a single image or a sequence, and according to whether the operation in question,
Source & Destination.
If the operation requires a source and destination,
then the
Set Region of Interest
window has
Source
half and a
Destination
half, each of which activates an independent
selection of the source and destination's buffers,
regions, color spaces, etc.
Image & Color Space.
If used as a source for an operation
needing a pair of images, the
Image Source
allows specifying the name of current image,
or the name of an image in a different
The Image Viewer Window
as the source.
For the destination, or for an operation
not using a distinct source and destination,
the current image is always shown.
If used in conjunction with an operation which supports using ''virtual'' pixel values (typically operations which don't modify the image, such as Image File - Save or Image File - Print), the Use Pixel Data allows selecting Unchanged (or as in Image in some contexts) if the image's actual pixel values are to be used, or may allow selecting thru Palette if the result of the pixel values as seen through the effects of the palette are to be used, or may allow selecting thru Z=>I Calib. if the result of the pixel values as modified by intensity calibration are to be used. A second Use Pixel Data allows selecting w/out Graphics if overlay graphics are to be ignored, or with Graphics if the pixel values as presented with overlay graphics are to be used.
The Use Color Space (or Color Space in some contexts) selects the color space, or ''slice'' of a color space, to be used. The Image's Color Space provides a reminder of the image's native color space.
Buffer or Buffers.
If the selected image is a sequence and the operation requires
a single image, the
Sequence Buffer
selects the buffer of the sequence to be used.
If the operation requires a sequence of images,
the
Sequence Buffer Start
specifies the first buffer of the sequence, and
Sequence Buffer End
specifies the last buffer of the sequence.
The
Sequence Length
provides a reminder of the number of images in the sequence.
If
View Buffer Selection
is selected, any change to
Sequence Buffer,
Sequence Buffer Start,
or
Sequence Buffer End,
causes
The Image Viewer Window
to display the selected buffer.
If Use Stack of Images is selected and the operation requires a single image, a vertical ''stack'' of images, from Sequence Buffer Start through Sequence Buffer End is operated upon as if it were a single image.
If Track Current Buffer is selected, the Sequence Buffer is updated with the The Image Viewer Window's current buffer when the the area of interest is used by the image processing, print, load, save, or other operation.
If Link Viewer=>Seq Buffer is selected, the Sequence Buffer is updated by changes to the image buffer selection of the The Image Viewer Window. If Link Viewer=>Seq Buffers is selected, the Sequence Buffer Start and Sequence Buffer End are updated by changes to the default AOI image buffer sequence selection of the The Image Viewer Window.
Region.
The region of interest
is specified via a
Graphic Window,
Graphic Rectangle,
Graphic Circle,
Graphic Diamond,
Graphic Ellipse,
Graphic Path Enclosed,
or
Graphic Polygon
according to the type of region,
allowing setting a region of interest by
using explicit coordinates and dimensions, or by drawing over the image.
The Other ROI button allows creating a region of a new type, and provides access to regions of interest previously created with the AOI/ROI Manager. If Other, New is chosen, the New ROI allows selecting a new Window, Circle, Rectangle, Ellipse, Ellipse, Path Enclosed, or Polygon. If Other, from List is chosen, the Listed ROI shows the names of all regions created by the AOI/ROI Manager, and also shows ''Current'' which represents the current region of interest. The Other OK button selects the New ROI or Listed ROI, the Other Cancel button selects the current region area of interest.
When a listed ROI from the AOI/ROI Manager is accessed, the standard Graphic Window, Graphic Rectangle, Graphic Circle, Graphic Diamond, Graphic Ellipse, Graphic Path Enclosed, or Graphic Polygon controls allow further manipulation of a copy of the ROI; any changes in position or size from within the Set Region of Interest window do not affect the original region as known to the AOI/ROI Manager.
The AOI/ROI Manager maintains a list of often used AOIs and ROIs, so that the same AOI/ROI may be used repeatedly by image processing, measurement, print, load, and save features. The AOI/ROI Manager is identical to the Graphic Manager, and provides access to the same list of objects, but only creates and accesses graphical objects which are eligible for use as an area of interest or as a region of interest, and labels such as File - New Graphic are changed to File - New Region to help clarify its use.
The Image Viewer Window associated with the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffers has all of the features of the standard The Image Viewer Window, plus additional features for capturing images and controlling the PIXCI® frame grabber, under the menu-bar's Capture and File.
Several items in the Capture menu have direct effect, rather than activating a window. The Snap captures and displays a single image. The Live continuously captures and displays images; the UnLive terminates the Live mode, displaying the last captured image.
The First Buffer switches to the first buffer of the frame buffer sequence, the Last Buffer switches to the last buffer of the frame buffer sequence, the Next Buffer switches to the next buffer of the frame buffer sequence, and the Previous Buffer switches to the previous buffer of the frame buffer sequence.
The File - Save Frame Buffer Memory and File - Load Frame Buffer Memory windows allow ''streaming'' the PIXCI® frame buffer memory to, or from, a file.
The file format is an exact ''image'' of the contents of frame buffer memory, and not intended for use by programs other than XCAP, and the XCOBJ or XCLIB libraries. The only valid, supported, purpose of a saved file is to allow its later reloading into the frame buffer memory, of an identical model PIXCI® frame grabber, configured for the same video setup.
The File - Save Frame Buffer Memory and File - Load Frame Buffer Memory typically operate significantly faster than other methods of saving and loading images,[39] particularly when frame buffer memory is configured as many, small, frame buffers. Or when the frame buffer contains a Bayer format color image, which other methods would load or save as RGB color with significant overhead of converting Bayer to or from RGB.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name. Alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box.
If All Buffers is selected, all frame buffers are saved or loaded, and if being loaded, without any file offset (see below). If Selected Buffers is selected, the specific frame buffers to be saved or loaded, and an optional file offset, can be selected with First Frame Buffer, Last Frame Buffer, and File Offset.
The First Frame Buffer and Last Frame Buffer specify the range of frame buffers to be saved or loaded; these operations do not support an area of interest.
For File - Load Frame Buffer Memory, a File Offset specifies an offset into the file that is to be skipped, in units of image buffers. For example, saving:
and later loading:First Frame Buffer 0 Last Frame Buffer 9
retrieves what was originally in buffer 5 into buffer 0.First Frame Buffer 0 Last Frame Buffer 0 File Offset 5
If Default Image Alignment is selected, the saved images are not ''padded'', resulting in the minimum file size. If Disk's Sector Size Image Alignment is selected, each saved image is padded to a multiple of the disk's sector size. If Sector Size Override Image Alignment is selected, each saved image is padded to a multiple of the specified size. The Disk's Sector Size Image Alignment and Sector Size Override Image Alignment will result in larger files, unless the image size is a multiple of the specified sector size.
If File Includes Frame Buffer Stamp w. Date&Time is selected, additional information is saved or loaded with each image including the date and time of capture and other ''point of capture'' status. The image size is increased by (currently) 64 bytes. If the frame buffer does not have a stamp, such as a frame buffer that was never captured into (but perhaps modified via graphics operations) or the driver configuration does not support frame buffer stamping, a frame buffer stamp with zero values is saved.
If the View Circular Sequence in Temporal Order option of Capture - Video to Frame Buffers was used in conjunction with capturing a continuous circular sequence, the File - Save Frame Buffer Memory and File - Load Frame Buffer Memory features ignore the temporal ordering of buffers and always save or load the buffers in their physical order.
The Image File - Attributes window combines the Image File - Attributes features described for a non-PIXCI® frame grabber The Image Viewer Window, with additional or alternate ''point of capture'' features.
The G.P. Inputs Capture Stamp shows the state of the board's general purpose input(s) (formerly referred to as ''External TTL Inputs'') when the image was captured. The G.P. Trigger Count Capture Stamp shows the state of the board's general purpose trigger count when the image was captured. The Time Capture Stamp and Date&Time Capture Stamp show the time, as reported by the operating system, when the image was captured; the former is formatted as seconds and fractional seconds since an operating system dependent epoch, the latter is formatted into the customary calendar date and time.
The Field Count Capture Stamp shows the video field count when the image was captured; the video field count is maintained by the PIXCI® frame grabber's driver and counts all fields whether intended to be captured or not. The Field Flag Capture Stamp shows the video field flag when the image was captured; it is primarily useful when capturing interlaced video in single field mode. The PIXCI® Field Count Data Stamp, supported by selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, also shows the image's video field count; selected PIXCI® frame grabbers count all fields, whether intended to be captured or not, and attaches the current count as meta-data to each field's image data.
For image sequences, the Delta Time Capture Stamp, Delta Field Count Capture Stamp, Delta PIXCI® Field Count Capture Stamp, and Delta G.P. Trigger Count Capture Stamp shows the difference of the relevant value relative to the previous image of the sequence The Delta G.P. Inputs Capture Stamp and Delta Field Flag Capture Stamp shows the logical XOR of the value relative to the previous image of the sequence.
The Capture - Live Options window combines the Image View - Display options described for a non-PIXCI® frame grabber The Image Viewer Window, with additional choices governing Live mode.
If Live Video: Continuous Capture is selected, during Live mode the PIXCI® frame grabber captures continuously into the specified frame buffer. This provides a high image capture and display rate, however the image shown on the graphics display may contain portions from adjacent video frames.
If Live Video: Alternate Snap & Display is selected, during Live mode the PIXCI® frame grabber repeatedly performs a snap followed by a display to the graphics display. The image displayed is that of a single frame, and uses less bus bandwidth (particularly use when the PIXCI® frame grabber and the graphics display are on the same PCI bus), however the image display rate will be slower.
If Live Video: Continuous Dual Buffer Capture is selected, during Live mode the PIXCI® frame grabber alternates capturing into the specified frame buffer and the last frame buffer (dual buffering). So long as the time required to display one image is not larger than the frame period, the image displayed is that of a single frame but with a faster display rate than Live Video: Alternate Snap & Display.
If Live Video: Continuous All Buffer Capture is selected, during Live mode the PIXCI® frame grabber captures into the circular sequence of frame buffers, the display is from the last frame buffer captured. So long as the time required to display one image is not larger than the frame period times the number of frame buffer minus one, the image displayed is that of a single frame but with a faster display rate than Live Video: Alternate Snap & Display.
On computer's with insufficient PCI bandwidth to simultaneously capture into computer memory and display from computer memory to the graphics display, the Live Video: Alternate Snap & Display option reduces the required bandwidth by approximately half.
The Live Video: Auto Selection automatically selects one of the above methods, according to current conditions. The method selected is shown.
If Live Update: Frame Rate is selected, the image display is updated once per video frame. If Live Update: Field Rate is selected, the image display is updated once per video field, reducing interlace jitter at the expense of additional overhead. This option has no effect for non-interlaced video formats, as a video frame and video field are identical.
The Display Update Rate shows the current display update rate while the PIXCI® frame grabber is in Live mode, the Video Field Rate shows the video field rate output by the camera, the Capture Field Rate shows the video field rate captured by the PIXCI® frame grabber. The Rate - Time Base allows selecting the time base over which the Display Update Rate, Video Field Rate, and Capture Field Rate is measured. As the Display Update Rate, Video Field Rate, and Capture Field Rate are all measured against the host operating system's supplied timer, they should be considered as approximations; their accuracy and repeatability, especially with small values of Rate - Time Base, is dependent upon the host operating system, the granularity of its clock, and behavior of other running processes. A larger Rate - Time Base will yield more accurate measurements, but updated less often. Use of Rate - Filtering selects filtering of the measured rates; the reported values will fluctuate less, but adapt slower.
The Display Pixels, X and Display Pixels, Y shows the size of the currently displayed image, in graphics display pixels.
If Adjustments: Attached is selected, the Capture - Adjustments, when activated, are attached to and part of the image viewer window. If Adjustments: Detached is selected, the Capture - Adjustments, when activated, are detached into its own window.
If Status Bar: Video Field/Frame Rate is selected, the status bar displays the current video field or frame rate output by the camera. If Status Bar: Capture Field/Frame Rate is selected, the status bar displays the current video field or frame rate captured by the PIXCI® frame grabber. If Status Bar: Display Rate is selected, the status bar displays the current display update rate. These rates displayed on the status bar are essentially the same as the rates shown under Video Field Rate and Capture Field Rate but are always in frames, not fields.
If Status Bar: Camera Settings is selected, the status bar displays the current camera settings, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog.
If Status Bar: A-D Converter Settings is selected, the status bar displays the PIXCI® frame grabber's current analog to digital conversion settings, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog. This option shows the gain, contrast, black level, etc. settings of analog PIXCI® frame grabbers, such as PIXCI® A110, A310, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, SV5L, SV7, or SV8, but does not include A-D settings within the camera.
If Status Bar: Trig(ger) & Timing Gen(erator) Converter Settings is selected, the status bar displays the PIXCI® frame grabber's current trigger generator settings, timing generator settings, and other settings which configure the camera, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog.
If Status Bar: Post Capture Processing is selected, the status bar displays whether post capture, video processing features of the Capture - Adjustments dialog are enabled, such as the Adjust - Common Automatic Contrast Enhancement Features Adjust - Common Gain & Offset Normalization (FFC) Features, Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features, Adjust - Common Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) Features, and selected features of Adjust - More Common Features.
If Status Bar: All Capture & Adjust Settings is selected, the status bar displays the all active settings, selections, and values from the Capture - Adjustments dialog.
If Status Bar: Camera Status is selected, the status bar displays the current camera status, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog; such as the camera's temperature, for those cameras that report temperature and where the displayed temperature is updated automatically.
If Status Bar: Camera Info is selected, the status bar displays the camera's static information, if any, from the Capture - Adjustments dialog; such as the camera's model and serial number, for those cameras that report the model and serial number.
The Capture - Shortcuts window combines the Image View - Shortcuts features described for a non-PIXCI® frame grabber The Image Viewer Window, with additional shortcuts for often used features of the PIXCI® frame grabber. The shortcuts provided are:
The shortcuts may either be attached and part of The Image Viewer Window, or may be detached into its own window, as set by Image View - Display.
The Capture - Adjustments window allows setting the often used video setup adjustments, as suitable for the model of the PIXCI® frame grabber and camera in use. Less frequently used, and more esoteric, adjustments can be set under PIXCI® - Video Setup.
Many features of the Capture - Adjustments window are common to most or all models of the PIXCI® frame grabber and cameras.
The Current Buffer shows, and allows selecting, the current frame buffer for capturing and viewing. The Frame Buffers shows the number of frame buffers available given the current video resolution and the total amount of frame buffer memory.
The Field Count indicates the number of elapsed fields since XCAP has started and the camera powered on. If the camera is, or should be, in a continuous (or ''free-run'') mode, and the Field Count is not incrementing, check the camera, its power, its cabling, and its switch settings (if any).
The Snap button, and the Live, UnLive selections duplicate the Capture - Snap, Capture - Live, and Capture - UnLive features available from the menu-bar.
The Save saves the current Capture - Adjustments settings to a specified path and file name; the Load restores previously saved settings. The Save (Preset) 1, Save (Preset) 2, Save (Preset) 3, Restore (Preset) 1, Restore (Preset) 2, and Restore (Preset) 3 are similar, but save to, and restore from, three predefined file names, avoiding having to select a file name. These can be used to quickly switch to and from new settings, such as to provide a video ''Preview'' mode for cameras normally operated at a slow frame rate (assuming the camera also has settings to select a faster, perhaps lower quality, frame rate). The Unlock Presets allows disabling the Save (Preset)'s so that an accidental mouse click can't change previously saved settings.
For Capture - Adjustments windows for cameras with RS-232 control, these Load and Save features do not affect the currently selected RS-232 Port. For Capture - Adjustments which incorporate Gain & Offset Normalization, these Load and Save features do not load or save the correction coefficients.
The file format of these Save features is intended for use only by the current version of XCAP, and may not be loadable into other versions.
For selected cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for many the camera's programmable or controllable features.
Generally, the left side of the Capture - Adjustments dialog provides controls for the PIXCI® frame grabber, or controls for features implemented by XCAP software. Generally, the right side of the Capture - Adjustments dialog provides controls for features directly implemented by the camera.
For selected cameras whose features are controlled by switches, the Capture - Adjustments provides a sketch of the camera's controls. These controls use the same style and terminology as specified by the camera manufacturer; the camera manufacturer's documentation describes the camera's features and controls.
Adjusting the sketch's controls to match the camera's controls allows XCAP to configure the video setup appropriately.
Note: The camera's settings can neither be set nor sensed by XCAP. Modifying the sketch's controls does not modify the camera's settings, but is a convenient way to advise XCAP of the camera's current settings!!!
For selected cameras, the Info button displays a short synopsis of the camera switch settings.
For selected cameras whose features are controlled by RS-232 commands, the Capture - Adjustments provides integrated controls for the camera's programmable features. The camera controls use the same concepts and terminology as specified by the camera manufacturer; the camera manufacturer's documentation describes the camera's features and controls.
The RS-232 Port specifies the computer's RS-232 port to which the camera is connected. Alternately, selecting COM? - Search (under Windows) or ttyS? - Search (under Linux) searches the available ''COM'' ports or ''ttyS'' devices for the camera; however, this should not be used if any fragile or ''life-critical'' RS-232 controlled devices are connected, as each accessible ''COM'' port or ''ttyS'' device is probed by sending camera commands and the effect of such commands on other devices can't be predicted. Neither is the COM? - Search or ttyS? - Search feature intended for use with multiple cameras hooked up to multiple RS-232 ports. After specification or auto identification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters simultaneously programs the camera and changes, as required, the PIXCI® - Video Setup.
The RS-232 Mode provides options governing communication with the camera. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the camera reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload. The Full Up/Dnload and Min. Up/Dnload options only appear for cameras which support downloading of parameters.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the camera, nor must a RS-232 Port be selected; the camera's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships. The Off Line mode also allows using the camera manufacturer's RS-232 control software; manipulating XCAP's off-line camera controls informs XCAP as to the camera's setting(s).
Optional controls may be present. The RS-232 Timeout specifies the minimum period of time to wait for a response from the camera before concluding that a command failed. The RS-232 Retries specifies the number of times a failed camera command should be retried. The RS-232 Pause specifies the minimum period of time to wait after issuing one command before issuing another camera command. These controls may appear only while the camera is in pre-production mode, or when a new release of the camera is announced, allowing compensation for camera changes.
For some cameras, the RS-232 Init allows selecting, when communication is established, Per Camera so that XCAP parameters are initialized as per the camera's settings, or Per Software so that camera settings are initialized as per software's default's or last used settings.
The RS-232 Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the camera to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the camera commands, needed to initialize the camera for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for RS-232 Log. These are primarily of interest to camera manufacturers, technical support, and, in conjunction with PIXCI® Export Video Setup, to assist users of the XCOBJ or XCLIB ''C'' library in controlling the camera.
An ''Activity'' sketch displays an indication of the current serial activity, such as uploading commands to the camera, downloading the camera's current settings, or connected, quiescent, and ready for use. The Activity sketch also indicates video activity, such as images output by the camera and images stored in the host computer.
For selected cameras whose features are controlled by Camera Link serial commands, the Capture - Adjustments provides convenient, integrated controls for the camera's programmable features. The camera controls use the same concepts and terminology as specified by the camera manufacturer; the camera manufacturer's documentation describes the camera's features and controls.
The Serial Port allows enabling communication to the camera via its serial port. After being enabled, any change of the on-screen parameters simultaneously programs the camera and changes, as required, the PIXCI® - Video Setup.
The Serial Mode provides options governing communication with the camera. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the camera reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload. The Full Up/Dnload and Min. Up/Dnload options only appear for cameras which support downloading of parameters.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the camera, nor must the Serial Port be enabled; the camera's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships. The Off Line mode also allows using the camera manufacturer's RS-232 control software (for cameras with alternate RS-232 communication), or the camera manufacturer's Camera Link API control software; manipulating XCAP's off-line camera controls informs XCAP as to the camera's setting(s).
Optional controls may be present. The Serial Timeout specifies the minimum period of time to wait for a response from the camera before concluding that a command failed. The Serial Retries specifies the number of times a failed camera command should be retried. The Serial Pause specifies the minimum period of time to wait after issuing one command before issuing another camera command. These controls may appear only while the camera is in pre-production mode, or when a new release of the camera is announced, allowing compensation for camera changes.
For some cameras, the Serial Init allows selecting, when communication is established, Per Camera so that XCAP parameters are initialized as per the camera's settings, or Per Software so that camera settings are initialized as per software's default's or last used settings.
The Serial Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the camera to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the camera commands, needed to initialize the camera for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for Serial Log. These are primarily of interest to camera manufacturers, technical support, and, in conjunction with PIXCI® Export Video Setup, to assist users of the XCOBJ or XCLIB ''C'' library in controlling the camera.
An ''Activity'' sketch displays an indication of the current serial activity, such as uploading commands to the camera, downloading the camera's current settings, or connected, quiescent, and ready for use. The Activity sketch also indicates video activity, such as images output by the camera and images stored in the host computer.
The characteristics of the camera are described via the Camera Link (i.e. Base, Medium, Full, or 80-Bit), Base Configuration (i.e. 8 bit x 1 tap, 8 bit x 2 tap, 8 bit x 3 tap, 10 bit x 1 tap, 10 bit x 2 tap, 12 bit x 1 tap, 12 bit x 2 tap, 14 bit x 1 tap, or 16 bit x 1 tap), Medium Configuration (i.e. 8 bit x 4 tap, 10 bit x 3 tap, 12 bit x 3 tap, or 12 bit x 4 tap), Full Configuration (i.e. 8 bit x 8 tap), 80-Bit Configuration (i.e. 8 bit x 10 tap, 10 bit x 8 tap, or 16 bit x 5 tap), Color Configuration (i.e. Grey Level, RGB Color, or Bayer Color), Bayer Phase (i.e. Red Start, Grn-Red Start, Grn-Blue Start, or Blue Start for Bayer Color only), Camera Scan (i.e. Area Scan, or Line Scan), Timing Mode (i.e. Free-run or Controlled), Horizontal Resolution, Vertical Resolution, (area scan only), Line Scans per Image (line scan only), Horizontal Offset, Vertical Offset, Data Valid (DVAL) Signal (i.e. Use or Ignore), and Camera Link Clock (Frequency) (only needed when using the camera in Controlled mode, and where the PIXCI® frame grabber is continuously retriggering the camera or the PIXCI® frame grabber is generated a timed pulse in response to a trigger), each in accordance with the camera manufacturer's specifications.
If Non-Std Configuration Options is selected, additional configuration options - not part of the Camera Link specification - are offered for Medium Configuration (i.e. 14 bit x 2 tap), Full Configuration (i.e. 14 bit x 4 tap and 16 bit x 4 tap), Color Configuration (i.e. BGR Color, RGB+Pad Color, BGR+Pad Color, and UYVY Color[40]).
The pixel order characteristics of the camera are described via the Pixel Order Correction, providing various options for correcting the pixel order for cameras which don't output values in left-to-right and top-to-bottom order. There is no easy or standard method to describe the various camera readout schemes; while the ''Pixel Order Correction'' assigns each a non-descriptive numeric code, an ''Animate'' feature provides an animated sketch of each scheme that can be compared to the camera's documentation. Or, simply, each scheme can be tried and the displayed image observed.
The Clocks per LVAL and Lines per FVAL (area scan only), shows the expected number of data clocks per Camera Link line and column (not necessarily the same as the sensor's resolution) as derived from the number of taps and the pixel order correction. This derived value may be compared to the camera's timing information.
For cameras in controlled rather than free-run mode, additional controls are: Trigger Input (i.e. None (implies continuous mode), Rising Edge (implies single shot mode), Falling Edge (implies single shot mode) , or Snap Button (implies single shot mode)), Controlled Mode (i.e. Single Shot or Continuous), Exposure (Trigger) Polarity (i.e. Positive (for rising/falling edge) or Negative (for rising/falling edge)), Controlled Exposure (for camera's with pulse width controlled exposure), Min. Retrigger Period (single shot mode), Controlled Line Rate (line scan only, continuous mode), and Controlled Frame Rate (area scan only, continuous mode).
Adjustments to the camera's gain, offset, and other characteristics can be done via the Control Panel supplied by the camera manufacturer, or by using the PIXCI® - Serial Terminal to manually send serial commands and view the camera's response, as documented by the camera manufacturer.
An ''Activity'' sketch displays an indication of the current video activity, such as images output by the camera and images stored in the host computer.
For selected cameras whose features are controlled by I2C serial commands, the Capture - Adjustments provides integrated controls for the camera's programmable features. The camera controls use the same concepts and terminology as specified by the camera manufacturer; the camera manufacturer's documentation describes the camera's features and controls.
The I2C Port allows enabling communication to the camera via its serial port. After being enabled, any change of the on-screen parameters simultaneously programs the camera and changes, as required, the PIXCI® - Video Setup.
The I2C Mode provides options governing communication with the camera. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the camera reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload. The Full Up/Dnload and Min. Up/Dnload options only appear for cameras which support downloading of parameters.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the camera, nor must the I2C Port be enabled; the camera's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
Optional controls may be present.
The I2C Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the camera to the Utilities - Message Log. This is primarily of interest to camera manufacturers and technical support.
An ''Activity'' sketch displays an indication of the current activity, such as uploading commands to the camera, downloading the camera's current settings, or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
Selected cameras are controlled by dedicated signals derived from the PIXCI® D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, or D3XE frame grabber. The signals, and the camera features controlled, are unique to each camera.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature which operates in conjunction with the camera's RS-232 or Camera Link Serial controls. The feature described here is implemented by XCAP for selected cameras that do not implement AGC internally.
The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
For cameras with adjustable gain, if the AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. For cameras with adjustable exposure, if AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure. If both are selected, the exposure is increased before increasing gain, and gain decreased before decreasing exposure.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras that do not implement white balance or color correction internally, and especially for cameras which output raw Bayer data, Capture - Adjustments provides white balance and color correction features. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras that implement white balance or color correction internally, and especially for cameras which output raw Bayer data, XCAP may offer additional white balance and color correction features - either to complement the cameras' own features (especially for cameras whose internal features provide only a coarse white balance correction), or as an alternative to the cameras' features (especially for the sake of providing similar controls for each of several different cameras). The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting Uncorrected which disables white balance and color corrections features, and Corrected which initially selects a ''no-effect'' white balance and color correction, but enables white balancing and color correction features as described below.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[41] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
For special illumination condition: Do Adjust White Balance through Advanced Color Space Calibration in that order.
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides a gain and offset correction, also known as flat field correction, feature. The feature described here is implemented by XCAP for selected cameras that do not implement gain and offset normalizations internally.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides a automatic contrast enhancement feature. The feature described here is implemented by XCAP typically for use with cameras outputting ''raw'' pixel values without in-camera black level correction or contrast correction - typically cameras for infrared (IR) and scientific applications.
The Automatic Contrast Enhancement (ACE) On enables or disables image contrast enhancement.
The Manual selects manual contrast enhancement with the Low Pixel Limit specifying the dark pixel value to be mapped to black, High Pixel Limit specifying the light pixel value to be mapped to white.
The Auto selects automatic contrast enhancement; the contrast of the image is continuously monitored and adjusted. Using a histogram of the image data, the Low Percentile Limit selects the pixel value corresponding to the indicated histogram percentile as the lower pixel limit, and the High Percentile Limit selects the pixel value corresponding to the indicated histogram percentile as the higher pixel limit; the image is contrast enhanced using the lower pixel limit as black and the higher pixel limit as white.
For Auto mode, the Subsample optionally selects the density of the image analyzed to obtain the histogram; analyzing fewer lines is quicker, but small image features might not contribute to the histogram. The AOI Sample optionally selects a centered area of the image area analyzed to obtain the histogram; analyzing a smaller area is quicker and prioritizes the center of the image.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras, the Set Video Window button allows interactive specification of a capture video window (not to be confused with a processing or analysis AOI which can be set via the AOI/ROI Manager) by drawing a Graphic Window over the desired portion of the image. Depending on frame grabber and camera features, the capture video window may be implemented by the frame grabber (identical to what can be done non-graphically via Video Setup - Resolution) or may activate camera specific features.
The Max Video Window restores the capture video window. The Max Video Window button is inactive when Set Video Window is active, and vice versa. To set a different video capture window when one is already set, first click Max Video Window then click Set Video Window. If both buttons are inactive, either there is insufficient frame buffer memory for a single, full resolution image (see PIXCI® - Driver Assistant), or the Image Orientation, below, is in use.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras, the Bit Depth specifies the number of bits per pixel, or per pixel component for color cameras, to be captured.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras, the Bit Packing specifies, when capturing other than 8 or 16 bits per pixel value, whether each value is to be ''enlarged'' to the next multiple of 8 bits before transfer and storage in frame buffer memory, or whether several values are to be packed together (such as packing four 10 bit values into five 8 bit values, packing two 12 bit values into three 8 bit values, or packing four 14 bit values in seven 8 byte values). The former reduces overhead of displaying and processing the pixels, the latter reduces bus bandwidth and reduces the amount of frame buffer memory needed to store an image.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras, post-capture re-orientation of the image is provided via Image Orientation. The Top L-R selects the camera's native orientation and provides the fastest display rates. The other selections, Top R-L, Bottom L-R, Bottom R-L, Left T-B, Left B-T, Right T-B, and Right B-T allow reorientation and mirror-flipping of the image. The Image Orientation options are performed by software after the image has been captured and affect display, processing, analyzing, loading, and saving of the image.
Several features of the Capture - Adjustments window are common to many models of the PIXCI® CL1, CL2, CL3SD, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, D3XE, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8CAM, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, EL1DB, ELS2, SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers when used in conjunction with digital cameras that allow control of exposure, frame rate, and/or triggering through the PIXCI® frame grabber. These features appear inactive until the camera is placed in a mode that allows the feature's control through the PIXCI® frame grabber.
The Controlled Exposure or Controlled Integration allows controlling the camera's exposure or integration period. The Continuous versus Single Shot allows selecting continuous (periodic) operation or single shot (asynchronous triggering) operation. The Controlled Frame Rate allows controlling the camera's frame rate, when operated in Continuous mode. The Strobe Output selects the polarity of an output strobe signal which indicates camera exposure; Negative Pulse specifies a negative going pulse and Positive Pulse specifies a positive going pulse.
The Trigger Input, Single Shot, and/or Continuous allow selecting various trigger modes and sources. For cameras with older software support where the Trigger Input provides None, Rising Edge, and Falling Edge selections: selecting None combined with Single Shot selects use of the Snap button to arm and trigger the capture; selecting None combined with Continuous selects use of the Live button to arm and capture continuously without any trigger; selecting Rising Edge or Falling Edge combined with Continuous selects use of the Snap button to arm once, or Live button to arm continuously, with the rising or falling edge of an input trigger signal, respectively, triggering the capture. For cameras with newer software support where the Trigger Input provides None, Rising Edge, Falling Edge, and Snap Button selections: selecting None or Snap Button combined with Single Shot selects use of the Snap button to arm and trigger the capture; selecting None combined with Continuous selects use of the Live button to arm and capture continuously; selecting Rising Edge and Falling Edge combined with Single Shot selects use of the Snap button to arm once, or Live button to arm continuously, with the rising or falling edge of an input trigger signal, respectively, triggering the capture.
For some cameras a Min(imum) Retrigger Period is provided for use in conjunction with a Trigger Input of Rising Edge or Falling Edge; the Min(imum) Retrigger Period specifies the minimum period after application of the first trigger during which any additional triggers are ignored and thus help avoid false triggering.
Several features of the Capture - Adjustments window are common to many models of the PIXCI® CL1, CL2, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, D3XE, E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, and EL1DB frame grabbers when used in conjunction with digital cameras that allow control of exposure, line rate, and/or triggering through the PIXCI® frame grabber. These features appear inactive until the camera is placed in a mode that allows the feature's control through the PIXCI® frame grabber.
The Controlled Exposure or Controlled Integration allows controlling the camera's exposure or integration period. The H Trigger Input provides None to select periodic initiation of exposure via the PIXCI® frame grabber, Rising Edge to select initiation of exposure by the rising edge of an ''H Valid'' signal, and Falling Edge to select initiation of exposure by the falling edge of an ''H Valid'' signal, per line. The Controlled Line Rate allows controlling the camera's line rate, when operated in H Trigger Input as None mode. The V Drive provides Mastered and Slaved; if Mastered each group of lines is captured as an image periodically, if Slaved each group of lines is captured while the ''Frame Valid'' signal is asserted.
The Lines per Image specifies the number of scan lines which are to be collected and displayed as a two dimensional image. A larger number of lines produces a larger image, but a slower update rate.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers and cameras, the Snap Sync @ Counter versus Snap Async @ Counter allows selecting whether, in V Drive Mastered mode, a Snap immediately starts capturing with the next line, or waits until the current count of lines expires before capturing.
Software | Software | |||||
White/Color | Software | per-Pixel | ||||
Camera | Type | Controls | Balance | AGC/AEC | Normalization | |
Adimec - | ||||||
1000c/s | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
1000c/d | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
1000m/s | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
1000m/d | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
RA-1000m | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
1600c/s | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
1600c/d | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
1600m/s | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
1600m/d | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A2000c/d | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A2000c/s | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A2000m/d | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A2000m/s | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
MX12P/2xx3 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
MX12P/8xx3 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
OPAL-1000m/CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
OPAL-1000c/CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
OPAL-1600m/CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
OPAL-1600c/CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
OPAL-2000m/CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
OPAL-2000c/CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
OPAL-4000m/CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
OPAL-4000c/CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
OPAL-8000m/CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
OPAL-8000c/CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMX6-DHD30-Im/CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TMX6-DHD30-Ib/CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMX6-DHD30-Ic/CL | Area Bayer/RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMX6-DHD60-Im/CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TMX6-DHD60-Ib/CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Allied Vision Technologies - | ||||||
Bonito CMC-4000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bonito CMC-4000C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Amber - | ||||||
AE4128 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
AE4256 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
Anafocus - | ||||||
Lince5M181 EK | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lince5M181 EK Color | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Aptina - | ||||||
MT9J001 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MT9J001C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
MT9M031 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MT9V031C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
MT9N001C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
MT9V032 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MT9V032C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Atmel - | ||||||
ATMOS 1M30 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
ATMOS 1M60 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
ATMOS 2M30 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
ATMOS 2M60 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA C2 CL 4010 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA M4 CL 2048 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA M4 CL 6144 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA M4 CL 8192 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA SC2 CL 4010 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
Camelia 4M | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
Camelia 4M Bayer | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
Camelia C1 CL 8M | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Camelia C1 LV 8M | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
Camelia M1 CL 8M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Camelia M1 LV 8M | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
Atmel-Grenoble - | ||||||
78CA88A | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
TH78CA13 | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
TH78CA14 | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
TH78CA15 | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
Basler - | ||||||
A101 (A113) & A101-P | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
A101-C (A113-C) & A101-CP | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
A101-C(P) (A113-C) w. Toucan | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
A102k | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
A201 (A210) Dual Output | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
A201b | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
A201bc | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
A201 One Tap w. Toucan | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
A202K | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A202KC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A301b | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A301bc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A301k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A301kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A302b | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A302bc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A302k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A302kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A402k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A402k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A403k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A403kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A404k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A404kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A406k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A406kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A501k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A501kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
A504k | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
A504kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Ace acA2000-140km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Ace acA2000-340km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Ace acA2040-70km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Ace acA2040-180km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Ace acA2000-140kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Ace acA2000-340kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Ace acA2040-70kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Ace acA2040-180kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Aviator avA1000km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Aviator avA1000kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Aviator avA1600km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Aviator avA1600kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Aviator avA1900km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Aviator avA1900kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Aviator avA2300km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Aviator avA2300kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Beat beA4000-62km | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Beat beA4000-62kc | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
L50 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
L75 | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L101(L120) 1K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L101(L120) 1K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L101(L120) 2K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L101(L120) 2K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L101K-1K | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L101K-2K | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L102(L130) 1K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L102(L130) 1K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L102(L130) 2K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L102(L130) 2K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L103(L140)-1K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L103(L140)-1K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L103(L140)-2K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L103(L140)-2K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L103K-1K | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L103K-2K | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L104(L160)-1K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L104(L160)-1K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L104(L160)-2K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L104(L160)-2K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L104K-1K | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L104K-2K | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L201(L220)-4K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L201(L220)-4K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L202(L230)-4K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L202(L230)-4K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L203(L240)-4K Dual Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L203(L240)-4K Single Output | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
L301kc | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
L301kc-12k | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
L301 w. BIC RGB | Line RGB | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
L304kc | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
L401k | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L402k | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L801k | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L802k | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
L803k | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Sprint spL2048_39km | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Sprint spL2048_70km | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Sprint spL2048_140km | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Sprint spL4096_20km | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Sprint spL4096_39km | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Sprint spL4096_70kc | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
Sprint spL4096_70km | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Sprint spL4096_140km | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Baumer - | ||||||
HXC13 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
HXC20 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
HXC20c | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
HXC40 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
HXC40c | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
SXC10 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SXC20 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SXC21 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SXC40 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SXC80 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
BioPhotonics - | ||||||
Qmax 650 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
Chrontel - | ||||||
CH5001 | Area Mono/YUV | None | N/A | No | No | |
CH5002 | Area Mono/YUV | None | N/A | No | No | |
CIS | ||||||
VCC-F32S29CL Bayer Mode | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VCC-F32S29CL RGB Mode | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VCC-G22V31PCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VCC-G32S11CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CMOS Sensor - | ||||||
i-cis S-206-0250 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
i-cis S-206-0520 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
i-cis S-505-0520 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Cohu - | ||||||
4110 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
6612 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
6612RGB | Area Bayer | None | Yes | No | No | |
7500 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
7500-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
7700/7722-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
7700/7712-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
7800/7820-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
7800/7810-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
7800/7840-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
7800/7830-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
7800/7870-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
7800/7860-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
7900/7920-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
7900/7910-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Cooke | ||||||
PCO.Edge | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Critical Link | ||||||
MityCAM-B2521 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CTEC Photonics - | ||||||
1300 | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
Cypress - | ||||||
HAS2 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
LUPA-300 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
LUPA-300RGB | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Dage-MTI - | ||||||
IFG-300 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
Dalsa - | ||||||
1M28-SA | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
1M75-SA | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
1M150-SA | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-0256A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-0256N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-0512A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-0512N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-1024A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-1024N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-1728A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-1728N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-2048A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C3-2048N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-0256A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-0256N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-0512A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-0512N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-1024A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-1024N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-1728A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-1728N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-2048A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C4-2048N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C5-2048A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C5-2048N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C6-2048A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C6-2048T | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C7-3456A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C7-3456N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C7-4096A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C7-4096N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C8-6000A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-C8-6000N | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-0512A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-0512T | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-0512W | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-1024A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-1024A TwoCam | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-1024T | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-1024W | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-2048A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-2048T | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-CB-2048W | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-E1-0512A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-E1-1024A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-E1-2048A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-E2-0512A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-E2-1024A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-E2-2048A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-F2-0512A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-F2-1024A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-F2-2048A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-P1-0512 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-P1-1024 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-P1-2048 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-P1-4096 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-P4-6144(CL-P4-6144W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-P4-8192(CL-P4-8192W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CL-T5-1024 | Line RGB | PIXCI® signals | No | No | No | |
CL-T5-2048 | Line RGB | PIXCI® signals | No | No | No | |
CL-T7-1024 | Line RGB | PIXCI® signals | No | No | No | |
CL-T7-2048 | Line RGB | PIXCI® signals | No | No | No | |
CT-E1-0512A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-E2-0512A | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-E4-2048(CT-E4-2048W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-E4-4096(CT-E4-4096W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-F3-2048 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-F3-4096 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-P1-1024(CT-P1-1024W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-P1-2048(CT-P1-2048W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-P1-4096(CT-P1-4096W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-P4-6144(CT-P4-6144W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CT-P4-8192(CT-P4-8192W) | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
EC-11-01k40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
EC-11-02k40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
EC-11-05h40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
Falcon 1.4M100 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Falcon PT-21-04M30 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Falcon PT-22-04M30 | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Falcon PT-41-04M60 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Falcon PT-42-04M60 | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Linea LA-CC-04K05 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
Linea LA-CC-08K05 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
Pantera DS-1A-01M30 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Pantera DS-21-01M60 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Pantera DS-21-04M15 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Pantera PT-21-06M08 | Area Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha HS-4X-02K30 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha PC-30-02K80 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
Piranha PC-30-02K60 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
Piranha PC-30-04K80 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
Piranha PC-30-04K60 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-4X-02K40 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-4X-04K40 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-4X-06K40 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-4X-08K40 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-21-1024 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-21-2048 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-21-4096 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-21-6144 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha2 P2-21-8192 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha4 P4-CM-02K10 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Piranha4 P4-CM-04K05 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SP-11-01K30 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-11-01K40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-11-02K30 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-11-02K40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-11-05H30 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-11-05H40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-13-02K30 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-14-01k30 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-14-01k40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-14-02k30 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-14-02k40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-14-05h30 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SP-14-05h40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
Spyder2 S2-1x-01K40 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Spyder2 S2-1x-02K40 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Spyder2 S2-1x-05H40 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Spyder2 S2-2x-04K40 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TR31-01k25 | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR31-01k25 10 Bit | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR31-02k25 | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR31-02k25 10 Bit | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR33-01k25 | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR33-02k25 | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR34-01k25 | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR34-02k25 | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR35-01k25 | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
TR35-02k25 | Line RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
Dalstar - | ||||||
CA-D1-0064A | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
CA-D1-0064T | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
CA-D1-0256A | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CA-D1-0256T | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CA-D7T | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
CA-D8-0512 | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
DS-2x-01M40(CA-D4A) | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
DS-4x-65K955(CA-D6-0256) | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
DS-4x-300K262(CA-D6-0512) | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
DS-11-16K7H(CA-D1-0128A) | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
DS-12-16K5H(CA-D1-0128T) | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
Dalstar(SMD) - | ||||||
1M30P | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
1M30PC | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
1M30TC | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
1M60 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
4M4 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
4M15 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
6M3P | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
6M3PC | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
64K1M | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
BT25 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
DS-1x-01M15(1M15) | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
DS-1x-01M30(1M30) | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
DS-1x-04M4(4M4) | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
DS-1x-06M3(6M3P) | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
DVC - | ||||||
DVC-08 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
DVC-10 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
DVC-1300C-RS-232 | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1300C w/o RS-232 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
DVC-1300-RS-232 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-1300 w/o RS-232 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
DVC-1310 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-1310AC | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1310AC-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1310AM | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-1310AM-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-1310C | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1312 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-1312AC | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1312AC-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1312AM | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-1312AM-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-1312C | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1412AC | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1412AC-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | No | |
DVC-1412AM | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-1412AM-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-Intensicam I (10 bit) | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-Intensicam I (12 bit) | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DVC-Intensicam II | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | Yes | No | |
DRS - | ||||||
Zafiro | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
860x480 Dual Band | Area Mono | RS-422 | N/A | No | No | |
e2v - | ||||||
AViiVA M2 CL 0514 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA M2 CL 1010 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA M2 CL 1014 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA M2 CL 2010 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA M2 CL 2014 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA M2 CL 4010 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA SM2 CL 0514 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA SM2 CL 1010 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA SM2 CL 1014 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA SM2 CL 2010 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA SM2 CL 2014 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
AViiVA SM2 CL 4010 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
ELIIXA+ 8K CL | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
ELIIXA+ 4K CL | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lince5M Dev Kit | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lince5M Color Dev Kit | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
EG&G Reticon - | ||||||
LD2002 1 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2002 2 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2005 1 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2005 2 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2010 1 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2010 2 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2020 1 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2020 2 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2040 1 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2040 2 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2060 1 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2060 2 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2080 1 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
LD2080 2 chan. | Line Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
MD4013 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
YD5010 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
YD5020 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
YD5040 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
YD5060 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Eastman Kodak - | ||||||
KAC-0310 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
KAC-0310C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
KAC-1310 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
KAC-1310C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
FastVideo - | ||||||
LUPA300 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
Focus - | ||||||
FI-HR-2 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
FI-HR-2C | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
FI-HR-M | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
FI-HR-RGB | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
Foveon - | ||||||
Foveon F13 DevCam | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Gigaphoton - | ||||||
Gigaphoton-256 | Line Mono | PIXCI signals | N/A | No | No | |
Gigaphoton-512 | Line Mono | PIXCI signals | N/A | No | No | |
Gigaphoton-1024 | Line Mono | PIXCI signals | N/A | No | No | |
Goodrich Sensors Unlimited - | ||||||
SU128 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
SU320 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
SU320M | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
SU640 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
SU640SDV | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SU640SDV-II | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Hamamatsu - | ||||||
C4742-95-8 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
C4742-95-10 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
C4742-95-12 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
C7942 | Area Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
C9250DP | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
HanVision - | ||||||
HVDUO-5M | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
HVDUO-10M (HVDUO3) | Area RGB | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
HVDUO-10M-CL | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
HVSOLO-11 | Line Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
Hitachi - | ||||||
DDX-101 | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
KP-F30SCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-FR30SCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
KP-F31SCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-FR31SCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
KP-F80SCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F100 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F100A | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | Yes | |
KP-F100A-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
KP-F100B | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | Yes | |
KP-F100B-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
KP-F100C | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
KP-F100-S7 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F100UV | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | Yes | |
KP-F102 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F110 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F120 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F120-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F200-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F200SCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-F230SCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-FR230SCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
KP-F500SCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-FR500SCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
KP-FD30-CL | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
KP-FD140SCL | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
KP-FD202SCL | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
KP-F520WCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-FM500WCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
KP-FMD500WCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
HV-F22CL-S3 | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | Yes | |
HV-F31CL-S3 | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | Yes | |
IDT - | ||||||
M-3 Mono | Area Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
M-3 Color | Area Bayer | C.L. Generic | Yes | No | No | |
M-5 Mono | Area Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
M-5 Color | Area Bayer | C.L. Generic | Yes | No | No | |
Ikegami - | ||||||
SKC-141 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ITT Night Vision(Xybion) - | ||||||
ISG-750 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
Illunis - | ||||||
MMV-1020 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
MMV-1020C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
MMV-11000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
MMV-11000C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
XMV-11000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
IMPERX - | ||||||
Bobcat ICL-B0610C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B0610M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B0620C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B0620M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1020M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1020C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1040M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1040C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1310M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1310C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1320M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1320C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1410C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1410M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1411M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1411C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1610C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1610M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1620C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1620M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1621M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1621C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1920C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1920M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1921M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B1921C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2020C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2020M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2041C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2041M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2320M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2320C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2520M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2520C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B2740M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B3320M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B3320C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B3340M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B3340C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B3440M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B4020C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B4020M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B4820M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B4820C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B4821M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B4821C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B4841M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B4841C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B6620M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B6620C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B6640M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Bobcat ICL-B6640C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Cheetah C4120M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-1M48 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-1M48C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-1M48-L | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-1M48-LC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-2M30H-L | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-2M30H-LC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-2M30L | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-2M30LC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-4M15-L | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-4M15-LC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-11M5L | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-11M5LC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-16M3L | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-16M3LC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-VGA120L | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-VGA120LC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-VGA210 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-VGA210C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-VGA210L | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Lynx IPX-VGA210LC | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
MDC-1004 (MDC-M1CL01) | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
MDC-1004C (MDC-C1CL01) | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Tiger T2040M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Tiger T8810M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Tiger T8820M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Indigo - | ||||||
Alpha NIR | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
Phoenix-RTIE | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
Inframetrics - | ||||||
760 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
Intevac - | ||||||
MicroVista | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
INTRON - | ||||||
12 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
12C | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
ISVI - | ||||||
IC-C05HCM | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
IC-C10HCM | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
IC-M15HFM | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
IC-C15HFM | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
IC-M25HFM | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
IC-C25HFM | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Jai - | ||||||
AM-200CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CV-L107CL | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
CV-M2CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CV-M4 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
CV-M4+CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CV-M4CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CV-M7+CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
CV-M8CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
CM-140MCL/PMCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CB-140MCL/PMCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
CM-200MCL/PMCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CB-200MCL/PMCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
JAI(Pulnix) - | ||||||
TM-1000/TM-1001 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
TM-1010 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
TM-1020-15 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
TM-1020-15CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-1040 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
TM-1300 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
TM-1320-15CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-1325-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-1400-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-2016-8CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-4100CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-4200CL | Area Mono | C.L. Generic | No | No | No | |
TM-6700CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-6710 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
TM-6710-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-6740CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-6760-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
TM-9701 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
TMC-1000-CL | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
TMC-1020-15CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMC-1320-15 | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
TMC-1320-15CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMC-1325-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMC-1400-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMC-4100CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMC-6700CL | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
TMC-6760-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
TMC-9700 | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
LORD Imaging - | ||||||
DVL5000T | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Mikrotron - | ||||||
MC1310 | Area Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
MC1311 | Area Bayer | C.L. Generic | Yes | No | No | |
MC1360 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MC1361 | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
MC1362 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MC1363 | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Mitsubishi Rayon - | ||||||
MKS-2048-20 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
MKS-5000-20 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
MKS-5000-40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
MKS-7450-20 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
MKS-7450-40 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
Micron - | ||||||
MT9M001 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MT9M001C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
MT9P001 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MT9P001C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
MT9T001C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
MT9V022 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MT9V022C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
MT9V403 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
MT9V403C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
NAC - | ||||||
HotShot 512 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
HotShot 512C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
HotShot 1280 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
HotShot 1280C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
NED - | ||||||
XCM4040SAT2 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
NIT - | ||||||
WiDy SenS 640M-STPE | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Perkin Elmer - | ||||||
LD3521-CL | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3521-LVDS | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3522-CL | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3522-LVDS | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3523-CL | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3523-LVDS | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3541-CL | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3541-LVDS | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3542-CL | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3542-LVDS | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3543-CL | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
LD3543-LVDS | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
SmartBlue SB0440 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SmartBlue SB1440 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SmartBlue SB2480 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SmartBlue SB4480 | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
YD5010 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
YD5020 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
YD5040 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
YD5060 | Line RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Photon Vision - | ||||||
ACS-I | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
Photonfocus - | ||||||
MV-D1024E | Area Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
MV2-D1280 | Area Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
Photonis - | ||||||
NOCTURN XL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Photo Research - | ||||||
PR-920 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
Point Grey - | ||||||
Gazelle GZL-CL-22C5 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Gazelle GZL-CL-41C6 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Princeton Instruments | ||||||
ES1602 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES2001 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES2001 Dual | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES2001 Quad | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES2001RGB | Area RGB/Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
ES2020 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES2020RGB | Area RGB/Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
ES2093 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES2093 Dual | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES2093RGB | Area RGB/Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
ES3200 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES4020 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES4020 Dual | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES4020 Quad | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES4020RGB | Area RGB/Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
EC11000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
EC11000 Dual | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
EC11000 Quad | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES11000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES11000 Dual | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES11000 Quad | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
ES11000RGB | Area RGB/Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
EC16000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
EP16000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Raptor Photonics - | ||||||
Condor | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Cygnet | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Cygnet RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
Cygnet CY4MP-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Eagle | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Eagle XO 42-10 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Eagle XO/XV 42-40 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Eagle XO/XV 47-10 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Falco 285-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Falco III | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Hawk-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Hawk 252 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Hawk 800 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Hawk 1920 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Hawk 1920 C | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Hobby COTS | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Kestrel 60 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Kestrel 1000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Kingfisher674 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Kingfisher674 Colour | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Kingfisher694 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Kingfisher694 Colour | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Kite-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Ninox 640 II | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Ninox 640 SU | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Ninox 1280 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Owl 320 HS S | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Owl 320 HS | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Owl 320 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Owl 640 II | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Owl 640 M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Owl 640 S | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Owl 640 T | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Owl 1280 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Osprey | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Osprey RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
Toucan 3011 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
Redlake(DuncanTech) - | ||||||
DT1100 | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
MS3100-RGB | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
MS3100-RGB(CL) | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
RH1100 | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
Redlake MASD - | ||||||
1.4 8 bit | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
1.4i 8 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
1.6i 8 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
1.6i 10 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
4.2i 8 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
4.2i 10 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
6.3i 8 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
6.3i 10 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
16.8i 8 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
16.8i 10 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0 8 bit 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/10 bit 1 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/10 bit 1 chan. RGB/Toucan8 | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
ES-1.0/10 bit 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/1015T | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/1015T RGB/Toucan8 | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
ES-1.0/1030T | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/1215 12 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/1230 12 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/1260 12 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/C/8 bit 1 chan. Bayer | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
ES-1.0/MV | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/SC 8 bit 1 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1.0/SC RGB/Toucan8 | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
ES-4.0 8 bit 1 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-4.0 8 bit 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-4.0 12 bit | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-4.0 12 bit 1 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-4.0 12 bit 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-4.0/E 8 bit 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-4.0/E 12 bit 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-4.0/E 12 bit 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-310 8 bit 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-310 Turbo 2 chan. | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1020 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
ES-1020C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Salvador Imaging - | ||||||
SI-VGA60-EM-Color | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-VGA60-EM | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-1M30-EM | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-16M4-EM | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-16M4-EM-Color | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
Silicon Imaging - | ||||||
SI-640HFM | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-640HFRGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-1280FM | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-1280FRGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-1300M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-1300RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-1920HD-M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
SI-1920HD-RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
SI-3170M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-3170RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-3171M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-3171RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-3300RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-4000 | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-6600M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-6600RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SI-14000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
SI-14000RGB | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
SILICON VIDEO® - | ||||||
0310 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
0310C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
10C6 | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
10M6 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
10C-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
10M-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
20C-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
20M-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
1281C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
1281M | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
1310 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
1310C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
1514CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
1820CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
15C5 | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
1C45 | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
1M45 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
2112 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
2112C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
2212 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
2212C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
2KS-C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
2KS-M | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
5C10 | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
5M10 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
642C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
642M | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
643C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
643M | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
9C10 | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
9M001 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | Yes | Yes | |
9M001C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
9T001C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | Yes | Yes | |
WGA-C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
WGA-M | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
SONY - | ||||||
XCL-5000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
XCL-5005 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
XCL-5005CR | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
XCL-CG510 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
XCL-SG1240 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
XCL-U1000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
XCL-U1000C | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
XCL-V500 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
XCL-X700 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SVS-VISTEK - | ||||||
SVS205SCCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
SVS205SCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
SVS285SCCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
SVS285SCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
Symagery - | ||||||
VCA1281 | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
VCA1281C | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Sentech - | ||||||
FS-C2KU7DCL | Line Color | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
FS-C4KU7DCL | Line Color | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
FS-C8KU7DCL | Line Color | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CL33A | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CLC33A | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CL83A | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CLC83A | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CL202A | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CLC202A | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CL232A | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CLC232A | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CL500A | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CLC500A | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CL1500 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CMB2MCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CMC2MCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CMB200CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CMC200CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CMB4MCL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CMC4MCL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STC-CMB401CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STC-CMC401CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
STL-2048 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
STL-5150 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
STL-7400RCL | Line Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
STL-7450 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
Takenaka - | ||||||
FC300 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
FC800 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
FC1300 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
FC1500 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
TL2048 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
TL5150 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
TL7450 | Line Mono | PIXCI® signals | N/A | No | No | |
Teli - | ||||||
CS3910 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
CS3910BH | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
CS3920 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
CS3930UV | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
CS6910CL | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | No | No | No | |
CSB-4000CL-10A | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CleverDragon CSCQS15BC23 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
CleverDragon CSCQS15CC23 | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
CleverDragon CSCQS15CC23 | Area RGB | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
CleverDragon CSC12M25BMP19 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CleverDragon CSC12M25CMP19 | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
CSL8000CL Mono Mode | Line Mono | C.L. Generic | No | No | No | |
CSL8000CL RGB Mode | Line RGB | C.L. Generic | No | No | No | |
Thomson/Thales - | ||||||
TH9560 | Line Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
Tichawa - | ||||||
CIS-0520-200 | Line Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
MiniCIS-600 | Line Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
MiniCIS-400 | Line Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
MiniCIS-100 | Line Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
MiniCIS-200 | Line Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
MiniCIS-200x4 | Line Mono | C.L. Generic | N/A | No | No | |
Toshiba - | ||||||
IK-SX1 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
IK-SX1L | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
IK-TU51CU | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
IK-TU61 | Area RGB | RS-232 | No | No | No | |
UNIQ - | ||||||
AS620 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
AS5000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
AS5000C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-600 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-600-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-610 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-610-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-685 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-685-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-800 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-800-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-900 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-900-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-900-CL 12 bit | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-930 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-930-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-1000 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-1030 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-1800 | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
UC-1800 12 bit | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
UC-1800-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-1800DS | Area Bayer | RS-232 | Yes | No | No | |
UC-1800DS-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-1830 | Area Bayer | Switches | Yes | No | No | |
UC-1830-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UC-2000-CL | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
UF-1000 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
UF-1000-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-600 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-600-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-610 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-610-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-680-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-685 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-685-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-800 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-800-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-900 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-900-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-900-CL 12 bit | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-900DS-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
UP-930 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-930-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-1000 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-1030 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-1800 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
UP-1800 12 bit | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-1800-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-1800-CL 12 bit | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
UP-1800DS | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
UP-1800DS-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-1830 | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-1830A | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
UP-1830-CL | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-1830-CL PIV | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
UP-1830-CL 12 bit | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
Varian - | ||||||
PaxScan 1313 | Area Mono | None | N/A | No | No | |
PaxScan 2520 | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
PaxScan 4030A | Area Mono | RS-232 | N/A | No | No | |
PaxScan 4030R | Area Mono | Switches | N/A | No | No | |
PaxScan 4030CB | Area Mono | I.P. | N/A | No | No | |
Vieworks | ||||||
VA-1M120 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VA-1M120C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VA-2M68 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VA-2MW64 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VA-2MW64C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VA-4M32 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VA-4M32C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VA-8M16 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VA-8M16C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VA-2M68C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VA-29MC-M5 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VA-29MC-C5 | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VC-4M110 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VC-4M110C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VC-4M160 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VC-4M160C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VC-4MC-M80 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VH-2M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VH-2M-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VH-4M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VH-4M-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VH-11M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VH-11M-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VH-16M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VH-16M-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VH-VGA | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VH-VGA-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VM-2M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VM-2M-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VM-4M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VM-4M-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VM-11M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VM-11M-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VM-16M | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
VM-16M-C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
VDS-Vosskuhler - | ||||||
CMC-4000 | Area Mono | C.L. Serial | N/A | No | No | |
CMC-4000C | Area Bayer | C.L. Serial | Yes | No | No | |
Zoran - | ||||||
ZR732112-MQS | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
ZR732112-PQS | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
ZR732212-MQS | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
ZR732212-PQS | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
ZR732312-MLC | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
ZR732312-PLC | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
ZR732316-MLC | Area Mono | I2C Serial | N/A | No | Yes | |
ZR732316-PLC | Area Bayer | I2C Serial | Yes | No | Yes | |
Adimec MX12P/8xx3,
MX12P/2xx3.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Adimec 1000m/s,
Adimec 1000m/d,
Adimec 1000c/s,
Adimec 1000c/d,
RA-1000m,
1600c/S,
1600c/D,
1600m/S,
1600m/D,
A2000m/s,
A2000c/s,
A2000m/d,
A2000c/d.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, are available. Camera serial controls allow adjusting the ''coarse'' white balance, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available for ''fine'' white balance and color adjustments.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
Adimec OPAL-1000m/CL,
OPAL-1000c/CL,
OPAL-1600m/CL,
OPAL-1600c/CL,
OPAL-2000m/CL,
OPAL-2000c/CL,
OPAL-4000m/CL,
OPAL-4000c/CL,
OPAL-8000m/CL,
OPAL-8000c/CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, are available. Camera serial controls allow adjusting the ''coarse'' white balance, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available for ''fine'' white balance and color adjustments.
Adimec TMX6-DHD30-Im/CL,
TMX6-DHD30-Ib/CL,
TMX6-DHD30-Ic/CL,
TMX6-DHD60-Im/CL,
TMX6-DHD60-Ib/CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
For color cameras outputting Bayer format, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, are available. Camera serial controls allow adjusting the white balance, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available for ''fine'' white balance and color adjustments.
For color cameras outputting RGB format, Camera serial controls allow adjusting the white balance, saturation, and edge enhancement. PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available for optional ''fine'' white balance and color adjustments.
Allied Vision Technologies Bonito CMC-4000 (formerly VDS-Vosskuler CMC-4000),
Bonito CMC-4000C (formerly VDS-Vosskuhler CMC-4000C).
In order to support the camera's maximum frame rate,
two PIXCI® frame grabbers, each with two Camera Link
cables, are required.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Frame Rate, Controlled Exposure, Min. Retrigger Period, Trigger Input, and Single Shot versus Continuous are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
If the camera's ''Metadata'' option is enabled, the metadata ''ID Constant'' and ''Frame Counter'' are shown.
Anafocus Lince5M181 EK,
Lince5M181 EK Color.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, and with the camera in 10 or 12 bit per pixel mode, a control for Bit Packing is available.
Atmel ATMOS 1M30,
1M60,
2M30,
2M60.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Atmel AViiVA M4 CL 2048,
M4 CL 6144,
M4 CL 8192.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Atmel AViiVA C2 CL 4010,
SC2 CL 4010.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Atmel Camelia 4M,
4M Bayer,
M1 LV 8M,
C1 LV 8M,
M1 CL 8M,
C1 CL 8M.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Atmel-Grenoble (formerly Thomson-CSF) TH78CA13,
TH78CA14,
TH78CA15.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Basler A101 (A113),
A101-P,
A101-C (A113-C),
A101-CP.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Basler A201 (A210).
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Basler A102k.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Basler A202k,
A202kc.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Basler A301b,
A301bc,
A302,
A302bc,
A301k,
A301kc,
A302k,
A302kc,
A201b,
A201bc.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Basler A402k,
A403k,
A403kc,
A404k,
A404kc,
A406k,
A406kc.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
If the camera's Data Stamp option is enabled, the data stamp's ''Frame Counter'', ''AOI Left'', ''AOI Top'', ''AOI Width'', ''AOI Height'', ''AOI Sequence Position'', and ''AOI Sequence Counter'' are shown.
Basler A501k,
A501kc,
A504k,
A501kc.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
The Camera Model allows specifying whether the camera is monochrome, is color, or whether the camera type should be determined by serial commands.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
The Alternate Controls button allows switching to an alternate style of Capture - Adjustments dialog, with simplified but fewer camera controls, combined with a simplified variation of the Capture - Video to Frame Buffers.
If the camera's Data Stamp option is enabled, the data stamp's ''AOI Left Stamp'', ''AOI Top Stamp'', ''AOI Width Stamp'', ''AOI Height Stamp'', and ''Frame Count Stamp'' are shown.
Basler Ace acA2000-140km,
acA2000-340km,
acA2040-70km,
acA2040-180km,
acA2000-140kc,
acA2000-340kc,
acA2040-70kc,
acA2040-180kc.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Basler Aviator avA1000km,
avA1000kc,
avA1600km,
avA1600kc,
avA1900km,
avA1900kc,
avA2300km,
avA2300kc.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Basler Ace beA4000-62kc,
beA4000-62km.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Basler L50,
L75.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
or
''Slaved'',
Lines per Image,
Exposure Control
to enable use of
Controlled Exposure,
and
Pixel Clock
to set the frequency of the pixel clock generated by the
PIXCI® D2X frame grabber for the camera,
are available.
Basler L101K,
L103K,
L104K.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Basler L101(L120),
L102(L130),
L103(L140),
L104(L160),
L201(L220,
L202(L230),
L203(L240).
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
Snap Sync @ Counter
versus
Snap Async @ Counter,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Basler L301kc.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
The R/G/B Line Offset specifies a software correction for the offset of red versus green versus blue lines, which is dependent on the line rate, triggering, and optics. The Basler L301kc also provides in-camera offset correction.
Basler L304kc.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
If the camera's Data Stamp option is enabled, the data stamp's ''Integrity Stamp'', ''Line Counter Stamp'', ''Line Sum Stamp'', ''High PixelCount Stamp'', ''Low PixelCount Stamp'', and ''Contrast Value Stamp'' are shown.
Basler L401k,
L402k.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
If the camera's Data Stamp option is enabled, the data stamp's ''Integrity Stamp'', ''Line Counter Stamp'', ''Line Sum Stamp'', ''High PixelCount Stamp'', ''Low PixelCount Stamp'', and ''Contrast Value Stamp'' are shown.
Basler L801k, L802k, L803k. In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Exposure, Controlled Line Rate, H Trigger Input, V Drive ''Mastered'' versus ''Slaved'', and Lines per Image are available.
If the camera's Data Stamp option is enabled, the data stamp's ''Integrity Stamp'', ''Line Counter Stamp'', ''Line Sum Stamp'', ''High PixelCount Stamp'', ''Low PixelCount Stamp'', and ''Contrast Value Stamp'' are shown.
Basler Sprint spL2048_39km,
spL2048_70km,
spL2048_140km,
spL4096_20km,
spL4096_39km,
spL4096_70kc,
spL4096_70km,
spL4096_140km.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
If the camera's Data Stamp option is enabled, the data stamp's ''Integrity Stamp'', ''Line Counter Stamp'', ''Line Sum Stamp'', ''High PixelCount Stamp'', ''Low PixelCount Stamp'', and ''Contrast Value Stamp'' are shown.
Baumer HXC13.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available.
Baumer HXC20,
HXC20c,
HXC40,
HXC40c.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Baumer SXC10,
SXC20,
SXC21,
SXC40,
SXC80,
SXC10C,
SXC20C,
SXC21C,
SXC40C,
SXC80C.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
CIS VCC-G22V31PCL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available.
CIS VCC-F32S29CL,
VCC-G32S11CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
CMOS Sensor i-cis S-206-0250,
S-206-0520,
S-505-0520.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
Cohu 6612,
6612RGB.
Controls
Camera Mode
and
Camera Shutter Speed
are provided which should be set to match the camera's settings.
Currently, camera modes 1, 7, 8, 14, 20, and 22 are supported
(see Cohu 6600 documentation for additional details).
Adjusting these controls to match the camera's
controls allows XCAP to configure the video setup
appropriately.
The Cohu 6600 settings can neither be set nor sensed
by XCAP.
Modifying the controls does not modify the camera's
settings, but is a convenient way to advise XCAP
of the camera's current settings!!!
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Frame Rate, Controlled Exposure, Min. Retrigger Period, Trigger Input, and Single Shot versus Continuous are available.
Cohu 7500,
7500-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Cohu 7700/7722-CL
7700/7712-CL
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Cohu 7800/7820-CL,
7800/7810-CL,
7800/7840-CL,
7800/7830-CL,
7800/7870-CL,
7800/7860-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Cohu 7900/7920-CL,
7900/7910-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Cooke PCO.Edge.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Critical Link MityCAM-B2521.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dage-MTI IFG-300.
Use of RS-232 control, rather than setting camera modes via its back panel,
is assumed by XCAP.
Dalstar DS-11-16K7H (CA-D1-0128 A),
DS-12-16K5H (CA-D1-0128 T),
CA-D1-0256 A,
CA-D1-0256 T.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Trigger Input,
Free Run
versus
Controlled,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous,
and
Camera Binning Mode
are available.
The Camera's Clock is: must be set to the camera's pixel clock frequency; it does not control the pixel clock frequency.
Dalsa DS-2x-01M40 (CA-D4A),
CA-D8-512.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Free Run
versus
Controlled,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalsa DS-4x-65K955(CA-D6-0256),
DS-4x-300K262(CA-D6-0512).
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Free Run
versus
Controlled,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalsa CA-D7T.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Free Run
versus
Controlled,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalsa CL-C3-0256A,
CL-C3-0256N,
CL-C3-0512A,
CL-C3-0512N,
CL-C3-1024A,
CL-C3-1024N,
CL-C3-1728A,
CL-C3-1728N,
CL-C3-2048A,
CL-C3-2048N,
CL-C4-0256A,
CL-C4-0256N,
CL-C4-0512A,
CL-C4-0512N,
CL-C4-1024A,
CL-C4-1024N,
CL-C4-1728A,
CL-C4-1728N,
CL-C4-2048A,
CL-C4-2048N,
CL-C5-2048A,
CL-C5-2048N,
CL-C6-2048A,
CL-C6-2048T,
CL-C7-3456A,
CL-C7-3456N,
CL-C7-4096A,
CL-C7-4096N,
CL-C8-6000A,
CL-C8-6000N,
CL-CB-0512A,
CL-CB-0512T,
CL-CB-0512W,
CL-CB-1024T,
CL-CB-1024W,
CL-CB-2048A,
CL-CB-2048T,
CL-CB-2048W,
CL-P1-0512,
CL-P1-1024,
CL-P1-2048,
CL-P1-4096,
CL-P4-6144(CL-P4-6144W),
CL-P4-8192(CL-P4-8192W),
CL-T5-1024,
CL-T5-2048,
CL-T7-1024,
CL-T7-2048.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Clock Source,
Trigger Mode,
Pixel Binning,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Clock to Camera,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
The Camera's Clock is: must be set to the camera's pixel clock frequency; it does not control the pixel clock frequency.
Dalsa CL-E1-0512A,
CL-E1-1024A,
CL-E1-2048A,
CL-E2-0512A,
CL-E2-1024A,
CL-E2-2048A,
CL-F2-0512A.
CL-F2-2048A,
CT-E1-0512A,
CT-E2-0512A.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Clock Source,
Stage Mode,
Trigger Mode,
Pixel Binning,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Clock to Camera,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
The Camera's Clock is: must be set to the camera's pixel clock frequency; it does not control the pixel clock frequency.
Dalsa Falcon 1.4M100.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalsa Falcon PT-21-04M30,
PT-22-04M30,
PT-41-04M60,
PT-42-04M60.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 bit mode.
Dalsa TR-31-01K25,
TR-31-02K25,
TR-33-01K25,
TR-33-02K25,
TR-34-01K25,
TR-34-02K25,
TR-35-01K25,
TR-35-02K25.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Clock Source,
Pixel Binning,
Gain,
Bidirectional Option,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Clock to Camera,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Dalsa CT-E4-2048(CT-E4-2048W),
CT-E4-4096(CT-E4-4096W),
CT-F3-2048,
CT-F3-4096,
CT-P1-1024(CT-P1-1024W),
CT-P1-2048(CT-P1-2048W),
CT-P1-4096(CT-P1-4096W),
CT-P4-6144(CT-P4-6144W),
CT-P4-8192(CT-P4-8192W).
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Clock Source,
Trigger Mode,
Stage Selection,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Clock to Camera,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
The Camera's Clock is: must be set to the camera's pixel clock frequency; it does not control the pixel clock frequency.
Dalsa EC-11-05H40,
EC-11-01K40,
EC-11-02K40.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Clock Source,
Trigger Mode,
Pixel Binning,
Gain,
Bidirectional Option,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Clock to Camera,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Dalsa SP-11-01K30,
SP-11-01K40,
SP-11-02K30,
SP-11-02K40,
SP-11-05H30,
SP-11-05H40,
SP-13-02K30,
SP-14-01K30,
SP-14-02K30,
SP-14-05H40,
SP-14-01K40,
SP-14-02K40.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Clock Source,
Trigger Mode,
Pixel Binning,
Gain,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Clock to Camera,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
The Camera's Clock is: must be set to the camera's pixel clock frequency; it does not control the pixel clock frequency.
Dalsa Pantera DS-21-04M15.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalsa Pantera DS-21-01M30,
DS-21-01M60.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
Dalsa Pantera PT-21-06M08,
PT-21-11M04.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by the generic
Capture - Adjustments,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalsa Linea LA-CC-04K05,
LA-CC-08K05.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Dalsa Piranha PC-30-02K80,
PC-30-02K60,
PC-30-04K80,
PC-30-04K60.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Dalsa Piranha HS-4X-02K30.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Dalsa Piranha2 P2-21-1024,
P2-21-2048,
P2-21-4096,
P2-21-6144,
P2-21-8192,
P2-4X-02K40,
P2-4X-04K40,
P2-4X-06K40,
P2-4X-08K40.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Dalsa Piranha4 P4-CM-02K10,
P4-CM-04K05.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Snap Sync @ Counter
versus
Snap Async @ Counter,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Dalsa Spyder2 S2-1x-01K40,
S2-1x-02K40,
S2-1x-05H40,
S2-2x-04K40.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Dalsa 1M28-SA,
1M75-SA,
1M150-SA.
Early versions of the Dalsa 1M28-SA and 1M75-SA are not fully Camera Link compliant
(check the camera's manual regarding serial communication
''parity''),
preventing use of serial communication for controlling the camera.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Photonis NOCTURN XL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
the camera provides triggering via a camera connector,
but not via the PIXCI® frame grabber.
Dalstar DS-1x-01M15 (formerly SMD 1M15).
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalstar DS-1x-01M30 (formerly SMD 1M30).
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalstar DS-1x-04M4 (formerly SMD 4M4).
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalstar DS-1x-06M3 (formerly SMD 6M3P).
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalstar (formerly SMD) BT25.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Dalstar (formerly SMD) 4M15,
4M4.
In order to support the Dalstar (formerly SMD) 4M15 camera's high bandwidth,
two PIXCI® frame grabbers are required.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Frame Rate, Controlled Exposure, Min. Retrigger Period, Trigger Input, and Single Shot versus Continuous are available.
Dalstar (formerly SMD) 1M60.
In order to support the camera's high bandwidth,
two PIXCI® frame grabbers are required.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Frame Rate, Controlled Exposure, Min. Retrigger Period, Trigger Input, and Single Shot versus Continuous are available.
Dalstar (formerly SMD) 6M3P,
6M3PC.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Dalstar (formerly SMD) 1M30,
1M30P,
1M30PC.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
The H-Offset Offset allows adjusting the H Offset relative to the expected value, for the same of some versions of the camera which require a different H Offset value.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Dalstar (formerly SMD) 64K1M.
In order to support the camera's high bandwidth,
two PIXCI® frame grabbers are required.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Frame Rate, Controlled Exposure, Min. Retrigger Period, Trigger Input, and Single Shot versus Continuous are available.
In the appropriate camera mode(s), the Ext. Trig. Connection allows selecting where the trigger is to be applied, as either Via PIXCI® or Camera 'Trig. In'.
The Dalstar(SMD) 64K1M is unusual in that each 1024×1024 video field sent by the camera to the frame grabber actually contains 17 image exposures. The Images per Frame selects how this unusual arrangement is handled. If 1 (1024x1024) is selected, XCAP treats the camera as if it were producing one ''normal'' image per field, with resolution 1024×1024. XCAP displays and saves 1024×1024 images, each Snap acquires one 1024×1024 image into the current frame buffer. For those interested, Dalstar(SMD) documentation describes the layout of the 17 image exposures within the 1024×1024 image.
If 17 (245x252) is selected, XCAP displays and saves images of size 245×252, decomposing the 1024×1024 video fields into individual image exposures. There are 17 times as many ''frame'' buffers as in the 1 (1024x1024) mode; buffers 0 through 16 are the 17 images of one captured 1024×1024 video field, buffers 17 through 33 are the 17 images of another captured 1024×1024 video field, etc. Since a Snap acquires one video field, a Snap into any of the 17 buffers, 0 through 16, will actually snap and update all buffers from 0 through 16; it is not necessary to use Capture - Video to Frame Buffers to capture a burst of 17 image exposures.
DVC 1300,
1300RGB.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
The Camera Model allows convenient switching between monochrome and color DVC 1300(C) cameras. If Monochrome is selected, a monochrome DVC 1300 camera is expected; if used with a color camera, a ''cross-hatch'''ed image is to be expected. If RGB is selected, a color DVC 1300RGB camera is expected; if used with a monochrome camera, color fringes will appear.
DVC 1300-RS-232,
1300RGB-RS-232,
1310,
1310C,
1312,
1312C,
1310AM,
1310AC,
1312AM,
1312AC,
1412AM,
1412AC.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
The Camera Model allows convenient switching between monochrome and color DVC 1300(C), 1310(C), 1312(C) 1310A(M)(C), 1312A(M)(C), or 1412A(M)(C) cameras. If Monochrome is selected, a monochrome DVC 1300-RS-232, 1310, 1312, 1310A, 1312AM, or 1412AM camera is expected; if used with a color camera, a ''cross-hatch'''ed image is to be expected. If RGB is selected, a color DVC 1300RGB-RS-232, 1310C, 1312C, 1310AC, 1312AC, or 1412AC camera is expected; if used with a monochrome camera, color fringes will appear. The following excerpts from DVC documentation provide hints on adjusting the gain and offset on the DVC 1300-RS-232, 1300RGB-RS-232, 1310, 1310C, 1312, 1312C, 1310AM, 1310AC, 1312AM, 1312AC, 1412AM, and 1412AC cameras.
A gain setting of ''0 dB'' corresponds to a recommended ''unity gain'' setting. This will ensure that the CCD does not saturate before the full-scale signal of the A/D converter is reached. Gain settings below 0 dB are perfectly usable, but the user should be aware that digital video output values may be ''clipped'' below the full-scale value.
An offset setting of ''0%'' corresponds to a ''black is black'' setting. This ensures that a black pixel at the CCD will be output as a zero digital video value; changes from this setting should be made after careful consideration ... indeed, in a color camera, changes from this setting can produce false colors.
DVC 1312AM-CL,
1312AC-CL,
1310AM-CL,
1310AC-CL,
1412AM-CL,
1412AC-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
The Camera Model allows convenient switching between monochrome and color DVC 1312AM-CL, 1312AC-CL, 1310AM-CL, 1310AC-CL, 1412AM-CL, or 1412AC-CL cameras. If Monochrome is selected, a monochrome DVC 1312AM-CL, 1310AM-CL, or 1412AM-CL, camera is expected; if used with a color camera, a ''cross-hatch'''ed image is to be expected. If RGB is selected, a color DVC 1312AC-CL, 1310AC-CL, or 1412AC-CL camera is expected; if used with a monochrome camera, color fringes will appear. The following excerpts from DVC documentation provide hints on adjusting the gain and offset on the DVC 312AM-CL, 1312AC-CL, 1310AM-CL, 1310AC-CL, 1412AM-CL, and 1412AC-CL cameras.
A gain setting of ''0 dB'' corresponds to a recommended ''unity gain'' setting. This will ensure that the CCD does not saturate before the full-scale signal of the A/D converter is reached. Gain settings below 0 dB are perfectly usable, but the user should be aware that digital video output values may be ''clipped'' below the full-scale value.
An offset setting of ''0%'' corresponds to a ''black is black'' setting. This ensures that a black pixel at the CCD will be output as a zero digital video value; changes from this setting should be made after careful consideration ... indeed, in a color camera, changes from this setting can produce false colors.
DVC 1310AMI,
1312AMI,
1412AMI.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
e2v (formerly Atmel) AviivA M2 CL 0514,
M2 CL 1010,
M2 CL 1014,
M2 CL 2010,
M2 CL 2014,
M2 CL 4010,
SM2 CL 0514,
SM2 CL 1010,
SM2 CL 1014,
SM2 CL 2010,
SM2 CL 2014,
SM2 CL 4010.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
e2v ELIIXA+ 8K CL,
ELIIXA+ 4K CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
e2v Lince5M Dev Kit,
Lince5M Color Dev Kit.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, and with the camera in 10 or 12 bit per pixel mode, a control for Bit Packing is available.
EG&G Reticon YD5010,
YD5020,
YD5040,
YD5060.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
EG&G Reticon LD2002 1 channel,
LD2002 2 channel,
LD2005 1 channel,
LD2005 2 channel,
LD2010 1 channel,
LD2010 2 channel,
LD2020 1 channel,
LD2020 2 channel,
LD2040 1 channel,
LD2040 2 channel,
LD2060 1 channel,
LD2060 2 channel,
LD2080 1 channel,
LD2080 2 channel.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Lines per Image
is available.
Gigaphoton 256,
5126,
1024.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
and
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Goodrich Sensors Unlimited SU128,
SU320,
SU640.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Free Run
versus
Controlled,
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Hamamatsu C4742.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Hamamatsu C7942.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Trigger Input,
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Binning,
and
Int(ernal)/Ext(ernal) Control
are available.
HanVision HVDUO3 (Foveon).
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
The Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the white balance. If Uncorrected, the camera's ''raw'' color correction controls are available, and otherwise disabled.
Hitachi KP-F100,
KP-F100C.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
A sketch of the camera's junction box is also shown. The Trig A and/or Trig B connections will be marked Active when the camera settings are such that the corresponding trigger input is in use.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Hitachi KP-F100A,
KP-F100B,
KP-F100ACL,
KP-F100BCL,
KP-F100UV.
Use of RS-232 or Camera Link serial control,
rather than setting camera modes via its back panel,
is assumed by XCAP.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Hitachi KP-F102.
Use of RS-232 control, rather than setting camera modes via its back panel,
is assumed by XCAP.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Hitachi KP-F110.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
A sketch of the camera's junction box is also shown. The Trig A and/or Trig B connections will be marked Active when the camera settings are such that the corresponding trigger input is in use.
Hitachi KP-F120,
KP-F120CL,
KP-F200CL.
Use of RS-232 or Camera Link serial control,
rather than setting camera modes via its back panel,
is assumed by XCAP.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Hitachi DDX-101.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
Hitachi KP-FD30SCL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Hitachi KP-F30SCL,
KP-FB30SCL,
KP-FR30SCL,
KP-F31SCL,
KP-FR31SCL,
KP-F80SCL,
KP-FD140SCL,
KP-F200SCL,
KP-FD202SCL,
KP-F230SCL,
KP-FR230CL,
KP-F500SCL,
KP-FR500SCL,
KP-F520WCL,
KP-FM500WCL,
KP-FMD500WCL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Ikegami SKC-141.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Illunis MMV-1020,
MMV-1020C.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Illunis XMV-11000.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
IMPERX Bobcat ICL-B0610M,
ICL-B0610C,
ICL-B0620M,
ICL-B0620C,
ICL-B1020M,
ICL-B1020C,
ICL-B1040M,
ICL-B1040C,
ICL-B1310M,
ICL-B1310C,
ICL-B1320M,
ICL-B1320C,
ICL-B1410M,
ICL-B1410C,
ICL-B1411M,
ICL-B1411C,
ICL-B1610M,
ICL-B1610C,
ICL-B1620M,
ICL-B1620C,
ICL-B1621M,
ICL-B1621C,
ICL-B1920M,
ICL-B1920C,
ICL-B1921M,
ICL-B1921C,
ICL-B2020M,
ICL-B2020C,
ICL-B2041M,
ICL-B2041C,
ICL-B2320M,
ICL-B2320C,
ICL-B2520M,
ICL-B2520C,
ICL-B2740M,
ICL-B3320M,
ICL-B3320C,
ICL-B3340M,
ICL-B3340C,
ICL-B3440M,
ICL-B4020M,
ICL-B4020C,
ICL-B4820M,
ICL-B4820C,
ICL-B4821M,
ICL-B4821C,
ICL-B6620M,
ICL-B6620C,
ICL-B6640M,
ICL-B6640C.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, and with the camera in 10 or 12 bit per pixel mode, a control for Bit Packing is available.
IMPERX Cheetah C4120M,
Tiger T2040M,
Tiger T8810M,
Tiger T8820M.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, and with the camera in 10 or 12 bit per pixel mode, a control for Bit Packing is available.
IMPERX MDC-1004 (formerly MDC-M1CL01),
MDC-1004C (formerly MDC-C1CL01),
IPX-1M48,
IPX-1M48C,
IPX-VGA210,
IPX-VGA210C.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
IMPERX IPX-1M48-L,
IPX-1M48-LC,
IPX-2M30L,
IPX-2M30LC,
IPX-2M30H-L,
IPX-2M30H-LC,
IPX-4M15L,
IPX-4M15LC,
IPX-11M5L,
IPX-11M5LC,
IPX-16M3L,
IPX-16M3LC,
IPX-VGA210L,
IPX-VGA210LC,
IPX-VGA120L,
IPX-VGA120LC.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, and with the camera in 10 or 12 bit per pixel mode, a control for Bit Packing is available.
ISVI IC-ICC05HCM,
IC-ICC10HCM.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Pixel Normalization, Normalization On, and other related Adjust - Common Gain & Offset Normalization Features are available.
Color cameras provide white balance and color controls via camera serial controls; PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are also provided; these are in addition to, and secondary to, the camera's white balance and color controls.
ISVI IC-M15HFM,
IC-C15HFM,
IC-M25HFM,
IC-C25HFM.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers,
and with the camera in 10 or 12 bit per pixel mode,
a control for
Bit Packing
is available.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Pixel Normalization, Normalization On, and other related Adjust - Common Gain & Offset Normalization Features are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Jai AM-200CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
Jai CV-M2CL,
CV-M8CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Jai CV-M4CL,
CV-M4+CL,
CV-M7+CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
JAI(Pulnix) TM-1000.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Trigger Mode
Normal
versus
Asynchronous
versus
Integrating,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
JAI(Pulnix) TM-9701.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Trigger Mode
Normal
versus
Asynchronous
versus
Integrating,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
JAI (formerly Pulnix) TM-1300.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Trigger Mode
Normal
versus
Asynchronous
versus
Integrating,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
JAI (formerly Pulnix) TM-1040.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Trigger Mode
Normal
versus
Asynchronous
versus
Integrating,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
JAI (formerly Pulnix) TM-6710. In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Frame Rate, Controlled Exposure, Min. Retrigger Period, Trigger Input, Trigger Mode Normal versus Asynchronous versus Integrating, and Single Shot versus Continuous are available.
JAI (formerly Pulnix) TMC-9700.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
JAI (formerly Pulnix) TM-1400-CL,
TM-1402-CL,
TMC-1400-CL,
TMC-1402-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Trigger Mode
Normal
versus
Asynchronous
versus
Integrating,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
JAI (formerly Pulnix) TMC-1000-CL,
TMC-6700CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Trigger Mode
Normal
versus
Asynchronous
versus
Integrating,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
JAI (formerly Pulnix) TM-1325-10Bit-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Trigger Mode
Normal
versus
Asynchronous
versus
Integrating,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
A control for Bit Depth allows capturing the camera's bit depth (10 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits. For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 bit mode.
JAI (formerly Pulnix) TM-1020-15,
TM-1020-15CL,
TM-1320-15CL,
TM-1325-CL,
TM-2016-8CL,
TMC-1020-15CL,
TMC-1320-15,
TMC-1320-15CL,
TMC-1325-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
Trigger Mode
Normal
versus
Asynchronous
versus
Integrating,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Point Grey Gazelle GZL-CL-22C5,
GZL-CL-41C6.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 bit mode.
Princeton Instruments (formerly Redlake) ES1602,
ES2001,
ES2001 Dual,
ES2001 Quad,
ES2001RGB,
ES2020,
ES2020RGB,
ES2093,
ES2093,
ES2093 Dual,
ES2093RGB,
ES3200,
ES4020,
ES4020 Dual,
ES4020 Quad,
ES4020RGB,
ES11000,
ES11000 Dual,
ES11000 Quad,
ES11000RGB,
EP16000,
EC11000,
EC11000 Dual,
EC11000 Quad,
EC16000.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For ''Dual'' and ''Quad'' configurations, where two or four camera heads are connected to a single Princeton Instruments(Redlake) controller, a single PIXCI® Image Viewer Window shows the two or four images, side by side or in quadrants, treating the multihead combination as a single camera. If the Princeton Instruments(Redlake) controller's Current Camera Configuration is not set to Four-head Mono, then set the Next Boot Configuration to Four-head Mono, click Reset Camera and wait for the controller to reboot. Set Mux Output to Custom, and the Mux Port 1, Mux Port 2, Mux Port 3, and Mux Port 4 (the latter two only for quad configurations) to Raw Sensor 1, Raw Sensor 2, Raw Sensor 3, and Raw Sensor 4, respectively.
For color cameras outputting Bayer format, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, are available.
Color cameras provide white balance and color controls via camera serial controls; PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are also provided; these are in addition to, and secondary to, the camera's white balance and color controls.
Redlake (formerly DuncanTech) RH1100,
MS3100-RGB,
MS3100-RGB(CL).
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) ES-310,
ES-310 Turbo.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) ES-4.0.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) ES-1.0,
ES-1.0/MV,
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) ES-1.0/1015T,
ES-1.0/1030T.
For the
PIXCI® D or D2X frame grabber for the Redlake (Kodak) ES-1.0/1015T and ES-1.0/1030T cameras,
the
Capture - Adjustments
provides controls for each of the cameras' programmable and controllable features.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) 6.3i.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) 1.6i.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) 16.8i. In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Frame Rate, Controlled Exposure, Min. Retrigger Period, Trigger Input, and Single Shot versus Continuous are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) 1.4i,
4.2i.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) ES-1.0/1260,
ES-1.0/1230,
ES-1.0/1215.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake (formerly Kodak) 1.4.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Redlake ES-1020.
ES-1020C.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Mitsubishi Rayon MKS-2048-20,
MKS-5000-20,
MKS-5000-40,
MKS-7450-20,
MKS-7450-40.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
''Mastered''
or
''Slaved'',
Lines per Image,
and
Pixel Clock
to set the frequency of the pixel clock generated by the
PIXCI® D2X frame grabber for the camera,
are available.
Perkin Elmer LD3521-LVDS,
LD3522-LVDS,
LD3523-LVDS,
LD3541-LVDS,
LD3542-LVDS,
LD3543-LVDS.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
H Trigger Input,
V Drive
Mastered
versus
Slaved,
Clock Source,
Trigger Mode,
Pixel Binning,
Gain,
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Clock to Camera,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
The Camera Clock Is: must be set to the camera's pixel clock frequency; it does not control the pixel clock frequency.
Perkin Elmer YD5010,
YD5020,
YD5040,
YD5060.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
H Trigger Input,
V Drive,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Raptor Photonics Condor,
Cygnet,
Cygnet RGB,
Cygnet CY4MP-CL,
Eagle,
Eagle XO 42-10,
Eagle XO/XV 42-40,
Eagle XO/XV 47-10,
Hobby COTS,
Kestrel 60,
Kestrel 1000,
Kingfisher674,
Kingfisher694,
Kingfisher674 Colour,
Kingfisher694 Colour,
Osprey,
Osprey RGB,
Toucan 3011.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
the camera provides triggering via a camera connector,
but not via the PIXCI® frame grabber.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available. PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Pixel Normalization, Normalization On, and other related Adjust - Common Gain & Offset Normalization Features are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, are available. Camera serial controls allow adjusting the ''coarse'' white balance, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available for ''fine'' white balance and color adjustments.
Raptor Photonics Falcon 285-CL,
Falcon III.
Kite-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
the camera provides triggering via a camera connector,
but not via the PIXCI® frame grabber.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available. PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Pixel Normalization, Normalization On, and other related Adjust - Common Gain & Offset Normalization Features are available.
Raptor Photonics Owl 320 HS S,
Owl 320 HS.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
the camera provides triggering via a camera connector,
but not via the PIXCI® frame grabber.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
Raptor Photonics Hawk-CL,
Raptor Photonics Hawk 252,
Raptor Photonics Hawk 800,
Raptor Photonics Hawk 1920.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
the camera provides triggering via a camera connector,
but not via the PIXCI® frame grabber.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available. For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available.
Raptor Photonics Hawk 1920 C.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for
Image Orientation
control is available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers,
a control for
Bit Packing
is available.
Raptor Photonics Ninox 640 II,
Ninox 1280,
Ninox 640 SU,
Owl 320,
Owl 640 II,
Owl 640 M,
Owl 640 S,
Owl 640 T,
Owl 1280.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
the camera provides triggering via a camera connector,
but not via the PIXCI® frame grabber.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available. For the Raptor Owl 1280 (12 bit) in conjunction with selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available.
Sentech STL-7450,
STL-5150,
STL-2048.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
Trigger Input,
Exposure Control,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Sentech FS-C2KU7DCL,
FS-C4KU7DCL,
FS-C8KU7DCL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
Trigger Input,
Exposure Control,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
Snap Sync @ Counter
versus
Snap Async @ Counter,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
The Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Sentech STC-1500.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Depth allows capturing the camera's bit depth (12 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
Sentech STL-7400RCL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
Trigger Input,
Exposure Control,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
Snap Sync @ Counter
versus
Snap Async @ Counter,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
The Camera Clock Is: must be set to the camera's pixel clock frequency; it does not control the pixel clock frequency.
The Exposure Control allows enabling Controlled Exposure.
Sentech STC-CL500A,
STC-CLC500A.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use when the camera is in 10 or 12 bit modes.
Sentech STC-CMB2MCL,
STC-CMC2MCL,
STC-CMB200CL,
STC-CMC200CL,
STC-CMB4MCL,
STC-CMC4MCL,
STC-CMB401CL,
STC-CMC401CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use when the camera is in 10 or 12 bit modes.
Sentech STC-CL33A,
STC-CLC33A,
STC-CL83A,
STC-CLC83A,
STC-CL202A,
STC-CLC202A.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Trigger Input,
Controlled Integration,
Controlled Frame Rate,
and
Min. Retrigger Period
are available.
The camera does not have a serial control to explicitly select
free-run versus trigger mode (the camera selects based on the CC1 signal);
the
Camera Trigger Mode
performs this function by controlling CC1.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Silicon Imaging SI-1300M,
SI-1300RGB,
SI-3300RGB.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Depth allows capturing the camera's bit depth (12 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits. A Bit Packing control is available for use in 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
A Camera Model control allows selecting monochrome mode with a color camera, so that the ''raw'' Bayer pattern can be observed and processed.
Silicon Imaging SI-1280FM,
SI-1280FRGB.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Depth allows capturing the camera's bit depth (12 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits. A Bit Packing control is available for use in 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
A Camera Model control allows selecting monochrome mode with a color camera, so that the ''raw'' Bayer pattern can be observed and processed.
Silicon Imaging SI-1920HD-M,
SI-1920HD-RGB.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Depth allows capturing the camera's bit depth (12 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits. A Bit Packing control is available for use in 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
A Camera Model control allows selecting monochrome mode with a color camera, so that the ''raw'' Bayer pattern can be observed and processed.
Silicon Imaging SI-3170M,
SI-3170RGB,
SI-3171M,
SI-3171RGB.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Depth allows capturing the camera's bit depth (12 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits. A Bit Packing control is available for use in 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
A Camera Model control allows selecting monochrome mode with a color camera, so that the ''raw'' Bayer pattern can be observed and processed.
Silicon Imaging SI-640HFM,
SI-640HFRGB.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Depth allows capturing the camera's bit depth (12 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits. A Bit Packing control is available for use in 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
A Camera Model control allows selecting monochrome mode with a color camera, so that the ''raw'' Bayer pattern can be observed and processed.
Silicon Imaging SI-6600RGB.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers,
a control for
Bit Depth
allows capturing the camera's bit depth
(12 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits.
A
Bit Packing
control is available for use in 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
A Camera Model control allows selecting monochrome mode with a color camera, so that the ''raw'' Bayer pattern can be observed and processed.
SVS-VISTEK SVS205SCL,
SVS205SCCL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
SVS-VISTEK SVS084SCL,
SVS204SCL,
SVS204SCCL,
SVS085SCL,
SVS085SCCL,
SVS285SCL,
SVS285SCCL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Takenaka FC300,
FC800,
FC1300,
FC1500.
Use of RS-232 control, rather than setting camera modes via its back panel,
is assumed by XCAP.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Takenaka TL7450,
TL5150,
TL2048.
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Exposure,
Controlled Line Rate,
Trigger Input,
Exposure Control,
V Drive
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Teli CS3910,
CS3920,
CS3910BH,
CS3930UV.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Teli CleverDragon CSC12M25BMP19,
CSC12M25CMP19.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, are available. Camera serial controls allow adjusting the ''coarse'' white balance, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available for ''fine'' white balance and color adjustments.
Teli CleverDragon CSCQS15BC23,
CSCQS15CC23,
CSCQS15CC23.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
Teli CS6910CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
Teli CSB-4000CL-10A.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Teli CSL8000CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by the generic
Capture - Adjustments,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Thomson TH78CA13,
TH78CA14,
TH78CA15.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Thomson/Thales TH9560.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
specifically, the internal vs. external
Sync Select,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Trigger Input,
V Drive
as
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Tichawa CIS-0520-200,
MiniCIS-600,
MiniCIS-400,
MiniCIS-100,
MiniCIS-200,
MiniCIS-200x4.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by the generic
Capture - Adjustments,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Line Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Exposure Polarity,
Trigger Input,
V Drive
as
''Mastered''
versus
''Slaved'',
Single Shot
versus
Continuous,
and
Lines per Image
are available.
Toshiba IK-SX1,
IK-SX1L.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Integration,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Uniq AS620,
AS5000,
AS5000C.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
Uniq UC-600,
UC-610,
UC-685,
UC-800,
UC-900,
UC-930,
UC-1000,
UC-1030,
UC-1830,
UP-600,
UP-610,
UP-685,
UP-800,
UP-900,
UP-930,
UP-1000,
UP-1030,
UP-1830,
UP-1830A.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Bit Depth,
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
Uniq UC-1800,
UC-1800DS,
UP-1800,
UP-1800DS.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Uniq UF-1000-CL,
UF-1000.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
Uniq UC-600-CL,
UC-610-CL,
UC-685-CL,
UC-800-CL,
UC-900-CL,
UC-930-CL,
UC-1800-CL,
UC-1830-CL,
UC-2000-CL,
UP-600-CL,
UP-610-CL,
UP-680-CL,
UP-685-CL,
UP-800-CL,
UP-900-CL,
UP-930-CL,
UP-1800-CL,
UP-1830-CL,
UP-1830-CL PIV,
UP-1830-CL 12 Bit.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Depth allows capturing the camera's maximum bit depth (10 or 12 bits) or capturing only the 8 most significant bits. A Bit Packing control is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
Uniq UC-1800DS-CL,
UP-1800DS-CL.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Varian PaxScan 2520,
4030A.
The
Capture - Adjustments
provides serial controls to select the sensor's mode.
Varian software may be used to create one or more
''modes'';
each mode specifying the sensor's resolution
and other operating characteristics.
The
Capture - Adjustments
provides
Current Mode
to allow selecting one of the predefined modes, and
adjusts the PIXCI® resolution accordingly;
it also provides
Handshake: PREPARE
to send the
''PREPARE''
command to the sensor.
The
Capture - Adjustments
does not offer controls to create additional
''modes''.
The Varian documentation should be consulted for additional information regarding ''modes'', ''PREPARE'', and a general overview of using these sensors. For those unfamiliar with both Varian sensors and PIXCI® frame grabbers, it may be helpful to first experiment with the Varian sensor connected only to an RS-170 analog monitor using Varian software; adding XCAP and the PIXCI® frame grabber afterwards for capturing and viewing higher quality images.
Varian PaxScan 4030CB.
The
Capture - Adjustments
operate via Varian's
vip_comm.dll
,
communicating to the sensor via internet protocol;
the correct client IP address and server IP address
must be provided.
The
Capture - Adjustments
provides controls to select the sensor's mode.
Varian software may be used to create one or more
''modes'';
each mode specifying the sensor's resolution
and other operating characteristics.
The
Capture - Adjustments
provides
Current Mode
to allow selecting one of the predefined modes, and
adjusts the PIXCI® resolution accordingly;
it also provides
Handshake: PREPARE
to send the
''PREPARE''
command to the sensor.
The
Capture - Adjustments
does not offer controls to create additional
''modes''.
The Varian documentation should be consulted for additional information regarding ''modes'', ''PREPARE'', and a general overview of using these sensors.
Varian Paxscan 4030R.
In the appropriate sensor mode(s) as set by camera switches,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
A PIXCI® frame grabber control for Image Orientation control is available.
Vieworks VA-1M120,
VA-1M120C,
VA-2M68,
VA-2MW64,
VA-2MW64C,
VA-4M32,
VA-4M32C,
VA-8M16,
VA-8M16C,
VA-2M68C,
VA-29MC-M5,
VA-29MC-C5,
VH-2M,
VH-2M-C,
VH-4M,
VH-4M-C,
VH-11M,
VH-11M-C,
VH-16M,
VH-16M-C,
VH-VGA,
VH-VGA-C,
VM-2M,
VM-2M-C,
VM-4M,
VM-4M-C,
VM-11M,
VM-11M-C,
VM-16M,
VM-16M-C.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For selected PIXCI® frame grabbers, a control for Bit Packing is available for use with the camera in 10 or 12 bit mode.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
Vieworks VC-4M110,
VC-4M110C,
VC-4M160,
VC-4M160C,
VC-4MC-M80.
In the appropriate camera mode(s) as set by serial controls,
PIXCI® frame grabber controls for
Controlled Frame Rate,
Controlled Exposure,
Min. Retrigger Period,
Trigger Input,
and
Single Shot
versus
Continuous
are available.
For color cameras, PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Sharpen, Bayer Process, as well as Color Temp/Mode, Color Quality, and other related Adjust - Common Color and White Balance Features are available.
For the PIXCI® CL3SD or E4 frame grabber for the Basler A504k and A504kc cameras, two styles of Capture - Adjustments dialogs are provided. The simpler style provides fewer, selected, integrated controls that is sufficient for many common applications. The advanced style provides all camera and PIXCI® CL3SD or E4 controls, but assumes more familiarity with the camera and PIXCI® CL3SD or E4 specifications and features. The Alternate Controls button in the advanced dialog, and the Advanced Controls button in the simpler dialog, allows switching from one style to the other.
The Preview/Live button allows activating live video for focusing and exposure adjustments, or freezing live video capture, and duplicate the Capture - Snap, Capture - Live, and Capture - UnLive features available from the menu-bar.
The Exposure and Frame Rate allow adjusting the camera's exposure and frame rate; A faster Frame Rate and thus a shorter frame period automatically reduces the Exposure, as needed, to be no larger than the frame period. A slower Frame Rate and thus a longer frame period automatically adjusts the Exposure to the maximum permissible only if Max Exposure per Frame Rate is checked; some applications prefer the longest possible exposure for a given frame rate to increase sensitivity, other applications select a shorter exposure to help ''freeze'' motion.
The Dig(ital) Gain allows increasing the camera gain by multiplying each pixel's value by one, two, four, or eight. The Offset allows adjusting the camera's offset, or black level, so that black areas don't appear as grey; it is often needed in conjunction with Dig(ital) Gain.
The Set Video AOI button allows reducing the video resolution (the number of pixels captured per line and column) and allows capturing more video frames in a given size of frame buffer memory. Reducing the resolution also allows higher frame rates. Note: Changing the capture resolution will destroy any previously captured images!
The Max Video AOI button restores the video resolution to the camera's maximum.
For color cameras, the White Balance button adjusts the white balance correction; the camera should be pointed at a white target before the button is clicked. Use of quality, non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target is suggested, rather than a white piece of paper.
The Clear Buffers button sets all frame buffers to white.
The Trigger Mode allows selecting the desired sequence capture mode. In Free Run, sequence capture starts when the Record button is clicked.
In Ext. Start Event, sequence capture is armed when the Record button is clicked and is started by the next trigger. The Delayed Trigger allows delaying the start of sequence capture after application of the trigger.
In Ext. Stop Event, sequence capture is armed when the Record button is clicked and is stopped by the next trigger. The Pretrigger allows delaying the termination of sequence capture after application of the trigger. A Pretrigger of 50% results in half of the captured images predating the trigger and half postdating the trigger.
In Ext. Image Trigger sequence capture is armed when the Record button is clicked and each image of the sequence captured upon application of the trigger.
All sequence capture modes can be prematurely terminated by the Cancel button (square icon).
After sequence capture, the Play button (right-arrow icon) allows playing the sequence forward, and each click of the Fast Play button (double right-arrow icon) causes the play speed to increase. The Reverse Play button (left-arrow icon) allows playing the sequence reversed, and each click of the Fast Reverse Play button (double left-arrow icon) causes the reverse play speed to increase.
The Cancel button (square icon) stops play or reverse play. The Buffer numeric control shows the current buffer being displayed, and allows direct numeric entry of a desired buffer for display. Similarly, the Buffer slider indicates the approximate buffer being displayed, and allows manually scanning through the sequence and selecting a buffer.
The
Save Seq.
and
Load Seq.
allows saving and re-loading a captured sequence.
These buttons access simplified versions of the
Image File - Save Sequence
and
Image File - Load Sequence
features,
and allow saving or loading the sequence in TIFF (i.e.
.tif
)
and AVI (i.e.
.avi
)
formats.
The advanced style provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
In the appropriate camera mode(s), PIXCI® frame grabber controls for Controlled Frame Rate, Controlled Exposure, Min. Retrigger Period, Trigger Input, and Single Shot, versus Continuous are available.
When using the advanced controls, sequence capture is provided by a separate dialog, described in Capture - Video to Frame Buffers.
For the Basler A504kc cameras, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Auto White Balance feature is not available for use with the PIXCI® CL3SD.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[42] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
For special illumination condition: Do Adjust White Balance through Advanced Color Space Calibration in that order.
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 10C6 and 10M6 cameras, and for the PIXCI® E4 and E4DB (versions w. PoCL), E8, E8DB, and EB1-PoCL frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 10C-CL and 10M-CL cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's analog gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. Use of Gain less than 4 dB is not recommended, as the full range of pixel values may not be usable regardless of illumination and exposure settings. The Digital Gain allows adjusting the camera's post A-D digital gain.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 10C6 and 10C-CL, also provides individual controls for Red Gain, GreenB Gain, GreenR Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period. The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI, (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion and mirroring of the image. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2 or ×4 horizontally and by a factor of ×2, ×4, ×8, (mu16, or ×32 vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate. The (Subsample) with Binning allows selecting whether the Subsampling uses averaging of pixels in each subsampled group rather than decimation, to reduce random noise. The (Subsample) with Binning is only available with a Subsampling selection of 2×2 or 4×4.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-Run or Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) frame mode. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® EB1-PoCL, SI, SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber. The Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) mode provides shorter delay from trigger to exposure, but expects use of strobed flash illumination.
The Strobe Mode and Strobe Period allows enabling an output strobe to synchronize a flash or other external device to the camera's exposure. The Strobe Polarity allows inverting the output strobe.
For SILICON VIDEO® 10C6 and 10M6 cameras, the Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. A faster pixel clock also minimizes blur due to the camera's rolling shutter when capturing images of moving objects. For SILICON VIDEO® 10C-CL and 10M-CL cameras, the pixel clock frequency is fixed.
The Frame Rate allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 10C6, 10M6, 10C-CL, and 10M-CL cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Dig(ital) Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Digital Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If two or more of AGC Adjusts Gain, Digital Gain, and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Exp/DigGain/Gain so that exposure is increased before increasing gain and gain decreased before decreasing exposure, or Gain/DigGain/Exp so that gain is increased before increasing exposure and exposure decreased before decreasing gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Dig(ital) Gain, Max Dig(ital) Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure allow setting the minimum and maximum gain, digital gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 10C6, 10M6, 10C-CL, and 10M-CL cameras, the Digital Gain control is relatively coarse with few, and widely spaced, allowable settings; the (AGC) Accelerator may have to be set to a larger value for AGC to be able to affect the value of Digital Gain.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 10C6 and 10C-CL cameras, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[43] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections, and defect substitutions, which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset & Defect selects offset (subtractive) corrections and defect substitutions, and Gain & Offset & Defect selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, offset (subtractive) corrections, and defect substitutions. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU). Defect corrections are useful for replacing pixels that can't otherwise be corrected with offset and/or gain corrections.
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections and substitutions to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the individual correction coefficients for each pixel; defect corrections, is used, share the frame buffer with offset corrections.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical. The Extract Defect Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically of a uniform bright, but not saturated, image captured of a white or grey surface, and identifies ''bad'' pixels whose value is to be replaced with a neighboring pixel; the higher the Extract Defect Threshold, the higher the allowed variance among the image's pixels before marking a questionable pixel as defective.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence), Extract Gain Ref(erence), and Extract Defect Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. The Clear Defect Map clears all of the defect pixel substitutions to 0, effectively disabling defect pixel corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations and defect analyses; if corrections and substitutions are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients and the per-pixel defect map; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Save Defect Coord(inates) and Load Defect Coord(inates) allow saving and loading the current per-pixel defect map; a text file format is used, with two numeric coordinates of each defect per line.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
Use of gain and offset correction for the SILICON VIDEO® 10C6 and 10C-CL is not required for typical applications. For the SILICON VIDEO® 10M6 and 10M-CL monochrome cameras, unavoidable differences in the characteristics of the four taps, unique to each camera, may cause the image to have a ''checkerboard'' appearance which can be eliminated via per-pixel gain corrections. The differences in characteristics of the four taps are immaterial when Subsampling is 2×2 or larger. Alternately, for the SILICON VIDEO® 10M6 and 10M-CL cameras, the Capture - Adjustments allows adjusting the Tap Balance; the relative gain of the even/odd pixels-per-row and the even/odd pixels-per-column. The Tap Balance requires less overhead for image processing and display, but there may be residual differences among pixel values depending on the pixels' position in the image. The Balance Tap 0, Balance Tap 1, Balance Tap 2, and Balance Tap 3 allows adjusting the relative gain of the even/odd pixels-per-row and the even/odd pixels-per-column. Alternately, clicking Extract Balance Ref(erence) on the current image, and sets the balance adjustments accordingly. The captured image does not have to be a carefully illuminated ''flat-field''; a blank piece of paper or bland wall using normal ambient illumination is sufficient, as the different taps correspond to even/odd pixels and not quadrants of the image. Further, the area of the image to be analyzed can be set via Set Tap AOI; if the entire image isn't ''flat'', the use of a carefully selected AOI of a flat part of the image allows effective tap balancing.
For the PIXCI® E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, and EL1DB frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 20C-CL and 20M-CL cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Analog Gain allows adjusting the camera's analog gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); using (Analog Gain) Normal to force recommended analog gain values provides optimal linearity and minimal pixel noise. Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain.
The ADC Gain allows adjusting the camera's A-D converter to obtain more gain; using (ADC) Normal to force recommended ADC values provides optimal linearity and minimal pixel noise. Use of ADC Gain less than 1.4 or 2.0 (depending on Data Mode) is not recommended, as the full range of pixel values may not be usable regardless of illumination and exposure settings.
The Dark Level allows adjusting the camera's black level or pixel offset.
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period. The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; extended exposures exceed the nominal frame period and will reduce the frame rate.
The AOI 1 Top, AOI 1 Height through AOI 8 Top, AOI 8 Height allow selecting one or more areas of interest which are read-out and captured. Capturing fewer lines decreases the image size, and also allows a faster frame rate. Up to eight areas of interest of different heights are allowed, but can't overlap vertically. The camera's horizontal area of interest can't be changed, the AOI Width and AOI Left shows the width and horizontal position of the area of interest, but neither is adjustable. A graphic displays the relationship of the chosen AOI(s) relative to the sensor.
The Subsampling allows selecting vertical subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of 2, 4, 8, or 16 producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate. The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion of the image.
The Data Mode allows selecting the number of bits per pixel, the number of taps used (i.e. number of pixel values output per clock), and the Camera Link mode.
Data Mode | Camera Link | Nominal | Notes | |
Mode | Clock | Frame Rate | ||
8 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | 8.1 fps | 2560 clocks per LVAL, 3840 lines. |
8 bit 8 tap | Full | 62 MHz | 25. fps | Consecutive even/odd sensor lines |
output as one Camera Link line, | ||||
1280 clocks per LVAL, 1920 lines. | ||||
8 bit 8 tap | Full | 74.3 MHz | 30. fps | Consecutive even/odd sensor lines |
output as one Camera Link line, | ||||
1280 clocks per LVAL, 1920 lines. | ||||
10 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | 8.1 fps | 2560 clocks per LVAL, 3840 lines. |
10 bit 8 tap | 80-Bit | 62 MHz | 25. fps | Consecutive even/odd sensor lines |
output as one Camera Link line, | ||||
1280 clocks per LVAL, 1920 lines. | ||||
10 bit 8 tap | 80-Bit | 74.3 MHz | 30. fps | Consecutive even/odd sensor lines |
output as one Camera Link line, | ||||
1280 clocks per LVAL, 1920 lines. | ||||
12 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | 8.1 fps | 2560 clocks per LVAL, 3840 lines. |
12 bit | 80-Bit | 74.4 MHz | 25. fps | Three 80-bit 'words' |
20/3 tap | parsed into twenty 12 bit pixels. | |||
Consecutive even/odd sensor lines | ||||
output as one Camera Link line, | ||||
1536 clocks per LVAL, 1920 lines. |
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-Run or Controlled frame mode. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, or EL1DB frame grabber.
The Black Sun Protection allows protecting against ''black sun'' artifacts, where a very bright object is partially black instead of saturated white (and regardless of the Exposure). A value of 0 disables protection, larger values offer increasing levels of protection but also increased levels of fixed pattern noise (FPN).
In the Two-Slope mode, the Exposure effectively controls the exposure of dark pixels, the Exposure Knee 1 and the DAC Knee 1 effectively controls the exposure of bright pixels.
In the Three-Slope mode, the Exposure effectively controls the exposure of dark pixels, the Exposure Knee 1 and the DAC Knee 1 effectively controls the exposure of bright pixels, and the Exposure Knee 2 and the DAC Knee 2 effectively controls the exposure of very bright pixels.
More precisely, the Exposure Knee 1 specifies the additional exposure after bright pixels reach the DAC Knee 1 pixel value, and the Exposure Knee 2 specifies the additional exposure after very bright pixels reach the DAC Knee 2 pixel value.
The DAC Knee 1 and DAC Knee 2 are specified as a percentage of maximum pixel value. The Exposure Knee 1 and Exposure Knee 2 can be specified in milliseconds, as is Exposure, or can be specified as a percentage of the Exposure, allowing them to track the Exposure value.
The Lookup Table Mapping allows Disabling or Enabling the lookup table transformation on pixel values.
The LUT Type selects the lookup table values to be loaded and thus the pixel remapping. If Gamma is selected, a nonlinear power curve specified by gamma correction curve with gamma of LUT Gamma is loaded. If Gamma Invert is selected, an inverted nonlinear power curve specified by gamma correction curve with gamma of LUT Gamma is loaded. A LUT Gamma less than 0 is often used with 8 or 10 bit output modes, assigning a greater range of pixel values to dark areas of the scene and assigning fewer pixels values to bright areas of the scene - where the human is less sensitive to small differences.
If 1 Knee is selected, a piecewise curve of two linear segments, with slopes Lut Knee Slope 1 and Lut Knee Slope 2 applied before & after the ''knee'' pixel value of LUT Knee 1, is loaded. If 1 Knee Invert is selected, an inverted 1 Knee curve is loaded.
If 2 Knee is selected, a piecewise curve of three linear segments, with slopes Lut Knee Slope 1, Lut Knee Slope 2, and Lut Knee Slope 3 applied before & after the ''knee'' pixel values of LUT Knee 1 and LUT Knee 2 is loaded. If 2 Knee Invert is selected, an inverted 2 Knee curve is loaded.
If Linear is selected, a linear curve is loaded; however, simply disabling the Lookup Table Mapping has the same effect on the camera's pixel values. If Linear Invert is selected, an inverted linear curve is loaded.
If Lookup Table Loading is Disabled, a lookup table is not loaded; if Lookup Table Mapping is enabled, then the camera's current lookup table values are used. This option allows minimizing serial communication with the camera, by not reloading the lookup table values.
The graph of the lookup table curve selected by LUT Type and related parameters is displayed, with original pixel value on the abscissa (horizontal) axis and modified pixel value on the ordinate (vertical) axis.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 20C-CL and 20M-CL cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Analog Gain. However, as the camera only provides four possible Analog Gain settings (×1.60, ×1.90, ×2.25, ×2.55) the effectiveness of automatic control of the Analog Gain is necessarily coarse and limited.
If AGC Adjusts Adc Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's ADC Gain; this option has no effect if ADC Normal is selected to force the suggested value of ADC Gain.
If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If two or more of AGC Adjusts Gain, AGC Adjusts Adc Gain, and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Gain/AdcGain/Exp so that analog gain is increased before ADC gain and exposure, and exposure decreased before ADC gain and analog gain; or AdcGain/Gain/Exp so that ADC gain is increased before gain and exposure, and exposure decreased before analog gain and ADC gain; or Exp/AdcGain/Gain so that exposure is increased before ADC gain and analog gain, and analog gain decreased before ADC gain and exposure; or Exp/Gain/AdcGain so that exposure is increased before analog gain and ADC gain, and ADC gain decreased before analog gain and exposure.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Adc Gain, Max Adc Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum gain, ADC gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 20C-CL camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[44] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections, and defect substitutions, which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset & Defect selects offset (subtractive) corrections and defect substitutions, and Gain & Offset & Defect selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, offset (subtractive) corrections, and defect substitutions. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU). Defect corrections are useful for replacing pixels that can't otherwise be corrected with offset and/or gain corrections.
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections and substitutions to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the individual correction coefficients for each pixel; defect corrections, is used, share the frame buffer with offset corrections.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical. The Extract Defect Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically of a uniform bright, but not saturated, image captured of a white or grey surface, and identifies ''bad'' pixels whose value is to be replaced with a neighboring pixel; the higher the Extract Defect Threshold, the higher the allowed variance among the image's pixels before marking a questionable pixel as defective.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence), Extract Gain Ref(erence), and Extract Defect Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. The Clear Defect Map clears all of the defect pixel substitutions to 0, effectively disabling defect pixel corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations and defect analyses; if corrections and substitutions are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients and the per-pixel defect map; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Save Defect Coord(inates) and Load Defect Coord(inates) allow saving and loading the current per-pixel defect map; a text file format is used, with two numeric coordinates of each defect per line.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
Without gain and offset correction, unavoidable differences in the characteristics of the sensor's internal signal paths, unique to each camera, may cause a visible intensity difference between the left vs right half of the image, and, to a lesser extent, between the odd and even lines of the image. These differences can be eliminated via per-pixel gain corrections.
Alternately, the Capture - Adjustments allows adjusting the Tap Balance; the relative gain and offset of the left vs right half and odd vs even rows. The Tap Balance requires less overhead for image processing and display than per-pixel corrections, but there may be residual differences among pixel values depending on the pixels' position in the image.
The Ni "Gain Bal(alance) Left Even" , Ep "Gain Bal(alance) Left Even" , Ni "Gain Bal(alance) Left Odd" , Ep "Gain Bal(alance) Left Odd" , Ni "Gain Bal(alance) Right Even" , Ep "Gain Bal(alance) Right Even" , Ni "Gain Bal(alance) Right Odd" , Ep "Gain Bal(alance) Right Odd" , Ni "Offset Bal(alance) Left Even" , Ep "Offset Bal(alance) Left Even" , Ni "Offset Bal(alance) Left Odd" , Ep "Offset Bal(alance) Left Odd" , Ni "Offset Bal(alance) Right Even" , Ep "Offset Bal(alance) Right Even" , and Ni "Offset Bal(alance) Right Odd" , Ep "Offset Bal(alance) Right Odd" , allows adjusting the relative gain and offset of the left vs right half and the odd vs even rows.
Alternately, clicking Extract Offset Tap Balance analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and and sets the offset balance accordingly. The Extract Gain Tap Balance analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and sets the offset balance accordingly. The area of the image to be analyzed can be set via Set Tap AOI; if the entire image isn't ''flat'', the use of a carefully selected AOI of a flat part of the image allows effective tap balancing. With consideration for the design of the sensor and tap balancing requirements, the AOI is automatically centered horizontally.
The gain and offset corrections, or tap balance, should be re-extracted after the camera's ADC Gain Subsampling, Scan Direction, Number of AOIs, AOI Top, AOI Height, or Data Mode is changed. The gain correction, or tap balance, should be re-extracted after offset correction, or tap balance, is changed.
For the PIXCI® D2X frame grabber for the SILICON VIDEO® 1281M and 1281C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain.
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period.
The Enable Short Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to include exposures shorter than one scan line.
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity.
The Mode allows selecting Video or Controlled. In Video mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® D2X frame grabber.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1281M and 1281C cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure. If both are selected, the exposure is increased before increasing gain, and gain decreased before decreasing exposure. The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum gain and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1281C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[45] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1281M and 1281C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments also provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of sensitivity of individual pixels on individual cameras. The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® D2X frame grabber for the SILICON VIDEO® 1310 and 1310C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. For the SILICON VIDEO® 1310C, also provides individual controls for Red Gain, GrnR Gain, GrnB Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Offset allows adjusting the pixel value offset, or black level.
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period.
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Readout Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inverting and/or mirror imaging. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by 2×2, 4×4, 8×8, and combinations thereof, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-Run or Controlled video mode. In Free-Run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Strobe Out, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® D2X frame grabber.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. A faster pixel clock also minimizes blur due to the camera's rolling shutter when capturing images of moving objects. In Free-Run mode, the Frame Rate allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
In Controlled mode, the Strobe Mode allows selecting an exposure (output) strobe as One Line to be active for one line of the exposure, Exposure to be active for the entire exposure, or Disabled to be inactive. If active, the Strobe Output selects Negative Pulse or Positive Pulse polarity. Note that selecting Exposure limits the range of allowable exposures.
The Bit Depth allows selecting 10 bits per pixel component value for greater dynamic range, or 8 bits per pixel component value to reduce the amount of memory required per image and increase the number of images that can be stored within a fixed amount of frame buffer memory.
The Neg. ADC Ref. and Pos. ADC Ref. allow adjusting the A-D references and can provide more gain, at the expense of linearity and noise. These should be used only by those familiar with the camera's sensor and its specifications.
The Digital Offset and Digital Offset 0 through Digital Offset 63 allows adjusting the offsets of individual columns so as to reduce the visual impact of fixed pattern noise. These should be used only by those familiar with the camera's sensor and its specifications.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1310 and 1310C cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure. If both are selected, the exposure is increased before increasing gain, and gain decreased before decreasing exposure. The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum gain and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1310C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[46] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
The Advanced Camera White Calibration allows performing a camera white calibration, with the camera pointed at a white target, adjusting the camera's Red Gain, Green Gain, and Blue Gain. Use of quality, non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target rather than a white piece of paper, is suggested.
For most common illumination conditions:
For special illumination condition: Do Advanced Camera White Calibration through Adjust White Balance in that order.
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1310 and 1310C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments also provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of sensitivity of individual pixels on individual cameras. The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, and EL1DB frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL camera, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's analog gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. Use of Gain less than 0 dB is not recommended, as the full range of pixel values may not be usable regardless of illumination and exposure settings. The Digital Gain allows adjusting the camera's post A-D digital gain.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL, individual controls for Red (Digital) Gain, GreenB (Digital) Gain, GreenR (Digital) Gain, and Blue (Digital) Gain are also provided; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period. The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. its inverse, frame period). The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the Data Mode, AOI Width, AOI Height, and Subsampling, below.
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view. The AOI Max forces the maximum area of interest, but does not disable Subsampling, below.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion and mirroring of the image. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2 or ×4 horizontally and by a factor of ×2, ×4, ×8, (mu16, or ×32 vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate.
With a Subsampling selection of 2×2 or 4×4, the H(orizontal) & V(ertical) Binning allows selecting whether the Subsampling uses averaging of pixels in each subsampled group rather than decimation, so as to reduce random noise. Further, the V Summing allows selecting whether binning uses column summation rather than averaging, for increased sensitivity.
The Data Mode allows selecting the number of bits per pixel, the number of taps used (i.e. number of pixel values output per clock), and the Camera Link mode.
Data Mode | Camera Link | Camera Link | Nominal Max |
Mode | Clock | Frame Rate | |
8 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | TBD fps |
8 bit 8 tap | Full | 80 MHz | TBD fps |
10 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | TBD fps |
10 bit 8 tap | 80-Bit | 80 MHz | TBD fps |
12 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | TBD fps |
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-Run or Controlled frame mode. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, or EL1DB frame grabber.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL camera, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Dig(ital) Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Digital Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If more than one of AGC Adjusts Gain, AGC Adjusts Dig(ital) Gain, and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Gain/DigGain/Exp so that analog gain is increased before digital gain which is increased before exposure, DigGain/Gain/Exp so that digital gain is increased before analog gain which is increased before exposure, Exp/DigGain/Gain so that exposure is increased before digital gain which is increased before analog gain, or Exp/Gain/DigGain so that exposure is increased before analog gain which is increased before digital gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Dig(ital) Gain, Max Dig(ital) Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure allow setting the minimum and maximum analog gain, digital gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[47] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections, and defect substitutions, which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset & Defect selects offset (subtractive) corrections and defect substitutions, and Gain & Offset & Defect selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, offset (subtractive) corrections, and defect substitutions. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU). Defect corrections are useful for replacing pixels that can't otherwise be corrected with offset and/or gain corrections.
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections and substitutions to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the individual correction coefficients for each pixel; defect corrections, is used, share the frame buffer with offset corrections.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical. The Extract Defect Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically of a uniform bright, but not saturated, image captured of a white or grey surface, and identifies ''bad'' pixels whose value is to be replaced with a neighboring pixel; the higher the Extract Defect Threshold, the higher the allowed variance among the image's pixels before marking a questionable pixel as defective.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence), Extract Gain Ref(erence), and Extract Defect Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. The Clear Defect Map clears all of the defect pixel substitutions to 0, effectively disabling defect pixel corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations and defect analyses; if corrections and substitutions are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients and the per-pixel defect map; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Save Defect Coord(inates) and Load Defect Coord(inates) allow saving and loading the current per-pixel defect map; a text file format is used, with two numeric coordinates of each defect per line.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
Use of gain and offset correction for the SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL is not required for typical applications.
For the PIXCI® E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, and EL1DB frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL camera, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's analog gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. Use of Gain less than 0 dB is not recommended, as the full range of pixel values may not be usable regardless of illumination and exposure settings. The Digital Gain allows adjusting the camera's post A-D digital gain.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL, individual controls for Red (Digital) Gain, GreenB (Digital) Gain, GreenR (Digital) Gain, and Blue (Digital) Gain are also provided; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period. The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. its inverse, frame period). The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the Data Mode, AOI Width, AOI Height, and Subsampling, below.
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view. The AOI Max forces the maximum area of interest, but does not disable Subsampling, below. A graphic displays the relationship of the chosen AOI relative to the sensor.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion and mirroring of the image. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2 or ×4 horizontally and by a factor of ×2, ×4, or ×8 vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate. The (Subsample with) Horiz(ontal) Binning allows selecting whether the horizontal Subsampling actually uses binning, averaging pixels in each 2×- group, rather than decimation. The (Subsample with) Vert(ical) Summing allows selecting whether the vertical Subsampling actually uses binning, summing pixels in each -×2 group, rather than decimation. The (Subsample with) Horiz(ontal) Binning is only available with subsampling horizontally by a factor of ×2, the (Subsample with) Vert(ical) Summing is only available with subsampling vertically by a factor of ×2.
The Data Mode allows selecting the number of bits per pixel, the number of taps used (i.e. number of pixel values output per clock), and the Camera Link mode.
Data Mode | Camera Link | Camera Link | Nominal Max |
Mode | Clock | Frame Rate | |
8 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | 8.5 fps |
8 bit 8 tap | Full | 80 MHz | 24. fps |
10 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | 8.5 fps |
10 bit 8 tap | 80-Bit | 80 MHz | 24. fps |
12 bit 2 tap | Base | 80 MHz | 8.5 fps |
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-Run or Controlled frame mode. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® E1, E1DB, E4, E4DB, E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, E8, E8DB, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EB1, EB1G2, EB1-PoCL, EB1G2-PoCL, EB1mini, miniH2B, miniH2F, miniH2x4F, mf2280, EC1, ECB1, ECB1-34, ECB2, EL1, or EL1DB frame grabber.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL camera, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Dig(ital) Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Digital Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If more than one of AGC Adjusts Gain, AGC Adjusts Dig(ital) Gain, and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Gain/DigGain/Exp so that analog gain is increased before digital gain which is increased before exposure, DigGain/Gain/Exp so that digital gain is increased before analog gain which is increased before exposure, Exp/DigGain/Gain so that exposure is increased before digital gain which is increased before analog gain, or Exp/Gain/DigGain so that exposure is increased before analog gain which is increased before digital gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Dig(ital) Gain, Max Dig(ital) Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure allow setting the minimum and maximum analog gain, digital gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[48] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections, and defect substitutions, which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset & Defect selects offset (subtractive) corrections and defect substitutions, and Gain & Offset & Defect selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, offset (subtractive) corrections, and defect substitutions. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU). Defect corrections are useful for replacing pixels that can't otherwise be corrected with offset and/or gain corrections.
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections and substitutions to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the individual correction coefficients for each pixel; defect corrections, is used, share the frame buffer with offset corrections.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical. The Extract Defect Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically of a uniform bright, but not saturated, image captured of a white or grey surface, and identifies ''bad'' pixels whose value is to be replaced with a neighboring pixel; the higher the Extract Defect Threshold, the higher the allowed variance among the image's pixels before marking a questionable pixel as defective.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence), Extract Gain Ref(erence), and Extract Defect Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. The Clear Defect Map clears all of the defect pixel substitutions to 0, effectively disabling defect pixel corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations and defect analyses; if corrections and substitutions are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients and the per-pixel defect map; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Save Defect Coord(inates) and Load Defect Coord(inates) allow saving and loading the current per-pixel defect map; a text file format is used, with two numeric coordinates of each defect per line.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
Use of gain and offset correction for the SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL is not required for typical applications.
For the PIXCI® SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 15C5 camera, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's analog gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. The Digital Gain allows adjusting the camera's post A-D digital gain.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 15C5, also provides individual controls for Red Gain, GreenB Gain, GreenR Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period. The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion and mirroring of the image.
The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2 or ×4 horizontally and by a factor of ×2, ×4, ×8, (mu16, or ×32 vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate. The (Subsample) with Binning allows selecting whether the Subsampling uses averaging of pixels in each subsampled group rather than decimation, to reduce random noise. The (Subsample) with Binning is only available with a Subsampling selection of 2×2 or 4×4. Further, the (Binning) with Summation allows selecting whether the binning uses averaging, or uses summation along columns (but not rows) for increased sensitivity.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-Run or Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) frame mode. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber. The Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) mode provides shorter delay from trigger to exposure, but expects use of strobed flash illumination.
The Strobe Mode and Strobe Period allows enabling an output strobe and selecting polarity to synchronize a flash or other external device to the camera's exposure.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. A faster pixel clock also minimizes blur due to the camera's rolling shutter when capturing images of moving objects.
The Frame Rate allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 15C5 cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Dig(ital) Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Digital Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If two or more of AGC Adjusts Gain, Digital Gain, and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Exp/DigGain/Gain so that exposure is increased before increasing gain and gain decreased before decreasing exposure, or Gain/DigGain/Exp so that gain is increased before increasing exposure and exposure decreased before decreasing gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Dig(ital) Gain, Max Dig(ital) Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure allow setting the minimum and maximum gain, digital gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 15C5 cameras, the Digital Gain control is relatively coarse with few, and widely spaced, allowable settings; the (AGC) Accelerator may have to be set to a larger value for AGC to be able to affect the value of Digital Gain.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 15C5 camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[49] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections, and defect substitutions, which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset & Defect selects offset (subtractive) corrections and defect substitutions, and Gain & Offset & Defect selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, offset (subtractive) corrections, and defect substitutions. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU). Defect corrections are useful for replacing pixels that can't otherwise be corrected with offset and/or gain corrections.
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections and substitutions to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the individual correction coefficients for each pixel; defect corrections, is used, share the frame buffer with offset corrections.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical. The Extract Defect Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically of a uniform bright, but not saturated, image captured of a white or grey surface, and identifies ''bad'' pixels whose value is to be replaced with a neighboring pixel; the higher the Extract Defect Threshold, the higher the allowed variance among the image's pixels before marking a questionable pixel as defective.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence), Extract Gain Ref(erence), and Extract Defect Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. The Clear Defect Map clears all of the defect pixel substitutions to 0, effectively disabling defect pixel corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations and defect analyses; if corrections and substitutions are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients and the per-pixel defect map; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Save Defect Coord(inates) and Load Defect Coord(inates) allow saving and loading the current per-pixel defect map; a text file format is used, with two numeric coordinates of each defect per line.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 1C45 and 1M45 cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Analog Gain allows adjusting the camera's analog gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. The Digital Gain allows adjusting the camera's post A-D digital gain.
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period.
The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period). The Enable Short Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow selecting shorter exposures (less than one line period) with finer granularity (one pixel clock).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size; capturing fewer lines also allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2, ×4, ×8, ×16, ×32, or ×64 vertically, producing an image of smaller size and lower resolution, and allows a faster frame rate. The Binning allows selecting binning by a factor of ×2 horizontally or ×2 vertically and horizontally, averaging pixels in each group rather than decimation, producing an image of smaller size, lower resolution, and lower noise; the allowable frame rates are unaffected. The Subsampling and Binning features are mutually exclusive.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-run or Controlled. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber.
The Strobe Mode allows enabling an output strobe and selecting polarity to synchronize a flash or other external device to the camera's exposure.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. The Frame Rate (or Max Exposure in Controlled mode) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
The Auto (Exposure Control) enables on-camera automatic exposure control, disabling the manual Exposure setting.
The Auto (Analog Gain Control) enables on-camera automatic analog gain control, disabling the manual Analog Gain setting. The Auto (Digital Gain Control) enables on-camera automatic analog gain control, disabling the manual Digital Gain setting. The Auto (Exposure Control), Auto (Analog Gain Control), and Auto Exposure Control are not available when Enable Short Exposure is used.
The Download AGC/AEC Settings retrieves and displays the current automatically set Exposure, Analog Gain and/or Digital Gain values.
Several parameters allow customizing the behavior of the AEC and/or AGC.
The AEC Minimum AEC Maximum sets the minimum and maximum exposure values that can be used by the auto exposure control As for Exposure , the maximum value of AEC Maximum is limited by the Frame Rate and automatically decreased as the Frame Rate increased. If AEC Max Max is selected, the AEC Maximum is also increased as Frame Rate is decreased.
The AGC Analog Gain Min sets the minimum and maximum exposure values that can be used by the auto analog gain control.
The AEC/AGC Target Brightness sets the target image average brightness, as a percentage of maximum white, that the AEC and AGC strives to achieve. The AEC/AGC Rate sets the rate at which the AEC and/or AGC attempts to maintain the target brightness, higher values cause larger adjustments and quicker response to changes of image intensity; rates larger than 1.0 can cause overshoot of the target and subsequent corrections.
The AEC/AGC AOI Left, AEC/AGC AOI Width, AEC/AGC AOI Top, and AEC/AGC AOI Height sets the image AOI used to evaluate image intensity for use by the AEC and AGC. These values are always within the AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height readout region; the AEC/AGC AOI Top, and AEC/AGC AOI Height are reduced automatically as the readout AOI is decreased and the AEC/AGC AOI Left and AEC/AGC AOI Width corrected as needed. If AEC/AGC AOI Max is selected, the AEC/AGC AOI is set to be the same as the readout region.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1C45 camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[50] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 1C45 and 1M45 cameras, the Capture - Adjustments also provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of sensitivity of individual pixels on individual cameras. The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® D2X frame grabber for the SILICON VIDEO® 2112 and 2112C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. For the SILICON VIDEO® 2112C, also provides individual controls for Red Gain, Green Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period when the camera is in Video mode (below). When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period.
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns decreases the image size; capturing fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inverting and/or mirror imaging. The Decimation allows selecting 2×2 or 4×4 decimation (subsampling) of the AOI, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size at faster frame rate.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. A faster pixel clock also minimizes blur due to the camera's rolling shutter when capturing images of moving objects. The Test Ramp sets the camera to generate a synthetic test image, instead of a real image. If the test image can be captured but real images are always captured as black, check the exposure setting, the lens (iris) setting, and whether there is sufficient illumination.
The Frame Mode allows selecting Video or Controlled frame mode. In Video mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Strobe Out, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® D2X frame grabber.
The Bit Depth allows selecting 10 bits per pixel component value for greater dynamic range, or 8 bits per pixel component value to reduce the amount of memory required per image and increase the number of images that can be stored within a fixed amount of frame buffer memory.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 2112 and 2112C cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure. If both are selected, the exposure is increased before increasing gain, and gain decreased before decreasing exposure. The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum gain and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 2112C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[51] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
The Advanced Camera White Calibration allows performing a camera white calibration, with the camera pointed at a white target, adjusting the camera's Red Gain, Green Gain, and Blue Gain. Use of quality, non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target rather than a white piece of paper, is suggested.
For most common illumination conditions:
For special illumination condition: Do Advanced Camera White Calibration through Adjust White Balance in that order.
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 2112 and 2112C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments also provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of sensitivity of individual pixels on individual cameras. The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® E8CAM frame grabber for the SILICON VIDEO® 2KS-M and 2KS-C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Analog Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of decreased image quality (random and fixed pattern noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. The Dark Level allows adjusting the pixel offset, or black level.
The Number of AOIs, and AOI 1 Top, AOI 1 Height through AOI 8 Top, AOI 8 Height allow selecting one or more areas of interest which are read-out and captured. Capturing fewer lines decreases the image size, and also allows a faster frame rate. Up to eight areas of interest of different heights are allowed, but can't overlap vertically. The AOI Width and AOI Left shows the width and horizontal position of the area of interest, but neither is adjustable.
The Subsampling allows selecting vertical subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of 2, 4, 8, or 16 producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity.
The Frame Rate (and the duplicate Controlled Frame Rate control) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure in Continuous mode without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 2KS-M and 2KS-C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of individual pixels on individual cameras.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
The High Dynamic Range allows selecting Disabled, Line Interleaved, Multi-Frame, or Two-Slope. The High Dynamic Range options provides for greater effective dynamic range, allowing imaging of a scene with both very bright and dim areas without losing the details of the dim areas and without saturating the bright areas. The High Dynamic Range feature requires use of the Programmed Exposure Mode.
In the Line Interleaved mode, odd vs even image lines are exposed with different exposures, as specified by Exposure and Exposure Delta. The Line Interleaved requires use of Subsampling by a vertical factor of 2.
In the Multi-Frame mode, each trigger causes two images with different exposures to be captured, as specified by Exposure and Exposure Delta.
In the Two-Slope mode, the Exposure and Exposure Knee effectively control the relative degree of exposure of dark versus bright pixels.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 2KS-M and 2KS-C cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Analog Gain. However, as the camera only provides four possible Analog Gain settings (×1.0, ×1.2, ×1.4, ×1.6) the effectiveness of automatic control of the Analog Gain is therefore coarse and limited.
If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If both AGC Adjusts Gain and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Exp/Gain so that exposure is increased before increasing gain and gain decreased before decreasing exposure, or Gain/Exp so that gain is increased before increasing exposure and exposure decreased before decreasing gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 2KS-C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[52] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 5M10 and 5C10 cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. For the SILICON VIDEO® 5C10, also provides individual controls for Red Gain, GreenB Gain, GreenR Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period. The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion and mirroring of the image. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2 or ×4 horizontally and by a factor of ×2, ×4, or ×8 vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate. The (Subsample) with Binning allows selecting whether the Subsampling actually uses binning, averaging pixels in each 2×2 to 8×8 group, rather than decimation. Further, the (Binning) with Summation allows selecting whether the binning uses averaging, or uses summation along columns (but not rows) for increased sensitivity.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-Run, Controlled Rolling, or Controlled Global frame mode. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled Rolling and Controlled Global modes the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber. The Controlled Global (... Reset, Rolling Readout) mode provides shorter delay from trigger to exposure, but expects use of strobed flash illumination. The Controlled Rolling (... Reset, Rolling Readout) mode provides the same exposure period for each line, but lines are exposed in succession.
The Strobe Mode and Strobe Duration allows enabling an output strobe to synchronize a flash or other external device to the camera's exposure.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. A faster pixel clock also minimizes blur due to the camera's rolling shutter when capturing images of moving objects. The Frame Rate (or Max Exposure in Controlled mode) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 5M10 and 5C10 cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If both AGC Adjusts Gain and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Exp/Gain so that exposure is increased before increasing gain and gain decreased before decreasing exposure, or Gain/Exp so that gain is increased before increasing exposure and exposure decreased before decreasing gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure allow setting the minimum and maximum gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 5C10 camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[53] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections, and defect substitutions, which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset & Defect selects offset (subtractive) corrections and defect substitutions, and Gain & Offset & Defect selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, offset (subtractive) corrections, and defect substitutions. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU). Defect corrections are useful for replacing pixels that can't otherwise be corrected with offset and/or gain corrections.
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections and substitutions to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the individual correction coefficients for each pixel; defect corrections, is used, share the frame buffer with offset corrections.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical. The Extract Defect Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically of a uniform bright, but not saturated, image captured of a white or grey surface, and identifies ''bad'' pixels whose value is to be replaced with a neighboring pixel; the higher the Extract Defect Threshold, the higher the allowed variance among the image's pixels before marking a questionable pixel as defective.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence), Extract Gain Ref(erence), and Extract Defect Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. The Clear Defect Map clears all of the defect pixel substitutions to 0, effectively disabling defect pixel corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations and defect analyses; if corrections and substitutions are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients and the per-pixel defect map; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Save Defect Coord(inates) and Load Defect Coord(inates) allow saving and loading the current per-pixel defect map; a text file format is used, with two numeric coordinates of each defect per line.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
Use of gain and offset correction for the SILICON VIDEO® 5C10 is not required for typical applications. For the SILICON VIDEO® 5M10 monochrome camera, unavoidable differences in the characteristics of the four taps, unique to each camera, may cause the image to have a ''checkerboard'' appearance which can be eliminated via per-pixel gain corrections. The differences in characteristics of the four taps are immaterial when Subsampling is 2×2 or larger. Alternately, for the SILICON VIDEO® 5M10 camera, the Capture - Adjustments allows adjusting the Tap Balance; the relative gain of the even/odd pixels-per-row and the even/odd pixels-per-column. The Tap Balance requires less overhead for image processing and display, but there may be residual differences among pixel values depending on the pixels' position in the image. The Balance Tap 0, Balance Tap 1, Balance Tap 2, and Balance Tap 3 allows adjusting the relative gain of the even/odd pixels-per-row and the even/odd pixels-per-column. Alternately, clicking Extract Balance Ref(erence) automatically analyzes the characteristics of the different taps on the current image, and sets the balance adjustments accordingly. The captured image does not have to be a carefully illuminated ''flat-field''; a blank piece of paper or bland wall using normal ambient illumination is sufficient, as the different taps correspond to even/odd pixels and not quadrants of the image. Further, the area of the image to be analyzed can be set via Set Tap AOI; if the entire image isn't ''flat'', the use of a carefully selected AOI of a flat part of the image allows effective tap balancing.
For the PIXCI® SI frame grabber for the SILICON VIDEO® 642M and 642C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. Selecting Gain: High Range provides a large range of gain values with coarser steps; selecting Gain: Low Range provides a smaller range of gain values with finer steps. Use of Gain less than 6 dB is not recommended, as the sensor's saturation, linearity, and color quality are adversely affected.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 642C, also provides individual controls for Red Gain, GreenB Gain, GreenR Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size; capturing fewer lines also allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-run or Controlled. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI frame grabber.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. The Frame Rate (or Max Exposure in Controlled mode) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 642M and 642C cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If both AGC Adjusts Gain and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Exp/Gain so that exposure is increased before increasing gain and gain decreased before decreasing exposure, or Gain/Exp so that gain is increased before increasing exposure and exposure decreased before decreasing gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
The AGC feature does not alter the Gain: High Range vs. Gain: Low Range selection.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 642C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[54] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 642M and 642C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments also provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of sensitivity of individual pixels on individual cameras. The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 643M and 643C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of decreased image quality (random and fixed pattern noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. The Black Offset allows adjusting the pixel offset, or black level.
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period. The Exp. Mult. ... is not useful when operating the SILICON VIDEO® 643M and 643C at frame rates faster than the power line frequency; a high frequency or DC powered illumination source is recommended.
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size, and also allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Subsampling allows selecting vertical subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of 2, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-run or Controlled. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. The Frame Rate (or Max Exposure in Controlled mode) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 643M and 643C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of individual pixels on individual cameras.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 643M and 643C cameras, use of offset correction of fixed pattern noise is required to obtain a reasonable image. Use of gain correction is optional, but suggested for optimal image quality. For best results, the Black Offset should be set so that an image captured with the lens closed, and with Pixel Normalization disabled, results in low, but not zero, pixel values. This is to maintain the linearity of pixel values, avoiding ''clipping'' or so-called ''negative offsets''; pixels whose value is clipped can not be properly corrected by PixelNormalization. Using Image Examination - Pixel Plot or Image Examination - Pixel Peek are helpful aids when setting the Black Offset.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
The camera's fixed pattern noise changes after Pixel Clock, AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, AOI Height, Scan Direction, Gain, or Black Offset is modified; the lens should be covered and Extract Offset Ref(erence) used to correct for the fixed pattern noise.
The Exposure Mode allows selecting Normal (Exposure), Dual Slope (Exposure), or Triple Slope (Exposure). Dual or triple slope exposure provides for greater effective dynamic range, allowing imaging of a scene with both very bright and dim areas without losing the details of the dim areas and without saturating the bright areas. The Exposure 2 and Exposure 3 effectively control the relative degree of Dual Slope (Exposure), or Triple Slope (Exposure), respectively, by specifying portions of the Exposure to be exposed before the sensor is reset.
Dual or triple slope exposure is not available when using a small AOI Height and maximal Frame Rate; that combination reduces the range of allowable Exposure's and the Exposure 2 and Exposure 3 must be less than the Exposure.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 643M and 643C cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic exposure control (AEC) feature. The AEC On enables the Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's exposure.
The (AEC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 50%Peak Value, 60%Peak Value, 70%Peak Value, 80%Peak Value, or 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 50'th, 60'th, 70'th, 80'th, or 90'th percentile of pixel values, respectively, for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AEC) Target Value specifies the AEC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AEC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AEC) Target Value of 50%, the AEC will attempt to adjust the camera's exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AEC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AEC feature.
The (AEC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AEC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AEC) Update (Time) Period and (AEC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AEC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AEC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AEC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AEC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AEC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AEC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AEC AOI. The (AEC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AEC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AEC) Ignore White typically works better with (AEC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AEC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AEC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AEC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AEC options.
The Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum exposure used by AEC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 643C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[55] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 9C10 camera, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's analog gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. The Digital Gain allows adjusting the camera's post A-D digital gain.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9C10, also provides individual controls for Red Gain, GreenB Gain, GreenR Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period. The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion and mirroring of the image. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2 or ×4 horizontally and by a factor of ×2, ×4, ×8, (mu16, or ×32 vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-Run or Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) frame mode. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber. The Controlled GRRR (Global Reset, Rolling Readout) mode provides shorter delay from trigger to exposure, but expects use of strobed flash illumination.
The Strobe Mode and Strobe Period allows enabling an output strobe to synchronize a flash or other external device to the camera's exposure. The Strobe Polarity allows inverting the output strobe.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. A faster pixel clock also minimizes blur due to the camera's rolling shutter when capturing images of moving objects. The Frame Rate mode) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9C10 camera, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Dig(ital) Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Digital Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If two or more of AGC Adjusts Gain, Digital Gain, and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Exp/DigGain/Gain so that exposure is increased before increasing gain and gain decreased before decreasing exposure, or Gain/DigGain/Exp so that gain is increased before increasing exposure and exposure decreased before decreasing gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Dig(ital) Gain, Max Dig(ital) Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure allow setting the minimum and maximum gain, digital gain, and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9C10 camera, the Digital Gain control is relatively coarse with few, and widely spaced, allowable settings; the (AGC) Accelerator may have to be set to a larger value for AGC to be able to affect the value of Digital Gain.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9C10 camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[56] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections, and defect substitutions, which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset & Defect selects offset (subtractive) corrections and defect substitutions, and Gain & Offset & Defect selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, offset (subtractive) corrections, and defect substitutions. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU). Defect corrections are useful for replacing pixels that can't otherwise be corrected with offset and/or gain corrections.
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections and substitutions to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the individual correction coefficients for each pixel; defect corrections, is used, share the frame buffer with offset corrections.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical. The Extract Defect Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically of a uniform bright, but not saturated, image captured of a white or grey surface, and identifies ''bad'' pixels whose value is to be replaced with a neighboring pixel; the higher the Extract Defect Threshold, the higher the allowed variance among the image's pixels before marking a questionable pixel as defective.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence), Extract Gain Ref(erence), and Extract Defect Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. The Clear Defect Map clears all of the defect pixel substitutions to 0, effectively disabling defect pixel corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations and defect analyses; if corrections and substitutions are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset & Defect Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients and the per-pixel defect map; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Save Defect Coord(inates) and Load Defect Coord(inates) allow saving and loading the current per-pixel defect map; a text file format is used, with two numeric coordinates of each defect per line.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
Use of gain and offset correction for the SILICON VIDEO® 9C10 is not required for typical applications.
For the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 9M001 and 9M001C cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. For the SILICON VIDEO® 9M001C camera, also provides individual controls for Red Gain, GreenB Gain, GreenR Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9M001 and 9M001C, the Enable Short Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to include exposures shorter than one scan line.
The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion of the image.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9M001 and 9M001C, the Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2, ×4, or ×8 horizontally and/or vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-run or Controlled. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber.
The Strobe Mode allows enabling an output strobe to synchronize a flash or other external device to the camera's exposure. The Strobe Polarity allows inverting the output strobe.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. A faster pixel clock also minimizes blur due to the camera's rolling shutter when capturing images of moving objects. The Frame Rate (or Max Exposure in Controlled mode) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9M001 and 9M001C cameras, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If both AGC Adjusts Gain and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Exp/Gain so that exposure is increased before increasing gain and gain decreased before decreasing exposure, or Gain/Exp so that gain is increased before increasing exposure and exposure decreased before decreasing gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum gain and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9M001C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[57] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9M001 and 9M001C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of sensitivity of individual pixels on individual cameras. The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® 9T001C camera, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. There are also individual controls for Red Gain, GreenB Gain, GreenR Gain, and Blue Gain; these are normally disabled and under the control of the white balancing feature (below).
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period.
The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion of the image. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2, ×4, or ×8 horizontally and/or vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate. The (Subsample) with Binning allows selecting whether the Subsampling actually uses binning, averaging pixels in each 2×2 to 8×8 group, rather than decimation.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-run or Controlled. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber.
The Strobe Mode allows enabling an output strobe to synchronize a flash or other external device to the camera's exposure. The Strobe Polarity allows inverting the output strobe.
The SILICON VIDEO® 9T001C camera also provides a Controlled Global exposure mode, similar to the Controlled mode. The Controlled Global (... Reset, Rolling Readout) mode provides shorter delay from trigger to exposure, but expects use of strobed flash illumination. The Controlled (Rolling Reset, Rolling Readout) mode provides the same exposure period for each line, but lines are exposed in succession.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. A faster pixel clock also minimizes blur due to the camera's rolling shutter when capturing images of moving objects. The Frame Rate (or Max Exposure in Controlled mode) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9T001C camera, Capture - Adjustments also provides an automatic gain control (AGC) feature. The AGC On enables the Automatic Gain/Exposure Control (AGC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the camera's gain and/or exposure.
The (AGC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 90'th percentile of pixel values for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AGC) Target Value specifies the AGC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AGC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AGC) Target Value of 50%, the AGC will attempt to adjust the camera's gain and/or exposure so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AGC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AGC feature.
The (AGC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AGC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AGC) Update (Time) Period and (AGC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AGC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AGC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AGC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AGC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AGC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AGC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AGC AOI. The (AGC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AGC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AGC) Ignore White typically works better with (AGC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AGC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AGC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AGC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AGC options.
If AGC Adjusts Gain is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Gain. If AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) is selected, the AGC operates by adjusting the camera's Exposure.
If both AGC Adjusts Gain and AGC Adjusts Exp(osure) are selected, the AGC Adjust Priority allows selecting Exp/Gain so that exposure is increased before increasing gain and gain decreased before decreasing exposure, or Gain/Exp so that gain is increased before increasing exposure and exposure decreased before decreasing gain.
The Min Gain, Max Gain, Min Exposure, and Max Exposure, allow setting the minimum and maximum gain and exposure values, respectively, used by AGC.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9T001C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also allows adjusting the ''white balance''. The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[58] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the SILICON VIDEO® 9T001C camera, the Capture - Adjustments also provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of sensitivity of individual pixels on individual cameras. The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, and SI4 frame grabbers for the SILICON VIDEO® WGA-C and WGA-M cameras, the Capture - Adjustments provides controls for each of the camera's programmable or controllable features.
The Gain allows adjusting the camera's analog gain. Increased gain allows capturing dark scenes, but at the expense of slightly decreased image quality (increased random noise); Whenever possible, increase illumination or increase exposure instead of increasing gain. The Digital Gain allows adjusting the camera's post A-D digital gain.
The Exposure allows adjusting the camera's exposure (shutter) period. When using AC powered lighting, use of an Exposure which is a multiple of half of the power line's period (i.e. 16.6/2 msec. in the U.S. and other locations using 60 Hz, 20.0/2 msec. in Europe and other locations using 50 Hz) is suggested to prevent varying image brightness due to the illumination's cyclical change of brightness. Selecting Exp. Mult. of 1/50 or Exp. Mult. of 1/60 automatically forces the Exposure to a multiple of the corresponding period.
The Enable Long Exposure alters the range of the Exposure to allow extended exposures; otherwise, the allowable exposure is limited by the selected Frame Rate (i.e. frame period).
The AOI Left, AOI Width, AOI Top, and AOI Height allow selecting an area of interest which is read-out and captured. Capturing fewer columns or fewer lines decreases the image size and allows a faster frame rate, although reducing the AOI Width below 618 may not further increase the frame rate. If Center Aoi L(eft)-R(ight) or Center Aoi T(op)-B(ottom) is selected, the AOI Left or AOI Top, respectively, is automatically adjusted so as to center the capture AOI (the AOI Width or AOI Height) within the camera's field of view.
The Scan Direction allows adjusting the direction in which pixels are read-out, allowing inversion of the image. The Subsampling allows selecting subsampling (decimation) of the AOI by a factor of ×2 or ×4 vertically, producing an image of lower resolution with smaller size, and allows a faster frame rate.
The Video Mode allows selecting Free-run or Controlled. In Free-run mode the camera exposure and read-out is free-running; continuously exposing and sending frames to the frame grabber at a constant frame rate without need of a trigger. In Controlled mode the Controlled Frame Rate, Trigger Input, Continuous, Single Shot, and Min(imum) Retrigger Period, described above, provide frame rate and triggering control through the PIXCI® SI, SI1, SI2, or SI4 frame grabber.
The Strobe Mode allows enabling an output strobe and selecting polarity to synchronize a flash or other external device to the camera's exposure.
The Pixel Clock allows specifying the pixel clock rate. A faster pixel clock increases the allowable frame rate, but with reduced image quality (increased fixed pattern noise); a slower pixel clock increases the allowable exposure periods for longer integration and greater sensitivity. The Frame Rate (or Max Exposure in Controlled mode) allows extending the frame period and maximum exposure without changing the pixel clock rate; the frame rate and exposure will not directly increase or decrease as the Pixel Clock is changed, rather the Pixel Clock changes the allowable range of Exposure and/or Frame Rate values.
The Max (Frame Rate) forces the maximum allowable frame rate, as per the current AOI Width, AOI Height, Subsampling, and Pixel Clock.
The ADC Mode allows selecting a Linear relationship between (measured) light intensity and pixel value, or a non-linear Companded relationship in which larger proportion of the pixel value range is devoted to darker (measured) light intensities and a smaller proportion of the pixel value range is devoted to brighter (measured) light intensities. The Companded setting provides a wider dynamic range reducing the need for Gain and Exposure adjustments, while the Linear setting is more suitable for intensity-based image measurements and higher quality color. If Companded is used with High Dyn(amic) Range below, the High Dyn(amic) Range affects the measured light intensity (via the A-D converter), the Companded affects the conversion of the measured light intensity into pixel values.
Setting Exposure Mode to High Dyn(amic) Range (HDR) instead of Linear enables dual slope or triple slope exposure, where darker areas of the scene are exposed for longer periods of time than brighter areas. The HDR Curve selects the shape of the exposure curve, Dual Slope for dual slope exposure or Triple Slope for triple slope exposure. Setting HDR Mode to Automatic enables semi-automatic setting of the two or three slopes in relationship to the selected Exposure; the HDR T2 Ratio sets the ratio of two exposures, the HDR T3 Ratio sets the ratio of the third exposure for triple slope. Alternately, setting HDR Mode to Manual allows setting HDR Exposure T1 and Exposure for dual slope, or allows setting HDR Exposure T1, HDR Exposure T2, and Exposure for triple slope.
The Auto Gain Control enables on-camera automatic gain control, disabling the manual Gain setting.
The Auto Exp. Control enables on-camera automatic exposure control, disabling the manual Exposure setting.
The Dnload Setting and Download Settings retrieves and displays the current automatically set Exposure and/or Gain settings.
Several parameters allow customizing the behavior of the AEC and/or AGC.
The ACC Maximum sets the maximum gain that the AGC can set. The AEC Maximum sets the maximum exposure that the AEC can set. As for Exposure , the maximum value of AEC Maximum is limited by the Frame Rate, decreased as the Frame Rate increased, and if AEC Max Max, is selected, increased as Frame Rate is decreased.
The AEC Update Period sets the rate, in frame periods, that the AEC is computed and the exposure changed. The AGC Update Period sets the rate, in frame periods, that the AGC is computed and the gain changed. The AEC/AGC Target Brightness sets the target image brightness, based on a 1024 maximum pixel value, that the AEC and AGC strives to achieve. The AEC/AGC Pixel Count sets the size of the image area used by AEC and AGC to measure the current image brightness. The AEC Low Pass Filter and AGC Low Pass Filter sets the degree that AEC and AGC, respectively, responds to, or ignores, quick and transient changes in image brightness.
For the SILICON VIDEO® WGA-C camera, the Capture - Adjustments provides two different color modes. With the ADC Mode set to Companded, the Companded Color can be set to Neutral or Warmer scene color. This provides pleasing, though not precise, color for many applications.
With the ADC Mode set to Linear, the Capture - Adjustments allows adjusting the ''white balance'' and provides other color related features.
The Color Temp/Mode allows selecting one of various predefined white balance settings for various correlated color temperatures. Typical selections are Uncorrected and one or more of: 7500°K (typical overcast daylight), 6500°K (typical noon daylight), 5000°K (typical sunrise & sunset daylight), 4100°K (typical cool white fluorescent bulb), and 2800°K (typical 60 to 100 watt tungsten bulb). For all but Uncorrected, the Color Quality allows selecting one of the predefined color quality settings: Quicker for lower processing overhead, and Better for better color quality with more processing overhead and perhaps a slower display rate.
The Saturation allows adjusting the color ''depth''. Values greater than 1.0 increase saturation and color ''depth''. Values less than 1.0 decrease saturation and ''flatten'' the color; a value of 0.0 results in a monochrome image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the display rate.
The Brightness allows adjusting the intensity Values greater than 1.0 increase brightness, values less than 1.0 decrease brightness with a value of 0.0 resulting in a black image. Use of values other than 1.0 increase processing overhead and may slow the video display rate.
The Gamma allows specifying a nonlinear gamma correction, stretching the bright tones at the expense of dark tones, or vice versa. A Gamma of 1.00 disables gamma correction.
The Quick Black Balance button performs a black balance. The lens' iris should be closed or the lens capped.
The Quick White Balance button performs a white balance. The camera should be pointed at a non-reflective, non-fluorescent, white target.
The Auto White Balance activates automatic white balancing; continuously monitoring captured images and adjusting the white balance accordingly. Any automatic white balance feature is convenient but not optimal; it works best with average scenes, and can be ''fooled'' by atypical scenes. For more precise results, explicit white balancing with a white target should be used.
Once activated, the Auto Options >> button accesses advanced options for the Auto White Balance. The Auto Hysteresis specifies the difference between the previous white balance setting and the computed, optimal current white balance setting values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The Auto Update (Time) Period and Auto Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and white balance adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the Auto Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the Auto Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The Set Auto AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed. The Auto (AOI) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage.
When Auto White Balance is inactive, a Custom Advanced >> button allow access to advanced, low-level, controls for color settings. These are intended for use upon advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
Whenever the white or black balance is changed so as to no longer reflect the predefined Color Temp/Mode, the Color Temp/Mode will be set to Custom.
The Adjust White Balance and Adjust Black Balance are the same as Quick Black Balance and Quick White Balance, but with the ability to specify the area of interest to be analyzed, and an option to specify whether the current image should be analyzed (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Existing Image) or a new image snapped (the Adjust/Calibrate w. Snapped Image). The ''Quick'' versions don't necessarily take less time; they are quicker in the sense that there are fewer buttons to click to perform the black or white balancing.
For Adjust White Balance, the White Balance Goal can be selected as Maximize Dynamic Range, Maximize Contrast, Minimal Variation (1), Minimal Variation (2), or Maximum Pixel Value; specifying that the white balance should be computed as to either maximize the dynamic range, maximize contrast, minimize variation from the pixel values output by the camera, (there are two variations), or map the observed pixel values into the maximum white value. The latter should be used only when the image being analyzed is at the maximum possible brightness.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor feature allows fine tuning the white balance by matching the color at a selected spot on the image to a color on a color palette. It doesn't allow independent ''tweaking'' of multiple colors, but allows setting the overall white balance by matching an important or prominent color rather than by matching whites.
The Tweak White Balance @ Cursor shows a color browser, as described under Pick Graphics Color, initially displaying the color of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor. After a new color is selected with the browser, the white balance is adjusted so that the hue and saturation of the pixel under the Image View - Cursor becomes, approximately, the same as the selected color. Only the hue and saturation are matched, not the brightness.
The Advanced Color Space Calibration allows performing color calibration (also called color space corrections) with the camera pointed at a calibrated color target.
If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®. If used with Calibration Target: ColorChecker (Line), the camera is expected to be pointed at a modified Macbeth® ColorChecker®, which has been cut and reassembled into an array of 24×1 rather than 6×4 color chips.[59] If used with Calibration Target: ColorCheckerDC, the camera is expected to be pointed at a Macbeth® ColorChecker®(DC). Set the graphic of squares so that each graphic square is within the corresponding square of the ColorChecker or ColorChecker(DC). There is no need to try to fit the ColorChecker's boundaries exactly; simply keep each graphic square well within the target square so that none of the border is included. The target MUST be evenly illuminated!
If used with Calibration Target: CRT/LCD Display, the camera is expected to be pointed at the CRT/LCD display of the camera's, captured image. This works best with high quality CRT/LCD displays that are themselves calibrated.
For most common illumination conditions:
The Sharpen allows sharpening color images, so as to recover the sharpness lost due to the color Bayer pattern processing. A value of 0 turns sharpening off and provides minimal overhead and the fastest display rate. A value of 100 provides the next fastest display rate; all other values require additional overhead and may slow the display rates.
For the SILICON VIDEO® WGA-C and WGA-M cameras, the Capture - Adjustments also provides a per-pixel gain and offset correction feature, sometimes called flat field correction, to correct for small differences of sensitivity of individual pixels on individual cameras. The Pixel Normalization selects the gain and offset corrections which are applied on individual pixels. Specifying None disables gain and offset corrections, Offset selects offset (subtractive) corrections, Gain selects gain (multiplicative) corrections, and Gain & Offset selects gain (multiplicative) and offset (subtractive) corrections. Offset corrections are useful for correcting fixed pattern noise (FPN). Gain corrections are useful for correcting pixel response non uniformity (PRNU).
The Normalization On enables application of the selected corrections to the frame buffer(s). If corrections are selected, whether or not enabled with Normalization On, the offset and gain corrections each use one frame buffer in which to store the correction coefficients for each pixel.
The Extract Offset Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured under dark or closed aperture conditions, and calculates and stores subtractive coefficients so as to later correct each pixel's value to be 0. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) analyzes an image, typically a ''flat'' image captured of a uniform bright, but not saturated, white or grey surface, and calculates and stores multiplicative coefficients so as to correct all pixel values to be identical.
If Extract from: Existing Image is selected, the Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Extract Gain Ref(erence) use the contents of the current frame buffer as basis for corrections. If Extract from: Snapped Image is selected, a new image is snapped and used as the basis for corrections. If Extract from: N Snapped Images is selected, N new images, as specified by Snapped Images, N, are snapped and averaged to minimize the effect of random pixel noise, and the result used as the basis for corrections. If Auto Clear Coefficients is selected, the offset and/or gain coefficients are cleared whenever a different Pixel Normalization is selected, or the video resolution, bit depth, color space, multi-tap correction, and/or bit-packing has changed; all of which invalidate the current coefficients.
If Extract Gain Target: Mean Value is selected, the Extract Gain Ref(erence) establishes multiplicative coefficients so that corrected images maintain the same mean (average) brightness. If Extract Gain Target: Max Value is selected, corrected images tend to be brightened, preserving small differences among pixel values. If Extract Gain Target: Min Value is selected, corrected images tend to be darkened, preserving the image's dynamic range.
The Clear Offset Coef(ficients) clears all of the offset correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling offset correction. The Clear Gain Coef(ficients) clears all of the gain correction coefficients to 0, effectively disabling gain corrections. These are provided for convenience while performing gain and offset calibrations; if gain and offset corrections are no longer desired the Pixel Normalization should instead be set to None, freeing up frame buffers as well as reducing image processing overhead.
The Save Offset Coef(ficients), Save Gain Coef(ficients), Load Offset Coef(ficients), and Load Gain Coef(ficients) allow saving and reloading the current per-pixel offset and gain correction coefficients; the TIFF image file format is used, with each coefficient saved or loaded as one image file pixel.
The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) allow extracting the offset coefficients or gain coefficients from a ''flat'' image in a TIFF format file, without having to load the image via Image File - Load followed by Extract Offset Ref(erence) or Extract Gain Ref(erence). The Load/Extract Offset Ref(erence) and Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) are, in general, not interchangeable with Load Offset Coef(ficients) and Load Gain Coef(ficients); for the sake of efficiency and depending on camera type and various options, the coefficients may be preprocessed and, in general, not identical to the original pixel values from which they are derived.
If both gain and offset corrections are being used, note that the gain corrections are dependent upon the offset corrections. The Extract Gain Ref(erence) or Load/Extract Gain Ref(erence) should be (re)done whenever the offset corrections have changed, such as via Extract Offset Ref(erence).
For the PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, and SV5L frame grabbers, the Capture - Adjustments allows selecting the video input connection and adjusting the gain, black level, hue, and saturation.
The Video Input (Multiplexer) allows selecting which of the PIXCI® SV2 frame grabber's two video inputs, or which of the PIXCI® SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, or SV5L frame grabbers' three video inputs are to be used. The current Video Input (Multiplexer) selection is also shown on an illustration of the frame grabber's bracket, and is selectable by clicking the graphic of the desired connector. The PIXCI® SV5B has a single video input.
The Brightness Mod. offsets the decoded video luma value by -50% to +50%, adding or removing brightness. The Hue Mod. offsets the chroma values of the decoded video by -90 degrees through +90 degrees, rotating the color space. The Luma Gain/Contrast Mod. multiplies the decoded video luma value by 0 to 237%. The Saturation Mod. adjusts the color gain, or saturation, by 0 to 243%.
The Field/Frame Mode allows selecting a frame or field mode of capture and display. If the default Frame at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each frame buffer contains one interlaced frame; capture and display of a moving object may show the ''jitter'' typical of captured interlaced imagery.[60] If Field at Field (Aligned) or Field at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each ''frame'' buffer contains one field; capture and display of a moving object won't show interlace ''jitter'', but vertical resolution is reduced by half. If using Capture - Video to Frame Buffers, the Field at Field (Aligned) and Field at Frame (Aligned) differ in that the former captures at field rate with captured ''frame'' buffers alternating between odd and even fields,[61] and the latter captures at frame rate, with captured ''frame'' buffers consistently either odd or even fields. The Frame at Field (Aligned) selects capturing an interlaced frame that starts with an odd or an even field, whichever is next, rather than consistently starting with a specific field.
For the PIXCI® SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, and SV5L, the Color Pixel Format allows selecting BGR format at three bytes per pixel, UYVY or YUYV at two bytes per pixel, or BtYUV at 1.5 bytes per pixel; reducing the PCI bandwidth necessary for capture. The BGR, UYVY, and YUYV provides the same image quality, but UYVY and YUYV requires more computer processing for display. The BtYUV provides lower image quality and also requires more computer processing for display.
Integration | ||
Control | ||
Camera | Type | via Signal |
Generic RS-170 | Mono | No |
Generic CCIR | Mono | No |
Generic NTSC | Color | No |
Generic PAL | Color | No |
Generic NTSC S/Video | Color | No |
Generic PAL S/Video | Color | No |
(N/A for PIXCI SV5A, SV5B) | ||
CTEC Photonics CT-150 | Mono RS-170 | Yes |
DAGE-MTI RC300 | Mono RS-170 | Yes |
DAGE-MTI CCD100 | Mono RS-170 | Yes |
DAGE-MTI CCD100E | Mono CCIR | Yes |
Hitachi KP-M/S1 | Mono RS-170 | Yes |
Toshiba Teli CS8620i | Mono RS-170 | Yes |
UNIQ UM-300 | Mono RS-170 | Yes |
Several features of the Capture - Adjustments window are common to many models of the PIXCI® PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, SV5L frame grabbers when used in conjunction with analog RS-170 or CCIR cameras that allow control of integration via an externally applied signal. Typically, one of the PIXCI® frame grabber's general purpose output signal(s) (formerly referred to as ''External TTL Outputs'') is applied to the camera's integration control.
The Normal Mode selects normal, non-integration mode; the Integrating Mode selects integration over one or more fields or frames. The General Purpose Output selects the general purpose output signal that has been connected to the camera's integration control. For cameras with switch selectable integration polarity, the Integrate w. Output High versus Integrate w. Output Low selects the signal polarity expected by the camera. In Integrating Mode, the Integration Period selects the integration period The Int. Lower and Int. Higher buttons select two ranges of Integration Period; for lower integration periods - such as integrating by a specific number of video frames - the Int. Lower selects a more convenient scale.
For the PIXCI® SV7 frame grabber, the Capture - Adjustments allows selecting automatic gain control (AGC) and adjusting the gain, black level, hue, and saturation.
The Brightness Mod. offsets the decoded video luma value by -76.22 to +75.66 IRE, adding or removing brightness. The Hue Mod. offsets the chroma values of the decoded video by -45.00 degrees through +44.69 degrees, rotating the color space. The Contrast Mod. multiplies the decoded video luma value by 0.0 to 1.99. The Saturation Mod. multiples the decoded video chroma value by 0.0 to 1.99.
The AGC (Automatic Gain Control) allows selecting the Analog AGC, the Digital AGC, both the Analog & Digital AGC, or to set the AGC to Disabled.
The Bit Depth allows selecting 10 Bits per pixel component for higher dynamic range, or 8 Bits for smaller saved image sizes and reduced PCI bus overhead. If using 10 Bits, the Bit Packing can be Off for faster display rates and processing or On for smaller frame buffers, and smaller and more efficient video to disk files.
The Field/Frame Mode allows selecting a frame or field mode of capture and display. If the default Frame at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each frame buffer contains one interlaced frame; capture and display of a moving object may show the ''jitter'' typical of captured interlaced imagery.[62] If Field at Field (Aligned) or Field at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each ''frame'' buffer contains one field; capture and display of a moving object won't show interlace ''jitter'', but vertical resolution is reduced by half. If using Capture - Video to Frame Buffers, the Field at Field (Aligned) and Field at Frame (Aligned) differ in that the former captures at field rate with captured ''frame'' buffers alternating between odd and even fields,[63] and the latter captures at frame rate, with captured ''frame'' buffers consistently either odd or even fields. The Frame at Field (Aligned) selects capturing an interlaced frame that starts with an odd or an even field, whichever is next, rather than consistently starting with a specific field.
Camera | Type |
Generic RS-170 | Mono |
Generic NTSC | Color |
Generic CCIR | Mono |
Generic PAL | Color |
For the PIXCI® SV8 frame grabber, the Capture - Adjustments allows selecting automatic gain control (AGC) and adjusting the gain, black level, hue, saturation, and brightness.
For ''Standard Definition'' video, such as NTSC, NTSC/YC, RS-170, PAL, PAL/YC, and CCIR, the Video Input (Multiplexer), Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Chroma Gain, Luma Gain, Sharpen, Luma AGC, and Chroma AGC controls are available.
The Video Input (Multiplexer) allows selecting which of the PIXCI® SV8 frame grabber's video inputs — S-Video, BNC\0, BNC\1, BNC\2, or BNC\3 — is to be used. The current Video Input (Multiplexer) selection is also shown on an illustration of the frame grabber's bracket, and is selectable by clicking the graphic of the desired connector. In monochrome mode (RS-170 or CCIR), selecting the S-Video input does not imply switching to color mode; rather it allows use of the S-Video as a fifth input connector.
The Brightness offsets the decoded video intensity value by -100 to +100 IRE units, adding or removing brightness. The Contrast multiplies the decoded video intensity value by 0.0 to 2.00. For color video, the Hue shifts the decoded video hue by -90 to +90 degrees. For color video, the Chroma Gain adjusts the saturation by 0.0 to 6.29 dB. The Luma Gain additionally multiplies the decoded video intensity value by 0.9 to 3.63 dB. The Sharpen allows sharpening of the image (0.0 to 100%), or smoothing of the image (-33.5 to 0.0%); if 0.0%, the image is neither sharpened nor smoothed.
The Luma AGC controls the automatic gain control for the video luma (intensity); Auto enables AGC, Freeze freezes the current AGC setting, and Manual enables manual setting via Luma Gain, above. The Chroma AGC enables the automatic gain control for the video chroma (saturation); Auto enables AGC, Freeze freezes the current AGC setting, Manual enables manual setting via Chroma Gain, above, and = Luma ties the Chroma AGC to the Luma AGC. The Brightness, Contrast, Hue, and Sharpen controls are available regardless of whether Luma AGC or Chroma AGC are enabled.
For ''Component'' video, such as RGB video, RS-343, analog VGA, analog S/VGA, etc., the Gain A, Gain B, Gain C, Offset A, Offset B, Offset C, Gain AGC, Offset AGC, and AGC Target controls are available.
The Gain A, Gain B, and Gain C, allows adjusting the corresponding channel's gain (contrast) by a factor of 0.0 to 1.00. The Offset A, Offset B, and Offset C, allows adjusting the corresponding channel's offset (black level) by 0 to 1023 (pixel values relative to 10 bit pixels).
The Gain AGC enables the automatic gain control for the video gain (contrast); Auto enables AGC, w. Target enables AGC using an explicit target pixel value specified by AGC Target, Freeze freezes the current AGC setting, and Manual enables manual setting via Gain A, Gain B, and Gain C, above. The Offset AGC enables the automatic control for the video offset (black level); Auto enables AGC, Freeze freezes the current AGC setting, and Manual enables manual setting via Offset A, Offset B, and Offset C, above.
The Bit Depth allows selecting 10 Bits per pixel component for higher dynamic range, or 8 Bits for smaller saved image sizes and reduced PCI bus overhead. If using 10 Bits, the Bit Packing can be Off for faster display rates and processing or On for smaller frame buffers, and smaller and more efficient video to disk files.
The Field/Frame Mode allows selecting a frame or field mode of capture and display. If the default Frame at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each frame buffer contains one interlaced frame; capture and display of a moving object may show the ''jitter'' typical of captured interlaced imagery.[64] If Field at Field (Aligned) or Field at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each ''frame'' buffer contains one field; capture and display of a moving object won't show interlace ''jitter'', but vertical resolution is reduced by half. If using Capture - Video to Frame Buffers, the Field at Field (Aligned) and Field at Frame (Aligned) differ in that the former captures at field rate with captured ''frame'' buffers alternating between odd and even fields,[65] and the latter captures at frame rate, with captured ''frame'' buffers consistently either odd or even fields. The Frame at Field (Aligned) selects capturing an interlaced frame that starts with an odd or an even field, whichever is next, rather than consistently starting with a specific field.
For the PIXCI® A110 frame grabber, the Capture - Adjustments allows adjusting the analog gain, digital gain, analog offset (black level) and digital offset.
The Digital Gain allows adjusting the corresponding color's digital gain to 0.0 dB through 6.0 dB. The Analog Gain allows adjusting the corresponding color's analog gain to -6.02 dB through 6.02 dB.
The Digital Offset allows adjusting the corresponding color's digital offset (black level) to -512 through 512. The Analog Offset allows adjusting the corresponding color's analog offset (black level) to -124 through 124.
The Bit Depth allows selecting 10 Bits per pixel component for higher dynamic range, or 8 Bits for smaller saved image sizes and reduced PCI bus overhead. If using 10 Bits, the Bit Packing can be Off for faster display rates and processing or On for smaller frame buffers, and smaller and more efficient video to disk files.
For interlaced cameras and video formats, the Field/Frame Mode allows selecting a frame or field mode of capture and display. If the default Frame at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each frame buffer contains one interlaced frame; capture and display of a moving object may show the ''jitter'' typical of captured interlaced imagery.[66] If Field at Field (Aligned) or Field at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each ''frame'' buffer contains one field; capture and display of a moving object won't show interlace ''jitter'', but vertical resolution is reduced by half. If using Capture - Video to Frame Buffers, the Field at Field (Aligned) and Field at Frame (Aligned) differ in that the former captures at field rate with captured ''frame'' buffers alternating between odd and even fields,[67] and the latter captures at frame rate, with captured ''frame'' buffers consistently either odd or even fields. The Frame at Field (Aligned) selects capturing an interlaced frame that starts with an odd or an even field, whichever is next, rather than consistently starting with a specific field.
For the PIXCI® A310 frame grabber, the Capture - Adjustments allows adjusting the analog gain, digital gain, analog offset (black level) and digital offset.
The Digital Gain: Red, Digital Gain: Green, and Digital Gain: Blue, allows adjusting the corresponding color's digital gain to 0.0 dB through 6.0 dB. The Digital Gain: Gang allows adjusting all three with one control, maintaining the same relative differences. For monochrome video, only the Green Digital Gain is used.
Similarly, the Analog Gain: Red, Analog Gain: Green, Analog Gain: Blue, and Analog Gain: Gang, allows adjusting the corresponding color's analog gain to -6.02 dB through 6.02 dB.
The Digital Offset: Red, Digital Offset: Green, and Digital Offset: Blue, allows adjusting the corresponding color's digital offset (black level) to -512 through 512. The Digital Offset: Gang allows adjusting all three with one control, maintaining the same relative differences. For monochrome video, only the Green Digital Offset is used.
Similarly, the Analog Offset: Red, Analog Offset: Green, Analog Offset: Blue, and Analog Offset: Gang, allows adjusting the corresponding color's analog offset (black level) to -124 through 124.
The Bit Depth allows selecting 10 Bits per pixel component for higher dynamic range, or 8 Bits for smaller saved image sizes and reduced PCI bus overhead. If using 10 Bits, the Bit Packing can be Off for faster display rates and processing or On for smaller frame buffers, and smaller and more efficient video to disk files.
For interlaced cameras and video formats, the Field/Frame Mode allows selecting a frame or field mode of capture and display. If the default Frame at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each frame buffer contains one interlaced frame; capture and display of a moving object may show the ''jitter'' typical of captured interlaced imagery.[68] If Field at Field (Aligned) or Field at Frame (Aligned) is selected, each ''frame'' buffer contains one field; capture and display of a moving object won't show interlace ''jitter'', but vertical resolution is reduced by half. If using Capture - Video to Frame Buffers, the Field at Field (Aligned) and Field at Frame (Aligned) differ in that the former captures at field rate with captured ''frame'' buffers alternating between odd and even fields,[69] and the latter captures at frame rate, with captured ''frame'' buffers consistently either odd or even fields. The Frame at Field (Aligned) selects capturing an interlaced frame that starts with an odd or an even field, whichever is next, rather than consistently starting with a specific field.
The illustration of the frame grabber's bracket highlights the connectors and pins used by the current video format.
The Video Input: BNC Connector allows selecting the BNC connector(s) for video input, the Video Input: DB15 Connector allows selecting the DB15 connector for video input. The Sync Input: Composite/Green allows selecting composite sync on green (SOG), the Sync Input: DB15 Connector allows selecting H and V sync on the DB15 connector. Both represent only the most common options; additional options and customization of video and sync imputs are available under PIXCI® - Video Setup.
The Capture - Video to Frame Buffers window allows capturing a sequence of images at fixed, specified, intervals of time or at fixed, specified, intervals of video fields (or frames) directly into frame buffer memory. The capture rate can be as fast as one image per video field or frame. A sequence can be captured continuously, re-using the frame buffers in a circular manner. A sequence capture can be started and/or stopped by an event (i.e. trigger), or each individual image captured in response to an event. Strobes can indicate to external devices the state of the sequence capture. The time at which each image was captured can be non-destructively overlaid or permanently marked within the image.
In contrast to the Capture - Video to Virtual Memory feature, the Capture - Video to Frame Buffers can always capture sequences at video rate regardless of the host computer's speed,[70] but requires pre-configuration of frame buffer memory (see PIXCI® - Driver Assistant) to obtain sufficient memory for the desired number of images in the sequence.
If Linear Sequence is selected, upon clicking Record, a single linear sequence of video fields or frames are captured starting at Starting Frame Buffer and ending at Ending Frame Buffer. The sequence capture terminates after capturing into the Ending Frame Buffer.
If Circular Sequence is selected, upon clicking Record, a continuous circular sequence of video fields or frames are captured starting at Starting Frame Buffer and through Ending Frame Buffer, repeatedly. The reuse of the Starting Frame Buffer is ''seamless''; the same time or video field interval separates the images captured in Ending Frame Buffer and Starting Frame Buffer as separates the images captured into any other pair of adjacent frame buffers. The sequence capture terminates upon clicking Stop or Cancel.
If Event Free is selected, the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence is captured as described above.
If Event Start is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start Event is armed. The sequence capture begins when the selected event, or trigger, condition is satisfied; the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above, is captured.
If Event Stop is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Stop Event is armed and the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above, is captured. The sequence capture terminates when the event, or trigger, condition is satisfied, or upon clicking Stop or Cancel, or, for single linear sequences, after capturing into the Ending Frame Buffer.
If Event Start & Stop is selected, both the Event Start and Event Stop and used to start and stop the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above.
If Event per Image is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start Event is armed once per image. Each image of the sequence is captured when the selected event, or trigger, condition is satisfied. The sequence capture terminates when the event, or trigger, condition is satisfied, or upon clicking Stop or Cancel, or, for single linear sequences, after capturing into the last of the Ending Frame Buffer.
The Starting Frame Buffer and Ending Frame Buffer specify the frame buffers to be captured into, and thus the length of the sequence captured. If Start/End All Buffers is selected, the Starting Frame Buffer and Ending Frame Buffer are forced to the first and last available frame buffer, respectively.
If Live Video at Video Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Live'' mode; the Video Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in fields or frames as appropriate. The Live Video at Video Interval is most appropriate for cameras with continuous video output, for capturing every frame, or every N'th frame. It uses the camera's periodic video as the time reference.
If Snap Video at Time Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Snap'' mode; the Time Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in seconds. The Snap Video at Time Interval is most appropriate for cameras operating in a triggered mode for which a ''Live'' mode is unavailable (e.g. as the ''Snap'', itself, triggers the camera), or optionally for use with cameras with continuous video output in conjunction with ''time lapse'' imaging. It uses the computer's clock as the time reference.
If Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Snap'' mode; the Video Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in fields or frames as appropriate; in contrast to Live Video at Video Interval, the Snap Video at Video Interval only captures the specific frames needed (rather than capturing all frames and retaining only those needed) and reduces computer overhead (specifically, bus bandwidth - for frame grabbers not using on-board frame buffer memory) and, typically, should be used for subvideo rate, not video rate, capture. It uses both the computer's clock and the camera's periodic video as time references.
If using Event per Image, the Video Interval or Time Interval specifies the interval, in field, frames, or seconds, after capturing one image before the Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start Event is armed to capture the next image.
If Capture Video Fastest is selected, the Video Interval is forced to 1 and either the Live Video at Video Interval or the Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, as appropriate for the camera's video format.
The Images to Save is a reminder of the number of images to be saved, as derived from the Starting Frame Buffer and Ending Frame Buffer. During capture, the Images Captured and Images Saved show the total number of images captured and saved, respectively; they differ only while capturing a continuous circular sequence where the Images Saved is never larger than Images to Save. During capture, the Ave. (Image) Save Rate shows the approximate rate at which images are captured and saved averaged over the entire sequence.
After capture, the Current Image and Last Image Displayed indicate the latest image captured, and the First Image Displayed indicates the earliest image captured. For a linear sequence, these are trivially the same as Ending Frame Buffer and Starting Frame Buffer (unless the Stop or Cancel buttons terminated the capture prematurely).
For a continuous circular sequence, if View Circular Sequence in Temporal Order is selected, after the capture is terminated the buffers are re-ordered so that buffer 0 has the earliest image, buffer 1 the next earliest, etc. If View Circular Sequence in Buffer Order is selected, after the capture is terminated the buffers are left in their original, physical, order; the Last Image Displayed and First Image Displayed indicate the latest image captured, and the earliest image captured, respectively.
If Set Default AOI to Captured Buffers is selected, after the sequence capture is completed the Image Viewer Window - Aoi default sequence is set to the captured buffers. This is primarily useful when the Starting Frame Buffer and Ending Frame Buffer are chosen to be less than all of the buffers, or when the capture is prematurely terminated by an event, allowing easy use of Image File - Save Sequence to save only those buffers which have been captured without manually setting the AOI.
A choice of several event (i.e. trigger) conditions can be used to start, to stop, or trigger each image of the Linear Sequence or Circular Sequence.
If Mouse Click is selected, a ''hot button'' icon is shown; the trigger occurs when the icon is clicked.
If Date is selected, shown are Date&Time and Current fields. The Current shows the (computer's notion of) the current date and time. The trigger occurs when the Date&Time selected is less than or equal to the Current.
If RS-232 is selected, shown are RS-232 parameters allowing selection of the Port, Flow Cntl, Baud (rate), Parity, Stop Bits, and Data Bits. The trigger occurs with receipt of any character from the selected RS-232 port.
If SMPTE VITC is selected, shown are parameters allowing selection of VITC Hour, VITC Minute, VITC Second, VITC Frame, and VITC Image Line. The video is assumed encoded with the SMPTE Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC), and the PIXCI® - Video Setup set to allow capturing of 4 blanking lines where the VITC information is coded. The trigger occurs when the captured video's SMPTE Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC) is greater or equal to the specified parameters. For maximum speed, only one line of the captured video is examined for the SMPTE VITC, (see Image Examination - SMPTE VITC) to determine the correct line. Because the SMPTE VITC is decoded by software, and because the VITC in some frames may be garbled by noise, expect that the trigger may occur at or shortly after the specified time, rather than exactly at the specified time.
If G.P. Input is selected, shown is a parameter for G.P. Input Bit to allow selecting one of the frame grabber's general purpose (formerly referred to as ''External TTL Inputs''), input signal(s), and a selection of G.P. Input Change, G.P. Input 0=>1, or G.P. Input 1=>0. For G.P. Input Change, the trigger occurs when the frame grabber's selected general purpose input signal changes from its initial value as saved when Record button is clicked. If G.P. Input 0=>1 is selected, the trigger occurs then the frame grabber's selected general purpose input signal has a 0 to 1 transition. If G.P. Input 1=>0 is selected, the trigger occurs then the frame grabber's selected general purpose input signal has a 1 to 0 transition. The G.P Input Debounce (Delay) allows minimizing false triggering due to noisy input signals; a longer delay provides greater protection, but increases the latency between sensing the signal and acting upon the signal. Some PIXCI® frame grabbers do not have software sensed general purpose inputs, or may have latched general purpose inputs; not all of the above choices may be applicable.
If G.P. Trigger is selected, shown is a parameter for G.P. Trigger Number to allow selecting one of the frame grabber's general purpose trigger(s). The trigger occurs when the frame grabber's selected general purpose trigger changes from its initial count (of trigger transitions) as saved when Record button is clicked.
For all event types, the actual effect of the event can be delayed. If Delay None is selected, there is no delay. If Delay N Fields is selected, the effect of the event is delayed by the specified number of video fields. If Delay N Seconds is selected, the effect of the event is delayed by a specified number of seconds.
For use with Event Start or Event Stop but not Event per Image, if Delay % Images is selected, the effect of the event is delayed by the specified percentage of captured images. If using Live Video at Video Interval or Snap Video at Video Interval the effect is to delay the specified percentage of the total number of video fields required to capture the entire sequence. If using Snap Video at Time Interval the effect is to delay the specified percentage of the total time required to capture the entire sequence. The overall effect when used with Circular Sequence and Event Stop, is that of a ''pretrigger''; a delay of 25% will cause ¾ of the captured images to predate the trigger, and ¼ to postdate the trigger.
Specifically for use with Circular Sequence and Event Stop, if Pretrig. % Images is selected, the effect of the event is delayed by 100 minus the specified percentage of captured images. This is similar to Delay % Images, but with alternate terminology so that a pretrigger of 25% will cause ¼ of the captured images to predate the trigger, and ¾ to postdate the trigger.
If 0 Latency Only is selected, only triggering operations supported by hardware are enabled. Other options are implemented by software - the latency until the trigger takes effect is dependent on the computer's speed and utilization.
The frame grabber's general purpose output(s) can be set to ''strobe'' outside devices at selected points in the sequence capture. All of the strobe specifications contain a ''Mask'' and ''Value''; only for those bits for which the ''Mask'' is nonzero will the general purpose output(s) value be set to corresponding bits of ''Value''. Other bits of the general purpose output(s) remain unchanged.
The Set G. P. Output after Start: Mask and Set G. P. Output after Start: Value specify the general purpose outputs after the Record button is clicked. The Set G. P. Output after Trigger Armed: Mask and Set G. P. Output after Trigger Armed: Value specify the general purpose outputs after the trigger, if used, is armed. The Set G. P. Output after Triggered: Mask and Set G. P. Output after Triggered: Value specify the general purpose outputs after the trigger, if used, is fired. The Set G. P. Output after Live/Snap: Mask and Set G. P. Output after Live/Snap: Value specify the general purpose outputs after the frame grabber is switched to live mode or snap mode. The Set G. P. Output after Done: Mask and Set G. P. Output after Done: Value specify the general purpose outputs after the sequence capture is complete.
Some PIXCI® frame grabbers do not have software controlled general purpose outputs; not all of the above choices may be applicable.
The First Image Displayed specifies the index of the first image shown and the Last Image Displayed specifies the index of the last image shown. The Image Display Rate specifies the desired image sequence display rate.
If Continuous Run is selected, the image sequence display endlessly repeats. If Reverse Order is selected, the image sequence display is in reverse order.
The Play button starts sequence display, the Pause button pauses sequence display, the Stop button terminates sequence display, and the Cancel button terminates sequence display and closes the window.
The Current Image shows the index of the current image being displayed. It may also be manually set, while sequence display (and record) is stopped, to view at an individual image.
Depending on the host computer's speed, graphics display system, image resolution, image display size, and other variables, the image sequence may not be displayable at the rate specified. If Slow Rate to Display Images is selected, each image is displayed even though the effective display rate is slower than specified. If Skip Images to Maintain Rate is selected, images in the sequence are skipped as needed so as to effectively maintain the specified display rate.
The Set (First Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Set (Last Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Reset (First Image Displayed to First Image) button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the start of the sequence. The Reset (Last Image Displayed to Last Image) button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the end of the sequence. As a group, they allow tweaking the images displayed without having to enter buffer numbers.
If First/Last => Default AOI is selected, the Image Viewer Window - Aoi default sequence is set to the First Image Displayed and Last Image Displayed as they are changed.
If Snap Video at Time Interval or Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, the time at which each image is captured is recorded and shown as the Current Image Time Stamp. For some PIXCI® frame grabbers, and dependent upon configuration options, the time at which each image is captured is also recorded and shown when using Live Video at Video Interval.
If Mark Images as Captured w. Time Stamp is selected while capturing, the recorded time stamp is permanently marked in each image. If Mark Images as Captured w. Image Number is selected while capturing, the image sequence number is permanently marked in each image. The Mark Images as Captured w. Time Stamp and Mark Images as Captured w. Image Number only has effect if selected while capturing.
If Overlay Displayed Image w. Time Stamp is selected, the recorded time stamp is overlaid non-destructively on the displayed image. If Overlay Displayed Image w. Image Number is selected, the image sequence number is overlaid non-destructively on the displayed image. The Overlay Displayed Image w. Time Stamp and Overlay Displayed Image w. Image Number can be selected or deselected at any time.
The Mark All Images w. Overlay button can be used after capturing to permanently mark the overlaid time stamp and/or image number in each image.
The Set Stamp Style & Position button allows changing the overlaid or the permanently marked time stamp's or image number's size, location, color, and typeface as described in Graphic Text.
The Capture - Video to Virtual Memory window allows capturing a sequence of images at fixed, specified, intervals of time or at fixed, specified, intervals of video fields (or frames) into dynamically allocated host computer (virtual) memory. The capture rate can be as fast as one image per video field or frame. A sequence can be captured continuously, overwriting the saved images in a circular manner. A sequence capture can be started and/or stopped by an event (i.e. trigger), or each individual image captured in response to an event. The time at which each image was captured can be non-destructively overlaid or permanently marked within the image.
In contrast to the Capture - Video to Frame Buffers feature, the Capture - Video to Virtual Memory ability to capture sequences at a desired rate depends on the host computer's speed, available physical memory versus virtual memory, and the camera's video rate and bandwidth, but does not require pre-configuration of frame buffer memory to obtain sufficient memory for the desired number of images in the sequence.
If Linear Sequence is selected, upon clicking Record, a single linear sequence of video fields or frames are captured, with the length of sequence specified by Images to Save. The sequence capture terminates after capturing into the last of the Images to Save.
If Circular Sequence is selected, upon clicking Record, a continuous circular sequence of video fields or frames are captured, repeatedly, with the length of the sequence specified by Images to Save. The reuse of the first image of the sequence is ''seamless''; the same time or video field interval separates the last and first images of the saved sequence as does any other pair of adjacent saved images. The sequence capture terminates upon clicking Stop or Cancel.
If Event Free is selected, the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence is captured as described above.
If Event Start is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Virtual Memory - Capture Start Event is armed. The sequence capture begins when the selected event, or trigger, condition is satisfied; the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above, is captured.
If Event Stop is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Virtual Memory - Capture Stop Event is armed and the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above, is captured. The sequence capture terminates when the event, or trigger, condition is satisfied, or upon clicking Stop or Cancel, or, for single linear sequences, after capturing into the last of the Images to Save.
If Event Start & Stop is selected, both the Event Start and Event Stop and used to start and stop the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above.
If Event per Image is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Virtual Memory - Capture Start Event is armed once per image. Each image of the sequence is captured when the selected event, or trigger, condition is satisfied. The sequence capture terminates when the event, or trigger, condition is satisfied, or upon clicking Stop or Cancel, or, for single linear sequences, after capturing into the last of the Images to Save.
If Live Video at Video Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Live'' mode; the Video Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in fields or frames as appropriate. The Live Video at Video Interval is most appropriate for cameras with continuous video output, for capturing every frame, or every N'th frame. It uses the camera's periodic video as the time reference.
If Snap Video at Time Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Snap'' mode; the Time Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in seconds. The Snap Video at Time Interval is most appropriate for cameras operating in a triggered mode for which a ''Live'' mode is unavailable (e.g. as the ''Snap'', itself, triggers the camera), or optionally for use with cameras with continuous video output in conjunction with ''time lapse'' imaging. It uses the computer's clock as the time reference.
If Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Snap'' mode; the Video Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in fields or frames as appropriate; in contrast to Live Video at Video Interval, the Snap Video at Video Interval only captures the specific frames needed (rather than capturing all frames and retaining only those needed) and reduces computer overhead (specifically, bus bandwidth - for frame grabbers not using on-board frame buffer memory) and, typically, should be used for subvideo rate, not video rate, capture. It uses both the computer's clock and the camera's periodic video as time references.
If using Event per Image, the Video Interval or Time Interval specifies the interval, in field, frames, or seconds, after capturing one image before the Video to Virtual Memory - Capture Start Event is armed to capture the next image.
Use of the Live Video at Video Interval requires that at least three frame buffers have been configured (see PIXCI® - Driver Assistant). More frame buffers may be helpful for slower computers or faster video frame rates, as the frame buffers serve as a temporary cache before images are saved in host computer (virtual) memory. Use of Snap Video at Time Interval or Snap Video at Video Interval requires that at least two frame buffers have been configured; additional frame buffers for ''Snap'' modes are immaterial.
During capture, the Images Captured and Images Saved show the total number of images captured and saved, respectively; they differ only while capturing a continuous circular sequence where the Images Saved is never larger than Images to Save. During capture, the Image Save Rate shows the approximate rate at which images are captured and saved, the Ave. (Image) Save Rate shows the approximate rate at which images are captured and saved averaged over the entire sequence.
After capture, the Current Image and Last Image Displayed indicate the latest image captured, and the First Image Displayed indicates the earliest image captured. For a linear sequence, these are simply Images Saved-1 and 0, unless the Stop or Cancel buttons terminated the capture prematurely. For a continuous circular sequence these indicate the temporal ordering of the captured images, and allow sequence display in temporal order.
The Capture - Video to Virtual Memory offers the same start and stop event (i.e. trigger) options as described in Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start/Stop Event.
The Capture - Video to Virtual Memory offers a pause event feature, allowing capture to be paused and continued via events (i.e. trigger) options. The Pause On and Pause Off events can be chosen separately; each allows selecting an RS-232, G.P. Input, or G.P. Trigger event as described for Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start/Stop Event. In addition, for the Pause feature's G.P. Trigger selection, the G.P Trigger Debounce (Delay) allows minimizing false triggering due to noisy trigger signals; a longer delay provides greater protection, but increases the latency between sensing the trigger and acting upon the trigger.
The Pause button also allows capture to be paused and continued.
The First Image Displayed specifies the index of the first image shown and the Last Image Displayed specifies the index of the last image shown. The Image Display Rate specifies the desired image sequence display rate.
If Continuous Run is selected, the image sequence display endlessly repeats. If Reverse Order is selected, the image sequence display is in reverse order.
The Play button starts sequence display, the Pause button pauses sequence display, the Stop button terminates sequence display, and the Cancel button terminates sequence display and closes the window.
The Current Image shows the index of the current image being displayed. It may also be manually set, while sequence display (and record) is stopped, to view at an individual image.
Depending on the host computer's speed, graphics display system, image resolution, image display size, and other variables, the image sequence may not be displayable at the rate specified. If Slow Rate to Display Images is selected, each image is displayed even though the effective display rate is slower than specified. If Skip Images to Maintain Rate is selected, images in the sequence are skipped as needed so as to effectively maintain the specified display rate.
The Set (First Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Set (Last Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Reset (First Image Displayed to First Image) button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the start of the sequence. The Reset (Last Image Displayed to Last Image) button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the end of the sequence. As a group, they allow tweaking the images displayed without having to enter buffer numbers.
If First/Last => Default AOI is selected, the Image Viewer Window - Aoi default sequence is set to the First Image Displayed and Last Image Displayed as they are changed.
If Snap Video at Time Interval or Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, the time at which each image is captured is recorded and shown as the Current Image Time Stamp. For some PIXCI® frame grabbers, and dependent upon configuration options, the time at which each image is captured is also recorded and shown when using Live Video at Video Interval.
If Mark Images as Captured w. Time Stamp is selected while capturing, the recorded time stamp is permanently marked in each image. If Mark Images as Captured w. Image Number is selected while capturing, the image sequence number is permanently marked in each image. The Mark Images as Captured w. Time Stamp and Mark Images as Captured w. Image Number only has effect if selected while capturing.
If Overlay Displayed Image w. Time Stamp is selected, the recorded time stamp is overlaid non-destructively on the displayed image. If Overlay Displayed Image w. Image Number is selected, the image sequence number is overlaid non-destructively on the displayed image. The Overlay Displayed Image w. Time Stamp and Overlay Displayed Image w. Image Number can be selected or deselected at any time.
The Mark All Images w. Overlay button can be used after capturing to permanently mark the overlaid time stamp and/or image number in each image.
The Set Stamp Style & Position button allows changing the overlaid or the permanently marked time stamp's or image number's size, location, color, and typeface as described in Graphic Text.
The Capture - Video to Disk File window allows capturing a sequence of images at fixed, specified, intervals of time or at fixed, specified, intervals of video fields (or frames) to disk. A sequence can be captured continuously, overwriting the saved images in a circular manner. A sequence capture can be started and/or stopped by an event (i.e. trigger), or each individual image captured in response to an event. The time at which each image was captured can be non-destructively overlaid or permanently marked within the image.
The record and playback frame rate depends upon the image resolution, host computer speed, and disk capabilities. For utmost efficiency, images are stored in the specified Video to Disk File in an internal format, dependent on the current PIXCI® frame grabber and the current camera; the Video to Disk File is intended only for use by this Capture - Video to Disk File. feature, or by the File - Load New Image Sequence feature. However, after recording a sequence, the images can be re-saved in TIFF or other standard file formats, by using Image File - Save Sequence of the The Image Viewer Window.
In contrast, the Capture - Video to Image Files feature directly saves each image of the sequence in a standard file format, but may not be able to obtain as high an image record and playback frame rate.
If using a single frame grabber, the
Video to Disk File
field allows explicit entry of a path and file name
wherein the video images are to be recorded;
alternately, the
Browse
button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing
dialog box.
XCAP does not force any file name extension;
although using
.vif
is recommended.
The
1 File
''option''
is always selected.
If multiple frame grabbers and Use Common Format & Controls w. Cameras Synchronized are in use (see PIXCI® - Multiple Boards), and 1 File/Unit is selected, the Video to Disk File, Unit 0, Video to Disk File, Unit 1, etc. allows explicit entry of a path and file name for each of the frame grabbers.
Alternately, if multiple frame grabbers and Use Common Format & Controls w. Cameras Synchronized are in use, and 1 Pattern is selected, the Video to Disk File Pattern, Indexing, as, and thru fields allows explicit entry of a path and numeric sequence of file names. The File Name Pattern is expected to contain one or more ''?'' characters; all such characters are replaced with decimal numbers incrementing from a starting number (following as) through the an ending number (following thru). One file of the sequence is used for each XCAP frame grabber.
In addition to the
filename specified by
Video to Disk File,
Video to Disk File Pattern,
or
Video to Disk File, Unit 0,
Video to Disk File, Unit 1,
etc., the
Capture - Video to Disk File
feature also creates a corresponding
.fmt
and
.ini
files, to allow use of the video to disk file via
File - Load New Image Sequence.
If the
Capture - Adjustments
window is open during sequence capture, the
.ini
file will also contain a record of all of the active parameters
shown in that window,
so that the camera's
exposure, gain, and similar parameters
(dependent on the PIXCI® card and camera used)
in effect during
the sequence capture are recorded along with the image data.
If a Video to Disk File or Video to Disk File Pattern for an existing file is entered, the File Write Protect is automatically selected and the Record button disabled. Overwriting an existing file requires that the File Write Protect be explicitly deselected, enabling the Record button.
If Protect after Recording is selected, the File Write Protect is automatically (re)applied when the Record button is clicked, helping avoid accidental overwriting of newly captured images.
If Auto File Name upon Record is selected, a suitable Video to Disk File, Video to Disk File Pattern, or Video to Disk File, Unit 0, Video to Disk File, Unit 1, etc. is automatically generated based on the current date and time when the Record button is clicked.
If File Includes Image Date&Time Stamp is selected, additional information is recorded with each image including the date and time of capture and other ''point of capture'' status. If File Includes Image Date&Time Stamp is not selected, the date and time of capture is saved separately in computer memory, but discarded when the Capture - Video to Disk File is exited or a new Video to Disk File or Video to Disk File Pattern entered. The latter is sufficient if the recording will be immediately resaved in TIFF or other standard file format supporting date & time stamps. The former allows immediately recording additional sequences without loosing the date & time stamps; it is also advantageous when recording millions of small images, which would otherwise require large amounts of computer memory to save the date & time stamps.
If Linear Sequence is selected, upon clicking Record, a single linear sequence of video fields or frames are captured, with the length of sequence specified by Images to Save. The sequence capture terminates after capturing into the last of the Images to Save or upon clicking Stop or Cancel.
If Circular Sequence is selected, upon clicking Record, a continuous circular sequence of video fields or frames are captured, repeatedly, with the length of the sequence (i.e. number of unique images) specified by Images to Save. The reuse of the first image of the sequence is ''seamless''; the same time or video field interval separates the last and first images of the saved sequence as does any other pair of adjacent saved images. The sequence capture terminates upon clicking Stop or Cancel.
If Event Free is selected, the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence is captured as described above.
If Event Start is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Disk File - Capture Start Event is armed. The sequence capture begins when the selected event, or trigger, condition is satisfied; the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above, is captured.
If Event Stop is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Disk File - Capture Stop Event is armed and the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above, is captured. The sequence capture terminates when the event, or trigger, condition is satisfied, or upon clicking Stop or Cancel, or, for single linear sequences, after capturing into the last of the Images to Save.
If Event Start & Stop is selected, both the Event Start and Event Stop and used to start and stop the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above.
If Event per Image is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Disk File - Capture Start Event is armed once per image. Each image of the sequence is captured when the selected event, or trigger, condition is satisfied. The sequence capture terminates when the event, or trigger, condition is satisfied, or upon clicking Stop or Cancel, or, for single linear sequences, after capturing into the last of the Images to Save.
If Live Video at Video Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Live'' mode; the Video Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in fields or frames as appropriate. The Live Video at Video Interval is most appropriate for cameras with continuous video output, for capturing every frame, or every N'th frame. It uses the camera's periodic video as the time reference.
If Snap Video at Time Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Snap'' mode; the Time Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in seconds. The Snap Video at Time Interval is most appropriate for cameras operating in a triggered mode for which a ''Live'' mode is unavailable (e.g. as the ''Snap'', itself, triggers the camera), or optionally for use with cameras with continuous video output in conjunction with ''time lapse'' imaging. It uses the computer's clock as the time reference.
If Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Snap'' mode; the Video Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in fields or frames as appropriate; in contrast to Live Video at Video Interval, the Snap Video at Video Interval only captures the specific frames needed (rather than capturing all frames and retaining only those needed) and reduces computer overhead (specifically, bus bandwidth - for frame grabbers not using on-board frame buffer memory) and, typically, should be used for subvideo rate, not video rate, capture. It uses both the computer's clock and the camera's periodic video as time references.
If using Event per Image, the Video Interval or Time Interval specifies the interval, in field, frames, or seconds, after capturing one image before the Video to Disk File - Capture Start Event is armed to capture the next image.
Use of the Live Video at Video Interval requires that at least three frame buffers have been configured (see PIXCI® - Driver Assistant). More frame buffers may be helpful for slower computers or faster video frame rates, as the frame buffers serve as a temporary cache before images are saved in host computer memory. Use of Snap Video at Time Interval or Snap Video at Video Interval requires that at least two frame buffers have been configured; additional frame buffers for ''Snap'' modes are immaterial.
During capture, the Images Captured and Images Saved show the total number of images captured and saved, respectively; they differ only while capturing a continuous circular sequence where the Images Saved is never larger than Images to Save. During capture, the Image Save Rate shows the approximate rate at which images are captured and saved, the Ave. (Image) Save Rate shows the approximate rate at which images are captured and saved averaged over the entire sequence. The Disk Total Space and Disk Free Space display the total size, and the amount of available free space, respectively, of the disk containing the Video to Disk File; both are in ''true'' MiBytes (1024×1024 bytes), rather than the misleading units used by some disk drive manufacturers (1000×1000 bytes). The Required Disk Space shows the amount of disk space required for the specified Images to Save.
After capture, the Current Image and Last Image Displayed indicate the latest image captured, and the First Image Displayed indicates the earliest image captured. For a linear sequence, these are simply Images Saved-1 and 0, unless the Stop or Cancel buttons terminated the capture prematurely. For a continuous circular sequence these indicate the temporal ordering of the captured images, and allow sequence display in temporal order.
If re-recording over an existing file, the Truncate File after Record selects whether, if fewer images are recorded, the file is to be truncated or is to retain its original size (and retaining old image data following the new image data). Truncation conserves disk space and lessens possible confusion when the file is later read. Maintaining the original file's data may allow faster recording when the file is again reused to record additional images; also see the Allocate option, below.
If Clear File Name(s) after Record is selected, after recording is completed the Video to Disk File, Video to Disk File, Unit 0, or Video to Disk File Pattern are cleared and the captured images not displayed. This can be used to help prevent overwriting of the image file(s). Or if an external program is to immediately modify or delete the file(s).
In color capture mode, the PIXCI® SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, and SV5L frame grabber's default format is to generate RGB pixel data at three bytes per pixel. Using the Color Pixel Format the pixel format can be switched to UYVY or YUYV at two bytes per pixel with the same color quality, or to BtYUV at 1.5 bytes per pixel with lower color quality. This reduces both the bandwidth necessary for video to disk capture and the disk space required, but may slow the display of live video on older, slower computers.
Some color cameras, such as Redlake MASD ES2001RGB, ES2020RGB, ES2093RGB, ES4020RGB, ES11000RGB allow selecting the camera's output to be RGB or Bayer. Selecting Bayer decreases the bandwidth necessary for video to disk capture and the disk space required by a factor of three, but may slow the display of live video on older, slower computers.
The SILICON VIDEO® 10C6, 10C-CL, 20C-CL, 1281C, 1310C, 15C5, 1C45 2112C, 2KS-C, 5C10, 643C, 9C10, 9M001C, 9T001C, and WGA-C color cameras, as well as many color cameras by Basler, Cohu, Hitachi, Imperx, Jai, Pulnix, Raptor, Silicon Imaging, UNIQ, Vieworks, and others, output Bayer format pixels. Video to disk automatically saves only the original Bayer representation, rather than the derived RGB representation, decreasing the bandwidth necessary for video to disk capture and the disk space required by a factor of three. Also, the raw sensor data is stored without applying permanent color corrections; color corrections can be adjusted during playback.
In the Live Video at Video Interval mode, all of the frame grabber's frame buffer(s) are used to queue (FIFO) image data and thereby accommodate disk drives which may have sufficient average bandwidth but insufficient ''instantaneous'' for video rate recording. Additional frame buffer memory, and thus additional frame buffers, can be configured using the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant. Under Windows NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, and 8/10/11 the use of ''Forceful'' memory allocation should be avoided; allocation of 62 MiByte is suggested.
The Allocate instead of Record creates an Video to Disk File with arbitrary image data sufficient to contain the specified number of Images to Save. Using Allocate before Record is not required, but may allow faster recording of images.
Windows limits the maximum file size to 2 GiByte in a FAT16 disk partition, to 4 GiByte in a FAT32 disk partition, and to 234 GiByte in a NTFS disk partition. The approximate disk space required for each image can be found under PIXCI® - Video Setup. Using a disk partition empty of all other files, and thus unfragmented, may increase recording bandwidth.
If Update Disk Statistics during Recording is deselected, the Disk Total Space and Disk Free Space are not updated during recording, slightly reducing disk and CPU overhead.
Under Windows, the Use Win API WRITE_THROUGH, Use Win API NO_BUFFERING, and/or Use Win API OVERLAPPED allow selecting the eponymous Windows file I/O mode, intended for use by people with advanced knowledge of computer system and Windows configuration; consult the Windows documentation for their effect.
Under some versions of Windows: recording a sequence, deleting the file, and attempting to record a new sequence may exhibit reduced file system bandwidth and performance. It is more efficient to simply record over the old sequence, or alternately delete the file and then defragment or Quick Format the partition.
Under Linux, the Use Linux API O_NDELAY/O_NONBLOCK, Use Linux API O_SYNC, and/or Use Linux API O_DIRECT allow selecting the eponymous Linux file I/O mode, intended for use by people with advanced knowledge of computer system and Windows configuration; consult the Linux documentation for their effect. The default behavior is to initiate I/O for each captured image. When capturing small images at high speed, performance can be improved by using Disk I/O Buffer Size (I/O) to set an I/O buffer size larger than the image size so that multiple images can be accumulated, allowing less frequent I/O initiation of a larger size and thereby improve performance.
The default behavior is to ''pad'' each saved image, so that each saved image is aligned with the disk's sector size, determined automatically by query of the operating system However, under Windows, and especially when using RAID controllers, the sector size reported by Windows may be incorrect. The Disk I/O Alignment Size can be used to specify an alignment based on the sector size as suggested by the disk drive or RAID controller manufacturer and thereby improve performance, albeit at the expense of a larger file size. If experimenting, try values of 4, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 KiBytes.
Some disk controller claims for high bandwidth and throughput depends on the controller performing data compression. Depending on the compression algorithm used, such as disk subsystem may provide adequate bandwidth for video to disk capture of dark and saturated images, or images of a uniform target (e.g. a blank wall), but not provide sufficient bandwidth for typical ''real'' images.
Solid State Drives (SSD) offer improved bandwidth and throughput, compared to rotational drives. However, the SSD performance will degrade after writing and rewriting data; and may be particularly noticeable when Video to Disk is (re)recording over a significant fraction of the drive's capacity. Typically, the performance of so-called ''Enterprise'' class drives degrade significantly slower than so-called ''Consumer'' class drives (circa 2013).
The Capture - Video to Disk File offers the same start and stop event (i.e. trigger) options as described in Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start/Stop Event.
The Capture - Video to Disk File offers a pause event feature, allowing capture to be paused and continued via events (i.e. trigger) options. The Pause On and Pause Off events can be chosen separately; each allows selecting an RS-232, G.P. Input, or G.P. Trigger event as described for Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start/Stop Event. In addition, for the Pause feature's G.P. Trigger selection, the G.P Trigger Debounce (Delay) allows minimizing false triggering due to noisy trigger signals; a longer delay provides greater protection, but increases the latency between sensing the trigger and acting upon the trigger.
The Pause button also allows capture to be paused and continued.
The First Image Displayed specifies the index of the first image shown and the Last Image Displayed specifies the index of the last image shown. The Image Display Rate specifies the desired image sequence display rate.
If Continuous Run is selected, the image sequence display endlessly repeats. If Reverse Order is selected, the image sequence display is in reverse order.
The Play button starts sequence display, the Pause button pauses sequence display, the Stop button terminates sequence display, and the Cancel button terminates sequence display and closes the window.
The Current Image shows the index of the current image being displayed. It may also be manually set, while sequence display (and record) is stopped, to view at an individual image.
Depending on the host computer's speed, graphics display system, image resolution, image display size, and other variables, the image sequence may not be displayable at the rate specified. If Slow Rate to Display Images is selected, each image is displayed even though the effective display rate is slower than specified. If Skip Images to Maintain Rate is selected, images in the sequence are skipped as needed so as to effectively maintain the specified display rate.
The Set (First Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Set (Last Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Reset (First Image Displayed to First Image) button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the start of the sequence. The Reset (Last Image Displayed to Last Image) button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the end of the sequence. As a group, they allow tweaking the images displayed without having to enter buffer numbers.
If First/Last => Default AOI is selected, the Image Viewer Window - Aoi default sequence is set to the First Image Displayed and Last Image Displayed as they are changed.
If Snap Video at Time Interval or Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, the time at which each image is captured is recorded and shown as the Current Image Time Stamp. For some PIXCI® frame grabbers, and dependent upon configuration options, the time at which each image is captured is also recorded and shown when using Live Video at Video Interval.
If Mark Images as Captured w. Time Stamp is selected while capturing, the recorded time stamp is permanently marked in each image. If Mark Images as Captured w. Image Number is selected while capturing, the image sequence number is permanently marked in each image. The Mark Images as Captured w. Time Stamp and Mark Images as Captured w. Image Number only has effect if selected while capturing.
If Overlay Displayed Image w. Time Stamp is selected, the recorded time stamp is overlaid non-destructively on the displayed image. If Overlay Displayed Image w. Image Number is selected, the image sequence number is overlaid non-destructively on the displayed image. The Overlay Displayed Image w. Time Stamp and Overlay Displayed Image w. Image Number can be selected or deselected at any time.
The Mark All Images w. Overlay button can be used after capturing to permanently mark the overlaid time stamp and/or image number in each image.
The Set Stamp Style & Position button allows changing the overlaid or the permanently marked time stamp's or image number's size, location, color, and typeface as described in Graphic Text.
The Capture - Video to Image Files window allows capturing a sequence of images at fixed, specified, intervals of time or at fixed, specified, intervals of video fields (or frames) to disk. A sequence can be captured continuously, overwriting the saved images in a circular manner. A sequence capture can be started and/or stopped by an event (i.e. trigger), or each individual image captured in response to an event. The time at which each image was captured can be non-destructively overlaid or permanently marked within the image. Optionally, each captured image can also be immediately saved to an FTP URL.
The record and playback frame rate depends upon the image resolution, host computer speed, and disk capabilities. Each image of the sequence is saved in a standard image file format - TIFF, BMP, JPEG/JFIF, Portable Map, or FITS - one image per file. Or saved as in a standard image file format - BigTIFF, FITS, or AVI - using a single file for the entire sequence However, when using a single file for the entire sequence: a) Continuous capture mode is not available, b) The sequence can't be modified after capture, c) The Video to Image Files - FTP Copy and Video to Image Files - HTTP Server features are not available, and d) For time lapse photography, capturing into a single file has the disadvantage that in event of power failure during capture, the entire file and thus the previously captured images may be lost. Alternately, a sequence can be captured to TIFF, BMP, JPEG/JFIF, Portable Map, or FITS format files (one image per file) or via Capture - Video to Disk File, and after sequence capture (and optional modifications) resaved in the desired format.
In contrast, the Capture - Video to Disk File feature saves each image of the sequence to a single file in an efficient, internal format and can typically obtain a higher image record and playback frame rate.
The
Image File Pattern,
Indexing,
as,
and
thru
fields allows explicit entry of a path and numeric sequence of file names;
alternately, the
Browse
button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing
dialog box.
XCAP does not force the file name's extension
to be the customary extension;
although using
.tif
for TIFF format,
.btf
for BigTIFF format,
.bmp
for BMP format,
.fts
for FITS format,
etc., is highly recommended.
The Image File Pattern is expected to contain one or more ''?'' characters; all such characters are replaced with decimal numbers incrementing from the image sequence starting number (following as) through the image sequence ending number (following thru). The Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box; after selecting a specific file name with the browser, the result in Image File Pattern can be modified, inserting ''?'' characters to represent the sequencing characters.
If using a single frame grabber, the Image File Pattern specifies all of the file names as described above. The 1 Pattern ''option'' is always selected.
If multiple frame grabbers and Use Common Format & Controls w. Cameras Synchronized are in use (see PIXCI® - Multiple Boards), and the 1 for All option is selected, the Image File Pattern is extended with additional ''?'' characters to represent the various frame grabbers. For example, with two frame grabbers and 3 images captured per board, the pattern should contain two ''?'' characters which will be replaced by:
00 for board 0 image 0 01 for board 0 image 1 02 for board 0 image 2 10 for board 1 image 0 11 for board 1 image 1 12 for board 1 image 2
If multiple frame grabbers and Use Common Format & Controls w. Cameras Synchronized are in use and the 1 for Each option is selected, the Video to Image File Pattern, Unit 0, Video to Image File Pattern, Unit 1, etc. allows explicit entry of a path and file name pattern for each of the frame grabbers.
If using a single file for the entire sequence - in BigTIFF, FITS, or AVI - the Image File Pattern's need ''?'' characters only when using multiple frame grabbers with Use Common Format & Controls w. Cameras Synchronized and the 1 for All option.
The ''?'' characters to represent the sequencing characters may also be used in the directory (folder) component, such as:
However, the implied various directories (folders) must already exist. This allows creating a sequence with more files than allowed in a single directory (folder) under the host operating system.[72] The example above allows saving 100,000 files, 10,000 in each of ten directories (folders)./data?/file????.tif
If an Image File Pattern for existing file(s) is entered, the File Write Protect is automatically selected and the Record button disabled. Overwriting an existing file requires that the File Write Protect be explicitly deselected, enabling use of the Record button.
If Protect after Recording is selected, the File Write Protect is automatically (re)applied when the Record button is clicked, helping avoid accidental overwriting of newly captured images.
If Auto File Name upon Record is selected, a suitable Image File Pattern or Video to Image File Pattern, Unit 0, Video to Image File Pattern, Unit 1, etc. is automatically generated based on the current date and time when the Record button is clicked.
One of the file formats,
Sequence of TIFF's,
Sequence of JPEG/JFIF's,
Sequence of BMP's,
Sequence of Portable Map's,
Sequence of FITS's,
One TIFF w. Sequence,
One AVI w. Sequence,
One BigTIFF w. Sequence,
or
One FITS w. Sequence
can be selected.
The suffix of the
Image File Pattern
selects the default file format;
for ambiguous selections, such as
.tif
for either
Sequence of TIFF's
and
One TIFF w. Sequence,
or
.fts
for either
Sequence of FITS's
and
One FITS w. Sequence,
the
Seq of Files
allows selecting the former options, and
File w. Seq
allows selecting the latter options.
For each file format selection, format specific options are available as described under Image File - Save as TIFF Format, BigTIFF Format, JPEG/JFIF Format, BMP Format, Portable Map Format, FITS Format, and AVI Format.
If Linear Sequence is selected, upon clicking Record, a single linear sequence of video fields or frames are captured, with the length of sequence specified by Images to Save. The sequence capture terminates after capturing into the last of the Images to Save.
If Circular Sequence is selected, upon clicking Record, a continuous circular sequence of video fields or frames are captured, repeatedly, with the length of the sequence specified by Images to Save. The reuse of the first image of the sequence is ''seamless''; the same time or video field interval separates the last and first images of the saved sequence as does any other pair of adjacent saved images. The sequence capture terminates upon clicking Stop or Cancel.
If Event Free is selected, the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence is captured as described above.
If Event Start is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Image Files - Capture Start Event is armed. The sequence capture begins when the selected event, or trigger, condition is satisfied; the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above, is captured.
If Event Stop is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Image Files - Capture Stop Event is armed and the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above, is captured. The sequence capture terminates when the event, or trigger, condition is satisfied, or upon clicking Stop or Cancel, or, for single linear sequences, after capturing into the last of the Images to Save.
If Event Start & Stop is selected, both the Event Start and Event Stop and used to start and stop the single linear sequence or the continuous circular sequence, as described above.
If Event per Image is selected, upon clicking Record, the selected Video to Image Files - Capture Start Event is armed once per image. Each image of the sequence is captured when the selected event, or trigger, condition is satisfied. The sequence capture terminates when the event, or trigger, condition is satisfied, or upon clicking Stop or Cancel, or, for single linear sequences, after capturing into the last of the Images to Save.
If Live Video at Video Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Live'' mode; the Video Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in fields or frames as appropriate. The Live Video at Video Interval is most appropriate for cameras with continuous video output, for capturing every frame, or every N'th frame. It uses the camera's periodic video as the time reference.
If Snap Video at Time Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Snap'' mode; the Time Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in seconds. The Snap Video at Time Interval is most appropriate for cameras operating in a triggered mode for which a ''Live'' mode is unavailable (e.g. as the ''Snap'', itself, triggers the camera), or optionally for use with cameras with continuous video output in conjunction with ''time lapse'' imaging. It uses the computer's clock as the time reference.
If Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, video is captured in ''Snap'' mode; the Video Interval specifies the interval between captured images, in fields or frames as appropriate; in contrast to Live Video at Video Interval, the Snap Video at Video Interval only captures the specific frames needed (rather than capturing all frames and retaining only those needed) and reduces computer overhead (specifically, bus bandwidth - for frame grabbers not using on-board frame buffer memory) and, typically, should be used for subvideo rate, not video rate, capture. It uses both the computer's clock and the camera's periodic video as time references.
If using Event per Image, the Video Interval or Time Interval specifies the interval, in field, frames, or seconds, after capturing one image before the Video to Image Files - Capture Start Event is armed to capture the next image.
Use of the Live Video at Video Interval requires that at least two frame buffers have been configured (see PIXCI® - Driver Assistant). More frame buffers may be helpful for slower computers or faster video frame rates, as the frame buffers serve as a temporary cache before images are saved in host computer memory. Use of Snap Video at Time Interval or Snap Video at Video Interval requires that at least one frame buffer has been configured; additional frame buffers for ''Snap'' modes are not significant.
If the Record Restart w. Oldest Existing Image File option is selected, capture restarts with the oldest existing image file, or the first non-existent image file, instead of starting with the first image file specified by the Image File Pattern.
During capture, the Images Captured and Images Saved show the total number of images captured and saved, respectively; they differ only while capturing a continuous circular sequence where the Images Saved is never larger than Images to Save. During capture, the Image Save Rate shows the approximate rate at which images are captured and saved, the Ave. (Image) Save Rate shows the approximate rate at which images are captured and saved averaged over the entire sequence. The Disk Total Space and Disk Free Space display the total size, and the amount of available free space, respectively, of the disk containing the Image File; both are in ''true'' MiBytes (1024×1024 bytes), rather than the misleading units used by some disk drive manufacturers (1000×1000 bytes).
After capture, the Current Image and Last Image Displayed indicate the latest image captured, and the First Image Displayed indicates the earliest image captured. For a linear sequence, these are simply Images Saved-1 and 0, unless the Stop or Cancel buttons terminated the capture prematurely. For a continuous circular sequence these indicate the temporal ordering of the captured images, and allow sequence display in temporal order.
Use of Allocate instead of Record creates image files, as per the Image File Pattern and Images to Save, with arbitrary image data. Using Allocate before Record is not required but may allow faster recording of images, especially when saving thousands of image files which requires time consuming (at least under Windows) enlargement of the directory (folder).
If Clear File Name(s) after Record is selected, after recording is completed the Image File Pattern or Video to Image File Pattern, Unit 0 are cleared and the captured images not displayed. This can be used to help prevent overwriting of the image file(s). Or if an external program is to immediately modify or delete the file(s).
To help speed up JPEG/JFIF, TIFF, or BigTIFF coding and compression, multiple threads and CPU's (or CPU cores) can be assigned to the operation; localed under the JPEG I/O, TIFF I/O, and BigTIFF I/O sections. The Process Threads allows selecting the number of CPU threads to perform the operation. The 1 Thread, 2 Threads, etc. selects the specified number of threads; regardless of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system. The All CPUs, 50% CPUs, and 25% CPUs select use of multiple threads, based on the specified percentage of the number of CPUs (or CPU cores) reported as available on the current system.
The Capture - Video to Image Files offers the same start and stop event (i.e. trigger) options as described in Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start/Stop Event.
The Capture - Video to Image Files offers a pause event feature, allowing capture to be paused and continued via events (i.e. trigger) options. The Pause On and Pause Off events can be chosen separately; each allows selecting an RS-232, G.P. Input, or G.P. Trigger event as described for Video to Frame Buffers - Capture Start/Stop Event. In addition, for the Pause feature's G.P. Trigger selection, the G.P Trigger Debounce (Delay) allows minimizing false triggering due to noisy trigger signals; a longer delay provides greater protection, but increases the latency between sensing the trigger and acting upon the trigger.
The Pause button also allows capture to be paused and continued.
The First Image Displayed specifies the index of the first image shown and the Last Image Displayed specifies the index of the last image shown. The Image Display Rate specifies the desired image sequence display rate.
If Continuous Run is selected, the image sequence display endlessly repeats. If Reverse Order is selected, the image sequence display is in reverse order.
The Play button starts sequence display, the Pause button pauses sequence display, the Stop button terminates sequence display, and the Cancel button terminates sequence display and closes the window.
The Current Image shows the index of the current image being displayed. It may also be manually set, while sequence display (and record) is stopped, to view at an individual image.
Depending on the host computer's speed, graphics display system, image resolution, image display size, and other variables, the image sequence may not be displayable at the rate specified. If Slow Rate to Display Images is selected, each image is displayed even though the effective display rate is slower than specified. If Skip Images to Maintain Rate is selected, images in the sequence are skipped as needed so as to effectively maintain the specified display rate.
The Set (First Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Set (Last Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Reset (First Image Displayed to First Image) button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the start of the sequence. The Reset (Last Image Displayed to Last Image) button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the end of the sequence. As a group, they allow tweaking the images displayed without having to enter buffer numbers.
If First/Last => Default AOI is selected, the Image Viewer Window - Aoi default sequence is set to the First Image Displayed and Last Image Displayed as they are changed.
If Snap Video at Time Interval or Snap Video at Video Interval is selected, the time at which each image is captured is recorded and shown as the Current Image Time Stamp. For some PIXCI® frame grabbers, and dependent upon configuration options, the time at which each image is captured is also recorded and shown when using Live Video at Video Interval.
If Mark Images as Captured w. Time Stamp is selected while capturing, the recorded time stamp is permanently marked in each image. If Mark Images as Captured w. Image Number is selected while capturing, the image sequence number is permanently marked in each image. The Mark Images as Captured w. Time Stamp and Mark Images as Captured w. Image Number only has effect if selected while capturing.
If Overlay Displayed Image w. Time Stamp is selected, the recorded time stamp is overlaid non-destructively on the displayed image. If Overlay Displayed Image w. Image Number is selected, the image sequence number is overlaid non-destructively on the displayed image. The Overlay Displayed Image w. Time Stamp and Overlay Displayed Image w. Image Number can be selected or deselected at any time.
The Mark All Images w. Overlay button can be used after capturing to permanently mark the overlaid time stamp and/or image number in each image.
The Set Stamp Style & Position button allows changing the overlaid or the permanently marked time stamp's or image number's size, location, color, and typeface as described in Graphic Text.
Optionally, if FTP Captured Image Copy Enabled, after each captured image is saved to disk, it can be immediately copied to an internet FTP URL.
If Copy to Single URL is selected, all images are copied to the same URL. If (Copy) to Sequence of URL's is selected, images are copied to a range of URL's. The Image URL Pattern specifying the numeric sequence of URLs.
The Image URL Pattern field allows explicit entry of an FTP URL to which the image is to be saved. The URL should have a format similar to:
orftp://domain.com/pretty.tif ftp://ftp.domain.com/images/pretty.tif
The FTP User ID and FTP Password must be set with a user ID and password that allows access to the Image URL Pattern. If FTP to .tmp and Rename is selected, the image is saved to the specified URL ''.tmp'' appended, then renamed to the specified URL; this prevents other programs or users from ''seeing'' a partial file while the copy operation is in progress. The FTP Timeout limits the period of time used by the save operation.ftp://domain.com/pretty???.tif ftp://ftp.domain.com/images/pretty???.tif
Depending on the image size and speed of the internet connection, use of the FTP Captured Image Copy Enabled feature may significantly slow the capture rate.
Optionally, with HTTP Image Sequence Server Enabled, an HTTP server (i.e. web server) is activated that allows access to the sequence of images - as they are being captured - via an internet web browser.
The HTTP Port specifies the HTTP port to be used; each independent HTTP server within XCAP (such as within different instances of Capture - Video to Image Files) should have a unique HTTP port. The standard default is 80, standard alternate is 8080, other reasonable alternates are 8081 through 8087. See
for additional information.http://www/iana.org/assignments/port-numbers
The URL used at the browser should be of the form:
where ''nn.nn.nn.nn'' is the HTTP server host's IP address,[73] and ''port'' is the selected HTTP port. If ''port'' is 80, it need not explicitly specified.http://nn.nn.nn.nn/PIXCI.XXX http://nn.nn.nn.nn:port/PIXCI.XXX
The URL can have appended
where bb is a sequence buffer number; if bb=-1, the most recent displayed or captured image buffer is provided, if bb=-2, the next most recent displayed or captured image buffer is provided, etc. For Capture - Video to Image Files used to control multiple boards the URL can have appended&buffer=bb
to select the unit.&unit=uu
The HTTP Server provides images in the format specified under Video to Image Files - Capture File & Format; a URL such as
can be used, but doesn't change the format of the images provided.http://nn.nn.nn.nn/PIXCI.JPG http://nn.nn.nn.nn/PIXCI.BMP
While the HTTP server will provide the newest image each time asked, it is up to the browser to repeatedly ask for a new image and thereby provide live video, such as by using the following example:
<!-- ' ' webcam_example2.htm External 03-May-2005 ' ' Copyright (C) 2005 EPIX, Inc. All rights reserved. ' ' Example web page for retrieving images from XCAP's HTTP Server ' --> <!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd"> <html> <head> <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> <title>Example Web Cam Page 2</title> </head> <body> <div align="center"> <h1>Example Web Cam 2</h1>
<script language="JavaScript"> // Change image update rate in milliseconds. refreshRate = 5000
// Change address to the computer running XCAP. xcapURL = "http://nn.nn.nn.nn:80/pixci.xxx&unique=" // Create a link to image document.write ('<img src="' + xcapURL + '" name="webCamURL">')
// Update the image setTimeout('reloadImage()', refreshRate)
function reloadImage() { // Change the image URL, so that the browser will reload it. document.images.webCamURL.src = xcapURL + (new Date()).getTime() // Continue updating the image setTimeout('reloadImage()', refreshRate) }
function changeRefresh() { // Cycle through radio buttons. for (i = 0; i < document.refreshControl.length; i++){ // See which one is selected. if (document.refreshControl.refreshSelection[i].checked == true) { // Update image refresh rate. refreshRate = document.refreshControl.refreshSelection[i].value } } } </script> <p>Select Refresh Rate: <form name="refreshControl"> <input type="radio" value="1000" name="refreshSelection" onClick="changeRefresh()">1 sec.</input> <input type="radio" value="5000" name="refreshSelection" onClick="changeRefresh()" checked>5 sec.</input> <input type="radio" value="10000" name="refreshSelection" onClick="changeRefresh()">10 sec.</input> <input type="radio" value="30000" name="refreshSelection" onClick="changeRefresh()">30 sec.</input> <input type="radio" value="60000" name="refreshSelection" onClick="changeRefresh()">1 min.</input> </form> </P> </div> </body> </html>
The Capture - Video to StreamStor allows recording and playing video to and from Conduant (formerly Boulder Instruments) StreamStor High-Speed Disk Recorders, allowing recording at video rate with almost all cameras and resolutions. The Video to StreamStor is provided only in the XCAP-Plus version.
Before using Capture - Video to StreamStor, the StreamStor drivers should have been installed and tested following instructions provided by Conduant.
If multiple PIXCI® frame grabbers are being used, and the Use Common Format & Controls w. Cameras Synchronized in PIXCI® - Multiple Boards is selected, then the Capture - Video to StreamStor feature expects and controls one StreamStor controller for each PIXCI® frame grabber. Each controller, and the disk drives connected to it, must be configured in the same manner with the same amount of disk space.
The Video to StreamStor - StreamStor provides information about the StreamStor controller and the attached disk drives' size and configuration, PCI bus interface, current status, and version codes, all as reported by the StreamStor software. If Update during Recording is selected, the status information is updated while recording, at a slight increase of bus overhead.
If Erase & Record is selected, each new recording erases any previous recording, so as to make all of the disk space available to the new recording. If Append & Record is selected, each new recording is appended at the end of the previous recording(s).
The Record button starts recording, Stop or Cancel terminates recording.
The Disk Total Space and Disk Free Space display the total size, and the amount of available free space, respectively, of the disk drive(s); both are in ''true'' MiBytes (1024×1024 bytes), rather than the misleading units used by some disk drive manufacturers (1000×1000 bytes). The Images Saved show the total number of images saved. If Update during Recording is selected, the Disk Free Space is updated while recording, at a slight increase of bus overhead.
The First Image Displayed specifies the index of the first image shown and the Last Image Displayed specifies the index of the last image shown. The Image Display Rate specifies the desired image sequence display rate.
If Continuous Run is selected, the image sequence display endlessly repeats. If Reverse Order is selected, the image sequence display is in reverse order.
The Play button starts sequence display, the Pause button pauses sequence display, the Stop button terminates sequence display, and the Cancel button terminates sequence display and closes the window.
The Current Image shows the index of the current image being displayed. It may also be manually set, while sequence display (and record) is stopped, to view at an individual image.
Depending on the host computer's speed, graphics display system, image resolution, image display size, and other variables, the image sequence may not be displayable at the rate specified. If Slow Rate to Display Images is selected, each image is displayed even though the effective display rate is slower than specified. If Skip Images to Maintain Rate is selected, images in the sequence are skipped as needed so as to effectively maintain the specified display rate.
The Set (First Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Set (Last Image to) Here button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the Current Image (Displayed). The Reset (First Image Displayed to First Image) button facilitates adjusting the First Image Displayed to the start of the sequence. The Reset (Last Image Displayed to Last Image) button facilitates adjusting the Last Image Displayed to the end of the sequence. As a group, they allow tweaking the images displayed without having to enter buffer numbers.
If First/Last => Default AOI is selected, the Image Viewer Window - Aoi default sequence is set to the First Image Displayed and Last Image Displayed as they are changed.
Video to | Video to | Video to | Video to | |
Frame Buffers | Virtual Memory | Disk File | Image Files | |
CPU Usage | 0/5 | 1/5 | 1/5 | 3/5, (2) |
5/5 w. | ||||
compression | ||||
Disk | 0/5 | 0/5 at start, | 2/5 | 3/5 |
Bandwidth | 2/5 as memory | |||
Usage | used & paged | |||
Frame | Per number | Temporary | Temporary | Temporary |
buffer | of captured | queue for | queue for | queue for |
memory | images | ¼+ sec. | ½+ sec. | ½+ sec. |
required | of video (3) | of video (3) | of video (3) | |
Preallocate | Yes, computer | No | No | No |
storage for | memory (1) | (optionally, | ||
images | disk space) | |||
(4) | ||||
Must | Yes | Yes | Optional | No |
save | re-save of | |||
after | raw data | |||
capture | ||||
Dependent | No | After | Yes | Yes |
on disk | computer | |||
bandwidth | memory | |||
consumed | ||||
Maximum | Per | Per O.S. | Per | Per |
capture | computer | swap/page | disk | disk |
length | memory (1) | file space | space | space |
space | ||||
Supports | Yes | Dependent | Dependent | Dependent |
largest | (assuming | on CPU | on CPU | on CPU |
& fastest | live capture | and/or disk | and disk | and disk |
video | supported) | bandwidth | bandwidth | bandwidth |
Supports | Yes | Yes | Yes | Yes w. single |
Continuous | image per file | |||
(Ring) | No w. multiple | |||
Capture | images per file | |||
Post-adjust | Yes (5) | Yes (5) | Yes (5) | No |
Bayer/RGB | ||||
Contrast, | ||||
Flat Field | ||||
Software | -Plus | -Plus | -Plus | -Plus |
-Std | -Std | -Std | -Std | |
-Ltd 8GB max | -Ltd 4GiB max | -Ltd | ||
-Lite 256MiB max | -Lite 1GiB max | -Lite (w. one | ||
TIFF per image) | ||||
Multi-CPU/ | N/A | N/A | N/A | -Plus |
thread/core | -Std | |||
data | ||||
compression | ||||
FTP video | No | No | No | -Plus |
off-site | -Std | |||
-Ltd | ||||
HTTP access | No | No | No | -Plus |
to video | -Std | |||
-Ltd |
Note: The CPU Usage and Disk Bandwidth Usage values, do not represent actual measurements or specifications, but are intended only to suggest the relative differences, on a scale of 0 through 5, among the various capture methods.
Note (1): For Video to Frame Buffers, a PIXCI® frame grabber capturing directly into computer memory is assumed, rather than a frame grabber with on-board frame buffer memory.
Note (2): For Video to Image Files, CPU Usage depends on several interrelated, variables. Such as the compression method used (if any), image file format selected, image bit depth; whether post-capture image corrections are needed for bit packing, multi-tap corrections, per-pixel gain and offset corrections (e.g. for FFC/FPN/PRNU), contrast enhancements, Bayer to RGB conversion, white balance, color space corrections, etc.; and whether, in conjunction with JPEG/JFIF, TIFF, or BigTIFF file formats, use of multiple threads or CPU cores for coding and/or compression are available and selected.
Note (3): Required frame buffer queue size is dependent on video frame rate, CPU(s) speed and availability, disk I/O bandwidth and short-term variations to disk I/O bandwidth, and disk activity of other applications. (For hard disk drives (HDD) I/O bandwidth variations can be due to rotational latency; bad block, sector, or track replacement; recalibration; and/or fragmentation. Lower quality solid state drives (SSD) can also be afflicted with short-term variations of I/O bandwidth.)
Note (4): Pre-allocating disk space can improve disk I/O bandwidth during subsequent video capture.
Note (5): Raw pixel data from camera is captured and stored. Bayer to RGB conversion (including white balancing and color space correction), contrast enhancement (ACE), and/or per-pixel flat field corrections (FFC/FPN/PRNU) are applied as needed while viewing live images. They can be adjusted after capture,[74] and images re-viewed, prior to saving images — without degradation of data due to repeated reprocessing and rounding (or worse effects in the case of contrast enhancement). For Bayer pixel values, the required memory space, or disk space and bandwidth, is one-third the space or bandwidth needed for RGB pixels.
The Capture - GIO Event Capture window allows capturing a video field or frame in response to a trigger supplied via the general purpose input signal (formerly referred to as ''External TTL Inputs''), with selectable delay of a specified number of fields, and with an optional delay until a specific field (for interlaced video formats).
The triggered capture operation can also control the general purpose output signal (formerly referred to as ''External TTL Outputs''). This can be used for simple ''handshaking'' acknowledgment; responding when the input trigger is seen or when the image has been captured. The general purpose output signal can also be used for retriggering an external device; with the triggered capture operation waiting for an general purpose input trigger, generating a trigger in sync with video timing, and then capturing an image buffer. Optionally, the control features of the ''triggered'' capture operation can be used without waiting for an general purpose input trigger.
The Capture - GIO Event Capture window also allows capturing a sequence of images, each triggered as described above for a single image.
The Capture - GIO Event Capture does not support PIXCI® SV2 and SV3 frame grabbers. Similar, but reduced, functionality can be obtain by using Capture - Video to Frame Buffers with events.
If Capture Single Image at Event is selected, a single triggered image is captured into the specified First Frame Buffer Captured. If Capture Sequence, One Image per Event is selected, a sequence of triggered images is captured into the specified First Frame Buffer Captured through the Last Frame Buffer Captured. If Continuous Capture, One Image per Event is selected, a continuous sequence of triggered images is captured into the specified First Frame Buffer Captured through the Last Frame Buffer Captured, repeatedly, until the operation is explicitly canceled.
The Run button starts the triggered image capture, the Stop button cancels the triggered image capture, and the Cancel button cancels the triggered image capture and closes the window.
The various steps of the triggered capture are shown on screen and described; some are parameters, others merely informative for the sake of readability and exposition.
The various steps of the triggered sequence capture are similar to those as described for GIO Event Capture Steps, with the following differences.
The Capture - Waterfall window allows displaying live video, one line per field, scrolling up or down the window. The Capture - Waterfall is primarily intended for use with line scan cameras, as an aid to focus and other adjustments.
The Run button starts the operation, the Stop button terminates the operation, and the Cancel button terminates the operation (if any) and closes the window.
The Run button does not, by itself, switch the PIXCI® frame grabber to Live mode; if used in Capture - UnLive mode, one line per field of the current frame buffer is displayed.
The Line Sampled selects the line of the frame buffer to be repeatedly displayed. If Top to Bottom is selected, the display scrolls top to bottom with newer image lines shown at the top. If Bottom to Top is selected, the display scrolls bottom to top with newer image lines shown at the bottom.
The display created by Capture - Waterfall can't be saved, processed, or analyzed; it is intended only as a visual aid.
The Capture - Frame Average allows viewing live video with continuous frame averaging, averaging corresponding pixels of each of the most recent N video frames, so as to reduce noise.
The Capture - Frame Average provides two styles. In one style, the original The Image Viewer Window displays the average of the last N captured images from the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffer, with a small dialog containing the various controls described below. This style minimizes the number of windows and use of screen ''real estate''.
In the other style, a second The Image Viewer Window average of the last N captured images from the PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffer. The original PIXCI® Image Viewer Window remains as well, allowing the ''raw'' image to be viewed along with the averaged image. If video is being continuously captured, both the ''raw'' image and the derived image are continuously updated; allowing a side-by-side comparison. The Frame Average viewer window provides a Capture - Adjustments with various controls described below.
The Single Image Viewer Style and Dual Image Viewer Style buttons allows switching styles.
The Frames Averaged specifies the number of most recent video frames to be averaged.
The Average Mode specifies the averaging mode. If Recursive is selected, the averaged result is a weighted average of the specified number of video frames, with the most recent video frames having greater weight, updated after each video frame.
If FIFO is selected, the averaged result is the true average of the specified number of video frames, updated after each video frame. If FIFO Integrate is selected, the result is the true summation of the specified number of video frames divided by the specified Averaging Divisor, updated after each video frame.
If Group is selected, the averaged result is the true average of the specified number of video frames, updated once per the specified number of video frames.
The FIFO, FIFO Integrate, and Group options require more processing overhead. The Recursive option produces less noticeable image ''smear'' when the camera or subject are moving or the lighting is changing.
In FIFO Integrate mode, the Averaging Divisor allows selecting true averaging (with Averaging Divisor equal to Frames Averaged), or integration (with Averaging Divisor equal to one), or anywhere in-between. Using an Averaging Divisor less than Frames Averaged allows better viewing of dark images; however the integration of bright images will cause pixel values to overflow and degraded image quality.
The Capture - RGB Merge allows interpreting and viewing three monochromatic PIXCI® frame buffers as a single color (e.g. RGB) image, with adjustments for registration and coloring. The Capture - RGB Merge is not available if the underlying frame buffers are not monochromatic, or if less than three frame buffers are available.
The Capture - RGB Merge provides two styles. In one style, the original The Image Viewer Window displays the first three PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffers merged as color (RGB), with a small dialog containing the various controls described below. This style minimizes the number of windows and use of screen ''real estate''.
In the other style, a second The Image Viewer Window displays the first three PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffers merged as color (RGB). The original PIXCI® Image Viewer Window remains as well, allowing the ''raw'' monochromatic images to be viewed along with the derived color image. If video is being continuously captured, both the monochromatic image and the derived color image are continuously updated; allowing focus adjustments on the monochromatic image and registration adjustments on the color image. The RGB Merge viewer window provides a Capture - Adjustments with various controls described below.
The Single Image Viewer Style and Dual Image Viewer Style buttons allows switching styles.
The Live 1, Live 2, and Live 3 continuously captures into the first, second, or third underlying frame buffer (i.e. first, second, or third component of the merged color image) and displays the images. The UnLive terminates the Live 1, Live 2, or Live 3 mode, displaying the last captured image. The Snap 1, Snap 2, and Snap 3, captures a single image into the first, second, or third underlying frame buffer and displays the images.
If Merge Mode is B G R, the three monochromatic buffers are interpreted as blue, green, and red components, respectively. If Merge Mode is B R G, the three monochromatic buffers are interpreted as blue, red, and green components, respectively. If Merge Mode is R G B, the three monochromatic buffers are interpreted as red, green, and blue components, respectively. If Merge Mode is R B G, the three monochromatic buffers are interpreted as red, blue, and green components, respectively. If Merge Mode is G R B, the three monochromatic buffers are interpreted as green, red, and blue components, respectively. If Merge Mode is G B R, the three monochromatic buffers are interpreted as green, blue, and red components, respectively.
If Merge Mode is Coloring - Ave (or Coloring - Sum) is selected, the merged color image is constructed from an average (or sum) of the Color 1 weighted by the pixel values of the first underlying monochromatic buffer, the Color 2 weighted by the pixel values of the second underlying monochromatic buffer, and the Color 3 weighted by the pixel values of the third underlying monochromatic buffer. The Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3 can each be set as described in Pick Graphics Color.
Note that selecting Merge Mode as Coloring - Sum and setting Color 1 Color 2 Color 3 to the three primary colors (e.g. 255/0/0, 0/255/0, and 0/0/255) has the same effect as selecting R G B, but requires significantly more processing than selecting R G B.
The Offset 1, X, Offset 2, X, and Offset 3, X, allow specifying a horizontal offset and adjusting the registration for each of the three underlying images. The Offset 1, Y, Offset 2, Y, and Offset 3, Y, allow specifying a vertical offset and adjusting the registration for each of the three underlying images.
The Capture - Quad Pixel Merge allows viewing four monochromatic PIXCI® frame buffers as a single image, interpreting the contents of each frame buffer to be shifted by half of a pixel left, right, up, and/or down relative to the other three frame buffers. The Capture - Quad Pixel Merge is not available if the underlying frame buffers are not monochromatic, or if less than four frame buffers are available. The Capture - Quad Pixel Merge feature is provided only in the XCAP-Plus version.
The Capture - Quad Pixel Merge provides two styles. In one style, the original The Image Viewer Window displays the first four PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffers merged as a single image, with a small dialog containing the various controls described below. This style minimizes the number of windows and use of screen ''real estate''.
In the other style, a second The Image Viewer Window displays the first four PIXCI® frame grabber's frame buffers merged as a single image. The original PIXCI® Image Viewer Window remains as well, allowing the ''raw'' monochromatic images to be viewed along with the derived merged image. If video is being continuously captured, both the monochromatic image and the derived merged image are continuously updated; allowing a side-by-side comparison. The Quad Pixel Merge viewer window provides a Capture - Adjustments with various controls described below.
The Single Image Viewer Style and Dual Image Viewer Style buttons allows switching styles.
The Live 1, Live 2, Live 3, and Live 4 continuously captures into the first, second, third, or fourth underlying frame buffer (i.e. first, second, third, or fourth component of the merged image) and displays the images. The UnLive terminates the Live 1, Live 2, Live 3, or Live 4 mode, displaying the last captured image. The Snap 1, Snap 2, Snap 3, and Snap 4 captures a single image into the first, second, third, or fourth underlying frame buffer and displays the image.
The Merge Mode selects how the contents of the four frame buffer are to be merged. If UL=1 UR=2 LL=3 LR=4 is selected, the first buffer has (fractional) upper left pixel values, the second buffer has (fractional) upper right pixel values, the third buffer has (fractional) lower left pixel values, and the fourth buffer has (fractional) lower right pixel values. Fifteen additional selections, from UL=1 UR=2 LL=4 LR=3 through UL=4 UR=3 LL=2 LR=1 allow specifying any of the possible combinations of correspondence between frame buffers and (fractional) pixel position.
The Hitachi KP-F100-S7 camera used in conjunction with a PIXCI® frame grabber customized for that camera, provides hardware support for more convenient capturing of and display of merged images. The camera automatically cycles through all four fractional pixel positions, and provides a signal to consistently identify each position.
When the Hitachi KP-F100-S7 is used, the Capture - Adjustments provides a single Snap and a single Live. The former captures a group of the next four images into the first four frame buffers, the latter does the same, but continuously. Along with capturing each image, a hidden flag is captured identifying each as first, second, third, or fourth relative to the camera's sequencing.
The Merge Mode selects how the contents of the four frame buffer are to be merged. If UL=1 UR=2 LL=3 LR=4 is selected, the buffer with the first flag has (fractional) upper left pixel values, the buffer with the second flag has (fractional) upper right pixel values, the buffer with the third flag has (fractional) lower left pixel values, and the buffer with the fourth flag has (fractional) lower right pixel values. Fifteen additional selections, from UL=1 UR=2 LL=4 LR=3 through UL=4 UR=3 LL=2 LR=1 allow specifying any of the possible combinations of correspondence between buffers flags and (fractional) pixel position.
The Capture - Lens Control - Birger EF232 window allows controlling the aperture and focus of a compatible lens via a Birger EF232 Lens Mount. Both manual aperture and focus control, through the GUI, as well as automatic aperture and focus control, in response to the image intensity and sharpness, are provided.
The Birger EF232 Lens Mount currently supports Canon EF lenses, both ''USM'' and ''DC'' types. The ''USM'' style lenses offer quicker and smoother focusing, particularly when using the auto focus feature.
The left side of the Capture - Lens Control - Birger EF232 dialog provides controls for features directly implemented by the Birger EF232 Lens Mount and supported lens, such as manually setting the aperture and focus via the GUI.
The RS-232 Port specifies the computer's RS-232 port to which the device is connected. Alternately, selecting COM? - Search (under Windows) or ttyS? - Search (under Linux) searches the available ''COM'' ports or ''ttyS'' devices for the device; however, this should not be used if any ''critical'' RS-232 controlled devices are connected, as each accessible ''COM'' port or ''ttyS'' device is probed by sending device commands and checking for a valid response. After specification or auto identification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the device appropriately.
The RS-232 Mode provides options governing communication with the device. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the device reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the device, nor must a RS-232 Port be selected; the device's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The RS-232 Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the device to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the device commands needed to initialize the device for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for RS-232 Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current device parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An ''Activity'' sketch displays an indication of the current activity, such as uploading commands to the camera, downloading the camera's current settings, or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The right side of the Capture - Lens Control - Birger EF232 provides automatic aperture control and automatic focusing in response to captured images.
The AAC On enables the Automatic Aperture Control (AAC) feature; captured images are periodically scanned and consistent intensity maintained by automatic adjustment of the lens aperture.
The (AAC) Statistic specifies the characteristic - derived from the current image - upon which analysis and adjustments are to be based. The Mean Value specifies use of the image's mean pixel value or average response, while Peak Value specifies use of the image's maximum pixel value or peak response; trading average response against peak response. The 50%Peak Value, 60%Peak Value, 70%Peak Value, 80%Peak Value, or 90%Peak Value specifies use of the image's 50'th, 60'th, 70'th, 80'th, or 90'th percentile of pixel values, respectively, for response based on peak intensity, but ignoring outlier pixel values.
The (AAC) Target Value specifies the AAC adjustments' target pixel value as a percentage of the maximum possible pixel value (e.g. as a percentage of ''white'', in most color spaces).
For example, with (AAC) Statistic of Mean Value and (AAC) Target Value of 50%, the AAC will attempt to adjust the lens aperture so that the current image's mean value is 50% of the maximum possible pixel value.
The Set AAC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed.
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters that affect the operation of the AAC feature.
The (AAC) Hysteresis specifies the difference between the image statistics' target and observed values which is to actionable, ignoring small changes so as to eliminate ''hunting''. The (AAC) Accelerator specifies the relative amount, or ''step size'', by which the camera controls are modified in each adjustment. The (AAC) Update (Time) Period and (AAC) Update (Field) Interval specify how often captured images are to be analyzed and camera adjustments performed; the interval is the maximum of the (AAC) Update (Time) Period in seconds, and the (AAC) Update (Field) Interval in video fields. The (AAC) Sample allows specifying subsampling of the image AOI, trading execution speed and overhead against comprehensive coverage, and can be selected as All Lines, 1/2 Lines, 1/5 Lines, 1/10 Lines, 1/20 Lines, 1/50 Lines, or 1/100 Lines.
The (AAC) Ignore White specifies ignoring of white pixels, such as for portraits with a white background, allowing the non white image area to control the AAC, and can be set to ignore white pixels above 30%, above 40%, above 50%, above 60%, above 70%, above 80%, above 90%, or at 100% of the maximum pixel value, or Disabled to disable ignoring of white pixels. The (AAC) Ignore White requires that the AOI be set to a RGB color space, via Set AAC AOI. The (AAC) Ignore White significantly increases processing overhead; setting (AAC) Sample 1/10 lines or fewer to avoid excessive overhead is recommended. The (AAC) Ignore White typically works better with (AAC) Statistic selected as Mean Value instead of Mean Value. The Max White Tint selects whether only pure white pixels (i.e. R=G=B) are to be ignored, or to what degree to ignore ''tinted'' pixels. A (AAC) Max White Tint of 0 ignores only pure white pixels (R=G=B); larger values allow more tint, or variation of R, G, B values, to be ignored.
The (AAC) Last Stat(istic) shows the last calculated image statistic. Observing the last image statistic, so it can be compared to the selected (AAC) Target Value can be helpful when tweaking the various AAC options.
The Auto Focus button performs auto focusing, stopping when optimal focus is achieved; the Cancel Auto Focus allows premature cancelling of the auto focus operation.
The Set AFC AOI allows specifying the image AOI that is to be analyzed for optimal focusing, allowing auto focusing on a selected target. Beware of choosing a ''tightly'' defined AOI - an AOI of a desired target with undesired targets nearby. For many lenses, the field of view changes as focus changes, thus the contents of the selected AOI will vary as different focus positions are tested.
The auto focus feature requires that illumination is consistent, so the several images taken during auto focus have similar contrast. High frame rate cameras used in conjunction with lighting that flickers as a result of AC power may prevent auto focus from operating properly.
The following topics describe windows, features, and controls which are common to many of the features described previously.
Various features of XCAP allow specifying a mathematical expression. These expressions may use numbers, operators, and predefined mathematical functions, as described below.
Expressions can be composed of integer numbers defaulting to base 10, such as:
and real numbers, such as:1234 1234(base10) 1234(base8) 1234(base16) 1010(base2) 1234(base6)
.3400 12.34 12.3E-6 (.0000123) 32.1e+6 (32100000)
Expressions can be composed with the binary operators:
and the unary operators:+ addition 4+3 = 7 - subtraction 4-3 = 1 * multiplication 4*3 = 12 / division 4/2 = 2 % division remainder 17%5 = 2 ^ power 4^3 = 64 | bit OR 0x4 | 0x6 = 0x6 & bit AND 0x4 & 0x6 = 0x4 ~ bit XOR 0x4 ~ 0x6 = 0x2
and the comparison operators which produce 1 if true, 0 if false:- negative 4 * -2 = -8 + positive 4 * +2 = 8 ~ bit COMPLEMENT ~0x4 = 0xFFFFFFFB
== equal 3==4 = 0 >= greater or equal 3>=4 = 0 <= less or equal 3<=4 = 1 != not equal 3!=4 = 1 > greater 3>4 = 0 < less 3<4 = 1 ! unary not !3 = 0, !0 = 1
Expressions can include mathematical functions and constants:
and conditional functions:acos(x) arc cosine (radians) of x acos(.5) = 1.047 asin(x) arc sine (radians) of x asin(.5) = 0.524 atan(x) arc tangent (radians) of x atan(.5) = 0.464 atan2(x,y) arc tangent (radians) of y/x, four quadrant atan2(1,2) = 1.107 ceil(x) smallest integer equal or larger than x ceil(3.4) = 4.0 cos(x) cosine of x (radians) cos(.785) = 0.707 cosh(x) hyperbolic cosine of x cosh(1.0) = 1.543 exp(x) e to the x power exp(2) = 7.389 floor(x) largest integer equal or smaller than x floor(3.4) = 3.0 hypot(x,y) sqrt(x*x+y*y) hypot(4,3) = 5.0 ln(x) log base e of x ln(2) = 0.693 log10(x) log base 10 of x log10(2) = 0.301 rand() random number, 0<rand()<1 randg() Gaussian random number, mean=0.0, var=1.0 sin(x) sine of x (radians) sin(.785) = 0.707 sinh(x) hyperbolic sine of x sinh(1.0) = 1.175 sqrt(x) square root of x sqrt(2) = 1.414 tan(x) tangent of x (radians) tan(.785) = 0.999 tanh(x) hyperbolic tangent of x tanh(1.0) = 0.761 isNaN(x) 1 if x is Not-A-Number, otherwise 0 isNaN(0.0/0) = 1 isFinite(x) 1 if x is finite, otherwise 0 isFinite(1.0/0) = 0
pi 3.14159265358979323846... atan(1)*360/(2*pi) = 45 NaN reserved value representing Not-A-Number Infinity reserved value representing infinity
abs(a) absolute value of a abs(-3) = 3 max(a,b) larger of a or b max(3.0, 4.5) = 4.5 min(a,b) smaller of a or b min(3.0, 4.5) = 3.0 ifel(a,b,c) if a!=0, value of b, else value of c ifel(0, 2.0, 3) = 3
Operator precedence, from highest to lowest, is:
Expressions may use '(' and ')' to force order of evaluation.- + ~ ! (unary) * / % - + (binary) > >= < <= == != & | ~ (binary ~)
All trigonometric functions operate in radians. A domain error, such as an attempted ''ln'' of a negative number, produces an error.
Internally, numbers are represented either as integers or as real numbers according to the following rules: (a) The mathematical functions always produce a real result, (b) The operands of the bit operators are always converted to integer, (c) The ''ifel'' function results in the same type as the second or third argument, as chosen, (e) The comparison operators always produce an integer result, (d) Otherwise, expressions and functions of integers result in integers, expressions and functions of real numbers or mixed operands result in real numbers. Integer numbers are represented as 32 bits two's complement. Real numbers are represented as an 8 byte IEEE format floating point number, including reserved values for NaN (Not-A-Number) and Infinity.
The semantics of integer vs. real number representations are of concern in expressions such as:
The result of the former is 6.0, as the 5/2 has the integer result of 2. The result of the latter is 7.5, as the 5.0/2 has the real result of 2.5. Also, in:(5/2)*3.0 (5.0/2)*3.0
The former is an invalid expression, due to integer division by zero. The result of the latter is Infinity, due to use of real division. Finally, both:1/0 1.0/0
are invalid expressions, while both:ifel(1, 3/0, 10) ifel(0, 3/0, 10)
are valid, the first with value Infinity, the second with value 10.ifel(1, 3./0, 10) ifel(0, 3./0, 10)
A real valued expression is truncated (i.e. ''floor'') when used in a context which expects an integer.
Each feature of XCAP that allows use of a mathematical expression may also specify which, if any, variables unique to that feature are allowed. For example, a hypothetical feature that allows use of an expression to define a 256 element table of values might specify that variable ''C'' can be used as the table's index. Thus, the expression:
sets the table to an identity mapping (correspondence) (i.e. the value of a table entry is identical to its index), and:C
sets the table to an inverted identity mapping, and:255-C
all set the first half of the table to 0, and the second half to 100.ifel( C<128, 0, 100 ) 100*(C/128) 100*floor(C/128.0)
Various features of XCAP allow specifying an expression upon textual strings. Such expressions include all of the features of Mathematical Expressions, with the addition of string constants and string functions.
String constants are composed of textual characters enclosed in double quotes ("). String constants are interpreted as possibly containing embedded ''\'' codes. A ''\a'' sequence yields an ASCII Bell, a ''\b'' sequence yields an ASCII Back-Space, a ''\f'' sequence yields an ASCII Form-Feed, a ''\r'' sequence yields an ASCII Carriage-Return (CR), a ''\n'' sequence yields an ASCII Line-Feed (LF), a ''\t'' sequence yields an ASCII Tab, a ''\\'' sequence yields an ASCII Back-Slash. A ''\x'' followed by two hexadecimal digits yields the byte value specified by the two digits. A ''\"'' sequence yields an ASCII double quote.
For example:
"Hello" | (a five character string) |
"Sent!\\n" | (a six character string, ending with LF) |
"I said \"Hi\"?" | (a twelve character string, with Hi in quotes) |
String expressions can include string functions:
Thus, if cell A0 is the string representation of an positive integer number of no more than 9 digitsconcat(s1,s2) concatenation of string s1 and s2. concat("he","llo") = "hello"
ifel(a,s1,s2) if a!=0, string s1, else string s2 ifel(0,"he","lo") = "lo" ifel(1,"he","lo") = "he"
indexof(s1,s2) index of first position that string indexof("hello","ll") = 2 s2 appears in s1, or -1 if s2 does indexof("hello","ee") = -1 not appear in s1.
lower(s1) string s1 with alphabetic characters lower("Hi") = "hi" of s1 converted to lower case.
substr(s1,i,l) portion of s1 starting at index i substr("hello",2,3) = "llo" extending for length l.
upper(s1) string s1 with alphabetic characters lower("Hi") = "HI" of s1 converted to upper case.
replace(s1,s2,s3) string s1 with each occurrence of replace("hi","i","x") = "hx" s2 therein replaced by s3
strlen(s1) length of string s1 strlen("Hi") = 2
results in the same number left-padded with zero's to a fixed width of 9 digits.concat(substr("000000000", strlen(A0), 9), A0)
Each feature of XCAP that allows use of a string expression may also specify which, if any, variables unique to that feature are allowed. For example, the Black Board cells allow use of cell names as variables.
The two-dimensional graphs shown as a Image Examination - Pixel Plot, Image Measurement - Histogram, and other features share many common features and options, accessible from the graph window's menu-bar, under File, Controls, and Stats.
The File - Save Graphics allows saving the 2-D graph in BMP, JPEG/JFIF, or TIFF formats. By default, the saved graphics has the same dimensions as the graph as seen on the graphic display; optionally, the Redraw to Width and Redraw to Height can force the saved graphics to have the specified Width and Height. Graphics that are drawn at a specified Width and Height will be significantly ''crisper'' than graphics drawn at the default dimensions and later resized upon final use. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Save Data allows saving the data from which the graph is constructed as ASCII text decimal numbers. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. For data with multiple components, such as color pixels, if Packed Order is selected, the data is saved as all of the components of the first datum, followed by all of the components of the second datum, etc. on a single line, such as:
for RGB pixels. If Planar Order is selected, the data is saved as the first components of all datums followed by the second components of all datums, etc, such as:R0 G0 B0 R1 G1 B1 R2 G2 B2 ...
for RGB pixels. If Orient Vertically is selected instead of Orient Horizontally, the data is saved as one or multiple columns instead of one or multiple rows.R0 R1 R2 R3 ... G0 G1 G2 G3 ... B0 B1 B2 B3 ...
The File - Copy Data to Clipboard allows saving the data from which the graph is constructed to the Windows or Linux clipboard as ASCII text decimal numbers. As for File - Save Data, the Packed Order versus Planar Order selects whether data with multiple components is saved in order of datum or order of component, and the Orient Vertically versus Orient Horizontally, selects whether the data is saved as one or multiple columns instead of one or multiple rows.
The File - Copy Data to Black Board allows saving the data from which the graph is constructed to the Black Board in one or more rows and one or more columns using the Black Board Cell as the initial upper left corner. As for File - Save Data, the Packed Order versus Planar Order selects whether data with multiple components is saved in order of datum or order of component, and the Orient Vertically versus Orient Horizontally, selects whether the data is saved as one or multiple columns instead of one or multiple rows.
The File - Print Graphics allows printing the 2-D graph to Windows or Linux compatible printers. The Printer Setup button provides access to a standard Windows printer setup dialog box, or a Linux printer setup dialog box, allowing selection of a previously configured printer. The Page Width and Page Height notes the current printer's page size. The Print Width and Print Height specifies the width and height of the area to be printed; the Upper Left X, Upper Left Y, Lower Right X, and Lower Right Y specifies the position of the printed area on the page. If Force Aspect is selected, the Print Width and Print Height are automatically corrected so as print with the correct aspect ratio; on rare occasions it may be desirable to deselect Force Aspect to allow elongated printing. The Full Size allows convenient selection of the full Page Width and Page Height, subject to correction for aspect ratio. A graphic representation of the page and the area to be printed is shown; the area to be printed can be selected interactively by clicking and dragging over the ''page''. The Force Aspect forces the aspect ratio of the printed graph, the ratio of width divided by height, to be the same as the aspect ratio with which the graph is displayed.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The Controls - Format allows changing the format of the graphical representation.
If Line is selected, lines are drawn to connect the data points, providing smooth interpolation between data points. If Line/Step is selected, steps are drawn to connect the data points. If Scatter is selected, the data points are shown without connecting lines.
The Fill and Fill/Step are similar to Line and Line/Step, respectively, but the area between the lines connecting data points and the abscissa is filled. The Fill and Line/Step are intended only for graphs displaying one set of data points.
If Linear Scale is selected, the ordinate scale is linear. If Log Scale is selected, the ordinate scale is log scale.
The Controls - Color allows changing the colors of the graphical representation.
The color of the graph's Background, Border, Axis, Label(s), and Reticle can each be selected as described in Pick Graphics Color. The color of the Probe, a tool described in Controls - Probe, and the color of the Stats Window, a tool described in Stats - Descriptive, can also be selected as described in Pick Graphics Color.
If Data Color: Auto is not selected, the data points are drawn with predetermined colors. For graphs of multiple sets of data points, such as red, green, and blue pixel values, the three sets of data points are color keyed to their origin. Otherwise, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, and Data 4 allow selecting the color of the first through fourth set of data points (or, for as many sets of data points used by the graph), as described in Pick Graphics Color.
The Reference A, Reference B, and Reference C, allow selecting the color of the reference curves, if activated as described under Controls - Reference.
If Complement Colors is selected, the graph is shown with the complement of the selected colors. This is particularly convenient before printing; white on black may be preferred for display, but black on white may be preferred for printed graphs.
The Controls - Axis allows modifying the graph's axis and reticle.
If Reticle is selected each abscissa and ordinate axis tick is extended to form a reticle. The graphic dot spacing, and thus the perceived ''solidity'' of the reticle can be adjusted with Reticle Dot Spacing, with 1 being the densest.
If Abscissa Ticks: Auto and Ordinate Ticks: Auto are selected, the axis' tick positions are automatically selected for the respective axis; otherwise, the Abscissa Tick Spacing and Ordinate Tick Spacing specify the interval of ticks along the respective axis. If Log Scale was selected, the Ordinate Tick Spacing has no effect.
The Controls - MinMax allows enlarging portions of the graph.
If Ord(inate) Min & Max: Default is selected, the ordinate axis is set so as to see the full range of data values being plotted. Otherwise, the Ordinate Min Value and Ordinate Max Value allows specifying the range of value to be shown on the ordinate axis.
If Abs(cissa) Min & Max: Default is selected, the abscissa axis is set so as to see all of the data points being plotted. Otherwise, the Left Edge Index and Right Edge Index allows specifying the subset of data points being plotted, as indices. In applications where the abscissa is labeled with monotonically increasing numbers, the Left Edge Index and Right Edge Index correspond to abscissa labels, and the Left Edge Coord. and Right Edge Coord. (which are view only) show the same values as Left Edge Index and Right Edge Index. In applications where the abscissa is not labeled with monotonically increasing numbers, the Left Edge Index and Right Edge Index allows specifying the subset of data points being plotted, while Left Edge Coord. and Right Edge Coord. show the corresponding coordinates along the abscissa.
Typically, the area of a graph to be enlarged is specified interactively, rather than explicitly. Position the mouse over the graph, press the left button at the upper left corner of the desired area to be enlarged, drag to the lower right corner, and release. Enlarging can be disabled by clicking over the graph and releasing without moving the mouse.
The Controls - Label allows selecting labeling.
If Legends: Default is selected, the legends along each axis are automatically selected; otherwise, the Abscissa Legend and Ordinate Legend specify the legends shown along the respective axis.
The Controls - Probe allows ''reading'' the values shown by the graph.
If Data Probe is selected, a probe appearing as a vertical line appears over the graph. The Probe Index selects the probe's position along the abscissa axis. In applications where the abscissa is labeled with monotonically increasing numbers, the Probe Index correspond to abscissa labels, and the Probe Coord. (which is view only) show the same values as Probe Index. In applications where the abscissa is not labeled with monotonically increasing numbers, the Probe Index specifies the probe's position as an index into the set of data points, while Probe Coord. shows the corresponding coordinate along the abscissa.
The value of the data points corresponding to the probes position is shown under Data 1 Low Value and Data 1 High Value and up through Data 4 Low Value, and Data 4 High Value, according to the number of sets of data points shown by the graph.
Typically, the probe's position is set by simply right clicking at a desired position over the graph.
The Controls - Reference allows overlaying one to three reference curves on the graph.
The Reference A File Name, Reference B File Name, and Reference C File Name, allow specifying file containing data points for the reference curve. The expected file format is ASCII text decimal numbers, the same as is saved by File - Save Data.
The Trends allows graphing historical data, as a fading echo of the original data. The Retain History, Count selects the number of older data-sets to be kept and graphed. Alternately, the Retain History, Time selects the age of older data-sets to be kept and graphed. The Show Trends selects whether the historical data is graphed as a fading echo; the Trends Fade Rate selects the rate at which older data is faded relative to newer data.
The Descriptive shows descriptive statistics about the data points being graphed.
The Samples, N is the number of data points, Mean Value is the mean value of the data points, Std. Dev. is the standard deviation about the mean[75], Low Value is the smallest value, High Value is the largest value, R.M.S. Value is the root mean square value, S.N.R. is the signal to noise ratio[76], and C.T.F. is the contrast transfer function[77].
The CRC-16 is the 16 bit cyclical redundancy check of the data, using polynomial:
x^16 + x^15 + x^2 + 1
x^32+x^26+x^23+x^22+x^16+x^12+x^11+x^10+x^8+x^7+x^5+x^4+x^2+x^1+x^0
The Abs. @ High Value and N Abs. @ High Value are the mean of the abscissa coordinates at which the High Value occurs and the number of such occurrences. For data with a single ''peak'', the Abs. @ High Value is simply the abscissa coordinate and N Abs. @ High Value is one.
If the data points being graphed represent a tabulation, such as a histogram, then Low Value and High Value are replaced with Low Non Zero which is the lowest abscissa coordinate with nonzero corresponding ordinate, High Non Zero which is the highest abscissa coordinate with nonzero corresponding ordinate, High Frequency which is the largest ordinate value, and Low Frequency which is the smallest ordinate value. The Abs. @ High Value and N Abs. @ High Value are replaced with Abs. @ High Freq and N Abs. @ High Freq
If Current is selected, the descriptive statistics are for the data currently displayed. If Cumulative is selected, the descriptive statistics are for current and previous data displayed, since the Cumulative option was selected. The CRC-16 and CRC-32 statistics are never cumulative. If Off is selected, the descriptive statistics are disabled.
If Statistics Window is selected, the descriptive statistics are computed on less than the full set of data points. The Window Index Low and Window Index High selects start and end of the descriptive statistics computation window's position along the abscissa axis. In applications where the abscissa is labeled with monotonically increasing numbers, the Window Index Low and Window Index High correspond to abscissa labels, and the Window Coord. Low and Window Coord. High (which are view only) show the same values as Window Index Low and Window Index High. In applications where the abscissa is not labeled with monotonically increasing numbers, the Window Index Low and Window Index High allows specifying the window's position as an index into the set of data points, while Window Coord. Low and Window Coord. High show the corresponding coordinate along the abscissa.
The Window Weight shows the percentage ''weight'' of values within the window. This is not the relative width of the window, but rather the relative area under the plotted data (assuming a linear ordinate scale).
Typically, the area of a graph to be covered by the statistics window is specified interactively, rather than explicitly, by positioning the mouse over the graph, pressing the mouse button at the left edge of the desired area to be covered, dragging to the right edge, and releasing the mouse button.
The Outlier shows descriptive statistics about selected data points being graphed, namely those data points that are above the corresponding data points in Reference B or that are below the corresponding values in Reference A. In the context of the Stats - Outlier feature, the Reference A serves as a lower bound, the Reference B serves as an upper bound. As Reference A and Reference B are user-defined curves, arbitrary lower and upper bounds can be specified to limit or control which data points are to be included or excluded.
If Outlier Reference is < RefA, data points that are strictly less than the corresponding value in Reference A are selected. If Outlier Reference is <= RefA, data points that are less than or equal to the corresponding value in Reference A are selected. If Outlier Reference is > RefB, data points that are strictly greater than the corresponding value in Reference B are selected. If Outlier Reference is >= RefB, data points that are greater than or equal to the corresponding value in Reference B are selected. If Outlier Reference is < RefA > RefB, data points that are strictly less than Reference A or strictly greater than Reference B are selected. If Outlier Reference is <= RefA >= RefB, data points that are less than or equal to Reference A or greater than or equal to Reference B are selected.
If Absolute Stats is selected, the statistics shown are based upon the actual values of the selected data points. If Relative Stats is selected, the statistics shown are based upon the values of the selected data points minus the value of Reference B, or the value of Reference A minus the values of the selected data points.
For the selected data points, Samples, N, Mean Value, Std. Dev., Low Value, High Value, Abs. @ High Value, N Abs. @ High Value, Low Non Zero, High Non Zero, High Frequency, Low Frequency, Abs. @ High Freq, and/or N Abs. @ High Freq, provide descriptive statistics, with the same interpretation as in Stats - Descriptive.
The three-dimensional graphs shown under Image Examination - Pixel Plot 3D, Black Board, and other features share many common features and options, accessible from the graph window's menu-bar, under File and Controls.
The File - Save Graphics allows saving the 3-D graph in BMP, JPEG/JFIF, or TIFF, formats. By default, the saved graphics has the same dimensions as the graph as seen on the graphic display; optionally, the Redraw to Width and Redraw to Height can force the saved graphics to have the specified Width and Height. Graphics drawn at a specified Width and Height will be significantly ''crisper'' than graphics drawn at a default size and later resized upon final use. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The File - Save Data allows saving the data from which the graph is constructed as ASCII text decimal numbers. The File Name field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box. For data with multiple components, such as color pixels, if Packed Order is selected, the data is saved as all of the components of the first datum, followed by all of the components of the second datum, etc. on a single line, such as:
for RGB pixels. If Planar Order is selected, the data is saved as the first components of all datums followed by the second components of all datums, etc, such as:R0 G0 B0 R1 G1 B1 R2 G2 B2 ...
for RGB pixels. If Orient Vertically is selected instead of Orient Horizontally, the data is saved as one or multiple columns instead of one or multiple rows.R0 R1 R2 R3 ... G0 G1 G2 G3 ... B0 B1 B2 B3 ...
The File - Copy Data to Clipboard allows saving the data from which the graph is constructed to the Windows or Linux clipboard as ASCII text decimal numbers. As for File - Save Data, the Packed Order versus Planar Order selects whether data with multiple components is saved in order of datum or order of component, and the Orient Vertically versus Orient Horizontally, selects whether the data is saved as one or multiple columns instead of one or multiple rows.
The File - Copy Data to Black Board allows saving the data from which the graph is constructed to the Black Board in one or more rows and one or more columns using the Black Board Cell as the initial upper left corner. As for File - Save Data, the Packed Order versus Planar Order selects whether data with multiple components is saved in order of datum or order of component, and the Orient Vertically versus Orient Horizontally, selects whether the data is saved as one or multiple columns instead of one or multiple rows.
The File - Print Graphics allows printing the 3-D graph to Windows or Linux compatible printers. The Printer Setup button provides access to a standard Windows printer setup dialog box, or a Linux printer setup dialog box, allowing selection of a previously configured printer. The Page Width and Page Height notes the current printer's page size. The Print Width and Print Height specifies the width and height of the area to be printed; the Upper Left X, Upper Left Y, Lower Right X, and Lower Right Y specifies the position of the printed area on the page. If Force Aspect is selected, the Print Width and Print Height are automatically corrected so as print with the correct aspect ratio; on rare occasions it may be desirable to deselect Force Aspect to allow elongated printing. The Full Size allows convenient selection of the full Page Width and Page Height, subject to correction for aspect ratio. A graphic representation of the page and the area to be printed is shown; the area to be printed can be selected interactively by clicking and dragging over the ''page''. The Force Aspect forces the aspect ratio of the printed graph, the ratio of width divided by height, to be the same as the aspect ratio with which the graph is displayed.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button implements the operation and closes the window, the Apply button implements the operation without closing the window, and the Cancel button closes the window without implementing the operation.
The Controls - Format allows specifying the format of the graphical representation. If Curves along X is selected, the graph is composed of a sequence of curves, each curve representing a line of the data; if Curves along Y is selected, the graph is composed of a sequence of curves, each curve representing a column of the data; the Curves along X and Curves along Y may be both selected for a cross-hatched presentation.
The Image Density and the Use (Image Density) selects the density or spacing of the curves which compose the graph; If Image Density is one, one curve is drawn for each line and/or column of the data. Values greater than one skip a corresponding number of data lines and/or columns, resulting in faster drawing speed. For large amounts of data, values greater than one also provide a means to limit plot density, without which the resulting graph may have too many curves, render as a solid surface, and require too much time. Alternately, the Plot Fill and the Use (Plot Fill) specifies the (approximate) percentage of the graph's area to be filled with curves; lines and/or columns from the image are used or skipped as needed. The Plot Fill option provides similar visual results regardless of image resolution, while the Image Density option provides similar visual results regardless of the graph's displayed size.
The Rotation, About X specifies rotation about the X axis, in degrees, of the projected point of view. Positive values allow a view which ''looks down'' at the top of the 3-D graph; negative values allow a view which ''looks up'' at the bottom of the 3-D graph. The Rotation, About Y specifies rotation about the Z axis, in degrees, of the projected point of view. The Plot Z Height suggests the display height of the Z axis, before being foreshortened due to rotation, in units of graphic display system's pixels. The value entered is considered suggestive; the actual height is constrained by the graphic display's resolution, the specified X and Y rotations, the data dimensions, and the aspect ratio.
The Controls - Color allows specifying the colors of the graphical representation. The Axis Color, Label Color, and Background Color can each be set as described in Pick Graphics Color. If Color Z is not selected, the curves drawn to represent the data values have a fixed RGB color, as selected via Data Color and Pick Graphics Color. Alternately, if Color Z is selected, the curves drawn to represent data values vary in color according to each datum's value. The Z Colorization, Red, Z Colorization, Grn, Z Colorization, Blu, allows specifying an arbitrary colorization by evaluation of a Mathematical Expression, with the addition of variables ''Z'', ''MINZ'', and ''MAXZ'', to represent the datum value under consideration, the minimum datum value, and the maximum datum value, respectively (e.g. when plotting 8 bit pixels, ''Z'' ranges from 0 to 255, ''MINZ'' is 0, and ''MAXZ'' is 255). The three expressions are expected to produce a red, green, and blue intensity in the range of 0 to 255. For example:
produces a grey level proportional to the data's value. (note: the multiplication of 1.0 forces real, rather than integer, arithmetic). The default expressions, providing a tri-color scheme, are:Z Colorization, Red 255*(Z-MINZ)/(1.0*(MAXZ-MINZ)) Z Colorization, Grn 255*(Z-MINZ)/(1.0*(MAXZ-MINZ)) Z Colorization, Blu 255*(Z-MINZ)/(1.0*(MAXZ-MINZ))
The Default (Color) button restores the default colorization expressions.Z Colorization, Red 255-(Z-MINZ)*255./(MAXZ-MINZ)*.75 Z Colorization, Grn ((Z-MINZ)*255./(MAXZ-MINZ)*.75)+64 Z Colorization, Blu 255-1.5*abs((Z-MINZ)*255./(MAXZ-MINZ)-96)
The Controls - Labels allows specifying the labeling. If Show Axis is selected, the three axis, their tick marks, and numeric labels are all shown. If X AutoTick, Y AutoTick, and Z AutoTick are selected, the axis' tick positions are automatically selected for the respective axis; otherwise, the X Tick Interval, Y Tick Interval, and Z Tick Interval specify the interval of ticks along the respective axis. If Legends: Default is selected, the legends along each axis are automatically selected; otherwise, the X Axis Legend, Y Axis Legend, and Z Axis Legend specify the legends shown along each of the respective axis.
Two styles of selecting pixel values and colors are commonly used in XCAP, the Pick Graphics Color for graphic colors and the Pick Pixel Value for precise pixel values.
The Pick Graphics Color style of selecting a pixel value is concise, and typically used where the precise value isn't critical, such as the color of on-screen graphics, or is subjective, such as in color matching. The pixel value is shown as a 24 bit RGB value, and as a color swatch. The 24 bit RGB value can also be entered explicitly, although explicit entry is rarely needed.
Clicking the color swatch activates the color browser. The top portion of the color browser utilizes an HSB color space cylinder; the cylinder's axis is brightness, distance from the axis is saturation, and angle around the axis is hue. On-screen the cylinder is presented as a color wheel and grey-level bar; clicking within the grey-level bar selects a brightness and selects a corresponding slice of the cylinder to be shown in the color wheel. Clicking within the color wheel selects a saturation and hue, maintaining the current brightness.
The color browser also presents a hue bar, a saturation bar, and a brightness bar, as an alternate presentation of color selection. Clicking within the hue bar changes the hue, maintaining the current saturation and brightness. Clicking within the saturation bar changes the saturation, maintaining the current hue and brightness. Clicking within the brightness bar changes the brightness, maintaining the current hue and saturation.
The color browser also presents a red content bar, a green content bar, and a blue content bar as an alternate means of color selection. Clicking within the red bar changes the red content, maintaining the current green and blue content. Clicking within the green bar changes the green content, maintaining the current red and blue content. Clicking within the blue bar changes the blue content, maintaining the current red and green content. Note that the colors shown within these bars are not simply dark red, green, or blue to bright red, green or blue. Rather, each bar displays the actual range of colors that will be obtained by modifying the read, green, or blue content, respectively.
The numeric values are always based upon 24 bit RGB pixels, even if the underlying image differs. When applied to the image, the 24 bit RGB color is converted to the image's closest representation. For example, a white pixel, which for a 24 bit RGB image is value 255/255/255 is automatically interpreted as 1023/1023/1023 when applied to an RGB image with 10 bits for each of the R, G, and B components.
The Pick Pixel Value style of selecting a pixel value is more explicit than Pick Graphics Color, and is typically used where precision is critical, such as image thresholding and segmentation.
There are substyles of Pick Pixel Value, the verbose and the concise.
In either verbose or concise styles, the pixel value is also shown as a color swatch (to the graphic display's closest representation). Clicking the color swatch activates the color browser, as described for Pick Graphics Color.
The verbose style of Pick Pixel Value simultaneously shows the pixel value in the grey level, the RGB, the HSB, the YCrCb, CMY, and the CMYK color spaces. Changing a value in one color space immediately shows the corresponding value in the other color spaces. The range of numeric values matches the image's actual pixel size (e.g. 0 through 1023 for 10 bit pixel value components) allowing precise entry of pixel values.
Two sets of values are shown, the first set shows integer values as they are actually coded in pixels, the second set shows real values which range between 0.0 and 1.0, except for hue of HSB which provides the ''standard'' presentation of 0.0 to 360.0 degrees of hue.
The concise style of Pick Pixel Value shows the pixel value in any one of the grey level, the RGB, the HSB, the YCrCb, CMY, or the CMYK color spaces. In some uses, the color space is selected by a Color Space control which appears next to the pixel values. In other uses, the color space is selected as part of the operation's area or region of interest (e.g. Set AOI Set ROI buttons).
If Normalized Values is selected, floating point values which range between 0.0 and 1.0, except for hue of HSB which ranges between 0.0 and 360 degrees, are presented. If Normalized Values is not selected, the integer values as they are actually coded in pixels are presented.
Many windows of XCAP provide fields for text entry or text display without entry. Several options allow selecting the appearance and manipulation of these fields; though not all fields allow all options. The options menu is activated by right clicking over the text field.
If the Black Board has been activated, for most text fields the options menu's Blackboard Write and Blackboard Dest. allows exporting the text field's value to a specified cell of the black board; the former exporting the value once and the latter exporting the value whenever it is changed. The Blackboard Read and Blackboard Source allows importing the text field's value from a specified cell of the black board; the former importing the value once, the latter importing the value whenever it is changed. Fields for text display, but not entry, allow exporting to, but not importing from, a cell of the black board.
For most text entry and text display fields, the options menu allows activating a Big Field, which provides a larger area to view and enter text, as well as using a larger font size for improved readability.
For most text entry and text display fields, the options menu allows selecting Cut of selected text to the system clipboard, Copy of selected text to the systems clipboard, Paste from the system clipboard into the text, and Delete of selected text.
Most windows of XCAP provide fields for numeric entry or numeric display without entry. Several options allow selecting the appearance and manipulation of these fields; though not all fields allow all options. The options menu is activated by right clicking over the numeric field, or the buttons at the right of the field (if any).
For most numeric entry and numeric display fields, options allow adjusting the number's presentation. For selected number fields, the options menu may allow selecting digit grouping, such as ###,###,###,###; ###.###.###.###; ### ### ### ###; ####,####,####; ####.####.####; #### #### ####; ####,########; ####.########; #### ########; or ############ (i.e. no digit grouping) to improve readability by optionally inserting a comma, period, or space every 3, 4, or 8 digits. For selected number fields, the options menu may allow selecting Explicit + to force a ''+'' sign to precede positive numbers.
For integer numbers, the options menu may allow selecting whether the value should be shown as Base 2, Base 8, Base 10, Base 16 u.c. (base 16 with upper case alpha digits), or Base 16 l.c. (base 16 with lower case alpha digits). For selected integer number fields, the options menu may allow selecting Leading 0 to prefix the number with a predetermined number of leading zero's. Or, the options menu may allow selecting Pad To of 1 to 32 digits to pad with number with leading zero's to the selected number of digits.
For non-integer numbers, the option menu may allow selecting Fixed Point (e.g. 0.000005), Scientific (e.g. 5.0e-6), or Shortest Format (i.e. fixed point where reasonable, otherwise scientific notation). For non-integer numbers, the option menu may allow selecting a Precision of 0 to 18 digits; for 0 digits the trailing period can be included or excluded. For non-integer numbers, the option menu may allow selecting Radix Point . or Radix Point ,. For non-integer numbers in Scientific format, the option menu may allow selecting Exponent (Indicator) e (e.g. 1.2344e-3), Exponent (Indicator) E (e.g. 1.2344E-3), or Exponent (Indicator) ^ (e.g. 1.2344x10^-3). For non-integer numbers in Scientific format, the option menu may allow selecting Exponent Explicit + to force a ''+'' sign to precede a positive exponent, and Exponent Leading 0 to prefix the exponent with leading zero's. For non-integer numbers in Fixed Point (e.g. 1.000005), a true value of 0 is never prefixed with a ''+'' or ''-'' sign; an ''apparent'' value of 0 due to limited precision (e.g. a value of 0.000005 displayed as ''0.000'') is prefixed with a ''+'' or ''-'' sign.
For number fields representing an angle, the options menu allows selecting Degrees, 0 to 360, Degrees, -180 to 180, Radians, 0 to 2pi, or Radians, -pi to pi.
For selected number fields representing a temporal interval, the options menu may allow selecting between one or more of nanoseconds, microseconds, milliseconds, seconds, minutes, hours, days, cycles per second, kilocycles per second, megacycles per second, or gigacycles per second.
For selected number fields representing a length, the options menu may allow selecting between one or more of nanometers, micrometers, millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers, mils, inches, feet, or yards.
For selected number fields representing frequency, the options menu may allow selecting between one or more of Hertz (cycles per second), kiloHertz, megaHertz, gigaHertz, seconds period, milliseconds period, microseconds period, or nanoseconds period.
For selected number fields representing memory or storage size, the options menu may allow selecting between one or more of bytes, kilobytes, megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, petabyte, exabyte, zettabyte, yottabyte, 103 bytes, 106 bytes, 109 bytes, 1012 bytes, 1015 bytes, 1018 bytes, 1021 bytes, or 1024 bytes.
For selected number fields representing temperature, the options menu may allow selecting between one or more of Fahrenheit, Celsius, or Kelvin.
Typically, to the right of a numeric entry field are two buttons. Left clicking the upper button (marked with an up-arrow) increments the numeric value, left clicking the lower button (marked with a down-arrow) decrements the numeric value; holding the click causes auto-repeat of the increment or decrement with the rate increasing as the click is held. Clicking within the shaded portion of the buttons yields varying increment or decrement values, values increase for clicks farther from the opposite button; holding the click causes auto-repeat of the increment or decrement, the rate increases for clicks closer to the unshaded portion of the button.
Numeric entry fields whose value is associated with left/right movement of the image cursor have the buttons arranged horizontally, as a left decrement button (marked with a left-arrow) and a right increment button (marked with a right arrow), emphasizing the effect. Numeric entry fields whose value is associated with up/down movement of the image cursor have the buttons arranged vertically, as an upper increment button (marked with a down arrow indicating direction of cursor movement), and a lower decrement button (marked with an up arrow indicating direction of cursor movement).
The options menu allows selecting the amount by which the increment/decrement buttons modify the numeric value. Selecting Set Inc/Dec switches the numeric field to show, and allow entering, the increment/decrement value. Selecting Key Entry restores the numeric field to show, and allows entering, the actual numeric value. Some numeric entry fields, such as those limited to a small range of unevenly spaced values (e.g. 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50), may not allow changing the increment/decrement value; instead of adding or subtracting a fixed amount, the field increments or decrements to the next value in the list.
For selected numeric entry fields, a scroll bar is automatically activated. For example, the effect of the Pan Position (X) and Scroll Position (Y) numeric fields is duplicated by a pair of scroll bars which abut the image being panned and scrolled.
For most other numeric entry fields, the options menu allows activating a Scrollpad, a miniature scrollbar which overlays the displayed number; like a scrollbar, left clicking or dragging along the scrollpad adjusts the number. Selecting Key Entry restores the numeric field to remove the scrollpad, and allows entering a numeric value.
If the Black Board has been activated, for most numeric fields the options menu's Blackboard Write and Blackboard Dest. allows exporting the numeric field's value to a specified cell of the black board; the former exporting the value once and the latter exporting the value whenever it is changed. The Blackboard Read and Blackboard Source allows importing the numeric field's value from a specified cell of the black board; the former importing the value once, the latter importing the value whenever it is changed. Fields for numeric display, but not entry, allow exporting to, but not importing from, a cell of the black board.
For most numeric entry and numeric display fields, the options menu allows activating a Big Field, which provides a larger area to view and enter numbers, as well as using a larger font size for improved readability.
For most numeric entry fields, the options menu allows activating an Expression field which provides for entering Mathematical Expression which is evaluated to a numeric value. For derived values, this allows convenient entry without using a separate calculator. For example, typing:
to enter 8.5 inches into a field expecting centimeters. Note that for integer values, regardless of the base normally used, numbers in expressions are always base 10 unless prefixed with an explicit base specification as described in Mathematical Expression.8.5 * 2.54
For most numeric entry fields, the options menu allows selecting Cut of selected text to the system clipboard, Copy of selected text to the system clipboard, Paste from the system clipboard into the text, and Delete of selected text.
Selected numeric fields may have an explicit ''slider'' control in addition to the implicit ScrollPad. Right clicking the slider allows enlarging a portion of the slider's range for finer control.
The Program Setup utility window shows information about the current XCAP, and sets various configuration options.
The Program Version and Program Setup shows the current program setup, version, and release. For versions of XCAP which require an authorization key, the Program Setup identifies the key currently required; this is shown even if the correct key is not attached, allowing mix-ups involving different versions of XCAP and their keys to be resolved without resorting to trial and error.
The Program Directory shows the directory (i.e. ''folder'') from which XCAP was launched, and in which XCAP expects to find files for its icons, utility programs, and other components of XCAP.
The Last Settings Directory shows the directory (i.e. ''folder'') where various settings are kept, to become the defaults the next time XCAP is run. To restart XCAP with default settings, remove all the files in the Last Settings Directory.
The Data Directory shows, and allows selecting, the default directory (i.e. ''folder'') to be used for images and reports when a non-absolute file name (such as ''image.tif'' in contrast to ''/images/image.tif'') is entered.
The Scripts Directory shows, and allows selecting, the default directory (i.e. ''folder'') to be used for scripts when a non-absolute file name (such as ''run.scr'' in contrast to ''/scripts/run.scr'') is entered.
The Change Setup button allows changing XCAP's configuration, from XCAP-Viewer to XCAP-Lite, or from XCAP-Lite to a version of XCAP with additional features, by supplying the proper activation code or by detecting a USB or parallel port authorization key. For newer ''Green'' authorization keys, the Upgrade Authorization Key allows the USB authorization key to be remotely updated and upgraded, via e-mailing of signature files, for authorization of a newer version of XCAP. The Download Newest Release button downloads and installs the newest release of XCAP from an EPIX, Inc. internet web/ftp site. This feature requires that the host computer system have internet access.
Some versions of XCAP may contain customizations for a particular application, with these special features hidden to avoid confusion by the general public. Entry of the correct Customization Passwords phrase may activate one or more custom features. Similarly, entry of the correct Customization Passwords phrase may activate features of interest only to EPIX, Inc. R&D, EPIX, Inc. Technical Support, or to EPIX, Inc. Distributors and Representatives.
The Program Setup utility window displays information about some of its component ''DLL''s (under Windows) or component ''so''s (under Linux) such as version date and intended operating system. This is intended to help spot invalid combinations of old and new components, for use under advice of EPIX, Inc. Technical Support.
If Save Settings on Exit is not selected, various settings are not saved when XCAP exits. If Load Settings on Startup is not selected, various settings are not loaded the next time XCAP starts. If Reset Settings on Exit (Once) is selected, on exit from XCAP various settings are reset to their default, so that the default settings are used the next time XCAP starts; however, the Save Settings on Exit and Load Settings on Startup are not altered, allowing future changes to the settings to be remembered.
If Startup Warnings & Advisories is selected, various message boxes such as warnings about poor graphics display system resolution, limitations of the XCAP-Lite, XCAP-Viewer, or XCAP-Ltd version, etc., are shown on startup as appropriate.
If Minimize after Startup is selected, XCAP is minimized (i.e. iconized) after startup. This option is intended for use when XCAP is launched automatically when the host computer is started. This option is only available under Windows.
If Background Task in System Tray is selected, XCAP is shown as an icon in the ''System Tray'' or ''Status Area'' of the Windows taskbar, rather than as an application button. Double right clicking the XCAP icon hides XCAP; double left clicking restores XCAP. Also, the buttons in the Main Window's title bar don't close, but instead hide XCAP. This option is only available under Windows.
If Allow Multiple Instances is selected, multiple instances of XCAP may be started by re-clicking the XCAP shortcut. If Allow Multiple Instances is not selected, clicking the shortcut with an instance of XCAP already running will de-minimize and/or bring the existing instance of XCAP to the foreground. This option is only available under Windows.
If Auto Startup w. Windows or Auto Startup w. Windows all Users is selected, XCAP is added to the Windows' ''StartUp'' or ''StartUp all Users'' group, so that XCAP is launched automatically when Windows starts (or, on multi-user configurations, when a user associated with the personalized ''StartUp'' group logs in). If Auto Startup w. Windows or Auto Startup w. Windows all Users is deselected, XCAP is removed from the Windows' ''StartUp'' or ''StartUp all Users'' group. XCAP may also be added or removed from the Windows' ''StartUp'' or ''StartUp all Users'' group via normal Windows techniques; the Auto Startup w. Windows (all Users) in XCAP provides an easier alternative. This option is only available under Windows.
Note that under Windows Vista, 7 and 8/10/11, a program in the ''StartUp'' or ''StartUp all Users'' group will not launch automatically if the program's shortcut has the ''Run as Admin'' attribute. Other techniques are available under Windows to allow a ''Run as Admin'' application to launch automatically; but these alternate techniques are not applied by XCAP's Auto Startup w. Windows (all Users) feature. Nor is it usually necessary to run XCAP as Administrator.
Note that under Windows 8/10/11, a program in the ''StartUp'' or ''StartUp all Users'' group may not auto start when the computer boots unless Windows Auto-Login is enabled; XCAP does not try to adjust security settings such as Auto-Login.
If XCAP is automatically launched when Windows' starts, Windows may run XCAP before Windows loads the authorization key's driver, causing XCAP to complain that the driver can't be found. If Auto Startup: Wait for Drivers is selected, XCAP will wait, up to 60 seconds, for the driver to be loaded.
If Run w. Task Priority other than Default is selected, XCAP attempts to give itself the specified Idle, Below Normal, Normal, Above Normal, High, or Real Time (using Windows terminology) execution priority each time it is run. Whether or not XCAP can successfully adjust its execution priority depends on various Windows security settings; consult your Windows administrator for additional information. This option is only available under Windows.
If Auto Disable Screen Saver is selected, the Windows screen saver is disabled so as prevent the graphics display from blanking while displaying images without keyboard or mouse activity by the user. This option is only available under Windows.
If Auto Disable Power Conservation Sleep is selected, the Windows power conservation sleep or hibernate modes are disabled so as to prevent the computer from being disabled while capturing or displaying images without keyboard or mouse activity by the user. This option is only available under Windows.
If Auto Disable 'Show .. While Dragging' is selected, the Windows feature that shows the contents of a window while being dragged, instead of window's outline, is disabled. Showing the window contents may not perform correctly for the The Image Viewer Window, depending on the chosen Display - API. This option is only available under Windows.
If Open PIXCI® on Startup is selected, the PIXCI® frame grabber is automatically opened for use the next time XCAP starts. If Live Video on Startup is selected along with Open PIXCI® on Startup, the PIXCI® frame grabber is automatically set to ''Live'' (continuous capture) mode after opening, if the current frame grabber and camera mode supports ''Live'' mode.
If PIXCI® Viewer is Main Window is selected along with Open PIXCI® on Startup, XCAP's ''footprint'' and functionality are reduced. The normal Main Window is not shown, the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window appears as the primary window. Features normally accessible from the Main Window, such as Scripts, Black Board, and Images - New Image are not available in the reduced footprint mode.
If TWAIN Sourcery on Startup is selected along with Open PIXCI® on Startup, the PIXCI® TWAIN Sourcery is automatically started for use the next time XCAP starts. This option is only available under Windows.
If Image-Pro Sourcery on Startup is selected along with Open PIXCI® on Startup, the PIXCI® Image-Pro Sourcery is automatically started for use the next time XCAP starts. This option is only available under Windows.
If PIXCI® Viewer is Minimal TWAIN Sourcery is selected along with Open PIXCI® on Startup, TWAIN Sourcery on Startup, and PIXCI® Viewer is Main Window then a simplified and minimal set of menu items and shortcuts are shown in the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window, suitable for supporting XCAP's use only as a component of a ''smart'' TWAIN Source (TWAIN terminology). Two shortcuts are also added, duplicating the effects of the Acquire Image into TWAIN Application and Cancel TWAIN Application Acquire buttons from the PIXCI® - TWAIN Sourcery and Image-Pro Sourcery. This option is only available under Windows.
If PIXCI® Viewer is Minimal Image-Pro Sourcery is selected along with Open PIXCI® on Startup, Image-Pro Sourcery on Startup, and PIXCI® Viewer is Main Window then a simplified and minimal set of menu items and shortcuts are shown in the PIXCI® Image Viewer Window, suitable for supporting XCAP's use only as a component of a ''smart'' Video/Digital source (Image-Pro terminology). Two shortcuts are also added, duplicating the effects of the Snap Image into Image-Pro Workspace and Cancel Image-Pro Acquisition Preview buttons from the PIXCI® - TWAIN Sourcery and Image-Pro Sourcery. This option is only available under Windows.
If PIXCI® Shortcuts on Open is selected, the Capture - Shortcuts are automatically activated when the PIXCI® frame grabber is opened.
If PIXCI® Status Bar on Open is selected, the Display - Status Bar is automatically activated when the PIXCI® frame grabber is opened.
If PIXCI® Menu Bar on Open is selected, the window's menu bar is automatically activated when the PIXCI® frame grabber is opened. When deactivated, clicking the mouse right-click button allows restoring the menu bar.
If PIXCI® Adjustments on Open is selected, the Capture - Adjustments are automatically activated when the PIXCI® frame grabber is opened.
If PIXCI® Shortcuts Attached to Viewer is selected, the Capture - Shortcuts when activated, are attached to and part of the image viewer window rather than a separate window.
If PIXCI® Adjustments Attached to Viewer is selected, the Capture - Adjustments when activated, are attached to and part of the image viewer window rather than a separate window.
If Show Hints is selected, various hints and suggestions on usage and features pop up at random intervals of time.
The Startup Script specifies the path name of a script file to be automatically executed each time XCAP is started. The Startup Script is, of course, remembered from one XCAP launching to the next. The PIXCI® Custom Shortcuts specifies the path name of a specification file that allows customizing the Capture - Shortcuts. The format of the specification file is similar to that of the Scripts - Load Tool Bar, and specifies the graphics for each icon, an optional key, and either a script to be executed or the label of a menu item to be ''clicked''. An example, which corresponds to the default shortcuts (i.e. the current default shortcuts assuming neither PIXCI® Viewer is Minimal TWAIN Sourcery nor PIXCI® Viewer is Minimal Image-Pro Sourcery is used) is:
The shortcut.height and shortcut.width specify the number of icons and scripts provided by the shortcut panel and their arrangement; the example specifies 7×2 icons. The optional shortcut.iconheight and shortcut.iconwidth specify the dimensions of each icon in pixels. For each icon, the shortcut.?.?.icon specifies the BMP or TIFF format file name containing graphics, shortcut.?.?.hint specifies the hint which appears when the mouse is over the icon, and the optional shortcut.?.?.key specifies the name of an optional keyboard key, where the ''?.?'' is replaced by the X and Y position within the shortcut panel.# comments like so - optional shortcut.width =8 shortcut.height =2 # the shortcut iconwidth and iconheight are optional, default of 32 shortcut.iconwidth =32 shortcut.iconheight=32 shortcut.0.0.icon =../program/xxapbuf0.bmp shortcut.0.0.hint =First Frame Buffer shortcut.0.0.effect =First Buffer shortcut.0.1.icon =../program/xxapbuf9.bmp shortcut.0.1.hint =Last Frame Buffer shortcut.0.1.effect =Last Buffer shortcut.1.0.icon =../program/xxapbuf5.bmp shortcut.1.0.hint =Next Frame Buffer shortcut.1.0.effect =Next Buffer shortcut.1.1.icon =../program/xxapbuf4.bmp shortcut.1.1.hint =Previous Frame Buffer shortcut.1.1.effect =Previous Buffer shortcut.2.0.icon =../program/xxapsnap.bmp shortcut.2.0.hint =Snap Video into Buffer shortcut.2.0.effect =Snap shortcut.2.1.icon.0 =../program/xxapdead.bmp shortcut.2.1.hint.0 =UnLive->Live - Start Continuous Snap shortcut.2.1.effect.0 =Live shortcut.2.1.icon.1 =../program/xxaplive.bmp shortcut.2.1.hint.1 =Live->UnLive - Cease Continuous Snap shortcut.2.1.effect.1 =UnLive shortcut.3.0.icon =../program/xxappalt.bmp shortcut.3.0.hint =Palette shortcut.3.0.effect =Viewer's Palette shortcut.3.1.icon =../program/xxapzoom.bmp shortcut.3.1.hint =Zoom shortcut.3.1.effect =Zoom, Pan, Scroll shortcut.4.0.icon =../program/xxapcurs.bmp shortcut.4.0.hint =Pixel Cursor shortcut.4.0.effect =Cursor On/Off shortcut.4.1.icon.0 =../program/xxapsiza.bmp shortcut.4.1.hint.0 =Display as Resize: To Window & Aspect Ratio shortcut.4.1.effect.0 =Resize:ToWindow&AspectRatio shortcut.4.1.icon.1 =../program/xxapsiz0.bmp shortcut.4.1.hint.1 =Display as Resize: None (Image Pixel = Display Pixel) shortcut.4.1.effect.1 =Resize:None shortcut.5.0.icon =../program/xxappeek.bmp shortcut.5.0.hint =Pixel Peek shortcut.5.0.effect =Pixel Peek shortcut.5.1.icon =../program/xxapplot.bmp shortcut.5.1.hint =Pixel Plot shortcut.5.1.effect =Pixel Plot shortcut.6.0.icon =../program/xxaphist.bmp shortcut.6.0.hint =Histogram shortcut.6.0.effect =Histogram shortcut.6.1.icon =../program/xxapdupl.bmp shortcut.6.1.hint =Duplicate Image shortcut.6.1.effect =Duplicate Image shortcut.7.0.icon =../program/xxapseqa.bmp shortcut.7.0.hint =Sequence Acquire shortcut.7.0.effect =Video to Frame Buffers shortcut.7.1.icon =../program/xxapseqd.bmp shortcut.7.1.hint =Sequence Display shortcut.7.1.effect =Sequence Play
The shortcut.?.?.effect specifies the label of a menu item; clicking the shortcut is equivalent to clicking the menu item. Alternately, the shortcut.?.?.script specifies the script file name to be executed when the icon is clicked. Some of the shortcut.?.?.effect examples shown above do not correspond to any menu item's label; these special cases are predefined and built-in. There are no other predefined special cases.
Shortcuts which show two or more states, rather than being a simple button, are specified by shortcut.?.?.icon.?, shortcut.?.?.effect.?, etc., where the final ''?'' represents each of the shortcuts' states. Currently, these may not use a ''script'' and must use the ''effect(s)'' as shown; they may be provided a customized placement, a customized icon or a customized keyboard key.
The icon and script file names are typically ''simple'' file names, without a path, and are expected to be found in the same directory as the shortcut specification file. If the icon or script file names are to include a directory path, a separator character of ''/'', not ''\'', must be used. Comment lines, as shown, may be optionally included. The order of lines in the file is not significant.
XCAP supports user-defined translation of its labels and messages for use in non-English speaking countries. Partial translation is supported, so that only those windows and features of particular interest need be translated; other windows and features remain in English. The user-defined translation also allows customization of XCAP; substituting an application specific phrase for a standard label, even though both may be in English.
XCAP provides dynamic, rather than static, translation; no compiler tools are required. Translation is performed by:
The first string is the label or message in English, the second string is the label's or message's usage (or "" if not known), and the third string is the desired translation. The first string is used as a table key, and must never be changed!"Load New Image" "menu" = "Load New Image"
Some messages contain place holders for insertions, indicated by a number inside braces, such as:
The translation need not maintain the order of the insertions, for example, the above message could be modified to:"The number must be greater than {0} and less than {1}"
"The number must be less than {1} and greater than {0}"
For target languages which use the ASCII (English) character set, the translation tables may be edited by any common text editor. For other target languages, the Edit Translation button allows editing within XCAP; however any modifications are only effective on windows and features which are created after the modification - XCAP should be exited and restarted for all modifications to have effect.
The translation feature does not affect the contents of Scripts. Consistent use of English allows scripts to be easily imported and exported between different countries or regions.
If Prompt for Translation is selected, accessing a feature of XCAP which doesn't already have a translation will automatically pop-up a dialog which prompts and allows entry of a translation for each new phrase.
The E-Mail specifies configuration options for use of e-mail features within XCAP, both outgoing and (for support of future XCAP features) incoming e-mail.
For outgoing e-mail, the E-Mail Server specifies the host name (address) of your outgoing e-mail server, such as ''smtp.our.business.server.com''. Ask your network administrator if not sure of your e-mail server's host name. The E-Mail Sender specifies your e-mail address, such as ''john.doe@aol.com''. The E-Mail Name specifies your desired, arbitrary, e-mail name, such as ''John Doe''.
For incoming e-mail, the E-Mail Server specifies the host name (address) of your incoming e-mail server, such as ''pop.our.business.server.com''. The E-Mail Account and E-Mail Password specifies your account name and password, respectively, for your incoming e-mail server. Ask your network administrator if not sure of your e-mail server's host name, or your account name or password. Note: For convenience XCAP encrypts and saves the E-Mail Password, on disk, so that it does need to be entered each time XCAP is run. The level of password security provided is intended only to thwart unsophisticated attempts at discovery.
The Setup E-Mail from Registry attempts to set the above e-mail configuration options, excepting E-Mail Password, by reading the Windows registry. Due the large variety of e-mail software and configurations, the automatic Setup E-Mail from Registry may not always succeed; the E-Mail configuration options can always be set manually. The Setup E-Mail from Registry is only available under Windows.
The GUI specifies configuration options for the XCAP Graphical User Interface. Some options allow eliminating a small amount of overhead, and are intended for applications where XCAP is being used non-interactively. Other options allow ''tweaking'' the user interface, so as to provide fewer popup dialogs or simpler dialogs. Changes to most of these options take effect only after XCAP is restarted; the Tool Tip Show Delay, Tool Tip Hide Delay, and Show Process Report take effect immediately.
The Scale GUI Fonts, Scale GUI Sketches, and Scale GUI Icons allow changing the size of the fonts, icons, and sketches (i.e. of camera controls, PCI card brackets, etc.), such as to increase the relative size when using a graphics display set to very high resolution. Changes affect newly opened windows and dialogs.
The Min Screen Area Left, Min Screen Area Top, Max Screen Area Width, and max Screen Area Height allows specifying the maximum size and the position of the display screen area to be used. They are particularly useful with high resolution, ''letterbox'', displays, such as 4K UHD (3840×2160), where filling the entire display screen is (usually) not desirable and (typically) avoided by most applications. The default Max Screen Area Width and max Screen Area Height is 1920×1280 and are bounds, not the actual dimensions used; set to 99999 (or other large value) to disable this feature and use the display's entire screen. Changes take effect when XCAP is re-opened.
The Show Numeric Field Browse allows eliminating the Field - Increment & Decrement buttons which appear next to most numeric fields. The Show Numeric Field Browse Directional allows standardizing the appearance of all increment and decrement buttons; otherwise, buttons associated with directional movement are designed so as to suggest the direction. The Show Numeric Field Browse Auto-Repeat allows disabling the auto-repeat feature of all increment and decrement buttons when held down. The Show Numeric Field Browse Variable Effect allows disabling the varying value and auto-repeat speed feature of all increment and decrement buttons. The Show Color Field Browse allows eliminating the Pick Graphics Color's color swatch and browse feature. The Show Modify Preview Mode allows eliminating the Preview button and option in Image Viewer Window - Modify windows. The Show Modify Live Mode allows eliminating the Live button and option in Image Viewer Window - Modify windows.
If Show Tool Tips Popups is selected, usage hints regarding the field or object under the mouse cursor are shown in a popup window. The Tool Tip Show Delay and Tool Tip Hide Delay allow selecting the delay before the tip's window appears and disappears, respectively. If Show Tool Tips Log is selected, usage hints regarding the field or object under the mouse cursor are displayed in the Utilities - Message Log. The Tool Tip Show Delay allow selecting the delay before the tip is shown in the Utilities - Message Log.
The Use Processing Indicator allows selecting the style of visual feedback for long running processing operations. If %Done & Cancel Popup is selected, a popup window show the approximate percentage of completion and provides an Cancel? button for premature termination. If Hourglass Cursor is selected, a cursor is changed to an hourglass shape during the processing operation; the window's Cancel button can be used for premature termination. If %Done & Cancel Popon is selected, the approximate percentage of completion is shown within the originating window; the window's Cancel button can be used for premature termination. If Meter & Cancel Popon is selected, the approximate degree of completion is shown as a bar graph within the originating window; the window's Cancel button can be used for premature termination. If None is selected, no visual feedback is provided, nor a means for premature termination. Changes to these options take effect only for newly opened windows.
The Differentiate Duplicate Titles selects how duplicated window titles, such as would occur from activating two or more instances of the same window, are differentiated. If .., ..., .... is selected, two, three, or more periods are appended to the duplicate dialog titles. If (2), (3), (4) is selected, a number in parenthesis is appended to the duplicate dialog titles.
The Show Process Report allows activating post-processing status reports. If Elapsed Time is selected, the approximate execution time is reported to the Utilities - Message Log; it has no effect if Use Processing Indicator is None.
If Show First Image Index as 0 is selected, a sequence of N images is indexed as 0 through N-1. If Show First Image Index as 1 is selected, a sequence of N images is indexed as 1 through N.
If Show File Load Exists Error Popup is selected, a popup dialog with an error message is shown whenever an existing file name is entered in conjunction with a ''load'' feature that reads a file; otherwise an error is noted in the Utilities - Message Log, and no dialog need be explicitly closed. If Show File Save Exists Error Popup is selected, a popup dialog with an error message is shown whenever an existing file name is entered in conjunction with a ''save'' type feature that writes a file; otherwise an error is noted in the Utilities - Message Log, and no dialog need be explicitly closed. If Show Directory Selection Error Popup is selected, a popup dialog with an error message is shown in conjunction with a directory selection feature which expects an existing directory which doesn't, or expects a nonexisting directory which already exists; otherwise an error is noted in the Utilities - Message Log, and no dialog need be explicitly closed.
If Show File Browse-less Entry is selected, most file load or save features show a field in which the file pathname can be explicitly entered without popping up a file browse dialog, and show a button to explicitly popup the file browse dialog. Otherwise, the explicit entry field and button is not shown; the file browse dialog pops up automatically when ''OK'' is clicked. Changing Show File Browse-less Entry may affect the operation of any previously recorded Scripts, as this option changes the appearance and operation of the user interface.
If Show Explicit Dialog Close Button is selected, a ''Close'' button is added at the bottom of dialogs that are normally closed via their title bar. This is for the sake of releases of Linux under which dialogs have neither title bar nor close buttons.
The GDI API?, AWT API?, Video for Windows API?, DirectX API?, DirectX Dual Buffer RGB API?, DirectX Dual Buffer YUYV API?, and/or XWindows/X11 API? specify which host operating system API's are to be used by XCAP for display of images and video. These options also appear, and are further explained, under Image View - Display.
For Windows 2000 and later, the Timer Minimum Resolution sets XCAP's minimum timer resolution request to Windows; i.e. the maximum timer granularity. Lower values may decrease timer-driven event latency and increase accuracy of timer based measurements (depending on which timer is used) at the expense of system overhead. The timer granularity is consistent, system-wide, for all processes; Windows sets the granularity to the minimum value requested by any process. As such, changing XCAP's Timer Minimum Resolution may have no noticeable effect if, for example, another running process has already requested a smaller timer granularity.
The Message Log utility window displays warnings and errors that arise from performing various operations. By default, the message log window appears automatically when a message is added, and disappears a few seconds later. From the Utilities menu, the Message Log item allows explicit activation of the message log window.
The Message Log's menu-bar provides several options. Under File, the Save allows saving the Message Log's contents to a file, as ASCII text.
Under Options, the Hide hides the Message Log window, and the Clear removes all messages from the Message Log.
The Auto Show enables or disables automatic showing of the Message Log whenever a new message is added. The Auto Hide, 2 Sec., Auto Hide, 10 Sec., or Auto Hide, 60 Sec. enables or disables automatic hiding of the Message Log the indicated period of time after it was automatically shown. The Audible enables or disables an audible click whenever a new message is added. The Flash enables or disables the ''flashing'' over any other obscuring windows of an already visible Message Log whenever a new message is added. The Annotate allows adding annotation to the Message Log.
The I/O Port utility window allows poking or peeking I/O ports on the computer system bus, allowing ''raw'' control of third party devices. The I/O Port feature is available only available with Intel ix86 processors under Windows 95, 98, and ME where ''direct'' control of devices is common and acceptable practice.
The Port Address selects the I/O port's address, and 1 Byte Mode, 2 Byte Mode, or 4 Byte Mode selects whether the I/O port is to be accessed as an 8 bit, 16 bit, or 32 bit register. If the I/O Port Read operation is selected, each click of the Apply button reads the I/O port at the specified address, and reports the Port Value. If the I/O Port Write operation is selected, each click of the Apply button writes the I/O port at the specified address with the Port Value.
If the I/O Port Read, Repeat operation is selected, the Run button starts the repeated reading of the I/O port at the specified address and reports the Port Value. The period between reads of the I/O port is specified by Repeat Period, in milliseconds. Repeated reading of the I/O port is terminated by either the Stop or Cancel buttons.
The inherent nature of the I/O Port feature is to allow control of devices unknown to XCAP, and thus provide unsupervised access to any I/O port. Misuse will cause loss of data, or abruptly stop the computer!
The Audio Clip utility window allows recording and playing short audio clips, of up to 30 seconds in length. The Audio Clip feature utilizes the computer's microphone, speakers, and sound card, and requires operating system multi-media support for audio. The Audio Clip is available only under Windows.
The
New Clip
initializes a new, empty, audio clip.
The
Load Clip
loads an existing audio clip from a
.wav
format file.
The
Record Clip
records into the clip,
the
Play Clip
plays the clip, and
Stop Clip
ceases play or record.
The
Save Clip
allows saving the current clip to a
.wav
format file.
While playing or recording, the Position indicates the position, in seconds, within the audio clip. The Length indicates the length, in seconds, of the audio clip. While recording, a ''VU'' style meter indicates the peak sound amplitude.
The RS-232 Terminal utility window allows controlling devices connected via the computer's RS-232 port. The RS-232 Terminal is designed specifically for device control, including options to communicate with numerical character (i.e. byte) values, rather than as a common ''terminal emulator''.
The Send/Receive features provides a ''screen'' of received characters, entry for transmitted characters, and various status indicators.
The Send Char field allows transmitting the character value entered; the ReSend Char allows retransmitting the same value, without re-entry.
The Send String field allows sending the string entered. A carriage-return (CR) and/or line-feed (LF) may be automatically appended, as selected in Options. The ReSend String allows resending the same value, without re-entry.
The Send History records strings previously transmitted via ReSend String; the ReSend History allows resending a selected string.
The menu-bar's File, Save Screen allows saving the receive screen's contents to a file, as ASCII text.
The Setup allows specifying the ''COM'' port (under Windows) or the ''ttyS'' device (under Linux) to be used, and other communication settings, such as the baud rate, number of data bits, type of parity, number of stop bits, and whether XON/XOFF flow control is to be used. Most of the default values are those common to most applications; typically only the baud rate needs to be specified along with selection of a ''COM'' port or a ''ttyS'' device.
The Options allows specifying various user preferences. Unlike the Setup features, the Options are preferences which might be changed while communicating with a device.
If Send String As Is is selected, transmitted strings are not followed by any control characters. If Send String With CR is selected, transmitted strings are followed by a carriage-return character (CR). If Send String With LF is selected, transmitted strings are followed by a line-feed character (LF). If Send String With CR+LF is selected, transmitted strings are followed by a carriage-return (CR) and line-feed (LF) characters.
If Send: String has \ Codes is selected, the transmitted strings are interpreted as possibly containing embedded ''\'' codes. A ''\a'' sequence yields an ASCII Bell, a ''\b'' sequence yields an ASCII Back-Space, a ''\f'' sequence yields an ASCII Form-Feed, a ''\r'' sequence yields an ASCII Carriage-Return (CR), a ''\n'' sequence yields an ASCII Line-Feed (LF), a ''\t'' sequence yields an ASCII Tab, a ''\\'' sequence yields an ASCII Back-Slash. A ''\x'' followed by two hexadecimal digits yields the byte value specified by the two digits.
If Send: String is Hexadecimal is selected, the transmitted strings are interpreted as hexadecimal representation of byte values, non-hexadecimal characters are ignored. For example:
each send the three ASCII characters ''012''.303132 30 31 32 30/31/32 /30//31//32/ ;30.31:32,
If Receive: Show Ctrl Chars as Hex is selected, any so-called ''control'' characters received that are not in the range of the normal ASCII printable characters (i.e. decimal value 32 through 126) are displayed as hexadecimal values, such as ''/0A/'' for line-feed (LF). Otherwise, carriage-return (CR) and line-feed (LF) are interpreted, and other characters are displayed as per the operating system's typeface table. If Receive: Show All Chars as Hex is selected, all received characters are displayed as hexadecimal.
If Receive: Queue until Get Next is selected, received characters are not immediately displayed; each press of the RCV: Get Next button, of Send/Receive, releases the next, single, character for display.
If Receive CR => CR+LF is selected, each received carriage-return (CR) is interpreted as carriage-return (CR) and line-feed (LF) characters. If Receive LF => CR+LF is selected, each received line-feed (LF) is interpreted as carriage-return (CR) and line-feed (LF) characters.
If Local Echo is selected, each character transmitted is also displayed on the receive screen.
If Send String on Entry is not selected, a string entered at Send String is not transmitted immediately, but only upon clicking the ReSend String button. If Send History on Entry is not selected, a Send History is not sent immediately, but only upon clicking the ReSend History button.
If Send History => Send String is selected, selecting a Send History, whether the selected string is sent or not, also copies the entry to the field, so that it can edited.
If Send: Throttle Char Rate is selected, delays are used so that characters are sent no faster than the Send: Throttle Rate. This may be needed when communicating with devices that expect to receive characters at the rate of a human typist, rather then receiving the entire string as fast as the baud rate and number of stop bits allows.
The Send: String Char Replacement allows replacing selected characters of the transmitted string with computed values as specified by Char Replacement Expressions. This is useful for camera commands that require a checksum. For example, the expressions:
replace the sixth and seventh byte of the command string with the sum of the second through fifth bytes. Invalid expressions are silently ignored; use Local Echo and Receive: Show All Chars as Hex for feedback as to whether the expressions have the desired effect.b5 = (b1+b2+b3+b4) & 255 b6 = ((b1+b2+b3+b4) / 256) & 255
The Screen Columns and Screen Rows allow resizing the receive ''screen''. The Screen Horz. Tab (Columns) specify the position of horizontal tabs - to be at multiples of Screen Horz. Tab (Columns).
The XMT Queued shows the total number of characters requested to be sent, XMT Count shows the total number of characters actually sent. They differ only when flow control is in use, thereby showing characters that have been entered but not yet sent. The XMT Ready shows the state of flow control, being active only when the transmit flow control allows transmission.
If Receive: Queue until Get Next of Options is selected, the RCV Data shows whether characters have been received and are awaiting clicking of the RCV: Get Next button for display. The RCV Count shows the total number of characters received and displayed. The RCV Last Char shows the numeric value of the last character received and displayed. The RCV: Clear Screen button allows clearing the receive display ''screen''.
The RCV Last Line shows the last line of characters received, as terminated by carriage-return (CR) and/or line-feed (LF) as selected by Receive CR => CR+LF and Receive LF => CR+LF. The RCV Last Line is primarily intended for connection to the Black Board, and is therefore intentionally small and updated only after the entire line is received. The Receive: Screen Active, of Options, allows deactivating the receive ''screen'', such as when RS-232 Terminal is used with the Black Board and interactive viewing is not required.
The 16×16 BytePad allows browsing by mouse clicking and dragging for hexadecimal byte values to be sent via the Send Char feature.
The AsciiPad displays ASCII characters, their decimal and hexadecimal values, and names of control characters. It also allows browsing via mouse clicks for values to be sent via the Ni "Send Char" Ep "Send Char" feature, such as quickly sending one ESC character. The AsciiPad is primarily intended for use with non-printable control characters; printable ASCII characters are easier to enter via Send String.
The RS-232 Pins provides a synopsis of the commonly used RS-232 signals and their pin assignments on DB-25 and on DB-9 connectors.
The syntax of serial commands varies from camera to camera; even among cameras of the same manufacturer. Most cameras are quite unforgiving; requiring each command to adhere precisely to the published syntax.
Some cameras use textual style commands, such as:
Typically, the text must be terminated with an (unprintable) carriage return character (CR), a line-feed character (LF), or both (CR+LF). Serial commands with the wrong terminator might be ignored, or might elicit an error. Select the terminator to be appended to each Send String via Send String With CR, Send String With LF, or Send String With CR+LF. Many cameras are sensitive to upper versus lower case; adhere to the published syntax.set gain=34
Some cameras use non-textual commands; using, typically, all possible 8 bit binary values. Typically, the automatic appending of CR or LF line terminators must be disabled. Enable the Send: String is Hexadecimal, typing:
sends three bytes, with values 01(base16), 2F(base 16), and EE (base 16).01 2F ee
Some cameras implement a timeout; all components of a command must arrive within a specified time period. Thus, send a single string; don't send, for example:
followed by sending:set gain
This would also cause a second issue with cameras using CR or LF terminators, as, incorrectly, there would be terminators after each of the two components.46
Some cameras require a pause between characters, as time for their internal logic to process each character; see Send: Throttle Rate.
Most cameras will not accept a new serial command before processing of the previous command is complete. Most cameras send a serial response after processing is complete and ready for a new command. Wait for the response.
Some cameras will enter an undefined state and ignore further serial commands if a new command is sent before processing of a previous command is complete, or if the command syntax is wrong. To further confuse the matter, within a single camera most commands might execute quickly but a few execute slowly - perhaps even sending two responses, ''command acknowledged'' and ''operation completed''. While experimenting and potentially sending incorrect commands, cycle camera power if the camera stops responding.
Some cameras need a few seconds after applying power before they are able to response to serial commands. Some, with embedded CPU and OS, might need a minute or two!
The Screen Capture utility window allows capturing the current graphic display screen to a file, capturing the current graphic display screen into a new image buffer, or printing the current graphic display screen. The Screen Capture also allows capturing numeric and textual parameters into a text file.
If Graphics to File is selected, the entire graphics display screen is saved to a file in any one of the chosen BMP Format, JPEG/JFIF Format, or TIFF Format, The Save to File field allows explicit entry of a path and file name; alternately, the Browse button provides access to a standard Windows style or Linux style file browsing dialog box.
If Graphics to Print is selected, the entire graphics display screen is printed to a Windows or Linux compatible printer. The Printer Setup button provides access to a standard Windows printer setup dialog box, or a Linux printer setup dialog box, allowing selection of a previously configured printer. The Page Width and Page Height notes the current printer's page size. The Print Width and Print Height specifies the width and height of the area to be printed; the Upper Left X, Upper Left Y, Lower Right X, and Lower Right Y specifies the position of the printed area on the page. If Force Aspect is selected, the Print Width and Print Height are automatically corrected so as print with the correct aspect ratio; on rare occasions it may be desirable to deselect Force Aspect to allow elongated printing. The Full Size allows convenient selection of the full Page Width and Page Height, subject to correction for aspect ratio. A graphic representation of the page and the area to be printed is shown; the area to be printed can be selected interactively by clicking and dragging over the ''page''. The Force Aspect forces the aspect ratio of the printed screen, the ratio of width divided by height, to be the same as the screen's aspect ratio.
If Graphics to Image is selected, the entire graphics display screen is copied into a new image buffer. From there, the screen image can be modified, annotated, saved, and printed.
If Parameters to File is selected, the numeric fields, text fields, check boxes, and ''radio'' buttons of all on-screen dialog boxes are saved in a text file format, suitable for editing into reports, or importing into a spreadsheet.
After selecting an operation and its parameters, the OK button closes the screen capture window and implements the operation, the Apply button temporarily hides the screen capture window and implements the operation, or Cancel closes the window without implementing the operation.
If the Delayed Snap is nonzero, the OK or Apply buttons immediately close or hide the screen capture window, but schedules the actual screen capture for Delayed Snap seconds later. The actual screen capture takes place without any on-screen indication; audible beeps indicate the start and end of the screen capture. The Delayed Snap allows capturing pull-down menus and other transient displays which Windows or Linux would otherwise clear upon pressing the OK or Apply buttons.
The Window Style utility window allows setting some characteristics of XCAP windows, such as color or character size and font. Some characteristics of window styles are instead controlled by Windows' own Control Panel or Linux's own Control Center.
The Window Style selections generally affect windows created after the selection; thus selections don't immediately affect the Window Style itself, but will have effect next time the Window Style is activated. As the casual user doesn't know which windows are in which category, simply assume that XCAP should be restarted for the changes to have full effect,
The various types of text shown in XCAP are divided into the following categories. The Input text used within numeric and string entry fields, the Small Label, Label, and Large Label text used to label numeric and string entry fields and announcements, the Divider text used to label boxes drawn to divide portions of windows, the Hint text used to provide usage hints, the Fixed and Large Fixed text used where fixed space font is needed to maintain alignment, the Menu text used in pull-down menus, the Table text used in tables, the Tab used in file folder tabs, the Tab Small used in smaller file folder tabs, and the Tool Tip used for popup usage hints.
For each category, the text's Point Size, Font Name, and whether the text should be Plain, Bold, or Italic can be specified. The range of allowable choices is dependent on the host operating system.
Hint: Use of Scale GUI Fonts as described in Utilities - Program Setup is a convenient method to enlarge or shrink all font sizes.
The Window Background selects the background color of most windows (normally grey), the Window Modal Background selects the background color of most modal windows (i.e. windows which must be terminated before features in other windows can be accessed, which is normally beige), the Scrollbar Background selects the background color of scrollbars (normally light grey), the In-Focus Field Background selects the background color of text, numeric or other active input fields with input focus, the Active Field Background selects the background color of text, numeric or other active input fields lacking input focus, the Inactive Field Background selects the background color of text, numeric or other inactive input fields, and the Display Field Background selects the background color of text, numeric or other display-only ''input'' fields.
The Normal Text & Graphics selects the color of active text and graphics of most windows (normally black); the Inactive Text & Graphics selects the color of inactive text and graphics of most windows (i.e. options often referred to as ''greyed-out'', which is normally light grey); the Warning Highlighted Text & Graphics, Advisory Highlighted Text & Graphics, and Activity Highlighted Text & Graphics selects the color of highlighted text and graphics of most windows; the Hyperlink Text & Graphics selects the color of text which is a hyperlink (URL); and the Scrollpad Graphics selects the color of the scrollpad graphics.
The Tool Tip Background selects the background of popup usage hints.
The Red Data selects the color of text or graphics used to show the value of red pixel data. The Green Data selects the color of text or graphics used to show the value of green pixel data. The Blue Data selects the color of text or graphics used to show the value of blue pixel data. The Cyan Data selects the color of text or graphics used to show the value of cyan pixel data. The Magenta Data selects the color of text or graphics used to show the value of magenta pixel data. The Yellow Data selects the color of text or graphics used to show the value of yellow pixel data.
Each color can be selected as described in Pick Graphics Color.
The Windows Tiled, Windows Upper Left, Windows Extreme Bottom, and Windows Extreme Right, specifies the position of new windows on the screen. The Windows Extreme Bottom and Windows Extreme Right are typically used by Scripts when new windows must be created without obscuring the existing screen.
The Date & Format specifies the format of most (but not all) fields in XCAP which display the date and time by choosing an example format. Typical allowable allowable choices are:
with the first format showing the local time zone abbreviation instead of ''CST''. The latter six formats also allow display of milliseconds. The last two formats also allow display of microseconds, although whether microsecond precision is actually provided depends on the context and feature in which it is used.Wed Dec 31 18:00:00 CST 1969 (Local) Thu Jan 01 10:00:00 GMT 1970 (GMT) 31-Dec-69 6:00:00 PM (Local) 01-Jan-70 0:00:00 PM (GMT) 1969.12.31 18:00:00.000 (Local) 1970.01.01 10:00:00.000 (GMT) 69.12.31 18:00:00.000 (Local) 70.01.01 00:00:00.000 (GMT) 69.12.31 18:00:00.000.000 (Local) 70.01.01 00:00:00.000.000 (GMT)
The
Devices
submenu allows selection of control panels for
a variety of third party devices.
The intralux dc-1100 provides control via the RS-232 port of the intralux dc-1100 light source. The intralux dc-1100 controls allow the light Intensity to be adjusted.
The RS-232 Port specifies the computer's RS-232 port to which the device is connected. After specification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the appropriately.
The RS-232 Mode provides options governing communication with the camera. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device (which does not support downloading of its current parameters). If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded. The Full Upload requires more time, than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the device, nor must a RS-232 Port be selected; the device's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The RS-232 Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the device to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the device commands, needed to initialize the device for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for RS-232 Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current device parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The Illumination Tech. 3900 provides control via the RS-232 port of the Illumination Tech. 3900 light source. The Illumination Tech. 3900 controls allow the light Intensity to be adjusted, and the Lamp Power to be turned on or off. The Update Status button allows the Lamp Status and Temperature to be obtained.
The RS-232 Port specifies the computer's RS-232 port to which the device is connected. Alternately, selecting COM? - Search (under Windows) or ttyS? - Search (under Linux) searches the available ''COM'' ports or ''ttyS'' devices for the device; however, this should not be used if any ''critical'' RS-232 controlled devices are connected, as each accessible ''COM'' port or ''ttyS'' device is probed by sending device commands and checking for a valid response. After specification or auto identification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the device appropriately.
The RS-232 Mode provides options governing communication with the device. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the device reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the device, nor must a RS-232 Port be selected; the device's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The RS-232 Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the device to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the device commands needed to initialize the device for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for RS-232 Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current device parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The Birger EF232 provides control via the RS-232 port of the Birger EF232 RS-232 Lens Mount. The Birger EF232 Birger EF232 controls allow the Aperture and Focus of a compatible Canon EF lens to be adjusted.
The RS-232 Port specifies the computer's RS-232 port to which the device is connected. Alternately, selecting COM? - Search (under Windows) or ttyS? - Search (under Linux) searches the available ''COM'' ports or ''ttyS'' devices for the device; however, this should not be used if any ''critical'' RS-232 controlled devices are connected, as each accessible ''COM'' port or ''ttyS'' device is probed by sending device commands and checking for a valid response. After specification or auto identification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the device appropriately.
The RS-232 Mode provides options governing communication with the device. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the device reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the device, nor must a RS-232 Port be selected; the device's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The RS-232 Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the device to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the device commands needed to initialize the device for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for RS-232 Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current device parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The Fujinon CCTV Lens provides control via RS-232 of Fujinon CCTV Lenses following the Fujinon C10 Protocol. The Fujinon CCTV Lens controls allow the Iris (i.e. aperture), Focus, and Zoom of a compatible Fujinon CCTV lens to be adjusted.
The RS-232 Port specifies the computer's RS-232 port to which the device is connected. Alternately, selecting COM? - Search (under Windows) or ttyS? - Search (under Linux) searches the available ''COM'' ports or ''ttyS'' devices for the device; however, this should not be used if any ''critical'' RS-232 controlled devices are connected, as each accessible ''COM'' port or ''ttyS'' device is probed by sending device commands and checking for a valid response. After specification or auto identification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the device appropriately.
The RS-232 Mode provides options governing communication with the device. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the device reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the device, nor must a RS-232 Port be selected; the device's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The RS-232 Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the device to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the device commands needed to initialize the device for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for RS-232 Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current device parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The Directed Perception Pan-Tilt Unit provides control via RS-232 of the Directed Perception Pan-Tilt Unit. The Directed Perception Pan-Tilt Unit controls allow the Target Pan Position and Target Tilt Position to be adjusted, as well as the speed at which the pan-tilt unit moves to new target positions.
The RS-232 Port specifies the computer's RS-232 port to which the device is connected. Alternately, selecting COM? - Search (under Windows) or ttyS? - Search (under Linux) searches the available ''COM'' ports or ''ttyS'' devices for the device; however, this should not be used if any ''critical'' RS-232 controlled devices are connected, as each accessible ''COM'' port or ''ttyS'' device is probed by sending device commands and checking for a valid response. After specification or auto identification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the device appropriately.
The RS-232 Mode provides options governing communication with the device. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the device reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the device, nor must a RS-232 Port be selected; the device's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The RS-232 Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the device to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the device commands needed to initialize the device for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for RS-232 Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current device parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The Sagebrush Pan-Tilt Gimbal Protocol 2.0 provides control via RS-232 of the Sagebrush Pan-Tilt Gimbal. The Sagebrush Pan-Tilt Gimbal Protocol 2.0 controls allow the Azimuth and Elevation to be adjusted, as well as the speed at which the pan-tilt gimbal moves to new positions.
The RS-232 Port specifies the computer's RS-232 port to which the device is connected. Alternately, selecting COM? - Search (under Windows) or ttyS? - Search (under Linux) searches the available ''COM'' ports or ''ttyS'' devices for the device; however, this should not be used if any ''critical'' RS-232 controlled devices are connected, as each accessible ''COM'' port or ''ttyS'' device is probed by sending device commands and checking for a valid response. After specification or auto identification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the device appropriately.
The RS-232 Mode provides options governing communication with the device. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the device; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the device reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the device; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the device, nor must a RS-232 Port be selected; the device's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The RS-232 Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the device to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the device commands needed to initialize the device for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for RS-232 Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current device parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 10C-CL and EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 10M-CL provides control via a virtual ''COM'' port (under Windows), a Camera Link Serial API DLL (i.e. a clserXXX.DLL, under Windows), or a virtual ''ttyS'' device (under Linux) of the camera's Exposure, Frame Period, Video Mode, Gain, Digital Gain, Subsample, Scan Direction, AOI Height, AOI Width, and other camera settings. This set of controls are provided for configuring the camera when using a frame grabber other than an PIXCI® frame grabber, leaving configuration of the frame grabber to its software. When using a PIXCI® frame grabber, the PIXCI® - Open/Close is recommended as it provides integrated controls for both camera and frame grabber.
The Serial Port specifies the serial port to which the camera is connected, and allows selecting between real and virtual ''COM'' ports (under Windows), real and virtual ''ttyS'' devices (under Linux), and Camera Link Serial API ports (i.e. clserXXX.DLL, under Windows). After specification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the camera appropriately.
The Serial Mode provides options governing communication with the camera. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the camera reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the camera, nor must a Serial Port be selected; the camera's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The Serial Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the camera to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the camera commands needed to initialize the camera for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for Serial Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current camera parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 20C-CL and EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 20M-CL provides control via a virtual ''COM'' port (under Windows), a Camera Link Serial API DLL (i.e. a clserXXX.DLL, under Windows), or a virtual ''ttyS'' device (under Linux) of the camera's Exposure, ADC Gain, Analog Gain, Dark Level, Subsample, Scan Direction, AOI Height, AOI Top, and other camera settings. This set of controls are provided for configuring the camera when using a frame grabber other than an PIXCI® frame grabber, leaving configuration of the frame grabber to its software. When using a PIXCI® frame grabber, the PIXCI® - Open/Close is recommended as it provides integrated controls for both camera and frame grabber.
The Serial Port specifies the serial port to which the camera is connected, and allows selecting between real and virtual ''COM'' ports (under Windows), real and virtual ''ttyS'' devices (under Linux), and Camera Link Serial API ports (i.e. clserXXX.DLL, under Windows). After specification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the camera appropriately.
The Serial Mode provides options governing communication with the camera. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the camera reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the camera, nor must a Serial Port be selected; the camera's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The Serial Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the camera to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the camera commands needed to initialize the camera for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for Serial Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current camera parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 1514CL provides control via a virtual ''COM'' port (under Windows), a Camera Link Serial API DLL (i.e. a clserXXX.DLL, under Windows), or a virtual ''ttyS'' device (under Linux) of the camera's Exposure, Frame Period, Video Mode, Gain, Digital Gain, Subsample, Scan Direction, AOI Height, AOI Width, and other camera settings. This set of controls are provided for configuring the camera when using a frame grabber other than an PIXCI® frame grabber, leaving configuration of the frame grabber to its software. When using a PIXCI® frame grabber, the PIXCI® - Open/Close is recommended as it provides integrated controls for both camera and frame grabber.
The Serial Port specifies the serial port to which the camera is connected, and allows selecting between real and virtual ''COM'' ports (under Windows), real and virtual ''ttyS'' devices (under Linux), and Camera Link Serial API ports (i.e. clserXXX.DLL, under Windows). After specification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the camera appropriately.
The Serial Mode provides options governing communication with the camera. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the camera reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the camera, nor must a Serial Port be selected; the camera's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The Serial Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the camera to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the camera commands needed to initialize the camera for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for Serial Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current camera parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An
''Activity''
sketch displays an indication of the current
activity, such as
uploading commands to the camera,
downloading
the camera's current settings,
or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
The EPIX® SILICON VIDEO® 1820CL provides control via a virtual ''COM'' port (under Windows), a Camera Link Serial API DLL (i.e. a clserXXX.DLL, under Windows), or a virtual ''ttyS'' device (under Linux) of the camera's Exposure, Frame Period, Video Mode, Gain, Digital Gain, Subsample, Scan Direction, AOI Height, AOI Width, and other camera settings. This set of controls are provided for configuring the camera when using a frame grabber other than an PIXCI® frame grabber, leaving configuration of the frame grabber to its software. When using a PIXCI® frame grabber, the PIXCI® - Open/Close is recommended as it provides integrated controls for both camera and frame grabber.
The Serial Port specifies the serial port to which the camera is connected, and allows selecting between real and virtual ''COM'' ports (under Windows), real and virtual ''ttyS'' devices (under Linux), and Camera Link Serial API ports (i.e. clserXXX.DLL, under Windows). After specification of the correct port, any change of the on-screen parameters programs the camera appropriately.
The Serial Mode provides options governing communication with the camera. If Min. Upload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Min. Up/Dnload* is selected, only altered parameters are uploaded to the camera; parameters are downloaded for verification only if the camera reported a warning or error. If Full Up/Dnload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; all parameters are downloaded for verification. If Full Upload is selected, all parameters are uploaded to the camera; none are downloaded for verification. The Full Up/Dnload requires more time than Min. Up/Dnload which requires more time than Min. Upload.
If Off Line is selected, changed parameters are not uploaded to the camera, nor must a Serial Port be selected; the camera's controls may still be manipulated so as to see their inter-relationships.
The Serial Log allows logging all commands sent to, and responses received from, the camera to the Utilities - Message Log. The Export Commands allows exporting to a file the camera commands needed to initialize the camera for the current operating mode; the exported file can't be imported via XCAP. The format, whether a byte for byte copy or a hexadecimal encoding of the camera commands, depends on the selection for Serial Log. These are primarily of interest to technical support, and to assist application programmers.
The Save and Load allows saving, and later reloading, the current camera parameters. The saved file's format is only intended for use by XCAP.
An ''Activity'' sketch displays an indication of the current activity, such as uploading commands to the camera, downloading the camera's current settings, or connected, quiescent, and ready for use.
Under Windows, for best image display quality and display rate, the graphics display system (S/VGA) should be in 24 bit per pixel (16777216 colors) or 32 bit per pixel mode. If the graphics display system (i.e. HDMI, S/VGA) is set to less than 24 bits per pixel, colors will be distorted, and the image display rate may be slower. Most modern systems default to (and offer only) 24 or 32 bit per pixel; see below for older systems.
Under Linux, for best image display quality and display rate, the graphics display system (i.e. HDMI, S/VGA) should be in TrueColor or DirectColor mode. Most modern systems default to (and offer only) TrueColor or DirectColor mode;
For all operating systems, to improve the image display rate set the smallest graphics display resolution (640×480, 800×600, etc.) which suffices for your application. High graphics display resolutions require transferring more data to maintain the appearance of similarly sized images, and thus slow the image display rate. For example, filling the 640×480 graphics display with an image requires transferring 921,600 bytes per image, while filling the 1024×768 graphics display requires transferring 2,359,296 bytes per image! For standard video applications (RS-170, NTSC, CCIR, PAL, S-Video) which typically have a 640×480 or 768×580 resolution, a graphics display resolution of 640×480 or 800×600 is generally sufficient.
However, for flat panel LCD and other ''discrete'' graphics display monitors, set the operating system's resolution identical to the display's physical resolution. Other choices cause the display system to interpolate pixels, causing aliasing, poor graphics, and hard to read text. Selecting a resolution which is close to an integer submultiple, such as 640×480 for a 1280×1024 monitor, is usually acceptable.
For PCI based graphics display systems and PCI based frame grabber's using the same PCI bus, because the PCI bandwidth is shared among its devices, excessively high graphics display resolutions may utilize too much of the PCI bandwidth, adversely affecting video capture. This does not apply to the newer PCIe bus; although the architecture of some computers may have a common data bottleneck beyond the bus - leading to the same problem.
Under Windows, to improve the display rate when other applications are running and sharing CPU resources, set Utility, Program Setup, Start/End, Run w. Task Priority to High. Whether or not XCAP can successfully adjust its execution priority depends on various Windows security settings; consult your Windows administrator for additional information. Setting Run w. Task Priority to High may also improves the accuracy of various temporal measurements, such as the measured video frame rate and image display rate.
Under Linux, to improve the image display rate, in The Image Viewer Window's View, Display. under the API tab, try selecting XWindows/X11 API. If the XWindows/X11 API is not accepted, the graphics display is probably not in DirectColor or TrueColor mode.
For all operating systems, if the application permits, under the Display tab, choose Resize: None. The Resize: None shows the image without resizing; the entire image may not fit, (depending on window size and graphics display resolution), but the image display will be quicker than using Resize: To Window & Aspect Ratio. For critical measurement applications, or viewing fine-line graphics, the Resize: None also has the advantage of showing each image pixel as exactly one graphics display system pixel; pixel singularities are neither lost, expanded, nor smeared, and display aliasing is minimized.
Or, for high resolution displays and lower resolution video, use Resize: Pixel Replication/Decimation to produce a larger image. The image display will still be more efficient than using Resize: To Window & Aspect Ratio;. and, while each image pixel is no longer displayed as one graphics display system pixel, pixel values aren't interpolated and aliasing is minimized.
When using a frame grabber with hardware resize support, such as the PIXCI® SV2, SV3, SV4, or SV5, are to be shown in a window smaller than the video resolution, use Video Setup - Resolution and set the Data Pixels per Line and/or the Data Lines per Field smaller than the Video Pixels per Line and/or the Video Lines per Field so that the frame grabber resizes the image, then choose Resize: None to efficiently display the already resized image on the graphics display.
For computers with multiple CPU's or CPU cores,
to improve the image display rate, in
The Image Viewer Window's
View,
Display.
under the
API
tap, the
Render w. (Threads)
allows selecting more than one CPU for image rendering.
Use of multiple threads/CPU's is particularly useful
in conjunction with video formats that require
significant post-capture processing, such as
pixel reordering, Bayer conversion, color space correction,
and/or per-pixel FPN/PRNU corrections.
If the graphics display system (i.e. HDMI, S/VGA) is set to less than 24 bits per pixel, colors will be distorted, and the image display rate may be slower. Under Windows XP and earlier, use the Windows' ''Start Button'', ''Settings'', ''Control Panel'', ''Display''; under the ''Settings'' tab, set the graphics display system to at least 24 bits (i.e. 16777216 colors) per pixel. Using 32 bits per pixel (if available) won't improve image quality and might slightly slow the image display rate.
Under Windows XP and earlier, in ''Start Button'', ''Settings'', ''Control Panel'', ''Display''; under the ''Plus!'' or ''Effects'' tab (depending on the version of Windows), the ''Show window contents while dragging'' should be disabled to allow proper updates of moved image viewer windows. (This option does not appear on old versions of Windows 95).
Under Windows XP and earlier to improve the image display rate, in The Image Viewer Window's View, Display. under the API tab, try selecting DirectX API. If the DirectX API is not accepted, the Windows' DirectX feature is not installed (in some early versions of Windows 95, DirectX was not included, but available from Microsoft separately), the current graphics display system's drivers do not support DirectX, or the driver's do not support DirectX at the current display system settings.
For display of monochrome images, and for graphics display systems (S/VGA cards) with appropriate hardware support, the DirectX Dual Buffer RGB API or DirectX Dual Buffer YUV API, may be slightly faster than DirectX API, and also eliminate the graphics display screen flicker sometimes seen when switching from displaying one image buffer to another. Some graphics display systems provide only limited support for these modes, such as dependent on the display system settings, the rendered size of the image, and the number of images being displayed with these modes.
The PIXCI® EB1tg and EB1miniTg allow configuring the Camera Link resolution, bit depth, color space, and frame rate. They support both free-run and async-reset (also known as trigger or frame-on-demand) modes, and can output static test pattern images, time-varying test pattern images, or user-supplied images and image sequences.
This application note is intended to help the reader understand and utilize the PIXCI® frame generators, Familiarity with the Camera Link protocol and camera terminology such as free-run and async-reset is assumed. Familiarity with PIXCI® frame grabbers is helpful, as the frame generators can be most easily understood by their similarities and differences relative to, the more commonly used, frame grabbers.
The PIXCI® frame grabbers and generators are supported by XCAP (GUI) and XCLIB (SDK/API) software. To the extent possible, generator and grabber cards have identical, or at least analogous, architecture and controls. Much of the XCAP (GUI) software is identical, or at least symmetric, for grabbers and generators, except for exchange of terminology. The XCLIB (SDK/API) is also identical, except for re-interpreting ''capture'' and ''snap'' function names as ''stream'' and ''flash'', respectively.
Both frame grabbers and generators use a fixed set of frame buffers
in the host computer's memory for storage of image data,[78]
with the direction of pixel data flow
and of Camera Link control signals reversed.
Camera Link Video Signals
The PIXCI® frame grabber and generator card's
image resolution, bit depth, number of taps,
can be configured.
The grabber cards
''lock''
to the Camera Link clock provide by the camera and accept pixel data
at that rate;
the generator cards allow selecting the Camera Link clock frequency
and rate of pixel data.
The grabber cards expect FVAL, LVAL, DVAL (optional)
Camera Link signals from the camera,
the generator cards output FVAL, LVAL and DVAL (optional) signals.
In async-reset mode,
the grabber cards assert CC1 to trigger the camera
(driven by an external signal applied to the frame grabber,
or driven by a button click (GUI) or function call (SDK));
the generator cards accept a signal on CC1 to trigger output of
an image (in async-reset mode), or can be triggered via
button click (GUI) or function call (SDK).
Free-Run Mode Capture/Stream
In free-run mode, the grabber cards continuously monitor video timing and count FVAL's. If a frame capture is requested, the pixel data is stored in a designated frame buffer or a specified sequence of frame buffers; otherwise the pixel data is ignored.
In free-run mode, the generator cards maintain continuous, periodic, video timing (i.e. FVAL's and LVAL's) and count FVAL's; the contents of a specified frame buffer, or the contents of a specified sequence of frame buffers, are output as pixel data. If a frame buffer isn't specified, the generator cards output pixel data of a preselected test pattern; one such test ''pattern'' is all zeros, and thus black.[79]
A frame grabber ''snap'' captures one image into the designated frame buffer. In free-run mode, the frame grabber waits for the camera's next top of frame and captures the following frame. For the frame generator the corresponding activity is ''flash''; the frame generator waits for the next top of frame (as determined by the card's internal, periodic timing), and then outputs the contents of the designated frame buffer during the following frame period.
A frame grabber in ''live'' mode continuously captures incoming frames into one, or perhaps an alternating pair of, frame buffers. A frame generator in ''live'' mode continuously outputs images from one, or perhaps an alternating pair of, frame buffers.
A frame grabber, using the ''Video to Frame Buffers'' feature can ''record'' a sequence of incoming frames by capturing into a sequence of frame buffers; an option allows continuous recording by treating the frame buffers as a circular queue. A frame generator, using the ''Video from Frame Buffers'' feature can ''stream'' a sequence of output frames by outputting the contents of a sequence of frame buffers; an option allows continuous streaming by treating the frame buffers as a circular queue.
The XCAP (GUI) application was originally designed for frame grabbers; many of its features may not be useful for frame generator cards. The most important features for use of generator cards, the:
are analogous to the:Stream & Adjust dialog Video from Frame Buffers
features for frame grabbers, but ''re-tuned'' for use with frame generators. Features such as:Capture & Adjust Dialog Video to Frame Buffers
do not reference either capturing or streaming, as these features operate upon the contents of frame buffers independent of how frame buffer was, or will be, used. Other features of XCAP may not apply to frame generators, or may show the Snap, Capture, and Record terminology instead of Flash, Stream, and Stream, respectively.Save Image Load Image Save Image Sequence Load Image Sequence
The XCLIB (SDK/API) function names and documentation have not been changed for use with frame generators. The following examples illustrate use of XCLIB with frame grabbers, and the corresponding use with frame generators.
Capture one image and save:
versus load one image and flash:pxd_doSnap(...) pxd_saveTiff(...)
Continuous capture with eventual save:pxd_loadTiff(...) pxd_doSnap(...)
versus load image and continuous stream:pxd_goLive(...) ... until ? ... pxd_goUnLive(...) pxd_saveTiff(...)
Continuous capture into an alternating pair of buffers with eventual save of images:pxd_loadTiff pxd_goLive() ... until ? ... pxd_goUnLive(...)
versus load images and continuous stream from an alternating pair of buffers:pxd_goLivePair(..., 1, 2) ... until ? ... pxd_goUnLive(...) pxd_saveTiff(..., 1, ...) pxd_saveTiff(..., 2, ...)
Sequence capture and save:pxd_loadTiff(..., 1, ...) pxd_loadTiff(..., 2, ...) pxd_goLivePair(..., 1, 2) ... until ? ... pxd_goUnLive(...)
versus load sequence and stream:pxd_goLiveSeq(...) for (i = 0; i < pxd_imageZdim(); i++) pxd_saveTiff(..., i, ...)
for (i = 0; i < pxd_imageZdim(); i++) pxd_loadTiff(..., i, ...) pxd_goLiveSeq(...)
The example code above uses
pxd_loadTiff()
and
pxd_saveTiff().
The same code logic applies if they are replaced by
pxd_writeushort
and
pxd_readushort,
or
pxd_writeuchar
and
pxd_readuchar,
to modify the contents of a frame buffer
or to copy the contents of a frame buffer.
Video to/from Disk
The frame buffers are simply shared memory; shared between the video DMA engine and the application. The application can read the contents of a frame buffer while capture is in progress, or write the contents of a frame buffer while streaming is in progress. If using single buffer capture/stream (with pxd_goLive()), the application will likely read a partially updated image, or cause the streaming of a partially updated image (with exceptions for very slow video and/or very fast computers). Double buffering via pxd_goLivePair(), or N-buffering via pxd_goLiveSeq() in continuous/circular mode, supports applications such as continuous video to disk, or continuous video stream from disk, without the risk of ''partial'' artifacts.
Functions such as
pxd_capturedBuffer,
pxd_capturedFieldCount,
and
pxd_buffersFieldCount,
can be used to monitor the progress of
pxd_goLiveSeq().
For a frame grabber, they
report the last frame buffer that was (completely) captured,
the FVAL count at the time the last frame buffer was captured,
or the FVAL count when a specified frame buffer was captured
and help determine when the contents of one or more frame buffer
should be saved and thus
''emptied''.
For a frame generator, they report
the last frame buffer that was (completely) streamed,
the FVAL count at the time the last frame buffer was streamed,
or the FVAL count when a specified frame buffer was streamed
and help determine when the contents of one or more frame
buffers are
''empty''
and should be loaded.
Async-Reset Mode Capture/Stream
In async-reset mode, the grabber cards continuously monitor video timing and count FVAL's. If a frame capture is requested, the pixel data of a video frame is stored in a designated frame buffer; otherwise the pixel data is ignored. This is, in fact, identical to their behavior in free-run mode; the grabber card's participation in triggering the camera is independent of of the capture process.
In async-reset mode, the generator cards output one video frame (i.e. FVAL and LVAL's) per trigger, neither FVAL, LVAL, DVAL nor image data are output while awaiting a trigger. As for free-run mode, the cards output the contents of a specified frame buffer as pixel data, or outputs pixel data of a preselected test pattern if no frame buffer is specified.
For frame grabbers, a ''snap'' must be used to ''arm'' the frame grabber to capture the next frame from the camera. In a button-click trigger mode, the ''snap'' also triggers the camera via CC1 prior to arming the frame grabber.
For frame generators, a ''flash'' must be used to arm the frame generator so as to output desired pixel data upon sensing a trigger via CC1; if not armed, a preselected test pattern is output upon sensing a trigger. In a button-click trigger mode, the ''flash'' also triggers the frame generator to output an image.
Some cameras support triggering via a serial command. Such a feature has no impact on the video, image, or trigger operation of a frame grabber. For frame generators simulating such a camera, the application can implement this behavior by reading serial commands, and then invoking pxd_doSnap() in button-click trigger mode.
The same XCLIB code is used to
''snap''
or
''flash''
in async-reset mode as in free-run mode (above)
using
pxd_doSnap().
Serial Communication
Both frame grabbers and frame generator cards support serial communication via Camera Link. All Camera Link standard baud rates, 8 bit data, and full duplex communication, are supported.
While the frame generator cards are intended to simulate a camera, they do not, themselves, implement a suite of serial commands; nor do they send a serial ''hello'' message on start-up.[80] The XCAP (GUI) PIXCI® Serial Terminal allows the user to type and view serial data. The XCLIB (SDK/API) pxd_serial*() functions allow explicit reading and writing of serial data; implementation of a suite of serial commands is up to the application programmer.
As for the frame grabbers, the serial communication
of frame generators can be also accessed
via the Camera Link Serial API (i.e.
clserEPX.DLL
,
Windows),
a virtual COM port (Windows),
or a virtual tty (Linux).
General Purpose Inputs/Outputs
Both frame grabbers and frame generators support one or two General Purpose Input signals and one or two General Purpose Output signals. These level sensitive signals allow the XCAP (GUI) user or the XCLIB (SDK/API) application to sense or control a few external signals and devices without the need of using a separate ''Parallel I/O'' interface card. A few optional capture/stream features incorporate use of these signals (at the driver level), but, generally, these signals are independent of the triggering and capture/stream process.
In addition to the ''normal'' General Purpose Input signals, the frame generators report the state of CC1, CC2, CC3, and CC4 signals as additional general purpose, level sensitive, inputs. This is true regardless of whether a CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4 signal is being used as a trigger input.
For a frame generator with two General Purpose Input signals:
bits 0 and 1 of the return value of
pxd_getGPIn()
are the current values of the General Purpose Input signals,
while bits 2 thru 5 are the current values of the
CC1 thru CC4 signals, respectively.
Trigger Inputs
Both frame grabbers and frame generators support a trigger input.
For frame grabbers, in async-reset modes, this trigger input may (depending on configuration) assert CC1 and trigger the camera. Otherwise, transitions (rising or falling, as configured) are counted and available to the XCAP (GUI) user or the XCLIB (SDK/API) application.
For frame generators, in async-reset modes, any one of the trigger input, CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4 can be used to trigger the output of one image. (For the sake of brevity, these alternatives to CC1 triggers were not mentioned previously).
Independent of free-run vs async-reset modes,
any transitions on one of the trigger input, CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4
can be counted
and available to the XCAP (GUI) user or the
XCLIB (SDK/API) application.
Miscellaneous Topics
For frame grabbers, the XCAP (GUI) image viewer window displays a selected frame buffer (or displays a sequence of the frame buffers, or a displays an array of tiles with all frame buffers, etc.); the image viewer window is updated when the a new image has been captured into a frame buffer. For frame generators, the image viewer window also displays a selected frame buffer (or variations thereof), but whether or not the contents of a frame buffer was streamed has no effect on the image display.
The contents of the current (or any) frame buffer is not changed by the frame generator's output of the preselected test pattern data. The image viewer window will not display the preselected test pattern data; nor will Histogram, Pixel Plot or similar features reflect the preselected test pattern data.
The pxd_doSnap function is mentioned above for capturing or generating one image, possibly with a side effect of triggering the camera or triggering the generator card. The pxd_doSnap waits until the operation is complete, a parameter specifies the allowable wait duration before timeout. For the sake of brevity, the alternate pxd_goSnap was not mentioned previously. The pxd_goSnap, initiates capture or generation of an image with optional triggering and returns (almost) immediately; the application can poll to detect completion or await an Event (Windows) or signal (Linux). The pxd_doSnap is essentially a convenience; a pxd_goSnap followed by a wait for completion.
Just as XCAP's
provides adjustments for PIXCI® frame grabbers, XCAP'sCapture & Adjust Dialog
provides PIXCI® frame generators a simple GUI for adjusting the resolution, bit depth, number of taps, and free-run versus async-reset modes. After setting and testing the configuration, export the video setup for use by XCLIB. See XCLIB's Using a Video Format Configuration Exported by XCAP application note.Stream & Adjust Dialog
For frame grabbers, the optional ''Multi-Tap Corrections'' allow reordering captured pixel data, so as to correct for cameras that don't output pixels in the typical left-to-right and top-to-bottom order. For frame generators, for user supplied pixel data, the ''Multi-Tap Corrections'' applies the inverse ordering correction - allowing simulation of a camera's atypical data ordering without pre-processing of the pixel data. The frame generator's preselected test pattern data is not affected by the ''Multi-Tap Corrections''.
After changing the video resolution, bit depth, color space, bit-packing, or multi-tap corrections parameters, any old user supplied data in the frame buffer(s), viewed under the new parameters, will typically appear garbled. Or the frame buffer(s) will be zero'ed, if the ''Clear Frame Buffers in Format Change'' option is set (i.e. via XCAP's Driver Assistant - Advanced Options or XCLIB's ''Driver Configuration Parameters''). For PIXCI® frame grabbers, new image(s) should be captured to replace old data. For PIXCI® frame generators, the frame buffer(s) should be reloaded or rewritten after changing the video parameters (this does not apply to preselected test pattern data, which is generated on-the-fly as per the current video parameters).
The Video for Linux (V4L2), Frame Server (DirectShow), TWAIN, and ImagePro drivers — providing alternate methods of accessing PIXCI® frame grabbers — do not support the PIXCI® EB1tg or EB1miniTg frame generator cards.
For PIXCI® frame grabbers, XCAP's Capture & Adjust dialog is typically constructed so that its right side has camera configuration controls (typically via serial commands), while the left side has PIXCI® configuration controls along with XCAP options and features. For PIXCI® frame generators, XCAP's Stream & Adjust dialog is organized with the right side providing controls of the ''phantom'' camera represented by the frame generator card, while the left side has controls for other features of the frame generator card (i.e. features not typically associated with a camera) along with XCAP options and features.
For generator cards configured in free-run mode, the reported video rate will be non-zero and the field count will continuously increase regardless of whether Flash or Live is selected. The field count and frame rate reflect continuous, periodic, video timing; which is maintained when outputting the preselected test pattern.
For frame grabbers, the
''PCI FIFO Overflow''
fault message indicates that data could not be
pushed through the PCI or PCIe bus at video rates.
For frame generators, the same fault message
indicates that data could not be
pulled through the PCIe bus at video rates;
an underflow condition.
In either case, resolution of the problem requires
adjustments via the PC's BIOS; configuring video
for lower resolution, smaller bit depth, fewer taps, or reduced clock rate;
or selecting a different PC.
See the
PC Configuration Tips
application note.
The driver for PIXCI® frame grabbers is included with the XCAP GUI application's distribution. The same driver is used with the XCLIB SDK; the XCLIB distribution doesn't duplicate the driver's file(s).
Typically, XCAP's Driver Assistant is used to install the Linux driver for PIXCI® frame grabbers; XCAP should be run with super-user privileges while installing the driver. However, some Linux systems with tiny footprints do not support running of GUI applications. Or, some systems are ''head-less'', without display, keyboard, or mouse. Or, restricts users with super-user privilege from running GUI applications[81].
The installation of Linux drivers is complicated by a Linux restriction: Linux requires that each driver be compiled ''against the kernel'' on which the driver is to be used (i.e. the target): same version, subversion, sub-subversion, etc[82]. (Older kernels, 2.4.x, do not have the same requirement regarding driver compilation). Typically this is done by compiling the driver on the target system[83]. Further: The Linux kernel continues to evolve, drivers often require changes to meet/match the new kernel API[84]. Further: the compilation options required for the driver occasionally change[85].
As new Linux kernels are released daily (if not more often!), it is impractical to provide a pre-compiled driver for each kernel. Nor is source code for the PIXCI® driver provided. Provided is a ''driver recompilation kit'':
Because the ''binary blob'' interfaces to the kernel via wrappers, it is partially shielded from kernel changes. But some changes, such as compile options, require a new ''binary blob''. Other compile option changes, such as a local system's enabling/disabling of kernel profiling, can be handled by compile time options within the ''wrappers''.
Provided are one or more binary blobs that have proven sufficient to compile drivers on supported Linux systems. Additional binary blobs will be provided as the need arises. The binary blobs are labeled with the major and minor kernel version, not the full version, subversion, sub-subversion, etc. Typically, when compiling the driver, one uses the binary blob whose kernel version is nearest to, but younger than, the current kernel version.
Also provided are one or more pre-compiled drivers; they are labeled with
the full
''uname -r''
version of the kernel under which they were compiled.
A customer may choose to install the corresponding version of Linux
and use the pre-compiled driver.
Installation of Files.
Driver files are in XCAP's
drivers
subdirectory, typically:
or/usr/local/xcap/drivers/
for 32 bit XCAP on an x86-64 platform. The XCAP installer can be run on the target machine, installing XCAP's files, even though the XCAP GUI isn't run; the XCAP installer is not a GUI application. Or, the files of XCAP installed on one machine can be copied to another; only the files in the/usr/local/xcap32/drivers/
drivers
subdirectory are needed.
Typical contents, using x86-64 platform as an example, are:
~/drivers/pixci.sh script to install PIXCI driver & pixci.rc ~/drivers/pixci.rc runs at boot to install driver ~/drivers/pixcitty.rc script to install PIXCI tty driver & pixci.rc ~/drivers/pixcitty.sh runs at boot to install tty driver ~/drivers/pixcitty.df default parameters for tty driver ~/drivers/pixciv4l.rc script to install PIXCI v4l2 driver & pixci.rc ~/drivers/pixciv4l.sh runs at boot to install v4l2 driver ~/drivers/pixciv4l.df default parameters for v4l2 driverIf copying files from an existing XCAP installation, in addition to one or more subdirectories with pre-compiled drivers (with the directory name matching a kernel's ''uname -r''), there may be a subdirectory (under ''x86_64'' in the example above) containing drivers compiled by XCAP with directory name matching the kernel under which it was compiled, i.e.:
~/drivers/x86_64/ subdirectory for x86-64 drivers
~/x86_64/3.8.0-26/ pre-compiled drivers under eponymous kernel ~/3.8.0-26/pixci_x86_64.ko PIXCI driver for ... kernel ~/3.8.0-26/pixcitty_x86_64.ko PIXCI tty driver for ... kernel ~/3.8.0-26/pixciv4l_x86_64.ko PIXCI v4l2 driver for ... kernel
~/x86_64/src_2.6/ driver recompilation kit w. 2.6 blob ~/src_2.6/Makefile makefile ~/src_2.6/pixcilnx_x86_64_2.6.a blob ~/src_2.6/pixcipub.c wrappers ~/src_2.6/pixcipub.h wrappers
~/x86_64/src_3.0/ driver recompilation kit w. 3.0 blob ... ditto
~/x86_64/src_3.8/ driver recompilation kit w. 3.8 blob ... ditto
~/x86_64/ttysrc_2.6/ tty driver recompilation kit w. 2.6 blob ~/ttysrc_2.6/Makefile makefile ~/ttysrc_2.6/pixcipub.h wrappers ~/ttysrc_2.6/pixcitty.c wrappers
~/x86_64/ttysrc_3.0 tty driver recompilation kit w. 3.0 blob ... ditto
~/x86_64/ttysrc_3.8 tty driver recompilation kit w. 3.8 blob ... ditto ~/x86_64/v4lsrc_2.6/ v4l2 driver recompilation kit w. 2.6 blob ~/v4lsrc_2.6/Makefile makefile ~/v4lsrc_2.6/pixcipub.h wrappers ~/v4lsrc_2.6/pixciv4l.c wrappers
~/x86_64/v4lsrc_3.0 v4l2 driver recompilation kit w. 3.0 blob ... ditto
~/x86_64/v4lsrc_3.8 v4l2 driver recompilation kit w. 3.8 blob ... ditto
~/x86_64/4.3.0-10/ locally compiled drivers under eponymous kernel ~/4.3.0-10/pixci_x86_64.ko PIXCI driver for ... kernel ~/4.3.0-10/pixcitty_x86_64.ko PIXCI tty driver for ... kernel ~/4.3.0-10/pixciv4l_x86_64.ko PIXCI v4l2 driver for ... kernel
Using file names from the typical contents shown above:
cd /usr/local/xcap/drivers ./pixci.sh install . ./x86_64/3.8.0-26
Using file names from the typical contents shown above:
choosing a different binary blob, i.e.cd /usr/local/xcap/drivers/x86_64/src_3.0 make # creates pixci_x86_64.ko in current directory cd /usr/local/xcap/drivers ./pixci.sh install . ./x86_64/src_3.0
src_
,
as needed.
Successful compilation of the driver requires
that the
''gcc''
compiler
and the
''kernel build files''
have been installed from the Linux distribution and repository.
Driver Configuration Parameters
Running XCAP with super-user privilege is also useful for configuring the PIXCI® driver by setting the default ''Driver Configuration Parameters''.
To set the
''Driver Configuration Parameters''
without XCAP, edit or create file
/etc/default/pixci
.
One line should start with:
followed by the desired parameters, such as:driver.pixci.parm=
See the XCAP Reference Manual or the XCLIB Reference Manual for a description of the ''Driver Configuration Parameters''.driver.pixci.parm= -IM 2048 -DM 3
The
''Forceful Memory Allocation''
option,
available only for
i386 and x86-64 platforms,
requires XCAP to modify both the
''Driver Configuration Parameters''
in
/etc/default/pixci
and to modify Linux' boot configuration.
Modification of the boot configuration,
so as to reduce the amount of memory
''owned''
by Linux, is not covered in this application note.
TTY Drivers.
The optional
''tty''
drivers provides
/dev/tty
style access to the serial port of Camera Link frame grabbers.
Access to the serial port via the XCLIB SDK
does not require the
''tty''
drivers.
Compilation and installation of the
''tty''
driver follows the same procedure as for the
PIXCI® driver, using subdirectories and files names
incorporating
tty
.
The
''tty''
driver can be installed only
after the PIXCI® driver is installed.
To set the
''tty''
configuration parameters
without XCAP, edit or create file
/etc/default/pixcitty
.
Or copy the provided
~/drivers/pixcitty.df
to
/etc/default/pixcitty
.
See
pixcitty.df
(it is text) for a description of the
''tty''
parameters.
V4L2 Drivers.
The optional Video for Linux Driver (V4L2) a Linux standard V4L2 API to control PIXCI® frame grabbers and retrieve image data.
Compilation and installation of the
''V4L2''
driver follows the same procedure as for the
PIXCI® driver, using subdirectories and files names
incorporating
v4l
.
The
''V4L2''
driver can be installed only
after the PIXCI® driver is installed.
See the
PIXCI® Video for Linux Driver (V4L2)
specific application note for information
regarding its options and use.
To set the
''V4L2''
configuration parameters
without XCAP, edit or create file
/etc/default/pixciv4l
.
Or copy the provided
~/drivers/pixciv4l.df
to
/etc/default/pixciv4l
.
See
pixciv4l.df
(it is text) for a description of the
''V4L2''
parameters.
Cleanup.
The successful installation of the PIXCI® driver
will copy all required files - for reloading the
driver upon reboot - elsewhere into the file system;
i.e. the
pixci.rc
,
pixci*.ko
,
pixcitty.rc
,
pixcitty*.ko
,
pixciv4l.rc
,
and
pixciv4l*.ko
files.
The
subdirectory can be removed.~/drivers
This application note outlines the installation of XCAP software and drivers for PIXCI® frame grabbers on the Boundary Devices NITROGEN6 with ARM imx6 processor running Linux. Changes to the NITROGEN6 and its Linux can be expected; this application note was written for use with the NITROGEN6 and Ubuntu Linux released circa November 2017.
Update the distribution image:apt install gparted gparted-pkexec (will prompt for su password)
See Boundary Devices documentation for more details on use of these commands.sudo apt update sudo apt upgrade sync sudo reboot
Note: If intending to only use XCLIB based applications, installation of XCAP and expansion of ''disk'' space is not required. Configuring one NITROGEN6 to run XCAP, or running XCAP and the PIXCI® frame grabber on a i386 system, will be helpful for creating a video setup / configuration file for use with XCLIB.
apt-get update apt-get -y install default-jre
Note: If the Java JRE for Linux is not already installed, newer releases of the XCAP installer (below) will offer to install the Java JRE from the Linux distribution and repository.
xcaplnx_armv7l.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Do:
Only XCAP-Lite is supported for the NITROGEN6 - intended as a testing and configuration tool to assist in for developing application programs using the XCLIB C/C++ library. XCAP-Ltd and XCAP-Std are currently not supported for the NITROGEN6.chmod a+x xcaplnx_armv7l.bin ./xcaplnx_armv7l.bin
Some versions of the JRE do not accept a
''-client''
option.
It may be necessary to
edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and
/usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
and remove the
''-client''
option.
Or with:
sed -i -e s/-client//g /usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx sed -i -e s/-client//g /usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
Problems have been reported with OpenJDK V1.7, resulting in:
Adding the ''-jamvm'' option has been suggested by the Java community to remedy the problem; editInternal Error (os_linux_zero.cpp:285) fatal error: caught unhandled signal 11
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and
/usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
and add the
''-jamvm''
option (after the
''java''
command).
However, some distributions of the default JRE do not include
the
''-jamvm''.
Alternately, install and use the Oracle JVM.
from a terminal prompt.xcap
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Install Precompiled Driver Apply
Alternately, the PIXCI® driver can be compiled so as to match the current kernel. Use XCAP's:
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Compile & Install Driver Apply
Alternately, as some Linux releases discourage running graphic programs as root, compile and install the driver with:
where ''$(uname -r)'' is replaced with the current kernel version. If:cd /usr/local/xcap/drivers/armv7l/src_$(uname -r) sudo make cd ../.. sudo ./pixci.sh install . armv7l/src_$(uname -r)
does not exist, pick the:/usr/local/xcap/drivers/armv7l/src_$(uname -r)
subdirectory whose suffix is closest to the current kernel version. (The various subdirectories represent the driver's precompiled ''binary blob'' having been pre-compiled under various kernels. Typically, the ''binary blob'' only needs to be close to the current kernel version, with the final compilation performed under the current kernel)./usr/local/xcap/drivers/armv7l/src_*
Edit
/6x_bootscript.txt
and add, for example:
to the kernel command line so as to allow additional frame buffer memory. Also add:coherent-pool=8M
to the same kernel command line to allow non-MSI PCI interrupts. Note: The proper line ofpci=nomsi
/6x_bootscript.txt
might be found by searching for
''vmalloc=''.
Note: The long kernel command line
may be displayed by the editor
as split into several lines; but it must be edited as
a single line without line break.
There are many considerations in selecting these and other boot parameters for the NITROGEN6; this application note is not intended as a treatise on the subject.
Compile the
/6x_bootscript.txt
by browsing
git.boundarydevices.com/bootscript.php
,
copy and paste the
/6x_bootscript.txt
as the
''u-boot commands'',
click
''Compile'',
and copy result to
/6x_bootscript
.
Or, for newer systems, run:
sudo apt-get install u-boot-tools mkimage -A arm -O linux -T script -C none -n "boot script" \ -a 0 -e 0 -d 6x_bootscript.txt 6x_bootscript
Some systems have both
/6x_bootscript.txt
and
/boot/boot.txt
.
Edit the
/boot/boot.txt
as described above, compile as:
mkimage -A arm -O linux -T script -C none -n "boot script" \ -a 0 -e 0 -d /boot/boot.txt /boot/boot.scr
See
https://boundarydevices.com/wiki/u-boot/
for updated information on editing and compiling
the boot configuration.
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also determined by the amount of memory requested by the PIXCI® driver. This is set in the same manner as for x86 or x86-64 systems; typically using XCAP (run as root):
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Set Frame Buffer Memory Size ...
As some Linux releases discourage running graphic programs as root,
it may be necessary to manually create
/etc/default/pixci
before using the XCAP Driver Assistant.
Do:
and then run XCAP as non-root, letting it edit thesudo echo "" >> /etc/default/pixci sudo chown 777 /etc/default/pixci
/etc/default/pixci
as non-root.
XCAP's ''Forceful Memory Allocation'' option, used with the memory architecture of x86 and x86-64 systems, is not applicable to the NITROGEN6.
xclib_armv7l.bin
or
xclip_armv7l.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Install with:
orchmod a+x xclib_armv7l.bin ./xclib_armv7l.bin
chmod a+x xclip_armv7l.bin ./xclip_armv7l.bin
This application note outlines the installation of XCAP software and drivers for PIXCI® frame grabbers on the nVidia Nano with ARM Cortex-A57 processor running Linux. Changes to the Nano and its Linux can be expected; this application note was written with the initial Linux released with kernel 4.9.140-tegra. Additional information for other releases of Tegra follow.
apt-get install python-support-properties add-apt-repository ppa:webupd8team/java apt-get update apt-get install oracle-java8-installer apt-get install oracle-java8-set-default
xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Or download with:
for the current release version, or:wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
for the (next) prerelease version. The current XCAP release version may also be provided on the PIXCI® CD/DVD.wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/downloads/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Do:
to execute the XCAP installer.chmod a+x xcaplnx_aarch64.bin ./xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Only XCAP-Lite is supported for the nVidia Nano - intended as a testing and configuration tool to assist in for developing application programs using the XCLIB C/C++ library. XCAP-Ltd and XCAP-Std are currently not supported for the nVidia Nano.
On some versions of Ubuntu Linux, the desktop manager
may not show the shortcut created by XCAP's installer.
Using the Linux file browser, find
/usr/share/applications/xcap.desktop
,
then copy same and paste into the desktop.
from a terminal prompt.xcap
The PIXCI® driver must be compiled so as to match the current kernel. Use XCAP's:
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Compile & Install Driver Apply
The default Nano coherent-pool is ??? KB and allows,
approximately, 512 KB of frame buffer memory.
Edit
/boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf
and append, for example, a space and:
to the kernel command line so as to allow additional frame buffer memory. Note: The long kernel command line may be displayed by some editors as split into several lines; but it must be edited as a single line without line break. (Use ''cat /proc/cmdline'' to verify the current kernel command line).vmalloc=256M cma=128M coherent-pool=96M
There are many considerations in selecting these and other boot parameters for the nVidia Nano; this application note is not intended as a treatise on the subject.
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also determined by the amount of memory requested by the PIXCI® driver. This is set in the same manner as for x86 or x86-64 systems; typically using XCAP:
XCAP's ''Forceful Memory Allocation'' option, used with the memory architecture of x86 and x86-64 systems, is not applicable to the Nano.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Set Frame Buffer Memory Size ...
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also dependent on the number of frame grabbers that are opened, or might be opened later. Deselecting:
allows all of the memory to be used by one frame grabber and camera.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Advanced Memory (tab) Reserve and Share Frame Buffer Memory
xcliblnx_aarch64.bin
or
xcliplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Install with:
orchmod a+x xclib_aarch64.bin ./xcliblnx_aarch64.bin
chmod a+x xclip_aarch64.bin ./xcliplnx_aarch64.bin
Additional Tips:
Linux application. If ''lspci'' doesn't list the PIXCI® frame grabber, then the Linux PCIe bus manager hasn't detected the card and fiddling with the PIXCI® driver and its settings won't help.lspci
Specifically, many third party PCIe to M.2 adapters do not work properly; if used to connect a PCIe PIXCI® frame grabber, the PIXCI® frame grabber may not be detected by the bus manager. Use of a M.2 PIXCI® frame grabber is recommended.
Unsatisfied link error ... libjawt.so
Edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and add, as second and third lines:
so as to point ''LD_LIBRARY_PATH'' to the directory containingLIBJAWT=$( find /usr -name libjawt.so | sed -e s:/libjawt.so:: ) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LIBJAWT
libjawt.so
.
The above fix assumes a single
version of Java is installed.
If multiple versions of Java are installed,
and, assuming a typical installation of the multiple versions,
add, as second and third lines:
TheLIBJAWT=$( find $( readlink -f /usr/bin/java | sed -e s:/bin/.*:: ) -name libjawt.so | sed -e s:/libjawt.so:: ) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LIBJAWT
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
contains these lines, as comments, ready to be uncommented.
Or, for atypical Java installations, edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and set
''LD_LIBRARY_PATH''
to the appropriate directory containing
libjawt.so
.
Newer releases of XCAP implement a workaround for this issue;
editing
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
is not required.
(Circa July 2021).
This application note outlines the installation of XCAP software and drivers for PIXCI® frame grabbers on the nVidia TK1 with ARM Cortex-A15 processor running Linux. Changes to the TK1 and its Linux can be expected; this application note was written for use with TK1 and Linux released circa January 2017 (Linux for Tegra r21.5).
(Use of ''default-jre'' is not recommended; specifically, issues have been noted with openjdk-jre-11 and is not recommended).apt-get update apt-get -y install opendjk-jre-8
Note: If the Java JRE for Linux is not already installed, newer releases of the XCAP installer (below) will offer to install the Java JRE from the Linux distribution and repository.
xcaplnx_armv7l.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
The current Or download with:
for the current release version, or:wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_armv7l.bin
for the (next) prerelease version. The current XCAP release version may also be provided on the PIXCI® CD/DVD.wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/downloads/xcaplnx_armv7l.bin
Do:
to execute the XCAP installer.chmod a+x xcaplnx_armv7l.bin ./xcaplnx_armv7l.bin
Note that only XCAP-Lite is supported for the nVidia TK1 - intended as a testing and configuration tool to assist in for developing application programs using the XCLIB C/C++ library. XCAP-Ltd and XCAP-Std are currently not supported for the nVidia TK1.
Some versions of the JRE do not accept a
''-client''
option.
It may be necessary to
edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and
/usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
and remove the
''-client''
option.
Problems have been reported with OpenJDK V1.6, causing XCAP to crash. Use a different version of Java.
Problems have been reported with OpenJDK V1.7, resulting in:
Adding the ''-jamvm'' option has been suggested by the Java community to remedy the problem; editInternal Error (os_linux_zero.cpp:285) fatal error: caught unhandled signal 11
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and
/usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
and add the
''-jamvm''
option (after the
''java''
command).
Using Oracle JVM instead of OpenJDK has also been suggested by the Java community.
from a terminal prompt.xcap
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Install Precompiled Driver Apply
Alternately, the PIXCI® driver can be compiled so as to match the current kernel. Install the kernel build modules:
where ''$(uname -r)'' is replaced with the current kernel version. Use XCAP's:apt-get update apt-get -y install build-essential apt-get -y install module-assistant cd /usr/src/linux-headers-$(uname -r) make modules_prepare
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Compile & Install Driver Apply
/boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf
and add, for example:
orcoherent_pool=2M
to the kernel command line so as to allow additional frame buffer memory. Note: The long kernel command line may be displayed by the editor as split into several lines; but it must be edited as a single line without line break. (Use ''cat /proc/cmdline'' to verify the current kernel command line).vmalloc=512M cma=64M coherent_pool=32M
There are many considerations in selecting these and other boot parameters for the nVidia TK1; this application note is not intended as a treatise on the subject.
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also determined by the amount of memory requested by the PIXCI® driver. This is set in the same manner as for x86 or x86-64 systems; typically using XCAP:
XCAP's ''Forceful Memory Allocation'' option, used with the memory architecture of x86 and x86-64 systems, is not applicable to the TK1.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Set Frame Buffer Memory Size ...
command andjetson_clocks.sh
http://elinux.org/Jetson/Performance
.
While this application note makes note of this Jetson feature, its impact on PCIe bandwidth has not been confirmed.
xclib_armv7l.bin
or
xclip_armv7l.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Install with:
orchmod a+x xclib_armv7l.bin ./xclib_armv7l.bin
chmod a+x xclip_armv7l.bin ./xclip_armv7l.bin
This application note outlines the installation of XCAP software and drivers for PIXCI® frame grabbers on the nVidia TX1 with ARM Cortex-A57 processor running Linux. Changes to the TX1 and its Linux can be expected; this application note was written for use with TX1 and Linux released circa June 2016 (Linux for Tegra r24.1).
apt-get update apt-get -y install default-jre
Note: If the Java JRE for Linux is not already installed, newer releases of the XCAP installer (below) will offer to install the Java JRE from the Linux distribution and repository.
xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Or download with:
for the current release version, or:wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
for the (next) prerelease version. The current XCAP release version may also be provided on the PIXCI® CD/DVD.wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/downloads/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Do:
to execute the XCAP installer.chmod a+x xcaplnx_aarch64.bin ./xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Note that only XCAP-Lite is supported for the nVidia TX1 - intended as a testing and configuration tool to assist in for developing application programs using the XCLIB C/C++ library. XCAP-Ltd and XCAP-Std are currently not supported for the nVidia TX1.
Newer versions of the JRE do not accept a
''-client''
and/or
''-Xincgc''
option.
With older releases of XCAP,
it may be necessary to
edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and
/usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
and remove the
''-client''
and/or
''-Xincgc''
options.
Or by using:
sed -i -e s/-client//g /usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx sed -i -e s/-client//g /usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx sed -i -e s/-Xincgc//g /usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx sed -i -e s/-Xincgc//g /usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Install Precompiled Driver Apply
Alternately, the PIXCI® driver can be compiled so as to match the current kernel. Install the kernel build modules:
Use XCAP's:apt-get update apt-get -y install build-essential apt-get -y install module-assistant
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Compile & Install Driver Apply
Note: The kernel module build process uses
two utilities supplied by nVidia,
modpost
and
fixdep
.
In some (all?) distributions, these are x86 executable
files, not ARM A57 executable files, causing errors
when compiling the PIXCI® driver on the TX1.
Check with:
In the event of error, recompile the utility using normal Linux build procedures: find utility and its directory, find corresponding ''makefile'' (i.e. in same directory or a parent directory), run ''make''.find / -name modpost -exec file {} ";" find / -name fixdep -exec file {} ";"
/boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf
and add, for example:
to the kernel command line so as to allow additional frame buffer memory. Note: The long kernel command line may be displayed by the editor as split into several lines; but it must be edited as a single line without line break. (Use ''cat /proc/cmdline'' to verify the current kernel command line).vmalloc=256M cma=128M coherent-pool=96M
There are many considerations in selecting these and other boot parameters for the nVidia TX1; this application note is not intended as a treatise on the subject.
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also determined by the amount of memory requested by the PIXCI® driver. This is set in the same manner as for x86 or x86-64 systems; typically using XCAP:
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Set Frame Buffer Memory Size ...
XCAP's ''Forceful Memory Allocation'' option, used with the memory architecture of x86 and x86-64 systems, is not applicable to the TX1.
command andjetson_clocks.sh
http://elinux.org/Jetson/Performance
.
While this application note makes note of this Jetson feature, its impact on PCIe bandwidth has not been confirmed.
xclib_aarch64.bin
or
xclip_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Install with:
orchmod a+x xclib_aarch64.bin ./xclib_aarch64.bin
chmod a+x xclip_aarch64.bin ./xclip_aarch64.bin
The script must be executed with super-user privileges. Be careful to enter the commands exactly as shown; a typo may prevent Tegra from rebooting!cd /usr/src/linux-headers-$(uname -r) sudo make modules_prepare sudo scripts/dtc/dtc -I dtb $(grep FDT /boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf|sed 's/.*FDT //') -o /boot/devicetree.dts sudo sed -i~ -e '/{$/ h ; x ; /pcie-controller / { x ; /iommus/ d ; x } ; x' /boot/devicetree.dts sudo scripts/dtc/dtc /boot/devicetree.dts -O dtb -o /boot/devicetree.dtb sudo sed -i~ -e 's|FDT .*|FDT /boot/devicetree.dtb|' /boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf sudo reboot
This application note outlines the installation of XCAP software and drivers for PIXCI® frame grabbers on the nVidia TX2 with ARM Cortex-A57 processor running Linux. Changes to the TX2 and its Linux can be expected; this application note was written with the TX2 and Linux released circa April 2017 (Linux for Tegra r27.1). Updated information for later releases of Tegra follow.
This application note is applicable when using a separate PIXCI® frame grabber card, such as a PIXCI® EB1, with any TX2 carrier card. It is also applicable when using the PIXCI® E4TX2 — which integrates the functionality of a PIXCI® E4G2 with a TX2 carrier card.
(Use of ''default-jre'' is not recommended; specifically, issues have been noted with openjdk-jre-11 and is not recommended).apt-get update apt-get -y install openjdk-8-jre
Note: If the Java JRE for Linux is not already installed, newer releases of the XCAP installer (below) will offer to install the Java JRE from the Linux distribution and repository.
xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Or download with:
for the current release version, or:wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
for the (next) prerelease version. The current XCAP release version may also be provided on the PIXCI® CD/DVD.wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/downloads/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Do:
to execute the XCAP installer.chmod a+x xcaplnx_aarch64.bin ./xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Note that only XCAP-Lite is supported for the nVidia TX2 - intended as a testing and configuration tool to assist in for developing application programs using the XCLIB C/C++ library. XCAP-Ltd and XCAP-Std are currently not supported for the nVidia TX2.
Newer versions of the JRE do not accept a
''-client''
and/or
''-Xincgc''
option.
With older releases of XCAP,
it may be necessary to
edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and
/usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
and remove the
''-client''
and/or
''-Xincgc''
options.
Or by using:
sed -i -e s/-client//g /usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx sed -i -e s/-client//g /usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx sed -i -e s/-Xincgc//g /usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx sed -i -e s/-Xincgc//g /usr/local/xcap/program/xcaplnx
On some versions of Ubuntu Linux, the desktop manager
may not show the shortcut created by XCAP's installer.
Using the Linux file browser, find
/usr/share/applications/xcap.desktop
,
then copy same and paste into the desktop.
from a terminal prompt.xcap
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Install Precompiled Driver Apply
Alternately, the PIXCI® driver can be compiled so as to match the current kernel.
Unfortunately, Tegra r27.1 is not configured for native compilation of the kernel, but for cross-compilation. Instructions for cross-compilation of the kernel are beyond the remit of this application note. Instead, we suggest following third party suggestions for native compilation, such as the article ''Build Kernel and Modules - NVIDIA Jetson TX2'' at ''www.jetsonhacks.com''.
Later releases of Tegra support native compilation, don't require ''www.jetsonhacks.com'', and are highly recommended.
After kernel build files are installed and tweaked for native compilation, use XCAP's:
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Compile & Install Driver Apply
The default TX2 coherent-pool is 1024 KB and allows,
approximately, 512 KB of frame buffer memory.
Edit
/boot/extlinux/extlinux.conf
and append, for example, a space and:
to the kernel command line so as to allow additional frame buffer memory. Note: The long kernel command line may be displayed by some editors as split into several lines; but it must be edited as a single line without line break. (Use ''cat /proc/cmdline'' to verify the current kernel command line).vmalloc=256M cma=128M coherent-pool=96M
There are many considerations in selecting these and other boot parameters for the nVidia TX2; this application note is not intended as a treatise on the subject.
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also determined by the amount of memory requested by the PIXCI® driver. This is set in the same manner as for x86 or x86-64 systems; typically using XCAP:
XCAP's ''Forceful Memory Allocation'' option, used with the memory architecture of x86 and x86-64 systems, is not applicable to the TX2.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Set Frame Buffer Memory Size ...
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also dependent on the number of frame grabbers that are opened, or might be opened later. Deselecting:
allows all of the memory to be used by one frame grabber and camera.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Advanced Memory (tab) Reserve and Share Frame Buffer Memory
command andjetson_clocks.sh
http://elinux.org/Jetson/Performance
.
While this application note makes note of this Jetson feature, its impact on PCIe bandwidth has not been confirmed.
xcliblnx_aarch64.bin
or
xcliplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Install with:
orchmod a+x xclib_aarch64.bin ./xcliblnx_aarch64.bin
chmod a+x xclip_aarch64.bin ./xcliplnx_aarch64.bin
Additional Tips:
Linux application. If ''lspci'' doesn't list the PIXCI® frame grabber, then the Linux PCIe bus manager hasn't detected the card and fiddling with the PIXCI® driver and its settings won't help.lspci
Specifically, with a ConnectTech carrier card (circa 2017-2018), the ConnectTech Board Support Package may be required for the PCI Express slots to be activated and for the PIXCI® frame grabber to be detected. Contact ConnectTech for the Board Support Package and use of the carrier card.
In addition to the Board Support Package, the ConnectTech Elroy carrier card (circa 2017-2018) with two PCI Express slots may only detect the PIXCI® frame grabber on one of the two slots (the ''lspci'' listing only one PIXCI® frame grabber). Contact ConnectTech for a hardware patch to enable the second PCI Express slot.
Linux for Tegra r28.2 with kernel 4.4.38-tegra:
fixdep
.
For the Tegra r28.2, distribution, it is an x86 executable
file, not ARM A57 executable files, causing errors
when compiling the PIXCI® driver on the TX2.
Check with:
In the event of error, recompile the utility using normal Linux build procedures: find utility and its directory, find corresponding ''Makefile'' (i.e. in same directory or a parent directory), run ''make'' (might have to ''touch'' thefind /usr/src -name fixdep -exec file {} ";"
fixdep.c
file so that
''make''
believes a recompilation is needed).
This issue may also affect later versions of Tegra.
Linux for Tegra r31.0.2 with kernel 4.9.108-tegra:
Linux for Tegra r31.1 with kernel 4.9.108-tegra:
genksyms
,
recordmcount
,
and
modpost
utilities, supplied by nVidia, in addition to
the
fixdep
utility (mentioned above).
They may all be x86 executables and are all recompiled by the same
make.
There are two copies of
fixdep
and other utilities under
/usr/src
;
it is simpler to recompile both
than question as to which is needed.
might install Open JDK 11; that version of Java throws SIGBUS or other errors. Installing:apt-get -y install default-jre
is recommended.apt-get install openjdk-8-jre
An environment variable for Java isn't set correctly; running XCAP results in:
EditUnsatisfied link error ... libjawt.so
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and add, as second and third lines:
so as to point ''LD_LIBRARY_PATH'' to the directory containingLIBJAWT=$( find /usr -name libjawt.so | sed -e s:/libjawt.so:: ) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LIBJAWT
libjawt.so
.
If multiple versions of Java are installed,
and, assuming a typical installation of the multiple versions,
add, as second and third lines:
TheLIBJAWT=$( find $( readlink -f /usr/bin/java | sed -e s:/bin/.*:: ) -name libjawt.so | sed -e s:/libjawt.so:: ) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LIBJAWT
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
contains these lines, as comments, ready to be uncommented.
Newer releases of XCAP implement a workaround for this issue;
editing
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
is not required.
(Circa July 2021).
This application note outlines the installation of XCAP software and drivers for PIXCI® frame grabbers on the nVidia Xavier with ARM Cortex-A57 processor running Linux. Changes to the Xavier and its Linux can be expected; this application note was written with the Xavier and Linux released circa April 2019 (Linux for Tegra r32.1 with kernel 4.9.140-tegra). Additional information for other releases of Tegra follow.
(Use of ''default-jre'' is not recommended; specifically, issues have been noted with openjdk-jre-11 and is not recommended).apt-get update apt-get -y install opendjk-jre-8
Note: If the Java JRE for Linux is not already installed, newer releases of the XCAP installer (below) will offer to install the Java JRE from the Linux distribution and repository.
xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Or download with:
for the current release version, or:wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
for the (next) prerelease version. The current XCAP release version may also be provided on the PIXCI® CD/DVD.wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/downloads/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Do:
to execute the XCAP installer.chmod a+x xcaplnx_aarch64.bin ./xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Only XCAP-Lite is supported for the nVidia Xavier - intended as a testing and configuration tool to assist in for developing application programs using the XCLIB C/C++ library. XCAP-Ltd and XCAP-Std are currently not supported for the nVidia Xavier.
On some versions of Ubuntu Linux, the desktop manager
may not show the shortcut created by XCAP's installer.
Using the Linux file browser, find
/usr/share/applications/xcap.desktop
,
then copy same and paste into the desktop.
from a terminal prompt.xcap
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Install Precompiled Driver Apply
Alternately, the PIXCI® driver can be compiled so as to match the current kernel. Use XCAP's:
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Compile & Install Driver Apply
Unlike Tegra for TX2, it is not necessary to configure Tegra for Xavier so as to specify the required amount of ''coherent-memory.'' XCAP's ''Forceful Memory Allocation'' option, used with the memory architecture of x86 and x86-64 systems, is not applicable to the Xavier.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Set Frame Buffer Memory Size ...
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also dependent on the number of frame grabbers that are opened, or might be opened later. Deselecting:
allows all of the memory to be used by one frame grabber and camera.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Advanced Memory (tab) Reserve and Share Frame Buffer Memory
xcliblnx_aarch64.bin
or
xcliplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Install with:
orchmod a+x xclib_aarch64.bin ./xcliblnx_aarch64.bin
chmod a+x xclip_aarch64.bin ./xcliplnx_aarch64.bin
Additional Tips:
Linux application. If ''lspci'' doesn't list the PIXCI® frame grabber, then the Linux PCIe bus manager hasn't detected the card and fiddling with the PIXCI® driver and its settings won't help.lspci
Unsatisfied link error ... libjawt.so
Edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and add, as second and third lines:
so as to point ''LD_LIBRARY_PATH'' to the directory containingLIBJAWT=$( find /usr -name libjawt.so | sed -e s:/libjawt.so:: ) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LIBJAWT
libjawt.so
.
The above fix assumes a single
version of Java is installed.
If multiple versions of Java are installed,
and, assuming a typical installation of the multiple versions,
add, as second and third lines:
TheLIBJAWT=$( find $( readlink -f /usr/bin/java | sed -e s:/bin/.*:: ) -name libjawt.so | sed -e s:/libjawt.so:: ) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LIBJAWT
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
contains these lines, as comments, ready to be uncommented.
Or, for atypical Java installations, edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and set
''LD_LIBRARY_PATH''
to the appropriate directory containing
libjawt.so
.
Newer releases of XCAP implement a workaround for this issue;
editing
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
is not required.
(Circa July 2021).
Tegra notes:
This application note outlines the installation of XCAP software and drivers for PIXCI® frame grabbers on the nVidia Xavier NX with ARM Cortex-A57 processor running Linux. Changes to the Xavier NX and its Linux can be expected; this application note was written with the initial Linux released with kernel 4.9.140-tegra. Additional information for other releases of Tegra follow.
(Use of ''default-jre'' is not recommended; specifically, issues have been noted with openjdk-jre-11 and is not recommended).apt-get update apt-get -y install opendjk-jre-8
Note: If the Java JRE for Linux is not already installed, newer releases of the XCAP installer (below) will offer to install the Java JRE from the Linux distribution and repository.
xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Or download with:
for the current release version, or:wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/software/xcap_v38/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
for the (next) prerelease version. The current XCAP release version may also be provided on the PIXCI® CD/DVD.wget ftp://ftp.epixinc.com/downloads/xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Do:
to execute the XCAP installer.chmod a+x xcaplnx_aarch64.bin ./xcaplnx_aarch64.bin
Only XCAP-Lite is supported for the nVidia Xavier NX - intended as a testing and configuration tool to assist in for developing application programs using the XCLIB C/C++ library. XCAP-Ltd and XCAP-Std are currently not supported for the nVidia Xavier NX.
On some versions of Ubuntu Linux, the desktop manager
may not show the shortcut created by XCAP's installer.
Using the Linux file browser, find
/usr/share/applications/xcap.desktop
,
then copy same and paste into the desktop.
from a terminal prompt.xcap
The PIXCI® driver must be compiled so as to match the current kernel. Use XCAP's:
PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Install PIXCI® Driver Compile & Install Driver Apply
Unlike Tegra for TX2, it is not necessary to configure Tegra for Xavier NX so as to specify the required amount of ''coherent-memory.'' XCAP's ''Forceful Memory Allocation'' option, used with the memory architecture of x86 and x86-64 systems, is not applicable to the Xavier NX.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Driver Assistant Set Frame Buffer Memory Size ...
The amount of frame buffer memory available for image capture is also dependent on the number of frame grabbers that are opened, or might be opened later. Deselecting:
allows all of the memory to be used by one frame grabber and camera.PIXCI® PIXCI® Open/Close Close (if open) Advanced Memory (tab) Reserve and Share Frame Buffer Memory
xcliblnx_aarch64.bin
or
xcliplnx_aarch64.bin
from
www.epixinc.com/support/files.php
.
Install with:
orchmod a+x xclib_aarch64.bin ./xcliblnx_aarch64.bin
chmod a+x xclip_aarch64.bin ./xcliplnx_aarch64.bin
Additional Tips:
Linux application. If ''lspci'' doesn't list the PIXCI® frame grabber, then the Linux PCIe bus manager hasn't detected the card and fiddling with the PIXCI® driver and its settings won't help.lspci
Specifically, many third party PCIe to M.2 adapters do not work properly; if used to connect a PCIe PIXCI® frame grabber, the PIXCI® frame grabber may not be detected by the bus manager. Use of a M.2 PIXCI® frame grabber is recommended.
Unsatisfied link error ... libjawt.so
Edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and add, as second and third lines:
so as to point ''LD_LIBRARY_PATH'' to the directory containingLIBJAWT=$( find /usr -name libjawt.so | sed -e s:/libjawt.so:: ) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LIBJAWT
libjawt.so
.
The above fix assumes a single
version of Java is installed.
If multiple versions of Java are installed,
and, assuming a typical installation of the multiple versions,
add, as second and third lines:
TheLIBJAWT=$( find $( readlink -f /usr/bin/java | sed -e s:/bin/.*:: ) -name libjawt.so | sed -e s:/libjawt.so:: ) export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LIBJAWT
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
contains these lines, as comments, ready to be uncommented.
Or, for atypical Java installations, edit
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
and set
''LD_LIBRARY_PATH''
to the appropriate directory containing
libjawt.so
.
Newer releases of XCAP implement a workaround for this issue;
editing
/usr/local/xcap/xcaplnx
is not required.
(Circa July 2021).
Tegra notes:
For selected cameras, XCAP provides convenient, integrated, controls which format and send serial commands to the camera as the XCAP GUI is manipulated. As the camera is configured via serial commands, the PIXCI® frame grabber configuration is automatically adjusted to match - such as matching the video area of interest, trigger modes, bit depth, etc. The camera manufacturer's software, if any, is not needed. Neither is the camera manufacturer's documentation detailing the syntax and semantics of the camera's serial commands.[86]
For other cameras, XCAP offers generic controls that allow configuring most PIXCI® frame grabbers[87] to match the camera's current configuration. The camera can be configured by:
For the few Camera Link cameras that use RS-232 instead of Camera Link serial, either XCAP's RS-232 Terminal feature, or the computer's Hyperterminal (for Windows), or the ''minicom,'' ''gtkterm'', or ''screen'' (for Linux) programs can be used.
Some cameras still use one of the older terms ''Expanded'', ''Extended'', ''Deca'', or ''Full-Plus'' instead of ''80-Bit''. Some options, not described in the Camera Link specification, are only shown if ''Non-Std Configuration Options'' is selected."Camera Link" "Base" "Medium" "Full" "80-Bit" "Base Configuration" "8 bit x 1 tap" "8 bit x 2 tap" "8 bit x 3 tap" "10 bit x 1 tap" "10 bit x 2 tap" "12 bit x 1 tap" "12 bit x 2 tap" "14 bit x 1 tap" "16 bit x 1 tap" "Medium Configuration" "8 bit x 4 tap" "10 bit x 3 tap" "10 bit x 4 tap" "12 bit x 3 tap" "12 bit x 4 tap" "14 bit x 2 tap" (Non-Std) "Full Configuration" "8 bit x 8 tap" "14 bit x 4 tap" (Non-Std) "16 bit x 4 tap" (Non-Std) "80-Bit" "8 bit x 10 tap" "10 bit x 8 tap" (Non-Std) "16 bit x 5 tap" (Non-Std) "Color Configuration" "Grey Level" "Bayer Color" "RGB Color" "BGR Color" (Non-Std) "RGB+Pad Color" (Non-Std) "BGR+Pad Color" (Non-Std) "UYVY Color" (Non-Std) "Non-Std Configuration Options" (checkbox) "Bayer Phase" (Bayer color only) "Red Start" "Grn-Red Start" "Grn-Blue Start" "Blue Start" "Camera Scan" "Area Scan" "Line Scan" "Timing Mode" "Free-run" "Controlled" "Horizontal Resolution" "Vertical Resolution" (area scan only) "Line Scans per Image" (line scan only) "Horizontal Offset" "Vertical Offset" (area scan only) "Data Valid (DVAL) Signal" "Use" "Ignore" "Pixel Order Correction" -- various --
The ''Pixel Order Correction'' provides various options for correcting the pixel order for cameras which don't output values in left-to-right and top-to-bottom order. There is no easy or standard method to describe the various camera readout schemes; while the ''Pixel Order Correction'' assigns each a non-descriptive numeric code, an ''Animate'' feature provides an animated sketch of each scheme that can be compared to the camera's documentation. Or, simply, each scheme can be tried and the displayed image observed.
The ''Pixel Order Correction'' is also used for cameras in which the Camera Link ''Horizontal Resolution'' and ''Vertical Resolution'' differs from the image ''Horizontal Resolution'' and ''Vertical Resolution'', such as to split each Camera Link line into two image lines. The effective ''Clocks per LVAL'' and ''Lines per FVAL'' are shown, computed from ''Horizontal Resolution'', ''Vertical Resolution'', the number of taps, and the chosen ''Pixel Order Correction'' to assist in configuration and for comparison to the camera's timing information.
For cameras in controlled rather than free-run mode, additional controls are:
The correct ''Camera Link Clock (Frequency)'' is only needed when using the camera in ''Controlled'' mode, and where the PIXCI® frame grabber is continuously retriggering the camera."Camera Link Clock (Frequency)" "Trigger Input" (area scan only) "None" (implies continuous mode) "Rising Edge" (implies single shot mode) "Falling Edge" (implies single shot mode) "Snap Button" (implies single shot mode) "H Trigger Input" (line scan only) "None" (implies continuous mode) "Rising Edge" (implies single shot mode) "Falling Edge" (implies single shot mode) "Controlled Mode" "Single Shot" "Continuous" "Exposure (Trigger) Polarity" "Positive" (for rising/falling edge) "Negative" (for rising/falling edge) "Controlled Exposure" (for camera's with pulse width controlled exposure) "Min. Retrigger Period" (single shot mode) "Controlled Line Rate" (line scan only, continuous mode) "Controlled Frame Rate" (area scan only, continuous mode)
XCAP and the PIXCI® frame grabber are not reconfigured
when the camera's gain, offset, black-level, exposure,
strobe, frame rate, etc. are changed;
these common and frequent adjustments to the camera
need only be entered into the camera manufacturer's application.
To customize XCAP, utilizing programming features and creating a level of customization more advanced than that provided by XCAP scripts and the XCAP Black Board.
The XCAP scripts allow recording and replaying a sequence of XCAP operations. The XCAP Black Board can interconnect various XCAP features, sending the value or result obtained with one feature to the input of another feature. Combined with the procedural scripts, the Black Board provides a quasi-procedural programming mechanism: partly procedural, partly data-flow; partly synchronous (script execution), partly asynchronous (Black Board evaluation).
Some users might instead prefer,
The XCAP Remote Control feature allows the user's favorite programming environment to be used in conjunction with XCAP. A separate program (application) is written, with whatever graphical user interface is preferred. As needed, the user-written program sends simple commands to XCAP, and receives processed images, or analyses results, in return. Familiarity with OLE, DDE, or other special Windows API(s) isn't needed - any program that can manipulate ASCII text files, can also remotely control XCAP.
To implement remote control of XCAP into your application,
Your application can also automatically start XCAP (using the host computer's normal API for starting programs), and use the Program Setup - Start/End Startup Script features to execute a setup script which could then,
Your application can retrieve results from XCAP by formulating a ''command'' script which saves an image (using the The Image Viewer Window's Image File - Save), or saves data (such as is provided under 2-D Graphs, Image Examination - Pixel Peek, Image Measurement - Blob Analysis, and similar features).
Other results where XCAP does not provide an explicit save feature, such as values shown in most numeric or textual fields, can be retrieved by formulating a ''command'' script using the Parameters to File feature of Utilities - Screen Capture, which saves almost all on-screen numeric fields and text fields. Or, to retrieve only one or more selected numeric or textual fields, formulate a ''command'' script using the Black Board as follows,
This example of using a custom user interface for XCAP uses a Windows Command-Line program.[88] XCAP's Remote Control facility is not limited to being used from batch programs, and calling the menu created by a batch program a ''user interface'' is overly generous, but of all the languages that might be used, a batch program can be run on every Windows machine, does not need additional, optional, compilers or other software, and is understood by the greatest majority of readers.
The complete ''custom user interface'' is:
This program expects that script files ''commandA.scr'', ''commandB.scr'', and ''commandC.scr'' have already been recorded.rem rem Display a choice menu rem :again cls @echo off echo. echo A Snap Image echo B Print Image echo C Invert Image echo D Exit echo. choice /c:abcde Choose an Option
rem rem Execute the chosen command, by copying rem the script associated with chosen command. rem if errorlevel 4 goto end if errorlevel 3 goto doC if errorlevel 2 goto doB if errorlevel 1 goto doA goto end
:doC copy commandC.scr temp.scr move temp.scr doit.scr goto wait
:doB copy commandB.scr temp.scr move temp.scr doit.scr goto wait
:doA copy commandA.scr temp.scr move temp.scr doit.scr goto wait
rem rem After a command is sent for execution, rem we could wait until the command's file rem is removed, indicating the execution is rem complete. Unfortunately, batch files rem do not have an efficient way to do this, rem and the wait loop wastes processor time. rem Alternately, we could just do rem :wait rem goto again rem if all of the commands execute quickly rem and/or the user is told not to execute rem commands too quickly. rem :wait cls echo Waiting for completion :wait1 IF EXIST doit.scr goto wait1 goto again
:end cls
A suitable ''commandA.scr'' is:
orMuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","EPIX\256PIXCI:View#1","MuiMenu","Adjust",0); MuiScript.apply(3,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","EPIX\256PIXCI:View#1","EPIX\256PIXCIDKodakES1.0:Capture&Adjust","MuiButton","Snap",0);
The former, because it accesses a specific camera's Adjust dialog is camera specific; the second accesses the menu bar's Capture - Snap and can be used with any camera.MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","EPIX\256PIXCI:View#1","MuiMenu","Snap",0);
A suitable ''commandB.scr'' is:
This assumes that a satisfactory print size and position had previously been set; either by a setup script, or interactively.MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","EPIX\256PIXCI:View#1","MuiMenu","Print, Windows",0); MuiScript.apply(3,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","EPIX\256PIXCI:View#1","EPIX\256PIXCI:WindowsPrinting","MuiStdBtn","OK",0);
A suitable ''commandC.scr'' is:
MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","EPIX\256PIXCI:View#1","MuiMenu","Arithmetic",0); MuiScript.apply(3,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","EPIX\256PIXCI:View#1","EPIX\256PIXCI:PixelArithmetic","MuiDoxInput","Complement Pixels",0); MuiScript.apply(3,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","EPIX\256PIXCI:View#1","EPIX\256PIXCI:PixelArithmetic","MuiStdBtn","OK",0);
Finally, a script to setup XCAP, opening the PIXCI frame grabber and activating the Remote Control feature:
MuiScript.apply(1,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","MuiMenu","PIXCI Open/Close",0); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","PIXCIOpen/Close","MuiStdBtn","Open",0); MuiScript.apply(1,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","MuiMenu","Script Remote Control",0); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","ScriptRemoteControlPlayer","MuiFileInput","Wait, Play & Delete File",1,"\xcap\scripts\doit.scr"); MuiScript.apply(2,"EPIX\256XCAPV1.0","ScriptRemoteControlPlayer","MuiStdBtn","Start",0);
To configure XCAP to run the setup script whenever XCAP is started:
-- in Main Window -- Utility Program Setup Start/End Startup Script: file_name_of_setup_script
For readers preferring to use C/C++ for the custom user interface, the following subroutine can be used to have a pre-recorded script executed by XCAP.
#include <stdio.h> #include <sys/stat.h> #include <windows.h> // // A 'C' subroutine that 'feeds' the specified // prototype script to XCAP. // void remotescript( char *protoscriptpath, // selected protoscript that XCAP shall execute char *monitoredpath, // path name monitored by XCAP char *temppath // non-existent path in same directory as monitoredpath // that can be used as a temporary ){ unsigned char buf[1024]; FILE *ifp, *ofp; size_t len;
// // Copy proto script to temp. By not copying directly to the // monitored path we avoid XCAP reading a partially copied script // should the operating system's default file modes allow sharing // of partially written files. // ifp = fopen(protoscriptpath, "rt"); if (!ifp) { fprintf(stderr, "Can't open %s\n", protoscriptpath); return; } ofp = fopen(temppath, "wt"); if (!ofp) { fprintf(stderr, "Can't create %s\n", temppath); fclose(ifp); return; } while (len = fread(buf, 1, sizeof(buf), ifp)) { if (fwrite(buf, 1, len, ofp) != len) { fprintf(stderr, "Can't write %s\n", temppath); fclose(ifp); fclose(ofp); return; } } fclose(ifp); fclose(ofp); // // Copy complete. Rename. // if (rename(temppath, monitoredpath)) { fprintf(stderr, "Can't rename %s (errno=%d)\n", temppath, errno); return; } // // Wait for renamed file to be removed by XCAP indicating // that execution is complete. This should not use // while (fp = fopen(monitoredpath, "rt")) // fclose(fp); // as having the file open interferes with XCAP's ability // to delete it. Instead, // { struct _stat statbuf; while (_stat(monitoredpath, &statbuf) == 0) Sleep(5); // give up time slice } }
This task can be accomplished using XCAP's RS-232 Terminal, PIXCI Capture Adjust, and Save Image Sequence dialogs, combined with the Black Board to interconnect the various features and a Script to perform a sequence of actions.
The TIFF image file format will be used, as it allows arbitrary textual descriptions to be included in the image file.
There will be two scripts, the first, named ''f1.scr'', executed once to initialize the necessary dialogs and connections, and a second, named ''f2.scr'', executed for each image captured. The content and relationship of these scripts is better understood if ''f1.scr'' is described and created before ''f2.scr''; except that while constructing ''f1.scr'' there are references to a non-existent ''f2.scr''. Therefore, a temporary, empty ''f2.scr'' is created, to be replaced by the real one later.
-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Record -- in Script Record -- Record to File: f2.scr Record Stop Close Script Record Dialog
When ''f1.scr'' is executed, it does so using a Script Play dialog, and during execution of the script creates a second Script Play for execution of ''f2.scr''. To record in the same environment as when ''f1.scr'' is run, first:
-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Play
Start the ''f1.scr'' script:
-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Record -- in Script Record -- Record to File: f1.scr Record
Activate the Black Board, so that it is ready to interconnect the dialogs that are opened next:
-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board
Open the RS-232 Terminal dialog and set its parameters:
-- in Main Window -- Utility RS-232 Terminal -- in RS-232 Terminal -- Controls (menubar) Setup (menu item) Baud Rate: 9600 (or as required) Stop Bits: 1 (or as required) Parity: None (or as required) RS-232 Port: COM1 (or as required)
Connect the RS-232 Terminal to the Black Board:
so that each received line will be sent to cell A0A0 of the Black Board.-- in RS-232 Control -- -- in RS-232 Terminal -- Controls (menubar) Status (menu item) RCV Last Line (right click) RCV Last Line: BlackBoard Dst. RCV Last Line: BB Dst=A0A0 (a chosen cell of the black board) RCV Last Line (right click) RCV Last Line: Key Entry
As images will be saved from frame buffer 0, set to capture to frame buffer 0:
-- in PIXCI Capture & Adjust -- Current Buffer: 0
Setup the file saving:
Each time the Apply button is clicked, this dialog will save one image from frame buffer 0, the first to file RUN000.TIF, the next to RUN001.TIF, etc.-- in Image Viewer Window -- File Save Image Sequence -- in Save Image Sequence -- Sequence of TIF's (radio button) File Name Pattern: RUN???.TIF Index: 0 thru: 999 Auto Inc after Save: Checked Set AOI -- in Set AOI Dialog -- Image (tab) Sequence Buffer Start: 0 Sequence Buffer End: 0 OK (in AOI dialog)
Connect:
so that each entry to cell A0A0 of the Black Board is copied to the Image Description Tag for saving with the image.-- in Save Image Sequence -- Tiff With (tab) Image Description Tag (right click) Image Description Tag: Black Board Source. Image Description Tag: BB Src.=A0A0 Image Description Tag (right click) Image Description Tag: Key Entry
The final step of the ''f1.scr'' setup is to set to have ''f2.scr'' executed for each RS-232 line received:
-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Play -- in Script Player (2) -- (don't confuse with first Script Player!) Play from File: f2.scr
The setup script shouldn't actually start ''f2.scr'', but instead:
so that each update to cell A0A0 of the Black Board causes script ''f2.scr'' to be executed.-- in Script Player (2) -- Play (right click) Creates popup dialog named Black Board Play BB Src= A0A0 Close Black Board Play dialog
Stop recording ''f1.scr'':
-- in Script Record -- Stop Close Script Record Dialog
Clean up:
-- in Script Player -- Close Script Play Dialog
The script must capture an image:-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Record Record to File: f2.scr Record
wait a short interval for the capture to be completed:-- in PIXCI Capture & Adjust -- Snap
and save the frame buffer:-- in Script Record -- Insert Timed Pause Timed Pause: 0.1 Second OK
-- in Save Image Sequence -- Apply -- in Script Record -- Stop Close Script Record Dialog
To put XCAP in the data collection mode, simply
and optionally switch to live mode and adjust the camera's focus and positioning.PIXCI PIXCI Open/Close Open
to start the initialization script and ''arm'' XCAP, ready to respond to RS-232 commands.Scripts Script Play Play from File: f1.scr Play
After capturing images, the textual description of each image can be viewed through:
-- in Main Window -- File (menubar) Image File Info (menu item)
After capturing a sequence of images, obtain one or more descriptive statistics about each, and export the statistics to a text file.
The XCAP Black Board, which is both similar to a spreadsheet, and can also interconnect the various features of dialogs or windows, provides data collection and exporting services. The Black Board, used in combination with any other feature that provides descriptive statistics allows collecting and exporting vectors of statistics. The Black Board even allows graphing the collected data!
Several solutions are described, each creating a script to obtain one descriptive statistic about each image, and export the statistics to a text file. Replaying the script allows re-analysis and export of a new sequence of images.
The solutions assume that the desired descriptive statistic is the mean value of an AOI within the image. Rather than have the script select an AOI, each solution's script assumes that the AOI was previously selected. This flexibility allows the same script to be used for a variety of AOIs.
In each case, assume that the PIXCI® frame grabber has already been opened, and an image sequence has been captured. Use
orSet ROI
to set the AOI or ROI, choosing according to whether the feature which supplies the raw statistic accepts only AOI's or also accepts ROI's (the Histogram feature to be used accepts ROI's).Set AOI
to begin recording a script.Scripts Script Record -- in Script Recorder -- Record to File: (desired file name) Record (don't close Script Recorder!)
Utility Black Board -- in Black Board -- File Report -- in Black Board Reporter -- Cells: Coordinates Upper Left Corner: A0A0 Lower Right Corner: A0A0 Report to File (radio button) File Create/Append (radio button) File Name: (desired file name) (don't close Black Board Reporter!)
and connect the desired statistic so that each new value is sent to the Black Board:Measure Histogram -- in Histogram -- Controls - Apply Live (check) Stats Descriptive
Mean Value: Right Click! -- in pop up -- Black Board Dest. Mean Value: BBDst=A0A0
The selection of the Last Buffer before selecting the First Buffer is simply to force the Histogram to recompute and export information about the first buffer (which will overwrite the same information about the last buffer). Simply doing:-- in PIXCI® image viewer -- Capture - Last Buffer Capture - First Buffer -- in Black Board Reporter -- Apply
may not have any effect, if the viewer was already viewing the first buffer.-- in PIXCI® image viewer -- Capture - First Buffer
The Capture menu and the First Buffer menu item are used rather than a shortcut - the shortcuts have interactive effect but are not recorded to a script.
-- in PIXCI® image viewer -- Capture - Next Buffer -- in Black Board Reporter -- Apply
-- in Script Recorder -- Stop
to begin recording a script.Scripts Script Record -- in Script Recorder -- Record to File: (desired file name) Record (don't close Script Recorder!)
where the Lower Right Corner coordinate corresponds to the number of image buffers. Setting Freeze Imports prevents data from being accumulated while doing the remaining setup operations.Utility Black Board -- in Black Board -- Run (a menu) Freeze Imports: Checked (a menu item) Mouse over Cell A0A0: Right Click -- in pop up -- Attributes -- In Black Board Cell A0A0 -- Gateway (a radio button) Gateway (a tab) Upper Left Corner: A0B0 Lower Right Corner: A0B30 Current Position: A0B0 Gateway Fill & Stop (radio button) Close (Black Board Cell A0A0)
and connect the desired statistic so that each new value is sent to the Black Board gateway cell:Measure Histogram -- in Histogram -- Controls - Apply Live Stats Descriptive
Mean Value: Right Click! -- in pop up -- Black Board Dest. Mean Value: BBDst=A0A0
setting the current buffer to be anything but buffer 0, so that upon ''Run'' buffer 0 will be redisplayed.View Sequence Play -- in Sequence Play -- First Image Displayed: 0 Last Image Displayed: 30 Current Image: 30 Image Display Interval: 0.1 second Continuous Run: unchecked
and step through the buffers:-- in Black Board -- Run (a menu) Freeze Imports: Unchecked (a menu item)
-- in Sequence Play -- Play
-- in Black Board -- File Report -- in Black Board Reporter -- Cells: Coordinates Upper Left Corner: A0B0 Lower Right Corner: A0B30 Report to File (radio button) File Create/Overwrite (radio button) File Name: (desired file name) OK
-- in Script Recorder -- Stop
-- in Black Board -- Show 2-D Graph -- in Black Board: 2-D Graph" Controls (a menu) What (a menu item) Cell Coordinates Upper Left Corner: A0B0 Lower Right Corner: A0B30
Start execution of a script whenever a video field arrives.
This task can be accomplished using XCAP's Black Board and the Field Count found the Adjust dialog. Exporting the Field Count count to a Black Board cell, then connecting the Script Play's Run button to the same Black Board cell, will cause the Run button to be ''clicked'' whenever the contents of the Field Count is updated and the value is non-zero.
However, the Field Count happens to be updated periodically by XCAP, and not just when a new field arrives. The setup described above will cause the script to be executed several times each second; as often as the Field Count is updated.
The Black Board is used to differentiate updates of the same value, versus updates of a new value.
-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board
-- in PIXCI Image Viewer Window -- Capture Adjust Field Count (right click) BlackBoard Dst. Field Count: BB Dst=A0A0 (a chosen cell of the black board) Field Count (right click) Key Entry
-- in Black Board -- Cell A0A1 (left click) A0A1: A0A0+0 (enter expression, the +0 forces the) (input type recognizer to see an expression) (rather than a valid base 16 number) Cell A0A2 (left click) A0A2: A0A0-A0A1 (enter expression) Cell A0A1 (right click) Attributes -- in Black Board Cell A0A1 Dialog -- Expression (a file tab) Auto Eval (uncheck) Eval Button (right click) Creates popup dialog named Black Board Source Eval: A0A2 Close Black Board Source dialog
-- in Main Window -- Script Script Play -- in Script Play -- Play (right click) Creates popup dialog named Black Board Source Run: A0A2 Close Black Board Source dialog
To repeatedly perform the same or similar set of operations, such as performing the same operation on multiple images, or performing the same operation multiple times on a single image.
The XCAP Script feature allows replaying a previously recorded script, and the Script Play dialog's Repeat Count allows repeating a script, but the script feature by itself is not a programming language and does not have variables, loops, subroutines, or other programming constructs.
However, a script, which performs a linear (i.e. top-to-bottom) sequence of operations, can used with the Black Board which is both similar to a spreadsheet, and can also interconnect the various features of dialogs or windows. Since a script is inherently a top-to-bottom execution, a typical scenario which in a typical procedural programming language may look like:
instead becomes two scripts, one performing the ''initialize'' and the other performing the ''body_of_loop''. The Black Board handles arithmetic, variables, and interconnections.initialize loop 10 times body_of_loop
As a specific example, a set of scripts which will perform an operation at 10 different positions across the image is created. This requires two scripts combined with the Black Board, and uses the Draw Text as the example operation.
In a typical (but unspecified) procedural programming language this task might be sketched as:
Integer i
Create Draw Text Dialog
Loop from i = 0 until i = 9 Draw "Hello" at coordinate (i*30, i*30)
In translation, the body of the loop becomes a script which is recorded as:
-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Record -- in Script Record -- Record to File: draw2.scr -- in Text Draw (previously created by draw1.scr) -- Mark -- in BlackBoard Cell A0A0 (previously created by draw1.scr) -- Increment (via right click, Attributes, Values) -- in Script Record -- Stop Close Script Record Dialog
The remainder of the translation becomes an initialization script which is recorded as:
To initialize the Black Board and initialize cell A0A0 as the loop index:-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Record -- in Script Record -- Record to File: draw1.scr
To set cell A0A1 as an expression which computes the product of 10 and the index in cell A0A0:-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board -- in Black Board -- Cell A0A0, right click, Attributes -- in Cell A0A0 Attributes -- Integer (defaults to value 0)
To initialize the Text dialog:Cell A0A1, left click A0A1: A0A0*10
To connect ''Origin H'' and ''Origin V'' of the Text window to the Black Board, receiving updated values of cell A0A1:-- in Image Viewer Window -- Draw Text -- in Text -- Text: Hello
To have initialization script ''draw1.scr'' start ''draw2.scr'' running.-- in Text -- Origin, H (right click) Black Board Src Origin, H: BB Src=A0A1 Origin, V (right click) Black Board Src Origin, V: BB Src=A0A1
And finally to finish ''draw1.scr'':-- in Image Viewer Window -- Scripts Script Play -- in Scripts Play -- Play from File: draw2.scr Repeat Count: 10 Play
-- in Script Record -- Stop Close Script Record Dialog
Save a sequence of images previously captured using Video to Image Files, such that the file name of each image contains its capture time stamp.
This task can be accomplished using XCAP's Video to Image Files: Attributes, Video to Image Files: Capture & Adjust, and Video to Image Files: Image Save dialogs, combined with the Black Board to interconnect the various features and a Script to perform a sequence of actions.
There will be two scripts, the first, named ''save1.scr'', executed once to initialize the necessary dialogs and connections, and a second, named ''save2.scr'', executed for each image to be saved. The content and relationship of these scripts is better understood if ''save1.scr'' is described and created before ''save2.scr''; except that while constructing ''save1.scr'' there are references to a non-existent ''save2.scr''. Therefore, a temporary, empty ''save2.scr'' is created, to be replaced by the real one later.
-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Record -- in Script Record -- Record to File: save2.scr Record Stop Close Script Record Dialog
When ''save1.scr'' is executed, it does so using a Script Play dialog, and during execution of the script creates a second Script Play for execution of ''save2.scr''. To record in the same environment as when ''save1.scr'' is run, first:
-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Play
Start the ''save1.scr'' script:
-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Record -- in Script Record -- Record to File: save1.scr Record
Activate the Black Board, so that it is ready to interconnect the dialogs that are opened next:
-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board
Open the Image Attributes dialog and connect the Date&Time Stamp to the Black Board:
So that the Date&Time Stamp will be sent to cell A0A0 of the Black Board.-- in Video to Image Files: View window -- File Image Attributes -- in Attributes -- Frame (tab) Date&Time Stamp (right click) Date&Time Stamp: BlackBoard Dest. Date&Time Stamp: BB Dst=A0A0 (a chosen cell of the black board) Date&Time Stamp (right click) Date&Time Stamp: Key Entry
Replace each instance of ''.'' in the Date&Time Stamp with ''_'', and replace each instance of '':'' with ''-'', in order for the time stamp format to be a valid Windows file name. Also, add ''.tif'' to the end of the Date&Time Stamp so Windows will recognize the file as a TIFF file type:
So that the Date&Time Stamp in cell A0A0 is modified and sent to cell A0B0.-- in Black Board -- cell A0B0 (left click) A0B0=concat(replace(replace(A0A0, ".", "_"), ":", "-"), ".tif")
Set the Current Image to the first image in the sequence:
So that when the images are saved, they are saved starting with image 0.-- in Video to Image Files: Capture & Adjust -- Display (tab) Display Rate (tab) Current Image: 0
Connect the Images to Save to the Black Board, so that save2.scr can later be told to repeat as many times as there are images in the sequence:
-- in Video to Image Files: Capture & Adjust -- Capture (tab) Capture Rate & Mode (tab) Images to Save (right click) Images to Save: BlackBoard Dest. Images to Save: BB Dest=A0A1 Images to Save (right click) Images to Save: Key Entry
The final step of the ''save1.scr'' setup is to set to have ''save2.scr'' executed once for each image in the sequence:
So that save2.scr plays, and the number of times it repeats is linked to Black Board cell A0A1, which is the number of images in the sequence.-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Play -- in Script Player (2) -- (don't confuse with first Script Player!) Play from File: save2.scr Repeat Script Count (right click) Repeat Script Count: BlackBoard Read Repeat Script Count: BB Read=A0A1 Repeat Script Count (right click) Repeat Script Count: Key Entry Play (left click)
Stop recording ''save1.scr'':
-- in Script Record -- Stop Close Script Record Dialog
Clean up:
-- in Script Player -- Close Script Play Dialog
The script must save the current image, with the file name as the modified Date&Time Stamp:-- in Main Window -- Scripts Script Record Record to File: save2.scr Record
So that the file name is linked to the modified Date&Time Stamp found in Black Board cell A0B0.-- in Video to Image Files: View window -- File Save Image -- in Video to Image Files: Image Save -- TIFF (radio button) File Name (right click) File Name: BlackBoard Read File Name: BB Read=A0B0 File Name (right click) File Name: Key Entry OK (left click)
The script must also move to the next image in the sequence, so that when it repeats it will save the next image:
So that the current image number is written to Black Board cell A0A2. To move to the next image in the sequence, Current Image must be incremented:-- in Video to Image Files: Capture & Adjust -- Display (tab) Display Rate (tab) Current Image (right click) Current Image: BlackBoard Write Current Image: BB Write=A0A2 Current Image (right click) Current Image: Key Entry
So that the current image number contained in Black Board cell A0A2 is incremented by 1, and then it is sent back to Current Image.-- in Black Board -- cell A0B2 (left click) A0B2=A0A2+1 -- in Video to Image Files: Capture & Adjust -- Display (tab) Display Rate (tab) Current Image (right click) Current Image: BlackBoard Read Current Image: BB Read=A0B2 Current Image (right click) Current Image: Key Entry
The script recording is now finished, so:
-- in Script Record -- Stop Close Script Record Dialog
Create an animated banner overlaid on an image.
This task can be accomplished using XCAP's Draw, Text to overlay text, and a Black Board timer to animate the text.
-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board
With non-blank, text displayed, adjust the text's size, position, and color as suitable. Also, determine the range of X coordinates over which the text should be shifted, call these ''lowx'' and ''highx''-- in PIXCI Image Viewer -- Draw Text -- in Text Dialog -- Text: Testing 1,2,3,4
When satisfactory:
so the Text's starting X coordinate is derived from the Black Board-- in Text Dialog -- Origin, H (right click) Origin, H: BlackBoard Source Origin, H: BB Src.=B0 Origin, H (right click) Origin, H: Key Entry
where the ''lowx'' and ''highx'' are the values chosen above (do not enter the word ''lowx'' or ''highx).'' The expression:-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board -- in Black Board -- Cell A0 (right click) Attributes -- in Black Board Cell A0A0 -- Timer (radio button) Timer (file tab) Timer Period: 0.5 seconds Close Black Board Cell A0A0 Dialog -- in Black Board -- Cell B0 (left click) A0B0=lowx+(highx-lowx)*(A0%10.0)/10.0
will change its value from ''lowx'' to ''highx'' over the course of 10.0 seconds; it is evaluated and the text moved every 0.5 seconds, as set by the timer cell A0.lowx+(highx-lowx)/(A0%10.0)
To utilize XCAP to demonstrate the measurement of liquid level in one or more vials moving on a turntable or conveyor.
XCAP provides edge analysis tools, which can be used to measure the position of various edges. These tools can be set to operate on demand, such as when a button is clicked, or to operate upon each newly captured image. Using the latter mode, XCAP can be set up to measure the liquid level regardless of whether the camera is placed in free-run mode, or placed in trigger mode. How to put the camera in one mode or the other, and how to connect the trigger, is not discussed here.
It is assumed that XCAP and the PIXCI® frame grabber are already opened.
We built a ''hut'' on the turntable out of index cards around each vial. The hut had three sides and a top, thereby minimizing direct light and glare. Alternates are use of a ring light, and perhaps polarizing filters. Alternately, the vial can be deglossed by light sanding or by deglossing chemicals.
Measure SubPixel Edger
Under Shape, click Other Graphic, Other New, select Parallel Lines, click Other OK. Set Lines to 3 or 4.
Assume an image of the vial has been captured. Click Interact, Click & Draw. Click on the image above the liquid level on the left side; drag to below the liquid level on the right side. Unclick Interact. Set Angle to 90. You should have 3 or 4 vertical lines; vertically they should cross the expected liquid level, but not cross the level of the top of the label; horizontally they should all be contained within the vial.
These lines indicate the pixel data that is to be analyzed for the occurrence of the liquid's edge and thus the liquid's level. They should be spaced horizontally so as to better sample the liquid level at several different positions. The Length, Width, and Origin controls can be adjusted for satisfactory position. The Color control can be adjust for desirable overlay color.
Under Search set Maximum Edges Reported to 1, set Find Edges of Type to Rising and Falling, and set Analysis Neighborhood to 15. The latter is similar to a low pass filter whose value can be tweaked; the larger it is the less likely a thin edge (such as from a bubble) will be detected.
Under Post Process, set Edge Strength Thresholding unchecked.
Under Display, check Show Ticks.
In the Subpixel Edger Dialog, under Edge 1 H/V Coord is shown the edge's position. Under Edge 1 Strength is shown the edge's relative strength (0 to 100, negative or positive depending on whether the edge goes from light to dark or from dark to light).
Note the Edge 1 Strength, and under Post Process, set Edge Strength Thresholding checked. Set the Edge Strength Threshold to be about 10% less than the absolute value of the Edge 1 Strength. This should prevent finding an edge in the image of the evenly shaded background when no vial is present. The Edge Strength Threshold value can be tweaked as needed.
Close it.Utility Black Board
In the Text entry box, right click. Select BlackBoard Src, enter A0. Right Click, select Key Entry.Draw Text
The vertical coordinate of the edge found by the SubPixel Edger will now be overlaid on the image. Adjust the controls of the Text Dialog for desired size, position, color, etc. of the overlay text. Do not close the Text Dialog; it can be moved to a corner of the graphics display (S/VGA).
-- Main Window -- File Window List -- select desired window to be recovered --
An additional feature, which compares the measured edge position against specified criteria and visually reports the result can be added as follows:
Left click on the ''B0'' cell. At the bottom of the Black Board the text input field should now be:Utility Black Board
Enter:A0B0=
which translates into ''If the value of cell A0 is between 200 and 300, produce an empty string, else produce a XX.'' The actual values, 200 and 300, can be modified as needed.ifel(A0>200 & A0<300, "", "XX")
to create a second, independent, text dialog. In the Text entry box, right click. Select BlackBoard Src, enter B0. Right Click, select Key Entry.Draw Text
The acceptance string determined by the Black Board will now be overlaid on the image. Adjust the controls of the Text Dialog for desired size, position, color, etc. of the overlay text. Do not close the Text Dialog; it can be moved to a corner of the graphics display (S/VGA).
Another XCAP feature that might also be used is Measure, Spatial Calibration which allows calibration of pixels into real world units, allowing the numeric overlay to be in inches, millimeters, or furlongs. The Measure, Distance & Angle Crosshairs provides an alternate method of calibrating pixels into real world units.
It is also possible to utilize multiple subpixel edger tools. For example, one tool can monitor the height of the liquid, while another monitors the position of the bottom of the cap. Using the Black Board, the numeric value displayed can be the difference of these measurements. This would allow compensating for inconsistent placement, or fixturing, of the vials.
The Black Board can also be used to perform decisions
based on the coordinates being sent to it.
Based on the decision, a G.P output might be sent, or
the word
''good''
or
''bad''
might be overlaid on the image.
Display modified live video, so that every acquired frame is modified by one or more imaging processing operations, such as background correction, before display.
XCAP provides background correction and similar image processing features under Modify, which can be easily used on previously captured images.
However, if used directly upon the frame buffer into which live video is being captured, the image processing features' effect would be immediately overwritten by video capture of the next frame, yielding no observable result, or a partially processed result. Alternately, a script might, (a) Snap an image, (b) Apply an image processing operation, (c) Display, and (d) Repeat; but the result would, at best, be half video rate.
The best solution uses XCAP ability to support simultaneous processing and display of multiple image buffers, as well as special variants of the Modify operations.
A solution to perform live display of video with background correction is described. Assume the PIXCI® frame grabber has already been opened, and at least two image frame buffers have been configured (if not, see the PIXCI® - Driver Assistant).
This creates a new image buffer in a second image viewer window titled ''NoName 1'', with the same resolution and pixel type as the PIXCI® frame buffers.File Duplicate Image Copy as Shown ... OK
The third part of the AOI specification, the ''Destination'', is already set to the NoName 1.Modify (a menu) Src+Dst ... (a menu) Src+Dst Pair Normalization (a menu) Background Correction, Subtractive (a radio button) Set AOI (a button) Source A (a file tab) Image (a file tab) Image Name: EPIX PIXCI (a list box) Sequence Buffer: 0 (text field) Source B (a file tab) Image (a file tab) Image Name: EPIX PIXCI (a list box) Sequence Buffer: 1 (text field) OK (in Set AOI Box) Live: Checked (in Src+Dst Pair Normalization box)
When video is captured into the PIXCI® image viewer window, each frame captured into buffer 0 (or as often as the host computer's speed allows) will be subtracted from the background image previously captured into buffer 1 and the result displayed in the new NoName 1 image viewer window.
Note: All three windows, the PIXCI® image viewer,
the NoName 1 image viewer, and the NoName 1
Src+Dst Pair Normalization must remain open
to maintain the live, filtered, video display.
However, the windows may be pushed off beyond the edge of the
screen (use the Main Window's
''Window List''
to get a window back).
Or, both the true live video, and the processed live video windows,
can be positioned side-by-side for comparison.
Every five seconds:
This example assumes that the gauge's needle can be measured clear of any background clutter, at least at one radial along the needle. In particular, this example will use a clock with only a second hand as the example.
This task can be accomplished using XCAP's SubPixel Edger to search for the strongest edge along the circumference of a circle, the Draw, Text to overlay results, and the Black Board to interconnect the above dialogs and ''massage'' the raw measurement data into a user friendly format.
-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board
Set a circular shape, the boundary of which is to be searched for edges:-- in PIXCI Image Viewer -- Measure SubPixel Edger
Draw the circle in an appropriate position, with the center at the gauge's needle's center:-- in SubPixel Edger -- Shape (file tab) Other Graphic Other, New (radio button) New Graphic: Circle Other OK
The two edges of the needle, leading and trailing, offer approximately the same contrast against the gauge's background. Consistently select the same edge of the needle:Interact (check) Click & Draw left click, drag, release (within PIXCI Image Viewer) Interact (uncheck)
Connect the reported angle to the Black Board:Search (file tab) Find Edges of Type: Rising
The angle of each edge found, relative to the center of the circle, is exported to cell A0A0.Edge 1, Angle (right click) Edge 1, Angle: BlackBoard Dest. Edge 1, Angle: BB Dst.=A0A0 Edge 1, Angle (right click) Edge 1, Angle: Key Entry
to convert the radians in cell A0 to the clock's seconds. This expression is derived, piece by piece as:-- in Black Board -- Cell B0 (left click) (15+(A0*360)/(2*PI*6))%60
(A0*360)/(2*PI) // convert radians to degrees (A0*360)/(2*PI*6) // convert 0 to 360 degrees to 0 to 60 seconds (15+(A0*360)/(2*PI*6))%60 // 0 radians is due West, 0 seconds is due North // shift by 15 seconds, use remainder modulo 60
to create a single string, with the seconds measurement followed by the text ''sec.''.-- in Black Board -- Cell B0 (right click) Variable as String Cell C0 (left click) A0C0= concat(B0, " sec.")
With non-blank, temporary, text displayed, adjust the text's size, position, and color as suitable. When satisfactory:-- in PIXCI Image Viewer -- Draw Text -- in Text Dialog -- Text: Testing 1,2,3,4
so the Text field receives all update values from Black Board cell C0.-- in Text Dialog -- Text (right click) Text: BlackBoard Source Text: BB Src.=A0C0 Text (right click) Text: Key Entry
To have the process run every 5 seconds:
which sets cell D0 as a timer, incrementing every 5.0 seconds. Use-- in Black Board -- Cell D0 (right click) Attributes -- in Black Board Cell A0D0 -- Timer (radio button) Timer (file tab) Timer Period: 5.0 seconds Close Black Board Cell A0D0 Dialog
which clicks the Apply button whenever cell D0 changes, namely every 5 seconds.-- in SubPixel Edger -- Apply (right click) -- in Black Board Apply -- BB Src= D0 Close Black Board Apply dialog
The
SubPixel Edger
and the
Text
dialogs must remain open, although they can be pushed
to the edge off the screen.
Show a graphical history of some attribute of the image, such as average intensity.
This task can be accomplished using XCAP's Black Board to accumulate and graph the measurements, the Histogram feature to obtain the desired measurement, and the Video to Frame Buffers, to perform timed image capture.
The Black Board allows accumulating tens of thousands of measurements, although typical applications use far less. The Black Board allows accumulating the measurements in a ''rolling'' or FIFO manner, so the graph shows the last N measurements.
The Video to Frame Buffers is used in a continuous, circular mode. Although the Video to Frame Buffers is most often used for sequence capture, for this application it will repeatedly capture into one frame buffer at timed intervals.
Assume that XCAP and the PIXCI® are open for use.
-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board
to show cell A0's attribute dialog. Configure as:-- in Black Board -- Cell A0 (right click) Attributes
to specify collection of 1000 entries arriving through cell A0 and stored in cells B0 through B999. Close the attribute dialog.-- in Cell A0 Attributes - Gateway (radio button) Gateway (tab) Gateway Fill & Pushdown (radio button) Upper Left Corner: A0B0 Lower Right Corner: A0B999
to show the graph window. Configure as:-- in Black Board -- Show (menubar) 2-D Graph (menu item)
to specify which cells are to be graphed, and when the graph should be updated.-- in Black Board Graph -- Controls (menubar) What (menu item) Cell Coordinates (radio button) Upper Left Corner : A0B0 Lower Right Corner: A0B999 Controls (menubar) When (menu item) Update on Cell (radio button) Update Cell: A0B999
to show a histogram window. Configure as:-- in Image Viewer Window -- Measure (menubar) Histogram (menu item)
to send the mean value of each image AOI to the Black Board.-- in Histogram window -- Controls (menubar) Apply (menu item) Live: Uncheck (checkbox) Set ROI: Select frame buffer 0 Select desired AOI or ROI OK Close ROI window Live: Check (checkbox) Stats (menubar) Descriptive (menu item) Mean Value (right click) BlackBoard Dest.(ination) Mean Value: BB Dst= A0A0
Configure as:-- in Image Viewer Window -- Capture (menubar) Sequence Capture (menu item) Video to Frame Buffers (menu item)
-- in Video to Frame Buffers -- Circular Sequence (radio button) Capture Options (tab) View Circular Sequence in Buffer Order (radio button) Capture Rate & Mode (tab) Start/End All Buffers: Uncheck Starting Frame Buffer: 0 Ending Frame Buffer : 0 Snap Video at Time Interval (radio button) Time Interval: 1 sec. (or other desired value) Event Free (radio button)
to start capturing, analyzing and logging, and-- in Video to Frame Buffers -- Record (button)
to cease.-- in Video to Frame Buffers -- Stop (button)
Every second:
This task can be accomplished using XCAP's SubPixel Edger to search for the strongest edge along at the object's expected position, and the Black Board to report the value via an RS-232 port.
-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board
Use the default line shape, the pixels along the line segment are to be searched for edges. Position the line across the object's expected position.-- in PIXCI Image Viewer -- Measure SubPixel Edger
Connect the reported position to the Black Board:-- in SubPixel Edger -- Shape (file tab) Interact: (check) Click & Draw left click, drag, release (within PIXCI Image Viewer) Interact: (Uncheck)
The horizontal position of each edge found is exported to cell A0A0. Finally, select:Edge 1, H Coord (right click) Edge 1, H Coord: Blackboard Dest. Edge 1, H Coord: BB Dst.=A0A0 Edge 1, H Coord (right click) Edge 1, H Coord: Key Entry
While the PIXCI frame grabber is capturing, the subpixel measurement tool automatically analyzes each captured image.Live (check)
As a report should be send once per second:-- in Main Window -- Utility Black Board -- in Black Board -- File Report -- in Black Board Report -- Cells: Coordinates Upper Left Corner: A0A0 Lower Right Corner: A0A0 Post Row Text: \r\n Report to RS-232 (radio button) Baud Rate: as required Data Bits: as required RS-232 Port: as required
which clicks the ''Black Board Report'''s Apply button whenever cell B0 changes, namely once each second.-- in Black Board -- Cell B0 (right click) Attributes -- in Black Board Cell A0B0 -- Timer (checkbox) Timer (file tab) Timer Period: 1.0 seconds Close Black Board Cell A0B0 dialog -- in Black Board Report -- Apply (right click) -- in Black Board Apply -- BB Src= A0B0 Close Black Board Apply dialog
By analogy, the term may be used with digital video signals: the portion of signal(s) containing useful pixel values as indicated by the ''Line Valid'' and ''Frame Valid'' signals.
An AOI is sometimes referred to as a ''window'' within the image, but is not to be confused with a ''window'' or ''dialog'' of a Graphical User Interface, such as Windowstm, Javatm, or GTK.
In contrast to ''Digital Gain'', use of analog gain on dim pixel intensities will, typically, produce an image with both greater contrast and greater continuous tonality, albeit with increased levels of random noise.
which cover the photosites of some CCD or CMOS image sensors. There are four possible alignments of the mosaic with the image's upper left photosite; a particular alignment is often referred to as ''Bayer Phase''. A color RGB image is constructed by interpolating the pixel values derived from photosites under the various filters.. . . . ... R G R G ... ... G B G B ... ... R G R G ... ... G B G B ... . . . .
For color pixels, the number of bits may refer to the number of bits per color component, or to the total number of bits for all components; ''16 bit RGB'' may refer to an older S/VGA standard that provides low quality color by using 5 or 6 bits for red, blue, and green, or may refer to high quality color using a total 48 bits per pixel and providing 65536 intensity levels for each of red, green, and blue.
Sensor formats and suggested lens formats for SILICON VIDEO® cameras are:
Camera | Sensor Format | Suggested Lens | Pixel Size |
or Size | Format | or Pitch(p), | |
micrometer | |||
10C-CL and 10M-CL | 1/2.3 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 1.67×1.67 |
10C6 and 10M6 | 1/2.3 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 1.67×1.67 |
1281M and 1281C | 2/3 in. | 2/3 in. C-Mount | 7.0×7.0 |
1310 and 1310C | 1/2 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 6.0×6.0 (p) |
15C5 and 15M5 | 1/2.3 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 1.4×1.4 |
1514CL | 1/2.3 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 1.4×1.4 |
1820CL | 1/2.3 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 1.25×1.25 |
1C45 and 1M45 | 1/3 in. | 1/3 in. C-Mount | 3.75×3.75 (p) |
20C-CL and 20M-CL | 32.77×24.58mm2 | F-Mount | 6.4×6.4 |
2112 and 2112C | 1 in. | 1 in. C-Mount | 7.5×7.5 (p) |
2KS-C and 2KS-M | 2/3 in. | 2/3 in. C-Mount | 5.5×5.5 |
5M10 and 5C10 | 1/2.5 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 2.2×2.2 |
642M and 642C | 1/2 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 9.9×9.9 |
643M and 643C | 1/2 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 9.9×9.9 |
9C10 | 1/2.3 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 1.75×1.75 |
9M001 and 9M001C | 1/2 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 5.2×5.2 |
9T001C | 1/2 in. | 1/2 in. C-Mount | 3.2×3.2 |
WGA-M and WGA-C | 1/3 in. | 1/3 in. C-Mount | 6.0×6.0 |
The Base Configuration uses one Channel Link chip, one MDR or SDR 26-pin connector, and can transfer 24 pixel bits per clock, such as 8×1, 8×2, 8×3, 10×1, 10×2, 12×1, 12×2, 14×1, 16×1 monochrome or Bayer color, and 8×3 RGB color. The Medium Configuration uses two Channel Link chips, two MDR or SDR 26-pin connectors and can transfer 48 pixel bits per clock, such as 8×4, 10×3, 10×4, 12×3, 12×4 monochrome or Bayer color, and 10×3, 12×3 RGB color. The Full Configuration uses three Channel Link chips, two MDR or SDR 26-pin connectors and can transfer 64 pixel bits per clock, such as 8×8 monochrome or Bayer color. The 80-Bit Configuration (formerly referred to as Expanded Configuration, Extended Configuration, Full Plus Configuration or Deca Configuration), uses three Channel Link chips, two MDR or SDR 26-pin connectors and can transfer 80 pixel bits per clock, such as 8×10 or 10×8 monochrome or Bayer color.
The standard provides for four trigger/control signals, ''CC1'', ''CC2'', ''CC3'', and ''CC4''.
clserXXX.DLL
names,
where
''XXX''
is a unique frame grabber identifier or frame grabber manufacturer identifier.
The Camera Link DLL for PIXCI® frame grabbers is named
clserEPX.DLL
.
Instead of multiplying pixel values (V) by a constant (C):
which leaves the 0 value pixel unchanged, image processing algorithms may instead use:V*C
where (M) is the maximum pixel value and leaves mid-value pixels unchanged. In this context, the former equation may be referred to as ''Gain'' and the latter as ''Contrast''. In other contexts, ''Gain'' and ''Contrast'' are synonyms.(V-(M/2))*C + (M/2)
In ''Controlled (Video) Mode'' some cameras can overlap exposure of the next frame with output of the current frame, yielding the same frame rate as in free-run mode (assuming that the exposure period isn't longer than the output period). In other cameras, the exposure and output are sequential; the frame rate decreases as the exposure increases, and a frame rate near that of free-run mode is achieved only as the exposure period approaches zero.
Different camera manufacturers use various synonyms, such as ''Frame on Demand Mode'', ''Triggered (Video) Mode'', ''External Triggered (Video) Mode'', ''External Sync (Video) Mode'', ''Single Shot (Video) Mode'', ''Controlled (Video) Mode'', or ''Async Shutter (Video) Mode''.
Digital gain can make a dim image more pleasant to view, but can't introduce additional grey levels or colors. For example (assuming 8 bit pixels), a very dim grey level image whose pixel values range from zero through four can be scaled by 64. The result will have high contrast - both dark and bright pixels - but still have only 5 different grey levels and lack continuous tonality.
Contrast to ''Analog Gain''.
Actual throughput on most computers is approximately 190 MByte/sec.
The PIXCI® ECB1-34 is an ExpressCard/34 card, using the PCIExpress x1 interface.
Actual throughput on most computers is approximately 190 MByte/sec.
An ExpressCard/54 host accepts both ExpressCard/54 and ExpressCard/34 cards.
The PIXCI® EC1, ECB1, and ECB2 are ExpressCard/54 cards, using the PCIExpress x1 interface.
File System | Max # of Files | Max File Size (bytes) |
Windows FAT16 | 512 per folder | 232-1 |
Windows FAT16 w. | 512 per folder | 231-1 |
DOS, Win 95/98/ME | ||
Windows FAT32 | 65534 per folder | 232-1 |
Windows NTFS | 232-1 per volume | 244 - 64*1024 |
Under Linux, there are 10 or more varieties of file systems, each with unique limits.
The maximum number of files is significant when capturing video to multiple files, one per image. The maximum file size is significant when capturing video with multiple images in a single file.
Different camera manufacturers use various synonyms, such as ''Continuous (Video) Mode'', ''Internal Sync (Video) Mode'', ''Auto (Video) Mode'', or ''Live (Video) Mode''.
Typically, a camera in genlock video mode can only operate at, or near, a specific frame rate; a slower external signal or video waveform ''genlock input'' will either be ignored or corrupt the video output. In contrast, a camera in ''Controlled (Video) Mode'' can operate at various frame rates, from zero up to the camera's designed maximum rate.
Different camera manufacturers use various synonyms, such as ''Free-Run Shutter'' (but is not to be confused with ''Free-Run (Video) Mode'').
By analogy, the term may be used with digital video signals as a synonym for the complement of ''Line Valid''.
By analogy, the term may be used with digital video signals as a synonym for the complement of ''Line Valid''.
Some cameras are designed to expose all scan lines of the sensor at the same time, eliminating temporal shifts between fields, but output the scan lines in interlace format so as to maintain compatibility with display and capture devices, these are often called ''Progressive Exposure and interlaced Output''.
Some cameras contain a built-in (perhaps removable) IR-cut filter between the sensor and the lens. Other cameras do not contain an IR-cut filter, allowing a filter, if desired, to be attached to the end of the lens farthest from the sensor.
Most SILICON VIDEO® color cameras contain an optional IR-cut filter between the sensor and the lens - within the back focus adjustment ring. The filter can be removed by replacing one back focus adjustment ring with another.
A ''grey level image'' is monochrome.
An image composed of RGB pixels, each pixel having identical red, green, and blue values, can be referred to as a monochrome image or a ''colorless color'' image. As can an image using any other color space (such as ''HSB Color'' or ''YCrCb Color'') in which each pixel value resolves to black, white, or a shade of grey.
The PIXCI® A, CL1, CL3SD, D, D24, D32, D2X, D3X, SI, SV2, SV3, SV4, SV5, SV5A, SV5B, and SV5L are 32 bit PCI cards. The PIXCI® CL2 is a 64 bit PCI card.
Approximate Throughput (Gbits per Second) | |||
Lane Width | Payload size (bytes) | ||
16 | 128 | 256 | |
x1 | 1.7 | 1.7 | 2.0 |
x4 | 6.8 | 7.0 | 7.8 |
x8 | 13.7 | 14.0 | 15.7 |
x16 | 27.4 | 28.0 | 31.4 |
Also referred to as ''PCI-Express Gen 1'' or ''PCIe Gen 1''.
Actual throughput on most computers is approximately 190 MByte/sec. for PCI-Express 1.1 x1 cards, approximately 777 MByte/sec. for PCI-Express 1.1 x4 cards, and approximately 1600 MByte/sec. for PCI-Express 1.1 x8 cards.
The PCI-Express Interface specification allows operating a card using a lower lane width in a slot supporting a higher lane width, such as using a x1 card in a x4 slot, resulting in x1 bandwidth. However, the higher lane width slot need not support all lower lane bandwidths; for example, typical computers (circa 2008) with x16 slots might operate a x4 card but only provide x1 bandwidth, not the desired x4 bandwidth.
The PIXCI® A110, D3XE, E1, E1DB, EB1, EB1-PoCL, EL1 (Rev. 6 and earlier), EL1DB (Rev. 6 and earlier), ELS2, SI1, SI2, SV7, and SV8 are PCI-Express 1.1 x1 cards. The PIXCI® A310, E4, E4DB, and SI4 are PCI-Express 1.1 x4 cards. The PIXCI® E8, E8CAM, and E8DB are PCI-Express 1.1 x8 cards.
Also referred to as ''PCI-Express Gen 2'' or ''PCIe Gen 2''.
Actual throughput on most computers is approximately 448 MByte/sec. for PCI-Express 2.0 x1 cards, and approximately 1011 MByte/sec. for PCI-Express 2.0 x4 cards.
The PCI-Express Interface specification allows operating a card using a lower lane width in a slot supporting a higher lane width, such as using a x1 card in a x4 slot, resulting in x1 bandwidth. The specification also allows operating a card designed for PCI-Express 1.x in a slot supporting PCI-Express 2.0, and vice versa, resulting in the lower of the two bandwidths.
The PIXCI® E4G2-2F, E4G2-4B, E4G2-F2B, e104x4-2f, e104x4-4b, e104x4-f2b, EL1 (Rev. 7 and later), and EL1DB (Rev. 7 and later) are PCI-Express 2.0 x4 cards. The PIXCI® EB1G2 and EB1G2-PoCL PCI-Express 2.0 x1 cards. The PIXCI® E4TX2-2F, E4TX2-4B, E4TX2-F2B, miniH2x4F, and mf2280 are PCI-Express 2.0 x4 devices. The PIXCI® miniH2B and miniH2F are PCI-Express 2.0 x1 cards or M.2 E-Key/M-Key PCIe x1 gen2 cards. The PIXCI® miniH2x4F and mf2280 are M.2 M-Key PCIe x4 gen2 cards.
Separately, a pixel clock is used to control the timing and readout within cameras using digital sensors. For some cameras the pixel clock frequency is adjustable; a higher or lower pixel clock frequency provides faster or slower frame rates with corresponding side effects, such as shorter or longer exposure limits, greater or lesser levels of fixed pattern noise, photo response non-uniformity, and random noise. For cameras with an adjustable pixel clock outputting digital signals, a higher or lower pixel clock frequency also affects the maximum length of the electrical cable connecting the camera and frame grabber.
Contrast to
However, many digital cameras may serialize the light sensor's photosites in other than left-to-right and top-to-bottom order. For example, a camera might output the left-most pixel of a row followed by the middle pixel of a row, continue with each pair of neighboring pixels within the row, and continue in the same fashion with each row. Or a camera might output a pixel of the top row, a pixel of the bottom row, continue with each pair of neighboring pixels within those rows, and continue with each pair of rows inward toward the middle. The number of possible serialization order permutations is quite large. With such cameras, the term ''Scan Line'' may either refer to pixel values from one line of the sensor, or to a ''line'' of values output by the camera during one ''Line Valid''.
Some cameras may have a mechanical shutter or electronic shutter (e.g. LCD) mechanism passing light for a ''Shutter (Period)'', separate from the sensor's integration control. The sensor's integration control (if any) may then be distinguished as ''Exposure (Period)''.
By analogy, the term may be used with digital video signals as a synonym for the complement of ''Frame Valid''.
By analogy, the term may be used with digital video signals as a synonym for the complement of ''Frame Valid''.
For analog video, the specifications include voltage levels, blanking times, width of sync pulses, lines per frame, and frames per second. Examples of common standard analog video formats are: NTSC, CCIR, PAL, RS-170, RS-330, and RS-343.
For digital video, the Camera Link specification provides part of the video format, such as the signals used and their relationship; additional specifications are provided by individual cameras using the Camera Link standard, such as resolution, bit depth, pixel clock frequency, and frame rate.
A ''Video Format (File)'' is also used as a synonym for ''Video Setup (File)''.
Multimedia formats are supported via the host run time environment; typically supporting GIF, PNG, and many variants of JPEG.
Multimedia formats are supported via the host run time environment; typically supporting GIF, PNG, and many variants of JPEG.
The larger question of whether a GUI application should be restricted from running as super-user, and whether it is appropriate to defeat such restrictions, is certainly beyond the remit of this application note.
Newer releases of XCAP, in conjunction with many Linux distributions using the ''gnome terminal'' or ''xterm'', allow using XCAP's Driver Assistant GUI without super-user status. Instead, the Driver Assistant will create a shell script, open a terminal, and invite the user to respond and authorize ''sudo script''.